IRAdv 500 400 SM PDF

imageRUNNER ADVANCE 500/400 Series
Service Manual Rev. 1.0
Product Overview
Technical Explanation
Periodical Service
Disassembly/Assembly
Adjustment
Troubleshooting
Error Code
Service Mode
Installation Appendix
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Application
This manual has been issued by Canon Inc. for qualified persons to learn technical theory, The following paragraph does not apply to any countries where such provisions are
installation, maintenance, and repair of products. This manual covers all localities where the inconsistent with local law.
products are sold. For this reason, there may be information in this manual that does not
apply to your locality. Trademarks
The product names and company names used in this manual are the registered trademarks
Corrections of the individual companies.
This manual may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors due to improvements
or changes in products. When changes occur in applicable products or in the contents of this Copyright
manual, Canon will release technical information as the need arises. In the event of major This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may
changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short period, Canon will issue a new not be copied, reproduced or translated into another language, in whole or in part, without the
edition of this manual. consent of Canon Inc.
© CANON INC. 2013
Caution
Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential
information.
Explanation of Symbols The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:
The following symbols are used throughout this Service Manual.
Symbols Explanation Symbols Explanation 1. Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and the
relationship between electrical and mechanical systems with reference to the timing of
operation.
Check. Remove the claw.
In the diagrams, represents the path of mechanical drive; where a signal
name accompanies the symbol, the arrow indicates the direction of the
electric signal.
The expression "turn on the power" means flipping on the power switch, closing the
Check visually. Insert the claw.
front door, and closing the delivery unit door, which results in supplying the machine with
power.
Check the noise. Use the bundled part. 2. In the digital circuits, '1' is used to indicate that the voltage level of a given signal is
"High", while '0' is used to indicate "Low". (The voltage value, however, differs from
circuit to circuit.) In addition, the asterisk (*) as in "DRMD*" indicates that the DRMD
signal goes on when '0'.
Disconnect the connector. Push the part.
In practically all cases, the internal mechanisms of a microprocessor cannot be checked
in the field. Therefore, the operations of the microprocessors used in the machines
are not discussed: they are explained in terms of from sensors to the input of the DC
controller PCB and from the output of the DC controller PCB to the loads.
Connect the connector. Plug the power cable.
The descriptions in this Service Manual are subject to change without notice for product
improvement or other purposes, and major changes will be communicated in the form of
Remove the cable/wire
Service Information bulletins.
from the cable guide or wire Turn on the power.
saddle. All service persons are expected to have a good understanding of the contents of this Service
Manual and all relevant Service Information bulletins and be able to identify and isolate faults
in the machine.
Set the cable/wire to the
cable guide or wire saddle.
Remove the screw.
Tighten the screw.

Contents
Productivity (Print speed)--------------------------------------------------------- 1-8
Paper type---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-9
Pickup------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-9
Parts Name-------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-10
External View-----------------------------------------------------------------------1-10
Safety Precautions Cross Sectional View-------------------------------------------------------------1-12
CDRH Act---------------------------------------------------------------------- 0-17 Operation----------------------------------------------------------------------------1-13
Laser Safety------------------------------------------------------------------- 0-17 Power Switch--------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-13
Handling of Laser System------------------------------------------------- 0-18 Description of Control Panel-------------------------------------------------------------1-13
Turn Power Switch ON----------------------------------------------------- 0-19

Power Supply----------------------------------------------------------------- 0-20
2 Technical Explanation
Safety of Toner---------------------------------------------------------------- 0-20 Basic Configuration------------------------------------------------------------2-2
About Toner-------------------------------------------------------------------------0-20 Functional Configuration---------------------------------------------------------- 2-2
Toner on Clothing or Skin--------------------------------------------------------0-20 Basic sequence------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-2
Notes When Handling a Lithium Battery------------------------------- 0-21 Original Exposure and Feed System--------------------------------------2-3
Notes Before Servicing----------------------------------------------------- 0-21 Construction-------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-3
Specifications/controls/functions--------------------------------------------------------- 2-3
Points to Note at Cleaning------------------------------------------------- 0-21
Major Components-------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-4
Notes On Assembly/Disassembly---------------------------------------- 0-21
Reader Controller PCB--------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-6
1 Product Overview Basic Operation--------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-7
Basic Sequence------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-7
Product Lineup------------------------------------------------------------------1-2 ADF Operation Mode----------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-8
Host machine------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-2 Controls------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-11
Host machine configuration--------------------------------------------------------------- 1-2
Controlling the Scanner Drive System------------------------------------------------ 2-11
Model type------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-2
Contact Image Sensor (CIS)-------------------------------------------------------------2-12
Option---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-2 Enlargement / Reduction-----------------------------------------------------------------2-13
Pickup / Delivery / Image Reading System Options-------------------------------- 1-2 Dust Detection Control--------------------------------------------------------------------2-14
Function expansion system options---------------------------------------------------- 1-3 Dust Detection Preventive Process----------------------------------------------------2-14
Features--------------------------------------------------------------------------1-4 Dust Detection Correction Control-----------------------------------------------------2-15
Product Features-------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-4 Image Processing--------------------------------------------------------------------------2-16
Service Feature--------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-4 Control of ADF----------------------------------------------------------------------2-18
Service Mode--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-4 Pickup and Feed Operations------------------------------------------------------------2-18
Improved Upgrading Operability--------------------------------------------------------- 1-5 Reversal Operation------------------------------------------------------------------------2-18
Jam/Error Code Display Specifications------------------------------------------------ 1-5 Delivery Operation-------------------------------------------------------------------------2-20
Specifications-------------------------------------------------------------------1-7 Jam Detection-------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-21
Specifications------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-7 Work of Service--------------------------------------------------------------------2-22
Weight and Size--------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-7 Periodically Replaced Parts--------------------------------------------------------------2-22
Consumable Parts--------------------------------------------------------------------------2-22 List of Image Formation Specifications-----------------------------------------------2-43
Periodical Servicing------------------------------------------------------------------------2-22 Major Components in image formation system-------------------------------------2-44
When replacing the parts-----------------------------------------------------------------2-22 Image Formation Process----------------------------------------------------------------2-45
Main Controller--------------------------------------------------------------- 2-23 Basic Sequence--------------------------------------------------------------------2-46
Overview-----------------------------------------------------------------------------2-23 Initial rotation sequence-------------------------------------------------------------------2-46
Configuration / Function------------------------------------------------------------------2-23 Sequence at printing-----------------------------------------------------------------------2-46
Boot Sequence------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-24 Last rotation sequence--------------------------------------------------------------------2-46
Shutdown Sequence-----------------------------------------------------------------------2-24 Controls------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-47
Controls------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-25 Drum Unit-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-47
Copy-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-25 Developing Assembly----------------------------------------------------------------------2-48
Print--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-25 Toner Supply Area--------------------------------------------------------------------------2-49
SEND------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-25 Transfer Unit---------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-51
Network(Advanced Box / Space Client)----------------------------------------------2-25 Change in bias by service mode--------------------------------------------------------2-52
Fax Send--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-26 Waste Toner Container--------------------------------------------------------------------2-52
Fax Receive----------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-26 Service Tasks-----------------------------------------------------------------------2-53
Security-------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-27 Periodically Replaced Parts--------------------------------------------------------------2-53
Setting the Management on the Hard Disk------------------------------------------2-27 Consumable Parts--------------------------------------------------------------------------2-53
Security features (encryption key and certificate, password protection)------2-28 Periodical Servicing------------------------------------------------------------------------2-53
HDD Encryption Kit (Optional)----------------------------------------------------------2-35 Fixing System----------------------------------------------------------------- 2-54
Service Tasks-----------------------------------------------------------------------2-36 Overview-----------------------------------------------------------------------------2-54
Actions at Parts Replacement-----------------------------------------------------------2-36 Features---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-54
Periodically Replaced Parts--------------------------------------------------------------2-36 Specifications--------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-54
Consumable Parts--------------------------------------------------------------------------2-36 Major Components-------------------------------------------------------------------------2-55
Service Notes--------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-36 Controls------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-56
Laser Exposure System---------------------------------------------------- 2-37 Fixing Temperature Control (temperature control)---------------------------------2-56
Construction-------------------------------------------------------------------------2-37 Standby Temperature Control-----------------------------------------------------------2-57
Specifications/Controls/Functions------------------------------------------------------2-37 Print Temperature Control----------------------------------------------------------------2-57
Main Configuration Parts-----------------------------------------------------------------2-37 Down Sequence Control------------------------------------------------------------------2-59
Control System Configuration-----------------------------------------------------------2-38 Change in fixing performance by service mode------------------------------------2-61
Basic Sequence--------------------------------------------------------------------2-39 Pre-fixing arch level control--------------------------------------------------------------2-62
Basic Sequence-----------------------------------------------------------------------------2-39 Protection function-------------------------------------------------------------------------2-63
Controls------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-40 Service Tasks-----------------------------------------------------------------------2-63
Controlling the Laser Activation Timing-----------------------------------------------2-40 Periodically Replaced Parts--------------------------------------------------------------2-63
Controlling the Intensity of Laser Light------------------------------------------------2-42 Consumable Parts--------------------------------------------------------------------------2-63
Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor--------------------------------------------------2-42 Periodical Servicing------------------------------------------------------------------------2-63
Controlling the Laser Shutter------------------------------------------------------------2-42 Pickup / Feed System------------------------------------------------------- 2-64
Image Formation System-------------------------------------------------- 2-43 Overview-----------------------------------------------------------------------------2-64
Basic Configuration----------------------------------------------------------------2-43 Specifications--------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-64
Parts Configuration-------------------------------------------------------------------------2-64 Access-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-95
Paper Path-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-66 Installing an MEAP Application-------------------------------------------------2-96
Controls------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-67 Outline-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-96
Overview--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-67 Procedure to install applications--------------------------------------------------------2-96
Cassette Pickup Assembly---------------------------------------------------------------2-67 Resource Information----------------------------------------------------------------------2-98
Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Assembly--------------------------------------------------2-71 MEAP Specifications--------------------------------------------------------------2-99
Fixing/Registration Assembly------------------------------------------------------------2-71 What is MEAP Specifications (MEAP Spec Version)?----------------------------2-99
Delivery Assembly--------------------------------------------------------------------------2-72 MEAP Application Management--------------------------------------------- 2-102
Reverse/Duplex Assembly---------------------------------------------------------------2-73 Outline--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-102
Jam Detection-------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-74 Starting, Stopping, or Uninstalling the MEAP Application---------------------- 2-102
Work of Service--------------------------------------------------------------------2-75 Managing the License File------------------------------------------------------------- 2-104
Periodically Replaced Parts--------------------------------------------------------------2-75 Other License File Management Functions---------------------------------------- 2-108
Consumables--------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-75 Enhanced System Application Management----------------------------- 2-110
Periodically Servicing----------------------------------------------------------------------2-75 Outline--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-110
External Auxiliary System-------------------------------------------------- 2-76 About Login Service--------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-110
Controls------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-76 Default Authentication overview------------------------------------------------------ 2-110
Software counter----------------------------------------------------------------------------2-76 SSO-H (Single Sign-On-H) overview------------------------------------------------ 2-110
Fan---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-78 Local device authentication------------------------------------------------------------ 2-115
Power supply--------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-79 Server authentication (Active Directory authentication)------------------------- 2-115
Quick Startup -------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-80 Server Authentication (LDAP Authentication)------------------------------------- 2-118
Energy Saving Function------------------------------------------------------------------2-81 Server authentication and local device authentication-------------------------- 2-118
Service Tasks-----------------------------------------------------------------------2-83 Steps to Change Login Services----------------------------------------------------- 2-119
Periodically Replaced Parts--------------------------------------------------------------2-83 Login Service Installation Procedure------------------------------------------------ 2-120
Consumable Parts--------------------------------------------------------------------------2-83 Login Service Uninstallation Procedure--------------------------------------------- 2-121
Periodical Servicing------------------------------------------------------------------------2-83 System Application Management-------------------------------------------- 2-121
MEAP--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-84 Password authentication---------------------------------------------------------------- 2-121
Preparation for Using SSO-H---------------------------------------------------2-84 RLS Authentication----------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-122
Outline-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-84 Setting the method to log in to SMS---------------------------------------- 2-123
Server authentication management----------------------------------------------------2-84 Outline--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-123
PC Environment of Administrator Users and General Users--------------------2-85 Initial Display Languages of SMS---------------------------------------------------- 2-126
Preparation for Using SMS------------------------------------------------------2-86 MEAP Application System Information------------------------------------- 2-126
Preparation of PC for Accessing SMS------------------------------------------------2-86 Outline--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-126
Settings on the Device Side-------------------------------------------------------------2-86 Checking the System Information---------------------------------------------------- 2-126
How to Check the Serial Number-------------------------------------------------------2-93 Display of System Information Details---------------------------------------------- 2-127
Log in to SMS-----------------------------------------------------------------------2-94 Printing the System Information of a MEAP Application------------------------ 2-127
Outline-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-94 Content of MEAP system information----------------------------------------------- 2-128
When SMS Cannot Be Accessed------------------------------------------------------2-94 MEAP Application Information------------------------------------------------ 2-128
How to Deal with a Message "Certificate Error" That Appears at the Time of Outline--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-128
Procedure to Check MEAP Application Information---------------------------- 2-128 Confirmation and preparation in advance------------------------------------------ 2-165
Check License-------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-129 Steps to E-RDS settings---------------------------------------------------------------- 2-166
Outline--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-129 Procedure for Service Call Completion--------------------------------------------- 2-168
Procedure to Check the License File------------------------------------------------ 2-129 Steps to Service Browser settings--------------------------------------------------- 2-169
Changing SMS Login Password--------------------------------------------- 2-130 Initializing E-RDS settings-------------------------------------------------------------- 2-170
Outline--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-130 FAQ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-170
Procedure to Change the SMS Login Password--------------------------------- 2-130 Troubleshooting------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-172
MEAP Application Setting Information Management and Log Error code and strings---------------------------------------------------------- 2-176
Management---------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-130 Updater----------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-179
Outline--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-130 Functional Overview------------------------------------------------------------ 2-179
Advantages Obtained When Using the Services--------------------------------- 2-131 Overview------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-179
MEAP Application Setting Information Management---------------------------- 2-131 System Configuration-------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-181
MEAP Application Log Management------------------------------------------------ 2-132 List of Functions--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-181
Maintenance---------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-133 Distribution Flow-------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-182
Backup of the MEAP Application Area and Recovery of the Backup Data Using Limitations and Cautions------------------------------------------------------- 2-183
SST------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-133 Limitations---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-183
Procedure for backing up the MEAP application area using SST------------ 2-134 Cautions------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-183
Procedures to Restore Backup Data------------------------------------------------ 2-136 Preparation------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-184
Formatting and Replacing the HDD-------------------------------------------------- 2-137 Overview of Preparation---------------------------------------------------------------- 2-184
MEAP Safe Mode (level 2)------------------------------------------------------------- 2-139 Setting Sales Company’s HQ---------------------------------------------------------- 2-184
Collection of MEAP Console Logs--------------------------------------------------- 2-141 Network Settings-------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-185
Using USB Devices---------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-146 Enabling UGW Link---------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-188
Integrated Authentication Function--------------------------------------------------- 2-151 Enabling [Update Firmware] Button of User Mode------------------------------- 2-188
Points to Note When Enabling the [Quick Startup Settings for Main Power] Enabling [Install Application/Options] Button of User Mode------------------- 2-189
Setting--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-153 Enabling [Manual Update] Button of User Mode (Remote UI)---------------- 2-189
Remedy to Be Performed When the Device Has Become Unable to Be System Management Operations-------------------------------------------- 2-190
Logged in----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-154 Various Setting---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-190
Reference material----------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-157 Displaying Logs--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-192
Option for exclusive individual measure-------------------------------------------- 2-159 Maintenance---------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-195
Embedded RDS------------------------------------------------------------ 2-162 Upgrading Updater----------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-195
Product Overview---------------------------------------------------------------- 2-162 Formatting Hard Disk-------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-195
Overview------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-162 How to Replace Controller Boards--------------------------------------------------- 2-195
Features and benefits------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-162 How to Replace Devices---------------------------------------------------------------- 2-195
Major Functions--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-162 FAQ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-196
Limitations------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-163 FAQ on Installing Firmware------------------------------------------------------------ 2-196
Service Mode Menu Transmission Function--------------------------------------- 2-163 FAQ on Installing MEAP Application/System Option---------------------------- 2-197
Service cautions------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-164 FAQ on General Matters of Updater------------------------------------------------- 2-198
E-RDS Setup---------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-165 DCM--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-199
DCM--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-199 Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-26
Overview------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-199 Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-26
Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM----------------- 2-203 Removing the Left Cover--------------------------------------------------------4-27
Import/export by service mode (external)------------------------------------------ 2-208 Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-27
Import/export by service mode (internal)------------------------------------------- 2-214 Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-27
Removing the Inner Rear Cover-----------------------------------------------4-28
3 Periodical Service Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-28
List of periodically replacement parts, consumable parts and Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-28
locations for cleaning----------------------------------------------------------3-2 Removing the Delivery Outer Cover------------------------------------------4-28

Periodically Replacement Parts------------------------------------------------- 3-2 Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-28
Consumable parts------------------------------------------------------------------ 3-2 Removing the Delivery Inner Cover-------------------------------------------4-29

Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-29
4 Disassembly/Assembly Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-29
Removing the Right Inner Cover-----------------------------------------------4-30
Preface---------------------------------------------------------------------------4-2 Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-30
Outline--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-2 Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-30
List of Parts----------------------------------------------------------------------4-3 Removing the Left Inner Cover-------------------------------------------------4-31
External View------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-3 Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-31
Front Side-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-3 Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-31
Rear Side-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-4 Removing the Support Column Cover----------------------------------------4-32
Internal View---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-4 Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-32
List of Main Unit--------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-5 Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-32
Electrical Components------------------------------------------------------------- 4-7 Removing the Reader Front Cover--------------------------------------------4-32
ADF Unit--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-7 Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-32
Reader Unit----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-8 Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-32
Printer Unit------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-9 Removing the Reader Rear Cover--------------------------------------------4-34
List of Connectors------------------------------------------------------------ 4-15 Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-34
External Cover/Internal System------------------------------------------ 4-22 Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-34
Location------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-22 Removing the Reader Bottom Cover-----------------------------------------4-35
Front Side-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-22 Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-35
Rear Side-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-23 Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-35
Internal View---------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-23 Removing the Control Panel Unit----------------------------------------------4-36
Removing the Front Cover------------------------------------------------------4-24 Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-36
Removing the Reader Controller Cover--------------------------------------4-24 Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-36
Removing the Rear Cover-------------------------------------------------------4-24 Original Exposure/Feed System----------------------------------------- 4-38
Removing the Right Front Cover-----------------------------------------------4-25 Location------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-38
Removing the Right Rear Cover-----------------------------------------------4-26 Removing the Copyboard Glass-----------------------------------------------4-39
Removing the Right Door Unit--------------------------------------------------4-26 Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-39
After Replacement-------------------------------------------------------------------------4-40 Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-64
Removing the ADF Reading Glass--------------------------------------------4-41 Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-65
Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-41 After Replacement-------------------------------------------------------------------------4-65
After Replacement-------------------------------------------------------------------------4-42 Laser Exposure System---------------------------------------------------- 4-66
Removing the ADF Unit----------------------------------------------------------4-42 Location------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-66
Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-42 Removing the Laser Scanner Unit---------------------------------------------4-66
Removing the Reader Unit------------------------------------------------------4-47 Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-66
Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-47 After Replacement-------------------------------------------------------------------------4-68
Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-47 Image Formation System-------------------------------------------------- 4-69
Removing the Reader Controller PCB----------------------------------------4-49 Location------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-69
Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-49 Removing the Waste Toner Container----------------------------------------4-70
Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-49 Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-70
Removing the CIS Unit-----------------------------------------------------------4-50 Removing the Toner Cartridge--------------------------------------------------4-71
Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-50 Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-71
Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-50 Removing the Drum Unit---------------------------------------------------------4-71
Removing the ADF Upper Cover Unit----------------------------------------4-52 Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-71
Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-52 Removing the Developing Assembly------------------------------------------4-72
Removing the ADF Separation Pad-------------------------------------------4-53 Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-72
Removing the ADF Pickup Roller Unit----------------------------------------4-54 Removing the Transfer Roller---------------------------------------------------4-74
Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-54 Removing the Separation Static Eliminator---------------------------------4-75
Removing the Original Pickup Tray-------------------------------------------4-56 Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-75
Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-56 Removing the Main Drive Unit--------------------------------------------------4-76
Removing the ADF Pickup Unit------------------------------------------------4-57 Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-76
Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-57 Removing the Hopper Unit------------------------------------------------------4-78
Main Controller System----------------------------------------------------- 4-60 Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-78
Location------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-60 Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-78
Removing the Main Controller PCB-------------------------------------------4-60 Fixing System----------------------------------------------------------------- 4-82
Preparation before Replacement-------------------------------------------------------4-60 Location------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-82
Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-60 Removing the Fixing Assembly-------------------------------------------------4-82
After Replacement-------------------------------------------------------------------------4-63 Removing the Fixing Drive Unit------------------------------------------------4-84
Removing the HDD Unit----------------------------------------------------------4-64 Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-84
Preparation before Replacement-------------------------------------------------------4-64
Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-84 5 Adjustment
Pickup Feed System-------------------------------------------------------- 4-85
Location------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-85
Overview-------------------------------------------------------------------------5-2
Adjustment when replacing parts----------------------------------------------- 5-2
Removing the Cassette Feed Roller------------------------------------------4-85
Image Position Adjustment------------------------------------------------------- 5-2
Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-85
Removing the Cassette Separation Roller----------------------------------4-87 When Replacing the Parts---------------------------------------------------5-4
Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-87 Original Exposure and Feed System (Reader)------------------------------ 5-4
Copyboard Glass---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-4
Removing the Cassette Pickup Roller----------------------------------------4-88
ADF Reading Glass------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-5
Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-88
CIS Unit---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-5
Removing the Cassette Pickup Idler Gear----------------------------------4-89
Original Exposure and Feed System (ADF)---------------------------------- 5-6
Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-89
ADF Unit--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-6
Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-89
Original Exposure and Feed System (Laser Scanner Unit)------------- 5-11
Removing the Cassette Pickup Unit------------------------------------------4-89
Laser Scanner Unit------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-11
Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-89
Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-89 When Replacing the Parts (Controller System)---------------------- 5-12
Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller---------------------------4-90 HDD-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-12
Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-90 Main Controller PCB--------------------------------------------------------------5-12
Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Pad------------------------4-93 DC Controller PCB----------------------------------------------------------------5-13
Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-93 Image Position Adjustment------------------------------------------------ 5-14
Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-93 Leading Edge Margin Adjustment---------------------------------------------5-14
Removing the Delivery/Reverse Unit-----------------------------------------4-94 Standard--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-14
Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-94 Service Mode Adjustment Method-----------------------------------------------------5-14
Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-94 Trailing Edge Margin Adjustment----------------------------------------------5-15
External Auxiliary System-------------------------------------------------- 4-95 Standard--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-15
Location------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-95 Service Mode Adjustment Method-----------------------------------------------------5-15
Removing the DC Controller PCB---------------------------------------------4-95 Left Margin Adjustment-----------------------------------------------------------5-15
Preparation before Replacement-------------------------------------------------------4-95 Standard--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-15
Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-95 Service Mode Adjustment Method (1-sided)-----------------------------------------5-15
Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-96 Service Mode Adjustment Method (2-sided)-----------------------------------------5-16
After Replacement-------------------------------------------------------------------------4-96 Leading Edge Non-image Width Adjustment-------------------------------5-16
Removing the HVT PCB---------------------------------------------------------4-97 Standard--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-16
Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-97 Left Edge Non-image Width Adjustment-------------------------------------5-17
Removing the Power Supply PCB---------------------------------------------4-99 Standard--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-17
Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-99 Adjustment of the Image Position of the ADF------------------------------5-17
6 Troubleshooting Downloading System Software (in single mode)-----------------------------------6-18
Formatting HDD-----------------------------------------------------------------------------6-19
Initial Check---------------------------------------------------------------------6-2 Backup----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-21
List of Initial Check Items--------------------------------------------------------- 6-2 Optional language support---------------------------------------------------------------6-24
Test Print-------------------------------------------------------------------------6-3 Version Upgrade using USB Memory Storage Device-------------------6-26
Overview------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 6-3 Relation between SST and USB memory storage device------------------------6-26
Steps to Select a Test Print Type----------------------------------------------- 6-3 Registering System Software------------------------------------------------------------6-27
How to View the Test Print-------------------------------------------------------- 6-4 Connection-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-31
Grid (TYPE = 1)------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 6-4 Upgrading System Software-------------------------------------------------------------6-32
17 gradations (TYPE = 2/3)--------------------------------------------------------------- 6-4 Selecting System Software--------------------------------------------------------------6-33
Solid white (TYPE = 4)--------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-5 Downloading/ Writing System Software (Automatic)------------------------------6-33
Halftone (TYPE = 5/6/11/12/13/14)----------------------------------------------------- 6-5 Formatting FLASH PCB or HDD--------------------------------------------------------6-35
Solid black (TYPE = 7)--------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-6 Backup/ Restore----------------------------------------------------------------------------6-37
Horizontal line (TYPE = 8/9/10)---------------------------------------------------------- 6-6 Other menus---------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-37
Troubleshooting Items--------------------------------------------------------6-7 Controller Self Diagnosis--------------------------------------------------- 6-38
List of Troubleshooting Items---------------------------------------------------- 6-7 Controller Self Diagnosis---------------------------------------------------------6-38
Image Failure------------------------------------------------------------------------ 6-7 Introduction-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-38
Toner soiling at the back side of paper------------------------------------------------- 6-7 Overview--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-38
Soiling at the leading/trailing edge of paper - ---------------------------------------- 6-8 Layout Drawing------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-39
Poor transfer of the image, hollow character----------------------------------------- 6-8 Basic Flowchart-----------------------------------------------------------------------------6-39
Image smear/toner bleed/condensation----------------------------------------------- 6-9 Prerequisite----------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-40
Large curl of paper-------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-9 Operation-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-40
Paper jam in solid image when the leading edge margin is small (1 to 4mm) --- Boot System Error Diagnosis------------------------------------------------------------6-40
6-9 Controller System Error Diagnosis-----------------------------------------------------6-41
Jam with thin paper (63g/m2 or lighter)-----------------------------------------------6-10 Restrictions-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-43
The toner bottle set lever cannot be operated or is hard to operate.----------6-10 Operation Check of the Main Controller LEDs-----------------------------6-44
Version Upgrade------------------------------------------------------------- 6-11 Location of LEDs---------------------------------------------------------------------------6-44
Overview----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-11 Preconditions--------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-44
Overview of Version Upgrade----------------------------------------------------------- 6-11 Check the lighting of the LED on the Main Controller ----------------------------6-44
Download mode-----------------------------------------------------------------------------6-12 Debug Log--------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-45
Writing System Software------------------------------------------------------------------6-12 Scope of Application--------------------------------------------------------------6-45
System Software Configuration---------------------------------------------------------6-12 Purpose --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-45
Note on download process---------------------------------------------------------------6-13 Overview-----------------------------------------------------------------------------6-45
Version Upgrade via SST--------------------------------------------------------6-13 Function Overview -------------------------------------------------------------------------6-45
Overview--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-13 Storing System Information-----------------------------------------------------6-45
Registering System Software------------------------------------------------------------6-14 Storage Method of System Information ----------------------------------------------6-45
Connection-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-15 Description of Log to be Collected ----------------------------------------------------6-46
Downloading System Software (Assist mode)--------------------------------------6-16 Operation to Save System Information - ---------------------------------------------6-46
Collecting System Information--------------------------------------------------6-48 E000 to E197--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7-3
Collection Destination --------------------------------------------------------------------6-48 E202 to E355--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7-6
Collection Method -------------------------------------------------------------------------6-48 E500 to E583--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7-9
Measures against Frequent Debug Log Collection -------------------------------6-48 E602 to E996-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7-11
Collecting Debug Log (USB memory device)-------------------------------6-48 Jam Code---------------------------------------------------------------------- 7-34
Manual Saving by Holding Down the Counter + 1.2.3 - --------------------------6-48 Jam Type-----------------------------------------------------------------------------7-34
DBG-LOG Screen-----------------------------------------------------------------6-50 Host machine ----------------------------------------------------------------------7-35
Function --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-50 CASSETTE UNIT-AA1-----------------------------------------------------------7-36
LOG2USB---------------------------------------------------------------------------6-50 ADF------------------------------------------------------------------------------------7-36
Function --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-50 Staple Finisher-R1-----------------------------------------------------------------7-37
LOG2SRVR-------------------------------------------------------------------------6-51 Alarm Code-------------------------------------------------------------------- 7-38
Function---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-51 Alarm Code Details----------------------------------------------------------------7-38
LOG-TRIG---------------------------------------------------------------------------6-52
Function---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-52 8 Service Mode
HIT-STS------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-53
Overview-------------------------------------------------------------------------8-2
HIT-STS2----------------------------------------------------------------------------6-53
Overview------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-2
DEFAULT----------------------------------------------------------------------------6-53
Entering Service Mode------------------------------------------------------------ 8-2
Function---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-53
Service Mode Menu---------------------------------------------------------------- 8-2
SYSLOG-----------------------------------------------------------------------------6-53
Service mode item explanations------------------------------------------------ 8-2
LOG-DEL-----------------------------------------------------------------------------6-54
I/O information enhancement---------------------------------------------------- 8-3
An Example of Automatic Log Collection Setting--------------------------6-54
Display of Error Code/Alarm Code description------------------------------ 8-3
Uploading Data by SST----------------------------------------------------------6-55
COPIER> OPTION> BODY, Item Segmentation--------------------------- 8-4
Preconditions:-------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-55
Security features-------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-5
Saving a Log of Key Operations-----------------------------------------------6-58
Related service modes--------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-5
Overview--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-58
Switching Screen (Level 1 < - > 2)--------------------------------------------- 8-6
Usage Method-------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-58
Language switch-------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-6
7 Error Code Back-up of service mode---------------------------------------------------------- 8-7
Service Label------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-7
Overview-------------------------------------------------------------------------7-2
COPIER--------------------------------------------------------------------------8-8
Outline--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7-2
DISPLAY------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-8
Outline------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 7-2
VERSION-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-8
Location code--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7-2
USER------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-25
Pickup position code------------------------------------------------------------------------ 7-2
ACC-STS-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-25
Points to Note When Clearing MN-CON----------------------------------------------- 7-2
ANALOG--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-26
Points to Note When Clearing HDD---------------------------------------------------- 7-2
HV-STS----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-27
Error Code-----------------------------------------------------------------------7-3 CCD--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-27
Error Code Details------------------------------------------------------------------ 7-3
I/O--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-30
Main Body_DC Controller (DC-CON> P001 to P016) ----------------------------8-30 ENV-SET--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-78
ADF (FEEDER> P001)--------------------------------------------------------------------8-32 FEED-SW-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-79
Reader (R-CON> P001)------------------------------------------------------------------8-32 NETWORK-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-79
ADJUST------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-33 CUSTOM-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-86
AE----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-33 USER------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-87
ADJ-XY----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-33 CST--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-98
CCD--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-35 ACC------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-101
LASER-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-36 INT-FACE----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-103
DEVELOP------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-38 LCNS-TR----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-103
DENS------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-38 TEST-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-113
BLANK-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-39 PG-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-113
PASCAL---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-39 NETWORK--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-114
HV-PRI----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-40 COUNTER------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-115
HV-TR-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-40 TOTAL--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-115
FEED-ADJ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-41 PICK-UP------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-116
MISC-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-43 FEEDER------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-116
FUNCTION--------------------------------------------------------------------------8-46 JAM------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-117
INSTALL---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-46 MISC----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-118
CCD--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-49 JOB------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-118
CLEANING-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-50 DRBL-1-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-119
FIXING----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-50 DRBL-2-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-120
PANEL-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-51 LF--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-122
PART-CHK-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-51 FEEDER---------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-123
CLEAR----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-52 ADJUST---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-123
MISC-R----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-55 FUNCTION------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-124
MISC-P----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-55 OPTION---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-125
SYSTEM--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-56
SORTER--------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-126
DBG-LOG-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-58
OPTION---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-126
OPTION------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-60
BOARD----------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-127
FNC-SW--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-60
OPTION---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-127
DSPLY-SW-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-67
IMG-FIX---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-70
IMG-TR----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-73
9 Installation
IMG-LSR--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-74 How to check this Installation Procedure--------------------------------9-2
IMG-RDR-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-74 When Using the parts included in the package----------------------------- 9-2
IMG-MCON-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-75 Symbols in the Illustration-------------------------------------------------------- 9-2
IMG-SPD--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-77 Installation-----------------------------------------------------------------------9-2
CLEANING-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-78 Option Installation Sequence-----------------------------------------------9-2
Copy Card Reader-F1--------------------------------------------------------9-3 User Authentication Information Registered by SSO-H (Single Sign-ON H)------
Check Item of the Contents------------------------------------------------------ 9-3 9-29
Points to Note at Installation----------------------------------------------------- 9-3 Setting Before Turning OFF the Power---------------------------------------9-29
Checking the Contents------------------------------------------------------------ 9-3 Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power-------------------------9-29
Copy Card Reader-F1---------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-3 Installation Outline Drawing-----------------------------------------------------9-29
Copy Card Reader Attachment-C2------------------------------------------------------ 9-3 Installation Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------9-30
Check Items when Turning OFF the Power---------------------------------- 9-4 HDD Initialization Procedure----------------------------------------------------9-34
Installation Outline Drawing------------------------------------------------------ 9-4 Checking the Security Version--------------------------------------------------9-34
Installation Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------- 9-4 Checking the Security Mark-----------------------------------------------------9-34
Assembling the Card Reader------------------------------------------------------------- 9-4 Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of the Work--------9-35
Removing the Covers---------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-6 Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment------------------------------------9-35
Installing the Card Reader Unit---------------------------------------------------------- 9-7 PCL International Font Set-B1-------------------------------------------- 9-36
Registering the Card IDs---------------------------------------------------------9-13 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------9-36
IC Card Reader BOX-A1--------------------------------------------------- 9-14 Checking the Contents-----------------------------------------------------------9-36
Check Item of the Contents-----------------------------------------------------9-14 Installation Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------9-36
Points to Note at Installation----------------------------------------------------9-14 Register Andale Font using the SST---------------------------------------------------9-36
Checking the Contents-----------------------------------------------------------9-14 Register Andale Font in the USB memory device----------------------------------9-38
Check Items when Turning OFF the Power---------------------------------9-15 Register Andale Font in the host machine-------------------------------------------9-40
Installation Outline Drawing-----------------------------------------------------9-15 Operation check after making the settings-------------------------------------------9-41
Installation Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------9-15 Confirmation of the application condition---------------------------------------------9-41
Assembling the IC Card Reader Box--------------------------------------------------9-15
Removing the Covers---------------------------------------------------------------------9-17 Appendix
Installing the Card Reader Unit---------------------------------------------------------9-18 Service Tools------------------------------------------------------------------ 10-2
Copy Control Interface Kit-A1--------------------------------------------- 9-23 Special Tools------------------------------------------------------------------------10-2
Checking the Contents-----------------------------------------------------------9-23 Oils and Solvents------------------------------------------------------------------10-3
Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power-------------------------9-23 General Timing Chart------------------------------------------------------- 10-4
Installation Outline Drawing-----------------------------------------------------9-23 Basic sequence at printing (A4 single-sided print (2 sheets), cassette)---
Installation Procedule-------------------------------------------------------------9-23 10-4
HDD Data Encryption Kit-C6---------------------------------------------- 9-26 Basic sequence at printing (A4 double-sided print (1 sheet), cassette)----
Points to Note when Unpacking HDD Data Encryption Kit--------------9-26 10-5
Checking the Contents-----------------------------------------------------------9-26 General Circuit Diagram---------------------------------------------------- 10-6
Points to Note Regarding Data Backup/Export----------------------------9-27 General Circuit Diagram (1/10)---------------------------------------------------------10-6
Making a Backup of the Data (reference only)-----------------------------9-28 General Circuit Diagram (2/10)---------------------------------------------------------10-7
Procedure for Import/Export ALL of User Settings---------------------------------9-28 General Circuit Diagram (3/10)---------------------------------------------------------10-8
Backup of MEAP Application------------------------------------------------------------9-28 General Circuit Diagram (4/10)---------------------------------------------------------10-9
Stop of MEAP Applications, Disabling, Download of Disabled License Files General Circuit Diagram (5/10)------------------------------------------------------- 10-10
and Uninstallation--------------------------------------------------------------------------9-28 General Circuit Diagram (6/10)------------------------------------------------------- 10-11
General Circuit Diagram (7/10)------------------------------------------------------- 10-12
General Circuit Diagram (10/10)------------------------------------------------------ 10-15
List of User Mode---------------------------------------------------------- 10-16
Environment Settings----------------------------------------------------------- 10-16
Paper Settings----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10-16
Display Settings--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10-16
Timer/Energy Settings------------------------------------------------------------------- 10-17
Network------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10-17
External Interface------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10-24
Accessibility-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10-24
Adjustment/Maintenance------------------------------------------------------- 10-25
Adjust Image Quality--------------------------------------------------------------------- 10-25
Adjust Action------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10-25
Maintenance------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10-25
Function Settings---------------------------------------------------------------- 10-26
Common------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 10-26
Copy----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10-28
Printer---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10-28
Send----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10-31
Receive/Forward ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10-35
Store/Access Files------------------------------------------------------------------------ 10-36
Secure Print-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10-36
Web Access-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10-37
Set Destination------------------------------------------------------------------- 10-39
Set Destination--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10-39
Management Settings---------------------------------------------------------- 10-40
User Management------------------------------------------------------------------------ 10-40
Device Management--------------------------------------------------------------------- 10-40
License/Other------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 10-43
Data Management------------------------------------------------------------------------ 10-43
Backup Data----------------------------------------------------------------- 10-44
Safety Precautions
■
■CDRH Act
■
■Laser Safety
■
■Handling of Laser System
■
■Turn Power Switch ON
■
■Power Supply
■
■Safety of Toner
■
■Notes When Handling a
Lithium Battery imageRUNNER ADVANCE
■
■Notes Before Servicing 500/400 Series
■
■Points to Note at Cleaning
■
■Notes On Assembly/
Disassembly
0-17
CDRH Act Laser Safety

The Center for Devices and Radiological Health of the US Food and Drug Administration put Laser beam radiation may pose a danger to the human body. A laser scanner mounted on
into force regulations concerning laser products on August 2, 1976. These regulations apply the machine is sealed with the protection housing and external cover to prevent the laser
to laser products manufactured on and after August 1, 1976, and the sale of laser products beam from leaking to the outside. The laser beam never leaks out of the scanner as far as
not certified under the regulations is banned within the Untied States. The label shown here users operate the machine normally
indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations, and its attachment is required on all laser
products that are soled in the United States. The following warnings are given to comply with Safety Principles (EN60950).
Sicherheit des Lasers

Laserstrahlen können für den menschlichen Körper gefährlich sein. Aus diesem Grund ist
das optische Lasersystem mit einem Schutzgehäuse und einer Außenabdeckung dicht
verschlossen und hat eine Struktur, die keine Laserstrahlen nach außen dringen lässt. Unter
der Voraussetzung, dass der Benutzer dieses Gerät normal bedient, ist ein Austritt von
Laserstrahlen daher ausgeschlossen.
F-0-1
A different description may be used for a different product.
0-17
0-18
Handling of Laser System

When servicing the area around the laser assembly, be sure to turn off the main power.
If you must service while the power is turned on, be sure to keep the followings:
- Do not use a screwdriver or tools that have a high level of reflectance in the laser path.
- Remove watches and rings before starting the work. (They can reflect the laser beam,
possibly hitting the eye.)
The machine's covers that can reflect laser light are identified by means of a warning label
(Figure). If you must detach a cover showing the label, be sure to take extra caution during
the work.
The following warnings are given to comply with Safety Principles (EN60950).
Handhabung des Laserteils

Bei servicearbeiten am oder in der Nähe des Laserteils zuerst das Hauptgerät abschalten. F-0-2
This product is certificated as a Class 1 laser product under IEC60825-1:2007.
Bei Servicearbeiten, die unbedingt bei eingeschaltetem Gerät durchgeführt werden müssen,
auf jeden Fall die folgenden Vorsichtsmaßnahmen beachten.
• Keine stark reflektierenden Schraubenzieher oder ähnliche Werkzeuge direkt in den

Lichtpfad des Laserstrahls bringen.
• Vor Beginn der Arbeit Uhren, Ringe und ähnliche Gegenstände abnehmen. (Reflektierte
Laserstrahlen könnten sonst in die Augen geraten.)
Abdeckungen, die möglicherweise Laserstrahlen reflektieren, haben in der auf dem Bild
gezeigten Position einen Aufkleber. Bei Servicearbeiten auf der Innenseite von Abdeckungen
mit Aufkleber ist besondere Vorsicht erforderlich.
0-18
0-19
Turn Power Switch ON CAUTION:
The machine is equipped with 2 power switches: main power switch and control energy saver Do not turn off the main power switch while the progress bar is indicated, during
whichaccess is made to the HDD. If deprived of power, the HDD can suffer a fault (E602).
key.
The machine goes on when the main power switch is turned on (i.e., other than in low power
mode, sleep mode).
Energy Saver Key
Main Power Switch
F-0-4
F-0-3
0-19
0-20
Power Supply Safety of Toner
About Toner
1. As a general rule, do not use extension cords. Using an extension cord may result The machine's toner is a non-toxic material made of plastic, iron, and small amounts of dye.
in a fire or electrical shock. If an extension cord must be used, however, use one
for local rated voltage and over, untie the cord binding, and insert the power plug
completely into the extension cord outlet to ensure a firm connection between the
Do not throw toner into fire. It may cause explosion.
power cord and the extension cord.
2. The socket-outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily
accessible.
Toner on Clothing or Skin
• If your clothing or skin has come into contact with toner, wipe it off with tissue; then, wash it
off with water.
• Do not use warm water, which will cause the toner to jell and fuse permanently with the
fibers of the cloth.
• Toner is easy to react with plastic material, avoid contact with plastic.
F-0-5
0-20
0-21
Notes When Handling a Lithium Battery Points to Note at Cleaning
CAUTION: CAUTION:
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. When performing cleaning using organic solvent such as alcohol, be sure to check that
the component of solvent is vaporized completely before assembling.
DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.
The following warnings are given to comply with Safety Principles (EN60950).
Achtung: Notes On Assembly/Disassembly

Wenn mit dem falschen Typ ausgewechselt, besteht Explosionsgefahr.
Follow the items below to assemble/disassemble the device.
Gebrauchte Batterien gemäß der Anleitung beseitigen. 1. Disconnect the power plug to avoid any potential dangers during assembling/disassembling
works.
2. If not specially instructed, reverse the order of disassembly to reinstall.
3. Ensure to use the right screw type (length, diameter, etc.) at the right position when
assembling.
4. To keep electric conduction, binding screws with washers are used to attach the grounding
wire and the varistor. Ensure to use the right screw type when assembling.
5. Unless it is specially needed, do not operate the device with some parts removed.
6. Never remove the paint-locked screws when disassembling.
Notes Before Servicing
F-0-6
At servicing, be sure to turn OFF the power source according to the specified steps and
disconnect the power plug.
ACHTUNG
Zweipolige bzw. Neutralleiter-Sicherung
F-0-7
0-21
1 Product Overview
■
■Product
■
■Features
Lineup
■
■Specifications
■
■Parts Name
1
Product Overview
1 Product Overview > Product Lineup > Option > Pickup / Delivery / Image Reading System Options
1-2
Product Lineup Option

■■Pickup / Delivery / Image Reading System Options
Host machine
[1]
[2]
[3]
[7]
[4]
[6]
F-1-1
■■Host machine configuration [5]

Configuration
F-1-2
Reader+ADF+Printer
T-1-1 No. Product name Remarks and condition
1 imageRUNNER ADVANCE 500/400
■■Model type 2 ADF Access Handle-A1
imageRUNNER ADVANCE 500 imageRUNNER ADVANCE 400 3 Staple Finisher-R1
4 Cassette Module-AA1 Up to 3 units can be installed
Print Speed 50ppm 40ppm
5 FL Cassette-AS1
Positioning Target machine: imageRUNNER 1750/1740 series
6 Envelope Cassette-E1 It can be installed to Cassette 2
T-1-2
7 Drum Heater-F1
imageRUNNER ADVANCE 500/400 T-1-3
Underlined (2-digit) numeric figures indicate print speed (ppm: print per minute).
1-2
1
Product Overview > Product Lineup > Option > Pickup / Delivery / Image Reading System Options
1 Product Overview > Product Lineup > Option > Function expansion system options
1-3
■■Function expansion system options ●● Hardware Products
No. Product name Remarks and condition
[2] 1 Copy Card Reader-F1 Copy Card Reader Attachment-C2 is required.
[1] 2 Copy Card Reader Attachment-C2 It cannot be used in combination with IC Card Reader.
[3] 3 IC Card Reader Box-A1 IC Card Reader is sales company’s option.
4 Super G3 Fax Board-AM1
5 Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board-AM1 Super G3 Fax Board-AM1 is required.
6 HDD Data Encryption Kit-C6
7 Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 Required when the coin manager is connected.
8 eM Controller-C1
T-1-4
[6]
●● License Products
At the time of installation, obtain the license number according to the license certificate
included. Then, enter the obtained license number from the Control Panel of the machine, so
that the applicable functions are enabled.
There is no physical installation work at the time of intallation.
License option
Product name Remarks and condition
PCL Printer Kit-AW1
PCL International Font Set-B1 PCL is required.
PS Printer Kit-AW1
Direct Print Kit-H1 (PDF/XPS)
Barcode Print Kit-D1 PCL is required.
Universal Send Trace & Smooth PDF Kit-A1
Universal Send Advanced Feature Set-D1/E1
Universal Send Security Feature Set-D1
Universal Send Digital User Signature Kit-C1
Remote Operators Software Kit-B1
[4] [5] Encrypted Secure Print Software-D1/
F-1-3
Encrypted Printing Software-D1
ACCESS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM KIT-B1
Secure Watermark-B1
iR-ADV Security Kit-H1 for IEEE 2600.1 Common
Criteria Certification
Web Access Software-H1
Remote Fax Kit-A1
T-1-5
1-3
1
Product Overview > Product Lineup > Option > Function expansion system options
1 Product Overview > Features > Service Feature > Service Mode
1-4
Features Service Feature

■■Service Mode
Product Features
The description of each service mode item is displayed as well.
Control Panel
- 7.0 inch WVGA large
color touch-panel LCD
is equipped.
Improved usability
Fixing Assembly
Drum Unit
Waste Toner Container
- User replaceable
Low running cost
Main Controller F-1-5

- System collaboration with other ADVANCE models Drum Unit
is possible by equipment of ADVANCE function. - Highly-durable OPC drum
- Equipped with HDD is adopted. ●● Features
• Display in natural language
High productivity Low running cost
• Item in the following are newly classified: COPIER> OPTION> BODY
High image quality • Enhanced I/O information
F-1-4 • The description of error code/alarm code is displayed.
• Easy switching of screens between Level 1 and Level 2
1-4
1
Product Overview > Features > Service Feature > Service Mode
1 Product Overview > Features > Service Feature > Jam/Error Code Display Specifications
1-5
■■Improved Upgrading Operability ■■Jam/Error Code Display Specifications
The options can be upgraded through the host machine. ●● Jam Code
SST (Service Support Tool) or USB memory or CDS (Contents Delivery System) are used for "Jam Code" and "Location Code" are displayed on the screen when a paper jam occures.
upgrading.
Host Machine
Staple Finisher-R1 aabbbb

aa : location
bbbb : jam code
F-1-7
Cassette Module-AA1
F-1-6
1-5
1
Product Overview > Features > Service Feature > Jam/Error Code Display Specifications
1 Product Overview > Features > Service Feature > Jam/Error Code Display Specifications
1-6
●● Error Code
In addition to "Error Code", "Location Code" is displayed on the screen when an error occurs.
Exxxxxx-yyyy-aa
xxxxxx : error code
yyyy : sub-code
aa : location
F-1-8
●● Service Advantage
When a paper jam/error is reported from the user:
The location (device) causing the paper jam/error can be recognized before the service
technician is sent to the user site.
The cause of trouble and the remedy can be assumed before the service technician is sent to
the user site.
Depending on the cause of the paper jam (e.g.: paper jam caused by wrong operation by
the user), support can be completed by the phone or e-mail. (Visiting to the user site is not
necessary.)
1-6
1
Product Overview > Features > Service Feature > Jam/Error Code Display Specifications
1 Product Overview > Specifications > Weight and Size
1-7
Specifications Item Specifications

Paper size (Cassette) A4, A5, B5, LTR, LGL, EXEC, STMT, 16K, Custom size (139.7 x
210mm to 216 x 355.6mm)
Specifications Paper size (Multi-purpose Tray) A4, A5, B5, LTR, LGL, EXEC, STMT, 16K, Custom size (99
x 139.7mm to 216 x 355.6mm), Envelope (No.10 (COM10),
Monarch, ISO-C5, DL, Nagagata 3, Yougatanaga 3)
Item Specifications
Pickup capacity Cassette: 550 sheets (80g/m2)
Copyboard Original stream reading, original fixed reading Multi-purpose Tray: 100 sheets (80g/m2)
Machine installation method Desktop Duplexing method Through-pass duplex
Light source LED (RGB) HDD capacity 160 GB
Photosensitive medium OPC Operation noise imageRUNNER ADVANCE 500 series:
Image reading system CIS During copy: 75.0dB or smaller *1/During standby: 53.0dB or
Copying method Indirect electrostatic method smaller *2
Exposure method Laser exposure imageRUNNER ADVANCE 400 series:
Charging method Roller charging During copy: 73.0dB or smaller *1/During standby: 53.0dB or
Developing method Dry, 1-component toner projection development smaller *2
*1 Excluding the Chinese models (Chinese models: 71.0dB or
Transfer method Roller transfer
smaller (During copy))
Separation method Curvature separation *2 Excluding the Chinese models (Chinese models: 45.0dB or
Pickup method Cassette: Retard separation smaller (During standby))
Multi-purpose Tray: Pad separation Ozone volume 1.5mg/h or smaller
Fixing method On-demand fixing
Rated power supply 120 - 127 V AC, 50/60 Hz, 10.5 A
Delivery method Face-down (inner delivery) 220 - 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz, 5.0 A
Magnification ratio 25 to 400% (in 1% increment) Maximum power consumption 120 to 127 V model : approx. 1500 W or less
Drum cleaning method Cleaning Blade 220 to 240 V model : approx. 1600 W or less
Toner type Magnetic negative toner When the machine is in the sleep mode : 1 W
Toner supplying method Toner Container method When the main power switch is turned OFF : 0.5 W
Toner level detection function Yes Dimensions (WxDxH) 560mm x 567mm x 633mm
560mm x 567mm x 983mm with the 3 cassette
Image margin 5.0mm or less (leading/trailing/left/right edge)
T-1-6
Warm-up time 34 sec or less when the power is turned ON
10 sec or less when the sleep mode
Image gradations 256 gradations
Resolution at reading 600 x 600dpi Weight and Size
(Color SEND: 300 x 300dpi)
Resolution at writing 1200 x 1200dpi (Print) Width Depth Height Weight
600 x 600dpi (Copy) Product name
(mm) (mm) (mm) Approx. (kg)
First print time 5.0 sec or less
imageRUNNER ADVANCE 500/400 series 560 567 633 47.9 *1
Paper type (Cassette) Plain paper (64 to 90g/m2), Recycled paper (64 to 80g/m2),
imageRUNNER ADVANCE 500/400 series 560 567 633 48.7 *1
Heavy paper (91 to 105g/m2), Pre-Punched paper, *Envelope
(No. 10 (COM10), Monarch, ISO-C5, DL, Nagagata 3, (with FAX)
Yougatanaga 3) Staple Finisher-R1 798 395 263 10.5
*Only when the option Cassette Unit-AA1 is installed and the Cassette Module-AA1 540 500 158 7.7
option Envelope Cassette-E1 is installed in the 2nd cassette. *1: Without the Toner and Drum Unit T-1-7
Paper type (Multi-purpose Tray) Plain paper (64 to 90g/m2), Recycled paper (64 to 80g/m2),
Heavy paper (91 to 128g/m2), Pre-Punched paper, Bond
paper (90g/m2), Transparency, Label paper, Envelope (No. 10
(COM10), Monarch, ISO-C5, DL, Nagagata 3, Yougatanaga 3)
1-7
1
Product Overview > Specifications > Weight and Size
1 Product Overview > Specifications > Productivity (Print speed)
1-8
Productivity (Print speed)
imageRUNNER ADVANCE 500 series imageRUNNER ADVANCE 400 series
Paper type Size Cassette 1 Cassette 2/3/4 Multi-purpose Tray Cassette 1 Cassette 2/3/4 Multi-purpose Tray
1-sided 2-sided 1-sided 2-sided 1-sided 2-sided 1-sided 2-sided 1-sided 2-sided 1-sided 2-sided
Plain paper (64 A4 50 49 50 49 40 39 40 39 40 39 40 39
to 90g/m2) B5 25 22 25 22 23 20 25 22 25 22 23 20
Recycled paper A5 25 22 25 22 25 22 25 22 25 22 25 22
(64 to 80g/m2) LGL 43 22 43 22 35 18 40 20 40 20 35 18
(41: Cassette 4)
LTR 52 48 52 48 40 37 42 39 42 39 40 37
EXEC 25 22 25 22 23 20 25 22 25 22 23 20
STMT 25 22 25 22 25 22 25 22 25 22 25 22
16K 25 22 25 22 23 20 25 22 25 22 23 20
Heavy paper 1 A4 45 44 45 44 40 39 40 39 40 39 40 39
(91 to 105g/m2) B5 25 22 25 22 23 20 25 22 25 22 23 20
A5 25 22 25 22 25 22 25 22 25 22 25 22
LGL 43 22 43 22 35 18 40 20 40 20 35 18
(41: Cassette 4)
LTR 45 42 45 42 40 37 42 39 42 39 40 37
EXEC 25 22 25 22 23 20 25 22 25 22 23 20
STMT 25 22 25 22 25 22 25 22 25 22 25 22
16K 25 22 25 22 23 20 25 22 25 22 23 20
Heavy paper 2 A4 - - - - 21 - - - - - 21 -
(106 to 128g/m2) B5, A5 - - - - 17 - - - - - 17 -
LGL - - - - 14 - - - - - 14 -
LTR - - - - 21 - - - - - 21 -
EXEC, STMT, 16K - - - - 17 - - - - - 17 -
Bond paper A4 - - - - 22 - - - - - 21 -
B5, A5 - - - - 17 - - - - - 17 -
LGL - - - - 6 - - - - - 14 -
LTR - - - - 22 - - - - - 21 -
EXEC, STMT, 16K - - - - 17 - - - - - 17 -
Envelope No.10 (COM10), Monarch, - - 12 *1 - 12 - - - 12 *1 - 12 -
ISO-C5, DL, Nagagata 3,
Yougatanaga 3
Transparency A4, LTR - - - - 17 - - - - - 17 -
Label paper A4, LTR - - - - 21 - - - - - 21 -
*1: Only when the optional Envelope Cassette-E1 is installed in the 2nd cassette T-1-8
1-8
1
Product Overview > Specifications > Productivity (Print speed)
1 Product Overview > Specifications > Paper type > Pickup
1-9
Paper type
See the table below for custom paper size.
Type Feeding direction (mm) Width direction (mm)
Custom size (Cassette) 210 to 355.6 139.7 to 210
Custom size (Multi-purpose Tray) 139.7 to 355.6 99 to 216
T-1-9
■■Pickup
Available paper types
Cassette 2
Multi-purpose Envelope Envelope
Paper Type Size Cassette 1 Cassette 3 Cassette 4 2-sided
Tray Cassette is Cassette is
installed not installed
Plain paper (64 to 90g/m2) A4, A5, B5, LGL, LTR,
Color paper (64 to 90g/m2) STMT, EXEC, 16K, Free
Recycled paper (64 to 80g/m2) size (139.7 mm x 210 Yes Yes - Yes Yes Yes Yes
Heavy paper 1 (91 to 105g/m2) mm to 215.9 mm x 355.6
mm)
Heavy paper 2 (106 to 128g/m2) A4, A5, B5, LGL, LTR,
Bond paper (75 to 90g/m2) STMT, EXEC, 16K, Free
size (139.7 mm x 210 Yes - - - - - -
mm to 215.9 mm x 355.6
mm)
Pre-Punched paper (75 to 80g/ A4, LTR
Yes Yes - Yes Yes Yes Yes
m2)
Label paper (151 to 181g/m2) A4, LTR Yes - - - - - -
Transparency (151 to 181g/m2) A4, LTR Yes - - - - - -
Envelope (75 to 105g/m2) No.10 (COM10),
Monarch, ISO-C5,
Yes - Yes - - - -
DL, Nagagata 3,
Yougatanaga 3
Custom size (64 to 105g/m2) 139.7 mm x 210 mm to
- Yes - Yes Yes Yes -
216 mm x 355.6 mm
Custom size (64 to 128g/m2) 99 mm x 139.7 mm to
216 mm x 355.6 mm
Yes - - - - - -
(long length paper: to
630 mm)
T-1-10
1-9
1
Product Overview > Specifications > Paper type > Pickup
1 Product Overview > Parts Name > External View
1-10
Parts Name Rear view, Right side
[12]
External View [11]
Front view, Left side

[5] [10] [1]
[4]
[6]
[3]
[7] [9] [2]
[8]
[2] [8]
[9]
[7]
[10]
[1] [6]
[3]
[14] [5]
[11]
[4]
F-1-10
[1] Reader Rear Cover [7] Right Door Unit

[2] Reader Controller Cover [8] Right Rear Fan Cover
[3] Rear Cover [9] Right Front Fan Cover
[13] [4] Right Rear Cover [10] Support Column Cover
[12] [5] Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit [11] Reader Right Front Cover
[6] Right Front Cover [12] Reader Right Rear Cover
F-1-9
[1] ADF Left Cover [8] ADF Front Lower Cover

[2] ADF Rear Cover [9] Reader Front Cover
[3] ADF Upper Cover [10] Control Panel Unit
[4] Side Guide Plates [11] Front Cover
[5] Original Pickup Tray [12] Cassette
[6] ADF Front Upper Cover [13] Left Cover
[7] Original Delivery Tray [14] Reader Left Cover
1-10
1
Product Overview > Parts Name > External View
1 Product Overview > Parts Name > External View
1-11
Delivery Assembly
[6]
[1]
[5]
[4] [2]
[3]
F-1-11
[1] Reader Bottom Cover

[2] Delivery Inner Cover
[3] Delivery Outer Cover
[4] Delivery Stopper
[5] Inner Rear Cover
[6] Reverse Tray
1-11
1
Product Overview > Parts Name > External View
1 Product Overview > Parts Name > Cross Sectional View
1-12
Cross Sectional View [1] Lead Roller 1 [19] Duplex Feed Roller 2
[2] Registration Roller [20] Registration Roller
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [3] Lead Roller 2 [21] Multi-purpose Tray Pullout Roller
[4] ADF Feed Roller [22] Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller
[5] ADF Delivery Reverse Roller [23] Multi-purpose Tray Separation Pad
[6] ADF Pickup Roller [24] Vertical Path Roller
[7] ADF Separation Pad [25] Cassette Separation Roller
[8] ADF Delivery Roller [26] Cassette Feed Roller
[9] ADF Reverse Roller [27] Cassette Pickup Roller
[11] [10] Drum Unit [28] Primary Charging Roller
[35] [11] Reverse Roller [29] Developing Assembly
[12] Delivery Roller [30] Laser Scanner Unit
[34] [13] Fixing Outlet Roller [31] Toner Container
[12] [14] Duplex Feed Roller 1 [32] Hopper
[33] [15] Pressure Roller [33] Copyboard Glass
[16] Fixing Film Unit [34] CIS Unit
[32]
[17] Photosensitive Drum [35] ADF Reading Glass
[13]
[18] Transfer Roller
[14]
[15]
[31] [16]
[17]
[18]
[30] [19]
[20]
[21]
[22]
[23]
[29] [28] [27] [26] [25] [24]

F-1-12
1-12
1
Product Overview > Parts Name > Cross Sectional View
1 Product Overview > Parts Name > Operation > Description of Control Panel
1-13
Operation ■■Description of Control Panel
■■Power Switch ●● Control Panel
[1] [2] [3] [4]
●● Types of Power Switches
[14]
Drum Heater Switch
[15]
[16]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
Main Power Switch
[13] [12] [11] [10] [9]

F-1-14
[1] Touch Panel Display [9] Main Power Indicator

F-1-13
[2] Settings/Registration key [10] Error Indicator
This machine has the Main Power Switch and the Drum Heater Switch. [3] Numeric key [11] Processing / Data Indicator
[4] Energy Saver key [12] Reset key
[1] Main Power Switch [5] Clear key [13] Edit Pen
This switch is used to turn OFF / ON the power of host machine. [6] ID (Log In/Out) key [14] Brightness Adjustment Dial
[7] Stop key [15] Volume Settings key
[2] Drum Heater Switch (option)
[8] Start key [16] Counter Check key
This switch is used to turn OFF / ON the power of the drum heater.
●● Points to Note on Turning ON/OFF the Power Switch

- Be sure to turn OFF the main power switch when turning OFF the power. (The
conventional shut-down sequence process is not needed.)
- After turning OFF the power (after turning OFF the Main Power Switch), do not turn ON
the main power switch again unless the screen disappears.
- Do not turn OFF the power during downloading.
1-13
1
Product Overview > Parts Name > Operation > Description of Control Panel
1-14
●● Main Menu ●● Differences in Main Menu
imageRUNNER 1750/1740 series imageRUNNER ADVANCE 500/400 series
Copy Key Copy
Send / Fax Key Fax
Scan and Send
Fax / I-Fax Inbox
Scan and Store
[1] [2] [3] [4] Access Stored Files
Remote Scanner / Expansion Key Secure Print
--- Tutorial
--- Scanner
[5] [6] [7] [8] --- Settings / Reg. Shortcut
T-1-12
[9] [10]
F-1-15
No Name Remarks
[1] Copy
[2] Fax Super G3 Fax Board-AM1 is required.
[3] Scan and Send
[4] Fax / I-Fax Inbox
[5] Secure Print
[6] Tutorial
[7] Scanner
[8] Scan and Store
[9] Access Stored Files
[10] Settings / Reg. Shortcut
T-1-11
1-14
1
1-15
●● Settings / Registration Menu ●● Differences in Settings / Registration Menu
imageRUNNER 1750/1740 series imageRUNNER ADVANCE 500/400 series
Common Settings Preferences
Timer Settings
Adjustment / Cleaning Adjustment / Maintenance
System Settings Management Settings
Report Settings Function Settings
[1] Cpoy Settings
Print Settings
[2] Address Book Settings Set Destination
T-1-14
[3]
1/1
[4]
[5]
F-1-16
No Name Remarks
[1] Preferences
[2] Adjustment / Maintenance
[3] Function Settings
[4] Set Destination
[5] Management Settings To log in as an administrator is necessary.
T-1-13
1-15
1
2 Technical Explanation
■
■Basic
■
Configuration
■Original Exposure and Feed System
■
■Main Controller
■
■Laser Exposure System
■
■Image Formation System
■
■Fixing System
■
■Pickup / Feed System
■
■External Auxiliary System
■
■MEAP
■
■Embedded RDS
■
■Updater
■
■DCM
2
Technical Explanation
2 Technical Explanation > Basic Configuration > Functional Configuration > Basic sequence
2-2
Basic Configuration ■■Basic sequence

●● Sequence at Power-On
Functional Configuration • Reader
This machine consists of 6 major blocks: Original Exposure and Feed System, Controller
Main power switch
System, Laser Exposure System, Image Formation System, Fixing System, and Pickup
ON
Feed System.
SREADY STBY
Reader motor Backwarding
(M10)
Original Exposure and Feed System Forwarding
LED
Reader Exposure Lamp CIS HP sensor
CIS (PS21)
Controller PCB (LED)
Controller System Shading Shading
position position
HDD F-2-2
Main Delivery Duplexing
Option Controller Feed ●● Print sequence
Board Fixing System • Reader (in book mode, 1-sheet original)
DC Fixing
Laser Exposure Image
Controller Black shading/White shading
System Formation Start key
System ON
Laser Scanner Transfer
Unit STBY SCFW SCRW STBY
Reader motor Backwarding Forwarding Backwarding Forwarding
(M10)
Pickup Multi-purpose LED Light-ON
Tray CIS HP sensor ON ON

(PS21)
Cassette Shading Leading edge Trailing edge Shading
position of original of original position
Pickup Feed System F-2-3
Flow of Paper
Flow of Signal
Laser beam
F-2-1
2-2
2
Technical Explanation > Basic Configuration > Functional Configuration > Basic sequence
2 Technical Explanation > Original Exposure and Feed System > Construction > Specifications/controls/functions
2-3
Original Exposure and Feed System Item

ADF original size
Specification/function
A4, B5, A5, LGL, LTR, STMT, 16K
Original width direction: 139.7 to 216 mm
Construction Original feed direction: 139.7 to 355.6 mm (In long length paper
printing mode: maximum 630 mm; FAX mode only)
ADF original tray capacity 100 sheets (64 or 80 g/m2 paper, original height: 10mm or less)
■■Specifications/controls/functions ADF original processing mode 1-sided original processing
The major specifications, controls and functions of the original exposure and feed system are 2-sided original processing
ADF original size detection No
described below.
function
Item Specification/function ADF mixed Mix of same Yes (weight of original same as continuous feed mode)
Original exposure LED original mode configuration Assured combination for mix with same configuration
Original scan In book mode Original scan is performed by moving the contact image sensor function mode • LTR/LGL
(CIS). Mix of different No
In ADF mode Original stream reading is performed with the contact image configuration
sensor (CIS) fixed. mode
Read resolution B/W: 600 dpi (main scanning) x 600 dpi (sub scanning) Book original Yes (The thickness of the book original must not exceed 30
(Color SEND: 300 dpi (main scanning) x 300 dpi (sub scanning)) mm.)
Gradation 256 gradation ADF done stamp function No
Carriage position detection CIS HP sensor (PS21) T-2-1
Magnification 25% to 400% (in 1% increment)

Main scanning Image is processed on main controller PCB.
direction
Sub scanning Image is processed on main controller PCB.
direction
Lens Rod lens array
Original reading sensor Number of lens: 1
Number of pixels: Total 5148 (incl. 5104 effective pixels)
Maximum original scan width: 216mm
CIS drive control Drive control by Reader motor (M10)
Original size Reader Main scanning direction: No
detection Sub scanning direction: by original reading length (LTR or LGL)
ADF Main scanning direction: No
Sub scanning direction: by original feeding length (LTR or LGL)
ADF original pickup method Auto pickup/delivery method
ADF setting direction of original Original tray pickup: face-up stacking
ADF setting position of original Original tray pickup: center reference
ADF separation method of original Upper separation by separation pad
ADF scanning method of original Stream reading
ADF weight of 1-sided AB: 42 to 128 g/m2
original Inch: 50 to 128 g/m2
2-sided 50 to 128 g/m2
Color original 64 to 128 g/m2
B/W or Color 50 to 128 g/m2 (Color: 64 to 128 g/m2)
mixed original
Original longer 60 to 90 g/m2 (1-sided, 1-sheet feeding)
than 432mm
2-3
2
Technical Explanation > Original Exposure and Feed System > Construction > Specifications/controls/functions
2 Technical Explanation > Original Exposure and Feed System > Construction > Major Components
2-4
■■Major Components ●● ADF unit
Following shows major components of ADF unit.
●● Reader Unit
Following shows major components of reader unit.
1) Cross Section
Delivery reversal roller (upper)

Reader motor (M10) Feed roller
Pickup roller
Reader controller PCB (PCB3) Delivery reversal flapper 2
Lead roller 2 Separation pad
Original pickup tray
Registration roller Delivery roller
Lead roller 1 Delivery reversal roller Original delivery tray

Reversal roller
Delivery reversal flapper 1
Platen guide
CIS HP sensor (PS21) F-2-5
Item Specification/function
Contact image sensor (CIS)
Pickup roller Picks up the original.
F-2-4 Feed roller Separates and feeds the original.
Item Notation Specification/function Separation pad Separates the original.
Reader motor M10 Stepping motor: controls the carriage drive. Registration roller Feeds the original and forms a skew feed correction loop.
CIS HP sensor PS21 Photo interrupter: detects the home position of CIS unit. Lead roller 1 Feeds the original before reading.
Contact image sensor CIS Reads the original. (LED + Light guide + Original reading Lead roller 2 Feeds the original after reading.
sensor array unit) Delivery reversal roller Delivers the original and performs upstream reversal feed of
Reader controller PCB PCB3 Controls the reader unit and ADF unit. the original.
T-2-2 Delivery reversal roller (upper) Separated from the mating delivery reversal roller by the roller
release solenoid during reverse feed of the original.
Delivery roller Delivers the original.
Reversal roller Performs downstream reversal feed of the original.
Platen guide Original read section.
Delivery reversal flapper 1 Switches between the upstream reversal path and the
downstream reversal path.
Delivery reversal flapper 2 Switches between the upstream reversal path and the delivery
path.
Original pickup tray Allows you to load an original.
Original delivery tray Stacks the delivered originals.
T-2-3
2-4
2
Technical Explanation > Original Exposure and Feed System > Construction > Major Components
2 Technical Explanation > Original Exposure and Feed System > Construction > Major Components
2-5
2) Sensor Layout
Item Notation Specification/function
Feed motor M11 Stepping motor: Feeds the original.
PS26 PS27
PS23 Delivery reversal motor M12 Stepping motor: Feeds, reverses, and delivers the
original.
Registration solenoid SL4 Transmits the driving force of the feed motor to the
registration roller.
Pickup solenoid SL5 Transmits the driving force of the delivery reversal
motor to the pickup roller and feed roller.
Flapper solenoid 2 SL6 Drives the delivery reversal flapper 2.
Flapper solenoid 1 SL7 Drives the delivery reversal flapper 1.
Roller release solenoid SL8 Separates the delivery reversal roller from the mating
delivery reversal roller during upstream reversal feed
of the original.
PS24 PS25
PS22 Lead sensor PS22 Photo interrupter: Detects the original read timing and
F-2-6
original length.
Registration sensor PS23 Photo interrupter: Detects the original leading edge
3) Drive Configuration looping timing.
Stay sensor PS24 Photo interrupter: Detects the original reversal timing
during downstream reversal feed.
Reversal sensor PS25 Photo interrupter: Detects the original feed during
M11 M12
downstream reversal feed.
Timing sensor PS26 Photo interrupter: Detects feed of the original.
Original set sensor PS27 Photo interrupter: Detects presence/absence of the
original on the original pickup tray.
SL8
SL5
SL4
T-2-4
SL6
SL7
F-2-7
2-5
2
Technical Explanation > Original Exposure and Feed System > Construction > Major Components
2 Technical Explanation > Original Exposure and Feed System > Construction > Reader Controller PCB
2-6
■■Reader Controller PCB
The function configuration of reader controller PCB is described below.
J907 J909 J910 J903 J908 J912
J911 J906
IC1
J905
J902
F-2-8
Notation Description
IC1 Image processing, control of contact image sensor, control of motors and
solenoids drive, control of sensors detection
J902 Connector for contact image sensor
J903 Connector for power supply from host machine (AC Driver PCB)
J905 Connector for reader motor
J906 Connector for feed motor and delivery reversal motor of ADF
J907 Connector for communication with main controller PCB of host machine
J908 Connector for registration solenoid and pickup solenoid and flapper
solenoid 1 and 2
J909 Connector for timing sensor and original set sensor
J910 Connector for lead sensor and registration sensor and stay sensor and
reversal sensor
J911 Connector for CIS HP sensor
J912 Connector for roller release solenoid
T-2-5
2-6
2
Technical Explanation > Original Exposure and Feed System > Construction > Reader Controller PCB
2 Technical Explanation > Original Exposure and Feed System > Basic Operation > Basic Sequence
2-7
Basic Operation ●● Basic Sequence at Start Key ON (Book mode/1 original)
■■Basic Sequence
Black shading and White shading
Start key
●● Basic Sequence at Power-On ON
STBY SCFW SCRW STBY
Reader motor (M10)
Main power switch
ON LED
SREADY STBY CIS HP sensor (PS21)
Reader motor (M10)
Shading Leading edge Trailing edge Shading
LED position of original of original position
CIS HP sensor (PS21) :Forward

:Reverse
Shading Shading
position position F-2-11
:Forward
:Reverse
CIS HP sensor
F-2-9
Copyboard glass reading Shading Leading edge Trailing edge

start position HP position of original of original
CIS HP sensor
Shading Leading edge

HP position of original 1. Moves to the start position
after black shading and
white shading
2. Original scan
1. CIS position check 3. Moves to the standby
position
F-2-12
F-2-10
2-7
2
Technical Explanation > Original Exposure and Feed System > Basic Operation > Basic Sequence
2 Technical Explanation > Original Exposure and Feed System > Basic Operation > ADF Operation Mode
2-8
●● Basic Sequence at Start Key ON (ADF mode/1 original) ■■ADF Operation Mode
ADF has four operation modes.
Start key Black shading and White shading Operation mode names and outline of operations and associated print modes are given in the
ON following table:
STBY SCRW SCFW STBY
Reader motor (M10)
Operation mode name Outline of operation Associated print mode
LED Forward pickup/delivery Picks up, reads, and then delivers
Single-sided original → Single-
an original. sided print
CIS HP sensor (PS21) Single-sided original → Double-
sided print
Shading Stream reading Trailing edge Shading
position position of original position Forward pickup/reversal Picks up, reads, and then reverses Double-sided original →
delivery and delivers an original Double-sided print
:Forward
:Reverse Double-sided original → Single-
sided print
F-2-13
T-2-6
CIS HP sensor
Copyboard glass
Stream reading reading start Shading
start position position HP position
1. Black shading and

White shading and
Original scan
F-2-14
2-8
2
Technical Explanation > Original Exposure and Feed System > Basic Operation > ADF Operation Mode
2-9
●● Forward Pickup/Delivery (Single-sided original → Single-sided print) ●● Forward Pickup/Reversal Delivery (Double-sided original → Double-
Operation sided print) Operation
The original flows as shown below. The original flows as shown below.
• Operation of single-sided original reading (2 originals) • Operation of double-sided original reading (2 originals)
- 1st original: Pickup
- 1st original: Pickup - 1st original: Delivery

- 1st original: Reversal and
- 2nd original: Reading
Formation of loop
- 1st original: Formation of loop
- 1st original: Formation of loop - 2nd original: Delivery - 1st original: Reading of
reverse side
- 2nd original: Pickup
- 1st original: Reading
- 1st original: Reading - End of job

- 2nd original: Pickup and - 1st original: Feeding to
Formation of loop downstream reversal path
- 2nd original: Formation of loop
F-2-15
Next
- 1st original: Feeding to

upstream reversal path
F-2-16
2-9
2
2-10
- 1st original: Reversal - 2nd original: Feeding to

- 2nd original: Reading downstream reversal path
- 1st original: Delivery

- 2nd original: Delivery
- 2nd original: Feeding to
upstream reversal path
- 2nd original: Reversal and - End of job

Formation of loop
- 2nd original: Reading of

reverse side
F-2-17
2-10
2
2 Technical Explanation > Original Exposure and Feed System > Controls > Controlling the Scanner Drive System
2-11
Controls ●● Reader Motor Control
Reader motor driver (IC15) turns on/off the reader motor (M10) and controls its direction and
■■Controlling the Scanner Drive System speed of rotation according to the signals from ASIC (IC1).
●● Overview
Parts configuration of scanner drive is described below. Reader controller PCB
3.3V 1.8V +5V +24V
Reader motor (M10) OM_RTPA

J905
Reader controller PCB (PCB3) OM_RTPAN B*
1
OM_RTPB IC15 B
IC1 Motor 2
Carriage drive belt ASIC OM_RTPBN A M10
driver 3
OM_PS A*
4
OM_CURRENT
F-2-19
Forward NOTE:
The scan speed is 160 mm/sec.

Sensor light-blocking plate
Reverse
CIS HP sensor (PS21) Carriage
Contact image sensor (CIS)

Carriage rail
F-2-18
• Reader motor (M10) drive signal
Controls the rotation and its direction and speed of motor.
• CIS HP sensor (PS21)
Detects that the contact image sensor (CIS) is at the home position.
2-11
2
Technical Explanation > Original Exposure and Feed System > Controls > Controlling the Scanner Drive System
2 Technical Explanation > Original Exposure and Feed System > Controls > Contact Image Sensor (CIS)
2-12
1) Forward Movement during Image Scan ■■Contact Image Sensor (CIS)
During image scanning, the reader controller PCB controls the reader motor (M10) to
control the contact image sensor (CIS) operation. ●● Outline
The original is exposed to light and read using the contact image sensor (CIS) to read the
image on a line-by-line basis.
Start Leading edge Trailing edge
position of original of original Stop
Acceleration Constant speed Deceleration Image reading line
Light guide LED (R/G/B)
Movement
speed
[1] [2] [3] [4]
Movement distance Copyboard glass
[1] Acceleration area: The motor accelerates to the speed specified

for each mode. Rod lens array
[2] Runup area: A margin to stabilize the speed. Scan direction
[3] Image read area: The image is read at a constant speed.
[4] Deceleration area: Upon detection of the trailing edge, LED (R/G/B)
the motor decelerates rapidly and stops.
F-2-20
Original reading
2) Backward Movement after Image Scan sensor array Rod lens array
After image scan, the carriage moves back to the contact image sensor (CIS) shading Light guide
Light guide
position at the constant speed (160 mm/sec).
LED
Original reading sensor array
F-2-21
Component Function
LED Illuminates the original.
Light guide Illuminates the entire image line with the LED light.
Rod lens array Collects the light reflected by the original.
Original reading sensor array Receives the light that passed through the rod lens array.
T-2-7
2-12
2
Technical Explanation > Original Exposure and Feed System > Controls > Contact Image Sensor (CIS)
2 Technical Explanation > Original Exposure and Feed System > Controls > Enlargement / Reduction
2-13
●● Analog Control Performed by the CIS ■■Enlargement / Reduction
The flow of analog image processing performed by the contact image sensor (CIS) is as
●● Magnification Change in Main Scanning Direction
follows:
In book mode or ADF mode
In the main scanning direction, image is read at 100%; thereafter, the data is subjected to
a. The light reflected by the original is collected by the rod lens array.
processing by the main controller PCB to suit the selected reproduction ratio.
b. The light is received by the original scan sensor array.
c. The original scan sensor array converts the received light to an electric signal and outputs
it. ●● Magnification Change in Sub Scanning Direction
The magnification in sub scanning direction is changed as follows:
The original scan sensor array consists of eleven channels (units). 1) In book mode
Each channel is provided with an output correction table to output an image signal after Image is read at original scan speed kept at 160 mm/sec; thereafter, the data is subjected
performing gain correction for the input brightness signal. to processing by the main controller PCB to suit the selected reproduction ratio.
2) In ADF mode
Image is read at original scan feeding speed kept at 320 mm/sec; thereafter, the data is
subjected to processing by the main controller PCB to suit the selected reproduction ratio.
1
ls
xe
pi
48
2
51
u it
r circ
ive Original scan sensor
3 Dr
channel x11
ls
xe
pi
8
46
11
F-2-22
2-13
2
Technical Explanation > Original Exposure and Feed System > Controls > Enlargement / Reduction
2 Technical Explanation > Original Exposure and Feed System > Controls > Dust Detection Preventive Process
2-14
■■Dust Detection Control ■■Dust Detection Preventive Process
●● Overview The contact image sensor (CIS) detects the reflected light from the ADF reading glass and
In ADF mode, the machine changes the original read position or corrects the read image platen guide surface (at the read position) to judge presence or absence of dust.
depending on the presence/absence of dust on the ADF reading glass or platen guide, thus The dust detection process is performed as follows:
preventing dust from showing up in the image. 1) The dust detection process is performed at position A. The original read position is
decided to the position A if detecting the absence of dust. And the process of step 2) is
The control of dust detection is as follows: performed if detecting the presence of dust.
1) Dust detection preventive process 2) The dust detection position moves to position B to perform the dust detection process
2) Dust detection correction control there. The original read position is decided to the position B if detecting the absence of
dust. And the process of step 3) is performed if detecting the presence of dust.
3) The dust detection position moves to position C to perform the dust detection process
there. The original read position is decided to the position C if detecting the absence of
dust. And the process of step 4) is performed if detecting the presence of dust.
4) If dust is detected at all of positions A, B, and C, position A is determined as the original
read position.
This process is performed only before starting the first job after the power-on.
However, in case the dust is detected at all of positions A, B, and C or the dust detection
preventive process cannot be performed, this process is performed before starting the next
job.
2-14
2
Technical Explanation > Original Exposure and Feed System > Controls > Dust Detection Preventive Process
2 Technical Explanation > Original Exposure and Feed System > Controls > Dust Detection Correction Control
2-15
■■Dust Detection Correction Control
Whenever the original from the ADF is read, presence or absence of duct is detected at the
original read position determined in the dust detection preventive process. If presence of dust
is detected, the image correction process is performed to prevent dust from appearing in the
output image.
0.5mm 0.5mm Main power

switch ON Start key ON
A B C
WMUPR STBY
1st 2nd
SCAN SCAN
Dust detection Dust detection Dust detection

correction control correction control correction control
F-2-24
Platen guide
ADF reading glass

Lens Contact image sensor unit
F-2-23
Position Description
A Reference position for read
B About 0.5 mm to the right of the reference position A
C About 1.0 mm to the right of the reference position A
T-2-8
NOTE:
When dust has been detected at all of positions A, B, and C, setting an original on the
ADF will show a message that prompts the user to clean the glass surface.
2-15
2
Technical Explanation > Original Exposure and Feed System > Controls > Dust Detection Correction Control
2 Technical Explanation > Original Exposure and Feed System > Controls > Image Processing
2-16
■■Image Processing ●● Original Reading Sensor Drive
The original reading sensor is a 1-line linear image sensor consisting of 5147 photocells. After
●● Overview
completion of photoelectric conversion in the light receiving block, the signals are output to
Major specifications and functions of the image processing system are as follows:
the reader controller PCB in parallel for each channel (total eleven channels) of the original
reading sensor array.
Item Specification/function
Original reading sensor array Number of lines: 1
Number of pixels: Total 5148 (incl. 5104 effective pixels)
Shading correction Shading correction: Performed for each job.
Shading adjustment: Performed in the Service mode. Original reading Original reading Original reading
T-2-9
sensor 11 senor 10 sensor 1
Contact image
sensor (CIS) Reader controller PCB
Analog image processor Digital image processor
Original reading
sensor Main
Analog
A/D Shading controller
image
conversion processing PCB
processing Light receiving block
F-2-25
output
About image processing, the function of the reader controller PCB is as follows: L L H H L H L H H H L ………
• Original reading sensor drive
F-2-26
• Original reading sensor output gain correction and offset correction
• Original reading sensor output A/D conversion
●● Original Reading Sensor Output Gain Correction and Offset
• Shading correction
• LED intensity adjustment Correction
The analog video signals output from the original reading sensor are corrected so that they
will have a specific gain level (gain correction), and the output voltages generated in the
absence of incident light are also corrected so that they will have a specific offset level (offset
correction).
●● Original Reading Sensor Output A/D Conversion

After completion of the gain correction and offset correction, the analog video signals are
converted to digital signals corresponding to individual pixel voltage levels by the A/D
converter.
2-16
2
Technical Explanation > Original Exposure and Feed System > Controls > Image Processing
2 Technical Explanation > Original Exposure and Feed System > Controls > Image Processing
2-17
●● Outline of Shading Correction ●● LED Intensity Adjustment
The original reading sensor outputs are necessary even for the following reasons even when The machine adjusts the length of time during which the LED turns on for each scan so that
the density of the original is uniform: the image scan level of the original reading sensor will be specific level.
1) Variation in sensitivity among original reading sensor pixels
2) Variation in light intensity of rod lens array
Related Service Mode:
The machine performs shading correction to even out the original reading sensor output. • CIS gain and offset correction
There are two types of shading correction: shading adjustment performed in the service mode COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > CCD-ADJ
and shading correction performed for each job.
• ADF white level adjustment

COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1 (Copyboard glass scan, B/W)
●● Shading Adjustment COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL2 (Stream reading scan, B/W)
The machine measures the density of the standard white plate, and stores the measured
COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL3 (Copyboard glass scan, Color)
density data. It then processes the stored data to use it as the target value for shading
COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL4 (Stream reading scan, Color)
correction.
●● Shading Correction
The machine performs shading correction for each scan. It measures the density of the
standard white plate, and compares the measured value with the target value stored in the
shading correction circuit to use the difference between the two as the shading correction
value. The machine uses this shading correction value to correct the variation among the
original reading sensor pixels when scanning the originals, thus evening out the image
density level.
Original reading
sensor output
Characteristics after correction
Target value Characteristics before correction
Measurement value
Original density
Standard White
white plate
F-2-27
2-17
2
Technical Explanation > Original Exposure and Feed System > Controls > Image Processing
2 Technical Explanation > Original Exposure and Feed System > Control of ADF > Reversal Operation
2-18
Control of ADF ■■Reversal Operation
Reversal operation is performed in the duplex printing mode or various sized originals printing
■■Pickup and Feed Operations
mode.
The pickup unit consists of two rollers, a pickup roller and a feed roller. There are two types of reversal operations: upstream reversal feed operation and
When the Start key is turned on (the original pickup signal is input), the delivery reversal downstream reversal feed operation.
motor (M12) turns in the normal direction, the pickup solenoid (SL5) turns off to lower the Either type of reversal feed operation is selected according to the following conditions:
pickup unit, and then the pickup roller and feed roller turn to pick up and feed the original.
A shutter and a separation pad are provided to prevent double feed of originals during pickup
1) Upstream reversal feed operation
operation. The separation pad is used to separate the original.
• When the front side is read in the duplex printing mode
When the original arriving at the registration roller loops, the pickup solenoid (SL5) turns on to
• When the front side is read in the various sized originals printing mode
raise the pickup unit.
Then, the feed motor (M11) turns to rotate the registration roller, feeding the original. And the
2) Downstream reversal feed operation
registration solenoid (SL4) turns on to stop the registration roller while the feed motor (M11)
• When the back side is read in the duplex printing mode
turns on.
• When the back side is read in the various sized originals printing mode
Pickup roller
Original
Shutter
Feed roller
Pickup solenoid (SL5)
Separation pad
Shutter
Registration roller
Delivery reversal motor (M12)

Registration solenoid (SL4)
Feed motor (M11)

F-2-28
2-18
2
Technical Explanation > Original Exposure and Feed System > Control of ADF > Reversal Operation
2 Technical Explanation > Original Exposure and Feed System > Control of ADF > Reversal Operation
2-19
●● Upstream Reversal Feed Operation 3) The delivery reversal roller turns in the reverse direction to feed the original for back
After the front of the original is read, the flapper solenoid 1 (SL7) turns off and the flapper side read. After the original arrives at the registration roller, the roller release solenoid
solenoid 2 (SL6) turns on to feed the original to the upstream reversal path with the delivery (SL8) turns on to raise the delivery reversal roller.
reversal flapper 1 and delivery reversal flapper 2.
When the original is fed by the registration roller, the roller release solenoid (SL8) turns on
to raise the delivery reversal roller, thus preventing the delivery reversal roller from applying Delivery reversal roller (upper)
SL8
pressure to the paper. Roller release solenoid: ON
1) The flapper solenoid 1 turns off and the flapper solenoid 2 turns on to feed the original to
the upstream reversal path.
Registration roller
SL6
Flapper solenoid 2: ON
F-2-31

SL6
SL7

Flapper solenoid 1: OFF
F-2-29
2) After being fed by the specified distance in the upstream reversal path, the original
stops.
Delivery reversal roller

SL6
F-2-30
2-19
2
Technical Explanation > Original Exposure and Feed System > Control of ADF > Reversal Operation
2 Technical Explanation > Original Exposure and Feed System > Control of ADF > Delivery Operation
2-20
●● Downstream Reversal Feed Operation ■■Delivery Operation
After the back side of the original is read, the flapper solenoid 1 (SL7) turns on to feed the
After being read, the original is delivered to the original delivery tray using the delivery
original to the downstream reversal path using the delivery reversal flapper 1. Then, the
reversal roller and delivery roller.
original is delivered with the reversal roller and delivery roller.
1) The flapper solenoid 1 turns off and the flapper solenoid 2 turns off to feed the original.
1) The flapper solenoid 1 turns on to feed the original to the downstream reversal path.
SL6
Delivery reversal flapper 1 Flapper solenoid 2: OFF
SL7
SL7
F-2-32 Delivery reversal flapper 1

Flapper solenoid 1: OFF
2) After being fed by the specified distance in the downstream reversal path, the original
F-2-35
stops.
2) The original is delivered to the original delivery tray.
Reversal roller
F-2-33
Original delivery tray
3) The reversal roller turns in the reverse direction to deliver the original. F-2-36
Delivery roller
F-2-34
2-20
2
Technical Explanation > Original Exposure and Feed System > Control of ADF > Delivery Operation
2 Technical Explanation > Original Exposure and Feed System > Control of ADF > Jam Detection
2-21
■■Jam Detection Jam type Sensor Jam description
Timing sensor delay jam PS26 When the timing sensor cannot detect an original
Whether jam is occured or not, determined by whether there is paper or not in the sensor
within the specified time.
area by the timing check that memorized in advance by the reader controller PCB. Registration sensor delay jam PS23 When the registration sensor cannot detect an
When the reader controller PCB detected jam, it will stop feeding operation and display the original within the specified time.
message in the control panel about the jam occurrence. Registration sensor stationary PS23 When the trailing edge of the original cannot be
jam detected after lapse of the specified time after the
As the machine stores the jam codes, it can be checked by outputting a jam error log report original was detected by the registration sensor.
in the service mode. Lead sensor delay jam PS22 When the lead sensor cannot detect the original
Lead sensor stationary jam PS22 When the trailing edge of the original cannot be
detected after lapse of the specified time after the
original was detected by the lead sensor.
Stay sensor delay jam PS24 When the stay sensor cannot detect the original
Stay sensor stationary jam PS24 When the trailing edge of the original cannot be
PS26 PS27 detected after lapse of the specified time after the
original was detected by the stay sensor.
Reversal sensor delay jam PS25 When the reversal sensor cannot detect the original
PS22 PS25
PS24 Reversal sensor stationary jam PS25 When the trailing edge of the original cannot be
detected after lapse of the specified time after the
PS23
original was detected by the reversal sensor.
Initial stationary jam PS22/ When an original is detected in the feed path during
PS23/ pickup of the first original.
PS24/
PS25/
PS26
Pickup NG jam PS27 When original pickup operation starts with no original
F-2-37
set on the original pickup tray.
Timing error jam - When the original feed sequence is not completed
The jam is detected by the following sensors. during the specified time.
• Lead sensor (PS22) T-2-10
• Registration sensor (PS23)

• Stay sensor (PS24)
• Reversal sensor (PS25)
• Timing sensor (PS26)
• Original set sensor (PS27)
2-21
2
Technical Explanation > Original Exposure and Feed System > Control of ADF > Jam Detection
2 Technical Explanation > Original Exposure and Feed System > Work of Service > When replacing the parts
2-22
Work of Service
■■Periodically Replaced Parts
None
■■Consumable Parts
No. Parts name Parts number Q'ty Estimated life
1 ADF Pickup Roller Unit FM4-7732 1 80,000 sheets
2 ADF Separation Pad FL3-7878 1 80,000 sheets
T-2-11
■■Periodical Servicing
None
Perform as needed.
■■When replacing the parts

Part name Operation Reference
Copyboard glass Input the value of label on the copyboard Refer to page 5-4
glass and ADF white level adjustment
ADF reading glass ADF white level adjustment Refer to page 5-5
Contact image sensor (CIS) ADF white level adjustment and CIS gain and Refer to page 5-5
offset correction
T-2-12
2-22
2
Technical Explanation > Original Exposure and Feed System > Work of Service > When replacing the parts
2 Technical Explanation > Main Controller > Overview > Configuration / Function
2-23
Main Controller ●● Main controller PCB

Lithium Battery
BAT6500
Overview
Mini-USB
J6
■■Configuration / Function
UI
J4
Main Controller PCB
FAN
J15
LAN
J7 1st Line FAX
USB(D) UI
J7013/
J3 J1002
J7019
USB(H)
J5
USB(H)
J40
CC-VI TPM PCB FLASH PCB
J21 J8 J11
2nd Line Fax HDD Memory PCB
CARD J6006/J7014 J7008/J7018 J7009
HDD J20
F-2-39
Jack Function Jack Function

TPM PCB
J3 USB I/F (Device) J40 USB I/F (Host)
Flash PCB J4 UI: Control Panel I/F J6006 2nd Line FAX Unit I/F (Power)
F-2-38 J5 USB I/F (Host) J7008 HDD Serial I/F
Mini-USB I/F: Connect to USB port
Item Function J6 J7009 Memory PCB I/F
of Right Front Cover
Main Controller PCB System Control / Memory Control / Printer Output Image J7 LAN I/F J7013 1st Line FAX Unit I/F (Power)
Processing Control, Reader Image Input Processing, Card Reader
J8 TPM PCB I/F J7014 2nd Line FAX Unit I/F
Connection I/F, Image Processing for FAX, USB Expansion HUB
Connection I/F J11 FLASH PCB I/F J7018 HDD Power Supply I/F
RAM Temporarily saving image data J15 FAN: Fan I/F J7019 1st Line FAX Unit I/F
Capacity 1GB (for controller control) + 512MB (for image Lithium Battery for RTC
processing control) Life: approx. 10 years
USB port USB2.0 Device I/F, USB2.0 Host I/F J20 CARD: I/F for Card Reader BAT6500
Replacement of a single battery is not available
HDD 2.5 inch SATA I/F Standard: 160GB (80GB usable area) in the service field.
Address book, Security information (password, certificate), Image J21 CC-VI: I/F for Control Interface Kit
data, Preference data T-2-14
Flash PCB Retains the system data: 1GB
TPM PCB Generates and stores the encryption key.
Management Settings > Data Management > TPM Settings; this
function is enabled when the TPM setting is set "On" (default: Off)
T-2-13
2-23
2
Technical Explanation > Main Controller > Overview > Configuration / Function
2 Technical Explanation > Main Controller > Overview > Shutdown Sequence
2-24
■■Boot Sequence Related error codes (major error codes):
Error codes Error description
E602 HDD error
Power Supply Switch ON 0001 HDD detection error
[ ] : Program storage location Unable to find the startup partition (BOOTDEV) at startup.
0002 File system error on the HDD
• Initializing process of hardware E614 Flash error
0001 Flash PCB detection error
• Starting BIOS Unable to recognize the Flash PCB. The Flash PCB is not formatted.
[Main Controller PCB] 0002 Error in file system on the Flash PCB
E748 Board error (Flash PCB)
• Starting IPL, OS, system software for the 2010 Unable to find the IPL (Initial Program Loader).
main/sub CPU 2011 Unable to find the OS.
[Flash PCB] T-2-15
[Main Controller PCB]
■■Shutdown Sequence
• Starting application
Before shutting OFF the power supply, it is necessary to perform the HDD completion
process (for the HDD models only. Purpose: to prevent damage on the HDD) and execute
the fixing disengagement operation. This sequential process is called "shutdown sequence".
The shutdown sequence has been manually executed with the legacy (existing) models (by
holding down the power supply switch on the Control Panel for a specific duration).
When the Main Power Switch is turned OFF with this equipment, Main Controller PCB detects
this operation to start/execute the shutdown sequence automatically.
Note that the maximum shutdown time with this equipment is 110 seconds.
Standby screen display
NOTE: NOTE:
Due to the high speed startup, the progress bar and the active PCB are not When the power supply is stopped without advance shutdown of the equipment, or
synchronized. the complete deletion process of the HDD (deletion of the primary file) failed to be
For this reason, the progress bar cannot be utilized for troubleshooting. completed within the shutdown time (max. 110 sec.), data matching is checked at
See the following error code list for the troubleshooting. startup. In such a case, startup takes up to 80 seconds. The progress bar is displayed
during the data checking.
2-24
2
Technical Explanation > Main Controller > Overview > Shutdown Sequence
2 Technical Explanation > Main Controller > Controls > Network(Advanced Box / Space Client)
2-25
Controls ■■SEND
■■Copy Network Reader
HDD
HDD To DC Controller Reader
Image Processing
Resolution Conversion
LAN Data Conversion Image rotation
Controller JPEG Encode JPEG Conversion/Extension
Print the Image Image Processing
Processing Resolution Conversion HDD Writing/
Extension Image rotation Reading
Processing JPEG Conversion/Extension
HDD Writing/ Image Data Buffer
Reading (Memory)
Image Data Buffer Main Controller PCB

(Memory)
Main Controller PCB F-2-42

*Same as Remote FAX.
F-2-40
■■Print ■■Network(Advanced Box / Space Client)
Network HDD To DC Controller Network HDD To DC Controller
Print the Image

Print the Image Rendering Processing
LAN Extension JPEG Decode
Processing LAN
Controller Extension Controller Processing
Processing
HDD Writing/ HDD Writing/
Reading Reading
Interpreter Image Data Buffer Image Data Buffer
(Memory) (Memory)
Main Controller PCB Main Controller PCB
F-2-41 F-2-43
2-25
2
Technical Explanation > Main Controller > Controls > Network(Advanced Box / Space Client)
2 Technical Explanation > Main Controller > Controls > Fax Receive
2-26
■■Fax Send
HDD Reader FAX
Image Processing
JBIG・MMR/MH Image rotation
Conversion Image Level Cell
HDD Writing/
Reading
Image Data Buffer
(Memory)
Main Controller PCB
F-2-44
■■Fax Receive
HDD To DC Controller FAX
Image Processing
Color Space Conversion
JBIG Conversion
HDD Writing/
Reading
Image Data Buffer

(Memory)
Main Controller PCB
F-2-45
2-26
2
Technical Explanation > Main Controller > Controls > Fax Receive
2 Technical Explanation > Main Controller > Security > Setting the Management on the Hard Disk
2-27
Security ●● Initializing All Data/Settings
■■Setting the Management on the Hard Disk Initializing the saved file and the registration information
In addition to the document data to be accumulated by FAX function, the registration This function enables to delete (initialize) the data such as the file saved in the host machine,
information of the Address Book and the password information of the System Box and the the registration information of the Address Book and the job log information*
Address Book are saved in the HDD of the host machine. Therefore, data management in the
HDD needs to be executed under a tight security measure.
Caution:
The host machine has functions such as data encryption and data deletion and the data is
managed which prevents data leak to the outside so that the data is maintained safely and This “Initialize All Data/Settings” setting is equipped without adding Data Erase Kit and
confidentially. executed voluntarily by a user when the machine is disposed. The effect is different
from complete deletion of the job data and the user management information is deleted
as well; therefore, take note not to explain this function to the user.
●● HDD Data Erase
The host machine saves the job data by dividing it into the management information area
*The details are to be explained in the TPM section.
and the actual data area at the time of copy, transmission/reception or print output. While the
management information is automatically deleted after job completion, the actual data is left
in the HDD.
Overwriting 0-data or random data can completely delete the actual data left in the HDD of
the host machine. This procedure is effective to prevent data leak to the outside when the
HDD is replaced or disposed.
Job Data If data is erased by Erase only management

Management normal procedure Management data after output
Information Information
Actual Data Actual data remains
in the hard disk
Actual Data Actual Data
If data is erased with Management 0 Data or randam data

Information is overwritten after every output
the Data Erase Kit
Erase remaining
Actual Data job data
F-2-46
Enabling the Data Erase Kit can completely delete the unnecessary data or the deleted data
in the HDD. For data deletion in the HDD, deletion timing and deletion mode can be selected.
The following shows the data to be completely deleted from the HDD:
• Temporary image data generated at the time of scanning.

• Residual data after deleting a file in Fax/I-Fax Inbox(Fax Box/System Box).
• Fax/I-Fax sent/received data
• Spool data
• Data temporarily saved as print data
2-27
2
Technical Explanation > Main Controller > Security > Setting the Management on the Hard Disk
2 Technical Explanation > Main Controller > Security > Security features (encryption key and certificate, password protection)
2-28
■■Security features (encryption key and certificate, password ●● Configuration of Security Information
The security functionality behaves differently depending on the TPM setting on the UI.This
protection) machine provides the two types of TPM settings. See the figure below for the security
On the Main Controller PCB of the main body, “TPM PCB” is equipped. TPM stands for information flow in each setting.
Trusted Plattform Module, and is the chip name which generates and stores the encryption
- When the TPM setting is ON
key and has the encryption calculation function for the public key.
TPM PCB can protect the security information(password, certificate and encriptiion key)
TPM Key
stored in the Flash Set / registered / saved data other than the security information is not
TPM PCB
protected.
To encrypt or decode the security information, use the TPM key installed in the chip. (Temporarily stored in Flash)
Public Key
USB flash drive
Backup Key
for TPM failure
Common
Key
Password Password
Memory Flash
F-2-48
When the TPM setting is ON, the TPM key is enabled to secure information with the three
keys. Therefore, the security information held in each machine is safely protected.The
security information in this setting can be accessed by the three keys and multiple passwords
stored in the Flash.Each data is stored in the specified location (enclosed with blue dots in the
figure above).Since the data in the upper layer are linked to those in the lower layer, security
information is activated only when data in all the layers are linked.For the backup purpose,
F-2-47 the backup key is temporarily stored also in the Flash to be prepared for a TPM failure (only
It is extremely difficult from the outside to take out the TPM key installed in the chip. for the initial failure after the TPM setting is ON).This key can be backed up using the USB
Therefore, even the following cases occur, the security information in the main body can be flash drive. Note that the security information is not decodable correctly in case the Flash is
protected securely. failed or formatted because the public key information stored in the Flash is cleared. If this
• HDD or Main Controller PCB is taken out occurs, execute “Initialize All Data / Settings” in Settings/Registration to set the TPM setting to
• System of the main body is intruded through the network OFF.
To enable this function, setting is required in Settings / Registration mode.

Management Settings > Data Management > TPM Settings -> On (default: OFF)
2-28
2
Technical Explanation > Main Controller > Security > Security features (encryption key and certificate, password protection)
2-29
When the TPM setting is OFF, the TPM key is disabled. Thus, the security information is ●● Before / after introduction
protected only by the common key.Under this setting, the security information held in this The setting neeeds to be specified in Settings / Registration mode (“TPM setting” is set OFF
machine is protected at the level equivalent to the conventional machines.The security at the time of shipment from the factory)
functionality in this setting is configured by the common key and multiple passwords stored 1. Enable the feature
in the Flash.When the TPM setting is set to OFF, the security information is protected by the 2. Backup the TPM key
common key and multiple passwords stored in Flash. Unlike the case that the TPM setting 3. Restore the TPM key
is set to ON, the password information stored in the Flash is initialized when the Flash is 4. Disable the feature
replaced or formatted.
Basically the user should perform this work
TPM Setting for Security Information
The security information can be protected with or without TPM by switching between TPM Caution:
settings in Setting / Registration mode. To set “ON” for TPM setting, be sure to instruct the following points to the user.
• When the TPM setting is ONThe security functionality is enabled in 4 levels (TPM key,
• Be sure to backup the TPM key immediately after selecting “ON”
public key, common key and password).
• Keep the password at the time of backup
• When the TPM setting is OFFThe security functionality is enabled in 2 levels (common key
• Be sure not to lose the USB memory that has saved the backup file of TPM key.
and password).
●● Preparation before Installing TPM In the case of replacing the TPM PCB due to failure, it is necessary to restore the TPM
key after replacement.
Before installing TPM, ask the user to back up data.Follow the steps below to back up data.
1) From Remote UI, execute Setting / Registration > Management Setting > Data
Management > Import / Export. The following data types should be backed up. Unless retoration is implemented, security information (password, certificate and
encryption key) cannot be used.
• Address book (see *1)
• Device settings (transfer settings, address book, frequently-used Send functions) (see *2) If restore work could not be performed due to lost of USB memory, etc., it is necessary
• Setting / Registration to first execute [Initialize All Data / Settings] to enable the TPM feature again. This is
• Printer settings can be exported due to security issue to keep the setup/register data unchanged.
• Favorites stored in the web browser (only when the web browser is enabled) (see *3)
*1 Each of address books can be exported. If the address book is seen as a part of device
settings, this step can be disregarded.
*2 Among settings in the main menu, only “Frequently-used Setting” under “Scan and Send”
can be backed up.
*3 These are available only in the specific models or configurations.
2) Select “Export” from Custom Menu of the Remote UI to back up “Custom Menu Setting
Information”.
2-29
2
2-30
1. Enable the feature 2) Click “Yes”, and then reboot this machine.
Setting of “system management encryption number”

Recommend the user (administrator) to set up the system management encryption
number in advance.
Backup of TPM key is performed after selecting “ON” for TPM settings, however,
backup is available only once. Therefore, it is efficient to set the system management
encryption number as a mean to avoid incidents, such as when backup file is obtained
by anyone other than the administrator, etc.
1) Select the following: Management Settings > Data Management > TPM Setting: and select
“ON” for TPM setting.
F-2-50
Encryption / decoding feature of security information is enabled after rebooting the machine.
F-2-49
2-30
2
2-31
2. Backup of TPM key 3) Click [Password] to enter the password (4 to 12-digit), and then enter the password to
Only the USB memory (supported system file: FAT32) can be used as the device for saving confirm the entry.
backup file of TPM key.
Data size of this file is several MB.
F-2-51
1) Connect the USB memory to the main unit.
There are two USB I/F (host): one at the side of the control panel and the other at the side
of main controller PCB.
Caution:
Be sure to connect only one USB memory, otherwise, a message indicating backup
failure is shown if performing backup while 2 or more USB memories are connected.
F-2-53
NOTE: 4) Click [OK] to start backup of TPM key.
The USB memory can save multiple backup files for TPM key.
2) Select the following: Management setting > Data Management > TPM setting; and click
[Backup TPM key].
F-2-54
5) Once the backup completion screen is shown, click [OK] and remove the USB memory.
F-2-52
2-31
2
2-32
3. Restore of TPM Key
Caution:
Procedure is about the same as the backup work.
Cause of backup failure Difference between restore work and backup work:
In the case of the following, a message is shown indicating backup failure and its cause. Rebooting is necessary (turn OFF and then ON the main power) after completion of restore
Be sure to perform appropriate remedy. work.
• USB memory is not connected 1) Connect the USB memory that saves TPM key.
• 2 or more USB memories are connected 2) Select the following: Management setting > Data management > TPM setting; and click
[Restore TPM key].
• Memory capacity of USB memory is insufficient
• Connected USB memory is read-only (writing is prohibited)
• There is no key
Caution:
Storage of USB memory
Be sure to instruct the following points to the user.
• The USB memory should be securely kept/managed.

• Do not put the backup file of TPM key stored in the USB memory to any location
accessible by general public, such as on the server.
F-2-55
NOTE: Backup file name of TPM key 3) Enter the password that has been specified at backup work.
Serial No. is automatically given as the backup file name.
4) Once the screen to confirm restore start is shown, click [OK] to start restore.
5) Once the restore completion screen is shown, click [OK] and remove the USB memory,
and turn OFF and then ON the main power switch.
2-32
2
2-33
Caution: Caution: Points to note when disabling functionality

Cause of restore failure To disable the use of TPM, all data and settings should be initialized. If this is executed,
In the case of the following, a message is shown indicating restore failure and its cause. user information saved in the FLASH is totally cleared. Ensure to back up the data
before disabling TPM settings.
Be sure to perform appropriate remedy.
• USB memory is not connected. List of data to be cleared

• 2 or more USB memories are connected. • Data saved in Inbox (Fax Box/ System Box)
• Connected USB memory is with security feature. • Destination data registered in Address Book
• Read mode registered using Send function
• There is no TPM key in the USB memory.
• Mode memory registered using Copy/ Box function
• The TPM key in the USB memory is not appropriate for the target machine.
• MEAP applications and their license files
• Mismatched entry password • Data saved using MEAP applications
• [Initialize All Data /Setting] is executed after obtaining backup of TPM key. • Password for MEAP SMS (Service Management Service)
• The Flash is faulty. (The password is returned to default if any change is made.)
• User authentication information registered by local device authentication via SSO-H (Single
Sign-On H)
4. Disable the feature • Unsent documents (documents for scheduled transmission and reserved transmission)
To set “OFF” for the TPM setting, execute [Initialize All Data / Settings]. • Job logs
• Contents set in Setting / Registration
• Image-composite registration form
• Registered transfer settings
• Key pair and server certificate registered in Management Setting (Setting/ Registration) >
[Device Management] > [Certificate Settings]
Steps of data restoration after recovery

The restoration process triggers Setting/ Registration > Management Setting > Data
Management > Import/ Export > Import/ Export Setting/ Registration on the UI.
The data listed below cannot be restored, thus should be set again.
F-2-56
2-33
2
2-34
●● Related Error Code ●● Data to be encrypted / decoded(reference)
Error Code Error title, description, remedy Type Application/feature Security information Saving destination
E746 Error in encryption Password/encryption FAX Box Password for FAX Box HDD
0031 Engine ID error number Send Password for File HDD
Description Hardware error destination in Address Book
Remedy 1. Turn OFF and then ON the power Password of LDAP server FLASH
2. Replace the TPM PCB Password of POP3 server FLASH
0032 Engine ID error Password of Adobe ES FLASH
Description TPM key mismatch Rights Management server
Remedy Format the system Password for address FLASH
Use SST or USB memory to format the HDD, and then execute (destination) registration
downloading of the system software. See Chapter 6 Upgrading for UI Password for Service Mode FLASH
details. For reference, the method using USB memory is shown Network Password for IPP FLASH
below: authentication
1. Prepare USB memory in which the system software was Password for FTP FLASH
registered authentication
0033 Engine ID error User name and password of FLASH
Description Mismatched data in the TPM Proxy authentication client
Remedy Recovery is available if backup of the TPM has been executed Login password of NetWare FLASH
1. Connect the USB memory in which the TPM key is saved print server
2. Management Settings > Data Management > TPM Settings; click Policy common key for FLASH
[Restore TPM key] IPSec
3. Enter the password that was specified at the time of backup work User name and FLASH
4. Once the restore completion screen is displayed, click [OK] and password for PEAP/TTLS
remove the USB memory, and then turn OFF and ON the main authentication
power switch. Others Login user information of HDD
When backup of the TPM key is not executed device
System format is necessary
Password for FAX reception FLASH
Use SST or USB memory to format the HDD, and then download the
Department management FLASH
system software
data (including administrator
0034 TPM auto recovery error
password)
Description An error occurs when clearing the HDD while the TPM setting is ON
Encryption key MIB Authentication key and FLASH
Remedy The symptom is recovered by turning OFF and then ON the power encryption key for SNMPv3
0035 TPM version error Certificate/Secret Key SSL, AMS Device key pair HDD
Description TPM which cannot be used in this machine was installed. Signature SEND User key pair HDD
Remedy Install the supported TPM. Others User preference data Key bundle information HDD
T-2-16 (password)
T-2-17
2-34
2
2 Technical Explanation > Main Controller > Security > HDD Encryption Kit (Optional)
2-35
■■HDD Encryption Kit (Optional) The following shows the statuses for each use case.
Case 1: Normally operated
This option enables to generate the encryption key inside the encryption board and to
Case 2: HDD-related error occurs because the system on the HDD cannot be read (other
encrypt the whole HDD including the system software. Performing encryption can protect the
than E602-2000 error)
temporary image data generated at copying or printing, the registration information of the
Case 3: E602-2000 is triggered by failure in mutual authentication
Address Book and the password information from leakage of confidential information by theft
Case 4: Unable to decode properly due to unmatched key for the encryption board
of the HDD.
Encryption
Correct Correct HDD
Correct
encryption (Protection property)
Caution: controller
board
There is no need to reinstall the system in the case of installing the HDD Encryption Kit. two-way authentication
This is because the system is not deleted but stored in the flash memory.
Correct Correct HDD
controller (Protection property)
●● HDD encryption function It is not possible to decode.

Encryption
Temporary image data such as scanned image or PDL data is written in the HDD of the host Correct
Controller Correct HDD
machine on an as-needed basis. In normal operation, only the management information not authorized encryption
board (Protection property)
is deleted after printing is complete or the file is deleted; therefore, the image or the user
It is not possible two-way authentication
file information remain in the HDD as they are (without modification). In this case, HDD
encryption function prevents an original image being restored from pulling out the HDD and Encryption board Correct HDD
analyzing in disk editor. not authorized (Protection property)
It is not possible to decode.
●● Data encryption mechanism F-2-57
The encryption board receives signals transmitted from the controller board, and encrypts ●● Actions against Troubles - Overview
and saves them in the HDD. Servicing User data Recovery Action
The encryption board receives the encrypted data saved in the HDD to decode and send HDD replacement cleared Replace HDDs 1) Format the HDD
them to the controller. Encryption board cleared Install HDD encryption 1) Replace encryption board
replacement Kit 2) Initialize Encryption Board
3) Format the HDD
●● Conditions for Encryption Board operation Main controller cleared Clear the key for HDD 1) Initialize the encryption board
The encryption board has the function to recognize and authenticate the host machine. An replacement data encryption kit 2) Format the HDD
error is triggered if a second-hand HDD encryption/ mirroring board is installed to the other Main controller clear cleared After MN-CON clear MN-CON clear does not clear
process is done authentication information; no work
machine. is required specifically for HDD
encryption kit
●● Compatibility among Device, Encryption Board and HDD T-2-18
E602-2000 error may occur if the unmatched authentication information is found between the
controller and the HDD encryption board and the encryption board is mounted.The device,
the encryption board and HDD can be connected in 4 use cases.
2-35
2
Technical Explanation > Main Controller > Security > HDD Encryption Kit (Optional)
2 Technical Explanation > Main Controller > Service Tasks > Service Notes
2-36
●● Relevant Error Codes
E602 and detailed codes
Detection
E code Description Cause Actions
Timing
E602 Authentication Error in Start-up Check connections between the
-2000 Error authentication encryption board and the HDD
between the host and between the encryption
machine and the board and the main controller.
encryption board This error may be triggered after
Failure in Error in recognition of replacement of the encryption
Encryption Board the encryption board board or the main controller.
Device Error Failure in the At any rate, this error disables
encryption board accesses to HDD data. When no
problem is found in connections,
use SST to execute Key Clear >
Format .
T-2-19
Service Tasks
■■Actions at Parts Replacement
Reference to the section 5.

None.
None.
■■Service Notes
None.
2-36
2
Technical Explanation > Main Controller > Service Tasks > Service Notes
2 Technical Explanation > Laser Exposure System > Construction > Main Configuration Parts
2-37
Laser Exposure System ■■Main Configuration Parts
Construction
[1] [3]
■■Specifications/Controls/Functions
●● Laser light
The number of laser light 4
Output 10mW
Wave length 775nm to 799nm (Infrared laser)
T-2-20
●● Scanner motor
Motor type DC brushless motor
The number of rotation Approx 31715 rpm / 36732 rpm (2-speed control)
Type of bearing Oil
T-2-21
●● Polygon mirror
The number of facet 6 (Φ40)
[2] [4]
T-2-22
F-2-58
●● Controls
Name Function
Synchronous control Main scanning direction synchronous control [1] Laser Driver PCB Emits laser
Laser intensity control APC control [2] Polygon mirror Scans the laser light in the main scanning direction
Others Laser ON/OFF control [3] BD mirror Reflects the laser light in the BD PCB direction
Laser scanner motor control [4] BD PCB Generates the BD signal
Laser shutter control T-2-24
T-2-23
2-37
2
Technical Explanation > Laser Exposure System > Construction > Main Configuration Parts
2 Technical Explanation > Laser Exposure System > Construction > Control System Configuration
2-38
■■Control System Configuration Signal name Function
Image signal
Controls for the laser exposure system are mainly performed by the Main Controller PCB and
DATA C+ C laser image data signal entry
DC Controller PCB. DATA C- C laser image data signal entry
DATA B- B laser image data signal entry
DATA B+ B laser image data signal entry
Laser driver PCB
DATA A- A laser image data signal entry
J602 DATA A+ A laser image data signal entry
DATA D+ D laser image data signal entry
J2
DATA D- D laser image data signal entry
Laser control signal
CTRL0_0 A/B laser control signal
CTRL1_0 C/D laser control signal
J601 CTRL1_1 C/D laser control signal
Laser scanner motor
CTRL1_2 C/D laser control signal

Scanner motor control signal
POLYGON_M_FG* FG output signal
control signal
Laser control signal
POLYGON_M_ACC* Motor speed-up signal

Image signal
POLYGON_M_DEC* Motor speed-down signal

J1
BD signal
BD PCB BD signal
BD BD signal
Laser scanner motor PCB T-2-25
J215
DC Controller PCB
Main Controller PCB
J6003 J6002
F-2-59
2-38
2
Technical Explanation > Laser Exposure System > Construction > Control System Configuration
2 Technical Explanation > Laser Exposure System > Basic Sequence > Basic Sequence
2-39
Basic Sequence
■■Basic Sequence
Initial rotation (INTR): After the control panel key is ON, the machine starts the scanner
motor and rotates the laser scanner motor until it reaches the number of target rotation while
keeping all laser OFF. Once it reaches the target, the machine enters stand-by mode. (FG
control)
If pressing the start key before the control panel key is ON, standby time gets shorter after
the laser scanner motor reaches the target.
Print (PRINT): When copy start key is ON, the machine drives D laser. After BD PCB detects
D laser, the machine performs the APC (laser intensity) control of each laser. Once the BD
signal reaches the specified cycle, the machine is ready to print. Image data is output from
the main controller based on the synchronous signal and laser is emitted corresponding to it.
<In the case of A4, 1 sheet>
Control panel key

(Start key ON*1) Start key ON
STBY INTR PRINT STBY
Waiting in FG control
Laser scanner
Speed up BD control Speed down
motor
PVREQ signal
Light off Light on Light off
Laser
: BD detection/APC control
: AP control
BD*1 BD*1
Laser D Laser D
Image per 1 line
Laser C Laser C
Laser B Laser B
Laser A Laser A
*1: BD signal is generated based on A laser light. Only A laser light reaches BD sensor
on BD PCB and B/C/D laser does not reach.
F-2-60
2-39
2
Technical Explanation > Laser Exposure System > Basic Sequence > Basic Sequence
2 Technical Explanation > Laser Exposure System > Controls > Controlling the Laser Activation Timing
2-40
Controls
■■Controlling the Laser Activation Timing
●● Laser ON/OFF Control
Laser ON/OFF control is dependent on the combination of the laser control signal (A/B laser:
CTRL0_0/0_1/0_2, C/D laser: CTRL1_0/1_1/1_2) from the Main Controller PCB.
CTRL0_0
CTRL0_1
CTRL0_2
CTRL1_0
CTRL1_1
CTRL1_2
<A laser/B laser>
Laser control signal Laser status
CTRL0_0 CTRL0_1 CTRL0_2 A Laser B Laser J6002
1 1 1 Image data output Image data output
0 1 1 Forcible output OFF Main controller PCB
1 0 1 OFF Forcible output
0 0 1 Forcible output Forcible output
1 1 0 Forcible output OFF Forcible output OFF F-2-61
0 1 0 ON (For APC control) OFF

1 0 0 OFF ON (For APC control)
0 0 0 Discharge: APC reset Discharge: APC reset
(Fixed when laser is not used) (Fixed when laser is not used)
T-2-26
<C laser/D laser>

Laser control signal Laser status
CTRL1_0 CTRL1_1 CTRL1_2 C Laser D Laser
1 1 1 Image data output Image data output
0 1 1 Forcible output OFF
1 0 1 OFF Forcible output
0 0 1 Forcible output Forcible output
1 1 0 Forcible output OFF Forcible output OFF
0 1 0 ON (For APC control) OFF
1 0 0 OFF ON (For APC control)
0 0 0 Discharge: APC reset Discharge: APC reset
(Fixed when laser is not used) (Fixed when laser is not used)
T-2-27
2-40
2
Technical Explanation > Laser Exposure System > Controls > Controlling the Laser Activation Timing
2 Technical Explanation > Laser Exposure System > Controls > Controlling the Laser Activation Timing
2-41
●● Main Scanning Synchronous Control [1] Synchronous PCB [4] VDO
Main scanning synchronous control is operated at synchronous PCB based on BD [2] Delay PCB [5] VDO signal process unit
synchronous signal. [3] Line memory [6] Laser driver PCB
BD_SYNCH: BD synchronous signal
Based on BD signal that is formed from A laser light detected by BD PCB, BD synchronous
RE_A/B/C/D: Readable signal
signal for each laser is formed inside Forcible Main Controller PCB.
Image data written in the line memory is read out by the readable signal (RE_A, RE_B, RE_
C, RE_D) according to the 4 phase differences formed inside the delay PCB based on the BD
NOTE:
synchronous signal (BD_SYNCH) and is sent to the laser driver. Regarding BD signal formation
Not B laser but A laser only reaches BD sensor on BD PCB. BD signal is formed based
on A laser light.
[6]
BD signal
J6003 J6002
[1]
BD_SYNCH
RE_A
[2]
[3]
RE_B
[2]
[3]
[4]
RE_C
[2]
[3]
RE_D
[2]
[3]
[5]
Main Controller PCB
F-2-62
2-41
2
Technical Explanation > Laser Exposure System > Controls > Controlling the Laser Activation Timing
2 Technical Explanation > Laser Exposure System > Controls > Controlling the Laser Shutter
2-42
■■Controlling the Intensity of Laser Light ■■Controlling the Laser Shutter
●● APC Control ●● Laser Shutter Control
The machine monitors the laser light that is emitted to the built-in photo diode of laser diode When releasing the Drum Unit, laser shutter will be closed by laser shutter link that works
and adjusts the laser to appropriate intensity. in conjunction with the Drum Unit and the laser light is blocked. Also, when the front door or
right door open is detected, laser scanner motor and the laser emission will be turned OFF.
■■Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor [1]
●● Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor

From when the laser scanner motor starts and the laser scanner motor reaches the number
of target rotation to before image formation starts, the machine controls the rotation speed by
referring to the laser scanner motor rotation speed signal (FG signal).
During image formation, it controls the laser scanner motor rotation speed based on BD
signal.
Laser scanner motor rotation speed is controlled by speed-up signal (ACC signal) and speed-
down signal (DEC signal).
[2]
When setting Drum Unit When releasing Drum Unit
[3] [1] [3] [1]

POLYGON_M_ACC
POLYGON_M_DEC
POLYGON_M_FG
[2]
[2]
J215
F-2-64
DC Controller PCB [1] Laser shutter
[2] Laser shutter link (works in conjunction with the Drum Unit)
F-2-63 [3] Laser unit
2-42
2
Technical Explanation > Laser Exposure System > Controls > Controlling the Laser Shutter
2 Technical Explanation > Image Formation System > Basic Configuration > List of Image Formation Specifications
2-43
Image Formation System
Basic Configuration
■■List of Image Formation Specifications
Item Specifications/Function/Method
Photosensitive Type Organic Photo Conductor High Durable Drum (E Drum)
Drum Cleaning mechanism Cleaning Blade
Processing speed 311mm/sec (at pickup from Cassette)
134mm/sec (at pickup from Multi-purpose Tray)
Primary Charging method Roller charging
Charging AC bias constant voltage control: approx. 0 to 3000Vp-p
DC bias constant voltage control: approx. -300 to -1000V
DC bias switch control (variable by Environment Sensor
Detection)
Roller diameter Diameter: 12
Cleaning mechanism Brush Roller (Diameter: 10)
Developing Developing method Dry, 1-component toner projection development
AC bias constant voltage control: approx. 800Vp-p
DC bias control: approx. 0 to -700V
DC bias switch control (Variable by density setting and
Environment Sensor Detection)
Developing Cylinder Diameter: 20
diameter
Toner Magnetic negative toner
Toner level detection Toner detection by Toner Level Detection Sensor (in Hopper
mechanism and Developing Assembly)
Transfer Transfer method Roller charging
DC constant current control: approx. 0 to 50 micro A
Cleaning bias control: -2300V (DC constant voltage control)
DC current level control (variable by Environment Sensor
Detection, paper type, paper width and pickup location)
Roller diameter Diameter: 16
Cleaning mechanism Cleaning bias application
Separation Separation method Electrostatic separation (Static Eliminator) + curvature
separation
DC constant voltage control: -2700V (strong bias), -2300V
(weak bias)
Waste Toner To collect into Waste Toner Container
Waste Toner Container capacity: approx. 750g
T-2-28
2-43
2
Technical Explanation > Image Formation System > Basic Configuration > List of Image Formation Specifications
2 Technical Explanation > Image Formation System > Basic Configuration > Major Components in image formation system
2-44
■■Major Components in image formation system
Name Function
The following shows major component parts in image formation system:
[1] Drum Unit A unit consists of the Photosensitive Drum, Primary
Charging Roller, etc.
[2] Brush Roller To rotate by engaging with the Primary Charging Roller
to clean the Primary Charging Roller.
[3] Primary Charging Roller To rotate by engaging with the Photosensitive Drum to
make the surface of Photosensitive Drum negatively-
charged.
[4] Cleaning Blade To remove residual toner on the surface of
[1] [2] [3] [4] Photosensitive Drum.
[5] Waste Toner Feed Screw To feed toner that was collected by the Cleaning Blade
into the Waste Toner Container.
[6] Photosensitive Drum To create image on the surface of Photosensitive Drum.
[7] Static Eliminator To make the back side of paper negatively-charged to
separate the paper from the Photosensitive Drum.
[14] [8] Transfer Roller To make the back side of paper positively-charged to
[5] transfer toner on the paper.
[9] Developing Cylinder To transfer toner in the Developing Assembly on the
Photosensitive Drum.
[6] [10] Developing Assembly A unit consists of the Developing Cylinder, Developing
Blade, etc.
[13] [11] Toner Feed Screw To fill toner that was supplied from the Hopper into the
[7]
(Inside Developing Developing Assembly.
Assembly)
[8] [12] Toner Feed Screw To feed toner that was supplied from the Toner Bottle
(Inside Hopper) into the Developing Assembly.
[13] Hopper Assembly To accumulate toner supplied from the Toner Bottle.
[14] Toner Cartridge A toner-filled cartridge for toner supply
T-2-29
[12] [11] [10] [9]

F-2-65
2-44
2
Technical Explanation > Image Formation System > Basic Configuration > Major Components in image formation system
2 Technical Explanation > Image Formation System > Basic Configuration > Image Formation Process
2-45
■■Image Formation Process
Image formation block Description
The image formation system of this machine consists of the Photosensitive Drum, Primary
[1] Primary charging block To evenly make the surface of the Photosensitive
Charging Roller, Developing Cylinder, Transfer Charging Roller, Static Eliminator and Drum negatively-charged.
Cleaning Blade, and the image formation process around the Drum Unit mainly consists of [2] Laser exposure block To neutralize electric charge by scanning laser beam
the 6 blocks. on the drum surface to create latent image.
[3] Developing block To create visible image by attaching toner that has
been negatively charged from the Developing Cylinder
Primary charging roller to the latent static latent image on the surface of the
Cleaning Blade [6] Photosensitive Drum.
[4] Transfer block To apply positively-charged potential from the back
side of paper to transfer toner on the drum to the
paper.
Photosensitive drum [5] Separation block To separate paper from the Photosensitive Drum by
elastic force of paper and make the paper easy to be
separated by applying negatively-charged potential
Paper from the back side of paper.
[1]
[6] Drum cleaning block To remove residual toner on the surface of the drum
by the Cleaning Blade to be collected into the Waste
[5] Toner Container.
T-2-30
Static eliminator
[2]
[3]
Transfer charging roller
[4]
Developing cylinder
F-2-66
2-45
2
Technical Explanation > Image Formation System > Basic Configuration > Image Formation Process
2 Technical Explanation > Image Formation System > Basic Sequence > Last rotation sequence
2-46
Basic Sequence ■■Sequence at printing
The following shows the basic sequence of this machine: Registration Image write Registration
ON end ON
Image formation sequence Sheet-to-sheet Image formation sequence
■■Initial rotation sequence (1st sheet) sequence (2nd sheet and later)
Main Motor (M2)
• At pickup from Cassette and pickup from Multi-purpose Tray
Primary Charging
Pickup Registration AC Bias
ON ON Primary Charging
DC Bias
Laser
Main Motor (M2)
Developing AC Bias
Primary Charging AC Bias
Developing DC Bias
Primary Charging DC Bias
Developing Cylinder
Laser Clutch (CL2)
Developing AC Bias Transfer Bias
Developing DC Bias Static Eliminator Bias
Developing Cylinder Clutch (CL2)

Transfer Bias F-2-68
Static Eliminator Bias ■■Last rotation sequence

F-2-67
Image write
end
Main Motor (M2)

Primary Charging AC Bias
Primary Charging DC Bias
Laser
Developing AC Bias
Developing DC Bias
Transfer Bias [1]
Static Eliminator Bias

Cleaning bias (-2700V) is applied at [1] as shown above. F-2-69
2-46
2
Technical Explanation > Image Formation System > Basic Sequence > Last rotation sequence
2 Technical Explanation > Image Formation System > Controls > Drum Unit
2-47
Controls ●● Drum Unit Life Detection
This machine detects the drum unit life from accumulation of time when the primary charging
■■Drum Unit AC bias or the primary charging DC bias is applied.
The Drum Unit mainly consists of the Photosensitive Drum, Primary Charging Roller, Brush The life (displayed in %) can be checked by the following service mode:
Roller, Cleaning Blade and Waste Toner Feed Screw, and is driven by the Main Motor (M2). Lv.1) COPIER > COUNTER > LF > K-DRM-LF (Drum unit (Bk) counter)
The Cleaning Blade is in contact with the surface of the Photosensitive Drum to remove
residual toner on the surface of the Photosensitive Drum that was not transferred to the
Related Service Mode
paper. Residual toner collected by the Cleaning Blade is sent from the Toner Ejection Part to
• Lv.1) COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > D-DLV-BK (Set Bk Drum auto delivery alarm
Waste Toner Container by the Waste Toner Feed Screw. The Brush Roller is also in contact
timing)
with the Primary Charging Roller, and the Brush Roller cleans the Primary Charging Roller.
<Setting value>
50 to 200% [Default: 100]
Waste Toner Feed Screw • Lv.2) COPIER > OPTION > USER > P-CRG-LF (ON/OFF of Drum Unit life warning)
<Setting value>
Cleaning Blade 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON [Default: 0 ]
• Lv.1) COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW > DRM-DSP (Counter initial screen display
sw: Drum Unit)
Brush Roller
<Setting value>
Primary
0 to 1
Charging Roller 0: Hide, 1: Display [Default: 0 ]
M2
Photosensitive Drum
[1]
DC Controller PCB
Toner Ejection Part
F-2-70
M2 Main Motor
[1] Main Motor drive signal
●● Drum Unit Detection

Charging AC bias is applied at Power-on, recovery from sleep state, or opening/closing the
door to detect the Drum Unit by the return value.
2-47
2
Technical Explanation > Image Formation System > Controls > Drum Unit
2 Technical Explanation > Image Formation System > Controls > Developing Assembly
2-48
●● Primary Charging Bias Control ■■Developing Assembly
This machine performs direct charging by the Charging Roller. AC bias is applied to the
The Developing Assembly mainly consists of the Developing Cylinder, Developing Blade,
Primary Charging Roller to make steady DC bias and charging.
Toner Stirring Plate, and Toner Feed Screw, and is driven by the Main Motor (M2) and
Developing Cylinder Clutch (CL2).
Primary charging roller The Toner Feed Screw and Toner Stirring Plate feed the toner, which was sent from the Toner
Photosensitive drum
Container, to fill in the Developing Assembly. Toner in the Developing Assembly is detected
by the Developing Assembly Toner Sensor (TS2), which is a magnetic sensor.
Toner Agitation Plate
Toner Feed Screw

HVT PCB
Environment sensor
TS2
[2] [1]
Developing Blade
Developing Cylinder
Primary AC bias Primary DC bias
control circuit control circuit CL 2
DC Controller PCB
M2
F-2-71
[1] Primary charging bias control signal

[3] [2] [1]
[2] Environment sensor detection signal
DC Controller PCB
●● DC/AC bias constant voltage control F-2-72
The DC bias control circuit and AC bias control circuit in the DC Controller PCB control DC TS2 Developing Assembly Toner Sensor
bias and AC bias, which are applied to the Primary Charging Roller, to make constant voltage. CL2 Developing Cylinder Clutch
M2 Main Motor
●● DC bias switch control [1] Developing Cylinder Clutch drive signal
DC bias changes output value of DC bias according to the environment detected by the
[3] Developing Assembly Toner Sensor detection signal
Environment Sensor (THU1).
2-48
2
Technical Explanation > Image Formation System > Controls > Developing Assembly
2 Technical Explanation > Image Formation System > Controls > Toner Supply Area
2-49
●● Developing Bias Control ■■Toner Supply Area
DC bias and AC bias are applied to the Developing Cylinder.
●● Toner Supply Control
Photosensitive drum Route of Toner Supply
TS1
Toner Cartridge Hopper
Density Setting Toner Feed Screw
Main Controller PCB
Environment sensor
TS2
HVT PCB Developing cylinder
Toner Feed Screw

[3] [2] [1]
Developing Assembly
Developing AC bias Developing DC bias
control circuit control circuit
DC Controller PCB M5 M2 M6
F-2-73
[5] [4] [3] [2] [1]
[1] Developing bias control signal
[3] Density setting signal DC Controller PCB
F-2-74
●● DC/AC bias constant voltage control TS1 Hopper Toner Sensor

TS2 Developing Assembly Toner Sensor
The DC bias control circuit and AC bias control circuit in the DC Controller PCB control DC
M2 Main Motor
bias and AC bias, which are applied to the Developing Cylinder, to make constant voltage. M6 Hopper Motor
M5 Bottle Motor
●● DC bias switch control [1] Hopper Toner Sensor detection signal
[2] Hopper Motor drive signal
DC bias changes output value of DC bias according to the environment and density settings
detected by the Environment Sensor (THU1). [4] Developing Assembly Toner Sensor detection signal
[5] Bottle Motor drive signal
2-49
2
Technical Explanation > Image Formation System > Controls > Toner Supply Area
2 Technical Explanation > Image Formation System > Controls > Toner Supply Area
2-50
Operation of the host ●● Detection for replacing Toner Container

Title Description Supply timing
machine This machine does not have a sensor to detect replacement of a Toner Container. Therefore,
Supply to the To supply When output result of Hopper Toner To drive the execute the toner supply sequence as follows to determine replacement of a Toner Container.
Hopper developer in the Sensor (TS1) changes from H to L. Bottle Motor (M5)
• Toner supply sequence (When "Replace toner cartridge." is displayed. )
Toner Container intermittently (to rotate
into the Hopper for 3 sec and stop for 2 1. Make the Main Motor (M2), Developing Clutch, Hopper Motor (M6) and Bottle Motor (M5)
sec). driven to supply toner.
Supply to the To supply The Developing Clutch is turned On To drive the 2. When the Hopper Toner Sensor detects presence of toner, the machine resumes normal
Developing developer from and the Main Motor (M2) is driven.*1 Hopper Motor (M6)
operation. When the Hopper Toner Sensor failed to detect presence of toner for more than
the Hopper to When output result of Developing intermittently (to rotate
Assembly 60 sec, it is determined that there has been no replacement of a Toner Container.
the Developing Assembly Toner Sensor (TS2) changes for 1 sec and stop for 1
Assembly. from H to L while the above conditions sec)
are satisfied.
• Toner supply sequence (When "Check the remaining toner." is displayed. )
T-2-31
1. To drive the Bottle Motor (M5) intermittently (to rotate for 3 sec and stop for 2 sec).
*1 The screw of Developing Assembly is driven by the Main Motor; therefore, supplying toner
2. When the Hopper Toner Sensor detects presence of toner, the machine resumes normal
while the Main Drive Motor is not driven causes toner leakage.
operation. When the Hopper Toner Sensor failed to detect presence of toner to drive the
Hopper Motor (M6) intermittently for more than 30 sec, it is determined that there has been
●● Toner level detection no replacement of a Toner Container.
Detection Display Remaining Toner
Prior delivery alarm *1 Empty toner
description error • Replacement when the power is turned ON
The residual EUR: 0% 10% 0% When the Front Cover is opened/closed, the machine determines that a Toner Container has
quantity of the Other:29% been replaced and executes toner supply sequence.
(The value mentioned
toner
above is a residual quantity
in the toner bottle.) • Replacement when the power is turned OFF or the machine is at sleep 2 state
Detection The rotary time for Toner When the Hopper Toner When the Developing The machine executes the toner supply sequence at power-on if there was a toner-out alert
timing Feed Screw in the Sub Sensor (TS1) detected Assembly Toner Sensor
Hopper absence of toner while (TS2) detected toner or toner-out message when the power was turned OFF the last time.
there has been no change absence for 40 seconds.
in value of the sensor
despite a supply operation
for approx. 150 sec.
Message None Check the remaining toner. Replace toner cartridge.
(machine (Continuous printing is (Job is stopped.)
enabled.)
operation)
Alarm Code 10-0020 None None
T-2-32
*1: Lv.1) COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > T-DLV-BK (Set of Bk-toner level displaying alarm)
<Setting value>
0 to 40% [Default EUR: 0, Other: 29]
2-50
2
Technical Explanation > Image Formation System > Controls > Toner Supply Area
2 Technical Explanation > Image Formation System > Controls > Transfer Unit
2-51
■■Transfer Unit ●● Transfer bias/separation static eliminator bias control
DC bias is applied to the Transfer Roller and Static Eliminator.
The Transfer Unit mainly consists of the Transfer Roller and Static Eliminator, and the
Transfer Roller rotates by engaging with the Drum Unit Photosensitive drum
Separation Static
Charge Eliminator Static eliminator
Environment sensor
HVT PCB
Transfer Roller
Transfer charging roller
[3] [2] [1]
F-2-75
Transfer bias Static eliminator bias

control circuit control circuit
DC Controller PCB
F-2-76
[1] Separation static eliminator bias control signal

[2] Transfer bias control signal
●● Transfer bias constant current control

Transfer bias, which is applied to the Transfer Roller, is controlled by the Transfer Bias
Control Circuit in the DC Controller PCB to make constant current.
●● Transfer bias level control

Transfer bias changes output value of transfer bias according to the environment detected by
the Environment Sensor (THU1), paper type, paper width, pickup position, etc.
2-51
2
Technical Explanation > Image Formation System > Controls > Transfer Unit
2 Technical Explanation > Image Formation System > Controls > Waste Toner Container
2-52
●● Cleaning bias control ■■Waste Toner Container
This is a control to apply negatively-charged voltage at last rotation to bring the toner attached
●● Overview
on the Transfer Roller back to the Photosensitive Drum.
The toner, which was not transferred to the paper but attached on the Photosensitive Drum, is
removed by the Cleaning Blade that is in contact with the Photosensitive Drum, and then fed
●● Separation static eliminator bias control
into the Waste Toner Container by the Waste Toner Feed Screw.
Two types of negatively-charged voltages, weak and strong biases, are applied to the
There is a screw for feeding toner in the Waste Toner Container. This screw is driven by the
Static Eliminator according to the print mode and sequence so that the paper is easy to be
Waste Toner Motor and engaged with movement of the Hopper Motor.
separated from the Photosensitive Drum by reducing electrostatic absorption force.
Note that there is no mechanism to detect presence of a Waste Toner Container with
this machine. The Front Cover cannot be closed unless the Waste Toner Container is
■■Change in bias by service mode mechanically installed; therefore, the machine is not driven without having the Waste Toner
Service mode settings include a mode to change the density or improve the separation Container installed.
performance by changing the bias. The following describes the mode which executes bias
control.
Waste Toner Container
Item Overview Setting value Control details
Lv.2) COPIER Set separation priority 0: Off Normal control
>OPTION >FEED- mode (Default)
Waste Toner Feed Screw
SW >SP-SW 1 to 2: On Separation priority mode
(Separation effect improves.)
Lv.2) COPIER Set density at watermark 0: Off Normal control
>OPTION >FNC- setting (Default)
1: On When the watermark is set, Waste Toner
SW>WTM-DENS Full Sensor (PS2)
the density becomes high by
changing the developing /primary
charge DC voltage so that the
watermark is reappeared.
T-2-33
Toner
F-2-77
PS2 Waste toner full level sensor
2-52
2
Technical Explanation > Image Formation System > Controls > Waste Toner Container
2 Technical Explanation > Image Formation System > Service Tasks > Periodical Servicing
2-53
●● Full Detection Service Tasks
Alert for full level of waste
Detection Prior delivery toner *1 (approx. 2000 Full level of waste toner ■■Periodically Replaced Parts
(0% left to reach full level of
description alarm sheets left to reach the full waste toner) None
level of waste toner)
The empty capacity 2% 0%
of the waste toner ■■Consumable Parts
container
No. Parts name Parts number Q'ty Estimated life
Detection timing When output result of the Waste Toner Full When 2,000 sheets are
1 Waste Toner Container FM4-8035 1 100,000 sheets
Sensor (PS2) changes from H to L and the printed since the full level
2 Transfer Roller FM4-6522 1 180,000 sheets
internal counter value exceeds 50,000 sheets. warning.
3 Static Eliminator FM1-A131 1 90,000 sheets
After approx. 2,000 When
T-2-35
output result of the Waste
Toner Full Sensor (PS2)
changes from H to L and the
internal counter value fails None
50,000 sheets. *2
Perform as needed.
Message None Waste toner is near full. Replace the waste toner
(machine (Continuous printing is container.
enabled.) (Host machine is stopped.)
operation)
Alarm Code 11-0010 11-0001
T-2-34
*1: Lv.1) COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW > WT-WARN (Displayt/hide of Waste Toner
Container preparation message)
<Setting value>
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display [Default: 0 ]
*2: Special full level detection
When attaching a Waste Toner Container that has been used by the other machine, or
the counter information is lost for some reason, it is necessary to notify full level before an
alert is given. (The counter shows less than 50,000 although the sensor detects full level of
waste toner) In such a case, it is determined as full level without an alert and the machine
cannot continue printing. Explain the user that there will be no alert when any of the above
is executed.
When replacing it for a new waste toner container after the Waste Toner Full Sensor (PS2)
detected waste toner full, the internal counter for full detection is cleared automatically. The
warning/indication message on the operation panel disappears.
And the parts counter (WST-TNR) of the waste toner container in the service mode is cleared
automatically.
• Lv.1) COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> WST-TNR
2-53
2
Technical Explanation > Image Formation System > Service Tasks > Periodical Servicing
2 Technical Explanation > Fixing System > Overview > Specifications
2-54
Fixing System ■■Specifications

Item Function/method
Overview Fixing method
Fixing speed
On-demand fixing
311 mm/sec (Normal speed : 1/1 speed)
■■Features 134 mm/sec (Low speed : 1/2 speed)
Fixing Heater Ceramic Heater
This machine uses the on-demand fixing method. 230 deg C (plain paper 1/2 mode, when the fixing temperature
Control temperature
at the start of startup control is 60 deg C or less. ) *1
Temperature Control Fixing Main Thermistor, Fixing Sub Thermistor
Fixing Delivery Roller Cleaning control Cleaning sequence control
Separation Guide Edge temperature rising control Down sequence
Fixing Arch Control Arch Sensor
Protection function Fixing Main Thermistor, Fixing Sub Thermistor,
Thermoswitch (Rated operational temperature: 270 +/-10 deg
C)
Nip width Area of 30mm from the edge: 6.5 to 8.2 mm
Center area: 6.5 to 8.0 mm
Difference between front and rear is within 1.0mm.
T-2-36
Fixing Film
*1. The figure varies depending on fixing mode and fixing temperature at the start of Startup
Pressure Roller control.
Fixing Heater Related Service Mode

Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > NIP-CHK (Check of fixing nip width)
Fixing Inlet Guide Fixing Inlet Guide
F-2-78
2-54
2
Technical Explanation > Fixing System > Overview > Specifications
2 Technical Explanation > Fixing System > Overview > Major Components
2-55
■■Major Components Part name Function / method
--- Film Unit A toner image on paper is fixed by applying heat/pressure.
--- Pressure Roller
Fixing Heater / Sub
H1/H2 Ceramic Heater
Heater
Pressure Roller
THM1 Fixing Main Thermistor Engaged with the heater
Temperature control and abnormal temperature rising detection
THM2 Fixing Sub Thermistor Engaged with the heater
Temperature control, abnormal temperature rising detection, edge
temperature-rising/cooling control
TP1 Thermoswitch A kind not engaged with the heater.
AC power supply is blocked at detection of a failure.
Fixing Pressure
PS18 Detection of pressure application/release to the Film Unit
Release Sensor
PS19 Fixing Paper Sensor Jam Detection
T-2-37
Fixing Film Unit
Fixing Pressure
Release Sensor (PS18)
Fixing Paper
Fixing Sub Sensor (PS19)
Thermistor (THM2)
Fixing Main
Thermistor (THM1)
Sub Heater (H2)
Fixing Thermoswitch (TP1)
Fixing Heater (H1)
F-2-79
2-55
2
Technical Explanation > Fixing System > Overview > Major Components
2 Technical Explanation > Fixing System > Controls > Fixing Temperature Control (temperature control)
2-56
Controls ●● Standby Temperature Control
This is a control to pre-heat the Fixing Assembly to reduce time to start printing.
■■Fixing Temperature Control (temperature control) • Flying Start
●● Print Temperature Control

This is a control to increase fixing temperature to the target level and keep it during printing.
• Startup (initial rotation) temperature control
• Print temperature control
• Paper interval temperature control
●● Down Sequence Control

This is a control to prevent fixing failure due to temperature increase at the edge or
temperature decrease. Productivity (throughput) decreases.
• Down sequence when feeding small-size paper
• Down sequence when switching paper size
F-2-80
2-56
2
Technical Explanation > Fixing System > Controls > Fixing Temperature Control (temperature control)
2 Technical Explanation > Fixing System > Controls > Print Temperature Control
2-57
■■Standby Temperature Control ■■Print Temperature Control
Max. 10 sec
F-2-81 F-2-82
●● Flying Start ●● Startup (initial rotation) Temperature Control

Purpose: A fixing temperature is increased to a printable temperature after receiving a command to
To reduce time to print the first sheet (FCOT). start printing.
Starting conditions:
• When opening the Copyboard Cover or ADF while the detected temperature of the ●● Print Temperature Control
Main Thermistor is lower than 100 deg C. To set optimal target temperature to prevent fixing failure or offset, and keep the specified
• When setting the original on the ADF while the detected temperature of the Main target temperature during printing
Thermistor is lower than 100 deg C.
• When receiving the job start demand while the detected temperature of the Main A. Setting the target temperature
Thermistor is lower than 100 deg C. A target temperature is determined according to the paper type/size, time which
• When the Main Power Switch is turned ON or the machine is recovered from sleep elapsed from when fixing temperature control (including standby control) finished the
mode to standby mode while the detected temperature of the Main Thermistor is lower last time, and fixing temperature when startup control started.
than 180 deg C
Control description: B. Temperature control during printing
The temperature control target is set at 177 deg C and the Fixing Motor is controlled When the paper passes through the Fixing Assembly, temperature is controlled to
at half-speed to start operation. The control continues for 10 sec at most until the keep the target temperature (see the next page) according to the detected temperature
machine receives a command to start printing. of the Main Thermistor.
2-57
2
Technical Explanation > Fixing System > Controls > Print Temperature Control
2 Technical Explanation > Fixing System > Controls > Print Temperature Control
2-58
C. Paper interval temperature control COPIER >OPTION >IMG-FIX >TMP-TBL5).
At paper interval where no paper is fed to the Fixing Assembly, the control temperature
is set less than the print control temperature (*1) to prevent temperature rising of the Related Service Mode
• COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FX
Fixing Assembly and save energy.
Lv.1) > TEMPCON2 (Set fixing control temp table: Plain 1, 1/2 Speed)
Lv.1) > FX-S-TMP (Set fixing temperature: Curl correction)
*1. Same as control temperature for plain paper. The temperature is set at -5 deg C or Lv.1) > TMP-TBL2 (Set fixing control temp table: Heavy paper 1)
-15 deg C or -20 deg C according to the paper type. Lv.1) > TMP-TBL4 (Set fixing control temp table: Heavy paper 2)
Lv.1) > TMP-TBL6 (Fixing control temp table: envelope)
Lv.1) > TMP-TBL7 (Set fixing control temp table: Plain 2, 1/1 Speed)
Target temperature during printing Lv.2) > TMP-TB12 (Set fixing control temp table: Plain 2, 1/2 Speed)
The control temperature is determined according to the fixing mode and fixing temperature Lv.2) > TMP-TB13 (Set fixing control temp table: Thin paper, 1/1 Speed)
Lv.2) > TMP-TB14 (Set fixing control temp table: Thin paper, 1/2 Speed)
at the start of Startup control. 11 fixing modes are available according to the selected
Lv.2) > TMP-TB15 (Set fixing control temp table: Plain 1, 2-sided)
pickup cassette and paper type. Lv.2) > TMP-TB16 (Set fixing control temp table: Plain 2, 2-sided)
The following shows an example of control temperature when the fixing temperature at
• COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ
the start of Startup control is 65 deg C or higher and lower than 70 deg C: (Temperature at
Lv.1) > ADJ-PTMG (Adj fix temperature at start of pickup)
standby with 20 deg C room temperature)
• COPIER > OPTION > CUSTOM
Lv.1) > TEMP-TBL (Set fixing control temp table: Plain 1, 1/1 Speed)
Control temperature (deg C)
1-sided print/1st side 2nd side of 2-sided <Setting value>
Fixing mode Setting of 2-sided print print 0 to 2: +15 degrees C
Normal Low Normal Low 3 to 11: +12 to -12 degrees C (increment by 3 degrees C) [Default: 7]
Speed Speed Speed Speed 12 to 14: -15 degrees C
Plain paper 1(64 to 80g/m2) 224 155 224 150
Plain paper 2(81 to 90g/m2) 224 155 224 150
Heavy paper 1 (91 to 105g/m2) 224 155 224 150
Heavy paper 2 (106 to 128g/m2) Paper type --- 175 --- 170
Bond paper --- 175 --- 170
Transparency --- 150 --- ---
Envelope --- 180 --- 175
N1 mode *1 Paper 195 150 185 145
N3 mode *2 type and 180 145 170 140
Thin paper mode *3 service 205 150 200 145
S thin paper mode *4 mode 195 145 190 140
T-2-38
*1 Setting of Plain paper 1/2, and Set "2" (N1 mode) in service mode (Lv.1 COPIER
>OPTION >IMG-FIX >TMP-TBLC).
*2 Setting of Plain paper 1/2, and Set "3" (N3 mode) in service mode (Lv.1 COPIER
>OPTION >IMG-FIX >TMP-TBLC).
*3 Setting of Plain paper 1/2, and Set "1" (Thin paper mode) in service mode (Lv.1
COPIER >OPTION >IMG-FIX >TMP-TBL5).
*4 Setting of Plain paper 1/2, and Set "2" (S thin paper mode) in service mode (Lv.1
2-58
2
Technical Explanation > Fixing System > Controls > Print Temperature Control
2 Technical Explanation > Fixing System > Controls > Down Sequence Control
2-59
■■Down Sequence Control Operation:
Increasing paper interval (to make longer temperature control at a temperature lower
●● Down sequence when feeding small-size paper than that of normal print) to reduce fixing temperature in 4 stages at most.
Purpose:
A5R/B5R
To prevent fixing offset and deterioration of the Fixing Film by controlling temperature Fixing mode Stages LGL A4R LTRR Envelope
EXE-R/STMTR
increase at a non paper feed area at continuous printing of small-size paper (paper Plain paper 1 (64 to 80g/m2) Normal 43/40*1 50/40*1 52/42*1 25 ---
that has smaller than A4R of width-direction length) Plain paper 2 (81 to 90g/m2) 1 --- --- --- 20 ---
Heavy paper 1 (91 to 105g/ 2 --- --- --- 18 ---
Starting conditions: m2) 3 15 15 15 15 ---
Down sequence is performed in a stepwise manner. This is a control to reduce Heavy paper 2 (106 to 128g/ Normal 14 21 21 17 ---
throughput on a step-by-step basis as the detected temperature of the Fixing Sub m2) 1 --- --- --- 14 ---
2 --- --- --- 10 ---
Thermistor reaches the specified temperature or higher as shown in the table below
3 6 6 6 6 ---
for consecutive 400msec during printing.
Bond paper Normal 13 22 22 17 ---
Stages Normal The 1st stage The 2nd stage The 3rd stage 1 --- --- --- 14 ---
A temperature to go 2 --- --- --- 10 ---
224 degrees C 245 degrees C 255 degrees C 260 degrees C
for the next stage 3 6 6 6 6 ---
T-2-39 Transparency Normal --- 17 17 --- ---
1 --- 14 14 --- ---
2 --- 10 10 --- ---
3 --- 6 6 --- ---
Envelope Normal --- --- --- --- 12
1 --- --- --- --- 10
2 --- --- --- --- 8
3 --- --- --- --- 6
T-2-40
*1: The order of description is as follows.

When the product is iR-ADV 500/400 series.
2-59
2
Technical Explanation > Fixing System > Controls > Down Sequence Control
2 Technical Explanation > Fixing System > Controls > Down Sequence Control
2-60
Termination condition: ●● Down sequence when switching paper size
When the machine detects 175 degrees C or lower for consecutive 400 msec after Purpose:
reaching the 3rd stage, the machine is recovered to move to the 1st stage. When feeding a sheet with a wider width than a preceding sheet during continuous
printing, temperature at the non paper-feed area of the preceding sheet increases,
Normal
and it can cause fixing offset and wrinkles when feeding the succeeding sheet. This
245deg C,400msec
down sequence controls temperature increase at the non paper feed area.
1st Step Non-feed area
255deg C,400msec
Return
2st Step 210deg C,400msec
260deg C,400msec
3st Step
Film
F-2-83

• COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FX
Lv.1) > FIX-TEMP (Setting of down sequence mode)
0 to 4 Non-feed area
F-2-84
<Setting value>
Starting conditions:
0: +20 deg C
1: +10 deg C When the paper is switched to a wider paper than the preceding sheet during printing,
2: 0 deg C [default: 2] the detected temperature of the Fixing Sub Thermistor is higher than 210 deg C (*1).
3: -10 deg C
4: -20 deg C
Operation:
This is a control to stop pickup of the succeeding sheet and power distribution to the
Fixing Heater to reduce fixing temperature.
Termination condition:
When detected temperature of the Fixing Sub Thermistor is 170 deg C or lower (*1).
*1. The temperature differs according to the service mode settings.
2-60
2
Technical Explanation > Fixing System > Controls > Down Sequence Control
2 Technical Explanation > Fixing System > Controls > Change in fixing performance by service mode
2-61
■■Change in fixing performance by service mode Service mode Outline Setting value Fixing temperature control
/ Throughput
Changing the control temperature or throughput affects fixing performance in some modes Lv.2) Set fixing paper special 0: OFF Normal temperature control
settings in service mode. The following describes the mode which affects fixing performance. COPIER processing mode (default) (plain paper mode control)
>OPTION >IMG-
FIX >FIX-PR 1: ON Normal temperature control
Service mode Outline Setting value Fixing temperature control
(plain paper mode control)
/ Throughput The electrostatic offset is
Lv.1) To set the control 0: Auto Change the normal improved by increasing the
COPIER temperature table to the temperature control and fixing filb bias, and electrical
N1 mode or the N3 mode N1 mode according to the effect of the inside between
>OPTION >IMG-
so that the paper curl is environment (temperature/ the paper become small.
FIX >TMP-TBLC reduced when select the: humidity) To prevent of discharge
plain paper 1, plain paper1: OFF Normal temperature control between the fixing film unit
2, recycled paper, color (default) (plain paper mode control) and pressure roller, and the
paper, prepunched paper. (Fixing grade priority) static charge of the pressure
2: N1 mode with N1 mode temperature roller.
plain paper 1/2 control T-2-41
(Target temperature
becomes low.)
3: N3 mode with N3 mode temperature
plain paper 1/2 control
(Target temperature
becomes moreover
low.)
Lv.1) To set the control 0: OFF Normal temperature control
COPIER temperature table for the (default) (plain paper mode control)
plain paper 1 and plain 1: thin paper mode Thin paper mode
>OPTION >IMG-
paper 2 to the thin paper (Fixing grade priority)
FIX >TMP-TBL5 mode or the S-thin paper 2: S-thin paper mode S-thin paper mode
mode. (Fixing grade priority)
Lv.2) To lower the fixing 0: OFF This is a control to set
COPIER temperature for the paper (default) the pickup permission
feed start at the paper temperature at 210* deg
>OPTION >IMG-
size change. C and pickup recovery
SPD >PSP-PR1 The priority is given to the temperature at 170*
productivity so that the deg C. (*: Detction
fixing offset may occur. temperature of sub
thermistor)
1: ON This is a control to set
(Productivity priority) the pickup permission
temperature at 230* deg
C and pickup recovery
temperature at 190* deg C.
(*: Detction temperature of
sub thermistor)
2-61
2
Technical Explanation > Fixing System > Controls > Change in fixing performance by service mode
2 Technical Explanation > Fixing System > Controls > Pre-fixing arch level control
2-62
■■Pre-fixing arch level control Starting conditions:
This control is performed every time the paper is fed.
Purpose:
Constantly creating an optimal arch between the transfer and fixing areas prevents a
Operation:
shock, which occurs when the paper's trailing edge passes through the Registration
The Arch Sensor detects a paper arch between the transfer nip and fixing nip to
Roller, and obtains an optimal image.
change the drive speed of the Fixing Motor.
1) When the paper's leading edge goes over 35mm from the Transfer Roller, drive speed
of the Fixing Motor is reduced by 3.1% against the process speed. The reduced speed
is maintained until the paper creates an arch and the Arch Sensor is turned ON.
Fixing Film
Pressure Roller
2) After the Arch Sensor has been detected ON for consecutive 50msec or longer,
drive speed of the Fixing Motor is increased by 0.8% against the process speed. The
increased speed is maintained until the paper arch disappears and the Arch Sensor is
turned OFF.
Sensor: OFF
3) After the Arch Sensor has been detected OFF for consecutive 50msec or longer, drive
speed of the Fixing Motor is reduced by 3.1% against the process speed. The reduced
Photosensitive Drum speed is maintained until the paper creates an arch and the Arch Sensor is turned ON.
4) Repeat steps 2) and 3). When the paper's trailing edge reaches at 10mm before
the Transfer Roller, drive speed of the Fixing Motor is increased by 0.8% against the
process speed.
5) Go back to step 1) in the case of continuous printing. The machine goes to the last
Arch Sensor (PS9)
rotation operation in the case of 1 sheet print.
Transfer Roller
Registration Roller
Sensor: ON
F-2-85
2-62
2
Technical Explanation > Fixing System > Controls > Pre-fixing arch level control
2 Technical Explanation > Fixing System > Service Tasks > Periodical Servicing
2-63
■■Protection function Service Tasks
Clearing of
Code Description
error ■■Periodically Replaced Parts
E000 Fixing Assembly low temperature error
None.
0001 When the detected temperature of the Fixing Main Thermistor (THM1) fails Required
to reach the specified temperature at temperature rising control.
E001 Fixing Assembly high temperature error ■■Consumable Parts
0000 When the Fixing Main Thermistor (THM1) detects 250 deg C or higher for Required
consecutive 200msec or longer. No. Parts name Parts number Q'ty Estimated life
0001 When the hardware circuit detects overheating of the Fixing Main Required Fixing Assembly (120V) FM1-A680 1 160,000 sheets
1
Thermistor (THM1) or Fixing Sub Thermistor (THM2) for 30msec or longer. Fixing Assembly (230V) FM1-A681 1 160,000 sheets
0002 When the Fixing Sub Thermistor (THM2) detects 295 deg C or higher for Required T-2-43
consecutive 200msec or longer.
E002 Fixing Assembly temperature rise error
0000 1. When the Fixing Main Thermistor (THM1) detected a temperature lower Required None.
than 115 deg C for consecutive 400msec or longer after 6 seconds that
Perform as needed.
the Fixing Main Thermistor (THM1) detected 100 deg C.
2. When the Fixing Main Thermistor (THM1) detected a temperature lower
than 150 deg C for consecutive 400msec or longer after 6.0 seconds that
the Fixing Main Thermistor (THM1) detected 140 deg C.
E003 Fixing Assembly temperature decrease error
0000 1. The Fixing Main Thermistor (THM1) detected the temperature of lower Required
than 80 deg C for 200 msec or longer.
2. The Fixing Sub Thermistor (THM2) detected the temperature of lower
than 60 deg C for 200 msec or longer.
E004 Thermistor disconnection detection error
0000 When removal of the connector is detected for consecutive 30msec. Not required
E014 Error in rotation of Fixing Motor (M1)
0001 Detection is performed every 100msec since the start of drive and there Not required
has been no lock signal for 2sec.
0002 Detection is performed every 100msec during the drive (after the lock Not required
detection) and the lock signal has not detected for 5 times consecutively (in
500msec).
0003 When the Fixing Pressure Release Sensor never detected pressure Not required
release during the 3 seconds while the fixing pressure was released.
0004 When the Fixing Pressure Release Sensor never detected pressure during Not required
the 3 seconds while the fixing pressure was applied.
E261 Error in zero cross signal
0000 When the relay is ON, the zero cross signal failed to be detected for Not required
500msec or longer.
*When the same status is detected again despite an error retry.
T-2-42

• COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR
Lv.1) > ERR (Clear of error code)
2-63
2
Technical Explanation > Fixing System > Service Tasks > Periodical Servicing
2 Technical Explanation > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Parts Configuration
2-64
Pickup / Feed System ■■Parts Configuration

●● Rollers Layout drawing
Overview
■■Specifications
Item Description
Paper storage method Front-loading method
[1]
Pickup method Cassette Retard separation
Multi-purpose Tray Pad separation
Stacking capacity Cassette 550 sheets (80g/m2), 650 sheets (64g/m2) [2]
Multi-purpose Tray 100 sheets (80g/m2), 110 sheets (64g/m2)
Paper feed reference Center reference
[3]
Paper size Cassette Width: 139.7mm to 216mm
Length: 210mm to 355.6mm [4]
A4, A5, B5, LGL, LTR, STMT, EXEC, 16K, special
standard-size*1, Envelope (No.10 (COM10), ISO-C5, [5]
Monarch, DL, Nagagata 3, Yougatanaga 3)*4
[6]
Multi-purpose Tray Width: 99mm to 216mm
Length: 139.7mm to 355.6mm (Up to 630mm long length [7]
paper can be supported.*2)
[8]
A4, A5, B5, LGL, LTR, STMT, EXEC, 16K, Envelope
(No.10 (COM10), ISO-C5, Monarch, DL, Nagagata 3, [9]
Yougatanaga 3)
Paper weight Cassette 64 to 105g/m2 [10]
Multi-purpose Tray 64 to 128g/m2
Paper size Cassette Auto switching [11]
switching Multi-purpose Tray Manual switching
Supported size for Cassette 210mm to 355.6mm (105g/m2) *3
2-sided print Multi-purpose Tray 210mm to 355.6mm (105g/m2) *3 [16] [15] [14] [13] [12]
2-sided print method Through-pass duplex F-2-86
T-2-44
[1] Reverse Roller [9] Duplex Feed Roller 2
*1: "Setting method when the size detection patterns are overlapped"(page 2-68). [2] Delivery Roller [10] Registration Roller
*2: Long length paper is supported. [3] Fixing Outlet Roller [11] Vertical Path Roller
[4] Duplex Feed Roller 1 [12] Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller
To make a print with long length paper, settings are required in service mode and applicable
[5] Pressure Roller [13] Multi-purpose Tray Pullout Roller
mode.(Up to 630mm image supported.)
[6] Fixing Roller [14] Cassette Separation Roller
Lv.2) COPIER > OPTION > USER > MF-LG-ST >1 [7] Drum [15] Cassette Feed Roller
Copying using long length paper is not available with this machine. [8] Transfer Roller [16] Cassette Pickup Roller
*3: Custom paper size is not supported.
*4: Only when the optional envelope cassette is installed in the 2nd cassette.
2-64
2
Technical Explanation > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Parts Configuration
2 Technical Explanation > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Parts Configuration
2-65
●● Sensors Layout Drawing ●● Route of Drive
M2 M1
PS6
PS4
M4
PS5
PS19 SL2
M7
PS9
PS8
PS11
PS12 CL1
SL3
PS20
SW2 PS17 PS16 PS15 PS14 PS13 PS7

F-2-87
PS4 Delivery Paper Full Sensor PS13 Cassette Pickup Sensor

PS5 Delivery Sensor PS14 Cassette Lifting Plate Sensor M9 M8 SL1
PS6 Reverse Sensor PS15 Cassette Paper Sensor
F-2-88
PS7 Multi-purpose Tray Paper Sensor PS16 Cassette Paper Level Sensor A
M1 Fixing Motor CL1 Registration Clutch
PS8 Duplex Feed Sensor PS17 Cassette Paper Level Sensor B
M2 Main Motor SL1 Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Solenoid
PS9 Arch Sensor PS19 Fixing Paper Sensor
M4 Reverse Feed Motor SL2 Reverse Feed Solenoid
PS11 Registration Sensor PS20 Transparency Sensor
M7 Duplex Feed Motor SL3 Cassette Pickup Solenoid
PS12 Pre-Registration Sensor SW2 Cassette Size Detection Switch
M8 Pickup Motor
M9 Lifter Motor
NOTE:
Transparency detection of this machine is performed by the Transparency Sensor (PS20)
which is a flag-type sensor.
Uneven speed at the time of transparency feed is detected to judge whether it is
transparency.
2-65
2
Technical Explanation > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Parts Configuration
2 Technical Explanation > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Paper Path
2-66
■■Paper Path
Reversing Point
Delivery Point
Pickup From Cassette

Pickup From
Manual Feeder
F-2-89
2-66
2
Technical Explanation > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Paper Path
2 Technical Explanation > Pickup / Feed System > Controls > Cassette Pickup Assembly
2-67
Controls ■■Cassette Pickup Assembly
■■Overview ●● Overview
Paper inside a cassette is lifted up by the Lifting Plate.
When pickup takes place, the Cassette Pickup Solenoid (SL1) is turned ON so that the
Cassette Pickup Roller is moved down. When the Cassette Pickup Roller comes in contact
with the surface of paper, the paper is picked up by rotation of the roller.
Reverse/Duplex Only a single paper picked up is moved to the feed path by the Cassette Feed Roller and the
Assembly Cassette Separation Roller, and moved as far as the Registration Roller by the Vertical Path
Roller.
If the Cassette Pickup Sensor (PS13) is ON when starting pickup (in the case that the
Delivery succeeding paper is also picked up when a paper is picked up and fed), the feed speed is
Assembly
decreased.
The Vertical Path Roller and Cassette Pickup Roller and Cassette Feed Roller and Cassette
Separation Roller are driven by the Cassette Pickup Motor (M8), and the Lifting Plate is
driven by the Lifter Motor (M9).
Fixing/Registration
Assembly [1] SL1 PS13
[4]
Multi-Purpose Tray
Pickup Assembly
[2]
[3]
Cassette Pickup
Assembly
F-2-90
[5] M9 M8
Area Detection/Control
Cassette Pickup Paper Level Detection Control Pickup Retry Control F-2-91
Assembly Paper Detection Control Paper Size Detection Control [1] Cassette Pickup Roller [4] Vertical Path Roller
Lifter Control - [2] Cassette Feed Roller [5] Lifting Plate
[3] Cassette Separation Roller
Multi-purpose Tray Paper Detection Pickup Retry Control
Pickup Assembly Paper Size Detection -
Fixing/Registration Registration Control Size Mismatch Detection Control ●● Pickup Retry Control
Assembly
Delivery Assembly Delivery Acceleration Control Delivery Full Detection If the Pre-Registration Sensor (PS12) is not turned ON within a specified period of time after
Reverse/Duplex Reverse Flapper Operation Duplex Re-pickup Control the start of pickup operation, operation of the Cassette Pickup Motor (M8) and the Cassette
Assembly Duplex Reverse Control Duplex Circulation Pickup Solenoid (SL3) is suspended once, and the pickup operation is executed again. If
Jam Detection List of Jam Codes Forcible Paper Feed Control the Pre-Registration Sensor (PS12) is not turned ON after re-pickup operation, a delay jam is
T-2-45
notified.
2-67
2
Technical Explanation > Pickup / Feed System > Controls > Cassette Pickup Assembly
2-68
In addition, presence of the cassette is detected when the size switch is pushed. (If no switch
●● Paper Size Detection Control is pushed, it is judged as no cassette.)
Paper size in a cassette is automatically detected by the "Cassette Size Switch". Paper size
in a cassette is automatically detected by adjusting the Guide Plate position. Rear Guide Plate
By shifting the Guide Plate, concavo-convex area of the Cassette Size Dial is switched
and the Cassette Size Switch at the printer side is switched. The switch consists of 4
microswitches, and length and width are detected in accordance with the combination of
ON/OFF. As long as standard size paper, it can be used for both AB configuration and inch
configuration. However, distinction between A5-R and STMT-R (*) should be specified
manually on the check screen. EXEC-R and 16K-R are decided automatically by model
setting.
*: The user can register paper distinction of A5-R and STMT-R by a user mode.
Cassette Size
[Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > [Paper Settings] > [Distinguishing A5 and STMT Switch (SW2)
Paper] > [A5] or [STMT]
Rear
Detection
Rink
F-2-93
Setting method when the size detection patterns are overlapped
Method to distinguish between A5-R and STMT-R is specified by the user settings.
SW2 Method to distinguish the special paper is specified by the user settings.
Setting sizes are as follows.
Related service mode

F-2-92 Lv.1) COPIER > OPTION > CST > CSTX-UY (Set the overseas special paper category used
Length Detection in Cassette)
Size Length 1 2 3 4 X indicates the cassette number (1 to 4), and Y indicates size category (1/2/4).
A5-R 210.0 - - ON ON
Set "1" in service mode (Lv.1 COPIER >OPTION >CST >U1/2/4-NAME) to display the paper
STMT-R 215.9 - - ON ON
B5-R 257.0 ON - - - type on UI.
EXEC-R 267.0 ON ON - - U sizes Settings
16K-R 270.0 ON ON - - U1 24: FLSC, 25: A-FLS, 26: OFI, 34: G-LGL, 37: M-OFI, 42: FA4, 0: Default
LTR-R 279.4 - ON ON - U2 23: K-LGL-R, 32: G-LTRR, 41: 16K-R, 44: EXEC-R, 0: Default
A4-R 297.0 ON - ON ON U4 21: LGL (Cassette 2/4 only), 28: B-OFI, 0: Default
LGL 355.6 - - ON - T-2-47
(No cassette) - - - - -
T-2-46
2-68
2
2-69
●● Paper Level Detection Control If the paper is full
Paper level inside the cassette is detected by the sensors shown in the following table.
Cassette Paper Cassette Paper Level Sensor A
Level Sensor B Paper
Cassette Paper Cassette Paper Cassette Paper Display on
Level Sensor A Level Sensor B Sensor Paper level the Control
(PS16) (PS17) (PS15) Panel
OFF OFF OFF 100% to 50%
Approx. 50% to approx. 50

ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
sheets
If the paper is approx.half
ON ON OFF Approx. 50 sheets or less Paper
ON ON ON No papers Level Sensor B
T-2-48
Cassette Paper Cassette Paper

Level Sensor A (PS16) Sensor (PS15)
Cassette Paper OFF ON

Level Sensor B (PS17) Paper Flag
If the paper is a little Paper
Level Sensor B
Tray
ON ON Cassette Paper Sensor

Flag
If the paper is absent Paper Tray

Paper Level Flag
Lifter Gear
F-2-95
F-2-94
2-69
2
2-70
●● Paper Detection Control ●● Lifter Control
After the Cassette Lifting Plate Detection Sensor (PS14) is turned ON, the Cassette Paper When Cassette is set
Sensor (PS15) detects presence/absence of paper. When the Cassette Paper Sensor (PS15) The Lifting Plate is raised until the Cassette Lifting Plate Detection Sensor (PS14) is turned
is ON, absence of paper is notified. ON.
In addition, if the Cassette Lifting Plate Detection Sensor (PS14) is not turned ON even
During pickup
raising the Lifter for 3 seconds, absence of paper is notified.
The behavior is determined in accordance with the detection when the Cassette Pickup
Paper Flag Solenoid (SL3) is turned ON and the detection by the Cassette Lifting Plate Detection Sensor
PS15 (PS14) executed 100msec. later.
Lifting Plate Flag
M9 100msec. later after Cassette Pickup Solenoid (SL3) is turned ON
PS14
ON OFF
When the Cassette ON - If the same detection continues for 5 consecutive
Lifter Pickup Solenoid (SL3) sheets, the Lifting Plate is raised until the Cassette
is turned ON Lifting Plate Detection Sensor (PS14) is turned ON.
Lifting Plate OFF - Raising the Lifting Plate immediately until the Cassette
Lifting Plate Detection Sensor (PS14) is turned ON.
T-2-49
SL3 Lifting Plate Flag

M9 PS14
Lifter
Lifting Plate
F-2-96
F-2-97
2-70
2
2 Technical Explanation > Pickup / Feed System > Controls > Fixing/Registration Assembly
2-71
■■Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Assembly ■■Fixing/Registration Assembly
●● Overview ●● Registration Control
Paper on the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Tray of the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit is pushed The Registration Roller is driven by the Main Motor (M2). There is the Registration Clutch
against the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller by the Lifting Plate, and only a single sheet (CL1) between the Registration Roller and the Main Motor, and it controls ON/OFF of the
of paper is separated and fed by the work of the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller and the Registration Roller to align the paper with the image on the drum at the specified registration.
Separation Pad. In addition, the speed is decreased right before a paper hits the Registration Roller so that
hitting sound is alleviated (speed is not decreased when picking up from the Cassette 1 of iR-
M8 SL1
ADV 400).
Multi-purpose
Tray Pickup Roller Side Guide
Multi-purpose Tray
Separation Pad
Pickup Guide Plate M2 CL1

Pressure Spring
Multi-purpose Tray
Manual Feeder Paper Detection

Paper Sensor (PS7) Lever Registration Roller
F-2-98
●● Pickup Retry Control F-2-99
If the Pre-Registration Sensor (PS12) is not turned ON within the specified period of time
after the start of pickup operation, detection by the Multi-purpose Tray Paper Sensor (PS7) is
referred.
• When Multi-purpose Tray Paper Sensor (PS7) is ON:
Execute the pickup operation again. If the Pre-Registration Sensor (PS12) is not turned ON
after the start of re-pickup operation, a delay jam is notified.
• When Multi-purpose Tray Paper Sensor (PS7) is OFF:
Terminate the pickup operation.
●● Paper Detection
Presence/absence of paper is detected by the Multi-purpose Tray Paper Sensor (PS7).
When absence of paper is detected but the same size and same type of papers exist in
another paper source, auto cassette change is executed.
2-71
2
Technical Explanation > Pickup / Feed System > Controls > Fixing/Registration Assembly
2 Technical Explanation > Pickup / Feed System > Controls > Delivery Assembly
2-72
●● Size Mismatch Detection Control ■■Delivery Assembly
Whether the size is mismatched is determined by paper length.
●● Delivery Acceleration Control
The time a paper passes through the Registration Sensor (PS11) is converted into distance.
Since elasticity of bond paper is low, delivery speed is increased when feeding the bond
Compared with the paper size (specified by the user in case of the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup
paper to improve the stackability.
Tray) detected by the Cassette Size Detection Switch (SW2), if the measured distance is
Condition for acceleration: When the Finisher is not installed, and the bond paper is set.
shorter than the specified distance (16mm), it is judged that the size is mismatched.
Timing for acceleration: When the trailing edge of paper passes through the Fixing Paper
Priority of the size mismatch detection control is lower than other controls. In addition, due to
Sensor (PS19).
the behavioral error of paper, the measured distance has a margin of error of approx. +6mm.
Timing to return the speed: When the Registration Clutch (CL1) is turned ON for the
succeeding paper.
Paper size mismatch cannot be detected with the following combinations because the
difference in paper size is small. Bond Paper M1 Delivery Roller
• A4-R, LTR-R
• A5-R, STMT-R
• B5-R, EXEC-R, 16K-R
In case of envelope, paper size mismatch is not detected (because detection by the
Registration Sensor (PS11) is not stable when feeding the envelope). Fixing Outlet Roller
PS19 Delivery Speed

Increased Position
Pressure Roller
F-2-100
●● Delivery Full Detection

If the Delivery Paper Full Sensor (PS4) is ON for a specified period of time, it is notified to the
Main Controller PCB. After the notification, printing stops.
Detection Lever
PS4
Delivery Point
F-2-101
2-72
2
Technical Explanation > Pickup / Feed System > Controls > Delivery Assembly
2 Technical Explanation > Pickup / Feed System > Controls > Reverse/Duplex Assembly
2-73
■■Reverse/Duplex Assembly ●● Duplex Re-pickup Control
If it is possible to secure necessary paper interval by estimating the paper interval with the
●● Reverse Flapper Operation
preceding paper when the Duplex Feed Sensor (PS8) is ON, the paper is re-picked up to the
The Reverse Flapper behaves in accordance with the Reverse Feed Solenoid (SL2).
pre-registration.
• When Reverse Feed Solenoid (SL2) is OFF: Feed to the Delivery Path
If the necessary paper interval cannot be secured, the paper stays at the duplex standby
• When Reverse Feed Solenoid (SL2) is ON: Feed to the Reverse Path
position (58mm downstream from the Duplex Lower Roller). After recalculated standby time
Reverse Flapper has passed, re-pickup is executed.
M7
SL2
Duplex feed roller 1
F-2-102
●● Duplex Reverse Control

Paper is reversed outside the machine using the Reverse Path. Duplex feed roller 2
The paper is fed to the duplex reverse stop position (it stops at 25mm from the trailing edge PS8
of paper) by using the Reverse Sensor (PS6) as a reference. Then, reverse operation starts.
Reverse Roller M4 Duplex Reverse Stop Position
PS6 58 mm
Duplex Standby Position
25 mm F-2-104
●● Duplex Circulation
The following shows the number of circulating sheets at the 2-sided print.
Length in paper feed direction Number of circulating sheets
317.5 mm less 3
317.5 mm or more 2
T-2-50
F-2-103
2-73
2
Technical Explanation > Pickup / Feed System > Controls > Reverse/Duplex Assembly
2 Technical Explanation > Pickup / Feed System > Controls > Jam Detection
2-74
■■Jam Detection ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name Sensor ID
3 FF03 Sequence jam*2 - -
●● List of Jam Codes 3 FF04 Sequence jam*2 - -
A jam code consists of 4 alphanumeric characters. 3 FF05 Sequence jam*2 - -
The upper 2 digits indicate the jam type, and the lower 2 digits indicate the sensor that 3 FF06 Sequence jam*2 - -
detected a jam.
T-2-51
ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name Sensor ID
*1: The state is recovered by opening and closing the Door, or turning OFF and then ON the
3 0101 Delay Pre-Registration Sensor PS12
3 0201 Stationary Pre-Registration Sensor PS12 power supply.
3 0A01 Power-on Pre-Registration Sensor PS12 If the same jam is detected regardless of the operation above, the error code is displayed.
3 0102 Delay Cassette 2 Retry Sensor (Option) PS103 *2: The state is recovered by opening and closing the Door, or turning OFF and then ON the
3 0202 Stationary Cassette 2 Retry Sensor (Option) PS103 power supply.
3 0A02 Power-on Cassette 2 Retry Sensor (Option) PS103
3 0103 Delay Cassette 3 Retry Sensor (Option) PS203
3 0203 Stationary Cassette 3 Retry Sensor (Option) PS203
●● Forcible Paper Feed Control
3 0A03 Power-on Cassette 3 Retry Sensor (Option) PS203 If the Finisher is installed when a jam occurs at the Reverse Assembly, jammed papers are
3 0104 Delay Cassette 4 Retry Sensor (Option) PS303 forcibly fed because they cannot be seen. If the Reverse Paper Sensor (PS6) is ON, the
3 0204 Stationary Cassette 4 Retry Sensor (Option) PS303 Reverse Motor (M4) is driven for 100mm when opening/closing the door.
3 0A04 Power-on Cassette 4 Retry Sensor (Option) PS303
3 0105 Delay Registration Sensor PS11 Reverse Roller M4
3 0205 Stationary Registration Sensor PS11
3 0A05 Power-on Registration Sensor PS11 PS6
3 0107 Delay Fixing Paper Sensor PS19 100 mm
3 0207 Stationary Fixing Paper Sensor PS19
3 0A07 Power-on Fixing Paper Sensor PS19
3 0108 Delay Delivery Sensor PS5
3 0208 Stationary Delivery Sensor PS5
3 0A08 Power-on Delivery Sensor PS5
3 010A Delay Reverse Sensor PS6
3 020A Stationary Reverse Sensor PS6
3 0A0A Power-on Reverse Sensor PS6
3 010B Delay Transparency Sensor PS20
3 020B Stationary Transparency Sensor PS20 F-2-105
3 0A0B Power-on Transparency Sensor PS20
3 010D Delay Duplex Feed Sensor PS8
3 020D Stationary Duplex Feed Sensor PS8
3 0A0D Power-on Duplex Feed Sensor PS8
3 0B00 Door open - -
3 0CA0 Sequence jam*2 - -
3 0CF1 Error*1 - -
3 0D91 Size Error - -
2-74
2
Technical Explanation > Pickup / Feed System > Controls > Jam Detection
2 Technical Explanation > Pickup / Feed System > Work of Service > Periodically Servicing
2-75
Work of Service
None
■■Consumables
No. Item Parts No. Q'ty Life Remarks
1 Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller FL2-3897 1 150,000 sheets Replace with Multi-
purpose Tray
Separation Pad
2 Multi-purpose Tray Separation Pad FL3-4890 1 150,000 sheets Replace with Multi-
purpose Tray Pickup
Roller
3 Cassette Feed Roller (Except CHN) FC6-7083 1 80,000 sheets Replace with Cassette
Cassette Feed Roller (CHN) FC7-9502 Separation Roller.
4 Cassette Separation Roller (Except FC6-6661 1 80,000 sheets Replace with Cassette
CHN) Feed Roller.
Cassette Separation Roller (CHN) FE3-1295
5 Cassette Pickup Idler Gear (For FU0-0043 1 80,000 sheets
China only)
T-2-52
■■Periodically Servicing
None
2-75
2
Technical Explanation > Pickup / Feed System > Work of Service > Periodically Servicing
2 Technical Explanation > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Software counter
2-76
External Auxiliary System Target Display number of each counter (in service mode) / item Country
Code
Counter 1
Counter 2
Counter 3
Counter 4
Counter 5
Counter 6
Controls
■■Software counter UL model Total 2 Copy *1 *1 *1 *1 US
Count-up timing differs depending on the following conditions: Type 2 (Total 2)
• Print mode (1-sided/2nd side of 2-sided print, 1st side of 2-sided print) (New method)
• Differs depending on the delivery position (Staple Finisher) 102 202 000 000 000 000
General model Total 1 Copy *1 *1 *1 *1 SG/KR/
Print mode (Total 1) CN/TH/
1-sided print/2nd side of
Delivery position 1st side of 2-sided print 101 201 000 000 000 000 VN
2-sided print
Count-up timing UK model Total Scan Print *1 *1 *1 GB
Host machine Delivery Tray Delivery Sensor (PS5) Duplex Feed Sensor (PS8) Type1 (Black/ (Total 1) (Total 1)
Staple Finisher Delivery Sensor (S2) (Conventional Small)
T-2-53 method)
113 501 301 000 000 000
Default counters for each country (model) are listed below.
240V Total 1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 GB
Target Display number of each counter (in service mode) / item Country UK model
Code Type 2
Counter 1
Counter 2
Counter 3
Counter 4
Counter 5
Counter 6
(New method) 101 000 000 000 000 000
CA model Total 1 Copy *1 *1 *1 *1 AU
(Total 1)
JP model Total 1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 JP
101 201 000 000 000 000
Type1 FRN model Total Scan Print *1 *1 *1 FR
(Conventional Type1 (Black/ (Total 1) (Total 1)
method) (Conventional
101 000 000 000 000 000 Small)
JP model Total 2 Copy Total A 2 *1 *1 *1 JP method)
Type 2 113 501 301 000 000 000
(Total 2)
(New method) FRN model Total 1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 FR
102 202 127 000 000 000 Type 2
Taiwan model Total 1 Copy *1 *1 *1 *1 TW (New method)
101 000 000 000 000 000
(Total 1)
GER model Total Scan Print *1 *1 *1 DE
101 201 000 000 000 000 Type1 (Black/ (Total 1) (Total 1)
UL model Total 1 Copy *1 *1 *1 *1 US (Conventional Small)
Type1 (Total 1) method)
113 501 301 000 000 000
(Conventional
GER model Total 1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 DE
method) 101 201 000 000 000 000 Type 2 101 000 000 000 000 000
(New method)
2-76
2
Technical Explanation > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Software counter
2 Technical Explanation > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Software counter
2-77
Target Display number of each counter (in service mode) / item Country <Explanation of the list>
Code • Large: Large size paper (when paper length exceeds 324 mm in paper feed direction)
Counter 1
Counter 2
Counter 3
Counter 4
Counter 5
Counter 6
• Small: Small size paper (when paper length is 324 mm or less in paper feed direction)
• Total: Copy + Print; 1 count up
• 2-Sided: 1 count up when auto 2-sided copy
AMS model Total Scan Print *1 *1 *1 ES/SE/ • Country code change of CONFIG is executed from COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW >
Type1 (Black/ (Total 1) (Total 1) PT/NO/ CONFIG.
(Conventional Small) DK/FI/ • Three-digit number in the counter column shows the setting value of the following service
method) PL/HU/ mode items.
CZ/SI/ (Lv.1) COPIER > OPTION > USER > COUNTER 1 to 6
GR/EE/ • COUNTER2 to 6 can be changed from the service mode (COPIER > OPTION > USER).
RU/NL/ • The change of the counter display type (New method/Conventional method) can be
113 501 301 000 000 000 SK/RO/ changed from the service mode (COPIER > OPTION > USER> CNT-SW).
HR/BG/ *1: Nothing is displayed as default. However, you can change this setting from the service
TR mode.
AMS model Total 1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 ES/SE/
Type 2 101 000 000 000 000 000 PT/NO/
(New method) DK/FI/
PL/HU/
CZ/SI/
GR/EE/
RU/NL/
SK/RO/
HR/BG/
TR
ITA model Total Scan Print *1 *1 *1 IT
Type1 (Black/ (Total 1) (Total 1)
(Conventional Small)
method)
113 501 301 000 000 000
ITA model Total 1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 IT
Type 2
101 000 000 000 000 000
(New method)
T-2-54
2-77
2
Technical Explanation > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Software counter
2 Technical Explanation > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Fan
2-78
■■Fan WUP STBY INI PTINT LSTR STBY JAM
/ERROR
Delivery Cooling Fan (Rear)
●● Overview (FM1)
Delivery Cooling Fan (Center)
Location of Fans (FM2)
*1
Delivery Cooling Fan (Front)

FM2 (FM3)
FM9 FM6 Power Supply Cooling Fan
(FM4) Controller control
Heat Exhaust Fan (Front)
(FM5)
*2
Heat Exhaust Fan (Rear)
(FM6)
Delivery Cooling Fan (Front)
(FM7)
*3
Developing Cooling Fan (Rear)
(FM8)
FM1
Main Controller Cooling Fan
FM5 Controller control
(FM9)
: Full-speed : 1/2-speed
F-2-107
*1: Fan speed is switched between half speed and full speed depending on the fixing
FM4 FM3
FM8 temperature.
FM7 *2: Upper (gray) band: sequence at 1-sided, lower (black) band: sequence at 2-sided print
*3: Fan is not driven at 1-sided print.
It is driven at full speed from the 2nd side at 2-sided print.
F-2-106
No. Name Function Error codes

FM1 Delivery Cooling Fan (Rear) To cool the Delivery Assembly E822-0004,E822-0005
FM2 Delivery Cooling Fan (Center) To cool the Delivery Assembly E822-0002,E822-0003
FM3 Delivery Cooling Fan (Front) To cool the Delivery Assembly E822-0000,E822-0001
FM4 Power Supply Cooling Fan To cool power supply E804-0000
FM5 Heat Exhaust Fan (Front) To exhaust heat in the machine E805-0002,E805-0003
FM6 Heat Exhaust Fan (Rear) To exhaust heat in the machine E805-0000,E805-0001
FM7 Developing Cooling Fan (Front) To cool the Developing E820-0000,E820-0001
Assembly and laser
FM8 Developing Cooling Fan (Rear) To cool the Developing E820-0002,E820-0003
Assembly and laser
FM9 Main Controller Cooling Fan To cool the Main Controller E881-0001
T-2-55
2-78
2
Technical Explanation > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Fan
2 Technical Explanation > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Power supply
2-79
■■Power supply ●● Power supply connection with the options
Reader/ADF
●● Internal power supply Wiring inside
the machine
+3.3V
Reader Controller PCB +24VR CIS
+24VR Main Switch Inner Finisher

Control Panel Unit
Interlock (SW1)
+24VR
+24VR
+3.3V
+5VR
Switch (SW3)
+12V
+3.3V
+5VC
AC Driver PCB +12V +12V
+12V +12V
+3.3V +5VC
+24V Regulator
12/24V Power Regulator Drawer
Supply PCB Main Controller PCB Connector
+5VR
+3.3V
+5VC Laser Scanner
Fixing Heater
control circuit
+24VR Unit
Heater
Drum Heater
DC Controller PCB Cassette Pedestal
+24VR
Heater +24VU
Circuit +5VR +5VR
Drum Heater +3.3V
Regulator F-2-109
SW (SW4)
NOTE:
With this machine, Reader and ADF are installed as standard.
+24VR
+24VR
+5VR
+5VR
+3.3V
The drawer connectors connect the Staple Finisher and Cassette Pedestals.
Inner Finisher Cassette
All-night Power An external cable is used to connect to ADF.
Supply PCB
+24VR
+5VR
Option
+3.3V
HVT PCB +24VU Cassette
+24VR
+5VR
Cassette
F-2-108
2-79
2
Technical Explanation > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Power supply
2 Technical Explanation > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Quick Startup
2-80
■■Quick Startup As for startup right after shutting down of the machine under any of the following conditions, it starts
up normally (even quick startup is ON).
To realize faster startup, power configuration has been changed to always supply power to FAX
the AC Driver PCB. Thereby, the main menu can be displayed after 34 seconds from turning • There is a fax transmission reservation.
ON the Main Power Supply Switch. • Within a specified period of time (10 seconds) from disconnection of a fax line
• Within a specified period of time (10 seconds) from non-detection of reception from a fax
Although when the Main Power Supply Switch is OFF, power is supplied to the following
line
PCBs. • Within a specified period of time (10 seconds) from putting down the fax sub device or
• AC Driver PCB handset
• All-night Power Supply PCB MEAP
During execution of MEAP application which prohibits moving to Deep Sleep
• Main Controller PCB
A scheduled processing is reserved on MEAP.
Disconnect the plug from outlet when performing work with the possibility to come in contact Job processing
• During print/scan job processing
with the PCBs above. PCBs may get damage. If a conductive material comes in contact with
• During SEND job processing
the PCB, short circuit may occur in the PCB, and may cause damage on it.
• During I-Fax communication/job processing
The following illustration is used at the place where attention needs. When the following label • During report job processing
• During forwarding transmission job/reception job processing
is affixed, be sure to disconnect the plug from outlet.
• During fax communication/phone communication
• During distribution of device information
Quick Start • During export/import by RUI
• During rebuilding with the HDD Data Encryption installed
Others
• When the machine state remains unchanged for more than 110 hours after turning ON the
power as quick startup or turning OFF the power.
-> At the time of shutdown, it will be normal shutdown.
* This is to prevent a risk of UI freeze caused by memory leak.
• Within a specified period of time (20 seconds) from turning OFF the Main Power Supply
Plug Off Switch
-> In such a case, the machine reboots and then starts up normally at startup. Therefore, it will
F-2-110 take a few more seconds compared with the normal startup.
In addition, quick startup is not performed under the following conditions. * This is for starting up the machine normally at the time of failure (UI freeze, etc.).
At first startup after the AC Power Plug is connected to the outlet • After moving to the Settings/Registration screen of service mode or RUI
Under the following conditions (settings), the machine always starts up normally (even quick startup • After changing the Settings/Registration that requires restart
is ON). • The machine is shut down from RUI
When any of the following devices is connected. • When an error occurs
• Serial Interface Coin Vendor • When resource downloader is active
When any of the following network settings is set to "ON". • In printer/scanner limited functions mode
• RARP • When a login application is switched by SMS
• BOOTP • A license has been registered.
• IPsec • Startup by pressing the Control Panel Key
• IPv6 T-2-56
• NetWare
2-80
2
Technical Explanation > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Quick Startup
2 Technical Explanation > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Energy Saving Function
2-81
■■Energy Saving Function Sleep 1
In the case of the following:
The power supply mode of this equipment is divided into the “Standby” mode and the “Sleep”
Settings/Registration > Preferences > Timer/Energy Settings > Sleep Mode Energy Use >
mode. In addition to the major modes, there are 3 patterns in “Sleep” mode.
“High”
The Control Panel is not active (the light is off) and the 24V power on the DC Controller PCB
is not supplied. The 12V power is supplied. The machine gets into the Sleep Standby mode
Standby
when a print job is submitted and the Standby mode when the power supply switch on the
Control Panel is pressed.
Switch of control panel is turned off In the case of the following, the machine gets into this mode even if “Sleep Mode Energy
or Switch of control panel is turned on
A specified period of time has passed
Use” is set “Low”.
• The device is connected to the IC CARD READER BOX-A1.
• Any mode other than “Auto” is specified for fax reception (RX) mode.
Sleep Mode
Deep Sleep
Sleep Standby In the case of the following:
Energy Use Energy Use
Settings/Registration > Preferences > Timer/Energy Settings > Sleep Mode Energy Use >
“Low” “High” “Low” (Default: “Low”)
Job end Only the 3.3V is supplied. The machine gets into the Sleep Standby mode when a print job
Job submission
is submitted and the Standby mode when the power supply switch on the Control Panel is
Job submission Job end pressed.
Regardless of the machine condition, the power of the Drum Heater is always supplied when
Deep Sleep Sleep 1
the Environment switch is turned ON.
F-2-111
*By default, it takes 5 minutes after completion of printing, scanning or Fax job. It takes 10
minutes after completion of other job cases (such as the job relating to Universal Send (e.g.
iFAX) or ping, etc).
Standby
This is the mode that the machine is running or the machine is ready to start operation. All the
power is supplied.
Sleep Standby
This mode indicates that only the display is turned off while the power of other parts is all
supplied. The machine gets into this state when a PDL job is submitted during sleep.
2-81
2
Technical Explanation > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Energy Saving Function
2 Technical Explanation > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Energy Saving Function
2-82
The following descriptions are conditions for not entering DEEP SLEEP. System Performance Status
Software status • A network application is communicating.
Common • A print job is being processed or waiting.
• Settings/Registration > Preferences > Timer/Energy Settings > Sleep Mode Energy Use is • A scan job is being processed or waiting.
set to "High". • A fax communication is in progress.
• Settings/Registration > Preferences > Timer/Energy Settings > Sleep Mode Exit Time • A phone communication is in progress.
Settings is set (and not blank). • An IFAX communication is in progress.
Network • A job is being processed.
• Settings/Registration > Preferences > Network > TCP/IP Settings > IPSec Settings > Use • A report job is being processed.
IPSec is set to "ON". • A forward send job is in progress.
• Settings/Registration > Preferences > Network > SMB Server Settings >Use SMB Server is • A forward receive job is in progress.
set to "ON". • A SEND job is being processed.
• Settings/Registration > Preferences > Network > NetWare Settings > Use NetWare is set to • The delivery of device information is in progress.
"ON". • RUI is being exported / inported.
• Settings/Registration > Preferences > Network > Ethernet Driver Settings > Auto Detect is • A VNC connection is in progress.
set to "OFF" and "1000 Base-T" is set for "Ethernet Type". • A MEAP Application is being executed. (However, when the MEAP Application is scheduling
• Settings/Registration > Preferences > Network > IEEE802.1X Settings > Use IEEE802.1X Timer Service Task within the time condition (within 12 minutes) of the Alarm Service not
is set to "ON". entering DEEP SLEEP, the machine may enter DEEP SLEEP.)
• The Resource Downloader is executing a task (such as downloading a font data and creating
Fax
a backup).
• Settings/Registration > Function Settings > Receive/Forward > Fax Settings > Selecting
• The Inbox is being backed up.
Reception Mode is not set to "Auto RX".
• The printer is in a limited operation.
• Settings/Registration > Function Settings > Receive/Forward > Fax Settings > Auto
• The scanner is in a limited operation.
Reception Switching is set to "ON".
• A store job is being processed. (As with SEND, this include the storage process to Advanced
• Settings/Registration > Function Settings > Receive/Forward > Fax Settings > Remote
Box or other storage after the scanning is completed.)
Reception is set to "ON".
• Settings/Registration > Function Settings > Send > Fax Settings > Set Line > Modem Dial
in Settings > Line 1 or Line 2 is set to "ON".
• Settings/Registration > Function Settings > Receive/Forward > Fax Settings > Number
Display Settings > Line 1 or Line 2 is set to "ON".
T-2-57
Hardware status
• The Serial Coin Vendor is connected.
• The host machine (such as a PC) is connected to the USB Device.
• The storage is connected to the USB host.
• A device (general USB devices such as the IC Card Reader not used by host machine's
functions) used by MEAP is connected to the USB host.
T-2-58
2-82
2
Technical Explanation > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Energy Saving Function
2 Technical Explanation > External Auxiliary System > Service Tasks > Periodical Servicing
2-83
The Alarm Service is set to within 12 minutes. ●● Effects of Spanning Tree-supported Hub
• * When one of the following is being executed, the Alarm Service (Time) is set. If you set the network as a loop, data keeps staying in this loop and efficiency of data transfer
• - Time setting for ON/OFF of the Memory Lock
• Settings/Registration > Function Settings > Receive/Forward > Common Settings > Fax/I-Fax might be decreased. In order to prevent this symptom, some hubs have the function called
Inbox > Memory Lock Start Time “spanning tree”. If this function is enabled, the device newly connected to the hub can make
• Settings/Registration > Function Settings > Receive/Forward > Common Settings > Fax/I-Fax data communication with network 10 to 50 seconds (time changes due to the conditions)
Inbox > Memory Lock End Time
• - Output of the scheduled report
after the connection. When the machine enters Deep sleep mode and restores from the sleep
• Settings/Registration > Function Settings > Send > Common Settings > Communication mode, the machine electrically disconnects with the network once. Therefore, if the machine
Management Report > Specify Print Time (when not set to "Off") connects with the spanning tree-installed hub, the machine cannot communicate with network
• Settings/Registration > Function Settings > Send > Fax Settings > Fax Activity Report >
for approximately 1 minute at a maximum after restoring from the Deep sleep mode.
Specify Print Time (when not set to "Off")
• Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Device Management > Device Information For this reason, right after restoring from the Deep sleep mode, the following symptoms might
Delivery Settings > Communication Log > Specify Print Time (when not set to "Off") occur: Device status cannot be collected, printing cannot be made, and login using a login
• - Scheduled Transmission Setting (Fax, Send) application cannot be made. If such symptoms become any problems, perform the following
• - POP settings
• Settings/Registration > Function Settings > Send > E-Mail/I-Fax Settings > Network Settings operations.
> Next > POP Issue Interval (when not set to "0") • Using Settings/Registration, set not to enter the Deep sleep mode.
• DHCP Setting (The interval is specified by the server) Preferences > Timer/Energy Settings > Sleep Mode Energy Use > High
• E-RDS Setting (The interval is specified by the server)
• SNTP Setting (The interval is specified by the server)
• Disable the spanning tree function of hub.
• Auto delivery of device information • Request users to use the hub which supports Rapid Spanning-Tree
• Scheduled specified printing of web browser • Protocol (RSTP) that resolved such problems.
• Time specified backup of Inbox document
• The auto sleep timer is running (and for the time set by Settings/Registration > Preferences > ●● Conditions to operate the heater
Timer/Energy Settings > Weekly Timer Settings).
• The sleep mode exit timer is running (for 15 seconds after exiting DEEP SLEEP)." Drum Heater
• The network timer is running (and for the number of seconds set by Service Mode (Level 2) > When the Environment At standby ON
COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK > WUEN-LIV.) Switch is turned ON At printing OFF
• The wake up timer is running (for 10 minutes after receiving a wake up packet).
When the Main Power ON
• The hard disk drive protection timer is running (for 12 minutes after exiting from DEEP SLEEP Switch is turned OFF
and the HDD is powered ON. However, after a printing, scanning, and fax job is completed, At sleep state ON
this timer is disabled.) T-2-60
• The after linkup timer is running (for 1 minute after the machine is powered ON and the
communication with the network is started). Service Tasks
• The sleep notification timer is running (for 10 minutes after notifying the network module of
entering DEEP SLEEP. However, when the network module responds, this timer is disabled).
T-2-59
None.
None.
None.
2-83
2
Technical Explanation > External Auxiliary System > Service Tasks > Periodical Servicing
2 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Preparation for Using SSO-H > Server authentication management
2-84
MEAP Note:
As for the user name for logging into the machine, use the name registered as "User
logon name (pre-Windows 2000)" in the Active Directory.
Preparation for Using SSO-H
An example of the user registration screen (Windows Server 2003)
■■Outline
When using Single Sign-On H (hereinafter referred to as SSO-H) for the login service,
required system environments are different in server authentication or local device
authentication.
See the following for system requirements in each of authentication methods:
■■Server authentication management

The system requirements necessary when using server authentication by SSO-H vary
depending on the authentication server.
The system requirements for using each authentication server are shown below.
F-2-112
●● Active Directory authentication

In order to use Active Directory authentication in SSO-H, the following system environments
are required. ●● LDAP authentication
1) Authentication server (Active Directory : Windows server ) When using LDAP authentication by SSO-H, the following conditions need to be satisfied.
• Active Directory and Domain Name System (DNS) should be installed. 1) LDAP server
• A group named "Canon Peripheral Admins" should be created on the Active Directory. • Novell eDirectory V8.8 SP6 for Windows
• The OS should be one of the followings. • Lotus Domino V8.5 for Windows
• Microsoft Windows Server 2003 SP2 *
• Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 SP2 * 2) OS where the LDAP server runs
• Microsoft Windows Server 2008 SP2 * • It should comply with the specifications of the LDAP server product.
• Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 SP1
• Microsoft Windows Server 2012 Operation check has been conducted for the following OS.
* 64-bit version is not supported. • Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Enterprise SP2
2) Users accessing the authentication server (Active Directory: Windows Server) • Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Enterprise
• The user should belong to the "Canon Peripheral Admins" group on the Active Directory.
Note:
• The user name should contain only single-byte alphanumeric characters, - (hyphen), _ (low
When an LDAP server other than the server shown above is used, SSO-H may not
line), and % (percent). work properly.
Windows Active Directory works also as an LDAP server, but is not supported.
Note:
The difference in time setting between the authentication server (Active Directory) and
the machine (and the computer for login) should be within 5 minutes. (If the difference in
time setting is 5 minutes or longer, an error will occur at the time of login for the server
authentication.)
2-84
2
Technical Explanation > MEAP > Preparation for Using SSO-H > Server authentication management
2 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Preparation for Using SSO-H > PC Environment of Administrator Users and General Users
2-85
■■PC Environment of Administrator Users and General Users Note: Internet Exproler-related
The following environment is required to use this machine (managed by SSO-H) from a PC • In order to use JRE6 Update24 with Internet Explorer 9/10, JRE6 Update24 or later is
required.
on the network. • The ActiveX plug-in should be enabled in Internet Explorer.
• In Internet Explorer, if [Run ActiveX controls and plug-ins] is disabled in [Internet Options]
> [Security] > [Custom level...], a warning message that JRE has not yet been installed is
●● OS of the PC and Other Environments
displayed.
Classification Operating System IPv6 Supported browser Java Runtime • When using Windows XP in an IP v6 environment, IP v6 may need to be installed
Environment manually in some cases.
Client OS Windows XP Professional SP3 Internet Explorer 7 JRE5.0/JRE6/
Internet Explorer 8 JRE7
Windows Vista SP2 Internet Explorer 7 (Exclude JRE6
Internet Explorer 8 update4/5. ) Note: MacOS-related
Internet Explorer 9 Java does not work in the case of combination of MacOS 10.6.8, Java SE 6 update6
Windows 7 SP1 Internet Explorer 8
(Java for MacOS X 10.6 Update 6) and Safari5.0.5. Either of the following measures
Internet Explorer 9
needs to be taken to make it run.
• Not installing Java SE 6 update6 (Java for MacOS X 10.6 Update 6) (it is however not
Windows 8 Internet Explorer 10
possible to uninstall it if it is already installed and running)
Server OS Windows Server 2003 SP2 Internet Explorer 7 • Providing a symbolic link again using the command of ln -s /System/Library/Frameworks/
Windows Server 2003 R2 SP2 Internet Explorer 8 JavaVM.framework/Resources/JavaPluginCocoa.bundle
Windows Server 2008 SP2 Internet Explorer 7 • Upgrading Safari to version 5.1
Internet Explorer 8
Internet Explorer 9
Windows Server 2008 R2 SP1 Internet Explorer 8
Internet Explorer 9 ●● Network ports used
Mac OS Mac OS X v10.5 Safari 4.0.5 J2SE5.0
Safari 5.0.5 Java SE 6 Port No. Application
Mac OS X v10.6 Safari 4.0.5 Java SE 6 Connecting 53 Communication with DNS server (fixed)
Safari 5.0.5 88 Kerberos authentication with KDC (Key Distribution Center)
Safari 5.1 1-65535 Communication with directory service using LDAP (default is 389,
Mac OS X Lion Safari 5.1 Java SE 6 ( default:389) may be changed to any port on LDAP service side)
Java SE 7 Listening 10000 - 10100 -
Mac OS X Mountain Lion Safari 6.0 Java SE 7 T-2-62
JRE : Java Runtime Environment T-2-61
J2SE : Java 2 Platform Standard Edition
Note: common to browsers

• The browser should support Java. (The environment such as Modern UI version of
Internet Explorer on Windows 8 in which Java add-on cannot be used is not applicable.)
• JavaScript should be enabled.
• Refer to the website of JAVA (http://java.com/) for how to obtain the Java environment.
2-85
2
Technical Explanation > MEAP > Preparation for Using SSO-H > PC Environment of Administrator Users and General Users
2 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Settings on the Device Side
2-86
Preparation for Using SMS ■■Settings on the Device Side
To use SMS, a PC and browser used to access SMS are required, and the network settings ●● Network configuration process
need to be set up on the device. In order to provide support for the machine via network such as SMS, the network settings
need to be made from the touch panel of the machine. (this setting is [ON] by default).
■■Preparation of PC for Accessing SMS
1) Press [Settings/Registration] button, select [Preferences] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Settings] >
●● Checking of operation environment [Use HTTP] and press [On] button.
In order to access SMS using password authentication, the PC and browser need to comply
with the following system environment.
Combination of the Browser and the OS

Operating System Supported browser
Windows XP Professional SP3 Microsoft Internet Explorer 7
Microsoft Internet Explorer 8
Windows Vista SP2 Microsoft Internet Explorer 7
Windows 7 SP1 Microsoft Internet Explorer 8
Windows 8 Microsoft Internet Explorer 10
Mac OS X v10.5 Safari 4.0.5
Safari 5.0.5
Mac OS X v10.6 Safari 4.0.5
Safari 5.0.5
Safari 5.1
Mac OS X Lion Safari 5.1
Mac OS X Mountain Lion Safari 6.0 F-2-113
T-2-63
In order to access SMS using RLS authentication, the environment should comply with the Note:
In iR-ADV series, the System Manager ID and the System PIN are configured by
environment for using SSO-H as the login service. (For details, refer to "PC Environment of default, so “Network” and the items that follow are grayed out and cannot be selected.
Administrator Users and General Users".) Return to the top screen, press “Login” button at the lower left of the screen, login as
the system manager, and configure the settings.
The default setting for the System Manager ID is “7654321”, and the password is”
●● PC and Browser Settings 7654321”.
The PC and browser used to access SMS need to satisfy the following conditions. 8
• The supported browser language should be the same with the language of the OS.
• Java Script should be enabled.
• The supported screen size should be 800 x 600 or larger (recommended size: 1024 x 768).
• Session cookie should be enabled.
• Only alphanumeric characters and some of the symbols ("-" or ".") should be used as the
machine domain name and host name.
F-2-114
• If an invalid character string such as a low line ("_") is included in the host name, cookies
cannot be enabled.
2-86
2
Technical Explanation > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Settings on the Device Side
2-87
●● Key Pair and Server Certificate when Using Encrypted SSL
Note:
When using SSL, press [Settings/ Registration] button, select [Management Communication
Settings]>[License / Other] > [MEAP Settings] > [SSL Settings] and press [On] button. To use SMS via SSL connection, it is required to specify a key pair and server certificate as
(This setting is applied to SSL setting on RUI. Vice versa, [On] set for SSL on RUI is
also applied to the touch panel.) the key to be used.
When [Use SSL] is set to On, the message dialog, [The Default Key is not set. Check Since a key (default key) that can be used for encrypted SSL communication is installed as
the Key and Certificate List settings in Certificate Setting.], is shown. Press [OK] button standard on the device, advance setting of the key pair and server certificate is not required.
for this message.
In order to use an encryption key other than the default key, follow the procedure "Generating
a key pair" shown below to make settings for the key pair and server certificate necessary for
encrypted SSL communication.
Note:
• MFP has a server certificate registered as standard.
• For detailed procedures of the Default Key setting, refer to [e-Manual > Security].
• As for SMS, by setting a Default Key, encrypted SSL communication is always executed
regardless of the following setting: [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings]
(Settings/Registration) > [MEAP Settings] > [SSL Settings]: ON/OFF.
F-2-115
2) Press [OK] button to return to Main Menu screen.

3) Restart this device. Generating a key pair
1) From a PC on the same network as the device, use a web browser to access the remote
CAUTION: UI's portal page. Then, select [ Settings/Registration ] from the menu on the right side of
• The setting [ Use HTTP ] is not actually enabled/disabled until you have restarted the the screen.
device.
• You cannot make a connection through a proxy server. If a proxy server is in use, URL to access: http://<device's IP address>:8000/
enter the IP address of the MEAP device in the Exceptions field for the browser.
Open Internet Options dialog of Internet Explorer and select Connections tab, LAN
Settings button, Use a proxy server option, and Advanced button of Proxy server
group. Proxy Settings dialog will opens. The Exceptions field is in the dialog. As
network settings vary among environments, consult the network administrator.
• If Cookie and JavaScript are not enabled in the Web browser, you will not be able to
use SMS.
• To type text using the Web browser, use the characters compatible with the MEAP
device’s touch panel display. The MEAP device may not properly recognize some
characters.
• When [Use SSL] is made available, it is necessary to set the key and the certificate
necessary for the SSL communication. Set the key and the certificate by SSL with F-2-116
[SSL Settings] that exists in [Preferences] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Settings] > [SSL
Settings] on the iR device.
2-87
2
2-88
2) Click [ Management Settings ] > [ Device Management ] > [ Certificate Settings ] > [ Key 5) Enter the necessary information, and then click the [ OK ] button.
and Certificate Settings ].
F-2-117
3) Click [ Generate Key... ] button.
F-2-120
Input example
Item name Type Content Entry
Key Settings
Key Name Compulsory An arbitrary character string Default Key
Signature Algorithm Compulsory Selected from:SHA1/SHA256/SHA384/SHA512 SHA1
Key Algorithm Compulsory Selected from:512/1024/2048/4096 1024
F-2-118
Certificate Settings
4) Click [ Network Communication ] Validity Start Date Compulsory Date 15/4/2012
Validity End Date Compulsory Date 15/4/2036
Country/Region Compulsory Country or region name US
State Arbitrary State name -
City Arbitrary City name -
Organization Arbitrary Organization name -
Organization Unit Arbitrary Organization unit -
Common Name Arbitrary Common Name* -
F-2-119
T-2-64
Note:
When the IP address of the device has been entered in the [Common Name] entry
field, if you install a server certificate to the browser ( see "Installing a server certificate
(reference information)" ), the message "Certificate Error" that usually appears when
access is made from Internet Explorer 7 or later will not be displayed.
2-88
2
2-89
6) Check to see that the generated key appears in [ Registered Key and Certificate ]. 3) Select the generated key, and then click the [ Default Key Settings ] button.
F-2-121
Default Key Settings
F-2-124
1) Click [ Preferences ] > [ Network Settings ] > [TCP/IP Settings ] > [ SSL Settings ]. 4) Check that [ SSL ] is displayed in the [ Key Usage ] entry field.
F-2-125
5) Log out from the remote UI, and then restart the device.
F-2-122
2) Click [ Key and Certificate...] button.
F-2-123
2-89
2
2-90
Installing a server certificate (reference information) 3) Click the [ Install Certificate... ] button on the [ General ] tab.
When you access a device where the key installed as standard [default key] is set as the key
for SSL, "Certificate Error" appears if the version of Internet Explorer (IE) is Version 7 or later.
Error display example
F-2-126
To disable display of "Certificate Error", use the following procedure (for IE8) to set the key
generated in "Key Pair and Server Certificate when Using Encrypted SSL Communication" (i.e.
the key with the IP address of the device specified as the shared name) as an SSL key.
1) Access SMS from the browser, and then click "Certificate Error" in the URL entry field.
F-2-127
F-2-129
2) Click [ View certificates ].
4) [ Certificate Import Wizard ] will appear. Click the [ Next ] button.
F-2-128
F-2-130
2-90
2
2-91
5) In [ Certificate Store ], select the [ Place all certificates in the following store ] option, and 7) You will return to the [ Certificate Store ] dialog. Check that "Trusted Root Certification
then click the [ Browse ] button. Authorities" appears in [ Certificate ], and then click the [ Next ] button.
F-2-131
F-2-133
6) In [ Select Certificate Store ], select [ Trusted Root Certification Authorities ], and then click 8) [ Completing the Certificate Import Wizard ] will appear. Click the [ Finish ] button.
the [ OK ] button.
F-2-132
F-2-134
2-91
2
2-92
9) If the [Security Warning] appears, click the [Yes] button. (It does not appear when installing ●● Network Port Settings
the same certificate again.) The default port of the HTTP server used for MEAP and MEAP applications to provide the
servlet function is 8000, and the HTTPS server's default port is 8443. In the case that these
ports have already used by the customer who is to introduce this application, the MEAP
application cannot use the HTTP (or HTTPS) server(s).
By changing the following ports to use, however, the MEAP application can be used as well
as the existing system.
1) Start [SERVICE MODE] in Level 2.

2) Press [COPIER] > [Option] > [NETWORK] buttons.
F-2-135
10) A message will appear to indicate that import has been completed successfully. Click
the [ OK ] button.
F-2-137
3) To set up the HTTP server port, select [ MEAP-PN ]. To set up the HTTPS server port,
select [MEAP-SSL ].
F-2-136
F-2-138
2-92
2
2 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > How to Check the Serial Number
2-93
4) Press the port number to specify on the control panel (the numerical value input in the field ■■How to Check the Serial Number
is displayed), and press [OK] button.
When performing MEAP device support, the serial number of the device is necessary in some
cases.
Examples of where the serial number is necessary

• When initializing SMS login password (obtaining a switch license)
• When obtaining a MEAP application license from LMS
• When obtaining a transfer license of MEAP application
• When obtaining a special license for reinstalling MEAP application
If a problem occurs in the MEAP device and you want to contact the support department of
the sales company, you need to provide the serial number. Perform the following procedure to
get the serial number.
F-2-139
Note: ●● Checking from the PC browser

A port number can be any integer from 0 to 65535. To avoid port numbers that are The serial number of the device is displayed on the SMS login screen, SMS screen, and
frequently used, do not use any integer from 0 to 1023. remote UI portal screen.
Server Setting value Default value / Value after RAM clear

HTTP Server 1024 to 65535 8000
HTTPS Server 1024 to 65535 8443
T-2-65
Note:
• If Print Server is connected, do not specify port 8080.
If port 8080 is specified, it is not possible to access the remote UI of the device where the
MEAP authentication application is running. (Port 8080 is reserved to allow the PS Print
F-2-141
Server Unit to redirect to the iR device.)
• As for port on HTTPS server, it only applies to the device that supports SSL function. ●● Checking from the device's Touch Panel
You can see the number by pressing the counter key on the Control Panel of the machine.
5) Restart the device if the port number is set.
F-2-140
F-2-142
2-93
2
Technical Explanation > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > How to Check the Serial Number
2 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Log in to SMS > When SMS Cannot Be Accessed
2-94
Log in to SMS ■■When SMS Cannot Be Accessed
■■Outline ●● If you forgot the password (SMS login password initialization)
After changing the default SMS login password, if you forgot the new password and cannot
SMS login may be done by entering a password for authentication, or by authentication via
log in to SMS, you can use a switch license for password initialization to change the password
the Remote Login Service (RLS) login window (RLS authentication). Settings can be changed
back to the default value "MeapSmsLogin".
to allow either only one of these methods or both of them.
Note that there is no special password for service.
SMS login window (password auth) RLS login window (user name/ password auth)
1) Obtain a switch license file for password initialization.
Contact the person in charge of support at the sales company, give the device's serial
number, and have a switch license file for password initialization issued.
2) Load the switch license file.
With nothing entered, click the [ Log in ] button to display the area for specifying a switch
license file for password initialization.
F-2-143
Authentication
Login method Authentication service name Users who may log in
method
Password Password SMS Installer Service (Password Users who know the SMS
authentication authentication Authentication) login password
RLS login SSO-H SMS Installer Service (Remote Users registered as
Login Service Authentication) administrators with SSO-H F-2-144
T-2-66 3) Specify the switch license file.
Click the [ Browse ] button and specify the switch license file.
Note: 4) Initialize the login password.
If Default Authentication is selected as the device authentication method, ‘RLS Click the [ Initialize ] button to display an initialization confirmation page, and click the [ OK
Authentication’ is not selectable as SMS Login method. Also, if ‘RLS Authentication’ is
selected, the device authentication method (Default Authentication, SDL, SSO) cannot ] button.
be changed.
Note:
• The default password is “MeapSmsLogin.” (The password is case-sensitive.)
• If you click [Cancel] button, the Login page opens without initializing the password.
2-94
2
Technical Explanation > MEAP > Log in to SMS > When SMS Cannot Be Accessed
2 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Log in to SMS > How to Deal with a Message "Certificate Error" That Appears at the Time of Access
2-95
●● If login is not possible due to exclusive control ■■How to Deal with a Message "Certificate Error" That Appears at
Since access to SMS is under exclusive control, you cannot log in if another user has already
logged into the SMS of the same iR device.
the Time of Access
When accessing from the browser to SMS, a message "Certificate Error" appears in
An example of the exclusive control message some cases. In that case, perform the procedure "Installing a server certificate (reference
information)" in this chapter.
F-2-145
If you cannot log in due to exclusive control, you need to ask the other user to log out before
you can try again.
Note:
If you close the browser without logging out, the session remains active. In that case,
you cannot log in again.
If this problem occurs, you can wait for 5 minutes so that the session is disconnected.
Or, you can restart the device to force the session to disconnect.
If [Key and Certificate Settings] is not set

If [Key and Certificate Settings] is not set correctly, you cannot access the URL for SMS
(https://<device's IP address>:8443/sms/). In that case, perform the following procedure.
1) Go to http://<device's IP address>:8000/sms/, and check to see that "HTTP 500 Internal

Server Error" appears.
2) If it appears, perform the procedure "Key Pair and Server Certificate when Using Encrypted
SSL Communication" in this chapter.
Note:
In the case of SMS, by setting the key to be used, encrypted SSL communication
is always executed regardless of the following setting: [Settings/Registration] >
［Management Settings］ > ［License/Other］ > ［MEAP Settings］ > [Use SSL] > ON/
OFF.
2-95
2
Technical Explanation > MEAP > Log in to SMS > How to Deal with a Message "Certificate Error" That Appears at the Time of Access
2 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Installing an MEAP Application > Procedure to install applications
2-96
Installing an MEAP Application ■■Procedure to install applications
1) Log in to SMS.
■■Outline
2) Click [ Install MEAP Application ] on the menu.
From the MEAP application installation screen, you can install the MEAP application as well
as the license file.
F-2-147
F-2-146
3) Check [ Install MEAP Application/License ] page appears.
Before installing the MEAP application, be sure to check the following items.
4) Click [ Browse.. ] button, and select the application file and the license file of the application;
then, click [ Install ] button.
●● Device compatibility with the MEAP application
To find out whether the device is compatible with the MEAP application, check the devices Note:
supported by the MEAP application. Depending on the application, the device's firmware may Application File: identified by the extension “jar”.
License File: identified by the extension “lic”.
require version upgrade.
●● Resources availability (remaining amount)

The necessary resources (free storage space and free memory available) must be secured
for an MEAP application to run; otherwise, you cannot install the MEAP application.
To check the resource information, see "Device's resources" in this manual.
F-2-148
2-96
2
Technical Explanation > MEAP > Installing an MEAP Application > Procedure to install applications
2 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Installing an MEAP Application > Procedure to install applications
2-97
5) Check the contents of the Confirm page; then, click [ OK ] button.
CAUTION:
• You cannot install only the license.
• You will not be able to install the application without using the appropriate license.
Be sure to select its license file.
• If you are adding a license to an existing application, see "Procedure adding a
license file".
• If you are updating an existing application, stop the application; then, install the new
application or its license file. You will not be able to update an application while it is
running.
Note:
The license file is provided in text file format, enabling to view in a text editor. The
application ID and device serial number shown in the file allow users to confirm which F-2-150
device to install with the license file. 6) Some applications show a screen to indicate the terms of agreement. Read the terms, and
Note that any changes added to the license file may disable installation. Cares should
be taken when confirming the contents of the license file. click [ OK ].
7) Check the message "Installing...Please wait." appears, beginning the installation.
Sample file
License File ID
Application ID
Serial Number
Validated Period F-2-151
Counter informations 8) Upon installation completed, click [ To MEAP Application Management ] button shown on
the screen to view MEAP Application Management page.
F-2-152
F-2-149
2-97
2
Technical Explanation > MEAP > Installing an MEAP Application > Procedure to install applications
2 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Installing an MEAP Application > Resource Information
2-98
Note:
■■Resource Information
As for an application that has just been installed, the status is "Installed". In order to use
the application, it is necessary to click the [Start] button to change the status to [Started].
●● Outline
Application Management page shows [ resource information ] for information of the whole
device resources including Amount Used, Remaining, and Percent Used.
This function enables users to judge the remaining resources before installing the additional
application. Such resource information is shown based on the manifest header stated at the
top of each application, which declares the resources required in the application. Therefore,
the information does not necessarily show the resources actually in use.
The following resource information is shown:
• Storage
• Memory
• Thread
• Socket
• File Descriptor
F-2-153
If the hard disk does not have enough free space for the application, the application cannot
be installed.
Note:
There are two ways to install an MEAP application. You can install using SMS, or install Moreover, if the free space of any of the resources (Memory, Thread, Socket, and File
using the [Register/Update Software] screen of the remote UI. Descriptor) is insufficient, the application cannot be started.
Screen example The following procedure shows how to check the resource information.
1) Log in to SMS.
2) Click [ MEAP Application Management ].
3) Check [ Resource Information ] for information of the whole device resources.
F-2-154
[Register/Update Software] provides two types of installations. One is [Manual
Installation] where you specify a jar file and a license file and then install. The other is
[Delivered Installation] where you enter a license access number.
For details of the procedures, please refer to the e-Manual.
F-2-155
2-98
2
Technical Explanation > MEAP > Installing an MEAP Application > Resource Information
2 Technical Explanation > MEAP > MEAP Specifications > What is MEAP Specifications (MEAP Spec Version)?
2-99
●● Device's resources MEAP Specifications
When 1 MEAP application operates, the resource volume allocated to each device is as
follows (loaded resource list). Since the following value is an estimate, when installing the ■■What is MEAP Specifications (MEAP Spec Version)?
MEAP applications, it needs to check the available resource of SMS. MEAP Specifications is one of the information required to judge whether MEAP applications
Since the indication of SMS resource volume fluctuates by the login service (authentication can be operated or not. With MEAP Specifications, you can prevent an application that uses
function) and configuration (future model), which the user selected, it may show a bigger a specific function of device from being installed onto the device that does not have the
value than the following values. function.
List of Available Resources

●● About Name
Product Name Storage Memory Thread Socket File Description The displayed name for Meap Specifications differs depending on the screen or the location
iR-ADV C5051 series 1024MB 128MB 256 256 256
where the name is displayed.
iR-ADV C9075 series 1024MB 128MB 256 256 256
iR-ADV 6075 series 1024MB 128MB 256 256 256 In this document, it is referred to as "Meap Specifications".
iR-ADV 8105 PRO series 1024MB 128MB 256 256 256 The location where the name is displayed/shown Displayed name
iR-ADV C2030/C2020 series Flash model 220MB 32MB 162 128 128 Platform Information : SMS > [ System Management] > [ System Information MEAP Specifications
HDD model 1024MB 128MB 256 256 256 ] > [ Platform Information]
iR-ADV 4045 series 1024MB 128MB 256 256 256 System Information Print : Local UI [ Settings/Registration ] > [ Management
iR-ADV C5255 series 1024MB 128MB 256 256 256 Settings ] > [ License/Other ] > [ MEAP Settings ] > [ System Information
iR-ADV C2220/C2230 series Flash model 220MB 32MB 162 128 128 Print]
HDD model 1024MB 128MB 256 256 256 Manifest file of the MEAP application MeapSpecVersion
iR-ADV 500/400 series 1024MB 128MB 256 256 256 SDK documents
T-2-67 T-2-68
●● Mechanism
Note: MEAP platform judges whether MEAP applications can be operated on it using on the 2
• Among the resources, the free space of Storage is checked when installing an application.
For other resources, the free space is checked when the application is started. information below:
• Some applications call for a specific set of conditions for installation. For details, see the • Device Specification ID
User’s Guide that comes with the individual applications. • MEAP Specifications
• Maximum installable application is up to 20 even if the remaining resource is adequate.
(However, the Send function consumes 1, it must be 19 in practice.) Authentication
Device Specification ID shows information such as the original functions of MFP (including
application is not included in this number. print, scan, and copy), and one that differs by model such as maximum copy number,
• The MEAP application, which can be started simultaneously, is up to 19. (Authentication thus each model has a different ID. (It is easy to determine the IDs for this reason.) MEAP
application is not included in this number.)
application declares 1 or more Device Specification ID required for its execution. Declaration
of multiple Device Specification IDs means that the application is operable in all the models
declared. Upon installation of MEAP application in (using) SMS or MEAP Enterprise Service
CAUTION:
Manager, matching of Device Specification ID is executed on the side of MEAP platform
To install an application, the user needs to use the following URL when accessing the machine. The machine which doesn't support the ID declared by the application rejects
license control system to obtain a license file. In doing so, he/she needs to register the
installation of such an application.
license access number of the application and the serial number of the device.
Meanwhile, MEAP Specifications shows other information than defined by Device
http://www.canon.com/lms/license/ Specification ID above, including network and security. Thus each model does not always
have the same version.
MEAP application declares 1 or more MEAP Specifications required for its execution.
2-99
2
Technical Explanation > MEAP > MEAP Specifications > What is MEAP Specifications (MEAP Spec Version)?
2-100
Declaration of multiple Device Specification IDs means that the application is operable Product Name Initial MEAP SpecVer Remarks
in all the environments declared. Upon installation of MEAP application in SMS or MEAP iR-ADV 6075 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, Ver.20.xx or later
Enterprise Service Manager, matching of MEAP Specifications is executed on the side of iR-ADV 6065 15, 17, 18, 19, 25, 26, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29,
iR-ADV 6055 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 44, 45,
MEAP platform machine. The machine which doesn't support the version declared by the 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 46, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59
application rejects installation of such an application. 40, 41, 44, 45, 46, 49
Ver.42.xx or later
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29,
MEAP Specifications for each model
30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 44,
Product Name Initial MEAP SpecVer Remarks 45, 46, 47, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59, 74
iR-ADV C5051 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, Ver.37.xx or later iR-ADV 8105 PRO 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, Ver.20.xx or later
iR-ADV C5045 15, 17, 18, 19, 25, 26, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29, iR-ADV 8095 PRO 15, 17, 18, 19, 25, 26, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25, 1, 32, 33,
iR-ADV C5035 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 44, iR-ADV 8085 PRO 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40 , 41, 44, 45, 46, 49, 50, 51,
iR-ADV C5030 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 45, 46 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59
40, 41, 42, 44, 45 40, 41, 44, 45, 46, 49
Ver.38.xx or later Ver.42.xx or later
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25 ,26, 27, 29,
30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 44,
45, 46, 49 45, 46, 47, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59, 74
iR-ADV C2030 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, Ver.10.xx or later
Ver.50.xx or later iR-ADV C2025 15, 17, 18, 19, 25, 26, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19,25,
5,6,7,9,10,11,13,14,15,17,18,19,25,26,27,29, 30,31,32, iR-ADV C2020 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40,
33,34,35,36,37,38,39,40,41,42,44,45,46,47,49,50,51,5 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 41, 42, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 53
2,53,54,55,56,57,58,59 40, 41, 42, 44, 45, 46,
47, 48, 49 Ver.29.xx or later
Ver.65.xx or later 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29,
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 44,
30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 53, 74
45, 46, 47, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59, 74 iR-ADV 4045 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, Ver.11.xx or later
iR-ADV C9075 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, Ver.37.xx or later iR-ADV 4035 15, 17, 18, 19, 25, 26, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29,
iR-ADV C9070 15, 17, 18, 19, 25, 26, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29, iR-ADV 4025 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 44,
iR-ADV C9065 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 45, 46, 47, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59, 74
iR-ADV C9060 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 45, 46 40, 41, 42, 44, 45, 46,
iR-ADV C7065 40, 41, 42, 44, 45 47, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53,
iR-ADV C7055 Ver.38.xx or later 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29, iR-ADV C5255 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, -
30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 44, iR-ADV C5250 15, 17, 18, 19, 25, 26,
45, 46, 49 iR-ADV C5240 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33,
iR-ADV C5235 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39,
Ver.50.xx or later 40, 41, 42, 44, 45, 46,
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29, 47, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53,
30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59,
45, 46, 47, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 69,
70, 71, 72, 74, 78, 80
Ver.65.xx or later
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29,
30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 44,
45, 46, 47, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59, 74
2-100
2
2-101
Product Name Initial MEAP SpecVer Remarks MEAP Specifications List
iR-ADV C2230 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, - Ver Description
iR-ADV C2225 15,17, 18, 19, 25, 26,
1 MEAP basic function
iR-ADV C2220 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33,
2 MEAP Spec Version 1 function and SSL/TSL + Proxy
34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39,
5 MEAP Spec Version 1 function and CPCA V2 + ERS (Error Recovery Service) + New SSL/TSL
40, 41, 42, 44, 45, 46,
47, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 6 Reserved
53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 7 MEAP Spec Version 5 function and Compact PDF + OCR PDF (Text Searchable) + USB Host
59, 64, 65, 66, 67, 69, (Buffering of Interrupt Transfer)
70, 72, 74, 78, 79, 80 9 Reserved
iR-ADV 500 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 10 MEAP Spec Version 5 function and USB-Host (Exception + Clear Feature + Set Feature+ Hot
iR-ADV 400 15, 17, 18, 19, 25, 26, Plug) + WINS address acquisition using MIB Agent + Timer Service + SSL client authentication
27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 11 MEAP Spec Version 5 function and AMS
34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 13 MEAP Spec Version 5 function and J2ME1.1 Support + Encrypted PDF + Trace and smooth
40, 41, 42, 44, 45, 46, PDF + CTK2.0
47, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 14 Device signature PDF
53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 15 IMI + ERS (API addition for IMI) , IPv6, Extended encryption function (AES/RC4)
59, 64, 65, 66, 67, 69, 17 Acquiring images of JBIG format
70, 72, 73, 74, 78, 79, 18 Parsing XML documents (XML parser)
80, 82
19 Enhancement of IMI function (IMI Version1.2 series)
T-2-69
21 Reserved
25 API to access the HID/Mass Storage class devices.
26 MEAP driver preference function
27 Symbols that can be used with MibAgent added. (symbols for IPv6 address acquisition)
29 IMI API added (IMI version 1.2.1 enabled)
30 Extended address book function. (e-mail/group/i-FAX/file)
31 Integrated ERS function
32 Extended Imaging function (function to generate PDF/OOXML (PowerPoint) with visible
signature)
33 Extended function for imageRUNNER / iR ADVANCE series (API for address book/ CTK/
TopMenu)
34 Extended IMI Box function (v1.3.0)
35 Extended SIS function (function to check the network cable status, function to check PS print
server unit status)
36 Reserved
37 CLS (Contextual Login Service) Supporting API Added
38 imageRUNNER / iR ADVANCE Series administrative privileges supported
39 MEAP Specifications added according to Jcrypto API Specification Change
40 ImagingAPI (Creation API of Visible Signature PDF) added
41 Reserved
42 Reserved
44 imageRUNNER / iR ADVANCE Series Remote Address Book Supported, RemoteFAX
Supported
45 Addition of API that allows acquisition of the HID installation status
46 Multilingualization of the USB keyboard of the System Driver
47 Addition of API which executes a print order from the MEAP application of the IMI encryption
PDF document
2-101
2
2 Technical Explanation > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Starting, Stopping, or Uninstalling the MEAP Application
2-102
Ver Description MEAP Application Management
48 ID expressing the scan function for iR-ADV C2030/C2025/C2020 series
49 Reserved ■■Outline
50 SecurityOptionalPackage
51 IMI function expansion of iR-ADV C5051 series (Ver.50.xx or later) or later You can use the MEAP application management screen to perform basic management tasks
52 (iR-ADV C5051 series (Ver.50.xx or later)) Addition of registered API to enable SSL of the MEAP application (start, stop, uninstall), or check the device's resource information.
communication setting (On/Off) for each URL
53 Disclosure of registration/deletion function to/from Quick Menu
54 Function to notify an event to the application at recovery from the sleep mode. ■■Starting, Stopping, or Uninstalling the MEAP Application
55 System account release function
56 MEAP User Preference Service ●● Procedure to start and stop a MEAP application
57 MEAP Application Configuration Service 1) Log in to the SMS. (Refer to "Log in to SMS" in this manual.)
58 MEAP Application Log Service 2) Click [ MEAP Application Management ].
59 Reserved
3) Click [ Start ] or [ Stop ] button shown for the MEAP application to be started or stopped.
59 Integrated authentication service
60 SFP basic functions
61 AVS (Lightweight Applet Viewer Service) for LBP
62 SIS (Lightweight System Interface Service) for LBP
63 LDT
64 IMI customization
65 Extension of MEAP User Preference Service (Ver56) (preference shared among applications)
66 Reserved
68 Addition of Office Open XML's Word creation API
69 Extension of the encryption PDF function (AES 128-bit/256-bit)
70 Addition of 3 formats (uncompressed searchable PDF, XPS, and linearized searchable PDF)
71 Reserved
72 Reserved
73 API that supports A4 scanners and allows for specifying of the direction of the original image
74 Support for addition of the CN validation function
75 Reserved F-2-156
76 Addition of the SFP ExtendedTextInputView class

77 Reserved
78 Reserved
79 Reserved
80 Reserved
81 Reserved
82 API to recover from Sleep 1
T-2-70
2-102
2
Technical Explanation > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Starting, Stopping, or Uninstalling the MEAP Application
2 Technical Explanation > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Starting, Stopping, or Uninstalling the MEAP Application
2-103
4) Check to see that the status of the MEAP application in question is either [ Started ] or [ ●● Procedure to uninstall the MEAP application
Stopped ]. Before uninstalling the MEAP application, check that the following conditions are met.
• The MEAP application has stopped.
• The license has been disabled or deleted. (The status is "Not Installed".)
F-2-157
●● If the MEAP application cannot be started F-2-158

If the conditions to start the MEAP application are not satisfied, the MEAP application cannot For information on the procedure to stop the MEAP application, see the previous section
be started. "Procedure to start and stop a MEAP application".
If the MEAP application cannot be started, check the following items. For information on the procedure to delete the license file, see the following section
"Managing the License File".
Is a valid license installed?
If the license has expired, you cannot start the application. If the license has already expired, Note:
When a user tries to uninstall an application before deleting the license, the following
obtain a new license and then update the license. ( See "Managing the License File" in this
message is shown.
manual.)
Are the necessary resources available?

If the resources such as memory capacity or number of threads are not sufficient, the
application also cannot be started.
Delete any unnecessary data to secure sufficient resources.
F-2-159
If the license file of the selected application cannot be deleted, the [Uninstall] button is
If the application still cannot be started after checking the foregoing conditions, contact the grayed out and therefore the application cannot be uninstalled.
support department of the sales company.
CAUTION:
If the application you are uninstalling is associated with another application, a message
will appear to indicate that the package exported by the application will no loner be
available. Uninstalling such an application may also disable its associated applications.
2-103
2
Technical Explanation > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Starting, Stopping, or Uninstalling the MEAP Application
2 Technical Explanation > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Managing the License File
2-104
1) Log in to SMS to click [ MEAP Application Management ] on the menu. ■■Managing the License File
2) Check that the status of the application you want to uninstall is [ Stop ] and the license has
been disabled. (The status is "Not Installed".) ●● Outline
The license file management functions allow you to perform the following operations related
to the license file necessary for the MEAP application to run.
• Update the license which has already expired.
• Disable or delete the license file in order to uninstall the MEAP application.
These license management functions can be performed from the [ MEAP Application
Management ] screen.
The main license management functions are as follows:
Adding a license
When the license has expired, you can add a license file.
Disabling a License File

Before uninstalling the MEAP application, the license needs to be deleted. In that case, you
F-2-160
must first disable the license file because a license file which has not been disabled cannot
3) Click [ Uninstall ] button for the application to be uninstalled.
be downloaded or deleted.
Downloading / Removing an Invalidated License File

Before uninstalling the MEAP application, you need to delete its license file which has already
been disabled.
By downloading the license file to your PC before it is deleted, you can use it when installing
the application again to the same device.
WARNING:
After deleting the license file which has been disabled, you can no longer download the
license file.
F-2-161
4) Check the application name to be uninstalled shown on the screen to click [ Yes ] button.
Upon [ Yes ] button clicked, uninstallation process is started.
F-2-162
2-104
2
Technical Explanation > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Managing the License File
2-105
●● Procedure adding a license file 4) Click [ Browse ] button, and select the license file you want to install.
1) Log on to SMS.
2) On MEAP Application Management, click the name of the application to which you want to
add a license file.
F-2-165
F-2-163
5) Click [ Install ] button.
3) In [ Application / License Information ] page shown on the screen, click [ License
Management ] button.
F-2-166
F-2-164 6) Check the content of the confirmation page, and click [ OK ] button.
2-105
2
2-106
●● Procedure disabling a license file (suspending a license) 3) On Application/ License Information page, click [ License Management ] button.
CAUTION:
• Since the license file cannot be disabled when the application is still running, the
application needs to be stopped before disabling the license file.
• Once suspended, the status of the license will be ‘Not Installed’, and its application
will no longer be available for use.
• You can later restore a suspended license file as long as you are doing so on the
same iR, the device with the same device serial number.
• If the machine needs to be replaced due to a device failure, use the transfer license
during the replacement. (See "License for forwarding")
1) Stop the application you want to uninstall on MEAP Application Management page.
F-2-169
4) License Management page appears. Click [ Disable ] button.
F-2-167
2) Click the name of the application that you want to disable.
F-2-170
5) Click [ Yes ].
F-2-171
F-2-168
2-106
2
2-107
●● Procedure downloading / removing an invalidated license file 5) License Management page appears. To download, click [ Download ] button.
Note:
The downloaded license file can be used for reinstallation only in the same iR device
(with the same device serial number).
1) Log in to SMS. (See Chapter 2, "Log in to SMS.")

2) Application List page appears. On MEAP Application Management page , click the name of
the application you want.
F-2-174
6) When you have selected [ Download ] button, specify where you want to store the file by
following the instructions on the screen.
7) To delete, click [ Delete ] button.
F-2-172
3) Check Application/ License Information page appears.
4) On Application / License Information page, click [ License Management ] button.
F-2-175
F-2-173
2-107
2
2 Technical Explanation > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Other License File Management Functions
2-108
8) When the dialog to confirm deletion is shown, click [ Yes ] button. 1) Log in to SMS, stop the application to be forwarded. (see "Starting, Stopping, or
Uninstalling the MEAP Application".)
F-2-176
WARNING:
Without the license file, an application cannot be reinstalled even to the MEAP de-vice
that the application had been installed last time. Download and save the license file
before deleting the application.
■■Other License File Management Functions

F-2-177
●● Reusable license 2) Move to the download page of license forwarded for the device as sender (https:// IP
When reinstalling, Disable License file should be downloaded (see Chapter 0, “Disabling a address of device: 8443/sms/ForwardLicense).
License File .” and see Chapter 0, “Downloading / Removing an Invalidated License File.” in
this manual) or a license for reinstallation should be obtained from LMS, before reinstallation.
This specification aims to prevent misuse of applications.
To increase convenience of users, only application with unlimited validity date and application
counter (e.g. Portal Service, SDL, SSO) has been made to be able to install as many times
as needed by the same license file. This kind of license is called 'Reusable license'.
F-2-178
●● License for forwarding 3) Specify the application to be forwarded.

If the machine needs to be replaced due to a device failure, you can transfer the license
information used in the MEAP application to the new machine and continue its usage. Service
engineers are responsible for license transfer as this task requires the SMS hidden page (not
open to users).
The procedure is shown below.
F-2-179
.
2-108
2
Technical Explanation > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Other License File Management Functions
2 Technical Explanation > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Other License File Management Functions
2-109
4) Click [ Disable ] button on the [ Disable License File ]. 7) The dialogue [ File Download ] is displayed. Click [ Save ].
F-2-183
8) Specify the download destination, click [ Save ].
F-2-180
5) The window to confirm whether to create a transfer licence will be displayed. Click [ Yes ].
F-2-184
9) After downloading the license file for forwarding, click [ Delete ] to display the confirmation
F-2-181
screen and click [ Yes ] to delete the file (in consideration of breakage of license for
6) When [Download] button on the [ Download / Delete Transfer License File ] becomes
forwarding, deleting disabled license can be executed after all steps have been completed).
effective, click [Download] button.
F-2-185
10) Log out of SMS.
11) Since this downloaded transfer license is the file only to prove the license
invalidation, it cannot be used for installation to the other device as it is. Send the transfer
license to the service support contact of your nearest sales company to request issuance
of the new license for installation in the new device.
Note:
When requesting issuance of license for forwarding, inform the sales company of the
F-2-182 name of product name and serial No. of the device as sender, and of the name of
product name and serial No. of the forwarding destination.
12) Install application using the license for forwarding issued by the sales company.
2-109
2
Technical Explanation > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Other License File Management Functions
2 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > SSO-H (Single Sign-On-H) overview
2-110
Enhanced System Application Management ■■Default Authentication overview
This login service is selected when the department ID management is enabled or no
■■Outline
authentication function is set. Set the department ID management to [ON] on Setting /
[ Enhanced System Application Management ] mainly manages the login services for logging Registration (Additional Functions mode) of this device and register 7-digit ID and PIN by
in to devices. department. This setting restricts the use of this device only to users keying the registered
• Installing and uninstalling Enhanced System Application Management (login services, etc.) ID and PIN. Department IDs/ and PINs can be registered on the touch panel of this device or
• Switching login services (switching the method to log in to devices) Remote UI.
• Checking installation status of other System Applications
■■SSO-H (Single Sign-On-H) overview

This is a merger of the existing SDL and SSO login services and has the following features.
• The following three authentication methods may be selected from.
• Server authentication
• Server authentication and local authentication
• Local device authentication
• Active Directory or LDAP can be used as the server for server authentication.
• It is not necessary to prepare a server for Security Agent (SA). (In the case of SSO, SA is
necessary.)
Differences from conventional SSO
Domain B Domain C Domain B Domain C
DC DC DC DC
F-2-186
■■About Login Service DC DC

The login service is started up to authenticate the user when MEAP-enabled iR device is
booted up. Login service changes and install/ uninstall are carried out from the [ System
Management ] page.
SA
The preinstalled login applications are Default Authentication and Single Sign On-H, and
Default Authentication is enabled by default.
CAUTION: Device Device

• This device does not support SDL, conventional SSO and Security Agent.
Domain A Domain A
SSO SSO-H
F-2-187
2-110
2
Technical Explanation > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > SSO-H (Single Sign-On-H) overview
2-111
●● Environment confirmation
CAUTION:
Refer to the section of "Preparation for Using SSO-H" of this manual for system requirements
• When the setting is SSO-H, the card reader for the option controller card cannot be
needed in each login service.
used.
• When the setting is SSO-H, start up takes a little longer when compared to Default
Authentication (because of the time required for object initialization).
●● Specification of SSO-H
• To use the SEND function when the setting is for SSO-H, when sending email, mail Item Specification
addresses need to be programmed against each user. If they are not, email cannot No. of local device users Up to 5000
be sent. Note, however, that when sending i-Fax, the mail addresses set in the Maximum number of domains Active Directory : 200 domains (“this device” not included)
device are used. IPv6 Authentication provided in IPv6 supports AD/KDC/DNS of
• The system configuration is different from previous SSO, so individual management Windows Server 2008 only)
is required. Resource used Memory : 3600KB
Storage : 27000KB
• Data porting of user information that was being used with the earlier SSO local
File Description : 27
device authentication and SDL can be done by exporting/ importing. However, Thread : 33
application settings information cannot be ported. Socket : 33
Network ports Connecting 88 ： KDC
used 53 ： DNS
1 - 65535 ( Default : 389) : LDAP
Listening 10000 - 10100
Supported authentication server Active Directory ：
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 SP2 *
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 SP2 *
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 SP2 *
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 SP1
Microsoft Windows Server 2012
*64-bit OS is not supported.
LDAP ：
Novell eDirectory V8.8 SP6 for Windows
Lotus Domino V8.5 for Window
Availability of Department Available only in local authentication
Management Linkage
T-2-71
SSO/SDL handling
This model does not support older versions of SSO or SDL released in the past.
2-111
2
2-112
●● Setting the Authentication Method ●● Conducting Department ID Management When SSO-H Is Used
In the case of SSO-H, it is possible to use a combination of multiple authentication methods. Department ID Management can be conducted also when SSO-H is used for login service.
The combination can be changed from the SSO-H setting screen. (For details, refer to
e-Manual > MEAP > Menu for Administrators > Setting the SSO-H > "Setting the User Usage Conditions
Authentication System".) In order to allow coexistence of SSO-H and Department ID management, the following
conditions need to be satisfied.
• Only "Local Device Authentication" can be used as the user authentication method.
• The department ID and password have been already set for the SSO-H login user before
enabling department ID management.
• The information (the department ID and password) set for the login user coincides with the
information registered in Department ID Management.
Setting Procedure
F-2-188
In order to allow coexistence of SSO-H and Department ID management, the following
procedure needs to be performed to enable the setting.
Note: 1) Change the authentication method to DA (Default Authentication).
The default settings are shown below. Access SMS, and select [Default Authentication] in [Enhanced System Application
• User authentication method : "Server Authentication + Local Device Authentication"
• Type of authentication : "Active Directory" Management] > [Login Service]. (How to log in to SMS can be found in "Log in to SMS".)
CAUTION:
• To ensure the security, it is recommended to change the password and the user
name of the Local Device Authentication administrator from those at the time of
shipment immediately after you have started using SSO-H.
• Since department ID and password are not assigned to domain users, distributing
setting information where the department ID is enabled to a device where the server
authentication is enabled may make the device unable to be logged in. If the device
has become unable to be logged in, follow "Remedy to Be Performed When the
Device Has Become Unable to Be Logged in" in this manual.
●● Using an Accounting Product When SSO-H Is Used

SSO-H has collaborative linkage with NetSpot Accountant, imageWARE / iW Accounting F-2-189
Manager, imageWARE Enterprise Management Console / iW Management Console Access 2) Restart the device.
Management Plug-in, imageWARE Enterprise Management Console / iW Management Restart the device in order to reflect the changes in login service.
Console Accounting Management Plug-in.
For details on the combination, refer to the User's Manual or Service Manual of the product.
2-112
2
2-113
3) Disable Depart ID Management. 6) Change the user registration information of SSO-H.
In user mode ([Settings/Registration]), select [Management Settings] > [User Management] Access the URL shown below, and change the content to the information registered in
> [Department ID Management] > [OFF]. In the case of remote UI, access [Settings/ Department ID Management.
Registration] > [Management Settings] > [User Management] > [Department ID Or, import the setting file whose content you want to use.
Management] > [Department ID Management Settings], and deselect [Enable Department
ID Management]. SSO-H user registration information edition screen
(SSO management screen [Main Menu] > [User Management] > [Edit User Information] or
https://<IP address>:8443/sso/Edit).
F-2-190
4) Change the authentication method back to SSO-H authentication.
Access SMS, and select [Single Sign-On H] in [Enhanced System Application Management]
> [Login Service]. (How to log in to SMS can be found in "Log in to SMS". )
F-2-192
SSO-H user registration information import screen
(SSO management screen [Main Menu] > [User Management] > [Import User Information]
or (https://<IP address>:8443/sso/Import).
F-2-191
5) Restart the device.
Restart the device in order to reflect the changes in login service. F-2-193
2-113
2
2-114
7) Enable Depart ID Management. ●● Setting the Administrator for Server Authentication
In user mode ([Settings/Registration]), select [Management Settings] > [User Management] When using Server Authentication, the user who satisfies the specified conditions (user
> [Department ID Management] > [ON]. In the case of remote UI, access [Settings/ attribute and its match criteria) becomes the administrator (the device administrator and the
Registration] > [Management Settings] > [User Management] > [Department ID SSO-H administrator).
Management] > [Department ID Management Settings], and select [Enable Department ID The default user attribute and whether the setting value can be changed or not are shown
Management]. below.
Item Default value Active Directory LDAP
Search Criteria: Exact Match Not Available Available
User Attribute: memberOf Not Available Available
Character String: Canon Peripheral Admins Available Available
T-2-72
The settings of the administrator can be changed on the following screen: remote UI > Single
Sign-On H > Configuration (http://device's IP address:8000/sso/ActionSet)
F-2-194
F-2-196
8) Check that the device can be logged in.
Log off and then log on to check that the device can be logged in with an environment ●● System Manager Linkage (automatic ID allocation to
where Local Device Authentication and Department ID Management are enabled. SystemManagers)
SSO provided the automated function conventionally on Security Agent (hereinafter “SA”) to
authenticate System Manager by allocating IDs set on SA to domain authentication managers
(users belonging to Canon Peripheral Admins group). However, SSO-H does not support this
function.
F-2-195
Note:
In the case of conventional SSO, department management can be conducted also
when server authentication is used provided that iWAM/iW EMC account management
is used, which is not supported by SSO-H.
2-114
2
2 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Server authentication (Active Directory authentication)
2-115
■■Local device authentication ■■Server authentication (Active Directory authentication)
It is one of the user authentication methods using SSO-H, and is used for an iR device on a ●● Outline
stand-alone basis. It is one of the user authentication methods using SSO-H. User authentication is performed
with the device linked with a domain controller on the network in an Active Directory
environment. It is a user authentication where the user is authenticated by the domain on the
iR device
network when the user logs into the device. In addition to users belonging to the domain that
Local user includes the iR device, users belonging to domains that have a reliable relationship with the
domain (multi-domain) can also be authenticated. The domain name of the login destination
can be selected by the users themselves upon login.
Remote user
Using one of the options (Net Spot Accountant, imageWARE Accounting Manager, or
imageWARE EMC Accounting Management Plug-in) makes it possible to analyze/manage
the iR device usage.
F-2-197
Register the user to be authenticated on the database in the device. Dmain A Domain B
User management can be performed from the User Management screen (http://device's IP
Domain controller Domain controller
address:8000/sso/) or imageWARE Enterprise Management Console. The login destination is （Active Directory）
Trusting
（Active Directory）
[This device].
relationship
User Management screen
Available
Domain A user iR Device Domain B user
F-2-199
The protocol used is as follows.
• Kerberos:LLS/RLS/ILS
• NTLMV2:WLS(Web Service Login Service)
User information acquisition is done by LDAP, so the Active Directory LDAP port needs to be
made accessible. If LDAP connection fails, the authentication will end in error.
No. of supported domains: 200 (unchanged from SSO) Site access supported.
F-2-198
CAUTION:
In the case of using Server Authentication (Active Directory authentication), it is
necessary to synchronize the time settings of the Active Directory server and the
machine (and the PC for login). If the difference in time setting is 5 minutes or longer,
an error will occur at the time of login. (The setting of the allowable difference in time
can be changed.)
2-115
2
Technical Explanation > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Server authentication (Active Directory authentication)
2-116
CAUTION: Note:
• The Active Directory subnet is assumed to be the same subnet as the device sub-net.
Since department ID and password are not assigned to domain users, distributing
• In the Active Directory addresses, the Active Directories of the same site are listed.
setting information where the department ID is enabled to a device where the server • Active Directories of the same subnet as the device are listed first.
authentication is enabled may make the device unable to be logged in. If the device has • If there is no Active Directory with the same subnet as the device, Active Directories
become unable to be logged in, follow "Remedy to Be Performed When the Device Has belonging to different subnets than the device are listed.
Become Unable to Be Logged in" in this manual. • The Active Directories within the same site are accessed in order. Note, however, that
where there are multiple Active Directories within the same site, access to those Active
Directories will be in the order in which the address list was obtained.
• If there is no Active Directory within the same site, if access outside of the site is
programmed, Active Directories outside of the site will be accessed in the order in which
●● Access Mode in Sites the address list was obtained.
With SSO-H, access to Active Directory within site can be prioritized or restricted, so there
is a setting called 'Access Mode in Sites'. Sites programmed in Active Directory comprise
multiple subnets. In this mode, SSO-H uses site information to access the same site as the
Site list acquisition
device, or the subnet Active Directory.
After booting up, upon the first login by LLS or ILS/ RLS, the site list is obtained from the
• The SSO-H default setting is with the site internal access mode OFF.
Active Directory. In order to obtain the site list from the Active Directory, Active Directory
• Access Active Directory within same site only.
needs to be accessed in LDAP, so SASL-Kerberos-Bind is used by the login user account. If
• If there is no Active Directory within the same site, or if connection fails, there will be an
authentication by Active Directory should fail, an authentication error will be generated and
authentication error.
the site list will be acquired again from Active Directory upon the next login.
• Access another site if Active Directory within the same site cannot be located.
• If there is no Active Directory within the same site, or if connection fails, an Active Directory
In SSO-H, the Active Directory to be accessed when acquiring the site list cannot be
external to the site will be accessed.
specified. In other words, if there is no site list, which site's Active Directory is accessed
• If all attempts to access Active Directory fail, there will be an authentication error.
depends upon the order of the Active Directory addresses returned by DNS. Therefore, when
acquiring the site list, LDAP may access the Active Di rectory of a different site. Therefore, in
The operating specifications of the site internal access mode are as described below.
such cases, it is sometimes necessary to access across sites or subnets, which means that
When first logging in to the login service after booting iR, the domain controller (DC) is
LDAP protocol needs to have continuity across sites (subnets) (normally, LDAP is port No.
obtained from the site list.
389). Further, if connection with Active Directory fails when acquiring site information, another
However, upon the first login, even if the site functionality is active, connection to DC is
Active Directory will be accessed.
random. (This is because, if connection to DC should fail, the site to which the device belongs
Site information, once it has been acquired, is cached within the device. The life settings of
cannot be ascertained.)
the cache can be set so that site information in the cache is updated upon the first login after
If the device IP address or the domain name are changed, the site settings are acquired once
the device boots up, or so that the cache is not updated once acquired.
more.
In this mode, at the first login (first authentication of domain to which the device belongs)
LDAP-Bind is performed directly to DC and site information acquired by LDAP from DC.
From the acquired site list, the site to which the device subnet belongs is extracted and this
becomes the site to which device belongs. Active Directory address is acquired (retrieved
from DNS)
2-116
2
2-117
Settings for access mode in sites 1) SSO-Tokyo acquires site lists from Active Directories.
Switching between site internal access mode/ non site internal access mode, as well as Note, however, that the Active Directories accessed in order to acquire site lists are in the
detailed mode settings, are done via DMS or iWEMC. order in which they were returned by DNS, so there is no guarantee that the same Active
Directory will be accessed as in the initial settings (upon device settings or changes to NW
Site internal access mode settings window (DMS) settings, etc.).
[Site subnet list]
Site: Tokyo: = 172.24.12.0/24, 172.24.35.0/24
Site: Osaka: = 192.168.1.0/24
Site: Hakata: = 211.111.1.0/24
As a result, since SSO-Tokyo is 172.24.12.80, the subnet is 172.24.12.0/24, and is judged
as belonging to site Tokyo.
F-2-200
2) The DNS server obtains its Active Directory list from the primary or secondary DNS, as set
The figure below shows a sample of processing Access Mode in Sites. in the device.
Sample of Processing Access Mode in Sites [Active Directory]
172.24.12.2, 172.24.35.2, 192.168.1.2, 211.111.1.30
3) Of the Active Directories in 2), above, the ones that belong to the same site (Tokyo) are
Domain X 172.24.12.2 and 172.24.35.2.
4.Access Active
Directory of same
Repllic
Site:Tokyo:: Of these, the Active Directory that is the same subnet as SS-Tokyo is 172.24.12.2.
DNS Server A site ation 172.24.12.0/24
records: DC-Tokyo/DNS 172.24.35.0/24 Therefore, this one will be accessed.
AD 192.168.1.2
n
172.24.12.2 1. When making initial

io
4) If access fails at step 3), above, the other Active Directory of the same site, 172.24.35.2,
at
AD 172.24.12.2 Site:Osaka::
settings, obtain site list
lic
AD 172.24.35.2
pl
192.168.1.0/24
and ascertain which will be accessed.
Re
AD 211.111.1.30 2.Get Active site the device

SSO-Tokyo 172.24.12.80 Directory list belongs to. Site:Hakata:: 5) If access fails at step 4), above, also, SSO-Osaka and SSO-Hakata will be accessed (the
SSO-Osaka 192.168.1.90 SSO-Tokyo 211.111.1.0/24
SSO-Hakata 211.111.1.3 N 172.24.12.80 WAN order will depend on the order of the Active Directories in DNS). Note, however, that this is
WA3. Access Active
Directory of same an optional operation.
subnet
Site:Tokyo
DC-Osaka/DNS 172.12.12.0/24 DC-Hakata/DNS
172.168.1.2 172.24.35.0/24
Logging into other domains at multi-domain
211.111.1.30
At multi-domain, if another domain is logged into, based on the site/ subnet information
retrieved in the home domain, the Active Directories of the login destination domain/ KDC
SSO-Tokyo SSO-Tokyo address list are computed. In the event that the domain controller IP addresses of other
Site:Osaka 192.168.1.90 Site:Hakata 211.111.1.3
192.168.1.0/24 211.111.1.0/24 domains are outside of the site access range, and only the domain controller within the site
is programmed for access, an error message will be displayed to the effect that the site
F-2-201
information is incorrect.
2-117
2
2 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Server authentication and local device authentication
2-118
■■Server Authentication (LDAP Authentication) ■■Server authentication and local device authentication
It is one of the user authentication methods using SSO-H. User authentication is performed It is a user authentication method provided with both the "server authentication" function and
with the device linked with the LDAP Server on the network in an LDAP environment. the "local device authentication" function.
It is possible to use server authentication to authenticate the users registered on the
iR Device LDAP Server
Local user Remote user authentication server under normal conditions and use local device authentication when a
user who cannot be added to the authentication server needs to be temporarily authenticated.
If a trouble occurs in the authentication server, local device authentication can be used as an
emergency measure until recovery from the trouble.
F-2-202
Server authentication
LDAP server authentication can be used for devices that support MEAP User Preference Local user Localローカルデバイス認証
device authentication
Service (MEAP Specification Ver.56) and MEAP Application Setting Information Management
(MEAP Specification Ver.57).
As for models that do not support MEAP User Preference Service and MEAP Application
Setting Information Management, [LDAP Server] cannot be selected as the type of the
authentication server on the SSO-H Configuration page. Moreover, it is not possible to access
the LDAP Server Management screen and the Add Server screen.
Remote user
Simple bind (a method where the password is not encrypted) is used as the bind
F-2-203
(authentication) between SSO-H and LDAP server. It is therefore strongly recommended to
always use SSL connection from a security standpoint.
As for the version of LDAP, only Ver.3 is supported.
ON/OFF of SSL connection can be changed on the LDAP Server Management page.
The time-out value of connection is 60 seconds.
In the case of using LDAP server authentication, the characters entered as the user name are
not case-sensitive, but the characters entered as the password are case-sensitive.
In the case of SSO-H, authentication is not allowed when the user name includes "* (asterisk)".
If authentication is performed with "* (asterisk)" used in the user name, an authentication error
occurs.
CAUTION:
Since department ID and password are not assigned to domain users, distributing
setting information where the department ID is enabled to a device where the server
authentication is enabled may make the device unable to be logged in. If the device has
become unable to be logged in, follow "Remedy to Be Performed When the Device Has
Become Unable to Be Logged in" in this manual.
2-118
2
Technical Explanation > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Server authentication and local device authentication
2 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Steps to Change Login Services
2-119
■■Steps to Change Login Services 3) When login service application you have selected turns to Start after Restart, restart the
device.
1) Click [ Enhanced System Application Management] on [System Management ].
F-2-204 F-2-206
2) A page will appear showing the various selections you can make for the login service. Click
[SWITCH] button for the login service to be used. CAUTION:
In case that the login method to a device is set to SSO-H, if you log in SMS with RLS
authentication, no selection is displayed although it is the screen to change the login
method.
F-2-205
F-2-207
This is the specification to prevent the inconsistent setting which enables to stop SMS
Installer Service (Password Authentication) by changing the login method to Default
Authentication.
When you want to change the login method to a device, log in the SMS with the
password authentication.
2-119
2
Technical Explanation > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Steps to Change Login Services
2 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Login Service Installation Procedure
2-120
■■Login Service Installation Procedure 3) Click [ Install] button.
Follow the procedure show below to install login services.

1) Access SMS, and select [System Management] > [Enhanced System Application
Management].
F-2-208 F-2-210
2) Click the [Browse] button, and specify the enhanced system application file and license file.
F-2-209
2-120
2
Technical Explanation > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Login Service Installation Procedure
2 Technical Explanation > MEAP > System Application Management > Password authentication
2-121
■■Login Service Uninstallation Procedure System Application Management
Follow the procedure show below to uninstall login services. This function manages the login services for logging in to SMS.
In order to uninstall a login service, the service needs to be stopped ("Installed" status). There are two login methods: one is "password authentication" where you enter the password
Default Authentication cannot be uninstalled even when the service is stopped. for SMS on the SMS login screen and log in, and the other is "RLS authentication" where you
do not use the SMS login screen but enter the user ID and password on the RLS (Remote
1) Access SMS, and select [System Management] > [Enhanced System Application Login Service) screen for authentication.
Management].
■■Password authentication
Enter the password on the SMS login screen for authentication. Only one password can be
set for SMS.
The login procedure is shown below.
1) Access SMS from the browser of a PC on the same network as the MEAP device. The URL
is as follows.
URL: https://<IP address of MEAP device>:8443/sms/
Ex.) https://172.16.188.240:8443/sms/
F-2-211 Note:
2) Click the [Uninstall] button of the login service you want to uninstall. To encrypt the password information input when logging in, SSL of the login screen
was made effective. However, it is redirected to new URL (effective SSL) even when
accessing with URL (non-SSL) before.
2) Enter the password in the password entry field, and click the [Log In] button. The default
password is “MeapSmsLogin.” (The password is case-sensitive.)
F-2-212
F-2-213
2-121
2
Technical Explanation > MEAP > System Application Management > Password authentication
2 Technical Explanation > MEAP > System Application Management > RLS Authentication
2-122
Note:
■■RLS Authentication
If you want to change the display language, select the language from the drop-down list Login without using the SMS login window but by entering the user ID and password for
of [Language] at the upper right of the login screen, and click the update button.
authentication in the RLS (Remote Login Service) window. The user information (user name
and password) used is the information for server authentication or local device authentication.
The login procedures are as follows.
1) Access SMS by RLS Authentication from the PC browser on the same network as the
F-2-214 MEAP device.
URL: https://<IP address of MEAP device>:8443/sms/rls/
Note: Ex.) https://172.16.188.240:8443/sms/rls/
If the wrong password is entered, the following window is displayed. The user's system
administrator may have changed the password, so confirm the password with the Note:
system administrator. Note that there is no special password for service. • To encrypt the password information input when logging in, SSL of the login screen was
made effective. However, it is redirected to new URL (effective SSL) even when accessing
with URL (non-SSL) before.
F-2-216
F-2-215
Note:
• When the device authentication method used is server authentication, enter the user
name, password and login destination registered with authentication server and then click
‘Log In’.
• If the authentication method used is local device authentication, enter the user name,
password and login destination registered in the device and click ‘Log In’ button.
The user information is set as below for local device authentication by default. Both are
case sensitive.
• User Name: Administrator
• Password: password
2-122
2
Technical Explanation > MEAP > System Application Management > RLS Authentication
2 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Setting the method to log in to SMS > Outline
2-123
Note: Setting the method to log in to SMS

Only the following users may us SMS via RLS.
• For local device authentication, users with Administrator or Device Admin authority. ■■Outline
• In the case of server authentication, the users who belong to the group (default: Canon
Peripheral Admins) specified as the device administrator on the SSO-H Configuration The method to log into SMS can be specified by one of the following methods.
screen. • If you want to change the password authentication settings: Use RLS authentication
to log in, and change the settings.
• If you want to change the RLS authentication settings: Use password authentication
to log in, and change the settings.
The following table shows the start/stop combinations of the two login methods.
Combination of Login Methods
Start RLS Authentication Stop RLS Authentication

Start Password Authentication Login available with either method Login available only with
Stop Password Authentication Login available only with RLS Setting unavailable
Authentication
T-2-73
F-2-217
CAUTION:
If only login via RLS is programmed, login may be disabled for the following reasons.
Note:
SMS Access can be gained also from Remote UI. • Authentication server is down
Access Remote UI and click on SMS shortcut shown on the lower right of the screen to • Network problem, no communication with authentication server
gain access to SMS.
When only the password authentication is enabled, the password authentication screen In the event of either of these cases, try the following.
is shown. 1. If local device authentication is active, try logging in with local device
When only the RLS authentication is enabled, no further authentication is needed to
access SMS. This is because users have already authorized upon accessing to Remote authentication.
UI. 2. If only server authentication is active, launch in MEAP safe mode from the device
service mode.
After launching in MEAP safe mode, the Default Authentication will become active, and
you will be able to log in to SMS with password authentication. After logging into SMS,
set the password authentication login to ON (active) and restore the device from MEAP
safe mode to normal mode. Until the problem blocking authentication is resolved, log
into SMS with password authentication.
F-2-218
2-123
2
Technical Explanation > MEAP > Setting the method to log in to SMS > Outline
2-124
●● Setting for login by Password Authentication 4) Click [Start] or [Stop] button shown in Status field of SMS Installer Service (Password
The procedures for changing the password authentication Start/ stop settings are as follows. Authentication) to check if the status is changed.
1) Access SMS login screen by RLS Authentication from the PC browser on the same network
as the MEAP device.
Ex.) https://172.16.188.240:8443/sms/rls
2) Enter the user name and the password of the user registered as an administrator, select
the login destination, and then click the [Log In] button.
Login screen (In case authentication method is SSO-H)
F-2-221
5) Logout once and login again to check to see that the setting is applied properly.
When clicking [Stop] to change the status to [Start], another password authentication login
screen is firstly shown. When trying to access the password authentication screen after
clicking [Start] to change the status to [Stop], the user is automatically redirected to RLS
authentication screen.
Password authentication started screen and Password authentication stopped screen

F-2-219
3) Select [System Application Management]
F-2-222
F-2-220
2-124
2
2-125
●● Setting for login by RLS Authentication 4) Click on [Start] or [Stop] button shown on Status field of SMS Installer Service (Remote
The procedures for changing the RLS authentication Start/ Stop settings are as follows. Login Service Authentication) to check if the status is changed.
1) Access the SMS login screen using the normal method (password authentication). The
URL is shown below.
Ex.) https://172.16.188.240:8443/sms/rls
2) Enter the password in the password entry field, and click the [Log In] button. The default
password is "MeapSmsLogin". (Case sensitive)
Login screen by Password Authentication
F-2-225
5) Log out and then log in again and access via the RLS authentication login window.
When RLS authentication is set to [Start], another RLS login screen is firstly shown. When
accessing to RLS status screen with the setting of [Stop], the user will be redirected to the
password authentication screen.
RLS authentication started screen and RLS authentication stopped screen
F-2-223
3) Select [System Application Management] on System Management menu.
F-2-226
F-2-224
2-125
2
2 Technical Explanation > MEAP > MEAP Application System Information > Checking the System Information
2-126
■■Initial Display Languages of SMS MEAP Application System Information
SMS supports English and Japanese. Display language can be changed with selecting by the
■■Outline
drop down list on a login page.
The initial display language at the time of accessing SMS depends on the setting. You can check the device's platform information and the MEAP application's system
information.
Start
Refer to the value of ■■Checking the System Information

Logged in by RLS Yes portalLang stored in
authentication. Cookie. System information that can be checked from the screen
• MEAP Specifications version (MEAP Spec Ver)
No Remote UI display English or Japanese • MEAP Contents version
setup language
Refer to the setting of the • Java Virtual Machine version
Accept-Language header, • System application information
which a browser sends out. Except English or Japanese
Language English or Japanese • The name of the installed system application
priority setting of a • The installation date of the installed system application
browser
Refer to the setting of a language Except English or Japanese
• Application ID of the installed system application
displaying in registration/initial • The status of the installed system application
setting [Additional Function].
Display setting English or Japanese
of a device
The checking procedure is shown below.
Except English or Japanese
Display in English. Display in the

language configured. 1) Log in to SMS.
F-2-227
2) Select [System Management] > [System Information] on System Management menu.
●● When accessing by SMS Installer Service (Password Authentication)

It is referred in order of the language priority (setting of the Accept-Language header which a
browser sends out) and the display-language setting in the "user mode". When the language
setup is other than English or Japanese, it is displayed in English.
●● When accessing by SMS Installer Service (Remote Login Service

Authentication).
Initial display language is set by the language setting (value of portalLang storing in Cookie)
selected by the remote UI screen. When the setting is other than English or Japanese,
Selection of display language is performed in a similar way with the SMS Installer Service
(Password Authentication) mentioned above. F-2-228
2-126
2
Technical Explanation > MEAP > MEAP Application System Information > Checking the System Information
2 Technical Explanation > MEAP > MEAP Application System Information > Printing the System Information of a MEAP Application
2-127
■■Display of System Information Details ■■Printing the System Information of a MEAP Application
The system information details can be displayed to check more than one pieces of information MEAP system information can be printed out with iR device for confirmation.
all at the same time: platform information, system application information, information on the
installed MEAP applications, etc. Note:
The system information of the MEAP application that you checked in the previous
section is exactly the same as the system information of the MEAP application that is
1) Log in to SMS. output.
2) Select [System Info] on System Management menu.
3) Click [Display Details] button.
Follow the steps below when confirming information:
1) Select [ Settings/ Registration] > [ Management Settings] > [ License/ Other] > [MEAP
Settings] > [ Print System Information] .
Note:
When System Manager ID and PIN are set, go to Top screen and log in as System
Manager to continue jobs.
2) Press [ Yes] button.
F-2-229
4) System information of each application (including system applications) is shown in an
additional window. Copy and paste all the information in a file to attach to AR reports as
text information. This function is useful to check status information of each application.
F-2-231
Note:
MEAP system information was printed out in PDL format conventionally. However,
the information has been printed out in text format instead of PDL format, enabling iR
devices without PDL installation to print out information (iR C3220 and later).
F-2-230
2-127
2
Technical Explanation > MEAP > MEAP Application System Information > Printing the System Information of a MEAP Application
2 Technical Explanation > MEAP > MEAP Application Information > Procedure to Check MEAP Application Information
2-128
■■Content of MEAP system information MEAP Application Information
Application System Information
■■Outline
Application Name: C-Cabinet Gateway for MEAP
Application ID/System Application Name: 03a46668-63e4-4636-9cbb-492b6cef05d5 You can check the MEAP application installed on the device.
Application Version: 1.0.0 The following information can be checked on the MEAP application information screen.
Status: Resolved
Installed on: Tue Oct 21 14:00:11 GMT+09:00 2003
Vendor : Canon Inc. Application Information
License Status : Installed • Application Name • Description • Version • Export Package
Maximum Memory Usage : 1024 • Application ID • Manufacturer • Copyright • Export Service
Registered Service : • Installed on • ContactAddress • Applet-Name • Import Package
• Applet Number • Category • URL • Import Service
• Resources Used (Storage, Memory, Threads, Sockets, File Descriptors)
item content
Application Name It is the name (bundle-name) declared in a statement within the application
program. It may not necessarily be identical to the name of the program. License Information
Application ID/System Application ID (application-id) items which are declared on the declaration • Status • Serial Number • Expires after
Application Name statement in the application program are printed.
Application Version It is the version of the application (bundle-version) declared in a statement
within the application program. ■■ Procedure to Check MEAP Application Information
Status It indicates the status of the application in question; specifically, 1) Log in to SMS.
Installed: the application has been installed.
Active: the application is being in use. 2) Select [System Management] > [MEAP Application Information] on System Management
Resolved: the application is at rest. menu.
Installed On It indicates the date on which the application was installed.
Vendor It is the name of the vendor that developed the application, and is the name
(bundle-vendor) declared in a statement within the application program.
License Status It indicates the status of the license; specifically,
None: no license is needed.
Not Installed: no license has been installed.
Installed: the appropriate license has been installed.
Invalid: the license has been invalidated.
Overlimt: the license has been used beyond its permitted limit.
License Expires After It indicates the date after which the license expires. If the status of the
license is 'none', this item will not be printed.
License Upper Limit It indicates the limit imposed on individual counter readings. If the status of
the license is 'none', this item will not be printed.
Counter Value It is the current counter reading of a specific counter. If the status of the
license is 'none', this item will not be printed.
Maximum Memory It indicates the maximum amount of memory that the application uses. It is
Usage the amount (maximum memory usage) declared in a statement within the F-2-232
application program, and is expressed in kilobytes.

Registered Service It is a list of services that have been registered by the application with the
MEAP framework.Some services may not have printable data.
T-2-74
2-128
2
Technical Explanation > MEAP > MEAP Application Information > Procedure to Check MEAP Application Information
2 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Check License > Procedure to Check the License File
2-129
3) The MEAP application information screen appears. Scroll the screen and check the
Check License
information of the target application.
■■Outline
You can check the contents of the license file.
■■Procedure to Check the License File

1) Log in to SMS.
2) Select [System Management] > [Check License] on System Management menu.
F-2-233
F-2-234
3) Click the [Browse..] button, specify a license file, and click the [Check] button.
F-2-235
2-129
2
Technical Explanation > MEAP > Check License > Procedure to Check the License File
2 Technical Explanation > MEAP > MEAP Application Setting Information Management and Log Management > Outline
2-130
Changing SMS Login Password MEAP Application Setting Information Management
■■Outline and Log Management
You can change the password for logging into SMS. ■■Outline
If you forgot the login password and you want to change the password back to the default
The MEAP Application Setting Information Management page and the MEAP Application Log
value (MeapSmsLogin), see "If you forgot the password (SMS login password initialization)"
Management page provide menu related to "MEAP Application Configuration Service" for
in this chapter.
managing MEAP application setting information and menu related to "MEAP Application Log
Service" for managing log information respectively.
■■Procedure to Change the SMS Login Password
1) Log in to SMS.
2) Select [System Management] > [Chage Password] on System Management menu.
F-2-238
●● MEAP Application Configuration Service

This service is used to manage the MEAP application setting information. It has functions
F-2-236
such as saving setting information to the MEAP area. Ver 57 of MEAP Specifications supports
3) Enter the current password and a new password, and then click the [Change] button. this service.
●● MEAP Application Log Service

This service is used to collect MEAP application logs (debug logs and authentication logs).
Ver 58 of MEAP Specifications supports this service.
The collected logs can be downloaded or deleted in user mode.
The settings such as the log level to be saved cannot be made from SMS.
F-2-237 These settings depend on the MEAP application. For detailed information, refer to the manual
for the application.
Note:
The [Reset] button on the [Change Password] screen is used to clear the value entered
in the text field. It is not a button for changing the SMS login password back to the
default value.
2-130
2
Technical Explanation > MEAP > MEAP Application Setting Information Management and Log Management > Outline
2 Technical Explanation > MEAP > MEAP Application Setting Information Management and Log Management > MEAP Application Setting Information Management
2-131
■■Advantages Obtained When Using the Services ■■MEAP Application Setting Information Management
By using MEAP Application Setting Information Management and MEAP Application Log The setting data (stored on the device) of the MEAP applications which support MEAP
Service, as long as the MEAP application supports these services, you can collectively Application Setting Information Management can be deleted. The procedure is shown below.
perform data management tasks.
1) Log in to SMS.
●● Devices and MEAP applications which do not support new functions 2) Select [System Management] > [MEAP Application Setting Information Management] on
System Management menu.
App1 App2
Dedicated management tool Dedicated management tool
Setting and reference Setting and reference
App1 App2
Device
Setting and reference Setting and reference
Config data Pref data Log data Config data Pref data Log data
(App1 format) (App1 format) (App1 format) (App2 format) (App2 format) (App2 format)
F-2-239
F-2-241
As for devices and MEAP applications that do not support the service, the setting information
3) Select an application you want to delete, and click the [Delete] button.
and log data are managed on an application-by-application basis.
●● Devices and MEAP applications which support new functions
General-purpose management tool
Setting and reference
App1 App2
Device
Configuration Preference Log Platform

management service management service management service F-2-242
Config data Preference data Log data

Note:
(common format) (common format) (common format)
If a MEAP application that contains setting data which can be shared (not dedicated
to the application) is installed, the application name [Shared Setting Information of
F-2-240
Applications] is displayed.
As for devices and MEAP applications that support the service, information can be collectively
managed.
2-131
2
Technical Explanation > MEAP > MEAP Application Setting Information Management and Log Management > MEAP Application Setting Information Management
2 Technical Explanation > MEAP > MEAP Application Setting Information Management and Log Management > MEAP Application Log Management
2-132
■■MEAP Application Log Management 4) To download the logs
The file save dialog for the log file will appear. Specify the destination and save the file.
The log data (stored on the device) of the MEAP applications which support MEAP
Application Log Service can be downloaded or deleted. The procedure is shown below.
1) Log in to SMS.
2) Select [System Management] > [MEAP Application Log Management] on System
Management menu.
F-2-245
5) To delete the logs
The confirmation screen will appear to prompt you to delete the logs. Click the [Yes] button
to delete the logs.
F-2-243
F-2-246
3) Select [Download Application Logs] or [Delete Application Logs].
F-2-244
2-132
2
Technical Explanation > MEAP > MEAP Application Setting Information Management and Log Management > MEAP Application Log Management
2 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Maintenance > Backup of the MEAP Application Area and Recovery of the Backup Data Using SST
2-133
Maintenance ●● Backup Item Automatically Copied
The following data are backed up using SST:
■■Backup of the MEAP Application Area and Recovery of the The following data are backed up (saved as Meapbackup.bin) using SST.
• MEAP applications.
Backup Data Using SST
• Setup data generated by MEAP applications (Note that image data stored in BOX will not
●● Outline be saved for MEAP applications using BOX function).
When replacing or formatting the HDD, the data in the MEAP application area needs to be • User information data registered for local device authentication in SSO-H
temporarily saved to your PC. • SMS password
This chapter describes information on backing up the data in the MEAP application area and
recovering the backup data. CAUTION:
Do not execute [Initialize All Data/Settings] in user mode during the period from backup
In the case of MEAP-installed devices, the application is license-managed, so the application using SST to recovery of the data.
needs to be reinstalled and reconfigured when replacing or formatting the HDD.
In that case, a license for reinstallation needs to be downloaded and the customer data and
configuration information need to be recovered, and these procedures pose heavy burdens
on the service technician.
The area used for the MEAP application can be easily saved/recovered by using the backup
function of SST (Service Support Tool).
This greatly reduces the work burden on the service technician.
Please note that the application cannot be illegally copied because the backup data can be
recovered only when the iR device has the same serial number.
F-2-247
WARNING: When [Initialize All Data/Settings] is executed, the key used to combine encrypted
You must not perform any other work (including checking operation) until the HDD has backup data (SMS password, etc.) is initialized, which makes it impossible to combine
been backed up. This arrangement is to prevent a mismatch of MEAP counter readings the data.
and the HDD contents, and any fault in operation arising as the result of failure to It means that SMS cannot be accessed even when the backup data has been
observe this will not be covered by the guarantee of operation. recovered using SST.
If you inadvertently executed [Initialize All Data/Settings] and can no longer access
SMS, the SMS login password needs to be initialized by following the procedure shown
Note: in "When SMS Cannot Be Accessed" in "Log in to SMS" in this manual.
The application that is installed with a reusable license can be reinstalled by using the
same license.
2-133
2
Technical Explanation > MEAP > Maintenance > Backup of the MEAP Application Area and Recovery of the Backup Data Using SST
2 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Maintenance > Procedure for backing up the MEAP application area using SST
2-134
●● Data backed up using SST in the case of iR-ADV devices ■■Procedure for backing up the MEAP application area using SST
In the case of iR-ADV devices, menus are implemented as MEAP application. Therefore the
1) Switching Login Service / Backup of Login User Information
following items can be also backed up (stored as Meapbackup.bin).
If SSO-H is used for the login service, switch to default authentication before backing
• Setting items of each menu in the main menu ( Copy, Scan and Send, Fax, Scan and
up the user information. Although SST will back up local device user information, it is
Store, Access Stored Files, Fax/I-Fax Inbox, ).
recommended to export the user information just in case. For local device user information
• Favorite settings
backup, go to User Management page of SSO-H site and export the data. (The SSO-H
• Default settings
login page opens with the URL "https://<device IP address>:8443/sso/").
• Settings of option shortcuts
• Previous settings CAUTION:
• Settings of quick menu
• If a HDD of a system that uses SSO-H is formatted without changing the login
• Button size information service to the default authentication, the error message “The login service must be
• Wallpaper settings set again with SMS” appears and the system cannot start up when you attempt to
• Quick menu button information restart the system after formatting.
• Restrict quick menu use • If this problem occurs, change the login service to SSO-H with SMS. If you cannot
access to SMS since you do not have the IP address of the device, start the system
●●Requirements for Backup Using the SST with FIXIP mode -hold down the numeric keys 1 and 7 and turn the power switch on.
The IP address “172.16.1.100” will be automatically assigned for the device. Then
The following conditions must be met for use of the function:
log in to SMS specifying the address.
1) Device Firmware Version

Device Firmware Version for SST (Ver4.2x)
2) Starting the device in Download Mode
Boot ROM System SST Press [2] and [8] buttons at the same time on the control panel and turn on the main power
iR-ADV C2030/C2020 series Boot ROM is not Already supported The version supporting switch to start the device in Download Mode. Note that SST backup function is enabled
iR-ADV C2230/C2220 series equipped. since the 1st the corresponding
iR-ADV 500/400 series version. devices.
only in Download Mode.
imageRUNNER ADVANCE Already supported Already supported The version supporting

series other than above since the 1st since the 1st the corresponding 3) Connecting the main unit to the PC to start SST
version. version. devices. Connect the main unit to the PC with SST installed using the crossing cable and the like to
T-2-75 start SST on the PC.
2) SST Version
Version 4.2.x or later. An earlier version will not permit the use of the function. If needed,
upgrade the SST.
3) Space for backup

To back up the HDD of the iR, the PC must have approx 1024MB of free space at
maximum. Sizes of backup files depend on actual data capacities to be backed up.
2-134
2
Technical Explanation > MEAP > Maintenance > Procedure for backing up the MEAP application area using SST
2 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Maintenance > Procedure for backing up the MEAP application area using SST
2-135
4) Connecting the device using SST 6) Saving backup data
When starting SST, select the target device type as Single and click [Start] button. Upon the backup data transferred to the PC, enter an appropriate file name and click [OK]
to save the backup data on the PC.
F-2-250
When the file is successfully saved, click [OK] button, and then click [Return to Menu]
button.
F-2-248
5) Generating backup data to transfer it to the PC (uploading)
Click [Upload Data] button of SST and select “Meapback.bin” as the item to be backed up
to click [ Start ] button.
F-2-251
F-2-249
2-135
2
Technical Explanation > MEAP > Maintenance > Procedure for backing up the MEAP application area using SST
2 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Maintenance > Procedures to Restore Backup Data
2-136
CAUTION:
■■Procedures to Restore Backup Data
Do not execute [Initialize All Data/Settings] in user mode during the period from backup 1) Connecting to the device
using SST to recovery of the data. Connect the device using SST by following step 1 to step 4 of the Procedure for backing up
the MEAP application area using SST.
2) Restoring backup file

Click [Download Data] button and select the data backed up in the previous step (Meapback.
bin) to click [Start Restoring Data]. Note that the data backed up in a different version
cannot be restored.
F-2-252
When [Initialize All Data/Settings] is executed, the key used to combine encrypted
backup data (SMS password, etc.) is initialized, which makes it impossible to combine F-2-253
the data. 3) Transferring Data
It means that SMS cannot be accessed even when the backup data has been When the data is successfully transferred, click the [OK] button shown on the screen. To
recovered using SST. continue other jobs, click [Return to Menu] button.
If you inadvertently executed [Initialize All Data/Settings] and can no longer access
SMS, the SMS login password needs to be initialized by following the procedure shown
in "When SMS Cannot Be Accessed" in "Log in to SMS" in this manual.
F-2-254
4) Turn off and on the main power switch of the device to gain access in SMS to check that
MEAP applications are surely restored.
5) Restore the backup data and setting saved. Note that the user information of the local
device is included in the backup data, thus does not need to be restored.
2-136
2
Technical Explanation > MEAP > Maintenance > Procedures to Restore Backup Data
2 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Maintenance > Formatting and Replacing the HDD
2-137
■■Formatting and Replacing the HDD ●● Formatting the HDD
Procedure to format the hard disk
●● Outline
Follow the following procedure to format the HDD.
If the HDD is broken or does not function correctly due to failure of the system (excluding the
MEAP application), it needs to be formatted or replaced.
1) Connecting to the device
When the HDD is formatted or replaced, the files of the MEAP application stored in it will be
Connect the device using SST by following step 1 to step 4 of "Procedure for backing up
lost, so make a backup of the MEAP application area according to “Procedure for backing up
the MEAP application area using SST".
the MEAP application area using SST” if possible. If a backup cannot be made, the MEAP
application and the license files need to be reinstalled.
2) Formatting the HDD
As for the MEAP counter information, it will not be lost because it is backed up just like the
Select “Format HDD” from SST menu to format the HDD.
conventional counter.
Note:
If a backup cannot be made, a special license file (a license file for installation with the HDD can be formatted also by starting Download mode using the USB memory and
expiration date carried over from the current counter value) is required to reinstall the MEAP executing formatting from the displayed menu.
application. This special license file is treated as a service tool and cannot be obtained by a
general user.
In order to obtain a special license file, a service technician needs to contact a person in
charge of support of a sales company.
When contacting the person in charge of support, the service technician also needs to
provide the serial number of the device and the name of the MEAP application installed.
In the support departments of regional headquarters of Canon, all license files of the
applications that have been issued are filed according to device serial numbers, enabling you
to obtain a series of license files through a single screen as long as you can identify the serial
number of the device in question.
Note:
The application that is installed with a reusable license can be reinstalled by using the
same license.
2-137
2
Technical Explanation > MEAP > Maintenance > Formatting and Replacing the HDD
2 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Maintenance > Formatting and Replacing the HDD
2-138
●● HDD replacement procedure ●● If the MEAP application area can be backed up
Outline If the MEAP application area can be backed up, it can be recovered after replacing the HDD,
The procedure for replacing the HDD differs according to whether the HDD functions normally so it is not necessary to prepare the special licenses for reinstallation.
or not.
1) Preparation for replacement
If the MEAP application area cannot be backed up Back up the MEAP application area of the device according to the procedure for backing up
If the HDD does not function correctly due to failure or for other reason, the MEAP application the MEAP application area using SST.
area cannot be backed up. It is therefore necessary to reinstall the application after replacing
the HDD. The procedure is shown below. 2) Replacing the drive
Prepare the necessary service parts of the HDD, and replace the drive.
1) Preparation for replacement
Copy a set of license files for reinstalling the MEAP application (special licenses and 3) Formatting HDD
reusable licenses) to a laptop for service operation. Format the HDD referring to Procedure to format the hard disk.
Register a set of system files of a target product to SST. Or, prepare USB thumb drive of
the System file transfer settlement. 4) Restorering the backup file
Restore the backup data referring to the Procedures to Restore Backup Data.
2) Replacing the drive
Prepare the necessary service parts of the HDD, and replace the drive. 5) Importing user information
As necessary, make login service selections and import user information.
3) Formatting HDD
Format the HDD referring to Procedure to format the hard disk.
4) Reinstalling the MEAP application

When the device has started normally, obtain the jar files of the MEAP applications from the
user, and install them using the license files for reinstallation.
Installation method is the same as normal installation.
5) Importing user information

As necessary, make login service selections and import user information.
Note:
When you replace the HDD without uninstalling MEAP applications, make sure to
reinstall the previously installed applications. Unless reinstalling them, MEAP counter
will not be released and the message “The number of applications that can be installed
has exceeded the limit. Try to install this application after uninstalling other applications.”
is displayed so that the installation of new applications may not be accepted. If you
want to install new applications in this case, once reinstall the applications in-stalled
before formatting and uninstall unnecessary applications.
2-138
2
Technical Explanation > MEAP > Maintenance > Formatting and Replacing the HDD
2 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Maintenance > MEAP Safe Mode (level 2)
2-139
■■MEAP Safe Mode (level 2) 3) Press or button for several times until [MEAPSAFE] button is shown. Click
[MEAPSAFE] button.
●● Outline
Use safe mode if you need to start up the system without worrying about extra applications. It
will start up only those system software files (including SMS) that normally start up as default
files while preventing MEAP applications and the like from starting up.
When you have made changes and restart the device, the control panel will indicate 'MPSF'
in its lower right corner. The MEAP applications that may have been active before you shut
down the equipment will not start up on their own. Make use of safe mode when restoring
the system software as when MEAP applications or services cause a fault as the result of a
conflict or wrong sequence of registration/use. You can access to SMS in this condition so
that you can take necessary measures, for example, you can stop application that may cause F-2-256
the trouble. 4) Press the 1 key on the control panel keypad to change the setting to '1'; then, click [OK]
If default authentication has been selected, the mode of authentication remains valid; button.
otherwise, the message "The login service must be set again with SMS" ap pears. Change
the login service as necessary.
●● Starting in Safe Mode

1) Startup [SERVICE MODE] in level 2.
2) Press [COPIER] >[Option] > [USER] buttons.
F-2-257
5) Check that the notation ‘MPSF’ has appeared in the upper left corner of the screen; then,
restart the device.
F-2-255
F-2-258
2-139
2
Technical Explanation > MEAP > Maintenance > MEAP Safe Mode (level 2)
2 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Maintenance > MEAP Safe Mode (level 2)
2-140
●● How to cancel MEAP SAFE mode
Note:
If accessed to SMS in MEAP SAFE mode, the device started mode is shown on the title 1) Startup [SERVICE MODE] in level 2.
bar of the browser. 2) Press [COPIER] >[Option] > [USER] buttons.
An example of the title bar displayed at the time of startup in MEAP SAFE mode
Service Management Service : <Device Name>:<Product Name>: Safe Mode
F-2-259
CAUTION:
If the device has been started in MEAP SAFE mode, all the MEAP applications stop F-2-261
and the status becomes "Installed". 3) Press or button for several times until [MEAPSAFE] button is shown. Click
This status remains unchanged even if the MEAP SAFE mode is canceled and the [MEAPSAFE] button.
device is started again in normal mode. It is therefore necessary to access SMS after
normal startup and start the MEAP application.
F-2-262
F-2-260
2-140
2
Technical Explanation > MEAP > Maintenance > MEAP Safe Mode (level 2)
2 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Maintenance > Collection of MEAP Console Logs
2-141
4) Press the 0 key on the control panel keypad to change the setting to '0'; then, press [OK] ■■Collection of MEAP Console Logs
button.
●● Overview
When debugging a MEAP application, console logs need to be collected in some cases.
The following shows how to collect MEAP console logs using commercially available terminal
software and service mode.
●● What to Prepare
• PC connected with the same network as the device
• Commercially available terminal software
Note:
In the procedure shown in this manual, "Tera Term Pro" and "Hyper Terminal" are used
F-2-263 as the terminal software.
5) Start service mode again after rebooting the device, and check that the displayed setting
value has changed to "0" and that [MPSF] is no longer displayed at the upper left of the
screen. ●● Work Procedure
Device Setting Procedure
1) Start [ SERVICE MODE ] in Level 1.
2) Press [ COPIER ] > [ Option ] > [ DSPLY-SW ] buttons.
F-2-264
F-2-265
2-141
2
Technical Explanation > MEAP > Maintenance > Collection of MEAP Console Logs
2-142
3) Press [ RMT-CNSL] button. PC setting procedure (when Tera Term is used)
1) Install the terminal software on the PC.
2) Start the terminal software, make the following settings, and then click the "OK" button.
F-2-266
4) Press either 1 (activate remote console function) on control panel (the numerical value
F-2-269
input in the field is displayed), and press [ OK ] button.
Connection : Select [TCP/IP] (Default)
Host : Device Host Name or IP Address
Service : Select "Telnet"
TCP port# : Enter 19001
3) The connection window will open. Select [Terminal…] from the [Setup] menu.
F-2-267
5) Check to see that it is reflected in setting field, and restart the device.
F-2-270
F-2-268
2-142
2
2-143
4) The terminal setting screen will appear. Make the following settings, and then click the "OK" 6) The dialog for specifying the save destination of the log file will appear. Set the save
button. destination path and the file name, and then click the [Save] button.
F-2-271
Terminal ID : VT100
F-2-273
New-line Receive : LF
7) Perform the operation whose log you want to collect.
5) Select [Log...] from the [File] menu.
F-2-274
8) Click the [Close] button in the log dialog.
F-2-272
F-2-275
Note:
To suspend log collection, click the [Pause] button.
2-143
2
2-144
9) Open the file saved in the save destination, and check that the logs are stored correctly.
Note:
While collecting logs, the following operations are available from the [File] menu.
Comment to Log... :
You can add a comment to the log being collected. The added comment is reflected in
the log file.
F-2-279
Note:
Depending on the MEAP application, the log output setting needs to be made in order
to collect logs.
CAUTION:
After collecting logs, the remote console function of the device needs to be disabled
F-2-276
Show Log dialog... : (select [SERVICE MODE] LEVEL1 > [COPIER] > [Option] > [DSPLY-SW] > [RMT-CNSL]
The logs that have been collected are pasted on Notepad and displayed. > 0, and restart the device).
F-2-277
Change directory... :
The preliminarily set save destination of the log file can be changed.
F-2-278
2-144
2
2-145
PC setting procedure (when Hyper Terminal is used) 4) Click the "Properties" icon on the Hyper Terminal screen.
1) Start Hyper Terminal, set the connection name in the [Connect Description] dialog that
appears on the screen, and then click the OK button.
F-2-283
5) The [Console Properties] dialog will appear. Select the [Settings] tab, select [VT100] for
[Emulation], and then click the [OK] button.
F-2-280
2) Set [TCP/IP(Winsock)] for [Connect using].
F-2-284
6) Return to the Hyper Terminal window, and select [Transfer] > [Capture Text...] from the
menu.
F-2-281 F-2-285
3) Enter the IP address of the target device in [Host address], and enter "19001" (fixed) in [Port 7) The dialog for specifying the save destination of the log file will appear. Specify the save
number]. destination.
F-2-286
F-2-282
2-145
2
2 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Maintenance > Using USB Devices
2-146
8) Perform the operation whose log you want to collect. ■■Using USB Devices
●● USB Driver
Two types of USB drivers
While the USB driver that can be used in iR series is only the USB driver designed exclusively
for MEAP application (hereinafter referred to as “MEAP driver”), not only MEAP driver but
also USB system driver (hereinafter referred to as “system driver”) can be used in iR-ADV
series.
System driver and MEAP driver cannot be used together. When either of them is used, the
other driver cannot be used.
USB driver setting (iR-ADV series):

System driver is active by default in iR-ADV series.
F-2-287
The driver can be changed in Settings/Registration (user mode).
9) Select [Transfer] > [Capture Text...] > [Stop] from the menu. Usually, It is not necessary to change the setting because it is specified in the MEAP
application side.
Only in the case of a special MEAP application, it is necessary to change the USB driver
setting.
For details, refer to specifications of MEAP application side.
F-2-288
10) Open the file saved in the save destination, and check that the logs are stored
correctly.
F-2-289
F-2-290
Note: Operating mode Software keyboard

Conventional USB System driver
Depending on the MEAP application, the log output setting needs to be made in order settings [Use MEAP application
to collect logs. keyboard enabled MEAP supported MEAP
driver as USB input (System Driver/
application application
device] MEAP Driver)
ON Can use USB keyboard. Cannot use USB Cannot use USB
CAUTION: * MEAP driver Can work only on the keyboards. (Device keyboards.
After collecting logs, the remote console function of the device needs to be disabled (conventional conventional applications cannot be detected.)
compatibility mode) that support the MEAP
(select [SERVICE MODE] LEVEL1 > [COPIER] > [Option] > [DSPLY-SW] > [RMT-CNSL]
application driver.
> 0, and restart the device).
2-146
2
Technical Explanation > MEAP > Maintenance > Using USB Devices
2-147
Operating mode Software keyboard Availability for MEAP application of the USB device A (either HID keyboard or Mass Storage)
Conventional USB System driver
settings [Use MEAP application plugged to iR device
keyboard enabled MEAP supported MEAP
driver as USB input (System Driver/ When the HID keyboard is MEAP application
application application
device] MEAP Driver) installed > USB Settings:
OFF (*default) Cannot use USB Can use USB Can use USB Application
Registration [Use MEAP Driver for USB
* Native driver keyboards. (Device cannot keyboards. keyboards. Via software System System driver with VID/
be detected.) keyboards only. status of Input Device] Native
driver not supported/ PID
T-2-76 USB device When the Mass Storage is application
supported conventional declared
A installed > USB Settings:
application application in Manifest
[Use MEAP Driver for
Note: for x
When any settings changes are made, the device must be restarted. External USB Device]
Not OFF YES YES NO
registered ON NO NO YES
Registered OFF NO NO YES YES
Setting the USB driver for each USB device (MEAP driver preference registration) ON NO NO YES YES
If it is set to use the system driver, the conventional applications that support the MEAP T-2-77
YES: USB device available NO: USB device not available
application driver cannot use the USB input device.
Therefore, for the USB drivers used by USB devices/MEAP applications, there is setting
Availability for MEAP applications of USB devices B and C (either HID keyboard or Mass
function (MEAP driver preference registration) to give priority to the MEAP driver.
Storage) plugged to iR device
If you register the ID of the USB device by using this function, the USB device can use the
MEAP driver despite the Additional Function settings. Setting to use MEAP application
Registration
MEAP driver System System driver Application
status of USB Native
(Additional driver not supported with VID/PID
Using this function requires the conditions below: USB device device application
Functions supported / conventional declared in
• Supported MEAP SpecVer: 26 B
mode) application application Manifest for B
• Describe the idVendeor(VID) and idProdutc(PID) of USB device in the manifest or activate/
Registered Not used B YES YES NO
deactivate the VID and PID by calling API from MEAP applications. (Native driver to C YES YES NO
be used)
The driver setting that is used in a manifest file is reflected in the following timing. To be used B NO NO YES
When registering from a manifest file. C NO NO YES

• The registration will be enabled when an application is activated and device is Not Not used B NO NO YES YES
registered (Native driver to C YES YES NO NO
restarted.
be used)
• The registration will be disabled when an application is stopped and device is To be used B NO NO YES YES
restarted. C NO NO YES YES
T-2-78
YES: USB device available NO: USB device not available
Note:
You can display/check the used driver setting at “USB device report print” described
below regardless of whether it is registered from a manifest file or is registered from
API.
2-147
2
2-148
Specifications for the use of USB keyboards ●● Initialization of MEAP driver priority registration
Characters that could be entered on the software keyboard displayed on the conventional When any trouble occurs regarding USB driver settings and it is necessary to reset the setting
control panel can be entered using a USB connected keyboard. information, you can reset the MEAP driver preference registration by using service mode.
• When the software keyboard window is displayed, characters can be entered from the USB
keyboard (in-line entry not possible). Steps to initialize preference use registration
• When the software keyboard window is not displayed, entered characters will not be 1) Start [SERVICE MODE] in Level 1.
remembered. 2) Press [COPIER] > [Function] > [CLEAR] > buttons.
• The characters, which can be entered from a USB keyboard, is only a character, which can
be entered from the software keyboard.
• Even if characters are entered from the USB keyboard, the software keyboard window will
not change (the corresponding key does not invert or change color).
• Input from the USB keyboard can be accepted at the same time as input from the software
keyboard or numeric keys.
• Since the device supports Plug and Play, the USB keyboard can be disconnected/
connected freely. However, do not disconnect and connect during in deep sleep (when
in sleep with setting "low" at "the power consumption in sleep"). It is out of an operation
guarantee to disconnect and connect the USB keyboard in deep sleep.
• When USB device is attached to iR device, iR devices do not shift to deep sleep mode. F-2-291
• Keyboard layout changes according to the keyboard layout settings in the Settings/ 3) Press or button for several times until [USBM-CLR] is shown on the screen.
Registration screen. In addition, function keys and ten keys which are not displayed in the Press [USBM-CLR] button.
software keyboard cannot be used. (Keyboard which the operation check was conducted
is 84-key Keyboard, but this does not mean that the operation of all 84-key Keyboards is
guaranteed.)
Note:
The factory shipment default setting is to enable the use of native (main unit
functionality) USB keyboards. Therefore, in order to use MEAP application keyboards,
[Use MEAP driver for USB input device] under [System management settings (initial
settings/ registration)] needs to be set to ON (factory shipment setting is OFF).
Operations change as described below in accordance with ON/ OFF settings. F-2-292
ON: when using MEAP application keyboard 4) Press [OK] button to restart this device.
OFF: when using native (main unit functionality) keyboard (factory shipment default)
F-2-293
2-148
2
2-149
●● USB Device report print 4) When pressing [OK] button, [ACTIVE] blinks on the status field.
To check the vendor IDs (idVendor) and the product IDs (idProduct) registered in this device
by means of declaration in Manifest file of MEAP applications, output the USB Device repot
report print.
Steps to output the USB Device report print

2) Press [COPIER] > [Function] > [MISC-P] > buttons.
F-2-296
5) When [OK] is shown on the status field, the status print is output. Check the contents of the
print.
F-2-294
3) Press or button for several times until [USBH-PRT] is shown. Press [USBH-PRT]
button.
F-2-297
F-2-295
2-149
2
2-150
Example of output result I : Interface
The interface information of a USB device is shown. Interface class and the driver to handle
******************************** can be recognized.
*** USB Device report print ***
********************************
USB device information The value and the content of Driver are as follows.
Labeling Content
T: Bus=01 Lev=02 Prnt=03 Port=01 Cnt=01 Dev#= 5 Spd=480 MxCh= 0
D: Ver=2.00 Cls=00(>ifc) Sub=00 Prot=00 MxPS=64 #Cfgs= 1 usbhid It is displayed when the USB system driver is assigned to the input device
connected.
P: Vendor=066f ProdID=4210 Rev=10.02
S: Manifacturer=SigmaTel, Inc. usb-storage It is displayed when storage devices (USB memory storage etc.) are
S: Product=STIr42xx connected.
S: SerialNumber=0002F0F7261287A5 irda-usb IrDA It is displayed when the dongle is connected.
C:* #Ifs= 1 Cfg#= 1 Atr=80 MxPwr=100mA hub It is displayed when HUB is connected.
I: If#= 0 Alt= 0 #EPs= 2 Cls=fe(app.) Sub=02 Prot=00 Driver=irda-usb
gpusb It is displayed when the USB driver only for MEAP application is assigned
E: Ad=81(I) Atr=02(Bulk) MxPS=512 Ivl=0ms
to the input device connected.
E: Ad=01(O) Atr=02(Bulk) MxPS=512 Ivl=0ms
gpusbex It is displayed when a USB device, which specific vendor ID/ Product ID are
F-2-298 preferentially registered using a manifest and MEAP API, is connected and
USB device information Content the USB driver only for MEAP application is assigned.
T-2-79
Display the information of the USB device, which the device recognized.
If not displayed, there may be some fault occurred. E:Endpoint
Some of standard optional devices are not displayed on a report. The Endpoint information of a USB device is shown.
The details of each item are as follows.
Right or wrong of report output
T : Topology Connecting device Report printing
Internal hierarchical structure, which a USB device is connected, is shown. The number of HID Yes
a connected bus, the hierarchical structure and connection speed can be indicated. Storage Yes
FAX No
D : Device
USB Device Port IrDA Yes
Information of USB devices is shown.
Multimedia Card Reader Yes
IC Card Reader Yes
P : Product
Image Data Analyzer Board-A1 No
Product information of USB devices is shown. Vendor ID and Product ID can be recognized
Hub Internal Hub* No
here.
External Hub Yes
T-2-80
S : String * USB Device Port-B1 Hub for device ports installed at the introduction
The character string embedded in a USB device is shown. A manufacture name and a
Note:
product name can be recognized here.
Some connecting devices such as the Image Data Analyzer Board and USB Device
Port are not installed depending on the model.
C : Configure
The configuration information of a USB device is shown. * mark is to know whether it is
active.
2-150
2
2 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Maintenance > Integrated Authentication Function
2-151
The content of MEAP preferred device information ■■Integrated Authentication Function
Display the information of the application or a USB device, which preferentially registered with
MEAP application. ●● Sharing the Authentication Information
By seeing this information, it can check which Application ID of the MEAP application is in the Separately managing the authentication information at login and the authentication
status using a specific USB device. information for MEAP applications creates inconveniences such as that the authentication
process is executed many times.
AppID : Application ID In order to solve this problem, the device has an integrated authentication function. This
VID : Vendor ID function allows authentication information to be shared between MEAP applications in a
PID : Product ID MEAP environment.
The supported version of MEAP Specifications is Ver.59, which needs to be supported by
Note: both the device and the MEAP application in order to use this function.
By starting, stopping or uninstalling a MEAP application, the driver settings of the There are 2 types of authentication information that can be shared: Volatile Credential whose
USB device may be changed. If the device needs to be restarted following this setting
registered information is discarded at the time of logout or shutdown of the device and
change, a message prompting the user to restart the device is displayed.
Persistent Credential whose registered information is not discarded at the time of logout.
●● Volatile Credential
Volatile Credential is used in cases where the authentication information is shared between
applications which use the same security domain for authentication.
The credential is registered mainly by the login application, therefore the applications which
access the security domain that was used for authentication by the login application can use
the credential.
●● Persistent Credential
Persistent Credential is used to help entry of authentication information when accessing a
different security domain for authentication.
The credential is registered mainly by general MEAP applications, and the authentication
F-2-299 information can be reused when the same user logs in for the second time or later.
●● Comparison of Functions
Volatile Credential Persistent Credential
Registered Character strings and arbitrary Character strings only User ID/Password/
information Java objects Domain/Arbitrary character strings
Lifetime Registration At login (the login application), and At any timing of registration by an
at any timing of registration by an application
application
Deletion Can be used until logout/shutdown. Can be used until deletion by the
application or management tool.
Encryption of Not supported Data retained on the HDD is encrypted.
credential data
Store (Save) to Memory in the device HDD in the device
T-2-81
2-151
2
Technical Explanation > MEAP > Maintenance > Integrated Authentication Function
2 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Maintenance > Integrated Authentication Function
2-152
●● Disabling the Integrated Authentication Function Select the item you want to disable, and click the [Update] button.
If you do not want Volatile Credential to be used from a security standpoint, the function can
be disabled.
The function can be disabled from remote UI or service mode.
Persistent Credential cannot be disabled.
On the setting screen of remote UI, the function can be disabled on a protocol-by-protocol
basis.
Remote UI
You can access the setting screen on remote UI for disabling integrated authentication as
shown below.
F-2-301
• [Disable integrated authentication]: The integrated authentication function is disabled
regardless of the authentication method.
• [Disable integrated authentication using credentials for local device authentication]: The
integrated authentication function is disabled only at the time of local device authentication.
• [Disable integrated authentication using credentials for LDAP server authentication]:
The integrated authentication function is disabled only at the time of LDAP server
authentication.
Service mode
The location of the service mode setting for disabling integrated authentication:
Setting value: 0 = Enabled, 1 = Disabled
F-2-300
F-2-302
2-152
2
Technical Explanation > MEAP > Maintenance > Integrated Authentication Function
2 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Maintenance > Points to Note When Enabling the [Quick Startup Settings for Main Power] Setting
2-153
■■Points to Note When Enabling the [Quick Startup Settings for In the case of "Schedule: Execute the task every 24 hours"
A schedule is set to start the specified task at the specified time and repeat "fixed-delay
Main Power] Setting execution".
If some of the MEAP applications are running on the device, the following problems will occur. If execution is delayed for some reason, the delay time is ignored.
Problem: If 24 hours have passed since the last execution of the task, the task is executed
only once.
●● The [Quick Startup Settings for Main Power] setting cannot be
=> The task may be executed at a timing other than the time the user expects it to be
enabled. executed.
If a MEAP application that restricts the device from shifting to deep sleep mode is running,
even when the setting of [Quick Startup Settings for Main Power] is enabled (On), the device 31/Dec 1/Jan 2/Jan 3/Jan 4/Jan 5/Jan
starts normally instead of quick startup.

In that case, it does not affect the behavior of the MEAP application.
Starting
●● Changes made in the settings of a MEAP application are not

Stopped
reflected. (Quick startup standby)
If the startup setting [Quick Startup Settings for Main Power] is enabled (On), even when the The timing the task is expected to be executed
Main Power Supply Switch of the machine is turned OFF, a shutdown process is not executed The timing the task was actually executed
internally. F-2-303
Therefore, in the case of a MEAP application where changes in settings are enabled when In the case of "Schedule: Execute the task at 00:00 every day"
the device is restarted, changes in settings are not reflected just by changing the settings. A schedule is set to start the specified task at the specified time and repeat "fixed-rate
Follow either of the restart procedures shown below to enable the changes made in the execution".
settings. If execution was delayed for some reason, two or more tasks are continuously executed to
• Execute restart from remote UI. "make up for the delay".
• Turn OFF the Main Switch, and then turn it ON within 20 seconds. Problem: The tasks of Jan. 1, Jan. 2, and Jan. 3 are executed after quick startup.
●● After recovery from quick startup, MEAP applications do not work 31/Dec 1/Jan 2/Jan 3/Jan 4/Jan 5/Jan
properly.
MEAP applications that are scheduled to execute processes at specified times may not work
Starting
properly after recovery from quick restart.
Unexpected problems such as that the application executes a task at an unexpected timing
Stopped
may occur. (Quick startup standby)
Problems may occur in the following two cases.
The timing the task is expected to be executed
The timing the task was actually executed
F-2-304
2-153
2
Technical Explanation > MEAP > Maintenance > Points to Note When Enabling the [Quick Startup Settings for Main Power] Setting
2 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Maintenance > Remedy to Be Performed When the Device Has Become Unable to Be Logged in
2-154
■■Remedy to Be Performed When the Device Has Become Note :
Even if the department ID and password registered in the user information of SSO-H
Unable to Be Logged in do not coincide with the department ID and password registered in the Department ID
Management, login is possible when all of the following conditions are satisfied.
●● Overview • System manager information of the device ([Settings/Registration] > [Management
Department ID Management and SSO-H (Local Device Authentication) manage user Settings] > [User Management] > [System Manager Information Settings]) is set.
information separately. Therefore, in order to allow coexistence of Department ID • Login is performed as a user with the administrator right of SSO-H.
Management and SSO-H, it is necessary that the information of SSO-H and the information
of Department ID Management are the same.
The user information of SSO-H does not coincide with the user information of Department ID
Management in the following cases:
SSO-H user management information
• The user information of SSO-H was different from that of Department ID Management
(1) User name Password Role Dept. ID Password when Department ID Management was enabled.
Administrator Password Administrator 7654321 7654321 Department ID Management was enabled before changing the department ID and
CANONTARO pass Administrator 1111 1111
Password : 1111
ID : 1111
User : CANONTARO CMJTARO Makuhari Administrator 2222 2222 password registered in SSO-H to match with the information of Department ID
(2)Password : pass Management.
Privilege (3) SSO-H user management information Dept. ID Management info
Authentication elevation
User name Password Role Dept. ID Password Dept. ID Password
(6)
(5) SSO-H
Administrator Password
CANONTARO pass
Administrator
Administrator
7654321
1234
7654321
1234
Mismatch 1111
2222
1111
2222
CMJTARO Makuhari Administrator 5678 5678 3333 3333
Dept. ID Management
Dept. ID Management Info (4) F-2-306
Dept. ID Password
O K • Only one of information was updated, resulting in mismatch.
7654321 7654321 Verification
1111 1111 Only the department ID and password registered in SSO-H or those in Department ID
2222 2222
Management were changed.
SSO-H user management information Dept. ID Management info
User name Password Role Dept. ID Password Dept. ID Password
F-2-305
1) The user enters the ID and password of SSO-H to a device where both SSO-H and
Administrator Password Administrator 7654321 7654321
Match 7654321 7654321
CANONTARO pass Administrator 1234 1234 1234 1234
Department ID Management are enabled.
2) SSO-H checks the entered ID and password with the SSO-H user information table. Only the SSO-H user
information was updated
3) SSO-H sends the department ID and password which correspond to the entered ID and SSO-H user management information Dept. ID Management info
USer name Password Role Dept. ID Password Dept. ID Password
password to the department ID management function.
Administrator Password Administrator 1234567 1234567 7654321 7654321
4) The department ID management function checks the department ID and password sent CANONTARO pass Administrator 9999 9999 Mismatch 1234 1234
from SSO-H with the user information table.
5) The user is elevated to the corresponding privilege. F-2-307
6) The user is authenticated.
If the department ID and password registered in the user information of SSO-H do not
coincide with the department ID and password registered in the Department ID Management,
the authentication ends in failure and the user can no longer log in to the device.
2-154
2
Technical Explanation > MEAP > Maintenance > Remedy to Be Performed When the Device Has Become Unable to Be Logged in
2-155
• Only the information of Department ID Management was updated, resulting in mismatch. Procedure
Only the Department ID Management information was changed in "Import All Function", 1) Change the authentication method to DA (Default Authentication).
resulting in mismatch. (The SSO-H user information cannot be changed in Import All Access SMS, and select [Default Authentication] in [Enhanced System Application
Function.) Management] > [Login Service]. (How to log in to SMS can be found in "Login to SMS".)
Device A Dept. ID Management Info

Dept. ID Password
1111 1111
2222 2222
Device B 3333 3333
Import All Function (Only the Department

ID Management information was updated.)
SSO-H user management information
Dept. ID Management Info
User name PAssword Role Dept. ID Password Dept. ID PAssword
Administrator Password Administrator 1234567 1234567
CANONTARO pass Administrator 9999 9999
Mismatch 1111 1111
2222 2222
F-2-308
●● Remedy
If the device became unable to be logged in due to mismatch of the department ID/password,
perform the following remedy.
F-2-309
Note : 2) Restart the device.
Since the device can be logged in if all of the following conditions are satisfied,
performing only the step 6 of this section can clear the mismatch of the department ID/ Restart the device in order to reflect the changes in login service.
password. 3) Disable Depart ID Management.
• System manager information of the device ([Settings/Registration] > [Management In user mode ([Settings/Registration]), select [Management Settings] > [User Management]
Settings] > [User Management] > [System Manager Information Settings]) is set.
• Login is performed as a user with the administrator right of SSO-H. > [Department ID Management] > [OFF]. In the case of remote UI, access [Settings/
Registration] > [Management Settings] > [User Management] > [Department ID
Management] > [Department ID Management Settings], and deselect [Enable Department
ID Management].
F-2-310
2-155
2
2-156
4) Change the authentication method back to SSO-H authentication. SSO-H user registration information edition screen:
Access SMS, and select [Single Sign-On H] in [Enhanced System Application Management] (SSO management screen [Main Menu] > [User Management] > [Edit User Information] or
> [Login Service]. (How to log in to SMS can be found in "Log in to SMS".) https://<IP address>:8443/sso/Edit).
F-2-311 F-2-312
5) Restart the device. SSO-H user registration information import screen:

Restart the device in order to reflect the changes in login service. (SSO management screen [Main Menu] > [User Management] > [Import User Information]
6) Change the user registration information of SSO-H. or (https://<IP address>:8443/sso/Import).
Access the URL shown below, and change the content to the information registered in
Department ID Management.
Or, import the setting file whose content you want to use.
F-2-313
2-156
2
2 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Maintenance > Reference material
2-157
7) Enable Depart ID Management. ■■Reference material
In user mode ([Settings/Registration]), select [Management Settings] > [User Management]
> [Department ID Management] > [ON]. In the case of remote UI, access [Settings/ ●● Glossary
Registration] > [Management Settings] > [User Management] > [Department ID Terms & Acronyms Definitions and Explanations
Management] > [Department ID Management Settings], and select [Enable Department ID Application A program unit to provide users with solutions.
Management]. Application ID An identifier assigned to each application.
A unique ID is assigned to each MEAP application.
Applet (Applet Type A MEAP application type created in Java.
Application) This type of applications show buttons on the touch panel display.
Code Sign Information to check if an application is genuine. An application marketed
in the normal procedure has a code sign assigned by LMS. MEAP platform
rejects applications without Canon code signs for being installed or
executed on the device.
CPCA Common Peripheral Controlling Architecture. CPCA defines an object
(Common Peripheral model of peripheral deices. A client can control a device by creating or
Controlling modifying objects in the device.
Architecture)
CPCA Java CL CPCA Java Class Library. A Java class library, which is used to control a
F-2-314 (Class Library) device.
8) Check that the device can be logged in. Default Authentication The login service used when the department ID control is used but other
Log off and then log on to check that the device can be logged in with an environment -Department ID authentication controls are not used. When the Department ID control is
Management turned on, the login dialog prompts the users to enter the department ID
where Local Device Authentication and Department ID Management are enabled.
and password. The dialog appears the initial screen of both the control
panel on the MEAP device and Remote UI
Device Specification ID allocated to each device type. This represents CPCA API specification
ID and the version number to use MFP generic functions or obtain information
including maximum allowable copies.
Esplet A MEAP application type created in Java. This type of applications do
(Esplet Type not show user interfaces either on Local UI or Web. Esplet is a coined
Application) word created by Canon, consisting of [Espresso] or Italian coffee and [let]
derived from Applet/Service.
File Description An identifier for the OS to identify the destination file requested by a
program. A program descriptor includes an identifier and information such
as a file name and size, which helps OS to judge the file to be edited.
F-2-315
HID class HID stands for Human Interface Device, representing man-machine
interfaces of PC components and peripheral devices. HID class means
USB class classified as HID.
iR Native application The functionalities that existing imageRUNNER has such as Copy,
Universal Send and Mailbox.
ISV Independent Software Vender. Software manufacturer who develops and/or
(Independent sells applications and tools but does not entire computer systems. Refers
Software Vendor) application developer in this document.
2-157
2
Technical Explanation > MEAP > Maintenance > Reference material
2 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Maintenance > Reference material
2-158
Terms & Acronyms Definitions and Explanations Terms & Acronyms Definitions and Explanations
J2ME Java 2 Platform Micro Edition. One of Java Platforms licensed by Sun MEAP Specifications MEAP Spec Version, the term used for the SDK. The version number that
(Java2 Platform Micro Microsystems, Inc. It is applied for MEAP. Other devices such as cellular (MEAP Spec Version) shows the APIs of the MEAP platform other than CPCA, such as network
Edition) phones and PDA. and security. The version number is not assigned for each device model.
J2RE A set of basic programs to run applications developed in the programming MEAP Application Runs on MEAP platform. Consists of application files
(Java 2 Runtime language of Java2. This set includes Java virtual machine providing (*.jar) and the license file (*.lic).
Environment) runtime environment for Java applications among others. Java applets do MEAP-enabled iR imageRUNNER (iR) devices with built-in MEAP platform.
not require J2RE since these are executed on Web browsers using Java device
runtime environment provided on browsers. However, standalone Java MFP Multi Function Peripheral. Peripheral device that supports more than one
applications require Java runtime environment such as J2RE for execution. (Multi Function function, such as digital copier, printer, scanner, and fax.
Runtime environments can be downloaded for free of charge from the Web Peripheral)
site of Sun Microsystems, the Java developer.
OSGi Open Service Gateway Initiative. See "http://www.osgi.org/".
Java A programming language developed by Sun Microsystems, in the U. S. A. (Open Service
Low dependent on models and OSes and runs on various platforms. Taking Gateway Initiative)
advantage of this feature, many applications that runs on web servers uses
Java. The MEAP platform uses J2ME - a type of Java. Portal Service The web portal to gain access to a MEAP-enabled device. This service has
been integrated in Remote UI top page in iR ADVANCE series.
JavaScript A script language developed by Netscape Communications, in the U.S. A.,
runs on web browsers such as Netscape Navigator and Internet Explorer. Protocol A set of rules applied to data transmission procedures over network. Major
Allows web designers to create interactive pages with HTML files such as communication protocols include:
animated buttons and display of timetables. • FTP: File Transfer Protocol. This is a communication protocol or
protocolimplemented commands to provide file transfer between a host
Java VM JAVA Virtual Machine. The Java byte code interpreter. The Virtual Machine and clients over TCP/IP network.
(Java Virtual Machine) acts as an interpreter for processing the byte code using the native • DHCP: An upward compatible protocol of BOOTP. This communication
instruction set. protocol allocates a dynamic IP address to each client machine upon
License Access A number issued for accessing license file. The Licensing server requires communication startup on TCP/IP network and collects the allocated IP
Number entries of application ID, expiration date/times information, and the number address when communication is completed. The server allocates one of
of access numbers, to issue license access numbers multiple IP addresses and notifies the setup information to a client.
Licensae File A software manufacture of a MEAP application provides the users with the • BOOTP: A communication protocol to automatically load setup
license files. Specifies the terms of agreement that a user concludes with information including IP address and a domain name from the server to a
the manufacturer. Required for installing a MEAP application. client on TCP/IP network.
• RARP: A communication protocol to request IP address information via
LMS The license is required for installing a MEAP application in a MEAPenabled the network adaptor address (MAC address) of a client.
(License Management iR device. LMS is the server issuing [License Files] as well as license • IPP: A communication protocol to execute remote printing between the
System) access numbers. print server and clients via Internet.
Login Service Manages user information of MEAP device. Authenticates users with user • TCP/IP: A standard communication protocol required to access to
names and passwords. Three login services are available for MEAP device Internet and other large-scale network.
- Default Authentication, which provides department ID control, SDL (Simple Proxy Server Provides functions to store data fetched from remote servers. When a
Device Login) and SSO (Single Sign-On). user request to display a web page that has been displayed and stored
Mass Storage class Mass Storage means a storage device with large capacity, generally in the proxy, the proxy server read the stored data but does not access
secondary storage devices. Mass Storage class means USB class the remote server where the original page is present, for efficient access
classified in the secondary storage device group. services. When a proxy server receives a URL from a PC, it searches the
file in the cache and sends it to the PC if the requested file is found. If the
MEAP (Multifunction Multifunctional Embedded Application Platform. Provides an environment
requested file is not stored in the cache, it accesses the remote server of
Embedded Application for executing application programs on a peripheral device. Uses the Java
the URL to acquire the file and, at the same time, stores the acquired file
Platform) platform (J2ME - Java 2 platform Micro Edition) to run Java application for
in the cache so that the proxy server can quickly send the file at the next
MEAP.
request.
MEAP Contents Required to install an MEAP application to a MEAP device.
Redistribution module A built-in module of an application created with SDK. Applications without
this module cannot work on MEAP platform.
2-158
2
Technical Explanation > MEAP > Maintenance > Reference material
2 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Maintenance > Option for exclusive individual measure
2-159
Terms & Acronyms Definitions and Explanations ■■Option for exclusive individual measure
SDK The kit containing information and tools required for software development.
(Software ●● Display Setting of Copy Icon (level2)
Development Kit) Make a setting as to whether to display/hide the copy screen (copy tab) on the control panel.
Service A functional unit or an application program working on MEAP platform. This is the specification for users who want to customize hiding it on control panel.
[Applications] are generally termed [Services] in Java world.
Servlet A MEAP application type created in Java. This type of applications is Default value
(Servlet Type designed to show user interface on the Web browser.
1: display
Application)
Setting range, item
SMS The web-base service to provide user interfaces for application life cycle
(Service Management management. 0: hide 1: display
Service)
Socket A virtual interface of an application for network communication. A user Setting Procedure
only needs to specify a socket as a unit of an address and a port from an 1) Start [SERVICE MODE] in Level 1.
application. This establishes the network connection for data transmission,
2) Press [COPIER] > [Option] > [DSPLY-SW] buttons.
eliminating complication related to detailed communication procedures.
SSO-H (Single Sign- Login service providing features of both local device authentication
On H) and domain authentication. The former is the method that iR device
independently authorizes users; whereas the latter is that iR device links to
the domain controller on the network in the Active Directory environment to
authorize users.
Thread A unit for program execution. A multi-task system allowing multiple
programs to run concurrently assigns a memory space and other resources
independently to each program, providing users with a feel as if only a
program is running. At least one thread is generated upon a program
generated.
URL The method to denote Web page locations on Internet and the like. For
(Uniform Resource instance, a URL on the Web is denoted as [http://www.w3.org/default. html]. F-2-316
Locator) [http] at the beginning means that an address following this is in a web 3) Press [UI-COPY] button.
page on the Internet.
USB Abbreviation of Universal Serial Bus. This is the interface standard to link
between information devices.
USB system driver The general-purpose driver that control the behavior of the device, there
are HID class driver, Mass Storage class driver and so on.
T-2-82
F-2-317
2-159
2
Technical Explanation > MEAP > Maintenance > Option for exclusive individual measure
2-160
4) Press either 0 (hide) or 1 (display) on control panel (the numerical value input in the field is ●● Error at starting up the MEAP application/Setting to hide JAM screen
displayed), and press [OK] button.
(level 2)
In the case that operation is restricted by MEAP application, hide the warning screen of error/
JAM (such as JAM screen, door opening, no-toner). In the case that these errors occur, there
will be a display indicating 'call the service personnel' etc.
Note:
Part of the warning screens is displayed if shifting to the device screen.
• As for the screens for jam and no-toner, the warning screen (animation) can be displayed
by pressing the followings: [Device Screen] > [Recovery Procedure]
• As for the screen for door opening, the warning screen cannot be displayed because
there is no display for [[Device Screen] > [Recovery Procedure]
F-2-318 Default value

5) Check to see that it is reflected in setting field, and restart the device. 1: No activation of warning display
Setting range, item

0: display warning screen 1: hide warning screen
Setting Procedure
2) Press [COPIER] > [Option] > [DSPLY-SW] buttons.
F-2-319
2-160
2
2-161
3) Press [ANIM-SW] button.
F-2-320
4) Press either 0 (display warning screen) or 1 (hide warning screen) on control panel (the
numerical value input in the field is displayed), and press [OK] button.
F-2-321
5) Check to see that it is reflected in setting field, and restart the device.
2-161
2
2 Technical Explanation > Embedded RDS > Product Overview > Major Functions
2-162
Embedded RDS ■■Features and benefits

E-RDS embedded with a network module in advance can realize a front-end processing
Product Overview of e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote system without attaching any extra hardware
equipment.
■■Overview
Embedded RDS (hereinafter referred to as E-RDS) is a monitoring program that runs on the ■■Major Functions
host machine. When the monitoring option is enabled by making the setting on this machine,
●● Service Browser
information such as the status change of the machine, counter information, and failure
Service browser is a web browsing functionality only for service technicians in charge, and is
information are collected. The collected device information is sent to a remote maintenance
used for referring to the FAQ contents which is connected to UGW.
server called UGW (Universal Gateway Server) via Internet, thus allowing for e-Maintenance/
In order to grasp on which devices the service browser is enabled, when the status of the
imageWARE Remote (Remote Diagnosis System).
service browser is changed from disabled (0: OFF) to enabled, E-RDS sends the browser
The following device information/ status can be monitored. information to the UGW.
• Billing counts
• Parts counter ●● Service mode menu Transmission
• Firmware info E-RDS sends the target service mode menu data to UGW in the following cases:
• Service call error log • When a specific alarm and service call error are detected
• Jam log • When the setting is changed in service mode
• Alarm log
• Status changes (Toner low/ out, etc.) The following shows the transmission timing and the target data for transmission in service
mode menu:
Since high confidentiality is required for the information shown above, it performs
Transmission timing Transmitting data Error retry
communication between this machine and the UGW using HTTPS/ SOAP protocol. When the following alarm is detected. COPIER Display ANALOG No
HV-STS
Customer Alarm codes for transmission: CCD
Environment UGW 0x060002,                     // Fixing
DPOT
This machine 0x060004 - 0x069999,  // Fixing
DENS
0x090005 - 0x099999,  // Dram
0x100006 - 0016, 0x100022 - 0099, FIXING
Internet
0x100101 - 9900,          // Development SENSOR
Firewall 0x300001 - 0x309999   // High voltage MISC
Sales Company HT-C
HV-TR
Administrator P-PASCAL
DNS Server Proxy Server
The e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote system configuration

F-2-322
2-162
2
Technical Explanation > Embedded RDS > Product Overview > Major Functions
2 Technical Explanation > Embedded RDS > Limitations > Service Mode Menu Transmission Function
2-163
Transmission timing Transmitting data Error retry Limitations
When the following service call error is detected. COPIER Display ANALOG No
Error codes for transmission:

HV-STS ■■Service Mode Menu Transmission Function
CCD
E000 - E00F,  // Fixing 1) In the following cases, service mode menu data is not transmitted.
DPOT
E020,              // Development ATR
DENS • When an unsent alarm log or service call log has been detected by E-RDS at power-
E060 - E06F   // High voltage
FIXING on
SENSOR • When an alarm log or service call log to be resent due to a transmission failure is
MISC
detected
HT-C
• When transmission of service mode menu executed at the time of detection of an
HV-TR
P-PASCAL alarm or a service call error ended in failure
When a value is set to [COPIER - Adjust] COPIER Adjust Yes • If a new alarm or service call error occurs while service mode menu data is being
subordinate’s Service mode menu. obtained after detection of an alarm or a service call error, the data being obtained is
(Transmission will be done at 60 min, later of
not sent.
setting)
When the first communication test is done. COPIER Display ANALOG Yes
2) If alarms/service call errors successively occur, and if the time of the host machine is
(For transmission process, 5 minutes after the HV-STS
execution) corrected or changed while the log is being sent, service mode menu data may not be
CCD
DPOT properly sent. It is because a Link No.* may be applied to the old log although it should be
DENS applied to the new log.
FIXING
* Link No.:
SENSOR
MISC
A common number for linking the service mode menu data with the alarm log/service
HT-C call log data to be sent
HV-TR After completion of log transmission, the service mode menu data is obtained, and is
P-PASCAL sent with this number attached.
Adjust
T-2-83
3) Transmission of the data of changes made in service mode menu settings is not performed
instantly, but performed when a specified period of 60 minutes elapse after the change of
NOTE: service mode menu settings is detected or when a communication test is performed at the
Target transmission data are only the items under LEVEL1 and 2 in the service mode.
time of power-on. (There is a time lag.)
4) When service mode menu settings ([COPIER] > [Adjust]) are made, transmission is
performed even when no change is made in the target data to be transmitted.
Transmission of service mode data is also performed when changes are made in the
service mode setting value not subject to transmission (items other than Level 1, 2) or
when settlement of a value is performed without changing the setting value.
2-163
2
Technical Explanation > Embedded RDS > Limitations > Service Mode Menu Transmission Function
2 Technical Explanation > Embedded RDS > Service cautions
2-164
Service cautions NOTE:
*The user can conduct a communication test and seen the communication test result.
1) After clearing RAM of the Main Controller PCB, initialization of the E-RDS setting (ERDS-
If the communication results in failure, an error code (a hexadecimal number, 8 digits)
DAT) and a communication test (COM-TEST) need to be performed. appears on the touch panel display.
Failure to do so will result that the counter transmitting value to the UGW may become
unusual.
Also, after replacing the main controller board, all settings must be reprogrammed.
2) The following settings in service mode must not be change unless there are specific
instructions to do so. Changing these values will cause error in communication with UGW.
• Set port number of UGW
[SERVICE MODE] > [COPIER] > [Function] > [INSTALL] > [RGW-PORT]
Default : 443
• URL setting of UGW

[SERVICE MODE] > [COPIER] > [Function] > [INSTALL] > [RGW-ADR]
Default : https://a01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/agentif010
3) If the e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote contract of the device is invalid, be sure to turn
OFF the E-RDS setting (E-RDS : 0).
4) With this machine, a communication test can be conducted from the [Settings /
Registration] key on the Control Panel. When conducting a communication test from the
[Settings / Registration] key on the Control Panel, pay attention on the following points:
• During a communication test, do not take any actions such as pressing a key. Actions
are not accepted until the communication test is completed (actions are ignored).
• When a communication test is being conducted from service mode or from the [Settings
/ Registration] key on the Control Panel, do not conduct a communication test from the
other. These operations are not guaranteed.
2-164
2
Technical Explanation > Embedded RDS > Service cautions
2 Technical Explanation > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Confirmation and preparation in advance
2-165
E-RDS Setup (3) Network settings
Based on the results of the information obtained in (2) Advance preparations, make this
■■Confirmation and preparation in advance machine network related settings.
See Users’ Guide for detailed procedures.
To monitor this machine with e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote, the following settings are
required.
CAUTION:
When changes are made to the above-mentioned network settings, be sure to reboot
(1) Advance confirmation
this machine.
Confirm with the UGW administrator that the device to be monitored with e-Maintenance/
imageWARE Remote is registered in the UGW.
(2) Advance preparations

The following network-related information needs to be obtained from the user's system
administrator in advance.
Information item 1
IP address settings
• Automatic setting : DHCP, RARP, BOOTP
• Manual setting : IP address, subnet mask and gateway address to be set
Information item 2
Is there a DNS server in use?
If there is a DNS server in use, find out the following.
• Primary DNS server address
• Secondary DNS server address
Information item 3
Is there a proxy server?
If there is a proxy server in use, find out the following.
• Proxy server address
• Port No. for proxy server
Information item 4
Is proxy server authentication required?
If proxy server authentication is required, find out the following.
• User name and password required for proxy authentication
2-165
2
Technical Explanation > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Confirmation and preparation in advance
2 Technical Explanation > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to E-RDS settings
2-166
■■Steps to E-RDS settings (2) Select [COPIER] > [Function] > [CLEAR] > [CA-KEY] and touch the [OK] button.
1) Start [Service Mode] at Level 1.

2) Select [COPIER] > [Function] > [CLEAR] > [ERDS-DAT] and touch the [OK] button.
NOTE:
This operation initializes the E-RDS settings to factory setting values.
For the setting values to be initialized, see the section of "Initializing E-RDS settings".
F-2-324
"OK!" is displayed if the CA certificate is initialized. When "NG!" is displayed, see the
section of "Troubleshooting" to execute the remedy, and then perform initialization of
the CA certificate again and check to see if the CA certificate is initialized.
F-2-323
3) Perform installation or deletion of the CA certificate if necessary, and reboot this machine.
• Installation of the CA certificate: Perform installation from SST or Remote UI.
• Deletion of the CA certificate: When the following operation is performed, the CA certificate
in the factory setting is automatically installed.
CAUTION:
After following procedure, the registered key and CA certificate are deleted, and only
the CA certificate installed at the time of shipment is registered.
It is therefore necessary to check with the user in advance. F-2-325
(3) Reboot this machine.
(1) Start [Service Mode] at Level 2. CAUTION:

If a key and a CA certificate have been registered in order to use a function other than
E-RDS, it is necessary to register again from SST or Remote UI.
2-166
2
Technical Explanation > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to E-RDS settings
2 Technical Explanation > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to E-RDS settings
2-167
CAUTION:
5) Select [COPIER] > [Function] > [INSTALL] > [E-RDS].
The following settings i.e. RGW-PORT and RGW-ADR in Service mode must not be
change unless there are specific instructions to do so.
Changing these values will cause error in communication with UGW.
F-2-326
6) Touch the numeric button [1] on the control panel (the setting value is changed to 1) and
touch the [OK] button. (The data is reflected to the setting value field.)
7) Select [COM-TEST] and then touch [OK].
NOTE:
This operation enables the communication function with UGW. NOTE:
This initiates the communication test between the device and the UGW.
F-2-327
F-2-328
2-167
2
Technical Explanation > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to E-RDS settings
2 Technical Explanation > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Procedure for Service Call Completion
2-168
If the communication is successful, "OK!" is displayed. If "NG!" (failed) appears, refer to the 3) Touch the numeric button [1] or [0] on the control panel (the setting value is changed to 1 or
"Troubleshooting" and repeat until "OK!" is displayed. 0) and touch the [OK] button. (The data is reflected to the setting value field.)
NOTE:
E-RDS generates an alarm of service call completion at this timing, and sends the
alarm to UGW.
F-2-329
NOTE:
F-2-331
The communication results with UGW can be distinguished by referring to the COM-
LOG. By performing the communication test with UGW, E-RDS acquires schedule
information and starts monitoring and meter reads operation. NOTE:
In the current condition, touching the [OK] button completes the service call regardless
of whether 0 or 1 is set.
■■Procedure for Service Call Completion

When the service technician completes the work for the service call, follow the instruction as
described below to execute the service call completion work.

2) Select [COPIER] > [Option] > [USER] > [SCALLCMP].
F-2-330
2-168
2
Technical Explanation > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Procedure for Service Call Completion
2 Technical Explanation > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to Service Browser settings
2-169
■■Steps to Service Browser settings 3) Reboot this machine.

4) Make sure that "1 (: ACTIVE)" is set under [COPIER] > [Display] > [USER] > [BRWS-STS].
2) Select [COPIER] > [Function] > [INSTALL] > [BRWS-ACT] and then touch [OK].
NOTE:
When the status of the function is changed from disabled to enabled, E-RDS sends the
browser information to the UGW.
F-2-334
5) When the above-shown setting values are enabled, [Service Browser] is displayed in the
Service Mode screen.
F-2-332
If the connection is established with UGW successfully, "OK!" is displayed. When "NG!" is
displayed, perform the steps referring to "Troubleshooting" until connection is established
with UGW.
F-2-335
NOTE:
Generally, once service browsing is enabled (BRWS-STS : 1), it cannot be disabled
(BRWS-STS : 0) again*. To disable service browsing, clear SRAM.
* The function is disabled (BRWS-STS: 2) by executing BRWS-ACT again.
F-2-333
2-169
2
Technical Explanation > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to Service Browser settings
2 Technical Explanation > Embedded RDS > FAQ
2-170
■■Initializing E-RDS settings FAQ
It is possible to clear the SRAM data of E-RDS and change the E-RDS setting back to the No.1
default value. Q: In what case does a communication test with UGW fail?
A: The following cases can be considered in the becoming "NG!" case.
●● Initialization procedure 1. Name resolution was failed due to an incorrect host name or DNS server has been
1) Start [Service Mode] at Level 1. halted.
2) Select [COPIER] > [Function] > [CLEAR] > [ERDS-DAT] and then touch [OK]. 2. Network cable is blocked off.
3. Proxy server settings is not correct.
No.2
Q: When does E-RDS send counter information to UGW? How many data is sent?
A: The schedule of data transmitting, the start time are determined by settings in the UGW
side. The send time cannot be specified on the E-RDS side. Data is sent once every 16
hours.
The data size of counter information is approx. 285 KB.
No.3
Q: Will data which failed to be sent due to an error in communication with UGW be resent?
A: Data shown below will be resent.
F-2-336 • Jam log
• Service call log
●● Setting values and data to be initialized • Alarm log
The following E-RDS settings, internal data, and Alarm filtering information are initialized. • Service mode menu
• COPIER > Function > INSTALL > E-RDS The newest data is resent only when the settings are changed in service mode.
• COPIER > Function > INSTALL > RGW-ADR • Browser information
• COPIER > Function > INSTALL > RGW-PORT It is resent only when the web browser option is enabled.
• COPIER > Function > INSTALL > COM-LOG Data is resent endlessly (after 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, and 30 minutes since the occurrence of
communication error; once 30 minutes have passed, it is resent at 30-minute intervals) until it
CAUTION: is sent successfully. Resend continues even if the power is turned OFF and then ON.
In case of replacing the CA certificate file, even if initialization of E-RDS is executed, the
status is not returned to the factory default. No.4
When installing the certificate file other than the factory default CA certificate file, it is Q: What is the upper limit of the number of COM-LOGs? What is the upper limit of the number
required to delete the certificate file after E-RDS initialization and install the factory of characters of error information displayed in a COM-LOG?
default CA certificate file. A: Up to 30 log data can be saved. The data size of error information is maximum 128
For detailed procedures, see "Steps to E-RDS settings - step 3.". characters.
2-170
2
Technical Explanation > Embedded RDS > FAQ
2 Technical Explanation > Embedded RDS > FAQ
2-171
No.5 No.10
Q: Although Microsoft ISA as a proxy server is introduced, the authentication check is failed. Q: Is there any setting to be made on the device side to enable the service mode menu
Can E-RDS adopt with Microsoft ISA? transmission function? Moreover, what is Service mode menu set as the object of
A: E-RDS must comply with "Basic" while "Integrated" authentication is used for Microsoft ISA transmission?
(as default); therefore, authentication with E-RDS is available if you change the setting to A: No steps peculiar to Transmitting Service mode menu. As for the data that applies to
"Basic" authentication on the server. transmission of the service mode, see the "Service mode menu Transmission".
No.6 No.11
Q: Can I turn this machine power off during the e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote system Q: What service browser data is transmitted to UGW by E-RDS in what timing?
operation? A: The service browser data to be transmitted and the transmission timing are shown below.
A: While operating the e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote system, the power of the device Transmission timing Detailed procedure Transmission Error occurs
must be ON. If power OFF is needed, do not leave the device power OFF for long time. information
It will become "Device is busy, try later" errors if the power supply of network equipment When the service 1) Specify the service browser Service browser mode: Retransmission
such as HUB is made prolonged OFF. browser is enabled from setting in the service mode [Register] is not performed.
the disabled state [OFF] menu.
2) Send browser information to WEB browser ("Disabling
No.7 UGW. option: [ON] or [OFF] [OFF]" continues
Q: Although a Service call error may not be notified to UGW, the reason is what? 3) Once obtaining OK response according to the to be set.)
from UGW, enable the service license status
A: If a service technician in charge turns off the power supply of this machine immediately
browser mode [ACTIVE].
after error occurred once, It may be unable to notify to UGW because data processing does (To use the setting, it is
not take a time from the controller of this machine to NIC though, the data will be saved on necessary to reboot this
machine)
the RAM.
T-2-84
If the power supply is blocked off while starting up, the data will be inevitably deleted.
No.12
No.8 Q: Counter information could not be sent at the scheduled send time due to the power of this
Q: How does E-RDS operate while this machine is placed in the sleep mode? machine being turned OFF. Will the counter information be sent later when the power of
A: While being in Real Deep Sleep, and if data to be sent is in E-RDS, the system wakes up this machine is turned ON?
asleep, then starts to send the data to the UGW. The system also waits for completion of A: Yes. When a scheduled send such as that for counter could not be executed due to the
data transmission and let the device to shift to asleep status again. power of this machine being turned OFF, etc., and the scheduled send time has already
However, transition time to the Real Deep Sleep depends on the device, and the transition passed at power-on, the send is executed immediately.
to sleep won’t be done if the next data transmission will be done within 10 minutes.
The following shows data send according to the status of this machine.
No.9 Status of this machine

Send types
Q: Is E-RDS compatible with Department counter? Power ON Power OFF Sleep
Scheduled send Sent Not sent*1 Sent*2
A: No, E-RDS does not support Department counter.
Immediate send
Sent - Sent*2
(Service call log / Alarm log / Jam log)
T-2-85
*1: Immediately sent if the send time has already passed at power-on.
*2: Sent after recovery from sleep mode.
2-171
2
Technical Explanation > Embedded RDS > FAQ
2 Technical Explanation > Embedded RDS > Troubleshooting
2-172
Troubleshooting
No.13
Q: What is the number of the network port used by E-RDS? No.1
A: The port number used by E-RDS for communication with UGW is "443". Symptom: A communication test (COM-TEST) results NG!
If this setting is changed, an error occurs during communication with UGW. Therefore this Cause: Initial settings or network conditions is incomplete.
setting should not be changed unless otherwise instructed. Remedy 1: Check and take actions mentioned below.
1) Check network connections
No.14 Is the status indicator LED for the HUB port to which this machine is connected ON?
Q: After the setting for E-RDS was made, the IP address of the host machine was changed. In YES: Proceed to Step 2).
that case, is it necessary to execute COM-TEST again? NO: Check that the network cable is properly connected.
A: It is not necessary to execute COM-TEST again because the IP address used by E-RDS is
automatically changed. However, it is necessary to restart the device to reflect the change 2) Confirm loop back address (* In case of IPv4 )
in the setting of the IP address Select [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Settings] > [IPv4
Settings] > [PING Command], enter "127.0.0.1", and touch the [Start] button.
F-2-337
2-172
2
Technical Explanation > Embedded RDS > Troubleshooting
2-173
Does the screen display "Response from the host."? (See the next figure.) (b) Touch the [Up] button.
YES: Proceed to Step 3).
NO: There is a possibility that this machine’s network settings are wrong. Check the
details of the IPv4 settings once more.
F-2-340
(c) Select [IPv4 Settings] > [PING Command], enter the primary DNS server noted down
in step a) as the IP address, and touch the [Start] button.
F-2-338
Does the screen display "Response from the host."?
3) Confirmation from another PC connected to same network. YES: Proceed to Remedy 2.
Request the user to ping this machine from a PC connected to same network. NO: Enter the secondary DNS server noted down in step a) as the IP address, and
Does this machine respond? then touch the [Start] button.
YES: Proceed to Step 4).
NO: Confirm the details of this machine’s IP address and subnet mask settings. Does the screen display "Response from the host."?
YES: Proceed to Remedy 2.
4) Confirm DNS connection NO: There is a possibility that the DNS server address is wrong. Reconfirm the
(a) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Settings] > [DNS address with the user’s system administrator.
Settings] > [DNS Server Address Settings], write down the primary and secondary
addresses of the DNS server, and touch the [Cancel] button.
F-2-339
2-173
2
2-174
Remedy 2: Troubleshooting using communication error log (COM-LOG) 3) When each line is selected, the communication error log detailed screen is displayed as
1) Start [Service Mode] at Level 1. shown in the figure below. (Example: No. 02)
2) Select [COPIER] > [Function] > [INSTALL] > [COM-LOG] and touch the blank field on the
right side. The communication error log list screen is displayed.
F-2-342
NOTE:
• A detailed description of the error appears below 'Information'. (Max 128 characters)
• Touch the [OK] button to return to the communication error log list screen.
4) When a message is displayed, take an appropriate action referring to "Error code and
strings".
No.2
Symptom: A communication test results NG! even if network setting is set properly.
Cause: The network environment is inappropriate, or RGW-ADR or RGW-PORT settings for
E-RDS have been changed.
F-2-341 Remedy: The following points should be checked.
1) Check network conditions such as proxy server settings and so on.
NOTE: 2) Check the E-RDS setting values.
• Only the initial part of error information is displayed in the communication error log list
• Check the communication error log from COM-LOG.
screen.
• "*" is added to the top of the error text in the case of an error in communication test (method • Check whether RGW-ADR or RGW-PORT settings has changed. If RGW-ADR or RGW-
name: getConfiguration or communicationTest) only. PORT settings has changed, restore initial values. For initial values, see "Service cautions".
2-174
2
2-175
No.3 No.8
Symptom: There was a log, indicating "Device is not ready, try later" in error details of COM- Symptom: When a communication test (COM-TEST) is repeatedly executed, an error occurs.
LOG list. Cause: During communication conducted after execution of a COM-TEST, another COM-
Cause: A certain problem occurred in networking. TEST was executed again.
Remedy: Check and take actions mentioned below. Remedy: When repeatedly executing COM-TEST, execute COM-TEST at intervals of 5
1) Check networking conditions and connections. minutes or more.
2) Turn on the power supply of this machine and perform a communication test about 60
seconds later.
No.4
Symptom: "Unknown error" is displayed though a communication test (COM-TEST) has done
successfully.
Cause: It could be a problem at the UGW side or the network load is temporarily faulty.
Remedy: Try again after a period of time. If the same error persists, check the UGW status
with a network and UGW administrator.
No.5
Symptom: Enabling Service Browser (BRWS-ACT) results NG!
Cause: A communication test with UGW has not been performed, or a communication test
result is NG!
Remedy: Perform a communication test, and check that the test with UGW finishes
successfully.
No.6
Symptom: The display indicates that the service browser is enabled (BRWS-STS: 1), but the
service browser fails to be activated.
Cause: The main power switch of this machine has not been turned OFF and then ON. ON/
OFF of the service browser is enabled after reboot.
Remedy: Turn OFF and then ON the main power of this machine.
No.7
Symptom: Initializing the CA certificate (CA-KEY) results in NG!
Cause: Initialization process of the CA certificate has completed abnormally.
Remedy: Initialize the HDD.
2-175
2
2 Technical Explanation > Embedded RDS > Error code and strings
2-176
Error code and strings No. Code Error strings Cause Remedy
8 8xxx 0101 Server response Communication with UGW has Perform and complete a
The following error information is displayed on the communication error log details screen. error (NULL) been successful, but an error communication test (COM-
(Here, "server" means UGW.) of some sort has prevented TEST).
UGW from responding.
• The error information are displayed in the following form. When (Null) is displayed
at the end of the message,
[*] [Error strings] [Method name] [Error details provided by UGW] this indicates that there has
been an error in the HTTPS
NOTE: communication method.
"*" is added to the top of the error text in the case of an error in communication test 9 8xxx 0201 Server schedule is During the communication When the error occurs, report
(method name: getConfiguration or communicationTest) only. 8xxx 0202 invalid test, there has been some the details to the support
8xxx 0203 kind of error in the schedule section.
8xxx 0204 values passed from UGW. After the UGW side
No. Code Error strings Cause Remedy 8xxx 0206 has responded, try the
1 0000 0000 SUSPEND: mode Unmatched Operation Mode Initialize the E-RDS setting communication test again.
changed. (ERDS-DAT). 10 8xxx 0207 Internal Schedule is The schedule data in the Perform a communication test
2 0500 0003 SUSPEND: Rebooting the device while Perform a communication test 8xxx 0208 broken inside of E-RDS is not right. (COM-TEST).
Communication test the communication test had (COM-TEST). 11 8xxx 0221 Server specified list Alarm/Alert filtering error: The Alert filtering is not supported
is not performed. not been performed although is too big number of elements of the list by UGW.
E-RDS is enabled. specified by the server is over
3 0xxx 0003 Server schedule is Blank schedule data have Perform and complete a restriction value.
not exist been received from UGW. communication test (COM- 12 8xxx 0222 Server specified list Alarm filtering error: Unjust Alert filtering is not supported
TEST). is wrong value is included in the by UGW.
4 0xxx 0003 Communication test Communication test has not Perform and complete a element of the list specified by
is not performed completed. communication test (COM- the server.
TEST). 13 8xxx 0304 Device is busy, try The semaphore consumption Try again a communication test
5 84xx 0003 E-RDS switch is A communication test has Set E-RDS switch (E-RDS) later error at the time of a after a period of time.
setted OFF been attempted with the to 1, and then perform a communication test.
E-RDS switch being OFF. communication test (COM- 14 8xxx 0709 Tracking ID is not When upgrading firmware, the Obtain the sublog, and contact
TEST). match TrackingID notified by Updater the support department of the
6 8600 0002 Event Registration Processing (event processing) Turn the device OFF/ ON. differs from the thing of UGW sales company.
8600 0003 is Failed within the device has failed. If the error persists, replace designates.
8600 0101 the device system software. 15 8xxx 2000 Unknown error Some other kind of Perform and complete a
8600 0201 (Upgrade) communication error has communication test (COM-
8600 0305 occurred. TEST).
8600 0306 16 8xxx 2001 URL Scheme The header of the URL of the Check that the value of URL of
8600 0401 error(not https) registered UGW is not in https UGW (RGW-ADR) is https://
8600 0403 format. a01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/
8600 0414 agentif010.
8600 0415 17 8xxx 2002 URL server A URL different to that Check that the value of URL of
7 8xxx 0004 Operation is not Method which E-RDS is not Contact help desk specified is illegal specified by the UGW has UGW (RGW-ADR) is https://
supported supporting attempted. been set. a01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/
agentif010.
2-176
2
Technical Explanation > Embedded RDS > Error code and strings
2-177
No. Code Error strings Cause Remedy No. Code Error strings Cause Remedy
18 8xxx 2003 Network is not Communication attempted Check the network 25 8xxx 2028 Server certificate • No route certificate installed • Install the latest device
ready, try later without confirming network connection, as per the initial error in device. system software. (Upgrade)
connection, just after booting procedures described in the • Certificate other than • Correctly set the date and
up a device in which the troubleshooting. that initially registered time of the device.
network preparations are not Perform a communication test in the user's operating • Execute CLEAR > CA-
ready. (COM-TEST) about 60 seconds environment is being used, KEY, and turn OFF and
later, after turn on the device. but has not been registered then ON the device. (The
19 8xxx 2004 Server response Communication with UGW has Try again after a period of time. with the device. CA certificate at the time of
error been successful, but an error Check detailed error code • The date and time of the shipment is automatically
([Hexadecimal]) of some sort has prevented (Hexadecimal) and [Error device is not correct. installed.)
[Error detailed in UGW from responding. details in UGW] from UGW 26 8xxx 2029 Server certificate The server certificate Check that the value of URL of
UGW]*1 displayed after the message. verify error verification error occurred. UGW (RGW-ADR) is https://
20 8xxx 200A Server connection • TCP/IP communication fault • Check the network a01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/
error • The IP address of device is connection, as per the initial agentif010.
not set. procedures described in the 27 8xxx 2046 Server certificate • The route certificate Check that the device time and
troubleshooting. expired registered with the device date are correctly set.
• When proxy is used, make has expired. If the device time and date are
the settings for proxy, and • Certificate other than correct, upgrade to the latest
check the status of the proxy that initially registered system software.
server. in the user’s operating
21 8xxx 200B Server address Server address name • Check that the value of URL environment is being used,
resolution error resolution has failed. of UGW (RGW-ADR) is but has not been registered
https://a01.ugwdevice.net/ with the device.
ugw/agentif010. • The device time and date
• Check that Internet is outside of the certificated
connection is available in the period.
environment. 28 8xxx 2047 Server response Due to network congestion, If this error occurs when the
22 8xxx 2014 Proxy connection Could not connect to proxy Check proxy server address / time out etc., the response from UGW communication test is being run
error server due to improper port and re-enter as needed. does not come within the or Service Browser is being set,
address. specified time. (HTTPS level try again after a period of time.
23 8xxx 2015 Proxy address Could not connect to proxy • Check that the proxy time out)
resolution error server due to name resolution server name is correct. If 29 8xxx 2048 Service not found There is a mistake in the Check that the value of URL of
error of proxy address. the proxy server name is UGW URL, and UGW cannot UGW (RGW-ADR) is https://
correct, check the DNS be accessed. (Path is wrong) a01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/
connection, as per the initial agentif010.
procedures described in the 30 8xxx 2052 URL error The data which is not URL is Check that the value of URL of
troubleshooting. inputted into URL field. UGW (RGW-ADR) is https://
• Specify the IP address as the a01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/
proxy server name. agentif010.
24 8xxx 201E Proxy Proxy authentication is failed. Check the user name and 31 8xxx 2058 Unknown error SOAP Client fails to obtain Perform and complete a
authentication error password required in order to SOAP Response. communication test (COM-
login to the proxy, and re-enter Possibility of a problem in TEST).
as needed. UGW or of a temporary
problem in the network load.
32 8xxx 2063 SOAP Fault SOAP communication error Check that the value of port
has occurred. number of UGW (RGW-PORT)
is 443.
2-177
2
2-178
No. Code Error strings Cause Remedy
33 xxxx xxxx Device internal An internal error, such as Turn the device OFF/ ON.
error memory unavailable, etc., Or replace the device system
has occurred during a device software. (Upgrade)
internal error phase.
34 xxxx xxxx SUSPEND: Internal error occurred at the Turn the device OFF/ ON.
Initialize Failure! initiating E-RDS.
T-2-86
*1: [Hexadecimal]: indicates an error code returned from UGW.

[Error details in UGW]: indicates error details returned from UGW.
2-178
2
2 Technical Explanation > Updater > Functional Overview > Overview
2-179
Updater a. UGW-linked Download and Update (Full-Remote Update)

If the device is linked to UGW and the distribution schedule and update setting
are registered on UGW in advance, full remote firmware update is available on an
Functional Overview imageRUNNER ADVANCE-series device. Upon downloaded from CDS, the firmware is
updated on the device.
■■Overview
1) Set up customers, Sales Company
Updater provides functions that enable network communication with Content Delivery System 3) Give a firmware distribution
UGW device types, distribution / Partner
schedule and the
(hereinafter CDS) to install firmware, MEAP applications and system options. command to e-ROS.
command for download
UGW Operator
• Firmware Installation
Updater function enables users to distribute firmware through CDS via Internet. Particularly
2) Notify distribution
on e-Maintenance/UGW (called NETEYE in Japan)-enabled devices, firmware can be e-RDS information to CDS.
updated remotely, which effectively slashes costs incurred in field services. 4) Download CDS
firmware
Updater Firmware
Firmware Upload
• MEAP Application/System Option Installation Canon Inc.
By linking devices to CDS and License Management System (providing the function to imageRUNNER 5) Writing process is
manage licenses; hereinafter LMS), applications can be installed in devices via Updater, ADVANCE automatically started upon
download completed.
regardless of those not embedded (MEAP application) or embedded (system options) in
F-2-343
devices.
b. UGW-linked Download (Remote Distribution / Update)
If the device is linked to UGW and the distribution schedule is registered on UGW in
●● Installing Firmware advance, firmware can be distributed to an imageRUNNER ADVANCE-series device before
With link to Updater, service technicians provide firmware install services in the following 3
a service technician actually visits the customer site. This allows the service technician to
methods.
update the firmware manually immediately after completing device inspection.
Download Downloadable Firmware Versions
Update 1) Set up customers, Sales Company
Distribution Method Commanded Previous Current Newer UGW device types, distribution / Partner
Timing 3) Give a firmware distribution
by: Ver Ver Ver command to e-ROS.
schedule and the
command for download
a. UGW-linked Download / Update UGW Auto No Yes Yes*1 UGW Operator
(Full-remote update)
b. UGW-linked Download UGW Manual Yes Yes Yes
(Remote Distribution / Update)
2) Notify distribution
c. Manual Download / Update Local UI Auto No Yes Yes*1 e-RDS information to CDS.
(On-site Update via Service mode) Manual Yes Yes Yes CDS
4) Download
*1:You can select the version allowed Remote Update. T-2-87 firmware
Updater Firmware
Firmware Upload
Canon Inc.
imageRUNNER
ADVANCE
5) Writing process is started by
Service manually executing Updater.
Technician
F-2-344
2-179
2
Technical Explanation > Updater > Functional Overview > Overview
2 Technical Explanation > Updater > Functional Overview > Overview
2-180
c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update via Service Mode) Installing MEAP Application
If an imageRUNNER ADVANCE-series device has connection with the external network,
a service technician can gain access to CDS via Service mode to download and update LAN
Sales
LAN LMS
firmware. This allows service technicians to update the firmware as needed on the Company
customer site even without PCs.

User
1) Manually execute CDS 5) Manuals, etc. 2) License
Updater. Authentication MEAP
Firmware Upload Application
Updater Firmware LAN
Canon Inc. Manual
CDS 3) Create LF
Upload
1) Enter LAN
imageRUNNER
Application
ADVANCE
Service 2) Firmware distribution
Technician 4) Transmit MEAP Canon Inc.
imageRUNNER Application/LF
F-2-345 ADVANCE
NOTE: If a customer enters LAN LAN: License Access Number

purchased from the sales company LF: License File
“External network” here means the network connecting the device to CDS via Internet. to an imageRUNNERADVANCE- (DSN: Device Serial Number,
series device, MEAP application/LF automatically sent to CDS upon LAN
can be installed. entered.)
NOTE: F-2-346
Users are able to gain firmware distribution in the following 3 methods by introducing Installing System Option
CDS. See User Manual for detailed information.
Download Downloadable Firmware Versions LAN
Update Sales
LAN LMS
Distribution Method Commanded Company
Timing Previous Ver Current Ver Newer Ver
by
Manual download/ Auto No No Yes *1
Local UI
update via Local UI Manual No No Yes *1 User
5) Manuals, etc. 2) License
Manual download/ Auto No No Yes *1 Authentication
Remote UI
upload via Remote UI Manual No No Yes *1 LAN
Manual
Special download/ Specific version only CDS 3) Create LF
Remote UI - Upload
upload via Remote UI (Obtain it separately) 1) Enter LAN
Application
*1: Only the latest version of Remote update-enabled version is downloadable.
4) Transmit LF Canon Inc.
imageRUNNER
ADVANCE
●● Installing MEAP Application/System Option
The following is the installation method of MEAP application/system option which is enabled LAN: License Access Number
If a customer enters LAN
LF: License File
purchased from the sales company
by applying CDS. to an imageRUNNERADVANCE-
(DSN: Device Serial Number,
automatically sent to CDS upon LAN
series device, a LF can be installed.
entered.)
a. LMS-linked MEAP Application/System Option Installation

F-2-347
If an imageRUNNER ADVANCE-series device is connected to the external network, user or
service technician can gain access to CDS from User mode to install a MEAP application
or a system option.
2-180
2
Technical Explanation > Updater > Functional Overview > Overview
2 Technical Explanation > Updater > Functional Overview > List of Functions
2-181
■■System Configuration ■■List of Functions
The figure below schematically shows the system configuration. The matrix below shows the list of functions provided by Updater.
Service User Remote UGW-
Category Function
LMS
MEAP application Mode Mode UI linked
User Dealer Manual
Sales Checking firmware compatibility Yes - - -
Internet
Company
Manual Checking special firmware Yes - - -
License
Access No. Readme Checking latest firmware
- Yes Yes -
CDS version
Application/License Registering/deleting firmware
Business Yes Yes Yes -
Updater Firmware distribution schedule
Application Group
eRDS Firmware Confirming and downloading
Yes Yes Yes Yes
UGW firmware
Firmware
QA
Updating downloaded firmware Yes Yes Yes -
Service Command for Firmware Distribution Cancelling downloaded
Technician Yes Yes Yes -
Canon Inc. firmware
Acquiring firmware distribution
F-2-348 information registered from - - - Yes
UGW
Notifying firmware version
- - - Yes
information
Inquiring license for MEAP
- Yes Yes -
MEAP application/ application/system option
system option Installing MEAP application /
- Yes Yes -
system option
Settings Yes - - -
System Testing communications Yes Yes Yes -
Management Displaying update logs Yes Yes Yes -
Displaying system logs Yes Yes Yes -
Internal system Notifying internal system error
Yes Yes Yes Yes
error notification occurrence to distribution server
T-2-88
2-181
2
Technical Explanation > Updater > Functional Overview > List of Functions
2 Technical Explanation > Updater > Functional Overview > Distribution Flow
2-182
■■Distribution Flow ●● MEAP Application/System Option Installation Flow
MEAP application/system option installation method using service mode is not provided.
●● Firmware Installation Flow
Be sure to use the user mode to install.
Service technicians provide firmware install services in the following 3 methods.
: Operator of each company : User operation
a: UGW-linked download and update

b: UGW-linked download
Application
c: Manual download and update Market Release
: Operator of each company : User operation

License Access
Number Acquisition
Firmware
(packaged with the
Market Release product)
a
b Device Serial No.
Acquisition
(from the device)
c
UGW setting
for distribution Firmware acquisition
(UGW-linked)*1
License Key License File

Distribution setting & Distribution setting & Distribution setting & Acquisition Acquisition
Download Download Download (from LMS) (from LMS)
Automatic download Download via SST
Via Service mode Via User mode Via User mode
(Local UI) (Local UI) (Remote UI)
Install distributed System Option System Option MEAP Application

Install
application Install Manual Install Manual Install
Via User mode
Via User mode Via User mode Via User mode Via User mode
(Local UI)
(Remote UI) (Local UI) (Remote UI) (Remote UI)
Apply (Update) Apply (Update) Apply (Update)

F-2-350
Automatic update Via Service mode Via User mode Via User mode Update via SST
(Local UI) (Local UI) (Remote UI)
F-2-349
*1: Schedules for UGW-linked distribution are maintained on CDS.
2-182
2
Technical Explanation > Updater > Functional Overview > Distribution Flow
2 Technical Explanation > Updater > Limitations and Cautions > Cautions
2-183
Limitations and Cautions Wait for EOJ (end of job) Function
Firmware update will be triggered only after the following jobs are completed.
■■Limitations This is the Updater-specific specification.
Changing Date/Time on Device Job/Function Receiving Printing Queued print Sending Queued send
When a user changes the date/time setting on the device (including change of the setting type jobs jobs
COPY - Wait for EOJ Wait for EOJ - -
according to daylight saving time), the firmware distribution may not be performed as
PRINT Wait for EOJ Wait for EOJ - -
scheduled. (end of job) Wait for EOJ
But there is not the problem if it is time adjustment of several minutes with NTP servers. FAX Wait for EOJ Wait for EOJ Wait for EOJ Wait for EOJ Wait for EOJ
I-FAX Receipt Cancel Wait for EOJ Wait for EOJ Wait for EOJ Wait for EOJ
processing to
Change of Setting from Service mode
trigger update *
Any settings from Service mode will be enabled after restarting the device. Report Print - Wait for EOJ Wait for EOJ - -
SEND - - - Cancel Cancel
processing to processing to
■■Cautions trigger update * trigger update *
Concurrent use of Updater functions T-2-89
Multiple users cannot use Updater functions on a device concurrently by using it together with *The data are guaranteed even if cut off in the middle of a job.It becomes the recovery object
Remote UI. after the device reboot and carry out send / reception again.
Coexistence of Remote UI and other tools Even during transfer, Pull SCAN job processing is cancelled soon after scanning is
Users logged in SMS (Service Management Service) are unable to use Update functions completed.
from Remote UI. Firmware update is cancelled if the jobs are not completed within 10 minutes. If this occurs,
the error code, 8x001106, will be returned (different numbers will be shown for x depending
Using Updater function from Remote UI on the execution modes).
Upon the following operations done, Updater functions are suspended from Remote UI for Firmware update is executed if the jobs stated above are not in the queue.
certain duration. Follow the shutdown sequence to reboot the device after the firmware is updated.
• When a user exits Web browser without clicking [Portal] or [Log Out] button in the setting of
Remote Login Service via SMS
• When a user exits Web browser without clicking [Portal] button in the setting of not to use
Remote Login Service via SMS.
• When a user exits Web browser without clicking [Log out from SMS] or [To Remote UI]
button.
2-183
2
Technical Explanation > Updater > Limitations and Cautions > Cautions
2 Technical Explanation > Updater > Preparation > Setting Sales Company’s HQ
2-184
Preparation ■■Setting Sales Company’s HQ
When using devices input in the markets listed below, the default setting of Sales Company’s
■■Overview of Preparation
HQ should be changed before obtaining firmware distributed from CDS. Unless the setting is
The following should be prepared before using Updater. changed properly, the desired firmware may not be able to be selected.
• For updating of firmware Default Setting of Sales Setting of Sales Company's
Market
Setting Enabling [Manual Company's HQ HQ after Change
Enabling [Update
Installation Sales Network Enabling Update] Button Canada US CA
Firmware] Button Latin America US/SG LA
Method Company’s Settings UGW Link of User Mode
of User Mode Hong Kong SG HK
HQ (Remote UI)
T-2-92
UGW-linked
Download and Yes Yes Yes - -
Go to the following screen to change the setting of Sales Company's HQ.
Update
UGW-linked Service Setting of Device Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > CDS-CTL
Yes Yes Yes - - Technician (Level 1)
Download
Manual Download
Yes Yes - - -
and Update
Manual Download
and Update via Yes Yes - Yes - NOTE:
Local UI The list below shows the setting of Sales Company’s HQ for CDS-CTS by market.
Manual Download Check and adhere to the appropriate setting for your market.
and Update via Yes Yes - Yes - <List of Sales Company’s HQ and the settings for CDS-CTL>
Remote UI Japan = JP China = CN
Special Download USA = US Hong Kong = HK
and Update via Yes - - - Yes Singapore = SG Australia = AU
Remote UI Europe = NL Canada = CA
T-2-90 Korea = KR Latin America= LA
• For Install of Application
Enabling [Install Application/
Installation Method Network Settings
Options] Button of User Mode
LMS-linked Installation Yes -
LMA-linked installation via Local UI Yes Yes
LMS-linked installation via Remote UI Yes Yes
T-2-91
2-184
2
Technical Explanation > Updater > Preparation > Setting Sales Company’s HQ
2 Technical Explanation > Updater > Preparation > Network Settings
2-185
■■Network Settings ●● Confirming URL Setting of Distribution Server
This section describes how to confirm the URL setting of the distribution server.
●● Connecting to External Network
The method of connecting to external network is similar to a normal network connection
1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1.
method. Refer to user manual of the device for details.
2. Press [Updater] button.
NOTE:
• See User Manual for how to connect the device to the external network.
• Before using UGW link or User mode, see the sections below to prepare as required.
"Enabling UGW Link"
"Enabling [Update Firmware] Button of User Mode"
"Enabling [Install Application/Options] Button of User Mode"
NOTE:
“External Network” here means the network connecting the device to CDS via Internet.
F-2-351
3. Press [Software Management Settings] button.
F-2-352
2-185
2
Technical Explanation > Updater > Preparation > Network Settings
2-186
4. Press [Settings] button. ●● Communication Test
This section describes how to check if the communication is normally done to the distribution
server and/or the file server.
NOTE:
Carry out the communication test with both Embedded RDS and CDS.

F-2-353
5. Ensure to enter “https://device.c-cdsknn.net/cds_soap/updaterif” in the field beside the
[Delivery Server URL] button.
If the URL is not entered or a wrong URL is entered in the field, click [Delivery Server URL]
button to show the virtual keypad. Check the URL and enter the correct one.
F-2-355
F-2-354
6. Press [OK] to set the entered items. Now the URL of the distribution server is successfully
set.
2-186
2
2-187
3. Press [Software Management Settings] button. 5. Press [Yes] button.
F-2-356 F-2-358
4. Press [Test Communication] button. Obtain the download file information for communication test from the distribution server
(to execute the communication test to the distribution server).
Using the download file information for communication test, the contents for test are
downloaded from the file server (for the communication test to the file server).
6. Upon the communication test completed, the communication test result screen is shown.
Press [OK] button to exit this operation.
F-2-357
F-2-359
2-187
2
2 Technical Explanation > Updater > Preparation > Enabling [Update Firmware] Button of User Mode
2-188
■■Enabling UGW Link ■■Enabling [Update Firmware] Button of User Mode
When installing the firmware in the method of “UGW-linked Download and Update” or “UGW- To allow users to install firmware using Updater, the setting of firmware installation should be
linked Download”, the following should be set before actually using UGW link. set to ON for users in advance.
Setting of Device Service Setting of Device Service Mode COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >CDS-FIRM
COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >CDS-UGW
Service Mode Technician (Level 1) (0 -> 1)
(0 -> 1)
Service Technician (Level 1)
Setting of UGW In [Customer Management] screen, set [Do not
WebPortal distribute firmware] to [Distribute firmware]. • User Mode screen for Updater when the setting is not enabled (CDS-FIRM(0)):
See "Analysis>Firmware Distribution
Setting of Authorities on
Sales Company's HQ Information" to grant the appropriate authorities
UGW WebPortal
to each account.
NOTE:
• See “imageWARE Remote Operator’s Manual / e-Maintenance Business Operation
Manual“ for how to operate UGW WebPortal.
• [Distribute Firmware] should be set on [Customer Management] screen for staff in charge
of setting for [Enter customer information] or [Command for firmware distribution] in order
to allow them to select the desired device on [Firmware Distribution Information] screen.
• If [Distribute Firmware] is not shown on [Customer Management] screen of UGW
WebPortal, appropriate authorities may not be set to each account in Firmware
Distribution Information. Contact the Sales Company HQ concerned for confirmation.
F-2-360
• User Mode screen for Updater when the setting is enabled (CDS-FIRM(1)):
F-2-361
2-188
2
Technical Explanation > Updater > Preparation > Enabling [Update Firmware] Button of User Mode
2 Technical Explanation > Updater > Preparation > Enabling [Manual Update] Button of User Mode (Remote UI)
2-189
■■Enabling [Install Application/Options] Button of User Mode ■■Enabling [Manual Update] Button of User Mode (Remote UI)
To allow users to install applications using Updater, the setting of application installation To allow users to install firmware from Updater using the file on Local PCs, the setting of
should be set to ON for users in advance. firmware installation should be set to ON for users in advance.
Service Setting of Device Service Mode COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >CDS-MEAP Service Setting of Device Service Mode COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >LOCLFIRM
Technician (Level 1) (0 -> 1) Technician (Level 1) (0 -> 1)
• User Mode screen of Updater when the setting is not enabled (CDS-MEAP(0)): • Remote UI screen of Updater when the setting is not enabled (LOCLFIRM (0)):
F-2-364
F-2-362 • Remote UI screen of Updater when the setting is enabled (LOCLFIRM (1)):
• User Mode screen of Updater when the setting is enabled (CDS-MEAP(1)):
F-2-365
F-2-363
2-189
2
Technical Explanation > Updater > Preparation > Enabling [Manual Update] Button of User Mode (Remote UI)
2 Technical Explanation > Updater > System Management Operations > Various Setting
2-190
System Management Operations 5. Press [Delivery Server URL] to show the virtual keypad. Enter the URL.
■■Various Setting
●● Setting URL of Distribution Server
This section describes how to set URL of the distribution server.

F-2-368
• [Delivery Server URL]:
Enter the "https://device.c-cdsknn.net/cds_soap/updaterif".
6 Press [OK] to set the entered items. Now the URL of the distribution server is successfully
set.
F-2-366
4. Press [Settings] button.
F-2-367
2-190
2
Technical Explanation > Updater > System Management Operations > Various Setting
2 Technical Explanation > Updater > System Management Operations > Various Setting
2-191
●● Setting Log Level 5. Select a log level from [Log Level] dropdown list.
This section describes how to set system log levels.
F-2-371
• [Log Level]:
Select one of 5 levels ranging from [0] to [4].
See the table below for logs output in each level.
Log Output
Log Level
Trace Information Important Message Ordinary Error System Error
0 - - - - Yes
1 - - - Yes Yes
F-2-369 2 - - Yes Yes Yes
4. Press [Settings] button. 3 - Yes Yes Yes Yes
4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
T-2-93
NOTE:
This list shows the contents of the Log Output.
Log Output Description
Trace Detailed logs for debug
Information Logs related to operations done on the system
Important Message Update logs output by firmware type
Installation logs by MEAP application
Logs related to enabled functions by system option
Ordinary Error Logs for ordinary errors
System Error Logs for internal system errors
F-2-370
6. Press [OK] button to set the selected log level. Now the log level is successfully set.
2-191
2
Technical Explanation > Updater > System Management Operations > Various Setting
2 Technical Explanation > Updater > System Management Operations > Displaying Logs
2-192
■■Displaying Logs 5. Press [Display Update Logs] button.
●● Update Logs
This section describes how to confirm System Option/MEAP Application Installation Logs and
Firmware Update Logs.
F-2-374
6. System Option/MEAP Application Installation Logs and Firmware Update Logs are shown.
F-2-372
4. Press [Select Log Display] button.
F-2-375
F-2-373
2-192
2
Technical Explanation > Updater > System Management Operations > Displaying Logs
2-193
●● System Logs 5. Press [Display System Logs] button.
This section describes how to confirm System Logs.
F-2-378
6. Updater internal logs are displayed.
Press [OK] button to exit this operation
F-2-376
4. Press [Select Log Display] button.
F-2-379
F-2-377
2-193
2
2-194
●● Communication Test 5. Press [Yes] button.
This section describes how to check if the communication is normally done to the distribution
server and/or the file server.
F-2-382
Obtain the download file information for communication test from the distribution server (to
execute the communication test to the distribution server).
Using the download file information for communication test, the contents for test are
downloaded from the file server (for the communication test to the file server).
6. Upon the communication test completed, the communication test result screen is shown.
F-2-380
4. Press [Test Communication] button.
F-2-383
F-2-381
NOTE:
Carry out the communication test with both Embedded RDS and CDS.
2-194
2
2 Technical Explanation > Updater > Maintenance > How to Replace Devices
2-195
Maintenance ■■How to Replace Devices
All settings should be set again because no data are inherited. See the section of
■■Upgrading Updater
"Preparation", “Updater” of Chapter 2 “Technology” of this manual for more detailed
The firmware installed in the device should be also upgraded when upgrading Updater. information.
See the section of “Version Upgrade” , Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual for more
detailed information.
■■Formatting Hard Disk

Since Updater is a MEAP application, its contents can be temporarily saved in the MEAP
application storage area on PC via SST during formatting or replacing HDD. See MEAP
Service Manual for further information.
The settings initialized in format or replacement should be restored. See the section
of "Preparation", “Updater” of Chapter 2 “Technology” of this manual for more detailed
information.
NOTE:
When formatting or replacing HDD, distribution schedule, downloaded firmware (not
updated yet) and logs (update/system logs) will be deleted.
■■How to Replace Controller Boards

The network and service mode setting should be set again after initialization. See the
section of "Preparation", “Updater” of Chapter 2 “Technology” of this manual for more
detailed information.
2-195
2
Technical Explanation > Updater > Maintenance > How to Replace Devices
2 Technical Explanation > Updater > FAQ > FAQ on Installing Firmware
2-196
FAQ No.4
Q: In the course of “UGW-linked download”, what will happen if the user downloads the
■■FAQ on Installing Firmware firmware before the service technician update the firmware downloaded with “UGW-linked
download” before?
No.1
A: The previously downloaded firmware in the method of “UGW-linked download” will be
Q: Is it also possible to downgrade firmware with using CDS?
overridden by the subsequently downloaded one.
A: Firmware can be downgraded in some methods shown in the table below.
This is because only one downloaded firmware can be held on the device.
If download and update are performed consecutively, firmware can’t be downgraded.
The firmware downloaded in the method of “Service mode-linked download” and “UGW-
linked download” can be checked/deleted from User mode, but cannot be updated, so it
Distribution Method Downgrade Possibility
cannot be updated by the user unnoticed by the service technician.
UGW-linked Download and Update No
UGW-linked Download Yes
Manual Download and Update(Timing to Apply : Manual) Yes No.5
Manual Download and Update(Timing to Apply : Automatic) No Q: What happens if the user registers another distribution schedule when the distribution
T-2-94 schedule has been set in “manual download and update”?
No.2 A: The distribution schedule subsequently registered by the user will override the existing
Q: When installing firmware, does it take less time in “manual download and update” schedule. This is because only one distribution schedule can be held. Any existing
compared to “update via SST”? distribution schedule is deleted and the newly registered distribution schedule is made
A: It depends on the number of devices to update firmware. valid.
When updating the firmware on a device, it takes more time in “manual download and
update” compared to “update via SST” (It depend on network environment.). No.6
As for the time to update firmware to multiple devices, “manual download and update” Q: How is an individual response edition of firmware distributed?
takes less time compared to “update via SST” because updating the firmware to multiple A: Any individual response edition of firmware can be installed in all the methods provided by
devices can be executed simultaneously. service technicians. Before installing the individual response edition, ensure to obtain the
ID and password separately.
No.3
Q: How can we confirm that the firmware is properly updated after “UGW-linked download No.7
and update” done? Q: If the device is down during firmware update, can the device be started using the older
A: You can confirm this in E-mail or the Device List on UGW-linked screen. firmware version?
E-mail to notify firmware update will be sent from CDS server to the addresses set as A: No, it is impossible to start the device using older versions. If this occurs, the service
destinations at the time of distribution setting to notify update completion. technician in charge should reinstall the firmware via SST. See the section of “Version
On UGW-linked screen, search the device of your interest on [Select Device] screen to find Upgrade” of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual for more detailed information.
the distribution status per device as shown in the search result.
No.8
Q: If the device is down during firmware download, is it possible to download the firmware
again?
A: Firmware cannot be downloaded again automatically. Instead, the error is notified in E-mail.
The user should register the firmware distribution schedule again accordingly.
2-196
2
Technical Explanation > Updater > FAQ > FAQ on Installing Firmware
2 Technical Explanation > Updater > FAQ > FAQ on Installing MEAP Application/System Option
2-197
No.9 ■■FAQ on Installing MEAP Application/System Option
Q: Can we cancel the operation during firmware download?
No.1
A: Yes. [Cancel] button is shown.
Q: What happens if a MEAP application is installed in the system with insufficient HDD free
space?
A: An error message is shown. Upon starting installation, the MEAP application checks the
required space against free space to judge installation availability.
No.2
Q: Can we cancel the operation during installation of MEAP application?
A: Yes: [Cancel] button is shown.
No.3
Q: Is the device automatically restarted after the system option is enabled?
A: The device is not automatically restarted. Users should restart the device manually.
F-2-384
No.10
Q: E-mail is sent to users to notify update completion. Can service technicians also receive
such a notification?
A: Yes. The notification E-mail is also set for the service technician in charge if the user enters
his/her E-mail address at the time of firmware distribution setting.
Multiple E-mail addresses can be entered in the field.Delimit each E-mail address with “,”
(comma) or “;” (semicolon) when you enter multiple E-mail addresses in the field.
No.11
Q: How long does the firmware update take?
A: Approx. 30 min. However, this does not include the download time. Download time relies
on the network environment.
2-197
2
Technical Explanation > Updater > FAQ > FAQ on Installing MEAP Application/System Option
2 Technical Explanation > Updater > FAQ > FAQ on General Matters of Updater
2-198
■■FAQ on General Matters of Updater No.2
Q: How can operations using Updater be masked on the users' side?
No.1
A: Be sure to perform the following from the service mode.
Q: What preparation is needed in each installation method?
• Masking Firmware Installation
A: See the table below for preparation required in each installation method.
Setting Device Service Mode COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >CDS-FIRM
• For updating firmware (Level 1) (1 -> 0)
Setting Enabling [Manual Setting Device Service Mode COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >LOCLFIRM
Enabling [Update (Level 1) (1 -> 0)
Installation Sales Network Enabling Update] Button
Firmware] Button
Method Company’s Settings UGW Link of User Mode
of User Mode
HQ (Remote UI) • Masking Application Installation
UGW-linked
Setting Device Service Mode COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >CDS-MEAP
Download and Yes Yes Yes - -
(Level 1) (1 -> 0)
Update
UGW-linked
Yes Yes Yes - -
Download
No.3
Manual Download
Yes Yes - - - Q: Can the communication be cancelled during the communication test?
and Update
Manual Download A: Yes. During the communication test, “Cancel” button is displayed.
and Update via Yes Yes - Yes -
Local UI
Manual Download
and Update via Yes Yes - Yes -
Remote UI
Special Download
and Update via Yes - - - Yes
Remote UI
T-2-95
• For install Application

Enabling [Install Application/
Installation Method Network Settings
Options] Button of User Mode
LMS-linked Installation Yes -
LMA-linked installation via Local UI Yes Yes
LMS-linked installation via Remote UI Yes Yes
T-2-96
2-198
2
Technical Explanation > Updater > FAQ > FAQ on General Matters of Updater
2 Technical Explanation > DCM > DCM > Overview
2-199
DCM 1) Perform the import of the DCM data of the service mode earlier.
2) Reboot the Host machine.
3) Import the DCM data of the user mode.
DCM • As for service mode, if the process is not completed within 5 minutes in the case of export
and 15 minutes in the case of import, the item performed at that time is continued until it
■■Overview ends, but the final result becomes ERROR.
DCM (Device Configuration Management) is a function to migrate the setting values (of user • Data to which no password is set when exporting service mode cannot be loaded
mode and service mode). In terms of the description in the User’s Guide, it is synonymous from collective import from RUI. When assuming to perform collective import from RUI,
with "Import/Export All". Service mode setting values can be backed up/restored from the top password must be set to data to be exported.
screen of service mode. • Following limitations are applied to password for DCM data:
The existing main controller did it only for the same main machine. DCM supports the • Character string of software keyboard: 0 to 32 characters
following 3 patterns. • No password is set when 0 character is entered. (The setting in which no password is
set is allowed only for service mode.)
• The same machine (backup for the purpose of providing against emergency) • No space is allowed in the middle of a password.
• A different machine of the same model (setting values are migrated collectively to multiple • Password is case sensitive.
machines when replacing a host machine) • At the time of following setting, Host matchine does not recognize USB memory.The DCM
• A different model (e.g.: the setting values are copied from an old model to a new model) function is not usable, too.
●● Where data is stored • Settings/Registration > Preferences > External Interface > USB Settings > Use MEAP
Store the backup data in the following location. Driver for External USB Device = On
• Remote UI > PC (RUI)
• iW EMC > iW EMC Server ●● Restrictions about import/export by Remote UI
• Service Mode > USB memory device/HDD of the machine (top screen of service mode) • An import/export process ends with error while the following specific job is executed;
●● Setting values that can be backed up • Send job,
The values changed by the user under [Settings/Registration] and those specified in service • Forwarding job,
mode can be backed up. • FAX reception job,
• IFAX reception job
Only setting values are backed up. Image data such as scanned image cannot be backed up.
• If this function is executed with a print job simultaneously, it affects the operation such as;
• [Settings/Registration] value that a user set. UI is locked, or a print job is cleared by reboot after import. So it requires careful operation.
• Service mode setting values • A device rejects an import/ export request during shut-down.
●● General limitations on DCM • If this function is executed with device information distribution or RUI import/ export
• With DCM, stored data, MEAP application, and system option license cannot be migrated. (conventional function) simultaneously, the first coming job takes priority and they are
• A .dcm file exported to the internal HDD is not deleted even when the machine is restarted. controlled exclusively.
Only 2 files at a maximum are stored in HDD. When there are more than 2 files, the old • If this function is executed with a firmware update by a CDS Updater simultaneously, a
.dcm files are deleted from the oldest. firmware update process takes priority, and this function is stopped temporarily by reboot.
• Continuous import is not guaranteed. After importing a file, the machine must be restarted. • When error code is issued, this function ends with error.
If executing import without restart, NG is displayed and a file is not imported. • If the display language differs between export and import, a setting value of a text corrupts
• When importing DCM file in service mode and user mode separately, perform it in the in some cases. The character corruption can be solved by changing the display language
following procedures. to the appropriate one.
2-199
2
Technical Explanation > DCM > DCM > Overview
2-200
●● Import/Export All from Remote UI
The following settings information is available with the Import function in each case
• Settings/Registration Basic Information
• Box Settings
• Department ID Management Settings
• Main Menu Settings
• Favorite Settings
• Address Book
• Forwarding Settings
• Quick Menu Settings
• Paper Type Management Settings
• Web Access Settings
• MEAP Application Setting Information
• User Setting Information
• Workflow Composer
• Service Mode Settings(Display/hide of the service mode settings on the export screen)
F-2-385
Note:
Display/hide of the service mode settings on RUI can be switched by changing the
setting in the following service mode.
Service mode L1 > Copier > Option > USER > SMD-EXPT
[0]: Hide the service mode settings. (Def.)
[1]: Display the service mode settings.
2-200
2
2-201
Collective Import Using Data Collectively Exported from RUI Setting Information Case Case Case
For the reason of security, it is not appropriate that the user mode can be exported from A B C
service mode without user's permission. Because of that, it cannot be exported due to the Preferences Paper Settings Paper Settings Yes Yes -
specification However, it is possible to import the setting values of user mode exported from Register Custom Size Yes Yes -
RUI. Paper Type Management Settings Yes Yes Yes
Display Settings Default Screen after Startup/Restoration Yes Yes Yes
Default Screen (Status Monitor/Cancel) Yes Yes Yes
Preparation Display Fax Function Yes Yes Yes
PC and web browser Store Location Display Settings Yes Yes Yes
USB memory device to store the data of reference machine Language/Keyboard Switch On/Off Yes Yes Yes
Language/Keyboard Switch Yes Yes Yes
Use Keyboard Shift Lock Feature Yes Yes Yes
Overall flow Display Remaining Paper Message Yes Yes Yes
1. Complete the device setting as a reference machine. No. of Copies/Job Duration Status Yes Yes Yes
2. Export the data of reference machine including service mode from RUI. Display Original Scanning Cleaning Area Yes Yes Yes
Paper Type Selection Screen Priority Yes Yes Yes
3. Copy the data to the root of the USB memory device using a PC.
mm/Inch Entry Switch Yes Yes Yes
4. Connect the USB memory device to the copy destination machine. ID/User Name Display On/Off Yes Yes Yes
5. Execute import by specifying the target files from RESTORE in service mode. Timer/Energy Date/Time Settings Yes Yes Yes
Settings Time Format Yes Yes Yes
The following cases may be possible for the Import All function. Quick Startup Settings for Main Power Yes Yes Yes
Auto Reset Time Yes Yes Yes
Case A:Importing all to your machine (Restoring the settings information to your machine for
Restrict Auto Reset Time Yes Yes Yes
backups) Function After Auto Reset Yes Yes Yes
Case B:Importing all to the same model machine. Auto Sleep Time Yes Yes Yes
Case C:Importing all to the different model machine that supports the Import All function Sleep Mode Energy Use Yes Yes Yes
Auto Sleep Weekly Timer Yes Yes Yes
Sleep Mode Exit Time Settings Yes Yes Yes
Network Confirm Network Connection Set. Changes Yes Yes Yes
TCP/IP Settings
IPv4 Settings Use IPv4 Yes Yes Yes
IP Address Settings
IP Address Yes - -
Subnet Mask Yes Yes Yes
Gateway Address Yes Yes Yes
DHCP Option Settings Yes Yes Yes
IPv6 Settings Use IPv6 Yes Yes Yes
Stateless Address Yes Yes Yes
Settings
Manual Address Settings Yes - -
Use DHCPv6 Yes Yes Yes
2-201
2
2-202
Setting Information Case Case Case Setting Information Case Case Case
A B C A B C
Preferences Network DNS Settings DNS Server Address Yes Yes Yes Function Common OCR (Text Searchable) Settings Yes Yes Yes
Settings Settings Trace & Smooth Settings Yes Yes Yes
DNS Host/Domain Name Yes - - OOXML Settings Yes Yes Yes
Settings Specify Minimum PDF Version Yes Yes Yes
DNS Dynamic Update Yes Yes Yes Format PDF to PDF/A Yes Yes Yes
Settings Optimize PDF for Web Yes Yes Yes
mDNS SettingsUse Yes Yes Yes 256-bit AES Settings for Encrypted PDF Yes Yes Yes
mDNS/mDNS Name Rights Management Server Settings Yes Yes Yes
WINS Settings Yes Yes Yes Set Authentication Method Yes Yes Yes
LPD Print Settings Yes Yes Yes Copy Auto Collate Yes Yes -
RAW Print Settings Yes Yes Yes Register/Edit Favorite Settings Yes Yes -
SNTP Settings Yes Yes Yes Change Default Settings Yes Yes -
FTP Print Settings Yes Yes Yes Register Options Shortcuts Yes Yes -
WSD Settings Yes Yes Yes Send Common Settings Yes Yes Yes
Use FTP PASV Mode Yes Yes Yes E-Mail/I-Fax Settings Yes Yes Yes
Multicast Discovery Settings Yes Yes Yes Fax Settings Yes Yes Yes
Use HTTP Yes Yes Yes Receive/Forward Common Settings Yes Yes Yes
Proxy Settings Yes Yes Yes Fax Settings Yes Yes Yes
NetWare Settings Yes Yes Yes Memory RX Inbox PIN Yes Yes Yes
SNMP Settings Yes Yes Yes Store/Access Files Common Settings Yes Yes -
Dedicated Port Settings Yes Yes Yes Network Settings Yes Yes Yes
Use Spool Function Yes Yes Yes Memory Media Settings Yes Yes Yes
Startup Settings Yes Yes Yes Secure Print Simple Authentication Settings Yes Yes Yes
Ethernet Driver Settings Yes Yes Yes Only Allow Encrypted Print Jobs Yes Yes Yes
Firewall Settings Yes Yes Yes Set Change Default Display of Address Book Yes Yes Yes
External Interface USB Settings Yes Yes Yes Destination Address Book PIN Yes Yes Yes
Accessibility Key Repetition Settings Yes Yes Yes Manage Address Book Access Numbers Yes Yes Yes
Reversed Display (Color) Yes Yes Yes Include Pswd. When Exporting Address Book Yes Yes Yes
Adjustment/ Adjust Image Quality Correct Density Yes Yes Yes Register LDAP Server Yes Yes -
Maintenance Fine Adjust Zoom Yes - - Auto Search When Using LDAP Server Yes Yes Yes
Function Common Paper Feed Settings Yes Yes - Register/Edit LDAP Search Conditions Yes Yes -
Settings Print Settings Acquire Remote Acquire Address Book Yes Yes Yes
Output Report Default Settings Yes Yes Yes Address Book Remote Address Book Server Address Yes Yes Yes
Register Characters for Page No./ Yes Yes Yes Communication Timeout Yes Yes Yes
Watermark
Fax TX Line Auto Select Adjustment Yes Yes Yes
Secure Watermark Yes Yes Yes
Register Destinations Yes Yes Yes
Scan Settings
Rename Address List Yes Yes Yes
Streak Prevention Yes Yes -
Register One-Touch Yes Yes Yes
Color Scan Speed/Image Quality Priority Yes Yes -
Remote Scan Gamma Value Yes Yes -
Auto Online Yes Yes Yes
Auto Offline Yes Yes Yes
Generate File
High Compression Image Quality Level Yes Yes Yes
2-202
2
2 Technical Explanation > DCM > DCM > Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM
2-203
Setting Information Case Case Case ■■Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM
A B C
Management Device Management Device Information Settings Yes - - The numbers shown in the Compatibility level are explained in the table below.
Settings Device Information Delivery Settings The thing without mention is impossible of import.
Register Destinations Yes Yes - Compatibility level (Lv) Description
Set Auto Delivery Yes Yes -
Restrict Receiving Device Information Yes Yes Yes Case A Can import to a device of the same model and same SN only.
Restrict Receiving for Each Function Yes Yes Yes Usable for the purpose of backup/restore.
Report Settings Yes Yes Yes Case B Can import to a device of a same model.
Display Job Status Before Authentication Yes Yes Yes Case C Can import to a device of a different model also.
Display Log Yes Yes Yes
T-2-98
Format Encryption Method to FIPS 140-2 Yes Yes Yes
User Management System System Manager/ Yes Yes Yes ●● Service Mode
Manager/ Contact Person
Contact Person Information Settings Initial Large Middle Small Case A Case B Case C
Information screen
Settings COPIER ADJUST ADJ-XY ADJ-X Yes - -
Department ID Register PIN Yes Yes Yes ADJ-Y Yes - -
Management ADJ-S Yes - -
Main Menu Settings Setting File Yes Yes Yes ADJ-Y-DF Yes - -
Quick Menu Settings Button File Yes Yes - STRD-POS Yes - -
Workflow Flow Data File Yes Yes Yes ADJ-X-MG Yes - -
Composer Operation Setting File Yes Yes Yes AE AE-TBL Yes Yes -
MEAP User Setting Information Data Yes Yes Yes BLANK BLANK-T Yes - -
MEAP Application Setting Information Data Yes Yes Yes BLANK-B Yes - -
Web Access Settings* Favorites Yes Yes Yes CCD W-PLT-X Yes - -
Settings Yes Yes Yes W-PLT-Y Yes - -
T-2-97 W-PLT-Z Yes - -
SH-TRGT Yes - -
DFTAR-R Yes - -
DFTAR-G Yes - -
DFTAR-K Yes - -
DENS DENS-ADJ Yes - -
DENS-PRT Yes - -
DEVELOP DE-OFST Yes - -
FEED-ADJ REGIST Yes - -
LOOP-CST Yes - -
LOOP-MF Yes - -
ADJ-REFE Yes - -
LOOPREFE Yes - -
RG-HF-SP Yes - -
ADJ-RE-L Yes - -
LOOP-THK Yes - -
LOOP-SP Yes - -
LOOP-ENV Yes - -
ADJ-PTMG Yes - -
2-203
2
Technical Explanation > DCM > DCM > Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM
2-204
Initial Large Middle Small Case A Case B Case C Initial Large Middle Small Case A Case B Case C
screen screen
COPIER ADJUST HV-PRI OFST1-DC Yes - - COPIER OPTION CST U1-NAME Yes Yes Yes
OFST1-AC Yes - - U2-NAME Yes Yes Yes
HV-TR TR-OFST Yes - - U4-NAME Yes Yes Yes
LASER PVE-OFST Yes - - ENV1 Yes Yes -
POWER Yes - - CST1-P1 Yes Yes -
LOW-PWR Yes - - CST2-P1 Yes Yes -
LDADJ1-K Yes - - CST3-P1 Yes Yes -
LDADJ2-K Yes - - CST4-P1 Yes Yes -
LDADJ3-K Yes - - CST1-U1 Yes Yes -
MISC SEG-ADJ Yes - - CST2-U2 Yes Yes -
K-ADJ Yes - - CST2-U4 Yes Yes -
ACS-ADJ Yes - - CST3-U1 Yes Yes -
ACS-EN Yes - - CST3-U2 Yes Yes -
ACS-CNT Yes - - CST3-U4 Yes Yes -
C1-ADJ-Y Yes - - CST4-U1 Yes Yes -
C4-ADJ-Y Yes - - CUSTOM TEMP-TBL Yes - -
MF-ADJ-Y Yes - - ABK-TOOL Yes Yes Yes
ACS-EN2 Yes - - FLK-RD Yes - -
ACS-CNT2 Yes - - TMP-TBL Yes - -
PASCAL OFST-P-K Yes - - DSPLY-SW UI-COPY Yes Yes Yes
FUNCTION INSTALL E-RDS Yes Yes Yes UI-BOX Yes Yes Yes
RGW-PORT Yes Yes Yes UI-SEND Yes Yes Yes
RGW-ADR Yes Yes Yes UI-FAX Yes Yes Yes
CDS-CTL Yes Yes Yes NWERR-SW Yes Yes Yes
BIT-SVC Yes Yes Yes ANIM-SW Yes Yes Yes
OPTION ACC COIN Yes - - UI-PRINT Yes Yes Yes
CARD-SW Yes - - UI-RSCAN Yes Yes Yes
CC-SPSW Yes - - UI-WEB Yes Yes Yes
UNIT-PRC Yes - - RMT-CNSL Yes Yes Yes
MIN-PRC Yes - - UI-SBOX Yes Yes Yes
MAX-PRC Yes - - UI-MEM Yes Yes Yes
SRL-SPSW Yes - - UI-NAVI Yes Yes Yes
PDL-THR Yes - - FXU-DSP Yes Yes -
CR-TYPE Yes Yes - PUMF-DSP Yes Yes -
CLEANING FX-CN-SW Yes - - PUC1-DSP Yes Yes -
2-204
2
2-205
screen screen
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW PUC2-DSP Yes Yes - COPIER OPTION FNC-SW WTM-DENS Yes - -
PUC3-DSP Yes Yes - AMSOFFSW Yes Yes Yes
PUC4-DSP Yes Yes - UA-OFFSW Yes Yes Yes
UI-CUSTM Yes Yes Yes MIB-NVTA Yes Yes -
USER-DSP Yes Yes Yes SVC-RUI Yes Yes -
SDTM-DSP Yes Yes Yes LCDSFLG Yes Yes Yes
WT-WARN Yes Yes Yes NO-LGOUT Yes Yes Yes
TR-DSP Yes Yes Yes T-DLV-BK Yes - -
SPEL-DSP Yes Yes Yes JM-ERR-D Yes - -
DRM-DSP Yes Yes - JM-ERR-R Yes - -
ENV-SET ENVP-INT Yes Yes Yes DFTSCNSZ Yes Yes Yes
IMG-BLD1 Yes - - DLVFN-SW Yes - -
IMG-BLD2 Yes - - ASLPMAX Yes Yes Yes
IMG-BLD3 Yes - - IMG-FIX FIX-CLN Yes - -
FEED-SW SP-SW Yes - - FIX-TEMP Yes - -
FNC-SW MODEL-SZ Yes - - TEMPCON2 Yes - -
SENS-CNF Yes - - FIX-LOW Yes - -
CONFIG Yes - - FX-S-TMP Yes - -
FAN-EXTN Yes - - TMP-TBL2 Yes - -
SZDT-SW Yes - - TMP-TBL4 Yes - -
SVMD-ENT Yes Yes Yes TMP-TBL5 Yes - -
KSIZE-SW Yes Yes - TMP-TBL6 Yes - -
PDF-RDCT Yes Yes Yes TMP-TBL7 Yes - -
SJB-UNW Yes Yes Yes RAG-CONT Yes - -
CARD-RNG Yes Yes - TMP-TBLC Yes - -
SJOB-CL Yes Yes Yes FIX-PR Yes - -
USB-RCNT Yes Yes Yes TMP-TB12 Yes - -
UNLMTBND Yes - - TMP-TB13 Yes - -
MIBCOUNT Yes Yes Yes TMP-TB14 Yes - -
PSWD-SW Yes Yes Yes TMP-TB15 Yes - -
SM-PSWD Yes Yes Yes TMP-TB16 Yes - -
RPT2SIDE Yes Yes Yes IMG-LSR SC-PR-SW Yes - -
INVALPDL Yes Yes - IMG-MCON PASCAL Yes - -
CDS-FIRM Yes Yes Yes SHARP Yes Yes -
CDS-MEAP Yes Yes Yes TMC-SLCT Yes - -
CDS-UGW Yes Yes Yes VP-ART Yes - -
LOCLFIRM Yes Yes Yes VP-TXT Yes - -
SDLMTWRN Yes Yes Yes PASCL-TY Yes Yes -
FAX-INT Yes Yes Yes REGM-SEL Yes - -
CDS-LVUP Yes Yes Yes C-S-P-D Yes Yes -
2-205
2
2-206
screen screen
COPIER OPTION IMG-MCON C-S-C-D Yes Yes - COPIER OPTION NETWORK SPDALDEL Yes Yes Yes
LIN-OFST Yes Yes - NCONF-SW Yes Yes Yes
BGE-OFS Yes - - IKEINTVL Yes Yes Yes
IMG-RDR DFDST-L1 Yes - - IPSDEBLV Yes Yes Yes
DFDST-L2 Yes - - SP-LINK Yes Yes Yes
UNK-A5R Yes Yes Yes AFS-JOB Yes Yes Yes
IMG-SPD PSP-PR1 Yes - - AFC-EVNT Yes Yes Yes
IMG-TR HUM-SW Yes - - ILOGMODE Yes Yes Yes
TROPT-SW Yes - - ILOGKEEP Yes Yes Yes
TR-BS-SW Yes Yes - IPTBROAD Yes Yes Yes
INT-FACE NWCT-TM Yes - - PFWFTPRT Yes Yes Yes
NETWORK IFAX-LIM Yes Yes Yes IPMTU Yes Yes Yes
SMTPTXPN Yes Yes Yes DDNSINTV Yes Yes Yes
SMTPRXPN Yes Yes Yes VLAN-SW Yes Yes Yes
POP3PN Yes Yes Yes VLAN-PKT Yes Yes Yes
FTPTXPN Yes Yes Yes USER COPY-LIM Yes Yes -
STS-PORT Yes Yes Yes SLEEP Yes Yes Yes
CMD-PORT Yes Yes Yes SIZE-DET Yes - -
NS-CMD5 Yes Yes Yes COUNTER1 Yes Yes Yes
NS-GSAPI Yes Yes Yes COUNTER2 Yes Yes Yes
NS-NTLM Yes Yes Yes COUNTER3 Yes Yes Yes
NS-PLNWS Yes Yes Yes COUNTER4 Yes Yes Yes
NS-PLN Yes Yes Yes COUNTER5 Yes Yes Yes
NS-LGN Yes Yes Yes COUNTER6 Yes Yes Yes
MEAP-PN Yes Yes Yes DATE-DSP Yes Yes Yes
CHNG-STS Yes Yes Yes CONTROL Yes - -
CHNG-CMD Yes Yes Yes MF-LG-ST Yes Yes Yes
MEAP-SSL Yes Yes Yes CNT-DISP Yes Yes Yes
LPD-PORT Yes Yes Yes PH-D-SEL Yes - -
WUEV-SW Yes Yes Yes COPY-JOB Yes Yes -
WUEV-INT Yes Yes Yes P-CRG-LF Yes - -
WUEV-POT Yes Yes Yes CPRT-DSP Yes Yes Yes
WUEV-RTR Yes Yes Yes PCL-COPY Yes Yes Yes
WUEN-LIV Yes Yes Yes CNT-SW Yes Yes Yes
IFX-CHIG Yes Yes Yes PRJOB-CP Yes Yes Yes
DNSTRANS Yes Yes Yes DPT-ID-7 Yes Yes Yes
PROXYRES Yes Yes Yes RUI-RJT Yes Yes Yes
WOLTRANS Yes Yes Yes FREG-SW Yes Yes Yes
802XTOUT Yes Yes Yes IFAX-SZL Yes Yes Yes
IKERETRY Yes Yes Yes IFAX-PGD Yes Yes Yes
2-206
2
2-207
screen screen
COPIER OPTION USER MEAPSAFE Yes Yes - COPIER OPTION USER JA-RUI Yes Yes Yes
PRNT-POS Yes Yes Yes JA-WEB Yes Yes Yes
AFN-PSWD Yes Yes Yes EXP-CRYP Yes Yes Yes
PTJAM-RC Yes Yes Yes EZY-SCRP Yes Yes Yes
PDL-NCSW Yes Yes - DMN-MTCH Yes Yes Yes
PS-MODE Yes Yes Yes SNDSTREN Yes Yes Yes
CNCT-RLZ Yes Yes Yes FAXSTREN Yes Yes Yes
COUNTER7 Yes Yes Yes FEEDER ADJUST DOCST Yes - -
COUNTER8 Yes Yes Yes LA-SPEED Yes - -
LDAP-SW Yes Yes Yes LA-SPD2 Yes - -
FROM-OF Yes Yes Yes DOC-LNGH Yes - -
DOM-ADD Yes Yes Yes OPTION UNK-A5R Yes Yes Yes
FILE-OF Yes Yes Yes SORTER OPTION MD-SPRTN Yes - -
MAIL-OF Yes Yes Yes T-2-99
IFAX-OF Yes Yes Yes
LDAP-DEF Yes Yes Yes
FREE-DSP Yes - -
TNRB-SW Yes Yes Yes
CLR-TIM Yes Yes Yes
HDCR-DSW Yes Yes Yes
SCALL-SW Yes Yes Yes
SCALLCMP Yes Yes Yes
USBH-DSP Yes Yes Yes
USBM-DSP Yes Yes Yes
USBI-DSP Yes Yes Yes
CTCHKDSP Yes Yes Yes
DFLT-ADJ Yes Yes Yes
USBR-DSP Yes Yes Yes
POL-SCAN Yes Yes Yes
JA-SBOX Yes Yes Yes
JA-DFAX Yes Yes Yes
JA-REP Yes Yes Yes
JA-FREP Yes Yes Yes
JA-BOX Yes Yes Yes
JA-FORM Yes Yes Yes
JA-PREV Yes Yes Yes
JA-PULL Yes Yes Yes
JA-PDLB Yes Yes Yes
JA-JOBK Yes Yes Yes
JA-JDF Yes Yes Yes
2-207
2
2 Technical Explanation > DCM > DCM > Import/export by service mode (external)
2-208
■■Import/export by service mode (external) Exporting data to an external USB memory device
1. Connect the USB memory device and check that it has been mounted. (When using the
The following shows the procedure for importing and exporting the service mode setting
external USB memory device)
values in service mode. With export by which data is collected from the machine, service
mode setting values can be backed up. With import, data backed up from service mode and
that backed up from remote UI can be restored.
The save destination of backup data can be selected from either a USB memory device or
HDD of the machine.
●● Export
Preparation
• USB memory device
* Required when exporting to an external USB memory device.
It needs to have been formatted to be recognized by the device. No firmware registration is
F-2-386
necessary.
2. Log in to service mode and press BACKUP.
Overall flow
Select the save destination between the internal HDD or external USB memory device
depending on the use case.
Procedure
1. Select external USB memory device as save destination (LIST=1)
2. Register password
3. Export to external USB memory device
4. Remove USB memory device
F-2-387
2-208
2
Technical Explanation > DCM > DCM > Import/export by service mode (external)
2-209
3. Select LIST after the screen moves to <BACKUP>. 5. The names of .dcm files saved in the external USB memory device are displayed.
F-2-390
F-2-388
4. When saving to the external USB memory device, select 1 and press OK. 6. Select PASSWD, enter a password from the software keyboard, and then press OK.
Click here
F-2-391
Note:
Limitations regarding the DCM data password
F-2-389 • Character string of software keyboard: 0 to 32 characters
• No password is set when 0 character is entered. (The setting in which no password is
set is allowed only for service mode.)
• No space is allowed in the middle of a password.
• Password is case sensitive.
Limitations regarding the DCM data no password
• The exporte data cannot import from remote UI without appointing a password. You can
import only from service mode UI.
2-209
2
2-210
7. After registering the password, select BACKUP. Press OK to execute export. Reference:
iAC5255_JWH00003_V0102_0040_2012_0124_193650.dcm
Model S/N Export
YYYY_MMDD_HHMMSS
Main controller DCM File format

firm ware version
DCM Job
management number
F-2-395
F-2-392
8. OK!" is displayed in the status column when the processing is successfully completed. ●● Import
Press <-. Preparation
• USB memory device
Note:
• Required when importing from an external USB memory device.
• It needs to have been formatted to be recognized by the device. No firmware registration
is necessary.
• When necessary, copy the files which you want to import using a PC in advance.
• Be sure to store them in the root folder of the USB memory device.
• Do not change the extension from .dcm. (only .dcm files can be recognized.)
• It is desirable to connect the USB memory device before entering service mode.
F-2-393
9. After access to the USB memory device has occurred, select LIST=0 and press OK.
Unmount the USB memory device.
It can also be removed by pressing the Remove button on the main menu.
F-2-394
2-210
2
2-211
Overall flow 4. When referring to the external USB memory device, select 1 and press OK.
Procedure for restoring data from an external USB memory device.
Procedure
1. Select external USB memory device as save destination (LIST=1)
2. Names of saved DCM data files are displayed
4. Import from external USB memory device
5. Remove USB memory device
6. Specification of export file name
Procedure for restoring data from an external USB memory device

1. Connect the USB memory device. (When using the external USB memory device)
2. Log in to service mode and press RESTORE.
F-2-398
5. The names of .dcm files referred to in the external USB memory device are displayed.
F-2-396
3. Select LIST after the screen moves to <RESTORE>.
F-2-399
F-2-397
2-211
2
2-212
6. Select SELECT. 8. When the correct file is displayed, press ->.
F-2-400 F-2-402
7. Enter the selection number displayed on the left side of the file to be selected and press
OK. Note:
Specification of file selection display
• "*" is displayed on the right side of the file to indicate that the file has been selected in
SELECT.
• USB memory device: Up to 8 files are displayed in a screen.
03 iAC5255
9. Select PASSWD, enter a password from the software keyboard, and then press OK.
Click here
F-2-401
F-2-403
2-212
2
2-213
11. OK!" is displayed in the status column when the processing is successfully completed.
Press <-.
OK
F-2-404
Note:
F-2-406
12. After access to the USB memory device has occurred, select LIST=0 and press OK.
• "<-" is displayed on the right side of the file to indicate that the selection of the file has
been confirmed. Unmount the USB memory device.
• "***" is displayed after the password is entered. It can also be removed by pressing the Remove button on the main menu.
10. After registering the password, select RESTORE. Press OK to execute import.
F-2-407
F-2-405
2-213
2
2 Technical Explanation > DCM > DCM > Import/export by service mode (internal)
2-214
■■Import/export by service mode (internal) 2. Select LIST after the screen moves to <BACKUP>.
When selecting the HDD of the machine at execution of BACKUP from the top screen of
service mode, service mode settings can be saved. Setting values of Main Controller, Reader
Controller, DC Controller, etc. can be collectively saved. It can be used when recovering the
initial status after having tried multiple setting changes temporarily for troubleshooting, etc.
Note:
DCM must not be used when replacing a PCB.
Be sure to use a method such as backup of SRAM of the Main Controller/service mode
backup of DCON/RCON.
DCM enables to back up only service mode setting values. There is still necessary
information other than setting values when replacing a PCB.
SRAM backup or service mode backup enables to save data other than setting values.
F-2-409
3. When saving to the internal HDD, select 2 and press OK.
●● Export
Preparation
There is no need to newly prepare for saving data to the HDD of the machine.
Overall flow
Here is a procedure for exporting data of the HDD of the machine.
Procedure
1. Select internal HDD as save destination (LIST=2)
3. Import from the internal HDD
Procedure for backing up data to the HDD of the machine
1. Select LIST after the screen moves to <BACKUP>.
F-2-410
F-2-408
2-214
2
Technical Explanation > DCM > DCM > Import/export by service mode (internal)
2-215
4. The names of .dcm files saved in the internal HDD are displayed. 6. After registering the password, select BACKUP. Press OK to execute export.
F-2-413
Press <-.
F-2-411
Click here
F-2-412
F-2-414
Note: Reference:
Limitations regarding the DCM data password
• Character string of software keyboard: 0 to 32 characters iAC5255_JWH00003_V0102_0040_2012_0124_193650.dcm
• No password is set when 0 character is entered. (The setting in which no password is set
is allowed only for service mode.)
Model S/N Export
• No space is allowed in the middle of a password.
YYYY_MMDD_HHMMSS
• Password is case sensitive.
Main controller DCM File format
firm ware version
DCM Job
management number
F-2-415
2-215
2
2-216
●● Import 3. When referring to the internal HDD, select 2 and press OK.
Preparation
There is no need to newly prepare for saving data to the HDD of the machine.
Overall flow
Here is a procedure for Importing data of the HDD of the machine.
Procedure
1. Select internal HDD as save destination (LIST=2)
3. Import from the internal HDD
Import from the internal HDD
1. Log in to service mode and press RESTORE.
F-2-418
4. The names of .dcm files referred to in the internal HDD are displayed.
F-2-416
2. Select LIST after the screen moves to <RESTORE>.
F-2-419
F-2-417
2-216
2
2-217
5. Select PASSWD. 7. When the correct file is displayed, press ->.
F-2-420
6. Enter the selection number displayed on the left side of the file to be selected.
F-2-422
Note:
• " *" is displayed on the right side of the file to indicate that the file has been selected in
SELECT.
• HDD : Up to 2 files are displayed in a screen.
F-2-421
Click here
F-2-423
2-217
2
2-218
Press <-.
OK
F-2-424
Note:
F-2-426
• "<-" is displayed on the right side of the file to indicate that the selection of the file has
been confirmed.
• "***" is displayed after the password is entered.
9. After registering the password, select RESTORE. Press OK to execute import.
F-2-425
2-218
2
3 Periodical Service
■
■List of periodically replacement parts, consumable parts
and locations for cleaning
3
Periodical Service
3 Periodical Service > List of periodically replacement parts, consumable parts and locations for cleaning > Consumable parts
3-2
List of periodically replacement parts, consumable parts and locations for cleaning
Periodically Replacement Parts

There are no periodically replacement parts in this machine.
Consumable parts
●: Replaced (consumables)
Work interval Parts counter
Every Every Every Every Every Every (Service mode:
No. Type Item Parts number Q'ty Estimated life Remarks
80,000 90,000 100,000 150,000 160,000 180,000 COPIER>
sheets sheets sheets sheets sheets sheets COUNTER)
1 Image Formation Waste Toner Container FM4-8035 1 100,000 sheets ● DRBL-1 WST-TNR Specified with 6% original.
2 System Transfer Roller FM4-6522 1 180,000 sheets ● DRBL-1 TR-ROLL -
3 Static Eliminator FM1-A131 1 90,000 sheets ● DRBL-1 SP-SC-EL -
4 Fixing System Fixing Assembly 120V: FM1-A680 1 160,000 sheets ● DRBL-1 FX-UNIT -
230V: FM1-A681
5 Pickup system Cassette Feed Roller FC6-7083 1 80,000 sheets ● DRBL-1 C1-FD-RL Other than China
FC7-9502 For China only
6 Cassette Separation Roller FC6-6661 1 80,000 sheets ● DRBL-1 C1-SP-RL Other than China
FE3-1295 For China only
7 Cassette Pickup Idler Gear FU0-0043 1 80,000 sheets ● - - For China only
8 Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller FL2-3897 1 150,000 sheets ● DRBL-1 M-FD-RL -
9 Multi-purpose Tray Separation Pad FL3-4890 1 150,000 sheets ● DRBL-1 M-SP-PD -
10 Original Exposure ADF Pickup Roller Unit FM4-7732 1 80,000 sheets ● DRBL-2 DF-FD-RL -
11 and Feed System ADF Separation Pad FL3-7878 1 80,000 sheets ● DRBL-2 DF-SP-PD -
T-3-1
3-2
3
Periodical Service > List of periodically replacement parts, consumable parts and locations for cleaning > Consumable parts
3 Periodical Service > List of periodically replacement parts, consumable parts and locations for cleaning > Consumable parts
3-3
[1] Waste Toner Container

[2] Transfer Roller
[3] Static Eliminator
[3] [4] Fixing Assembly
[5] Cassette Feed Roller
[2]
[6] Cassette Separation Roller
[7] Cassette Pickup Idler Gear
[8] Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller
[8] [9] Multi-purpose Tray Separation Pad
[10] ADF Pickup Roller Unit
[9] [11] ADF Separation Pad
[10]
[11]
[4]
[5] [1]
[7]
[6]
F-3-1
3-3
3
Periodical Service > List of periodically replacement parts, consumable parts and locations for cleaning > Consumable parts
4 Disassembly/Assembly
■
■List
■
■List
of Parts
of Connectors
■
■External Cover/Internal System
■
■Original Exposure/Feed System
■
■Main Controller System
■
■Laser Exposure System
■
■Image Formation System
■
■Fixing System
■
■Pickup Feed System
■
■External Auxiliary System
4
Disassembly/Assembly
4 Disassembly/Assembly > Preface > Outline
4-2
Preface
Outline
This chapter describes disassembly and reassembly procedures of the printer.
The service technician is to identify the cause of printer failures according to the "Chapter 6
TROUBLESHOOTING" and to follow the disassembly procedures of each part to replace the
defective parts or the consumable parts.
Note the following precautions when working on the printer.
1. CAUTION: Before disassembling or reassembling the printer, be sure to disconnect its
power cord from the electrical outlet
2. During disassembly, reassembly or transportation of the printer, remove the cartridge if
required.
When the cartridge is out of the printer, put it in a protective bag even in a short period of
time to prevent the adverse effect of light.
3. Reassembling procedures are followed by the reverse of disassembly unless otherwise
specified.
4. Note the length, diameters, and locations of screws as you remove them. When
reassembling the printer, be sure to use them in their original locations.
5. Do not run the printer with any parts removed as a general rule.
6. Ground yourself by touching the metal part of the printer before handling the PCB to
reduce the possibility of damage caused by static electricity.
7. When you replace the part that the rating plate or the product code label is attached, be
sure to remove the rating plate or the product code label and put it to the new part.
4-2
4
Disassembly/Assembly > Preface > Outline
4 Disassembly/Assembly > List of Parts > External View > Front Side
4-3
List of Parts No.

[12] Cassette
Name
-
Reference
[13] Left Cover (Refer to page 4-27)

External View [14] Reader Left Cover -
T-4-1
■■Front Side
[5] [6]
[4] [1]
[6]
[3]
[7]
[8]
[2]
[5]
[9]
[10]
[1] [4] [2]
[14]
[11] [3]
F-4-2
[13] No. Name Reference

[12] [1] Reader Bottom Cover (Refer to page 4-35)
[2] Delivery Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-29)
F-4-1
[3] Delivery Outer Cover (Refer to page 4-28)
No. Name Reference [4] Delivery Stopper -
[1] ADF Left Cover - [5] Inner Rear Cover (Refer to page 4-28)
[2] ADF Rear Cover - [6] Reverse Tray -
[3] ADF Upper Cover (Refer to page 4-52) T-4-2
[4] Side Guide Plate -
[5] Original Pickup Tray (Refer to page 4-56)
[6] ADF Front Upper Cover -
[7] Original Delivery Tray -
[8] ADF Front Lower Cover -
[9] Reader Front Cover (Refer to page 4-32)
[10] Control Panel Unit (Refer to page 4-36)
[11] Front Cover (Refer to page 4-24)
4-3
4
Disassembly/Assembly > List of Parts > External View > Front Side
4 Disassembly/Assembly > List of Parts > External View > Internal View
4-4
■■Rear Side ■■Internal View
[12]
[11]
[10] [1]
[9] [2]
[1]
[8]
[2]
[7]
[6]
[3]
[5]
[3]
[4] F-4-4
F-4-3 No. Name Reference

No. Name Reference [1] Right Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-30)
[1] Reader Rear Cover (Refer to page 4-34) [2] Developing Assembly Replacement Inner Cover -
[2] Reader Controller Cover - [3] Left Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-31)
[3] Rear Cover (Refer to page 4-24) T-4-4
[4] Right Rear Cover (Refer to page 4-26)

[5] Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit -
[6] Right Front Cover (Refer to page 4-25)
[7] Right Door Unit (Refer to page 4-26)
[8] Right Rear Fan Cover -
[9] Right Front Fan Cover -
[10] Support Column Cover (Refer to page 4-32)
[11] Reader Right Front Cover -
[12] Reader Right Rear Cover -
T-4-3
4-4
4
Disassembly/Assembly > List of Parts > External View > Internal View
4 Disassembly/Assembly > List of Parts > List of Main Unit
4-5
List of Main Unit No. Name Reference Adjustment during
parts replacement
[1] ADF Pickup Unit (Refer to page 4-57) -
[2] ADF Unit (Refer to page 4-42) (Refer to page 5-6)
[3] Reader Unit (Refer to page 4-47) -
[4] Control Panel Unit (Refer to page 4-36) -
T-4-5
[1]
[2] [4]
[3]
F-4-5
4-5
4
Disassembly/Assembly > List of Parts > List of Main Unit
4 Disassembly/Assembly > List of Parts > List of Main Unit
4-6
No. Name Reference Adjustment during

parts replacement
[1] Fixing Drive Unit (Refer to page 4-84) -
[3] [2] Right Door Unit (Refer to page 4-26) -
[3] Transfer Unit - -
[4] Multi-purpose Tray Unit - -
[2] [5] Fixing Assembly (Refer to page 4-82) -
[4] [6] Pre-registration Guide Unit - -
[7] Cassette Pickup Unit (Refer to page 4-89) -
T-4-6
[1]
[5]
[6]
[7]
F-4-6
4-6
4
Disassembly/Assembly > List of Parts > List of Main Unit
4 Disassembly/Assembly > List of Parts > Electrical Components > ADF Unit
4-7
Electrical Components
[6] [1]
■■ADF Unit
●● Sensor
PS27
PS26
[5]
PS24
[2]
PS22
PS25
PS23
[4]
[3]
F-4-8
F-4-7
No. Name Constitution Unit Reference Adjustment during
No. Name Reference Adjustment during
parts replacement
parts replacement PS22 Lead Sensor ADF Pickup Unit - -
[1] Delivery/Reverse Unit (Refer to page 4-94) - PS23 Registration Sensor ADF Pickup Unit - -
[2] Drum Unit (Refer to page 4-71) - PS24 Stay Sensor ADF Pickup Unit - -
[3] Hopper Unit (Refer to page 4-78) - PS25 Reversal Sensor ADF Pickup Unit - -
[4] Laser Scanner Unit (Refer to page 4-66) (Refer to page 5-11) PS26 Timing Sensor ADF Pickup Unit - -
[5] Developing Assembly (Refer to page 4-72) - PS27 Original Set Sensor ADF Pickup Unit - -
[6] Main Drive Unit (Refer to page 4-76) - T-4-8
T-4-7
4-7
4
Disassembly/Assembly > List of Parts > Electrical Components > ADF Unit
4 Disassembly/Assembly > List of Parts > Electrical Components > Reader Unit
4-8
●● Solenoid/Motor ■■Reader Unit
SL6
SL5 M10
M12
M11
SL4 PCB3
SL7
PS21
SL8
F-4-9 F-4-10
No. Name Constitution Unit Reference Adjustment during No. Name Constitution Unit Reference Adjustment during
parts replacement parts replacement
SL4 Registration Solenoid ADF Pickup Unit - - PS21 CIS HP Sensor Reader Unit - -
SL5 Pickup Solenoid ADF Pickup Unit - - PCB3 Reader Controller PCB Reader Unit (Refer to page 4-49) -
SL6 Flapper Solenoid 2 ADF Pickup Unit - - M10 Reader Motor Reader Unit - -
SL7 Flapper Solenoid 1 ADF Pickup Unit - - T-4-10
SL8 Roller Release Solenoid ADF Pickup Unit - -
M11 Feed Motor ADF Pickup Unit - -
M12 Delivery Reversal Motor ADF Pickup Unit - -
T-4-9
4-8
4
Disassembly/Assembly > List of Parts > Electrical Components > Reader Unit
4 Disassembly/Assembly > List of Parts > Electrical Components > Printer Unit
4-9
■■Printer Unit No. Name Constitution Unit Reference Adjustment during
parts replacement
●● Motor M1 Fixing Motor Fixing Drive Unit - -
M2 Main Motor Main Drive Unit - -
M2 M3 Waste Toner Motor Main Unit - -
M4
M4 Reverse Feed Motor Delivery/Reverse Unit - -
M5 Bottle Motor Hopper Unit - -
M6 Hopper Motor Hopper Unit - -
M7 Duplex Feed Motor Main Drive Unit - -
M8 Pickup Motor Main Unit - -
M1 M9 Lifter Motor Cassette Pickup Unit - -
T-4-11
M7
M5
M6
M8
M9
M3
F-4-11
4-9
4
Disassembly/Assembly > List of Parts > Electrical Components > Printer Unit
4-10
●● FAN ●● Clutch
FM9
FM6
FM5
FM1
FM2
FM3
CL2 CL1
FM4
FM8
FM7
F-4-12 F-4-13
FM1 Delivery Cooling Fan (Rear) Main Unit - - CL1 Registration Clutch Main Drive Unit - -
FM2 Delivery Cooling Fan (Center) Delivery/Reverse Unit - - CL2 Developing Cylinder Clutch Main Drive Unit - -
FM3 Delivery Cooling Fan (Front) Delivery/Reverse Unit - - T-4-13
FM4 Power Supply Cooling Fan Main Unit - -
FM5 Heat Exhaust Fan (Front) Right Door Unit - -
FM6 Heat Exhaust Fan (Rear) Right Door Unit - -
FM7 Developing Cooling Fan (Front) Main Unit - -
FM8 Developing Cooling Fan (Rear) Main Unit - -
FM9 Main Controller Cooling Fan Main Unit - -
T-4-12
4-10
4
4-11
●● Solenoid ●● Heater/Speaker
THM2
THM1
SL2 H2
SL1 TP1
H1
H3
SL3
SP1
F-4-14 F-4-15
SL1 Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Multi-purpose Tray Unit - - THM1 Fixing Main Thermistor Fixing Assembly - -
Solenoid THM2 Fixing Sub Thermistor Fixing Assembly - -
SL2 Reverse Feed Solenoid Right Door Unit - - TP1 Fixing Thermoswitch Fixing Assembly - -
SL3 Cassette Pickup Solenoid Cassette Pickup Unit - - H1 Fixing Heater Fixing Assembly - -
T-4-14 H2 Sub Heater Fixing Assembly - -
H3 Drum Heater Drum Heater Unit - -
SP1 Speaker Main Unit - -
T-4-15
4-11
4
4-12
●● Sensor No. Name Constitution Unit Reference Adjustment during
parts replacement
PS2 Waste Toner Full Sensor Main Unit - -
PS3 Waste Toner Motor Main Unit - -
Rotation Sensor
PS7 Multi-purpose Tray Paper Multi-purpose Tray Unit - -
PS8 Sensor
PS11
PS8 Duplex Feed Sensor Right Door Unit - -
PS12 PS9 Arch Sensor Transfer Unit - -
PS9 PS10 Bottle Rotation Sensor Hopper Unit - -
PS11 Registration Sensor Main Unit - -
PS7
PS12 Pre-registration Sensor Main Unit - -
PS18 Fixing Pressure Release Fixing Assembly - -
Sensor
PS19 Fixing Paper Sensor Fixing Assembly - -
THU1 Environment Sensor Main Unit - -
TS1 Hopper Toner Sensor Hopper Unit - -
T-4-16
PS10
TS1
PS18
PS19
THU1
PS2
PS3
F-4-16
4-12
4
4-13
●● Switch
PS6
PS5
PS4
PS15
SW3
PS16 PS20
TS2
PS17
SW4
SW2
PS13 SW1
PS1 PS14
F-4-17

F-4-18
parts replacement
PS1 Front Cover Sensor Main Unit - - No. Name Constitution Unit Reference Adjustment during
PS4 Delivery Paper Full Sensor Delivery/Reverse Unit - - parts replacement
PS5 Delivery Sensor Delivery/Reverse Unit - - SW1 Power Switch Main Unit - -
PS6 Reverse Sensor Delivery/Reverse Unit - - SW2 Cassette Size Detection Switch Main Unit - -
PS13 Cassette Pickup Sensor Cassette Pickup Unit - - SW3 Cover Switch Main Unit - -
PS14 Cassette Lifting Plate Cassette Pickup Unit - - SW4 Drum Heater Switch Drum Heater Unit - -
Sensor T-4-18
PS15 Cassette Paper Sensor Cassette Pickup Unit - -
PS16 Cassette Paper Level Cassette Pickup Unit - -
Sensor A
PS17 Cassette Paper Level Cassette Pickup Unit - -
Sensor B
PS20 Transparency Sensor Casstte Pickup Unit - -
TS2 Developing Assembly Toner Developing Assembly - -
Sensor
T-4-17
4-13
4
4-14
●● PCB
PCB7
PCB1
PCB2
PCB16
PCB8 PCB15
PCB12 PCB14
HDD
PCB9
PCB6 PCB11
PCB4 PCB13
PCB5
F-4-20

parts replacement
F-4-19
PCB2 Main Controller PCB Main Unit (Refer to page 4-60)
No Name Constitution Unit Reference Adjustment during PCB7 Control Panel CPU PCB Control Panel Unit (Refer to page 4-36) -
parts replacement PCB9 Laser Driver PCB Laser Scanner Unit - (Refer to page 5-11)
PCB1 DC Controller PCB Main Unit (Refer to page 4-95) (Refer to page 5-13) PCB11 G3 FAX PCB FAX Board Unit - -
PCB4 AC Driver PCB Main Unit - PCB12 2nd Line G3 FAX PCB FAX Board Unit - -
PCB5 All-night Power Supply PCB Main Unit (Refer to page 4-99) - PCB13 Modular PCB FAX Board Unit - -
PCB6 12/24V Power Supply PCB Main Unit - PCB14 2nd Line Modular PCB FAX Board Unit - -
PCB8 HVT PCB Main Unit (Refer to page 4-97) - PCB16 HDD Encryption PCB HDD Data
- -
PCB15 Off-hook PCB FAX Board Unit - - Encryption Kit
T-4-19 T-4-20
4-14
4
4 Disassembly/Assembly > List of Connectors
4-15
List of Connectors
J2221
J2220
J77 J2215
J2300
J2213
J2212
J2214 J2218
J2210
J2217
J2219
J2211
J2301
J2236 J2222
J2237
J2223
J2233
J2235 J210
J2241
J212
J2238 J213 J301

J2240 J2234 J202
J2239
F-4-21
Jack No. Symbol Name Relay Connector Relay Connector Jack No. Symbol Name Remarks
J202 PCB1 DC Controller PCB J301 PCB8 HVT PCB
J210 PCB1 DC Controller PCB J2213 FM2 Delivery Cooling Fan (Center)
J210 PCB1 DC Controller PCB J21 J40 J2300 FM1 Delivery Cooling Fan (Rear)
J210 PCB1 DC Controller PCB J21 J40 J2214 FM3 Delivery Cooling Fan (Front)
J210 PCB1 DC Controller PCB J21 J2210 PS4 Delivery Paper Full Sensor
J210 PCB1 DC Controller PCB J21 J2211 PS5 Delivery Sensor
J210 PCB1 DC Controller PCB J21 J2212 PS6 Reverse Sensor
J210 PCB1 DC Controller PCB J21 J2215 M4 Reverse Feed Motor
J212 PCB1 DC Controller PCB J14 J2218 SL1 Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Solenoid
4-15
4
Disassembly/Assembly > List of Connectors
4-16
J212 PCB1 DC Controller PCB J8 J2219 SL2 Reverse Feed Solenoid
J212 PCB1 DC Controller PCB J8 J2220 FM5 Heat Exhaust Fan (Front)
J212 PCB1 DC Controller PCB J8 J2221 FM6 Heat Exhaust Fan (Rear)
J212 PCB1 DC Controller PCB J8 J2222 PS8 Duplex Feed Sensor
J212 PCB1 DC Controller PCB J8 J5 J2223 PS9 Arch Sensor
J212 PCB1 DC Controller PCB J8 J2217 PS7 Multi-purpose Tray Paper Sensor
J213 PCB1 DC Controller PCB J20 J2233 M8 Pickup Motor
J213 PCB1 DC Controller PCB J13 J2241 SW2 Cassette Size Detection Switch
J213 PCB1 DC Controller PCB J9 J2234 SL3 Cassette Pickup Solenoid
J213 PCB1 DC Controller PCB J9 J2235 M9 Lifter Motor
J213 PCB1 DC Controller PCB J9 J2236 PS13 Cassette Pickup Sensor
J213 PCB1 DC Controller PCB J9 J2237 PS14 Cassette Lifting Plate Sensor
J213 PCB1 DC Controller PCB J9 J2238 PS15 Cassette Paper Sensor
J213 PCB1 DC Controller PCB J9 J2239 PS16 Cassette Paper Level Sensor A
J213 PCB1 DC Controller PCB J9 J2240 PS17 Cassette Paper Level Sensor B
J213 PCB1 DC Controller PCB J9 J2301 PS20 Transparency Sensor
T-4-21
4-16
4
4-17
J2202
J2230
J2228
J2229
J2231
J2201
J2224
J2226
J2225
J2227 J2232
J209
J211
J2216 J2303 J203

J2302
J2204
J2203 J2209
J2206
J2207 J2205
F-4-22
J203 PCB1 DC Controller PCB J1 J2201 M1 Fixing Motor
J203 PCB1 DC Controller PCB J2 J2202 M2 Main Motor
J203 PCB1 DC Controller PCB J50 J2230 M7 Duplex Feed Motor
J209 PCB1 DC Controller PCB J22 J2203 THU1 Environment Sensor
J209 PCB1 DC Controller PCB J22 J2206 PS3 Waste Toner Motor Rotation Sensor
J209 PCB1 DC Controller PCB J22 J2207 M3 Waste Toner Motor
J209 PCB1 DC Controller PCB J15 J3 J2209 TS2 Developing Assembly Toner Sensor
J209 PCB1 DC Controller PCB J15 J2204 PS1 Front Cover Sensor
J209 PCB1 DC Controller PCB J15 J2205 PS2 Waste Toner Full Sensor
J209 PCB1 DC Controller PCB J15 J60 J2302 FM7 Developing Cooling Fan (Front)
J209 PCB1 DC Controller PCB J15 J60 J2303 FM8 Developing Cooling Fan (Rear)
4-17
4
4-18
J211 PCB1 DC Controller PCB J6 J2224 PS10 Bottle Rotation Sensor
J211 PCB1 DC Controller PCB J6 J2225 TS1 Hopper Toner Sensor
J211 PCB1 DC Controller PCB J6 J2226 M5 Bottle Motor
J211 PCB1 DC Controller PCB J6 J2227 M6 Hopper Motor
J211 PCB1 DC Controller PCB J2228 CL1 Registration Clutch
J211 PCB1 DC Controller PCB J2229 CL2 Developing Cylinder Clutch
J211 PCB1 DC Controller PCB J7 J2231 PS11 Registration Sensor
J211 PCB1 DC Controller PCB J7 J2232 PS12 Pre-registration Sensor
T-4-22
4-18
4
4-19
J922 J2511
J904 J1001
J905
J902 J02
J903
J4
J907
J7003
J911 J15
J204
J205
J6005
J923 J6001
J01
J103 J7013
J602
J950 J601
J7019
J2502 J103
J2501 J104
J7
J106
J2512 J6002
J6003 J105
J108
J120
J1
J201
J215
J101
J2
F-4-23
J201 PCB1 DC Controller PCB J104 PCB4 AC Driver PCB
J204 PCB1 DC Controller PCB J6001 PCB2 Main Controller PCB
J205 PCB1 DC Controller PCB J105 PCB4 AC Driver PCB
J215 PCB1 DC Controller PCB J01 - Laser Scanner Motor
J4 PCB2 Main Controller PCB J1001 PCB7 Control Panel CPU PCB
J15 PCB2 Main Controller PCB J77 FM9 Main Controller Cooling Fan
J6001 PCB2 Main Controller PCB J204 PCB1 DC Controller PCB
J6002 PCB2 Main Controller PCB J602 PCB9 Laser Driver PCB
J6002 PCB2 Main Controller PCB J02 PCB10 BD PCB
J6003 PCB2 Main Controller PCB J601 PCB9 Laser Driver PCB
J6005 PCB2 Main Controller PCB J907 PCB3 Reader Controller PCB
J7003 PCB2 Main Controller PCB J106 PCB4 AC Driver PCB
J7010 PCB2 Main Controller PCB J70 J120 PCB4 AC Driver PCB
4-19
4
4-20
J7013 PCB2 Main Controller PCB J74 J2 PCB11 G3 FAX PCB
J7019 PCB2 Main Controller PCB J1 PCB11 G3 FAX PCB
J7021 PCB2 Main Controller PCB J78 J25 SW1 Main Switch
J902 PCB3 Reader Controller PCB J950 - CIS Unit
J903 PCB3 Reader Controller PCB J108 PCB4 AC Driver PCB
J905 PCB3 Reader Controller PCB J922 M10 Reader Motor
J911 PCB3 Reader Controller PCB J923 PS21 CIS HP Sensor
J105 PCB4 AC Driver PCB J2216 FM4 Power Supply Cooling Fan
J101 PCB6 Power Supply PCB J2510 J2502 PS18 Fixing Pressure Release Sensor
J101 PCB6 Power Supply PCB J2510 J2501 PS19 Fixing Paper Sensor
J101 PCB6 Power Supply PCB J2510 J2511 H1,H2 Fixing Heater,Sub Heater
- - - J2512 H1,H2 Fixing Heater,Sub Heater
J101 PCB6 Power Supply PCB J2510 - THM1 Fixing Main Thermistor
J101 PCB6 Power Supply PCB J2510 - THM2 Fixing Sub Thermistor
J101 PCB6 Power Supply PCB J2510 - TP1 Fixing Thermoswitch
J103 PCB6 Power Supply PCB J103 SW3 Cover Switch
J7 PCB11 FAX PCB J7 SP1 Speaker
T-4-23
4-20
4
4-21
J927 J906
J912
J931 J908
J930
J910
J928
J909
J929
J926
J942
J949
J936
J943
J937
J944
J960
F-4-24
J906 PCB3 Reader Controller PCB J928 M12 Delivery Reversal Motor
J906 PCB3 Reader Controller PCB J929 M11 Feed Motor
J908 PCB3 Reader Controller PCB J925 J936 SL6 Flapper Solenoid 2
J908 PCB3 Reader Controller PCB J925 J937 SL7 Flapper Solenoid 1
J908 PCB3 Reader Controller PCB J926 SL4 Registration Solenoid
J908 PCB3 Reader Controller PCB J927 SL5 Pickup Solenoid
J909 PCB3 Reader Controller PCB J930 PS26 Timing Sensor
J909 PCB3 Reader Controller PCB J931 PS27 Original Set Sensor
J910 PCB3 Reader Controller PCB J947 J949 PS25 Reversal Sensor
J910 PCB3 Reader Controller PCB J956 J944 PS24 Stay Sensor
J910 PCB3 Reader Controller PCB J933 J943 PS23 Registration Sensor
J910 PCB3 Reader Controller PCB J933 J942 PS22 Lead Sensor
J912 PCB3 Reader Controller PCB J958 J960 SL8 Roller Release Solenoid
T-4-24
4-21
4
4 Disassembly/Assembly > External Cover/Internal System > Location > Front Side
4-22
External Cover/Internal System No.

[13] Left Cover
Name Reference
(Refer to page 4-27)
[14] Reader Left Cover -
Location T-4-25
■■Front Side [6]

[1]
[5]
[4]
[6]
[3]
[7]
[5]
[8]
[2]
[9]
[4] [2]
[10]
[1]
[14] [3]
[11]
F-4-26
No. Name Reference

[1] Reader Bottom Cover (Refer to page 4-35)
[2] Delivery Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-29)
[13] [3] Delivery Outer Cover (Refer to page 4-28)
[12] [4] Delivery Stopper -
F-4-25
[5] Inner Rear Cover (Refer to page 4-28)
No. Name Reference
[6] Reverse Tray -
[1] ADF Left Cover -
T-4-26
[2] ADF Rear Cover -
[3] ADF Upper Cover (Refer to page 4-52)
[4] Side Guide Plate -
[5] Original Pickup Tray (Refer to page 4-56)
[6] ADF Front Upper Cover -
[7] Original Delivery Tray -
[8] ADF Front Lower Cover -
[9] Reader Front Cover (Refer to page 4-32)
[10] Control Panel Unit (Refer to page 4-36)
[11] Front Cover (Refer to page 4-24)
[12] Cassette -
4-22
4
Disassembly/Assembly > External Cover/Internal System > Location > Front Side
4 Disassembly/Assembly > External Cover/Internal System > Location > Internal View
4-23
■■Rear Side ■■Internal View
[12]
[11]
[10] [1]
[9] [2]
[1]
[8]
[2]
[7]
[6]
[3]
[5]
[3]
F-4-28
[4]
F-4-27 No. Name Reference
[1] Right Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-30)
No. Name Reference
[2] Developing Assembly Replacement Inner Cover -
[1] Reader Rear Cover (Refer to page 4-34)
[3] Left Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-31)
[2] Reader Controller Cover (Refer to page 4-24)
T-4-28
[3] Rear Cover (Refer to page 4-24)
[4] Right Rear Cover (Refer to page 4-26)
[5] Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit -
[6] Right Front Cover (Refer to page 4-25)
[7] Right Door Unit (Refer to page 4-26)
[8] Right Rear Fan Cover -
[9] Right Front Fan Cover -
[10] Support Column Cover (Refer to page 4-32)
[11] Reader Right Front Cover -
[12] Reader Right Rear Cover -
T-4-27
4-23
4
Disassembly/Assembly > External Cover/Internal System > Location > Internal View
4 Disassembly/Assembly > External Cover/Internal System > Removing the Rear Cover
4-24
Removing the Front Cover Removing the Rear Cover
1) Open the Front Cover. 1) Remove the Reader Controller Cover.(Refer to page 4-24)
2) Remove the Front Cover . 2) Remove the Rear Cover.
• 2 Screws • 6 Screws
• 2 Pins • 2 Claws
x2 x6
x2
Pin
Front Cover
F-4-29
Removing the Reader Controller Cover F-4-31
1) Remove the Reader Controller Cover.

• 1 Claw
F-4-30
4-24
4
Disassembly/Assembly > External Cover/Internal System > Removing the Rear Cover
4 Disassembly/Assembly > External Cover/Internal System > Removing the Right Front Cover
4-25
Removing the Right Front Cover 2) Open the Cassette, and lift the Control Panel Unit.
Control Panel Unit

NOTE:
The following shows the 3 claws and 2 bosses of the Right Front Cover.
Boss
Claw Cassette
Hole
F-4-34
3) Remove the Right Front Cover.
• 3 Claws
• 2 Bosses
F-4-32
Boss
Right Front Cover
1) Open the Front Cover and Right Door Unit, and remove the screw.
Boss
x3
Claw
F-4-35
Right Door Unit

Front Cover
F-4-33
4-25
4
Disassembly/Assembly > External Cover/Internal System > Removing the Right Front Cover
4 Disassembly/Assembly > External Cover/Internal System > Removing the Right Door Unit > Procedure
4-26
Removing the Right Rear Cover Removing the Right Door Unit
■■Preparation
NOTE:
The following shows the 1 claw and 2 bosses. 1) Remove the Right Front Cover.(Refer to page 4-25)
2) Remove the Right Rear Cover.(Refer to page 4-26)
Claw
■■Procedure
1) Open the cassette.
2) While holding the Right Door Unit, remove the 2 Door Fixtures on the Rear and Front.
Boss
• 2 Screws
x2
Door Fixture
F-4-36
1) Open the Right Door Unit .

2) Remove the Right Rear Cover.
• 2 Screws
• 1 Claw
• 2 Bosses F-4-38
Claw
x2
Boss
Claw
Right Rear Cover

Right Door Unit
F-4-37
4-26
4
Disassembly/Assembly > External Cover/Internal System > Removing the Right Door Unit > Procedure
4 Disassembly/Assembly > External Cover/Internal System > Removing the Left Cover > Procedure
4-27
3) Remove the Right Door Unit.
Removing the Left Cover
• 2 Wire Saddles
• 2 Connectors ■■Preparation
• 5 Screws
1) Remove the Rear Cover.(Refer to page 4-24)
2) Remove the Delivery Outer Cover.(Refer to page 4-28)
x3 x2 x2 x2 ■■Procedure
Right Door Unit 1) Open the cassette, and remove the Left Cover while lifting the host machine.
Connector
• 1 Screw
Wire Saddle • 4 Claws
CAUTION:
When lifting the host machine, hold the rear side of the bottom of the Reader Unit.
Connector
F-4-39
F-4-40
Claw
x4
F-4-41
4-27
4
Disassembly/Assembly > External Cover/Internal System > Removing the Left Cover > Procedure
4 Disassembly/Assembly > External Cover/Internal System > Removing the Delivery Outer Cover > Procedure
4-28
Removing the Inner Rear Cover Removing the Delivery Outer Cover
■■Preparation ■■Procedure
1) Remove the Rear Cover.(Refer to page 4-24) 1) Open the Front Cover, and remove the Delivery Outer Cover.
2) Remove the Delivery Outer Cover.(Refer to page 4-28) • 4 Claws
3) Remove the Left Cover.(Refer to page 4-27)
Claw
■■Procedure x4
1) Remove the Inner Rear Cover.
• 7 Claws
Claw
x6
F-4-43
Claw Claw
F-4-42
4-28
4
Disassembly/Assembly > External Cover/Internal System > Removing the Delivery Outer Cover > Procedure
4 Disassembly/Assembly > External Cover/Internal System > Removing the Delivery Inner Cover > Procedure
4-29
Removing the Delivery Inner Cover CAUTION:
■■Preparation Be sure to install the Delivery Inner Cover while lifting the flapper when assembling.
1) Remove the Rear Cover.(Refer to page 4-24) Flapper

4) Remove the Inner Rear Cover.(Refer to page 4-28)
■■Procedure
1) Lift the Control Panel Unit.
2) Remove the Delivery Inner Cover.
• 1 Claw
Delivery Inner Cover

Control Panel Unit
F-4-45
Delivery Inner Cover
Claw
F-4-44
4-29
4
Disassembly/Assembly > External Cover/Internal System > Removing the Delivery Inner Cover > Procedure
4 Disassembly/Assembly > External Cover/Internal System > Removing the Right Inner Cover > Procedure
4-30
Removing the Right Inner Cover 2) Remove the Right Inner Cover while getting out the cover from the Toner Cartridge Lock
Lever.
■■Preparation • 5 Claws
1) Remove the Toner Cartridge.(Refer to page 4-71) Right Inner Cover

2) Remove the Waste Toner Container.(Refer to page 4-70)
3) Remove the Drum Unit.(Refer to page 4-71)
4) Remove the Developing Assembly.(Refer to page 4-72)
5) Remove the Front Cover.(Refer to page 4-24)
6) Remove the Right Front Cover.(Refer to page 4-25)
Claw
■■Procedure
1) Return the Toner Cartridge Lock Lever to the original position, and remove the 4 screws.
Toner Cartridge Lock Lever
F-4-47
x4
F-4-46
4-30
4
Disassembly/Assembly > External Cover/Internal System > Removing the Right Inner Cover > Procedure
4 Disassembly/Assembly > External Cover/Internal System > Removing the Left Inner Cover > Procedure
4-31
CAUTION: Removing the Left Inner Cover

Be sure to fit the 2 hooks at the upper side of the Right Inner Cover into the 2 holes of ■■Preparation
the Support Column Cover when assembling.
1) Remove the Toner Cartridge.(Refer to page 4-71)
Claw
Hole of the Support Column Cover 6) Remove the Right Front Cover.(Refer to page 4-25)
7) Remove the Right Inner Cover.(Refer to page 4-30)
■■Procedure
1) Remove the Left Inner Cover.
Hole of the Support Column Cover Claw Claw
• 2 Screws
• 1 Claw
Left Inner Cover

x2
Claw
F-4-49
F-4-48
4-31
4
Disassembly/Assembly > External Cover/Internal System > Removing the Left Inner Cover > Procedure
4 Disassembly/Assembly > External Cover/Internal System > Removing the Reader Front Cover > Procedure
4-32
Removing the Support Column Cover Removing the Reader Front Cover
■■Preparation ■■Preparation
1) Remove the Rear Cover.(Refer to page 4-24) 1) Remove the Rear Cover.(Refer to page 4-24)
2) Remove the Delivery Outer Cover.(Refer to page 4-28) 2) Remove the Delivery Outer Cover.(Refer to page 4-28)
3) Remove the Left Cover.(Refer to page 4-27) 3) Remove the Left Cover.(Refer to page 4-27)
4) Remove the Inner Rear Cover.(Refer to page 4-28) 4) Remove the Inner Rear Cover.(Refer to page 4-28)
5) Remove the Delivery Inner Cover.(Refer to page 4-29)
6) Remove the Reader Front Cover.(Refer to page 4-32) ■■Procedure
1) Open the Right Door Unit, and open the ADF Unit.
2) Remove the Reader Right Rear Cover.
• 1 Screw
■■Procedure • 2 Claws
1) Lift the Control Panel Unit, and remove the Support Column Cover.
ADF Unit
• 1 Claw
• 1 Boss Reader Right Rear Cover
x2
Claw
Boss
Operation Panel Unit
Claw
Support Column Cover
Right Door Unit

F-4-51
F-4-50
4-32
4
Disassembly/Assembly > External Cover/Internal System > Removing the Reader Front Cover > Procedure
4 Disassembly/Assembly > External Cover/Internal System > Removing the Reader Front Cover > Procedure
4-33
3) Remove the Reader Right Front Cover. 5) Remove the Reader Front Cover.
• 1 Screw • 2 Screws
• 1 Boss • 4 Bosses
Boss
Reader Right Front Cover
Boss
F-4-52
4) Remove the Reader Left Cover.
• 1 Screw Reader Front Cover
• 3 Claws
• 1 Boss
Boss
Claw
x3
x1
Claw Boss
F-4-54
Reader Left Cover
F-4-53
4-33
4
Disassembly/Assembly > External Cover/Internal System > Removing the Reader Front Cover > Procedure
4 Disassembly/Assembly > External Cover/Internal System > Removing the Reader Rear Cover > Procedure
4-34
Removing the Reader Rear Cover 2) Remove the Reader Rear Cover.
• 1 Connector
■■Preparation • 1 Flexible Cable
• 2 Screws
1) Remove the ADF Unit.(Refer to page 4-42)
• 3 Claws
3) Remove the Delivery Outer Cover.(Refer to page 4-28) Claw
■■Procedure x2
1) Open the Right Door Unit, and remove the Reader Right Rear Cover.
• 1 Screw
4
• 2 Claws Reader Rear Cover
Claw Reader Right Rear Cover
2
x2 x3
Right Door Unit F-4-56
3) Remove the Core from the Reader Rear Cover.

x2 • 1 Claw
Claw
F-4-55
Core
F-4-57
4-34
4
Disassembly/Assembly > External Cover/Internal System > Removing the Reader Rear Cover > Procedure
4 Disassembly/Assembly > External Cover/Internal System > Removing the Reader Bottom Cover > Procedure
4-35
Removing the Reader Bottom Cover
CAUTION:
Put the Flexible Cable through the part in the Rear Guide where the Flexible Cable is to
■■Preparation
be passed when assembling 1) Remove the Rear Cover.(Refer to page 4-24)
Connector
Flexible Cable 6) Remove the Reader Front Cover.(Refer to page 4-32)
8) Remove the Support Column Cover.(Refer to page 4-32)
Guide
■■Procedure
1) Remove the Reader Bottom Cover.
Guide • 4 Claws
F-4-58
x4
Claw
Reader Bottom Cover

Claw
F-4-59
4-35
4
Disassembly/Assembly > External Cover/Internal System > Removing the Reader Bottom Cover > Procedure
4 Disassembly/Assembly > External Cover/Internal System > Removing the Control Panel Unit > Procedure
4-36
Removing the Control Panel Unit 2) Upset the Control Panel Unit and put on the copy board glass.
Then, remove the Control Panel Lower Cover and Control Panel Lower Rear Cover.
■■Preparation • 4 Screws

x4
6) Remove the Reader Front Cover.(Refer to page 4-32)
■■Procedure
1) Lift the the Control Panel Unit and remove the 4 screws.
• 1 Claw Control Panel Lower Cover
Control Panel Lower Rear Cover
F-4-61
x2 x2
NOTE:
When putting the Control Panel Unit on Copyboard glass, be sure to put paper on the
copy board glass to protect the panel surface.
Claw
Control Panel Unit
F-4-60
4-36
4
Disassembly/Assembly > External Cover/Internal System > Removing the Control Panel Unit > Procedure
4 Disassembly/Assembly > External Cover/Internal System > Removing the Control Panel Unit > Procedure
4-37
3) Remove the USB Cable and Connector, then remove the Control Panel Unit.
• 1 Reuse Band
• 1 Wire Saddle
Connector
x2 Wire Saddle
USB Cable
Reuse Band
F-4-62
CAUTION:
When the control panel unit is reassembled, confirm that the cables are correctly put
back in the cable guide of the control panel unit. If the cables are not correctly put in
the cable guide, the cables may be damaged by the open/close operation of the control
panel unit.
4-37
4
Disassembly/Assembly > External Cover/Internal System > Removing the Control Panel Unit > Procedure
4 Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Location
4-38
Original Exposure/Feed System No. Name Constitution Unit Reference Adjustment during
parts replacement
[1] ADF Separation Pad ADF Pickup Unit (Refer to page 4-53) -
Location [2] ADF Pickup Roller Unit ADF Upper Cover Unit (Refer to page 4-54) -
[3] ADF Upper Cover Unit ADF Unit (Refer to page 4-52) -
[4] Original Pickup Tray ADF Unit (Refer to page 4-56) -
[3] [5] ADF Pickup Unit ADF Unit (Refer to page 4-57) -
[6] ADF Unit Main Unit (Refer to page 4-42) (Refer to page 5-6)
[2] [7] Reader Unit Main Unit (Refer to page 4-47) -
[8] Copyboard Glass Reader Unit (Refer to page 4-39) (Refer to page 5-4)
[9] CIS Unit Reader Unit (Refer to page 4-50) (Refer to page 5-5)
[10] ADF Reading Glass Reader Unit (Refer to page 4-41) (Refer to page 5-5)
[11] Reader Controller PCB Reader Unit (Refer to page 4-49) -
[4]
T-4-29
[5]
[1]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[11]
[10]
[9]
F-4-63
4-38
4
Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Location
4 Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Removing the Copyboard Glass > Procedure
4-39
Removing the Copyboard Glass 1) Open the ADF Unit.
2) Remove the Glass Retainer Plate.
■■Procedure • 2 Screws
CAUTION:
• Place the removed Copyboard Glass on a cloth, etc. to avoid damaging the bottom x2
sheet.
• When removing the Copyboard Glass, take care not to touch the glass surface.
• If the surface becomes dirty, clean it with lint free paper.
ADF Unit Glass Retainer Plate
F-4-65
3) Remove the Copyboard Glass.
F-4-64
Copyboard Glass
F-4-66
4-39
4
Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Removing the Copyboard Glass > Procedure
4 Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Removing the Copyboard Glass > After Replacement
4-40
■■After Replacement NOTE:
1) Enter the value indicated on the platen glass as shown in the following service mode: The result of the adjustment is reflected to COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFTAR-K/
DFTAR-R/ DFTAR-G/ DFTAR-B.
(Lv.1) COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-X/Y/Z (White level data entry of white plate)
CAUTION:
Be sure to make the white plate data adjustment before ADF white level adjustment.
W-PLT-X W-PLT-Z
W-PLT-Y
F-4-67
2) Write down the new numerical value in the service label.

3) Take the action stated below in the service mode.
(Lv.1) COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1/2/3/4 (White level adj in book/ADF mode)
3-1) Place a sheet of paper that the user usually uses on the Copyboard Glass, enter the
following servicemode.
(Lv.1) COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1
Read the white level (B&W) in the BOOK mode. (Check the transparency of the
Copyboard Glass)
3-2) Place a sheet of paper that the user usually uses on the ADF, enter the following
servicemode.
Read the white level (B&W) in the ADF mode. (Check the transparency of the ADF
Reading Glass.)
Read the white level (Color) in the BOOK mode. (Check the transparency of the
Copyboard Glass)
servicemode.
Read the white level (Color) in the ADF mode. (Check the transparency of the ADF
Reading Glass.)
4-40
4
Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Removing the Copyboard Glass > After Replacement
4 Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Removing the ADF Reading Glass > Procedure
4-41
Removing the ADF Reading Glass 3) Remove the ADF Reading Glass.
■■Procedure
ADF Reading Glass
CAUTION:
• Place the removed ADF Reading Glass on a cloth, etc. to avoid damaging the
bottom sheet.
• When removing the ADF Reading Glass, take care not to touch the glass surface.
• If the surface becomes dirty, clean it with lint free paper.
1) Open the ADF Unit.

2) Remove the Glass Retainer Plate.
F-4-69
• 2 Screws
CAUTION:
• When removing the ADF Reading Glass, take care not to touch the glass surface.
ADF Unit
• Attached soiling may cause white line/black line in the images.
• If soiling is attached, clean it with lint free paper moistened with alcohol.
x2 • When installing the ADF Reading Glass, be sure that the sheet material [A] of the
ADF Reading Glass is on the left front side.
Glass Retainer Plate
F-4-68 [A]
F-4-70
4-41
4
Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Removing the ADF Reading Glass > Procedure
4 Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Removing the ADF Unit > Procedure
4-42
■■After Replacement Removing the ADF Unit
■■Procedure
1-1) Place a sheet of paper that the user usually uses on the Copyboard Glass, enter the 1) Remove the Reader Controller Cover.
following servicemode. • 1 Claw
Copyboard Glass)
servicemode.
Reading Glass.)
Read the white level (Color) in the BOOK mode. (Check the transparency of the F-4-71
Copyboard Glass) 2) Remove the 5 connectors and the Grounding Wire and then release the ADF Harness from
1-4) Place a sheet of paper that the user usually uses on the ADF, enter the following the guide.
servicemode. • 1 Screw
Guide Grounding Wire
Reading Glass.)
x5
NOTE:
The result of the adjustment is reflected to COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFTAR-K/
ADF Harness
Connector
Connector
F-4-72
4-42
4
Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Removing the ADF Unit > Procedure
4 Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Removing the ADF Unit > After Replacement
4-43
3) Open the ADF Unit and remove it. <Procedure after Replacement>
CAUTION:
When ADF was exchanged or removed from the leader, you must do all adjustment of
ADF Unit
the following six items.
●● 1. Adjustment of the Degree of a Right Angle

1) Set a test chart on ADF, and give one sheet of copy.
2) Confirm the degree of a right angle of the image on the leading edge of the test chart and
the copied form.
Measure the dimension of A and B at the leading edge of the copied form.
When the amount of skew is not in the following standard, adjust it from the step 3).
F-4-73
• Standard Value: A - B = 0 +/- 1.5 mm
■■After Replacement A
<Prepare before Adjustment>

Prepare a test chart. A test chart is made when there is no test chart.
Feed direction Copy of the test chart
A test chart is drawn the rectangle that the end of 4 is smaller by 10 mm than a paper, and a
test chart is made in the form of A4 or LTR.
B
NOTE:
Write a character and a mark to know the direction of the copied image. F-4-75
10 mm
10 mm 10 mm
10 mm
F-4-74
4-43
4
Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Removing the ADF Unit > After Replacement
4-44
3) Loosen the 4 Fixing Screws of the Right Hinge, and then move the hinge to adjust the <Mechanical Adjustment>
squareness. 1) Loosen the Adjusting Screw of the Original Pickup Tray.
2) Move the slide guide in front/rear with reference to the scale marks.
Fixing Screws of the Right Hinge
• When a copied image moves to the rear: Move the slide guide in the front.
• When a copied image moves to the front: Move the slide guide in the rear.
F-4-76 Adjusting Screw

4) After completion of the adjustment, tighten the 4 Fixing Screws of the Right Hinge you
loosened in step 3).
●● 2. Adjustment of the Image Position (Horizontal Scanning Direction)

2) Compare the horizontal registration of the test chart and the copy of the test chart. F-4-78
When the horizontal registration is not in the following standard, adjust it with a process of 3) After completion of the adjustment, tighten the Adjusting Screws you loosened in step 1).
<Mechanical Adjustment> or <Service Mode Adjustment>.
• Standard Value: within 10 +/- 2 mm
10 +/- 2mm
F-4-77
4-44
4
4-45
<Service Mode Adjustment> ●● 3. Adjustment of the Image Position (Vertical Scanning Direction)
1) Select the item in the service mode. 1) Set a test chart on ADF, and give one sheet of copy.
(LV.1) COPIER> ADJUST> ADJ-XY> ADJ-Y-DF 2) Compare the leading edge registration of the test chart and the copy of the test chart.
2) Input value, and adjust an image. Carry out the following process when adjustment is necessary.
• When a copied image moves to the rear: Increase value 3) Select the item in the service mode.
• When a copied image moves to the front: Decrease value (LV.1) FEEDER> ADJUST> DOCST
• Adjustment unit: 0.1 mm 4) Input value, and adjust an image.
< When a copied image moves to the rear > < When a copied image moves to the front > • When a copied image moves to the trailing edge: Increase value
Copy of the test chart • When a copied image moves to the leading edge: Decrease value
Copy of the test chart
Test chart Test chart • Adjustment unit: 0.1 mm
< When a copied image moves to < When a copied image moves to
the trailing edge > the leading edge >
Test chart Copy of the test chart

A
A Test chart
A A
Feed direction Feed direction

F-4-79
3) Write the new changed value in the service label.
4) Exit the service mode.
F-4-80
CAUTION:
Confirm that the Degree of a Right Angle is correct after you finish this adjustment.
Adjust again from the Adjustment of the Degree of a Right Angle when the Degree of a
Right Angle is not correct.
4-45
4
4-46
●● 4. Fine Adjustment of Image Magnification (1-sided/Vertical Scanning ●● 5. Fine Adjustment of Image Magnification (2-sided/Vertical Scanning
Direction) Direction)
1) Set the image of the test chart upward in ADF, and give one sheet of copy. 1) Set the image of the test chart downward in ADF, and give one sheet of copy.
2) Compare the image length of the feed direction of the test chart and the copy of the test 2) Compare the image length of the feed direction of the test chart and the copy of the test
chart. chart.
Carry out the following process when adjustment is necessary. Carry out the following process when adjustment is necessary.
3) Select the item in the service mode. 3) Select the item in the service mode.
(LV.1) FEEDER> ADJUST> LA-SPEED (LV.1) FEEDER> ADJUST> LA-SPD2
4) Input value, and adjust an image. 4) Input value, and adjust an image.
• When a copied image is long: Decrease value (The feeding speed increases) • When a copied image is long: Decrease value (The feeding speed increases)
• When a copied image is short: Increase value (The feeding speed decreases) • When a copied image is short: Increase value (The feeding speed decreases)
• Adjustment unit: 0.1 % • Adjustment unit: 0.1 %
< When a copied image is long > < When a copied image is short > < When a copied image is long > < When a copied image is short >
Copy of the test chart Copy of the test chart

Test chart Copy of the test chart Test chart Copy of the test chart
Test chart Test chart
A A A A
Feed direction Feed direction Feed direction Feed direction

F-4-81 F-4-82
5) Write the new changed value in the service label. 5) Write the new changed value in the service label.
6) Exit the service mode. 6) Exit the service mode.
4-46
4
4 Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Removing the Reader Unit > Procedure
4-47
●● 6. Adjustment the White Level for ADF Scanning Removing the Reader Unit
(Lv.1) COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1/2/3/4 (White level adj in book/ADF mode) ■■Preparation
1-1) Place a sheet of paper that the user usually uses on the Copyboard Glass, enter the 1) Remove the ADF Unit.(Refer to page 4-42)
following servicemode. 2) Remove the Rear Cover.(Refer to page 4-24)
(Lv.1) COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1 3) Remove the Delivery Outer Cover.(Refer to page 4-28)
Read the white level (B&W) in the BOOK mode. (Check the transparency of the 4) Remove the Left Cover.(Refer to page 4-27)
Copyboard Glass) 5) Remove the Inner Rear Cover.(Refer to page 4-28)
1-2) Place a sheet of paper that the user usually uses on the ADF, enter the following 6) Remove the Right Inner Cover.(Refer to page 4-30)
servicemode. 7) Remove the Reader Front Cover.(Refer to page 4-32)
(Lv.1) COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL2 8) Remove the Right Front Cover.(Refer to page 4-25)
Read the white level (B&W) in the ADF mode. (Check the transparency of the ADF 9) Remove the Support Column Cover.(Refer to page 4-32)
Reading Glass.) 10) Remove the Reader Bottom Cover.(Refer to page 4-35)
1-3) Place a sheet of paper that the user usually uses on the Copyboard Glass, enter the 11) Remove the Reader Rear Cover.(Refer to page 4-34)
following servicemode. 12) Remove the Control Panel Unit.(Refer to page 4-36)
■■Procedure
Copyboard Glass)
1-4) Place a sheet of paper that the user usually uses on the ADF, enter the following 1) Remove the 2 Screws.
servicemode.
x2
Reading Glass.)
NOTE:
The result of the adjustment is reflected to COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFTAR-K/ x2
F-4-83
4-47
4
Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Removing the Reader Unit > Procedure
4 Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Removing the Reader Unit > Procedure
4-48
2) Remove the Reader Right Front Fixation Plate and the Reader Right Rear Fixation Plate. 4) Remove the Harness Guide and then remove the Reader Unit.
• 4 Screws • 4 Screws
• 2 Claws
Reader Right Rear Fixation Plate
Reader Unit
x4 Reader Right Front Fixation Plate Harness Guide
x4
Claw
F-4-84
3) Disconnect the connector and remove the reuse band. F-4-86
Reuse Band
Connector
F-4-85
4-48
4
Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Removing the Reader Unit > Procedure
4 Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Removing the Reader Controller PCB > Procedure
4-49
Removing the Reader Controller PCB CAUTION:
Fit the Reader Controller PCB into the 2 grooves of the plate when assembling.
NOTE:
The Reader Controller PCB does not memorize a reader-related service mode.
Therefore the measures after replacing the Reader Controller PCB are not necessary.
■■Preparation
1) Remove the ADF Unit.(Refer to page 4-42)
3) Remove the Delivery Outer Cover.(Refer to page 4-28) Groove
Reader Controller PCB
5) Remove the Reader Rear Cover.(Refer to page 4-34)
6) Remove the Copyboard Glass.(Refer to page 4-39)
F-4-88
■■Procedure
1) Remove the Reader Controller PCB.
• 1 Harness Retainer
• 2 Connectors
• 1 Flat Cables
• 2 Screws

Flat Cable
Connector
Harness Retainer
Connector
x2 x2
F-4-87
4-49
4
Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Removing the Reader Controller PCB > Procedure
4 Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Removing the CIS Unit > Procedure
4-50
Removing the CIS Unit 2) Remove the CIS Unit.
• 1 Harness Retainer
■■Preparation • 1 Flat Cable
• 2 Shafts
1) Remove the Copyboard Glass.(Refer to page 4-39)
■■Procedure CIS Unit

Shaft
CAUTION:
• Be sure not to touch the Document Reading Part of the CIS Unit when
disassembling/assembling.
Document Reading Part
F-4-89
Harness Retainer CIS Unit
1) Shift the CIS Unit to the center by moving the belt. Flat Cable
F-4-91
CIS Unit Belt
F-4-90
4-50
4
Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Removing the CIS Unit > Procedure
4 Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Removing the CIS Unit > After Replacement
4-51
■■After Replacement Read the white level (Color) in the BOOK mode. (Check the transparency of the
Copyboard Glass)
1. When uploading of backup data succeeds before replacement.
3-4) Place a sheet of paper that the user usually uses on the ADF, enter the
1) Restoring the backup data
(Lv.2) COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES
2) After turn OFF/ON the main power switch, make a copy and check the copied image.
Read the white level (Color) in the ADF mode. (Check the transparency of the
ADF Reading Glass.)
2. When uploading of backup data fails before replacement.
1) Enter the value indicated on the platen glass as shown in the following service mode: NOTE:
(Lv.1) COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-X/Y/Z (White level data entry of white plate) The result of the adjustment is reflected to COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFTAR-K/
CAUTION:
Be sure to make the white plate data adjustment before ADF white (Lv.1) COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> CCD-ADJ (Adjustment of CIS gain/offset of CIS)
level adjustment.
4-1) Place 10 or more sheets of standard white paper (The whitest paper form
which a user is using except for the color paper.) on the Copyboard Glass.
4-2) Select this item and press OK key.
4-3) The auto-adj is performed for about 30 sec. <ACTIVE> is displayed on the
W-PLT-X W-PLT-Z LCD.
W-PLT-Y 4-4) <OK!> is displayed and the auto-adj is completed.
F-4-92 4-5) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
CAUTION:
3) Take the action stated below in the service mode. When turning OFF/ON the main power switch is not carried out, E315-510 error (Device
(Lv.1) COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1/2/3/4 (White level adj in book/ADF timeout) occurs at the time as the copy.
mode)
3-1) Place a sheet of paper that the user usually uses on the Copyboard Glass,
NOTE:
enter the following servicemode. The NG is indicated after about 70 sec.
(Lv.1) COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1 The adjusted value reflect in COPIER> DISPLAY> CCD> OFST (BW1 to BW11 and
Read the white level (B&W) in the BOOK mode. (Check the transparency of the CL1 to CL11) and COPIER> DISPLAY> CCD> GAIN-BW/GAIN-CL.
Copyboard Glass)
5) Make a copy and check the copied image.
Read the white level (B&W) in the ADF mode. (Check the transparency of the
ADF Reading Glass.)
enter the following servicemode.
4-51
4
Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Removing the CIS Unit > After Replacement
4 Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Removing the ADF Upper Cover Unit > Procedure
4-52
Removing the ADF Upper Cover Unit 2) Remove the ADF Upper Cover Unit.
• 1 Link
■■Procedure • 2 Shafts
CAUTION:
Be sure not to touch the surface of the Roller and the Pad when disassembling/ Shaft
assembling.
1) While pulling the part of the ADF Front Cover, release the part which works as an open/
close stopper and open the ADF Upper Cover Unit.
ADF Front Cover

ADF Upper Cover Unit ADF Front Cover
ADF Upper Cover Unit
F-4-93 Link
Shaft
F-4-94
4-52
4
Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Removing the ADF Upper Cover Unit > Procedure
4 Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Removing the ADF Separation Pad > Procedure
4-53
3) Return the Pickup Upper Guide to the original position.
Removing the ADF Separation Pad
■■Procedure
CAUTION:
Pickup Upper Guide
Be sure not to touch the surface of the pad when disassembling/assembling.
1) Open the ADF Upper Cover Unit, and remove the ADF Separation Pad.
• 2 Claws
F-4-95 x2
Claw
ADF Separation Pad
ADF Upper Cover Unit
F-4-96
4-53
4
Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Removing the ADF Separation Pad > Procedure
4 Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Removing the ADF Pickup Roller Unit > Procedure
4-54
CAUTION: Removing the ADF Pickup Roller Unit

Be sure to fit the Spring of the ADF Separation Pad into the 2 bosses when assembling. ■■Preparation
1) Remove the ADF Upper Cover Unit.(Refer to page 4-52)
Spring Boss
■■Procedure
CAUTION:
Be sure not to touch the surface of the roller when disassembling/assembling.
Boss
1) Remove the Pickup Upper Cover Lower Guide.

• 5 Claws
F-4-97
Claw
x5
Claw
Claw
F-4-98
4-54
4
Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Removing the ADF Pickup Roller Unit > Procedure
4 Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Removing the ADF Pickup Roller Unit > Procedure
4-55
2) Remove the Pickup Roller Unit.
CAUTION:
• 1 Clip
• 1 Bushing • Be sure to install the 4 flags of the ADF Pickup Roller Unit under the 2 flags of the
• 1 Spring Upper Cover Unit when assembling.
• Hook the 2 edges of the spring on the 2 grooves [A] when assembling.
Spring
Flag (Upper Cover)

Edge
[A]
[A]
Edge
Flag
F-4-99
F-4-100
4-55
4
Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Removing the ADF Pickup Roller Unit > Procedure
4 Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Removing the Original Pickup Tray > Procedure
4-56
Removing the Original Pickup Tray 2) Remove the Original Pickup Tray Unit.
• 2 Shafts
■■Procedure
Shaft
1) Open the ADF Upper Cover Unit, and remove the ADF Rear Cover.
• 2 Screws
• 1 Claw
• 2 Bosses
Boss
x2
Shaft
F-4-102
F-4-101
4-56
4
Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Removing the Original Pickup Tray > Procedure
4 Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Removing the ADF Pickup Unit > Procedure
4-57
Removing the ADF Pickup Unit 1) Remove the Reader Controller Cover.
• 1 Claw
■■Preparation
1) Remove the ADF Upper Cover Unit.(Refer to page 4-52)
2) Remove the Original Pickup Tray.(Refer to page 4-56) x2
Reader Controller Cover
■■Procedure
CAUTION:
Be sure not to touch the surface of the Static Eliminator, the Separation Pad and the
Feed Roller when disassembling/assembling.
Claw
Feed Roller Separation Pad
F-4-104
2) Remove the 5 connectors and the Grounding Wire of the ADF Harness.
• 1 Screw
Connector
x5
Static Eliminator
F-4-103 Grounding Wire

Connector
Connector
F-4-105
4-57
4
Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Removing the ADF Pickup Unit > Procedure
4-58
3) Open the ADF Unit. 6) Close the White Plate and the ADF.
4) Open the White Plate, and remove the 3 screws.
ADF
White Plate
White Plate
F-4-108
7) Remove the 4 screws.
ADF Pickup Unit

ADF Unit
x3 x4
F-4-106
5) Remove the ADF Front Cover.
• 4 Hooks
Hook ADF Front Cover
Hook ADF Pickup Unit
F-4-109
Hook
F-4-107
4-58
4
4-59
8) Remove the ADF Pickup Unit.
CAUTION:
• 1 Hook
When installing the ADF Pickup Unit, be sure to open the ADF Lower Guide and hook
CAUTION: the hook at the lower side on the hole of the White Plate.
When removing the ADF Pickup Unit, be careful that the ADF Unit becomes open due
to its own weight becoming smaller.
Hook
Hole
White Plate
F-4-112
F-4-110
Hook
ADF Pickup Unit
F-4-111
4-59
4
4 Disassembly/Assembly > Main Controller System > Removing the Main Controller PCB > Preparation
4-60
Main Controller System Removing the Main Controller PCB

■■Preparation before Replacement
Location
1) Backup of the set/registered dataUse the Remote UI.
Use the Remote UI: Management Settings > Data Management > Import/Export
Target data:
• Address List
2) Printing the set/registered data
Use the service mode : (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > USER-PRT
List of the set/registered data which cannot be backed up is printed."
■■Preparation
1) Remove the Reader Controller Cover. (Refer to page 4-24)
2) Remove the Rear Cover. (Refer to page 4-24)
NOTE:
[1] If the FAX Unit have been already installed, remove the FAX Unit.
When removing the 1st Line and 2nd Line FAX Units, it is possible to remove 1st line
[2] and 2nd Line FAX Units together by removing the 5 screws after disconnecting the
connectors and releasing the harnesses.
F-4-113
Adjustment during
No. Name Constitution Unit Reference
parts replacement
x5
[1] Main Controller PCB Main Unit (Refer to page 4-60) 1st Line and 2nd Line Fax Unit
[2] HDD Unit Main Unit (Refer to page 4-64)
T-4-30
F-4-114
4-60
4
Disassembly/Assembly > Main Controller System > Removing the Main Controller PCB > Preparation
4 Disassembly/Assembly > Main Controller System > Removing the Main Controller PCB > Procedure
4-61
■■Procedure NOTE:
1) Remove the Main Controller Sub Cover. When the operation is done with the Main Controller Cover opened, the condition of [A]
or [B] can do.
• 1 Screw
[A]:When the Cover is rested on the base. [B]:When the Cover is caught in the claw.
Claw
x2
Base
F-4-117
Boss
F-4-115
2) Remove the Main Controller Cover.
• 2 Connectors
• 4 Screws x2
NOTE: x4
The HDD Unit is being installed on the Main Controller Cover.
F-4-118
F-4-116
4-61
4
Disassembly/Assembly > Main Controller System > Removing the Main Controller PCB > Procedure
4 Disassembly/Assembly > Main Controller System > Removing the Main Controller PCB > Procedure
4-62
3) Disconnect the USB Cable and the Control Panel Communication Cable.
• 2 Connectors
x2
x7
F-4-119
4) Remove the Main Controller Unit.
• Disconnect all connectors on the Main Controller PCB.
• 3 Wire Saddles
x7
• 3 Edge Saddles
• 2 Harness Guides
• 5 Reuse Bands
• 7 Screws
NOTE:
When the FAX Unit is being installed, perform the operation after remove the Fax Unit.
F-4-120
4-62
4
Disassembly/Assembly > Main Controller System > Removing the Main Controller PCB > Procedure
4 Disassembly/Assembly > Main Controller System > Removing the Main Controller PCB > After Replacement
4-63
CAUTION: NOTE:
When the reuse band is installing as shown, do not mistake the place to install it.
When installing the Controller Unit, install the Controller Unit that the Speed Label is the
same as the Product Name. Reuse Band
The Speed Label is being pasted on [A] or [B]. Reuse Band
(The barcode in the following figure is for factory, so there is the case that it is not
printed.)
Product Name Product Name
＊400＊
400$***$*********
F-4-122
■■After Replacement
1) Transfer the parts from old PCB to new PCB.
• TPM PCB
• Flash PCB
• Memory PCB
TPM PCB Flash PCB Memory PCB
F-4-121
F-4-123
4-63
4
Disassembly/Assembly > Main Controller System > Removing the Main Controller PCB > After Replacement
4 Disassembly/Assembly > Main Controller System > Removing the HDD Unit > Preparation
4-64
CAUTION: Removing the HDD Unit

Do not transfer the following parts to another machine (a machine of a different serial ■■Preparation before Replacement
number.).
1) Backup of the set/registered data
The machine will not start up normally, and may become unrecoverable in some cases. Use the Remote UI : Management Settings > Data Management > Import/Export
• Main Controller PCB Target data:
• Flash PCB • Address List
• Memory PCB • Forwarding Settings
• Web Access Favorites
2) Printing the set/registered data
2) After installing the parts, turn ON the main power switch. Use the service mode : (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > USER-PRT
3) Restoring the backup data List of the set/registered data which cannot be backed up is printed."
Use the Remote UI : Management Settings > Data Management > Import/Export 3) Use SST to upload Meapback.bin to the Flash PCB on the Main Controller.
4) Resetting/registering the data (When Meapback.bin cannot be uploaded, use another method. Refer to Backup Data.)
While referring to the list of set/registered data which was printed before replacement,
reset/register the data. ■■Preparation
5) When the user generates and adds the encryption key, certificate and/or CA certificate,
request the user to generate them again.
3) Remove the Main Controller Sub Cover. (Refer to page 4-61)
4) Remove the Main Controller Cover. (Refer to page 4-61)
4-64
4
Disassembly/Assembly > Main Controller System > Removing the HDD Unit > Preparation
4 Disassembly/Assembly > Main Controller System > Removing the HDD Unit > After Replacement
4-65
■■Procedure ■■After Replacement
1) Remove the HDD Unit. 1) HDD format
• 2 Connectors 1-1) Start with the safe mode. (While pressing 2 and 8 keys simultaneously, turn ON the
• 4 Screws main power switch.)
1-2) Use SST to format all partitions.
2) Initializing the key, certificate and CA certificate
(Lv.2) COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > CA-KEY
x2 3) Turning OFF and ON the main power switch

4) Restoring the backup data
Use the Remote UI : Management Settings > Data Management > Import/Export
x4 5) Restore the backup data.

5-1) Use RUI: Management Settings > Data Management > Import/Export
5-2) Download Meapback.bin using SST.
6) Resetting/registering the data
While referring to the list of set/registered data which was printed before replacement,
reset/register the data.
7) When the user generates and adds the encryption key, certificate and/or CA certificate,
F-4-124
request the user to generate them again.
NOTE:
When Installing the HDD Unit, reuse the connector removed with step 1).
4-65
4
Disassembly/Assembly > Main Controller System > Removing the HDD Unit > After Replacement
4 Disassembly/Assembly > Laser Exposure System > Removing the Laser Scanner Unit > Procedure
4-66
Laser Exposure System Removing the Laser Scanner Unit

■■Preparation
Location
4) Remove the HVT PCB.(Refer to page 4-97)
■■Procedure
CAUTION:
Be sure not to disassemble the Laser Scanner Unit because it requires adjustment.
[1]
1) Remove the Laser Scanner Fixation Plate.

• 1 Screw
2) Free the harness from the guide.
F-4-125

parts replacement
[1] Laser Scanner Unit Main Unit (Refer to page (Refer to page 5-11)
4-66)
T-4-31
F-4-126
4-66
4
Disassembly/Assembly > Laser Exposure System > Removing the Laser Scanner Unit > Procedure
4 Disassembly/Assembly > Laser Exposure System > Removing the Laser Scanner Unit > Procedure
4-67
3) Remove the 3 Reuse Bands and the connector, and pull out the Laser Scanner Unit to the
CAUTION:
front.
Be sure to fit the 3 bosses of the Laser Scanner Unit into the 3 holes of the plate of the
CAUTION: host machine when assembling.
When disassembling/assembling, be careful not to touch the PCB installed in the Laser
Boss
Scanner Unit. (Touching the PCB may change the adjustment value as the PCB is Boss
equipped with laser intensity adjustment volume resistor.)
Reuse Band
Connector PCB
x4 Hole Hole
F-4-129
F-4-127
4) Remove the Laser Scanner Unit.
• 2 Sponges
• 3 Connectors
Laser Scanner Unit Sponge
x3 Connector
Connector
F-4-128
4-67
4
Disassembly/Assembly > Laser Exposure System > Removing the Laser Scanner Unit > Procedure
4 Disassembly/Assembly > Laser Exposure System > Removing the Laser Scanner Unit > After Replacement
4-68
■■After Replacement
1) When replacing the laser unit, enter the values recorded on the label affixed to the laser
unit to be replaced for the following in the service mode:
-10 0 147 136 93 16 117
ＢＣＤＡＥＦＧ
F-4-130
Trailing edge OFF adjustment for the laser:
A. (LV1) COPIER> ADJUST> LASER> PVE-OFST> 136
Magnification between the lasers:
B. (LV1) COPIER> ADJUST> LASER> LDADJ1-K> -10
C. (LV1) COPIER> ADJUST> LASER> LDADJ2-K> 0
D. (LV1) COPIER> ADJUST> LASER> LDADJ3-K> 147
Phase difference between the lasers:
E. (LV1) COPIER> ADJUST> LASER> LDADJ4-K> 93
F. (LV1) COPIER> ADJUST> LASER> LDADJ5-K> 16
G. (LV1) COPIER> ADJUST> LASER> LDADJ6-K> 117

4-68
4
Disassembly/Assembly > Laser Exposure System > Removing the Laser Scanner Unit > After Replacement
4 Disassembly/Assembly > Image Formation System > Location
4-69
Image Formation System No. Name Constitution Unit Reference Adjustment during
parts replacement
[1] Separation Static Charge Transfer Unit (Refer to page 4-75)
Location Eliminator
[2] Transfer Roller Transfer Unit (Refer to page 4-74)
[3] Drum Unit Main Unit (Refer to page 4-71)
[1] [4] Waste Toner Container Main Unit (Refer to page 4-70)
[5] Toner Cartridge Main Unit (Refer to page 4-71)
[2] [6] Hopper Unit Main Unit (Refer to page 4-78)
[7] Developing Assembly Main Unit (Refer to page 4-72)
[8] Main Drive Unit Main Unit (Refer to page 4-76)
T-4-32
[8]
[7]
[3]
[6]
[4]
[5]
F-4-131
4-69
4
Disassembly/Assembly > Image Formation System > Location
4 Disassembly/Assembly > Image Formation System > Removing the Waste Toner Container > Procedure
4-70
Removing the Waste Toner Container ●● Assembling Procedure
1) Install the Waste Toner Container, turn the Lock Lever, and then close the Front Cover.
■■Procedure
●● Disassembling Procedure
1) Open the Front Cover, turn the Lock Lever, and then remove the Waste Toner Container.
F-4-134
F-4-132
2) Remove the lid attached on the surface of the Waste Toner Container, and cover the
opening of the container with the lid to prevent spills.
Lid Opening Lid
F-4-133
4-70
4
Disassembly/Assembly > Image Formation System > Removing the Waste Toner Container > Procedure
4 Disassembly/Assembly > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Unit > Procedure
4-71
Removing the Toner Cartridge Removing the Drum Unit
■■Procedure ■■Preparation
1) Open the Front Cover, release the Toner Cartridge Lock Lever, and then remove the Toner 1) Remove the Waste Toner Container.(Refer to page 4-70)
Cartridge. ■■Procedure
CAUTION:
• Be sure not to touch the drum of the Drum Cartridge when disassembling/
assembling.
F-4-135
F-4-136
• Be sure to block light to the removed Drum Cartridge using paper.
F-4-137
4-71
4
Disassembly/Assembly > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Unit > Procedure
4 Disassembly/Assembly > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Assembly > Procedure
4-72
1) Open the Right Door Unit, release the Developing Pressure Lock Lever.
Removing the Developing Assembly
2) Remove the Drum Unit while releasing the Drum Unit Lock Lever.
■■Preparation
■■Procedure
Lock Lever
CAUTION:
• Place paper, and then place the Developing Assembly.

• Be sure not to tilt the Developing Assembly to prevent toner from spilling from the
Toner Duct when disassembling/assembling
F-4-138
F-4-139
4-72
4
Disassembly/Assembly > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Assembly > Procedure
4 Disassembly/Assembly > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Assembly > Procedure
4-73
2) Remove the Developing Assembly.
CAUTION:
• 1 Edge Saddle
• Be sure not to touch the Developing Cylinder when disassembling/assembling. • 1 Connector
Edge Saddle
Connector
F-4-140
F-4-142
1) Remove the Developing Assembly Replacement Inner Cover.

• 2 Claws
x2
F-4-141
4-73
4
Disassembly/Assembly > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Assembly > Procedure
4 Disassembly/Assembly > Image Formation System > Removing the Transfer Roller > Procedure
4-74
Removing the Transfer Roller ●● Assembling Procedure
1) Install the Transfer Roller by fitting the protrusion of the Transfer Roller Holder into the hole
■■Procedure of the Transfer Unit.
CAUTION:
Transfer Roller
Be sure not to touch the surface of the Transfer Roller when disassembling/assembling.
Protrusion
Hole
F-4-145
2) Close the Right Door Unit.
F-4-143
1) Open the Right Door Unit, hold the grips at the front and rear, and then remove the Transfer
Roller.
Grip
Transfer Roller
F-4-144
4-74
4
Disassembly/Assembly > Image Formation System > Removing the Transfer Roller > Procedure
4 Disassembly/Assembly > Image Formation System > Removing the Separation Static Eliminator > Procedure
4-75
Removing the Separation Static Eliminator ●● Assembling Procedure
1) Install the Separation Static Eliminator.
■■Procedure
CAUTION:
Be sure not to touch the surface of the Transfer Roller when disassembling/assembling.
F-4-148
CAUTION:
Be sure to hook the claw of the grip on the protrusion of the Transfer Unit when
assembling.
F-4-146
1) Open the Right Door Unit, and remove the Separation Static Eliminator.
F-4-149
F-4-147
4-75
4
Disassembly/Assembly > Image Formation System > Removing the Separation Static Eliminator > Procedure
4 Disassembly/Assembly > Image Formation System > Removing the Main Drive Unit > Procedure
4-76
Removing the Main Drive Unit 2) Disconnect the connector and then remove the Relay Connector from the connector mount.
• 1 Connector
■■Preparation
3) Remove the Waste Toner Container.(Refer to page 4-70) Connector Relay Connector
5) Remove the Main Controller PCB.(Refer to page 4-60)
■■Procedure
1) Disconnect the 2 connectors and release the 2 wire saddles.
x2 F-4-151
3) Free the Harness Guide and disconnect the connector.
• 1 Boss
• 2 Claws
• 1 Connector
Boss
x2
F-4-150
Claw
F-4-152
4-76
4
Disassembly/Assembly > Image Formation System > Removing the Main Drive Unit > Procedure
4 Disassembly/Assembly > Image Formation System > Removing the Main Drive Unit > Procedure
4-77
4) Remove the Registration Clutch. 5) Remove the Drive Unit.
• 1 Connector • 6 Screws
• 1 E-ring
x6
F-4-155
F-4-153
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Be sure to fit the bearing of the Drive Unit into the hole of the plate on the host machine
When assembling the Registration Clutch, be sure to align the cut-off of the clutch with
side when assembling.
the protrusion of the Drive Unit
Protrusion Cut-off
Hole Bearing
F-4-156
F-4-154
4-77
4
Disassembly/Assembly > Image Formation System > Removing the Main Drive Unit > Procedure
4 Disassembly/Assembly > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper Unit > Procedure
4-78
Removing the Hopper Unit 2) Remove the Reverse Tray.
• 3 Claws
■■Preparation
2) Remove the Delivery Outer Cover.(Refer to page 4-28) x3
4) Remove the Toner Cartridge.(Refer to page 4-71)
9) Remove the Fixing Assembly.(Refer to page 4-82)
F-4-158
12) Remove the Left Inner Cover.(Refer to page 4-31)
3) Remove the High Voltage Upper Guide.
• 1 Boss
14) Remove the Delivery Inner Cover.(Refer to page 4-29)
• 4 Claws
15) Remove the HVT PCB.(Refer to page 4-97)
16) Remove the Laser Scanner Unit.(Refer to page 4-66)
■■Procedure
1) Remove the High Voltage Main Guide.
• 1 Boss
• 6 Claws
Boss
Claw Boss
x6 Claw
Claw
x4
Claw Claw
Claw
F-4-157 F-4-159
4-78
4
Disassembly/Assembly > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper Unit > Procedure
4-79
4) Remove the Hopper Unit.
• 1 Connector
• 1 Edge Saddle
• 4 Screws
CAUTION:
x4
When removing the Hopper Unit, be sure not to spill toner from the Toner Supply Mouth
and the Toner Open/Close Shutter.
Toner Supply Mouth
F-4-162
●● Assembling Procedure
Toner Open/Close Shutter
1) Install the Hopper Unit.
• 1 Connector
• 1 Edge Saddle
• 4 Screws
CAUTION:
F-4-160 When installing the Hopper Unit, be sure not to spill toner from the Toner Supply Mouth
and the Toner Open/Close Shutter.
NOTE:
Since installation of the Toner Container decreases the possibility of toner scattering, it is Toner Supply Mouth
recommended to install the Toner Container when there is no problem with it.
Toner Open/Close Shutter
F-4-163
F-4-161
4-79
4
4-80
2) Install the High Voltage Upper Guide.
CAUTION:
• 1 Boss
When installing the Hopper Unit with toner inside, be sure to install it after removing the • 4 Claws
Support Column Cover. There is a high possibility of toner scattering during the work if
it is not removed.
Removing the Support Column Cover (Refer to page 4-32)
NOTE:
Since installation of the Toner Container decreases the possibility of toner scattering, it is
recommended to install the Toner Container when there is no problem with it.
Boss
Claw
x4
Claw
Claw Claw
F-4-164
F-4-166
3) Install the Reverse Tray.
• 3 Claws
x3
x4
F-4-165
F-4-167
4-80
4
4-81
4) Install the High Voltage Main Guide. 5) Install the Laser Scanner Unit.
• 1 Boss 6) Install the HVT PCB.
• 6 Claws 7) Install the Delivery Inner Cover.
8) Install the Inner Rear Cover.
Claw
9) Install the Left Inner Cover.
Boss 10) Install the Right Inner Cover.
11) Install the Right Front Cover.
x6 12) Install the Fixing Assembly.
13) Install the Front Cover.
14) Install the Developing Assembly.
15) Install the Drum Unit.
16) Install the Waste Toner Container.
17) Install the Toner Cartridge.
18) Install the Left Cover.
Claw 19) Install the Delivery Outer Cover.
20) Install the Rear Cover.
F-4-168
CAUTION:
When assembling the High Voltage Main Guide, be sure that the 7 Contact Springs are
in contact with the [A] part of the High Voltage Lower Guide.
[A]
Contact Spring
[A] Contact Spring

F-4-169
4-81
4
4 Disassembly/Assembly > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Assembly > Procedure
4-82
Fixing System Removing the Fixing Assembly
Location CAUTION:
• Be sure to start removing the Fixing Assembly after it is cooled down enough. The
[1] [2]
Fixing Assembly right after printing may cause burn injury.
• Be sure not to disassemble the Fixing Assembly because it requires adjustment.
■■Procedure
1) Open the Right Door Unit.
F-4-170

parts replacement
[1] Fixing Drive Unit Main Unit (Refer to page 4-84) F-4-171
[2] Fixing Assembly Main Unit (Refer to page 4-82)
T-4-33
4-82
4
Disassembly/Assembly > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Assembly > Procedure
4 Disassembly/Assembly > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Assembly > Procedure
4-83
2) Release the 2 Fixing Lock Levers, and remove the Fixing Assembly. ●● Assembling Procedure
1) Install the Fixing Assembly by putting the 2 edges [A] of the bottom of the Fixing Assembly
into the 2 Fixing Rails.
CAUTION:
Be sure that the lock of the 2 Fixing Lock Levers is released when installing.
F-4-173
[A]
[A]
F-4-172
Fixing Rail
F-4-174
4-83
4
Disassembly/Assembly > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Assembly > Procedure
4 Disassembly/Assembly > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Drive Unit > Procedure
4-84
2) Lock the 2 Fixing Lock Levers, and secure the Fixing Assembly.
Removing the Fixing Drive Unit
■■Preparation
5) Remove the Main Controller PCB.(Refer to page 4-60)
6) Remove the Main Drive Unit.(Refer to page 4-76)
■■Procedure
1) Remove the Fixing Drive Unit.
F-4-175
3) Close the Right Door Unit. • 6 Screws (RS Tightening)
• 1 Screw (with washer)
• 1 Connector
x6
F-4-176
4-84
4
Disassembly/Assembly > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Drive Unit > Procedure
4 Disassembly/Assembly > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Cassette Feed Roller > Procedure
4-85
Pickup Feed System Removing the Cassette Feed Roller

■■Procedure
Location
[1] CAUTION:
[3]
[2]
[4]
[5]
[6] F-4-178
[7]
1) Remove the cassette.
[8]
F-4-177

parts replacement
[1] Delivery/Reverse Unit Main Unit (Refer to page 4-94)
[2] Multi-purpose Tray Separation Transfer Unit (Refer to page 4-93)
Pad
[3] Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Transfer Unit (Refer to page 4-90)
Roller
[4] Cassette Pickup Unit Main Unit (Refer to page 4-89)
[5] Cassette Pickup Idler Gear Cassette Pickup Unit (Refer to page 4-89)
[6] Cassette Feed Roller Cassette Pickup Unit (Refer to page 4-85)
[7] Cassette Separation Roller Cassette Pickup Unit (Refer to page 4-87)
[8] Cassette Pickup Roller Cassette Pickup Unit (Refer to page 4-88)
T-4-34 F-4-179
4-85
4
Disassembly/Assembly > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Cassette Feed Roller > Procedure
4 Disassembly/Assembly > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Cassette Feed Roller > Procedure
4-86
2) Release the claw of the Cassette Feed Roller, and remove the Cassette Feed Roller. 1) Install the Cassette Feed Roller by aligning the protrusion of the Feed Roller Shaft with the
groove of the Cassette Feed Roller.
Groove
Cassette Feed Roller
Claw
Protrusion
F-4-180
●● Assembling Procedure F-4-182

2) Return the cassette to the original position.
CAUTION:
Be sure to install the Cassette Feed Roller to the shaft at the upper side and the
Cassette Separation Roller to the shaft at the lower side when assembling.
Cassette Separation Roller
F-4-181
4-86
4
Disassembly/Assembly > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Cassette Feed Roller > Procedure
4 Disassembly/Assembly > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Cassette Separation Roller > Procedure
4-87
Removing the Cassette Separation Roller 2) Release the claw of the Cassette Separation Roller, and remove the Cassette Separation
Roller.
■■Procedure
CAUTION:
Be sure not to touch the surface of the roller when disassembling/assembling. Claw
F-4-185
CAUTION:
Be sure to install the Cassette Feed Roller to the shaft at the upper side and the
F-4-183
Cassette Separation Roller to the shaft at the lower side when assembling.

F-4-186
F-4-184
4-87
4
Disassembly/Assembly > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Cassette Separation Roller > Procedure
4 Disassembly/Assembly > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Cassette Pickup Roller > Procedure
4-88
1) Install the Cassette Separation Roller by aligning the protrusion of the Separation Roller
Removing the Cassette Pickup Roller
Shaft with the groove of the Cassette Separation Roller.
■■Procedure
Protrusion
CAUTION:

Groove
Protrusion
F-4-187
2) Return the cassette to the original position.
F-4-188
2) Remove the Fixation Pin, and remove the Cassette Feed Roller.
Fixation Pin
F-4-189
4-88
4
Disassembly/Assembly > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Cassette Pickup Roller > Procedure
4 Disassembly/Assembly > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Cassette Pickup Unit > Procedure
4-89
Removing the Cassette Pickup Idler Gear Removing the Cassette Pickup Unit
■■Preparation ■■Preparation
1) Remove the Cassette Feed Roller..(Refer to page 4-85) 1) Remove the Right Front Cover.(Refer to page 4-24)
2) Remove the Cassette Pickup Roller.(Refer to page 4-88) 2) Remove the Right Rear Cover.(Refer to page 4-24)
3) Remove the Right Door Unit.(Refer to page 4-26)
■■Procedure
■■Procedure
CAUTION:
NOTE:
Be sure not to touch the surface of the roller when disassembling/assembling. When an option cassette is installed, open the Option Cassette Right Door.
1) Remove the Cassette Pickup Idler Gear.

• 1 Claw
Claw
Cassette Right Door
F-4-191
F-4-190
4-89
4
Disassembly/Assembly > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Cassette Pickup Unit > Procedure
4 Disassembly/Assembly > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller > Procedure
4-90
1) Pull out the cassette, and remove the Cassette Pickup Unit.
Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller
• 1 Connector
• 1 Wire Saddle ■■Procedure
• 1 Screw (RS Tightening)
• 4 Screws (Tapping)
• 1 Reuse Band
CAUTION:
CAUTION: • Be sure not to touch the surface of the roller when disassembling/assembling.
When pulling out the Pickup Unit at disassembly/assembly, be sure not to cause open
circuit by making the harness get caught in the part.
F-4-194
• Be sure not to touch the surface of the pad when disassembling/assembling.

F-4-192
x5
Reuse Band
Wire Saddle
F-4-195
F-4-193
4-90
4
Disassembly/Assembly > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller > Procedure
4-91
1) Open the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Tray. 3) Release the claw of the Pickup Roller Holder on the right and left, and move the Pickup
Roller Holder.
F-4-196
2) Remove the Pickup Roller Cover. F-4-198
• 2 Claws 4) Lower the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Pad, and remove the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup
Roller.
x2
F-4-197
F-4-199
4-91
4
4-92
●● Assembling Procedure 3) Close the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Tray.
1) Install the Pickup Roller by aligning the protrusion of the new Pickup Roller with the groove
of the Pickup Roller Holder.
• 2 Pickup Roller Holders
F-4-202
Protrusion
F-4-200
2) Install the Pickup Roller Cover by aligning the 2 grooves of the Pickup Tray Cover with the
2 shafts of the Pickup Roller Cover.
Groove
Pickup Roller Cover
Shaft
F-4-201
4-92
4
4 Disassembly/Assembly > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Pad > Procedure
4-93
Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Pad 1) Lower the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Tray, release the 2 bosses of the Multi-purpose Tray
Separation Pad, and then remove the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Pad.
■■Preparation Boss
1) Remove the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller.(Refer to page 4-90)
■■Procedure
CAUTION:
Be sure not to touch the surface of the pad when disassembling/assembling.
F-4-204
1) Install the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Pad by aligning the 3 protrusions of the new Multi-
purpose Tray Separation Pad with the 3 grooves of the Separation Pad Holder.
F-4-203
Protrusion
Groove
F-4-205
4-93
4
Disassembly/Assembly > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Pad > Procedure
4 Disassembly/Assembly > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Delivery/Reverse Unit > Procedure
4-94
Removing the Delivery/Reverse Unit 2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the Wire Saddle, the Edge Saddle and the 2
screws.
■■Preparation
2) Remove the Rear Cover.(Refer to page 4-24) x2 x2
NOTE:
Remove the Main Controller Unit to improve the operability.
■■Procedure
1) Remove the Reverse Tray.
• 3 Claws
F-4-207
Claw 3) While putting the connector into the inside of the host machine, remove the Delivery/
Reverse Unit.
x3 • 3 Bosses
Boss
Boss
Connector
F-4-206
F-4-208
4-94
4
Disassembly/Assembly > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Delivery/Reverse Unit > Procedure
4 Disassembly/Assembly > External Auxiliary System > Removing the DC Controller PCB > Preparation
4-95
External Auxiliary System Removing the DC Controller PCB

■■Preparation before Replacement
Location
1) Backup of the Service Mode data.
(Lv.2) COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
After “ACTIVE” is displayed for approx 2 minutes, “OK!” is displayed.
If necessary, output the service mode setting values by P-PRINT before execution.
(Lv.1) COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> P-PRINT
2) After the above execution is completed, turn OFF the main power supply.
■■Preparation
[2] 1) Remove the Reader Controller Cover.(Refer to page 4-24)
[3] NOTE:
When the FAX Unit is being installed, perform the operation after remove the Fax Unit.
[1]
F-4-209
Adjustment during
No. Name Constitution Unit Reference
parts replacement
[1] DC Controller PCB Main Unit (Refer to page 4-95) (Refer to page 5-13)
[2] HVT PCB Main Unit (Refer to page 4-97) -
[3] Power Supply PCB Main Unit (Refer to page 4-99) -
T-4-35
4-95
4
Disassembly/Assembly > External Auxiliary System > Removing the DC Controller PCB > Preparation
4 Disassembly/Assembly > External Auxiliary System > Removing the DC Controller PCB > After Replacement
4-96
■■Procedure ■■After Replacement
1) Remove the DC Controller PCB 1) Upgrade of DC Controller PCB
• Disconnect all connectors on the Main Controller PCB. To ensure correct behavior, upgrade the firmware to the latest firmware combination.
• 6 Wire Saddles When SST is used to upgrade the version, the upgrade needs to be performed in simple
• 1 Reuse Band mode.
• 1 Positioning Protrusion When download menu (USB) is used to upgrade the version, select service mode >
• 4 Screws COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD, and then press [OK].
Select Root Menu (USB) > [1]: Select Version > [1]: Upgrade (Auto) to upgrade the version.
2) Restore of the Service Mode data.

(Lv.2) COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES
Positioning Protrusion
3) If uploading of backup data fails before replacement due to the damage to the DC
controller PCB, enter the values of service mode items recorded on the service label or
P-PRINT.
4) Turn OFF and then ON the main power switch.

(Turning OFF/ON the main power switch allows the values entered for the service mode
items to take effect.)
x6
x4
F-4-210
4-96
4
Disassembly/Assembly > External Auxiliary System > Removing the DC Controller PCB > After Replacement
4 Disassembly/Assembly > External Auxiliary System > Removing the HVT PCB > Procedure
4-97
Removing the HVT PCB 2) Remove the HVT PCB.
• 1 Locking support
■■Preparation • 3 Screws

3) Remove the Delivery Outer Cover. (Refer to page 4-28)
4) Remove the Left Cover. (Refer to page 4-27)
■■Procedure x2
1) Remove the HVT Unit.
• 1 Connector
• 3 Wire Saddles
• 1 Edge Saddle
• 2 Screws
Locking support
F-4-212
x4
x2
F-4-211
4-97
4
Disassembly/Assembly > External Auxiliary System > Removing the HVT PCB > Procedure
4 Disassembly/Assembly > External Auxiliary System > Removing the HVT PCB > Procedure
4-98
CAUTION: CAUTION:
Be sure to fit the 2 edges [B] of the plate of the HVT PCB into the 2 rails [A] on the host Be sure that the 7 contact points [A] of the HVT PCB are in contact with the 7 Contact
machine side when assembling. Springs [B] of the High Voltage Main Guide when assembling.
F-4-214
F-4-213
4-98
4
Disassembly/Assembly > External Auxiliary System > Removing the HVT PCB > Procedure
4 Disassembly/Assembly > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Power Supply PCB > Procedure
4-99
Removing the Power Supply PCB 2) Disconnect the Connector and release the harness from the Wire Saddle.
■■Preparation
3) Remove the Delivery Outer Cover. (Refer to page 4-28) Connector Wire Saddle
4) Remove the Left Cover. (Refer to page 4-27)
■■Procedure
1) Disconnect the Fixing Connector.
F-4-216
3) Remove the Power Supply PCB.
• 3 Screws
• 8 Connectors
x8
F-4-215
x3
F-4-217
4-99
4
Disassembly/Assembly > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Power Supply PCB > Procedure
5 Adjustment
■
■Overview
■
■When Replacing the Parts
■
■When Replacing the Parts (Controller System)
■
■Image Position Adjustment
5
Adjustment
5 Adjustment > Overview > Image Position Adjustment
5-2
Overview Item
Leading
Specification value
1-sided: 2.5 +/- 1.5 (mm)
Reference
Refer to page 5-14
Edge Margin 2-sided: 2.5 +/- 2.0 (mm)
Adjustment when replacing parts Adjustment
Feed direction
This section describes adjustment required in field service works when replacing parts.
The parts are classified by function into the following 2 blocks. 1-sided of copy paper: 2.5 +/- 1.5mm
2-sided of copy paper: 2.5 +/- 2.0mm
Parts Name Actions at Parts Replacement Reference Leading Edge
Original Exposure and Reader Copyboard Glass Refer to page of paper
Feed System 5-4
ADF Reading Glass Refer to page
5-5
CIS Unit Refer to page
5-5 0 2 456 8 101214161820
ADF ADF Unit Refer to page F-5-1
5-6
Laser Scanner Unit Laser Scanner Unit Refer to page Trailing 1-sided: 2.5 +/- 2.0 (mm) Refer to page 5-15
5-11 Edge Margin 2-sided: 2.5 +/- 2.0 (mm)
Controller System HDD Refer to page
Adjustment
5-12
Main Controller PCB Refer to page Feed direction
5-12
DC Controller PCB Refer to page
5-13 2018 161412 10 8 6 5 4 2 0
TPM PCB Refer to page
2-28
T-5-1
Image Position Adjustment Trailing Edge

of paper
This section describes remedies when adjusting the basic image position. 2.5 +/- 2.0mm
F-5-2
5-2
5
Adjustment > Overview > Image Position Adjustment
5 Adjustment > Overview > Image Position Adjustment
5-3
Item Specification value Reference Item Specification value Reference
Left Margin 1-sided: 2.5 +/- 1.5 (mm) Refer to page 5-15 Left Edge 1-sided: 2.5 +/- 1.5 (mm) Refer to page 5-17
Adjustment 2-sided: 2.5 +/- 2.0 (mm) Non-image 2-sided: 2.5 +/- 2.0 (mm)
Left Edge Width Left Edge
of paper Adjustment of image
1-sided of copy paper: 2.5 +/- 1.5mm 1-sided of copy paper: 2.5 +/- 1.5mm
2-sided of copy paper: 2.5 +/- 2.0mm 2-sided of copy paper: 2.5 +/- 2.0mm
0 0
2 2
4 4
5 5
6 6
8 8
10 10
F-5-3 F-5-5
Leading 1-sided: 2.5 +/- 1.5 (mm) Refer to page 5-16 Adjustment - Refer to page 5-17
Edge Non- 2-sided: 2.5 +/- 1.5 (mm) of the Image
image Width Position of the
Adjustment Feed direction ADF
T-5-2
2.5 +/- 1.5mm
Leading Edge
of image
0 2 456 8 101214161820
F-5-4
5-3
5
Adjustment > Overview > Image Position Adjustment
5 Adjustment > When Replacing the Parts > Original Exposure and Feed System (Reader) > Copyboard Glass
5-4
When Replacing the Parts (Lv.1) COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL3

Copyboard Glass)
Original Exposure and Feed System (Reader) 3-4) Place a sheet of paper that the user usually uses on the ADF, enter the following
servicemode.
■■Copyboard Glass (Lv.1) COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL4
<Procedure of Replacement> Read the white level (Color) in the ADF mode. (Check the transparency of the ADF
"Removing the Copyboard Glass"(page 4-39). Reading Glass.)
<Procedure after Replacement> NOTE:

1) Enter the value indicated on the platen glass as shown in the following service mode:
(Lv.1) COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-X/Y/Z (White level data entry of white plate)
CAUTION:
Be sure to make the white plate data adjustment before ADF white
level adjustment.
W-PLT-X W-PLT-Z
W-PLT-Y
F-5-6

Copyboard Glass)
servicemode.
Reading Glass.)
5-4
5
Adjustment > When Replacing the Parts > Original Exposure and Feed System (Reader) > Copyboard Glass
5 Adjustment > When Replacing the Parts > Original Exposure and Feed System (Reader) > CIS Unit
5-5
■■ADF Reading Glass ■■CIS Unit
<Procedure of Replacement> <Preparation before Replacement>
"Removing the ADF Reading Glass"(page 4-41). 1) Backup of the Service Mode data.
(Lv.2) COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP
<Procedure after Replacement>
1) Take the action stated below in the service mode. <Procedure of Replacement>
(Lv.1) COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1/2/3/4 (White level adj in book/ADF mode) "Removing the CIS Unit"(page 4-50).
following servicemode. <Procedure after Replacement>
(Lv.1) COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1 1. When uploading of backup data succeeds before replacement.
Read the white level (B&W) in the BOOK mode. (Check the transparency of the 1) Restoring the backup data
Copyboard Glass) (Lv.2) COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES
1-2) Place a sheet of paper that the user usually uses on the ADF, enter the following 2) After turn OFF/ON the main power switch, make a copy and check the copied image.
servicemode.
(Lv.1) COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL2 2. When uploading of backup data fails before replacement.
Read the white level (B&W) in the ADF mode. (Check the transparency of the ADF 1) Enter the value indicated on the platen glass as shown in the following service mode:
Reading Glass.) (Lv.1) COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-X/Y/Z (White level data entry of white plate)
following servicemode. CAUTION:
(Lv.1) COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL3 Be sure to make the white plate data adjustment before ADF white
Read the white level (Color) in the BOOK mode. (Check the transparency of the level adjustment.
Copyboard Glass)
servicemode.
W-PLT-X W-PLT-Z
Read the white level (Color) in the ADF mode. (Check the transparency of the ADF W-PLT-Y
Reading Glass.)
F-5-7
NOTE:
The result of the adjustment is reflected to COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFTAR-K/ 2) Write down the new numerical value in the service label.
(Lv.1) COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1/2/3/4 (White level adj in book/ADF
mode)
Copyboard Glass)
5-5
5
Adjustment > When Replacing the Parts > Original Exposure and Feed System (Reader) > CIS Unit
5 Adjustment > When Replacing the Parts > Original Exposure and Feed System (ADF) > ADF Unit
5-6
Original Exposure and Feed System (ADF)
(Lv.1) COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL2 ■■ADF Unit
Read the white level (B&W) in the ADF mode. (Check the transparency of the
<Procedure of Replacement>
ADF Reading Glass.)
"Removing the ADF Unit"(page 4-42).
<Prepare before Adjustment>
Prepare a test chart. A test chart is made when there is no test chart.
A test chart is drawn the rectangle that the end of 4 is smaller by 10 mm than a paper, and a
Copyboard Glass)
test chart is made in the form of A4 or LTR.
following servicemode. NOTE:
(Lv.1) COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL4 Write a character and a mark to know the direction of the copied image.
Read the white level (Color) in the ADF mode. (Check the transparency of the
ADF Reading Glass.)
10 mm
NOTE:
4) Take the action stated below in the service mode. 10 mm 10 mm

(Lv.1) COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> CCD-ADJ (Adjustment of CIS gain/offset of CIS)
4-1) Place 10 or more sheets of standard white paper (The whitest paper form
which a user is using except for the color paper.) on the Copyboard Glass.
4-2) Select this item and press OK key.
4-3) The auto-adj is performed for about 30 sec. <ACTIVE> is displayed on the 10 mm
LCD. F-5-8
4-4) <OK!> is displayed and the auto-adj is completed.

4-5) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
CAUTION:
When turning OFF/ON the main power switch is not carried out, E315-510 error (Device
timeout) occurs at the time as the copy.
NOTE:
The NG is indicated after about 70 sec.
The adjusted value reflect in COPIER> DISPLAY> CCD> OFST (BW1 to BW11 and
CL1 to CL11) and COPIER> DISPLAY> CCD> GAIN-BW/GAIN-CL.
5) Make a copy and check the copied image.
5-6
5
Adjustment > When Replacing the Parts > Original Exposure and Feed System (ADF) > ADF Unit
5-7
<Procedure after Replacement> 3) Loosen the 4 Fixing Screws of the Right Hinge, and then move the hinge to adjust the
squareness.
CAUTION:
Fixing Screws of the Right Hinge
When ADF was exchanged or removed from the leader, you must do all adjustment of
the following six items.
●● 1. Adjustment of the Degree of a Right Angle

2) Confirm the degree of a right angle of the image on the leading edge of the test chart and
the copied form.
Measure the dimension of A and B at the leading edge of the copied form.
When the amount of skew is not in the following standard, adjust it from the step 3).
• Standard Value: A - B = 0 +/- 1.5 mm
B F-5-10
4) After completion of the adjustment, tighten the 4 Fixing Screws of the Right Hinge you
loosened in step 3).
F-5-9
5-7
5
5-8
●● 2. Adjustment of the Image Position (Horizontal Scanning Direction) <Mechanical Adjustment>
1) Set a test chart on ADF, and give one sheet of copy. 1) Loosen the Adjusting Screw of the Original Pickup Tray.
2) Compare the horizontal registration of the test chart and the copy of the test chart. 2) Move the slide guide in front/rear with reference to the scale marks.
When the horizontal registration is not in the following standard, adjust it with a process of • When a copied image moves to the rear: Move the slide guide in the front.
<Mechanical Adjustment> or <Service Mode Adjustment>. • When a copied image moves to the front: Move the slide guide in the rear.
• Standard Value: within 10 +/- 2 mm
10 +/- 2mm
F-5-11
Adjusting Screw
F-5-12
3) After completion of the adjustment, tighten the Adjusting Screws you loosened in step 1).
5-8
5
5-9
<Service Mode Adjustment> ●● 3. Adjustment of the Image Position (Vertical Scanning Direction)
1) Select the item in the service mode. 1) Set a test chart on ADF, and give one sheet of copy.
(LV.1) COPIER> ADJUST> ADJ-XY> ADJ-Y-DF 2) Compare the leading edge registration of the test chart and the copy of the test chart.
2) Input value, and adjust an image. Carry out the following process when adjustment is necessary.
• When a copied image moves to the rear: Increase value 3) Select the item in the service mode.
• When a copied image moves to the front: Decrease value (LV.1) FEEDER> ADJUST> DOCST
• Adjustment unit: 0.1 mm 4) Input value, and adjust an image.
< When a copied image moves to the rear > < When a copied image moves to the front > • When a copied image moves to the trailing edge: Increase value
Copy of the test chart • When a copied image moves to the leading edge: Decrease value
Test chart Test chart • Adjustment unit: 0.1 mm
< When a copied image moves to < When a copied image moves to
the trailing edge > the leading edge >
Test chart Copy of the test chart

A
A Test chart
A A

F-5-13
F-5-14
CAUTION:
Confirm that the Degree of a Right Angle is correct after you finish this adjustment.
Adjust again from the Adjustment of the Degree of a Right Angle when the Degree of a
Right Angle is not correct.
5-9
5
5-10
●● 4. Fine Adjustment of Image Magnification (1-sided/Vertical Scanning ●● 5. Fine Adjustment of Image Magnification (2-sided/Vertical Scanning
Direction) Direction)
1) Set the image of the test chart upward in ADF, and give one sheet of copy. 1) Set the image of the test chart downward in ADF, and give one sheet of copy.
2) Compare the image length of the feed direction of the test chart and the copy of the test 2) Compare the image length of the feed direction of the test chart and the copy of the test
chart. chart.
Carry out the following process when adjustment is necessary. Carry out the following process when adjustment is necessary.
3) Select the item in the service mode. 3) Select the item in the service mode.
(LV.1) FEEDER> ADJUST> LA-SPEED (LV.1) FEEDER> ADJUST> LA-SPD2
4) Input value, and adjust an image. 4) Input value, and adjust an image.
• When a copied image is long: Decrease value (The feeding speed increases) • When a copied image is long: Decrease value (The feeding speed increases)
• When a copied image is short: Increase value (The feeding speed decreases) • When a copied image is short: Increase value (The feeding speed decreases)
• Adjustment unit: 0.1 % • Adjustment unit: 0.1 %
< When a copied image is long > < When a copied image is short > < When a copied image is long > < When a copied image is short >
Copy of the test chart Copy of the test chart

Test chart Copy of the test chart Test chart Copy of the test chart
Test chart Test chart
A A A A
Feed direction Feed direction Feed direction Feed direction

F-5-15 F-5-16
5) Write the new changed value in the service label. 5) Write the new changed value in the service label.
6) Exit the service mode. 6) Exit the service mode.
5-10
5
5 Adjustment > When Replacing the Parts > Original Exposure and Feed System (Laser Scanner Unit) > Laser Scanner Unit
5-11
●● 6. Adjustment the White Level for ADF Scanning Original Exposure and Feed System (Laser Scanner
Unit)
1-1) Place a sheet of paper that the user usually uses on the Copyboard Glass, enter the ■■Laser Scanner Unit
<Procedure of Replacement>
"Removing the Laser Scanner Unit"(page 4-66).
Copyboard Glass)
<Procedure after Replacement>
1) When replacing the laser unit, enter the values recorded on the label affixed to the laser
servicemode.
unit to be replaced for the following in the service mode:
Reading Glass.)
1-3) Place a sheet of paper that the user usually uses on the Copyboard Glass, enter the -10 0 147 136 93 16 117
Copyboard Glass) ＢＣＤＡＥＦＧ
1-4) Place a sheet of paper that the user usually uses on the ADF, enter the following F-5-17
servicemode. Trailing edge OFF adjustment for the laser:

(Lv.1) COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL4 A. (LV1) COPIER> ADJUST> LASER> PVE-OFST> 136
Read the white level (Color) in the ADF mode. (Check the transparency of the ADF Magnification between the lasers:
Reading Glass.) B. (LV1) COPIER> ADJUST> LASER> LDADJ1-K> -10
C. (LV1) COPIER> ADJUST> LASER> LDADJ2-K> 0
NOTE: D. (LV1) COPIER> ADJUST> LASER> LDADJ3-K> 147
The result of the adjustment is reflected to COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFTAR-K/ Phase difference between the lasers:
E. (LV1) COPIER> ADJUST> LASER> LDADJ4-K> 93
F. (LV1) COPIER> ADJUST> LASER> LDADJ5-K> 16
G. (LV1) COPIER> ADJUST> LASER> LDADJ6-K> 117

5-11
5
Adjustment > When Replacing the Parts > Original Exposure and Feed System (Laser Scanner Unit) > Laser Scanner Unit
5 Adjustment > When Replacing the Parts (Controller System) > Main Controller PCB
5-12
When Replacing the Parts (Controller System) Main Controller PCB

Before 1) Backup of the set/registered dataUse the Remote UI.
HDD Replacing Use the Remote UI: Management Settings > Data Management > Import/Export
Target data:
Before 1) Backup of the set/registered data • Address List
Replacing Use the Remote UI. • Forwarding Settings
Management Settings > Data Management > Import/Export 2) Printing the set/registered data
Target data: Use the service mode.
• Address List (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > USER-PRT
• Forwarding Settings List of the set/registered data which cannot be backed up is printed."
• Web Access Favorites Replacement Transferring the parts from old PCB to new PCB
2) Printing the set/registered data • Memory PCB
Use the service mode. • Flash PCB
(Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > USER-PRT • TPM PCB
List of the set/registered data which cannot be backed up is printed." Aftter Replacing 1) After installing the parts, turn ON the main power switch.
3) Use SST to upload Meapback.bin to the Flash PCB on the Main Controller. 2) Restoring the backup data
(When Meapback.bin cannot be uploaded, use another method. Refer to Backup Use the Remote UI.
Data.) Management Settings > Data Management > Import/Export
Aftter Replacing 1) HDD format 3) Resetting/registering the data
1-1) Start with the safe mode. (While pressing 2 and 8 keys simultaneously, While referring to the list of set/registered data which was printed before
turn ON the main power switch.) replacement, reset/register the data.
1-2) Use SST to format all partitions. 4) When the user generates and adds the encryption key, certificate and/or CA
2) Initializing the key, certificate and CA certificate certificate, request the user to generate them again.
(Lv.2) COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > CA-KEY Prohibited Do not transfer the following parts to another model (which has a different serial
3) Turning OFF and ON the main power switch Operation number).
4) Restoring the backup data If you fail to do so, the Main Body does not activate normally and this might cause
Use the Remote UI. to fail the restoration.
Management Settings > Data Management > Import/Export • Main Controller PCB
5) Restore the backup data. • Flash PCB
5-1) Use RUI: Management Settings > Data Management > Import/Export • TPM PCB
5-2) Download Meapback.bin using SST. • Memory PCB
6) Resetting/registering the data T-5-4
While referring to the list of set/registered data which was printed before
replacement, reset/register the data.
7) When the user generates and adds the encryption key, certificate and/or CA
certificate, request the user to generate them again.
Points to Note When using the HDD of the other machine (different serial number), be sure to
when Using the format the HDD after the installation. If the HDD is not formatted, the operation
HDD cannot be guaranteed.
T-5-3
5-12
5
Adjustment > When Replacing the Parts (Controller System) > Main Controller PCB
5 Adjustment > When Replacing the Parts (Controller System) > DC Controller PCB
5-13
DC Controller PCB
Procedure of
"Removing the DC Controller PCB"(page 4-95).
Replacement
Before 1) Backup of the Service Mode data.
Replacing (Lv.2) COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
After “ACTIVE” is displayed for approx 2 minutes, “OK!” is displayed.
If necessary, output the service mode setting values by P-PRINT before
execution.
(Lv.1) COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> P-PRINT
2) After the above execution is completed, turn OFF the main power supply.
Aftter 1) Upgrade of DC Controller PCB
Replacing To ensure correct behavior, upgrade the firmware to the latest firmware
combination.
• When SST is used to upgrade the version, the upgrade needs to be performed
in simple mode.
• When download menu (USB) is used to upgrade the version, select service
mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD, and then press [OK].
Select Root Menu (USB) > [1]: Select Version > [1]: Upgrade (Auto) to
upgrade the version.
2) Restore of the Service Mode data.
(Lv.2) COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES
3) If uploading of backup data fails before replacement due to the damage to the
DC Controller PCB, enter the values of service mode items recorded on the
service label or P-PRINT.
4) Turn OFF and then ON the main power switch.
(Turning OFF/ON the main power switch allows the values entered for the service
mode items to take effect.)
T-5-5
5-13
5
Adjustment > When Replacing the Parts (Controller System) > DC Controller PCB
5 Adjustment > Image Position Adjustment > Leading Edge Margin Adjustment > Service Mode Adjustment Method
5-14
Image Position Adjustment <Adjustment of regist start timing: 1/2 speed>

(Lv.1) COPIER> ADJUST> FEED-ADJ> RG-HF-SP
Copy 10 sheets from each pickup position to check that the image margin and non-image • Adjustment unit: 0.1 mm
area is within the standard. • Increase value: Leading Edge Margin becomes smaller.
• Each Cassette • Decrease value: Leading Edge Margin becomes larger.
• Multi-purpose Tray
<Adjustment of Leading Edge Margin>
If it is not within the standard, go through the following procedures to adjust it.
(Lv.1) COPIER> ADJUST> BLANK> BLANK-T
• Adjustment unit: 1 pixel (0.0423 mm)
CAUTION:
• Increase value: Leading Edge Margin becomes larger.
If changing the value of service mode item in this adjustment, enter the changed value • Decrease value: Leading Edge Margin becomes smaller.
in the service label.
<Adjustment of ADF image lead edge margin>
(Lv.1) FEEDER> ADJUST> DOCST
Leading Edge Margin Adjustment • Adjustment unit: 0.1 mm
• Increase value: Leading Edge Margin becomes smaller.
■■Standard • Decrease value: Leading Edge Margin becomes larger.
1-sided: 2.5 +/- 1.5 mm

2-sided: 2.5 +/- 2.0 mm
Feed direction

Leading Edge
of paper
0 2 456 8 101214161820
F-5-18
■■Service Mode Adjustment Method

<Adjustment of regist start timing: 1/1 speed>
(Lv.1) COPIER> ADJUST> FEED-ADJ> REGIST
• Adjustment unit: 0.1 mm
• Increase value: Leading Edge Margin becomes larger.
• Decrease value: Leading Edge Margin becomes smaller.
5-14
5
Adjustment > Image Position Adjustment > Leading Edge Margin Adjustment > Service Mode Adjustment Method
5 Adjustment > Image Position Adjustment > Left Margin Adjustment > Service Mode Adjustment Method (1-sided)
5-15
Trailing Edge Margin Adjustment Left Margin Adjustment
■■Standard ■■Standard
1-sided: 2.5 +/- 2.0 mm 1-sided: 2.5 +/- 1.5 mm
2-sided: 2.5 +/- 2.0 mm 2-sided: 2.5 +/- 2.0 mm
Left Edge
of paper
Feed direction
Feed direction

2018 161412 10 8 6 5 4 2 0 2-sided of copy paper: 2.5 +/- 2.0mm
0
Trailing Edge
of paper 2
2.5 +/- 2.0mm
4
F-5-19 5
6
8
<Adjustment of Trailing Edge Margin>
10
(Lv.1) COPIER> ADJUST> BLANK> BLANK-B
• Adjustment unit: 1 pixel (0.0423 mm)
F-5-20
• Increase value: Trailing Edge Margin becomes larger.
• Decrease value: Trailing Edge Margin becomes smaller.
■■Service Mode Adjustment Method (1-sided)
<Enter Cassette1 side register adjustment value>
(Lv.2) COPIER> ADJUST> MISC> C1-ADJ-Y
• Increase value: Left Margin becomes larger.
• Decrease value: Left Margin becomes smaller.
<Enter MP Tray side register adjustment value>

(Lv.2) COPIER> ADJUST> MISC> MF-ADJ-Y
5-15
5
Adjustment > Image Position Adjustment > Left Margin Adjustment > Service Mode Adjustment Method (1-sided)
5 Adjustment > Image Position Adjustment > Leading Edge Non-image Width Adjustment > Service Mode Adjustment Method
5-16
■■Service Mode Adjustment Method (2-sided) Leading Edge Non-image Width Adjustment
<Adjustment of the write start position of image in horizontal scanning direction: 2-sided>
■■Standard
(Lv.1) COPIER> ADJUST> FEED-ADJ> ADJ-REFE
• Adjustment unit: 0.1 mm 1-sided: 2.5 +/- 1.5 mm
• Increase value: Left Margin becomes larger. 2-sided: 2.5 +/- 1.5 mm
Feed direction
<Adjustment of the write start position of image in horizontal scanning direction: 2-sided of the
large paper (Bigger paper than LTR)> 2.5 +/- 1.5mm
(Lv.1) COPIER> ADJUST> FEED-ADJ> ADJ-RE-L

Leading Edge
• Adjustment unit: 0.1 mm of image
• Decrease value: Left Margin becomes smaller. 0 2 456 8 101214161820
F-5-21

<Adjustment of image position in book mode: vertical scanning direction>
(Lv.1) COPIER> ADJUST> ADJ-XY> ADJ-X
• Increase value: Leading Edge of image is moved to the Leading Edge direction.
• Decrease value: Leading Edge of image is moved to the Trailing Edge direction.
5-16
5
Adjustment > Image Position Adjustment > Leading Edge Non-image Width Adjustment > Service Mode Adjustment Method
5 Adjustment > Image Position Adjustment > Adjustment of the Image Position of the ADF
5-17
Left Edge Non-image Width Adjustment Adjustment of the Image Position of the ADF
■■Standard • Adjustment of the Degree of a Right Angle (Refer to page 5-7)
• Adjustment of the Image Position (Horizontal Scanning Direction) (Refer to page 5-8)
1-sided: 2.5 +/- 1.5 mm
• Adjustment of the Image Position (Vertical Scanning Direction) (Refer to page 5-9)
2-sided: 2.5 +/- 2.0 mm
• Fine Adjustment of Image Magnification (1-sided/Vertical Scanning Direction) (Refer to
Left Edge page 5-10)
of image • Fine Adjustment of Image Magnification (2-sided/Vertical Scanning Direction) (Refer to
Feed direction
page 5-10)
4
5
6
10
F-5-22

<Adjustment of image position in book mode: horizontal scanning direction>
(Lv.1) COPIER> ADJUST> ADJ-XY> ADJ-Y
• Increase value: Left Edge of image is moved to the Left Edge direction.
• Decrease value: Left Edge of image is moved to the Right Edge direction.
<Adjustment of image position in ADF mode: horizontal scanning direction>

(Lv.1) COPIER> ADJUST> ADJ-XY> ADJ-Y-DF
• Increase value: Left Edge of image is moved to the Left Edge direction.
• Decrease value: Left Edge of image is moved to the Right Edge direction.
5-17
5
Adjustment > Image Position Adjustment > Adjustment of the Image Position of the ADF
6 Troubleshooting
■
■Initial
■
■Test
Check
Print
■
■Troubleshooting Items
■
■Version Upgrade
■
■Controller Self Diagnosis
■
■Debug Log
6
Troubleshooting
6 Troubleshooting > Initial Check > List of Initial Check Items
6-2
Initial Check Item No. Check Items

1 Check for foreign particle such as paper lint.
Check
2 Check if paper dust is accumulated on the Cassette Pickup / Feed / Separation

Roller. Check for wear, scar, soiling or deformation.
List of Initial Check Items 3 Check for wear, scar, soiling or deformation on the Registration Roller/Paper
Pickup Path Roller.
Item No. Check Items Check Feed 4 Check for wear, scar, soiling or deformation on the Feed Guide.
1 The value of power voltage is +/- 10% of the specified voltage. 5 Check for an error such as folding at the leading edge/curl/ripple/moist of the
2 The machine is not in a high-temperature/high-humidity place (near the paper.
water tap, water boiler, or humidifier), a cold place, a place near fire, or a 6 Check if the symptom improves by using the Canon-recommended paper/
dusty place. transparency film.
Site 3 The machine is not in a place that generates ammonia gas 1 Check for load in the drive system.
environment Drive
4 The machine is not in a place of direct sunlight. 2 Check for wear or crack of the gear.
5 The machine is installed in a well-ventilated place where the machine 1 Check that the Cassette is correctly set. Check that the paper size is correctly
stands horizontally. specified. Check that the same symptom does not occur when replacing with a
6 The power plug of the machine is connected to the output normal cassette.
Cassette 2 Check that the Cassette Lifting Plate moves smoothly. Check for deformation.
1 The Canon-recommended paper is used.
Checking the
2 The paper is not moistened. Set paper by taking it out from a new package 3 Check hat the Side Guide Plate/Trailing Edge Guide Plate in the Cassette is
paper
to output. correctly set.
1 Paper that is within the specified volume is correctly set in the Cassette 1 Check for operation of the Sensor/Clutch/Motor/Solenoid. Check for poor
Checking the and Multi-purpose Tray. contact of the connector.
paper setting 2 When using transparency film, the transparency is set in the correct (Check the power supply and signal transmission path with general circuit
direction in the Multi-purpose Tray. diagram)
Checking the 1 Check the list of consumable parts for periodical replacement and 2 Check for a caught wire in wiring/loosened screw.
General
consumable locations for cleaning, and replace parts that reach the estimated life. 3 Check that the External Covers are all attached.
items
parts 4 Check that the Main Power Switch/Control Panel Power Switch is turned ON.
Checking the 2 Check the list of consumable parts for periodical replacement and
5 Check that the power cables/signal cables are correctly routed to the options.
periodical locations for cleaning, and execute maintenance work for the parts that
servicing items reach the maintenance timing. 6 Check for blowout of a fuse on the PCBs.
T-6-1
7 Check that the user uses the machine correctly
1 Do not move a machine that has been stone-cold in a warehouse into a warm
Checking the Units/Check Items of Function System
room on all on a sudden. (This generates condensation inside the machine,
Do not move a machine that has been stone-cold in a warehouse into a warm room on all on a and causes various types of troubles)
sudden. (This generates condensation inside the machine, and causes various types of troubles) • E100 error by condensation of the BD Sensor
Item No. Check Items Check • Light image density by condensation of the Contact Image Sensor and
1 Check for scar, soiling or foreign particle in the Scanner System (CIS/ White Copyboard Glass.
Plate/ Copyboard Glass). Others • Failure in paper feeding by condensation of the Pickup/Feed Guide
2 Check that the CIS Unit moves smoothly. Check for soiling on the rail. 2 In the case of the symptom described above, be sure to dry wipe the units of
Reader
3 Check for flicker with CIS. the pickup/feed system
Condensation tends to occur when unpacking a Toner Bottle/Drum Unit that
4 Check for condensation in the Scanner System.
has been kept in a cold place and brought into a warm room. To prevent
1 The Drum Unit/Toner Bottle is securely installed.
Image condensation, be sure to make the part sufficiency accustomed to the room
2 Check for scar or soiling on the Photosensitive Drum. temperature (leave it for 1 to 2 hours) before unpacking.
Formation
3 Check for wear, scar, soiling or deformation on the Transfer Roller. T-6-2
1 Check for wear, scar, soiling or deformation on the Fixing Film/Pressure Roller.
Fixing 2 Check if the Fixing Main Thermistor is open circuit.
3 Check for electrical continuity of the Thermoswitch
6-2
6
Troubleshooting > Initial Check > List of Initial Check Items
6 Troubleshooting > Test Print > Steps to Select a Test Print Type
6-3
Test Print
Overview
The following test print types are available with this machine, and you can check for failure of an image with 'Yes' described in the check items in the table below.
When no failure is found in the test print in normal output mode, it can be caused in PDL input or Reader.
Steps to Select a Test Print Type

Image check item
Right angle
PG
Pattern Transfer Black White Uneven Uneven accuracy Side Magnification
TYPE Gradation Fogging Shock
failure line line pitch density Straight line registration ratio
accuracy
0 Normal copy/print - - - - - - - - - - -
1 Grid - - - - - - - Yes Yes - Yes
2 17 gradations Tbic rank 2 Yes - Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes - - - -
3 17 gradations 600dpi (134-line screen or 141-line screen) Yes - Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes - - - -
4 Solid white - Yes - Yes - - - - - - -
5 Halftone (density: 80H, Tbic rank 2, without image correction) - Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes - - Yes -
Halftone (density: 80H, 134-line screen or 141-line screen, without
6 - Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes - - Yes -
image correction)
7 Solid black - Yes Yes - Yes Yes Yes - - - -
8 Horizontal line (4 dots, 27 spaces) - - - - - - - Yes - - -
11 Halftone (density: 60H, Tbic rank 2, without image correction) - Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes - Yes Yes -
image correction)
13 Halftone (density: 30H, Tbic rank 2, without image correction) - Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes - - Yes -
image correction)
15 to 50 For development - - - - - - - - - - -
T-6-3
Operation Procedure
1) Select COPIER> TEST> PG> TYPE.
2) Select 1-sided (0) or 2-sided (1). : COPIER> TEST> PG> 2-SIDE
3) Enter the number of sheets to output. : COPIER> TEST> PG> PG-QTY
4) Select a pickup cassette and press the Start key. : COPIER> TEST> PG> PG-PICK
1: Cassette1, 2: Cassette2 (OP), 3: Cassette3 (OP), 4: Cassette4 (OP), 5: Multi-purpose Tray
5) The machine outputs the test pattern.
6-3
6
Troubleshooting > Test Print > Steps to Select a Test Print Type
6 Troubleshooting > Test Print > How to View the Test Print > 17 gradations (TYPE = 2/3)
6-4
How to View the Test Print ■■17 gradations (TYPE = 2/3)
■■Grid (TYPE = 1)
F-6-2
Check item Check method Assumed cause

F-6-1 Check whether gradation in density is Drum failure, laser exposure system failure
Gradation
Check item Check method Assumed cause made appropriately. or developing system failure is considered.
Right angle Check the evenness of density. Check
Check whether lines in the horizontal/ Transfer Transfer system failure or transfer roller
whether uneven image or foggy image
accuracy/ vertical scanning directions are Feed system failure or Laser Scanner Unit failure failure is considered.
appears.
Straight line paralleled to the paper and these lines failure is considered.
Laser light path failure, developing system
accuracy are at right angles to one another. Check whether black lines appear on
Black line failure, cleaning (drum) failure or transfer
the image.
Floor at the installation site is extremely roller failure is considered.
Side
Check the left margin. distorted, or the feed system failure is Check whether white lines appear on
registration considered. White line Developing system failure is considered.
the image.
Check whether the grid is printed at Roller’s feed system failure or laser Check whether lines appear on the Drum failure, developing system failure,
Magnification
9.99mm intervals. (Check the image on exposure system failure (drum, Laser Uneven pitch image in the horizontal scanning laser exposure system failure or drive-
ratio the second side at duplex printing.) Scanner) is considered. direction. related failure is considered.
T-6-4 Uneven Check the density difference between Drum failure or developing system failure is
density the front and rear sides. considered.
T-6-5
6-4
6
Troubleshooting > Test Print > How to View the Test Print > 17 gradations (TYPE = 2/3)
6 Troubleshooting > Test Print > How to View the Test Print > Halftone (TYPE = 5/6/11/12/13/14)
6-5
■■Solid white (TYPE = 4) ■■Halftone (TYPE = 5/6/11/12/13/14)
F-6-3 F-6-4
Check item Check method Assumed cause Check item Check method Assumed cause
Check whether foggy image appears in Drum failure, laser exposure system failure Check whether foggy image appears in Drum failure, laser exposure system failure
Fogging Fogging
the blank area. or developing system failure is considered. the blank area. or developing system failure is considered.
Laser light path failure, developing system Check the evenness of halftone
Check whether black lines appear on Transfer Transfer system failure or transfer roller
Black line failure, cleaning (drum) failure or transfer density. Check whether uneven image
the image. failure failure is considered.
roller failure is considered. or foggy image appears.
T-6-6 Laser light path failure, grid failure,
Check whether black lines appear on
Black line developing system failure, cleaning (drum)
the image.
failure or transfer roller failure is considered.
Check whether white lines appear on
White line Developing system failure is considered.
the image.
Check whether lines appear on the Drum failure, developing system failure,
Uneven pitch image in the horizontal scanning laser exposure system failure or drive-
direction. related failure is considered.
Uneven Check the density difference between Drum failure or developing system failure is
Floor at the installation site is extremely
Side
Check the left margin. distorted, or the feed system failure is
registration considered.
Roller’s feed system failure or laser
Check whether horizontal lines appear
Shock exposure system failure (drum, Laser
on the image.
Scanner) is considered.
T-6-7
6-5
6
Troubleshooting > Test Print > How to View the Test Print > Halftone (TYPE = 5/6/11/12/13/14)
6 Troubleshooting > Test Print > How to View the Test Print > Horizontal line (TYPE = 8/9/10)
6-6
■■Solid black (TYPE = 7) ■■Horizontal line (TYPE = 8/9/10)
F-6-5 F-6-6
Check item Check method Assumed cause Check item Check method Assumed cause
Check whether foggy image appears in Drum failure, laser exposure system failure Right angle Check whether lines in the horizontal/
Fogging
the blank area. or developing system failure is considered. accuracy/ vertical scanning directions are Feed system failure or Laser Scanner Unit
Check the evenness of density. Check Straight line paralleled to the paper and these lines failure is considered.
Transfer
whether uneven image or foggy image Transfer system failure is considered. are at right angles to one another.
failure accuracy
appears.
T-6-9
Check whether white lines appear on
White line Developing system failure is considered.
the image.
Check whether lines appear on the Drum failure, developing system failure,
Uneven pitch image in the horizontal scanning laser exposure system failure or drive-
direction. related failure is considered.
Uneven Check the density difference between Drum failure or developing system failure is
T-6-8
6-6
6
Troubleshooting > Test Print > How to View the Test Print > Horizontal line (TYPE = 8/9/10)
6 Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting Items > Image Failure > Toner soiling at the back side of paper
6-7
Troubleshooting Items [Cause]

Fixing Assembly: Toner on the paper comes off and adheres to the Pressure Roller, and then
the toner adheres to the back side of the paper.
List of Troubleshooting Items Transfer Roller: Toner remains on the Drum that has stopped at the time of paper jam,
and then the residual toner on the Drum adheres to the Transfer Roller during a recovery
Category Item Description Reference
operation.
Image Failure Soiling Toner soiling at the back side of paper Refer to page 6-7
Soiling at the leading/trailing edge of paper Refer to page 6-8
Toner bleed/white Poor transfer of the image, hollow character Refer to page 6-8
[Condition]
spot Image smear/toner bleed/condensation Refer to page 6-9 Fixing Assembly: Under conditions that causes poor fixing performance, such as low
Operation Paper jam Large curl of paper Refer to page 6-9 temperature environment, or when feeding a large number of sheets of halftone image. Or
failure 2
Jam of thin paper (63g/cm or lighter) Refer to page the Fixing Unit comes to the end of its life for replacement.
6-10 Transfer Roller: When a paper jam occurs. Or the Transfer Roller comes to the end of its life
Jam of paper with solid image when the leading Refer to page 6-9
for replacement
edge margin is small (1 to 4mm)
Failure in setting The toner bottle set lever cannot be operated Refer to page
or is hard to operate. 6-10 [Field Remedy]
T-6-10
Fixing assembly: Service mode(Lv.2)> COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEANING> FIX-CLN> OK
Transfer Roller: Service mode(Lv.2)> COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEANING> TR-CLN> OK
Image Failure
■■Toner soiling at the back side of paper
F-6-7
[Location]
Fixing Assembly (circumference of Pressure Roller: 94mm)
Transfer Roller (roller circumference: 50mm)
6-7
6
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting Items > Image Failure > Toner soiling at the back side of paper
6 Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting Items > Image Failure > Poor transfer of the image, hollow character
6-8
■■Soiling at the leading/trailing edge of paper ■■Poor transfer of the image, hollow character
F-6-9
F-6-8 F-6-10
[Location] [Location]
Pre-transfer Guide, Transfer Roller (roller circumference: 50mm)
Fixing Inlet Guide
[Cause]
[Cause] • Because of insufficient transfer output due to highly-resistive paper caused by reduced
• Pre-transfer Guide: The leading edge or trailing edge of paper touches the toner adhered to moisture content in paper by having the paper left untouched in a low humidity environment
the Pre-transfer Upper Guide. • Because of insufficient transfer output due to highly-resistive paper caused by increased
• Fixing Inlet Guide: The leading edge or trailing edge of paper touches the toner adhered to moisture content in paper by having the paper left untouched in a high humidity
the Fixing Inlet Upper Guide. environment
[Condition]
[Condition] • Paper left untouched in a low humidity environment
When a high print chart, such as halftone or black, is continuously fed. • Paper left untouched in a high humidity environment
[Field Remedy] [Field Remedy]

Clean the toner-adhered Guide with lint-free paper. • Service mode (Lv.2)> COPIER> OPTION> IMG-TR> TROPT-SW> -2 to 1
-2: Transfer output voltage moreover decreases.
-1: Transfer output voltage decreases.
0: OFF
1: Transfer output voltage increases.
6-8
6
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting Items > Image Failure > Poor transfer of the image, hollow character
6 Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting Items > Image Failure > Paper jam in solid image when the leading edge margin is small (1 to 4mm)
6-9
■■Image smear/toner bleed/condensation ■■Large curl of paper
[Location]
Fixing Assembly
[Cause]
Excess heat from fixing changes moisture content between the front and back of paper, which
causes large curl.
[Condition]
Paper left untouched in a high humidity environment
[Field Remedy]
F-6-11 • Service mode (Lv.2)> COPIER> OPTION> IMG-FIX> TMP-TBLC> 0 to 3
[Location] 0: Auto
Photosensitive Drum (circumference:94mm) 1: OFF
2: N1 mode with plain paper 1/2 (Target temperature becomes low.)
[Cause] 3: N3 mode with plain paper 1/2 (Target temperature becomes moreover low.)
Discharge products generated from the Charging Roller adhere to the Drum, attract water
molecules and cause low resistance, which loses the ability to create the desired latent
■■Paper jam in solid image when the leading edge margin is small
image, resulting in bleed text image.
(1 to 4mm)
[Condition]
[Location]
The first operation in the day under a high temperature and high humidity environment
Fixing Assembly
[Field Remedy]
[Cause]
• Service mode (Lv.2)> COPIER> OPTION> ENV-SET> IMG-BLD1> 0 to 3
When handling a solid image with small leading edge margin (1 to 4mm), it causes poor
0: OFF
paper separation from the Fixing Film and paper jam can occur by separation failure.
1: Extend warm-up rotation for 60 seconds
2: Extend for 120 seconds
[Condition]
3: Extend for 240 seconds
Paper left untouched in a high humidity environment, solid image with small leading edge
• When "1-3" under "Service mode(Lv.2)> COPIER> OPTION> ENV-SET> IMG-BLD1" are
margin
set, the item is displayed in the user mode. Only setting value "2" can work in the user.
[Settings/Registration]> [Adjustment/Maintenance]> [Clean Drum]> [Start]
[Field Remedy]
• Install an option Drum Heater
• Service mode (Lv.2)> COPIER> OPTION> FEED-SW> SP-SW> 0 to 2
0: OFF
1/2: Separation priority mode
• Or Service mode (Lv.2)> COPIER> OPTION> IMG-FIX> TMP-TBLC> 0 to 3
0: Auto
6-9
6
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting Items > Image Failure > Paper jam in solid image when the leading edge margin is small (1 to 4mm)
6 Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting Items > Image Failure > The toner bottle set lever cannot be operated or is hard to operate.
6-10
1: OFF specified range
2: N1 mode with plain paper 1/2 (Target temperature becomes low.) • When repeatedly setting a bottle that contains toner in an undesirable manner
3: N3 mode with plain paper 1/2 (Target temperature becomes moreover low.)
* Selecting "SP-SW > 1/2" or "TMP-TBLC > 3" makes a wider leading edge margin and [Field Remedy]
avoids paper jam by separation failure. • Once the toner bottle set lever rotates by approximately 45 degrees, pulling the toner bottle
* Selecting "TMP-TBLC > 2/3" also improves paper curl; however, it reduces productivity while rotating the set-on lever can easily set the toner bottle.
• Operate the lever after the toner bottle is securely pushed into the rear.
■■Jam with thin paper (63g/m2 or lighter)
[Location]
Photosensitive Drum, Fixing Assembly
[Cause]
Separation performance drops due to weak rigidity of paper, which causes paper jam at the
Cleaner Assembly or Fixing Assembly by separation failure.
[Condition]
When using thin paper lighter than 64g/m2
[Field Remedy]
• Service mode (Lv.1)> COPIER> OPTION> IMG-FIX> TMP-TBL5> 0 to 2
0: OFF
1: thin paper mode
2: S-thin paper mode
*When using 52g/m2 paper, "2" must be selected.
■■The toner bottle set lever cannot be operated or is hard to

operate.
[Location]
Toner bottle set lever
[Cause]
• When sealing force of the Toner Bottle Cap is large although it is within the specified range,
the lever operation force to open/close the cap can be large.
• The toner bottle has not been fully pushed into the rear to hear a sound.
[Condition]
• When opening a new toner bottle cap that has large sealing force although it is within the
6-10
6
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting Items > Image Failure > The toner bottle set lever cannot be operated or is hard to operate.
6 Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Overview > Overview of Version Upgrade
6-11
Version Upgrade
Overview
■■Overview of Version Upgrade
The system software version is upgraded in 2 steps, downloading and writing the new version of the system software.
●● Downloading System Software

This machine supports the following 3 downloading methods.
1.Download via the service support tool (hereinafter referred to as “SST”)
Connect the machine to the PC by the cross cable to download the system software using SST installed in the PC.
2.Download using the USB memory storage device
Insert the USB memory storage device to the slot of the machine and download the system software stored in the device.
3.Download via Contents Delivery System (hereinafter referred to as “CDS”)
Download the system software directly to the machine from CDS via Internet.
folder SST Host Machine

System Software System Software
Download mode Write the
system software
Normal mode
/(Safe mode) Restart
Copy the
System Software Automatically restarted
USB menu
USB memory
storage device Activate the machine with the
System Software new system software version
Temporary Memory Space
Done
CDS
System Software Updater
F-6-12
6-11
6
Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Overview > Overview of Version Upgrade
6 Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Overview > System Software Configuration
6-12
■■Download mode
When upgrading the version using SST or USB memory storage device, it is necessary to enter download mode.
●● Starting the download mode

Enter download mode by selecting Copier > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD in service mode (recommended).
Press and hold 2 and 8 keys simultaneously on the numeric keypad, and turn ON the power switch.
The above operation makes this machine to be in static IP address automatically and recovers to enable the download in the same way as before.
■■Writing System Software

The system software downloaded in either of the abovementioned methods is stored in the temporary storage space of the FLASH PCB.
After the system software is successfully downloaded and this machine is restarted, writing process to the system area of the FLASH PCB is started.
When the main power switch of this machine is turned OFF during the writing process, it may render the machine unable to start.
This machine supports the remote version upgrade via CDS. When upgrading the system software via CDS, a warning message is shown on the control panel to alert the user not to turn OFF the
power switch.
When the system software is successfully written, the machine is automatically restarted with the downloaded system software.
If any error occurs during the writing process, the machine is restarted with the previous firmware (the version before upgrade). Therefore, after version upgrade, be sure to check in service mode by
following COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION if version upgrade has been properly completed.
■■System Software Configuration

The table below shows the system software configuration for this machine.
Software to be upgraded Display on SST How to upgrade versions Remarks
Registered name of product Name of system software SST USB memory CDS
Host Machine SafeCont iA500 SYSTEM yes yes yes
StdCont yes yes yes
Language Module LANGUAGE yes yes yes
Printer Controller DCON yes yes yes
FAX Board Boot Program G3CCB yes yes yes Super G3 FAX Board-AM1/Super G3 2nd Line FAX
Board-AM1
FAX Board Main Program G3CCM yes yes yes Super G3 FAX Board-AM1/Super G3 2nd Line FAX
Board-AM1
Finisher Finisher Controller FIN_R1 FIN_CON yes yes yes Staple Finisher-R1
Cassette Cassette Module Controller CST_AA1 CST_CON yes yes yes Cassette Module-AA1
The finisher and cassette of this machine support version upgrade via the host machine in any of the abovementioned methods, i.e., via SST, USB memory storage device or CDS. T-6-11
6-12
6
Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Overview > System Software Configuration
6 Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Overview
6-13
■■Note on download process Version Upgrade via SST
CAUTION: Never turn OFF the power during the download/ writing process
■■Overview
Turning OFF the power during the download/ writing process of the system software The system software can be downloaded via SST in either of the two modes below.
may cause a failure of machine startup at power-on. • Assist mode (recommended)
When the machine fails to be started after turning the power ON, be sure to start in safe • Single mode
mode (by pressing 2 and 8 keys simultaneously on the numeric keypad).
The assist mode has the following features:
• Automatically identities the connecting model
• Automatically searches the new version of the system software for the connecting model
CAUTION: Note on version upgrade completion • Automatically downloads the system software in the combination of the versions, which the
Even if the version upgrade is failed, the machine is properly restarted with the previous operation has been checked.
version; therefore, be sure to execute the following after completion of version upgrade
to see if version upgrade has been properly completed This machine consists of multiple system software that mutually interacts during operation;
COPIER > DISPLAY >VERSION therefore, it is necessary to download all the system software in the combination of the
versions, which the operation has been checked. Basically, use the assist mode to download
the system software of this machine.
NOTE:
With the previous models, the error code of E753-0001 occurs when downloading the
NOTE:
system software for the option that is not installed. With this machine, however, no error
Use the single mode only in the following cases:
occurs even if downloading the system software for the option that is not installed.
• When downloading a part of system software such as the DCON or an option.
• When uploading/ downloading the backup data.
6-13
6
Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Overview
6 Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Registering System Software
6-14
●● Downloading System Software ■■Registering System Software
The system software is stored in the temporary storage space of the FLASH PCB immediately
●● System file storage folder to SST
after downloading from the PC. When this machine is restarted after the download process,
Register the system software stored in the system file storage folder to SST.
the system software is written in the system area of the FLASH PCB and the data in the
temporary storage space is deleted.
NOTE:
This machine is automatically restarted after the writing process is completed. When the When the system software has been compressed, decompress the compression file
writing process is successfully completed, the machine is restarted with the new version of and then register the file to SST.
the system software. When an error occurs, the machine restarted with previous version of
the system software.
Preparation
1) Download the system software Requirements:
-
[
[
- - Download Mode - - -
iR2270i-JPjaxxxx-MN.dsh ] - - - - - - - - - - Complete
iR2270iM-JPjaxxxx-1F77-MN.PRG ] - - - - Complete
• PC with SST Ver.4.73 or later installed
[ iR2270iM-ZZjaxxxx-49AD.PRG ] - - - - - - - Complete
• The system software for this machine

[ iR2270iW-JPjaxxxx-5C16-MN.PRG ] - - - - Complete
[ iR2270iW-ZZjaxxxx-A825.PRG ] - - - - - - - Complete
[ iR2270iF-JPjaxxxx-DE96-ICC.PRG ] - - - - Complete
[ iR2270iG-JPjaxxxx-EC30-ICC.PRG ] - - - - Complete
Steps to register the system software

1) Start the PC.
FLASH 2) Start SST.
Temporary 3) Click the “Register System Software” button.
System memory space
Software
System
Software
System
memory area
2) Automatically restarted
3) The system software is written

<<<<< download shell >>>>>
[ SYSTEM JPja-m ] - - - - Upgrading complete
[ SYSTEM ZZ ] - - - - - - - Upgrading complete
[ SYSTEM JPja-w ] - - - - Upgrading complete
[ FONT F ] - - - - - - - - - - Upgrading complete
[ FONT G ] - - - - - - - - - - Upgrading complete
+++ Switch OFF the power then ON. +++
FLASH
Temporary F-6-14
memory space
4) Automatically
主電源スイッチOFF/ON restarted
System
memory area
System 5) Start with the new version.
Software
F-6-13
6-14
6
Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Registering System Software
6 Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Connection
6-15
4) Select the folder containing the system software and click the “Search” button. ■■Connection
The following IP address is automatically assigned for this machine at startup in download
mode.
• IP address: 172.16.1.100
• Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
When the PC with SST installed is connected to this machine, change the PC network
address as follows:
• IP address: 172.16.1.160
• Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
• Default gateway: arbitrary
CAUTION:
While the PC is connected to the network, changing to the abovementioned settings
F-6-15
may cause network failures due to an IP address conflict, etc. Ensure that the PC is
NOTE: disconnected from the network when you change the PC network settings. Alternatively
“XXXX” in the figure describes the version of system software. use the cross cable to connect to this machine.
5) A list of system software in the folder is displayed.

Preparation
Deselect the checkbox of unnecessary folder(s) and/or system software and click the
Requirements
“Register” button.
• PC with SST Ver.4.73 or later installed and the system software for this machine is
registered.
6) Click the “OK” button after the message telling completion of system software registration
• Cross cable
is displayed.
10Base-T: Category 3 or 5
100Base-T: Category 5
1000Base-T: Enhanced Category 5 (CAT5e) or later
CAUTION:
Disconnect USB memory storage devices if connected.
This machine disables the communication to SST if any USB memory storage device is
recognized. SST and the USB memory storage device cannot be used concurrently.
F-6-16
6-15
6
Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Connection
6 Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Downloading System Software (Assist mode)
6-16
Procedure ■■Downloading System Software (Assist mode)
1) Connect this machine and the PC with SST installed with the cross cable.
1) Start this machine and enter download mode. (COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM >
2) Turn ON the main power switch of this machine.
DOWNLOAD)
3) Enter service mode to start the machine in download mode.
2) Connect the PC to this machine and start SST.
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD; and press [OK].
3) Click the “Start Assist Mode” button.
Skip this step when starting SST in assist mode.
4) Check the IP address of the PC.
Go to Start menu to select the following: Program > Accessory > Command Prompt.
Type IPCONFIG and press the [Return] key to see the network settings of the PC.
If any discrepancies from the description in the figure below are found, change the network
settings of the PC.
F-6-18
If newer combination of the system software is stored in SST, the new combination is
automatically selected.
NOTE:
If only the existing system software combination is stored, none of them are selected.
Any versions of the existing system software can be downloaded by manual selection.
F-6-17
CAUTION:
The network settings cannot be shown with IPCONFIG if the PC is disconnected from
the network. To check the settings, ensure that this machine is turned ON, and connect
the PC and this machine with the cross cable.
6-16
6
Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Downloading System Software (Assist mode)
6 Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Downloading System Software (Assist mode)
6-17
4) Click the “Start” button. 5) Click the “Next” button.
F-6-19 F-6-20
Writing process is started when download is completed. 6) Disconnect the cross cable from the machine.
The machine is restarted twice during the writing process (at completion of writing processes 7) Enter service mode to check the version of the system software.
other than SafeCont and at completion of writing process of SafeCont). 8) Click the “OK” button.
Upon completion of the writing process, the main menu is displayed. The main menu is displayed.
NOTE: Download confirmation modes NOTE:

Download is confirmed in any of the following 2 modes: When an error occurs during version upgrade, the machine is normally started with the
Downloading of the difference only: “Skip the existing versions and confirm whether to previous version of the system software (the version before the upgrade). After version
download the downgraded versions” upgrade, be sure to check if the version of the system software is changed to the
Downloading of the system software in the version that is not installed in the machine: version you downloaded.
“Confirm whether to download the existing versions/ downgraded versions”
Download is not executed when the target software is in the same version.
Overwrite all versions
Regardless of version upgrade or downgrade, all versions of the system software are
downloaded without the confirmation message.
By default, “Skip the existing versions and confirm whether to download the
downgraded versions” is selected.
6-17
6
Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Downloading System Software (Assist mode)
6 Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Downloading System Software (in single mode)
6-18
■■Downloading System Software (in single mode) NOTE:
The following is the sample steps to download the DCON (the other components of the The following device information is shown at the right top of SST screen.
• IP address
system software can be downloaded similarly) • Model name
1) Start the machine in download mode. • Download mode
2) Connect the PC to this machine and start SST.
3) Select the model to be connected and “Single”, check the network settings. Click the “Start”
button.
F-6-22
4) Select the DCON version to be downloaded and click the “Start” button.
Multiple files of system software can be selected in this step. Selecting SYSTEM
F-6-21
automatically selects the language software that supports the selected system.
F-6-23
6-18
6
Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Downloading System Software (in single mode)
6 Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Formatting HDD
6-19
NOTE: Download confirmation modes

■■Formatting HDD
Download is confirmed in any of the following 2 modes:
• Downloading of the difference only: “Skip the existing versions and confirm whether to
●● Overview
download the downgraded versions” Only HDD formatting is available on this machine. HDD formatting can be executed in the
• Overwrite all versions following cases:
Regardless of version upgrade or downgrade, all versions of the system software are
• When installing the HDD from other machine installed
downloaded without the confirmation message.
• When the HDD seems to be faulty and it is highly possible to solve the problem by
“Skip the existing versions and confirm whether to download the downgraded versions” formatting.
can be selected when the checkbox for SYSTEM is selected. There is no choice but to Executing Format ALL on the machine in use deletes all the user data in the HDD as well
select “Overwrite all versions” when the checkbox for SYSTEM is not selected.
as the MEAP application; therefore, be sure to gain agreement with the user.
For normal version update, there is no need to format the HDD.

NOTE: Checking execution status for download
Once download is started, the process up to the writing process is automatically HDD can be formatted only in single mode.
executed. You cannot interrupt or add the process in the middle of the operation. The When the HDD format is initiated, the formatting is executed at next start-up. In such cases,
following confirmation message is displayed when downloading is executed.
startup time will take longer than normal.
F-6-24
5) When download is completed, click the “OK” button.

Return to the main menu screen.
This machine is automatically restarted.
The downloaded system software is written on the FLASH PCB.
6) Enter service mode to check the version.
6-19
6
Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Formatting HDD
6 Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Formatting HDD
6-20
●● Steps of Formatting 5) Click the “Execute Format” button.
1) Enter download mode.
2) Connect the PC to the machine and start SST.
3) Select the model to be connected and “Single”. Check the network settings and click the
“Start” button.
F-6-27
HDD is formatted at next startup.
The startup will take longer than normal for the HDD format.
F-6-25
4) Click the “Format HDD” button.
Format HDD
F-6-26
6-20
6
Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Formatting HDD
6 Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Backup
6-21
■■Backup ●● Steps to Upload Data
●● Overview CAUTION:
When replacing the Controller PCB, the data stored in the PCB can be temporary saved and
Do not select Sublog.bin
migrated to the new PCB by using the backup function.
The backup data can be downloaded only on the machine from which the data was
uploaded.
• Backup via SST
Backup data File name to be downloaded/ uploaded
Flash data Sraming.bin (available to upload/ download)
MEAP application MeapBack.bin (available to upload/ download)
For R&D use Sublog.bin (Do not select this file)
T-6-12
• Although backup of SramImg.bin can be executed with SST, the file is actually saved
iR ADVANCE 400/500 Series
Service PC
in the FLASH PCB.
• MeapBack is the MEAP application and its data stored in the FLASH/HDD.
SST Main controller PCB
iR ----
(MeapBack is saved in the FLASH PCB for a FLASH (memory) model while it is saved Upload/Download
in the HDD for a HDD model) System
• Backup via service mode MeapBack.bin

FLASH
Backup data Service mode
Backup of DC Controller COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM DSRAMBUP (backup)
PCB COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM DSRAMRES (restoration) MeapBack.bin
• Data is saved in the FLASH PCB. T-6-13

SramImg.bin
NOTE:
Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, backup the data in service mode. The
backup data can be restored in service mode after replacing the DC Controller PCB. HDD
This enables to maintain the setting data including service mode stored in the old DC
Controller PCB.
MeapBack.bin
F-6-28
Listed below are the sample steps to upload MeapBack.
6-21
6
Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Backup
6-22
3) Select the model to be connected and “Single”. Check the network settings and click the 5) Select “MeapBack.bin” and click the “Start” button.
“Start” button.
F-6-31
F-6-29 6) Enter the file name to be saved and comments when necessary. Click the “Save” button.
4) Click the “Upload Data” button.
F-6-32
F-6-30 7) Click the “OK” button.
6-22
6
6-23
●● Steps to Download Data 4) Click the “Download Data” button.
CAUTION:
The backup data can be downloaded to the machine from which the data was uploaded.
Listed below are the sample steps to download MeapBack.

3) Select the model to be connected and “Single”. Check the network setting and click the
“Start” button.
F-6-34
5) Select the data to be downloaded and click the “Start” button.
F-6-33
F-6-35
6) When the data is successfully downloaded, click the “OK” button.
7) Restart the machine.
6-23
6
6 Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Optional language support
6-24
■■Optional language support The elimination of normal languages and optional languages
There are 2 kinds of language modules. One is the basic module which saved in system area,
This is the explanation on how to download optional language firmware prepared locally by
the other is the indication module which saved in other area.
sales company.
Usually the indication module is used in UI. If there is not the indication module, it is made
from the basic module.
The following basic languages and a normal languages are installed in this machine at the
If you want to eliminate languages from this machine, you have to delete both of the basic
time of factory shipment.
module and the indication module.
General area You can delete the indication module only in the normal mode. The deletion of the basic
Basic languages English, Japanese
module is only in the download mode.
Normal languages German, French, Italy, Spanish
T-6-14
To eliminate normal languages and optional languages, you select following service mode.
Asian area Copier > FUNCTION > CLEAR > LANG-CLR (Level-2)
Basic languages English, Japanese
By selecting this service mode, the indication module of normal languages and optional
Normal languages Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Korean
T-6-15
languages are deleted, then the download mode is activated automatically.
Besides these languages, you can install optional languages for which sales company
At this time, installing firmware set(including SYSTEM) without the deletion languages by SST
prepared.
or USB memory, the basic module is deleted.
The basic languages(English and Japanese) are included in SYSTEM and these languages
You can install basic languages, normal languages, optional languages, collectively 8
cannot be deleted.
languages. The optional languages are prepared for in European area and Asian area.
The optional languages are shown below:
The use case and execution methods
• European area
Bulgarian, Catalan, Czech, Danish, Greek, Estonian, Finnish, Croatian, Hungarian, Dutch, Work contents SST USB CDS
Installing the optional languages to the machine of Available Available Available
Norwegian, Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Slovak, Slovenian, Swedish, Turkish,
the normal languages.
Eliminating the optional languages and restore to Available Available N/A
• Asian area the normal languages
Vietnamese and Thai. Interchanging the optional languages Available Available N/A
Installing the more than 3 optional languages after Available Available N/A
eliminating the normal languages
The number of the installable languages Updating the machine of the optional languages Available Available Available
The number of the installable languages in this machine which are basic languages, normal T-6-16
languages, optional languages, collectively 8 languages.
2 basic languages and 4 normal languages are already installed. So you can install only 2
optional languages.
First, select the optional language to be downloaded in the Assist Mode and exported to the
USB memory.
Optional language confirmation message appears in the Assist Mode.
The firmware of the selected optional language is exported to the USB memory.
6-24
6
Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Optional language support
6 Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Optional language support
6-25
●● Optional language selection The number of the selectable optional languages in the "Optional Language Setting" is
equivalent to the maximum number of optional languages.
"Optional Language Setting" is added to "System Management". The number of the optional languages to be added to the machine is equivalent to the
By default, "Don't download optional language" is selected. maximum number of optional languages minus the number of the optional languages installed
When "Download optional language" is selected, up to two optional languages can be to the machine.
selected. Error will not occur even the number of the installed optional languages is greater than the
The firmware of the optional languages on the list are excluded from Assist Mode necessary maximum number of the optional languages.
firmware.
Assist Mode can be executed without registering the optional language firmware to SST. In such a case, any new optional language cannot be added, but the firmware of the installed
optional language is downloaded in the Assist Mode.
The picture shown below is the example of the case that Finnish is installed to the machine,
and Danish and Dutch are selected in the "Optional Language Setting".
Only two optional languages can be installed to the machine and Finnish is already installed.
Therefore, either Danish or Dutch can be installed to the machine.
F-6-36
●● Optional language confirmation
When either of the following conditions is satisfied, the optional language confirmation
message appears when "Start" button is clicked.
F-6-37
Optional language is selected in the "Optional Language Setting" of "System Management".

Any optional language is installed to the connected machine.
Maximum number of the optional languages installed to the machine is two.

The optional language already installed to the connected machine is always selected, and it
cannot be removed from the machine with SST.
Even if the firmware of the installed optional language is not registered to SST, it is counted
as the installed optional language.
6-25
6
Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Optional language support
6 Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB Memory Storage Device > Relation between SST and USB memory storage device
6-26
●● Firmware to be exported to USB memory Version Upgrade using USB Memory Storage Device
When the firmware of the selected optional language in "Optional Language Setting" is ■■Relation between SST and USB memory storage device
installed to SST, it is exported to the USB memory. When using the USB memory storage device for version upgrade, the system software
The firmware of the other optional languages are not exported to the USB memory. should be copied to the USB memory storage device. By inserting the USB memory storage
When Danish and Dutch are selected in the "Optional Language Setting", the firmware of device to the slot of the machine, the system software can be upgraded.
these languages are exported to the USB memory as shown below. The figure below shows the relation between SST and USB memory storage device.
PC iR ----
SST
System software
F-6-38 Copying the System Software
USB memory
storage device Downloading the
SST system software
System software Flash ROM
F-6-39
When downloading the system software, enter download mode by any of the following
methods.
• Select the following in service mode (recommended):
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD; and click [OK].
• Press and hold 2 and 8 keys simultaneously on the numeric keypad when turning ON the
power switch.
NOTE:
It takes 2 to 3 minutes to enter the download mode from the service mode because the
machine is restarted. Do not turn OFF the power during that time.
6-26
6
Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB Memory Storage Device > Relation between SST and USB memory storage device
6 Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB Memory Storage Device > Registering System Software
6-27
●● Downloading System Software ■■Registering System Software
The system software is updated according to the set of versions selected from the USB
●● System software storage folder to SST
menu. The system software is stored in the temporary storage space on the FLASH PCB
Register the system software stored in the folder to SST.
immediately after the system software is downloaded. After the download process, the
system software is written in the system area on the FLASH PCB and the data saved in
NOTE:
the temporary storage space is deleted.This machine is automatically restarted when the
When the system software has been compressed, decompress the compression file
writing process is completed. When writing process is successfully completed, the machine is and then register to SST.
restarted with the new version of the system software. When an error occurs, the machine is
restarted with the previous version of the system software.
Preparation
Tasks in the customer site
Requirements:
1) Download the system software • PC with SST Ver.4.73 or later installed
Task in the office -
[
[
[
- - Download Mode - - -
iR2270i-JPjaxxxx-MN.dsh ] - - - - - - - - - - Complete
iR2270iM-JPjaxxxx-1F77-MN.PRG ] - - - - Complete
iR2270iM-ZZjaxxxx-49AD.PRG ] - - - - - - - Complete
• The system software for this machine
[ iR2270iW-JPjaxxxx-5C16-MN.PRG ] - - - - Complete
[ iR2270iF-JPjaxxxx-DE96-ICC.PRG ] - - - - Complete
[ iR2270iG-JPjaxxxx-EC30-ICC.PRG ] - - - - Complete

1) Start the PC.
USB memory FLASH 2) Start SST.
storage device
System
Temporary 3) Click the “Register System Software” button.
System memory space
Software Software System
Copying the system software
システムソフトウェアのコピー Software
System
memory area
2) Automatically restarted
3) The system software is written

<<<<< download shell >>>>>
[ SYSTEM JPja-m ] - - - - Upgrading complete
[ SYSTEM JPja-w ] - - - - Upgrading complete
[ FONT F ] - - - - - - - - - - Upgrading complete
[ FONT G ] - - - - - - - - - - Upgrading complete
+++ Switch OFF the power then ON. +++
FLASH
Temporary
memory space
F-6-41
4) Automatically
主電源スイッチOFF/ON restarted
System
memory area
System 5) Start with the new version.
Software
F-6-40
6-27
6
Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB Memory Storage Device > Registering System Software
6-28
4) Select the folder in which the system software is saved and click the “Search” button. 6) Click the “OK” button when the message telling completion of system software registration
is displayed.
F-6-42
F-6-44
NOTE:
“XXXX” in the figure describes the version of system software.
5) A list of system software in the folder is displayed.

Deselect the checkbox of unnecessary folder(s) and/or system software and click the
“Register” button.
F-6-43
6-28
6
6-29
●● SST to USB memory storage device 4) Click the USB icon shown in “Select the target” screen.
Register the system software registered in SST to the USB memory storage device.
NOTE:
Although only one version of software can be saved with the existing machines, multiple
versions of software can be saved simultaneously in the USB memory storage device
with this machine (up to 9 versions of software can be saved)
Preparation
Requirements:
• PC with SST Ver.4.73 or later installed
• USB memory storage device (*)
*: Requirements for USB memory storage devices

Interface: USB1.1 or later (USB2.0 is recommended)
Memory capacity: 1GB or more is recommended (the total file size of the system software F-6-45
is approx. 350MB) 5) Select the drive (removable disk) where the USB memory storage device is inserted.
Format: FAT (FAT16), FAT32 (NTFS and HFS are not supported). The memory is formatted
in a partition (multiple partitions are not supported)
Unusable USB memory storage device: the memory that is protected by a password or the
encryption technology.

1) Start the PC.
2) Insert the USB memory storage device to the USB port of the PC.
3) Start SST.
F-6-46
6-29
6
6-30
6) Select the “Series” (iRA500). 8) Wait for approx. 1 minute so the firmware to be written is displayed. When the following
screen is displayed, click start button.
F-6-47
7) Select the version to register. After selecting the version, click confirm button. F-6-49
NOTE: NOTE:
Only one version can be registered at once. In addition, a single system software can In the case of using USB1.1, it takes approx. up to 10 minutes for writing. In the case
be registered. of using USB2.0, it takes approx. up to 3minutes so it is recommended to use USB
memory supporting USB2.0.
9) When the system software is successfully registered to the USB memory storage device,
click the “OK” button.
F-6-48
F-6-50
6-30
6
6 Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB Memory Storage Device > Connection
6-31
■■Connection 5) When the machine recognizes the USB memory storage device, the following menu is
displayed on the control panel.
CAUTION:
This machine does not communicate with SST once it recognizes a USB memory
storage device. Therefore, SST and a USB memory device cannot be used at the same
time.
Preparation
Requirements: a USB memory storage device, which the system software for this machine
is registered.
Procedure
1) Remove the network cable if any network cable is connected to this machine.
2) Turn ON the power of the machine and enter download mode from the service mode.
Select the following in service mode: COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD; and
click [OK]. F-6-52
3) The following screen is displayed.

CAUTION:
Depending on the manufacturer or the model, this machine may fail to recognize the
USB memory storage device.
This machine retries recognition of a USB memory storage device for up to 60 seconds
after power-ON. The above menu is not displayed if the machine fails to recognize a
USB memory storage device within the time period.
In such a case, use another USB memory storage device.
F-6-51
4) Connect the USB memory storage device to the USB port.
NOTE:
The USB port at the back of the device can be used as well.
6-31
6
Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB Memory Storage Device > Connection
6 Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB Memory Storage Device > Upgrading System Software
6-32
■■Upgrading System Software ●● Points to Note When Operating/ Using System Software
●● Menu/ Function Overview NOTE:
For normal download of system software, it is recommended to execute from the
download menu --- [1]: Upgrade (Auto).
CAUTION: Do not turn OFF the power during the download/writing process
To prevent unnecessary error, do not turn OFF the power during downloading or writing
of the system software although the machine can be normally started using the previous
version thanks to the recovery mechanism when an error occurs.
CAUTION: Note when the power is turned OFF

F-6-53 Be sure to execute the following procedure to quit download mode.
Downloading System Software Pressing the [Reset] key and then the [0] key on the menu screen initiates the shutdown
[1]: Select Version sequence. Once the message on the touch panel disappears, turn OFF the main power
To select system software (to be downloaded after the selection) switch.
[4]: Clear/Format
To delete or format all the data in the FLASH PCB/HDD
[5]: Backup/Restore
To backup or restore the data in Meepback/Sraming
[Reset]: Shutdown
To execute shutdown sequence
Press the key on the control panel to select or execute the functions.
6-32
6
Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB Memory Storage Device > Upgrading System Software
6 Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB Memory Storage Device > Downloading/ Writing System Software (Automatic)
6-33
■■Selecting System Software ■■Downloading/ Writing System Software (Automatic)
●● [1]: Select Version ●● [1]: Upgrade (Auto)
Select the version to be used (from the system software versions saved in the USB memory). The versions are compared among the host machine, options and the system software in the
USB memory storage device, and only the newest version of the system software in the USB
memory is downloaded to the temporary storage space in the FLASH PCB.
This machine is automatically restarted after the writing process is completed. When the
writing process is successfully completed, the machine is restarted with the new version
of the system software. When an error occurs, the machine is restarted with the previous
version of the system software.
Procedure
3) Press [1] and select the version of system software to be used on the screen for selecting
version.
4) Select [1]: Update (Auto) to start download.
F-6-54
[1] to [0]: Execute download/ any key other than [0]: Return to the menu screen
Selecting version gets into the download menu.
F-6-55
6-33
6
Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB Memory Storage Device > Downloading/ Writing System Software (Automatic)
6 Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB Memory Storage Device > Downloading/ Writing System Software (Automatic)
6-34
During the download process, download status is displayed on the control panel. ●● [2]: Upgrade (w Confirmation)
The versions are compared among the host machine, options and system software in the
Writing to the system software area on the FLASH PCB is started once download is USB memory storage device, and newest version of the system software is downloaded to
completed. When writing to the Dcon (ACC1, CCM or CCB if there is an option) is completed, the temporary storage space in the FLASH PCB.
the machine is automatically restarted. After writing of SafeCont is completed, the machine is When the versions of system software in the USB memory storage device are older version,
automatically restarted again. a confirmation message is displayed on the control panel so that the user can select whether
to overwrite or not. This step is skipped when the target software is the same version.
This machine is automatically restarted once writing process is completed. When writing
process is successfully completed, the machine is started with the new version of the system
software. When an error occurs, the machine is restarted with the previous version of the
system software.
Operation Procedure
version.
4) Select [2]: Update (w Confirmation) to start downloading.
F-6-56 [2] - [0]: Execute download/ any key other than [0]: Return to the menu screen
5) When the main menu is displayed, press the removal key at the bottom right on the touch During the download process, download status is displayed on the control panel.
panel and select removal of memory media device, and then remove the USB memory
storage device. NOTE:
When the system software version in the USB memory storage device is older than
the system software version in the device, a confirmation message as to whether to
overwrite or not is displayed on a module basis. Press the key on the control panel.
[0]: Overwrite/ any key other than [0]: Not to overwrite
When download is completed, this machine is automatically restarted to start writing to the
system software area in the FLASH PCB. When writing to the Dcon (ACC1, CCM or CCB
if there is an option) is completed, the machine is automatically restarted. After writing of
SafeCont is completed, the machine is automatically restarted again.
5) When the main menu is displayed, press the removal key at the bottom right on the touch
storage device.
6-34
6
Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB Memory Storage Device > Downloading/ Writing System Software (Automatic)
6 Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB Memory Storage Device > Formatting FLASH PCB or HDD
6-35
●● [3]: Upgrade (Overwrite all) ■■Formatting FLASH PCB or HDD
Regardless of the system software version in the machine, all the system software in the USB
●● Format Overview
memory storage device is downloaded.
The following 3 types of formatting/initialization methods are available with this machine. With
This machine is automatically restarted once writing process is completed. When writing
this machine, there is no function to format BOOTDEV only, which was available with the
process is successfully completed, the machine is restarted with the new version of the
existing machines.
system software. When an error occurs, the machine is restarted with the previous version of
the system software.
NOTE:
All firmware update may take up to 25 minutes. To reduce downtime, we recommend
using Auto under normal condition.
Operation Procedure
version.
4) Select [3]: Update (Overwrite all) to start downloading.
F-6-57
[3] - [0]: Execute download/ any key other than [0]: Return to the menu screen
• Disk Format: To initialize the entire HDD
During the download process, download status is displayed on the control panel.
• Flash Format: To initialize the entire FLASH PCB
• HDD Encryption Board Initialize: To initialize the HDD Encryption Board
When download is completed, this machine is automatically restarted to start writing to the
system software in the FLASH PCB. When writing to the Dcon (ACC1, CCM or CCB if there
For normal version update, there is no need to format the FLASH PCB/ HDD.
is an option) is completed, the machine is automatically restarted. After writing of SafeCont is
completed, the machine is automatically restarted again.
5) When the main menu is displayed, press the removal key at the bottom right on the touch
storage device.
6-35
6
Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB Memory Storage Device > Formatting FLASH PCB or HDD
6 Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB Memory Storage Device > Formatting FLASH PCB or HDD
6-36
●● [1]: Disk Format ●● [2]: FLASH Format
To format the entire HDD To clear all the user data in the FLASH PCB
Executing format on the machine in use deletes all the user data in the HDD as well as the Executing format with the machine in use deletes all the user data in the FLASH PCB as well
MEAP application (caution); therefore, be sure to gain agreement with the user. as the MEAP application (note); therefore, be sure to gain agreement with the user.
Formatting is necessary when replacing a service part HDD. Note that recovery is not After executing format of the FLASH PCB, the user data in the FLASH PCB is initialized and
available by HD-CLEAR in service mode. the machine is started. Download of system software is not necessary because the system
software is restored from the backup.
Operation Procedure
1) Enter download mode. Operation Procedure
2) Connect the USB memory storage device to the USB port. 1) Enter download mode.
3) Press the key on the control panel. 2) Connect the USB memory storage device to the USB port.
[4] - [1] - [0]: Execute format/ any key other than [0]: Return to the menu screen 3) Press the key on the control panel.
[4] - [2] - [0]: Execute format/ any key other than [0]: Return to the menu screen
Formatting is executed when the power is turned ON the next time. The message showing
data initialization and wait time are displayed.
●● [3]HDD Encryption Board Initialize

To execute when using the HDD and the HDD Encryption Board that were used with the other
machine.
When initializing the Encryption Board, the data in the HDD becomes inaccessible. Therefore,
to the HDD format is necessary for reuse. Be sure to obtain agreement with the user because
formatting the HDD deletes all the user data and MEAP application (note).
Operation Procedure
F-6-58 1) Enter download mode.
Formatting is executed when the power is turned ON the next time. The message showing 2) Connect the USB memory storage device to the USB port.
data initialization and wait time are displayed. 3) Press the key on the control panel.
[4] - [3] - [0]: Execute format/ any key other than [0]: Return to the menu screen
Formatting is executed when the power is turned ON the next time. The message showing
data initialization and wait time are displayed.
6-36
6
Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB Memory Storage Device > Formatting FLASH PCB or HDD
6 Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB Memory Storage Device > Other menus
6-37
■■Backup/ Restore The following message is displayed when the backup process is completed.
●● [5]: Backup/Restore
Backup/Restoration of the data in the FLASH can be executed.
It is used to temporarily save the data stored in the FLASH to the HDD and to restore it after
replacement.
Operation Procedure
3) Press the key on the control panel.
[5] - [1] - [0]: Execute backup/ any key other than [0]: Return to the menu screen
F-6-60
4) The restoration process follows the same procedure as the backup procedure.
NOTE:
If there is no advance data backup, restoration is not available.
■■Other menus
●● [6]: Other Menu 2
This item is not used
F-6-59
6-37
6
Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB Memory Storage Device > Other menus
6 Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller Self Diagnosis > Overview
6-38
Controller Self Diagnosis ■■Overview

Two types of error diagnosis tools are installed in this machine, and stored in the locations
Controller Self Diagnosis shown below.
■■Introduction DC Controler PCB HDD

Operation of the (2 types of) error diagnosis tools added to the main body and remedy for
errors are described. These tools can reduce time to determine cause of errors occurred in Reader
field and improve the accuracy of specifying error locations. Option
This manual can be applied when the main body is placed in the following conditions.
• The main body does not boot. (In such a case that the Control Panel is not displayed or the
Start system
progress bar does not work, etc.)
failure
• An error is suspected to have occurred in the Main Controller PCB and other related PCBs diagnosis
(child PCBs such as Flash PCB, Memory PCB or TPM mounted in the Main Controller tool
PCB). Flash PCB
Controller system
failure diagnosis
PCBs and units diagnosed by each tool are as follow: tool
Main Controller PCB
●● Boot System Error Diagnosis Tool
• Main Controller PCB
• Control Panel Operation All-night/Non-all-
panel Option
night Power Supply
• All-night Power Supply, Non-all-night Power Supply
F-6-61
●● Controller System Error Diagnosis Tool Boot System Error Diagnosis Tool covers the components shown in the red frame (solid line)
• Main Controller PCB side <Main Controller PCB, TPM PCB, FLASH Memory PCB,> in the figure. Controller System Error Diagnosis Tool covers the components shown in the
• HDD blue frame (dotted line).
●● Boot System Error Diagnosis Tool

This tool automatically checks the Control Panel, Main Controller PCB, All-night Power
Supply, and Non-all-night Power Supply, and notifies the result by the number of light-out and
blinking interval of the lamp on the Control Panel.
This tool is installed in the ROM of Main Controller PCB.
Therefore, regardless the version of MN-CNT, this tool can be used even when an error
occurs in child PCBs or when the Controller System Error Diagnosis Tool cannot be booted.
6-38
6
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller Self Diagnosis > Overview
6 Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller Self Diagnosis > Basic Flowchart
6-39
●● Controller System Error Diagnosis Tool ■■Basic Flowchart
This tool automatically checks the Main Controller PCB, child PCBs mounted on the Main
Basic Check Items
Controller PCB, and display the result on the Control Panel.
Check all of the items shown below.
This tool is installed in Flash PCB.
Therefore, this tool cannot be used when an error occurred in Flash PCB. Turn ON the main power switch.
■■Layout Drawing
Layout Drawing of PCBs Subject to Diagnosis No
Does the Power supply LED Execute basic check.
on the Control Panel light up?
Backup Battery
Yes
No
Execute Boot System Error
Is the Control Panel displayed?
Diagnosis Tool
Yes
Execute Controller System

Error Diagnosis Tool.
Flash PCB
Memory PCB
Yes
Is display a judgment result The error locations are identified
TPM PCB of [OK] or [NG]? according to
the Controller System Error
Diagnosis Table.
No
Take an action appropriate for

Debug SRAM the error Code.
F-6-62
F-6-63
●● Basic Check Items

1. Check if the Power Supply Plug is disconnected.
2. Check if the Connection Cable between the Main Controller PCB and Control Panel is
disconnected.
3. Check if the Connection An All-night Power Supply. Check if the Connection Cable from
Main Controller PCB is disconnected. Change AC Driver PCB if not recovered.
6-39
6
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller Self Diagnosis > Basic Flowchart
6 Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller Self Diagnosis > Boot System Error Diagnosis
6-40
■■Prerequisite ●● Diagnosis Time
Diagnosis is completed in approx. 1 minuites.
This machine’s Firmware is intalled in Flash PCB.
Controller System Error Diagnosis Tool (BCT) is also installed at the same time when System <When the diagnosis result is normal>
software is installed. After the Main Power Supply Lamp repeatedly lights out 4 times, it lights up and the diagnosis
is completed.
NOTE: After completion of the diagnosis, this machine executes normal boot sequence.
BCT stands for Box Checker Test.
When BCT is installed on the main body, version of the installed module can be
checked using service mode (COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION>BCT).
■■Operation
Operations of the two diagnosis tools are explained below.
Use each tool according to the following purposes.
• When the main body does not boot (the Control Panel is not displayed): Execute Boot
F-6-65
System Error Diagnosis. <When an error is detected by diagnosis>
• When an error is suspected to have occurred in the Main Controller PCB or child PCBs The Main Power Supply Lamp repeats high-speed blinking after completion of a check in
mounted on the Main Controller PCB: Execute Controller System Error Diagnosis. which an error is detected. (See *1.)
For example, when an error is detected in Check 2, the Main Power Supply Lamp lights out
■■Boot System Error Diagnosis twice and repeats high-speed blinking (ON/OFF in 0.3 seconds interval).
When an error is detected, be sure to count the number of times the Main Power Supply
●● Boot Method
Lamp lights out.
1) Turn ON the Main Power Supply Switch while pressing the Control Panel Energy Saver
For detailed results, see “Error Diagnosis”.
Switch.
2) Right after the Main Power Supply Lamp lights up once, it lights out instantly, and diagnosis
starts.
(When the Main Power Supply Lamp lights out, you can release your finger from the Control
Panel Switch.)
F-6-66
*1: When an error is detected, there is a possibility that the Main Power Supply Lamp may not
perform high-speed blinking but perform other operation (continuous light-up, light-out). If the
error is not resolved, execute the remedy of the Check No. which is not completed normally.
(For details, see “Error Diagnosis”.)
*2: Although diagnosis time for Check 3, and Check 4 is longer than that of other Checks, it is
correct operation.
F-6-64
6-40
6
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller Self Diagnosis > Boot System Error Diagnosis
6 Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller System Error Diagnosis
6-41
●● Error Diagnosis ■■Controller System Error Diagnosis
<Boot System Error Diagnosis Table>
●● Boot Method
The error locations are identified according to the following table.
1) Turn ON the Main Power Supply Switch while pressing the numeric keys ‘2’ and ‘4’
simultaneously.
2) Keep pressing the numeric keys (for approx. 20 seconds) until the following screen
appears on the Control Panel.
F-6-68
●● Diagnosis Time
Diagnosis is completed in approx. 3 minutes.
The result is displayed on the Control Panel.
<When the diagnosis result is normal>
F-6-67
F-6-69
6-41
6
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller System Error Diagnosis
6 Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller System Error Diagnosis
6-42
<When an error is detected by diagnosis> <Controller System Error Diagnosis Table>
Detailed information is displayed under the judgment result. In detailed information, the name The error locations are identified according to the following table.
of the test where an error was detected is indicated. Test Name Description Remedy Error
Code
SN-1 IA-DDR2 Check an error between the Main Replace the Main Controller PCB . -
SDRAM Controller PCB and SDRAM on the
Main Controller PCB
SN-2 SM BUS Check an SM bus error in I2C on the Replace the Main Controller PCB . -
IA DIMM1 Main Controller PCB
SN-3 SM BUS Check an SM bus error in SDRAM Replace the Main Controller PCB . -
IA DIMM2 (inside) on the Main Controller PCB
SN-5 PCI Check a PCI Configuration error in the Replace the Main Controller PCB . -
Configuration Main Controller PCB
SN-8 CPLD Check failure of CPLD chip on the Main Replace the Main Controller PCB . -
F-6-70
Controller PCB
SN-9 LANC Check failure of LANC SPI on the Main Replace the Main Controller PCB . -
<How to view the error result>
SPI Controller PCB
The following screen is an enlarged view of the detailed information indicated above. SN-10 RTC Check failure of RTC on the Main Replace the Main Controller PCB . -
Explanation of the detailed error information is described. CHECK Controller PCB
SN-11 TPM Check failure of the TPM PCB on the 1. Check the installation of the TPM E746
Main Controller PCB PCB.
* TPM PCB is not installed in products 2. Replace the TPM PCB.
for China. So, the diagnosis results 3. Replace the Main Controller PCB.
NG.
SN-12 Check an error DDR2 SDRAM on the Replace the Main Controller PCB. -
SOC- DDR2 Main Controller PCB
F-6-71 SDRAM
SN-13 FRAM Check failure between the Main 1. Check the installation of the E355
no] means that optional PCBs are not mounted. Controller PCB and the Memory PCB Memory PCB.
2. Replace the Memory PCB.
When [no] is displayed although an optional PCB is mounted, it means that an error has been 3. Replace the Main Controller PCB.
occurring. SN-15 JUST Check ROM READ on the Main Replace the Main Controller PCB 2. -
[NG] means that an error occurred to PCBs mounted as standard. ROM READ Controller PCB
SN-16 HDD Check an HDD I/F error 1. Check the cable connection of the E602
HDD.
2. Replace the HDD.
NOTE: SN-17 SRI SRI BUS Connection check Replace the Main Controller PCB. -
Once the tool is activated, this machine reboots after approx. 2 minutes.
T-6-17
After completion of the diagnosis, be sure to turn OFF and then ON the main power.
By turning the power OFF, the operation of this tool completes.
6-42
6
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller System Error Diagnosis
6 Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller Self Diagnosis > Restrictions
6-43
■■Restrictions
●● <Boot System Error Diagnosis>
• If an error cannot be resolved by executing remedy according to the error diagnosis table
described above, consider boot failure of the main power supply and take appropriate
actions.
●● <Controller System Error Diagnosis>

• Regarding the diagnosis for the test names (SN-1, 2, 5, 12), if an error occurs in the
diagnosis under the test names, this diagnosis tool will not boot.
• When no PCBs are installed on the Main Controller PCB, the following judgment results are
displayed.
Standard PCB: [NG]
Optional PCB: [OK]
However, [no] is displayed in detailed error information for optional PCBs.
6-43
6
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller Self Diagnosis > Restrictions
6 Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Operation Check of the Main Controller LEDs > Check the lighting of the LED on the Main Controller
6-44
Operation Check of the Main Controller LEDs ■■ Check the lighting of the LED on the Main Controller
You may be able to determine the remedies against Main Controller-related troubles by
checking the lighting status of LEDs on the PCB. Lighting check of the LED
on the Main Controller PCB
■■Location of LEDs
Checking the All-night Power Supply (3.3V)
1. Error in the connector on the Main Controller PCB
(J7003/J7021)
Main Controller PCB LED7002 lights up.
No 2. Replace the power supply of the machine or the
Yes
AC Driver PCB.
LED9 LED7001 Checking the Non-all-night Power Supply (12V)

LED7002
1. Error in the connector on the Main Controller PCB
(J7010)
LED7001 lights up.
No 2. Replace the Main Controller PCB.
Yes 3. Replace the power supply of the machine
or the AC Driver PCB.
Checking the power supply on the

Main Controller PCB
LED9 lights up. Replace the Main Controller PCB.
No
LED1 Yes
Checking the startup of ﬁrmware
1. Check for poor connection of the connector
Flash PCB on the FLASH PCB.
LED1 lights up. No 2. Replace the FLASH PCB.
3. Replace the Main Controller PCB.
Yes
Is the machine
started normally? No 2. Replace the FLASH PCB.
Yes
F-6-72
Normal operation
■■ Preconditions
F-6-73
Check whether the connectors are securely connected. LEDs are not lit when the contact is
poor. (Power-on is not possible)
When the LED of the Control Panel main power is not lit, check the connection of cables (such
as UI Cable).
6-44
6
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Operation Check of the Main Controller LEDs > Check the lighting of the LED on the Main Controller
6 Troubleshooting > Debug Log > Storing System Information > Storage Method of System Information
6-45
Debug Log * Collection of Sublog is not necessary when the reproduction procedure is identified and
the error can be reproduced by the sales company HQ or the Canon staff who is in charge
of quality follow-up.
Scope of Application
With imageRUNNER ADVANCE, Sublog can be saved in the HDD using the standard
■■Purpose function of the machine without using the Sublog Board.
• When the Canon quality-appointed staff determines the need for an analysis of firmware The Sublog Board is also assigned as a tool with imageRUNNER ADVANCE. The Sublog
debug log by the R&D department, we ask the field to collect log for an investigation to Board is required for an error that requires rebooting because the Sublog Board has a battery.
determine the cause.
• This is intended to improve efficiency in log collection when a trouble occurs. Storing System Information
●● Adding Users for Log Collection ■■Storage Method of System Information
Collecting logs previously required operation in service mode. Therefore, a service technician
needed to visit the site. ●● Automatic Storage
Operation in service mode, however, is no longer necessary because a log can be created by At the time of shipment, 101 is specified in service mode Lev2: COPIER > FUNCTION >
holding down the counter + 123. DBG-LOG > LOG-TRIG.
Thanks to this feature, even a user can create a log for a trouble as long as the Control Panel Debug log is automatically stored in the case of the following:
can be used. Exception + E-code + reboot
When only the service mode is available, the service technician performs the work. ●● Manual Storage
Lev2 COPIER > FUNCTION > DBG-LOG > LOG2USB Counter Key + 1.2.3
When executing "Counter Key + 1.2.3" while no USB memory device is connected to the
Overview machine, "Storing system information..." is displayed at the lower side of the Control Panel
and debug log is stored in the HDD of the machine.
■■Function Overview
Debug log is an integrated log for failure analysis that gathers logs prepared by the software
modules in the device for debug purpose.
In the case of a field failure that is hard to be reproduced, this measure is intended to improve
efficiency in failure analysis and reduce the time for failure support by collecting debug log at
the user site (which was created immediately after the failure) and sending it to the R&D.
When the Canon quality-appointed staff determines the need for an analysis of firmware
debug log by the R&D department, we ask the field to collect log for an investigation to
determine the cause.
●● Effective Instances of Collecting Debug Log
• The error occurs only at the customer site and cannot be reproduced by the sales company
or the Canon staff who is in charge of quality follow-up.
• When the error frequency is low.
• When the error is suspected of links with firmware rather than a mechanical/electrical F-6-74
failure.
6-45
6
Troubleshooting > Debug Log > Storing System Information > Storage Method of System Information
6 Troubleshooting > Debug Log > Storing System Information > Operation to Save System Information
6-46
■■Description of Log to be Collected

The log consists of the number of logs as shown below; from the latest log extended to the
older logs.
Logs older than the specified period are overwritten (deleted).
When collecting logs, they are archived to be one file.
When collecting logs from the machine, the log file in the machine is deleted.
DC configuration can be obtained by manual generation. DC configuration can be obtained
by automatic generation with LOG-TRIG specified.
HDD 10 pieces
T-6-18
■■Operation to Save System Information

By holding down the counter + 1.2.3, you can separate the operation into two: the operation
to save debug log in the HDD and the operation to transfer the data into a USB memory.
By using service mode LOG2USB or SST, the data storage and the data transfer are
performed as one operation.
In any of these cases, debug log in the HDD of the machine is deleted when the data is
transferred.]
The following shows a flowchart of assumed work to collect debug log by a service technician.
F-6-75
6-46
6
Troubleshooting > Debug Log > Storing System Information > Operation to Save System Information
6 Troubleshooting > Debug Log > Storing System Information > Operation to Save System Information
6-47
Workflow to Start the Machine with the 2 and 8 Keys Reacquiring Debug Log
F-6-76
F-6-77
6-47
6
Troubleshooting > Debug Log > Storing System Information > Operation to Save System Information
6 Troubleshooting > Debug Log > Collecting Debug Log (USB memory device) > Manual Saving by Holding Down the Counter + 1.2.3
6-48
Collecting System Information ■■Measures against Frequent Debug Log Collection
Debug log collection involves operations with the machine; therefore, frequent log collection
■■Collection Destination
increases service load.
To retrieve debug log to an external location from the device, use a USB memory device, FTP Carrying a tool PC (PC with a USB memory device attached or SST installed) to the user site
server or SST (Ver. 4.73 or later). can be restricted.
■■Collection Method When the user allows the Internet connection in their site, debug log can be sent to the
specified FTP server in the service mode LOG2SRVR setting by distributing the setting file,
Retrieve debug log from the machine by any of the following methods.
which has been sent from the Canon field support department via the sales company HQ.
• Make the machine recognize the USB memory device. Save the system information by
holding down the counter + 1.2.3 and transfer the data to the USB memory device.
Collecting Debug Log (USB memory device)
• Make the machine recognize the USB memory device. Select the following in service mode
Lev2: COPIER > FUNCTION > DBG-LOG > LOG2USB; and click OK. ■■Manual Saving by Holding Down the Counter + 1.2.3
• Start the machine with the 2 and 8 keys and use SST on a PC with the network cable
connected to transfer the debug log. Note:
• Start the machine with the 2 and 8 keys and transfer the debug log to a USB memory If a USB memory device is recognized in advance by the machine, debug log is written
device that stores the system of the machine. to the USB memory device by executing the following operation.
If the USB memory device is not recognized, the data is moved to the log storage
• Store the setting file, which was sent from the Canon field support department through the
space in the controller; and then the data is written to the USB memory device when
sales company HQ, into a USB memory device. Select the following in service mode Lev2 the following operation is executed the next time while the USB memory device is
to read the data with LOG2SRVR: COPIER > FUNCTION > DBG-LOG > LOG2SRVR; and connected.
transfer the debug log to the specified FTP server. Note that the extension of the file name differs between the one that is directly written
and the one that is written after the data was saved.
Method Storage Collection The log file is deleted in the machine once it is collected into the USB memory device.
Holding down the counter + If there is no USB memory device, If there is a USB memory device, Log can be collected from service mode as well. See the LOG2USB section for details.
1.2.3 the data is just saved. the data is saved and collected.
LOG2USB The data is saved and collected as a set of operation.

1. Reproduce the error.
LOG2RVR The data is saved and collected as a set of operation.
2. Hold down the [Counter] button (10 sec. or longer).
SST The data is saved and collected as a set of operation. 3. Press 1 on the numeric keypad.
Starting the machine with The data is saved and collected as a set of operation. 4. Press 2 on the numeric keypad.
the 2 and 8 keys and using 5. Press 3 on the numeric keypad. (UI is locked at this stage) The machine starts
a USB memory device generation of the file that was converted from binary data on the memory into text-based
T-6-19
data and then encrypted.
"Storing system information..." is displayed at the lower side of the touch panel (Control Panel
of the machine). Data transfer is complete when the display disappears.
See the following for the file name.
6-48
6
Troubleshooting > Debug Log > Collecting Debug Log (USB memory device) > Manual Saving by Holding Down the Counter + 1.2.3
6 Troubleshooting > Debug Log > Collecting Debug Log (USB memory device) > Manual Saving by Holding Down the Counter + 1.2.3
6-49
●● Log Description
You can check the description of the logs to be included in .bin file with "LOGLIST.TXT" that
is saved simultaneously with the .bin file into the USB memory device.
The following are samples of LOGLIST.TXT:
F-6-80
20101216_14-12-ENS00059-V2022_UserErr00-ServiceCall
<- A log file automatically saved at 14:12 on Dec. 16 by a service call
20101216_14-48-ENS00059-V2022_Fatal00-exception
<- A log file automatically saved at 14:48 on Dec. 16 by Exception processing
F-6-78 20101216_14-51-ENS00059-V2022_Debuglog@Cnt123
6. A file is generated in root of the USB memory device. <- A log file saved at the moment of holding down the counter + 1.2.3
7. Note that the screen is locked while the data is transferred to the USB memory device;
therefore, the screen does not change even though you press any key on the Control ●● Status Display on the Control Panel
Panel. Press the Reset key to check that the screen changes. Data transfer is completed During a log collection processing, "Storing system information..." is displayed on the
when the screen changes. (Multiple times) No change on the screen at this moment. (The status line. The message disappears once the log collection processing is complete. (When
screen is locked.) the log has been collected with a USB memory device connected, a message "a memory
8. Wait for a while until the screen changes. Completion of copying data into the USB media is connected" is displayed.)
memory device when the screen changes. When holding down the counter + 1.2.3 while an error code is shown, the message "Storing
system information..." is not displayed for convenience of UI display.
●● File name
When the data is sent to the USB memory device:
The file name is as follows: Date/time + serial number + MNCONT version +
Debuglog@Cnt123.Bin
Example:
20100510_12-35-ENS00059-V01.54_debulog@Cnt123.bin
F-6-79
Note:
Date to be added to the file name shows the date that the log was transferred. The time
of the specified region may not be shown when the machine is not working properly. In
such a case, Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) is shown.
6-49
6
Troubleshooting > Debug Log > Collecting Debug Log (USB memory device) > Manual Saving by Holding Down the Counter + 1.2.3
6 Troubleshooting > Debug Log > LOG2USB > Function
6-50
DBG-LOG Screen ●● Operation Procedure
a) Insert a USB memory device for log collection to the machine.
■■Function
Note:
●● Service mode LEVEL 2 When inserting a USB memory device, wait for 10 seconds or so because it takes
COPIER > FUNCTION > DBG-LOG several seconds for the machine to recognize the USB memory device after it was
inserted. Or enter service mode when you confirmed the display of "A memory media is
connected" after inserting a USB memory device to the machine.
The size and the number of log files to be collected vary depending on the device status
and log storage status; therefore, the file size to be collected can be large as several-
hundred MB. Because of the above reason, we recommend using a USB memory
device with 1GB or larger capacity.
101
b) Select "LOG-USB" and click "OK" to start a log collection.

An "ACTIVE!" sign blinks during the processing.
ACTIVE! OK!
F-6-81
LOG2USB
■■Function
F-6-82
This is a function to send a set of debug logs in the machine to a USB memory device
attached to the device. Note:
For using LOG2USB, take note of the following difference compared to the operation by Do no perform the following operations during the processing.
• Turning OFF and then ON the power of the machine.
holding down the counter + 1.2.3. • Disconnecting a USB memory device.
• Any operation on the touch panel of the machine.
Points to Remember
- Executing LOG2USB while no USB memory device is attached to the machine causes
an "NG" display. The data is not transferred. The log in the HDD is retained. c) "OK!" is displayed when the processing is successfully completed. "NG!" is displayed
Make the machine recognize a USB memory device before executing LOG2USB. when the processing fails.
d) Remove the USB memory device for log collection.
6-50
6
Troubleshooting > Debug Log > LOG2USB > Function
6 Troubleshooting > Debug Log > LOG2SRVR > Function
6-51
●● Operation Procedure
Note:
To remove the USB memory device, exit the service mode screen and perform the First, go through the following steps to set the address of the FTP server:
operation for removing memory media on the screen. a) Save the log setting file (e.g. "800.conf") provided by the Canon quality-appointed staff
Remarks:) into a USB memory device.
• When there is any debug log file that has been automatically saved in the sublog storage b) Insert the USB memory device to the machine and enter 800 for "LOG-TRIG" to execute
space, send it to the USB memory device as well. reading.
• Multiple debug logs are archived into one file to be sent into the USB memory device.
• The archived name is automatically given as follows: "date and time", "serial number", > The server address described in 800.conf is specified in the transfer destination of
"MN-CONT" LOG2SRVR.
c) Select "LOG-SRVR" and click "OK" to start a log collection and server transfer
processing.
A file name example: 20100425_13-32-ENS00059-V01.44_Debuglog@USB.bin d) An "ACTIVE!" sign blinks during the processing.
In the above example, "20100425_13-32" shows the date and time of log collection (the
date and time set in the machine), Note:
"ENS00059" the serial number, Do not perform the following operations during the processing.
• Turning OFF and then ON the power of the machine.
"V01.44" the firmware version of the Main Controller (MNCONT), and
• Operation on UI.
"Debuglog@USB" shows that the log was "collected with "DBG-LOG>LOG2USB". When the processing results in "NG!" although you tried several times before, check for
the IP address in the loaded setting file again.
Perform an internal ping test from the machine to the specified IP address immediately
after you started the processing; if the result shows OK, start a processing to collect
Note:
and transfer the log.
The log file is deleted from the machine once it is collected into the USB memory
Failure in a ping test can cause "NG!"; in such a case, select "LOG2SRVR" again to try
device.
again.
You can check the description of the logs to be included in .bin file with "LOGLIST.TXT"
that is saved simultaneously with the .bin file into the USB memory device.
e) "OK!" is displayed when the processing is successfully completed. "NG!" is displayed
when the processing fails.
When there is any debug log file that has been automatically saved in the sublog storage
LOG2SRVR space, send it to the server as well.
When the Canon quality-appointed staff determines that it is necessary to use this function, f) Multiple debug logs are archived into one file to be sent to the server.
the setting file for the FTP server is provided through the sales company HQ. The archived name is automatically given as follows: "date and time", "serial number", "MN-
CONT"
■■Function
A file name example: 20100425_13-26-ENS00059-V01.44_Debuglog@Server.bin
This is a function to transfer debug log to the FTP server. In the above example, "20100425_13-26" shows the date and time of log collection (the
●● Preconditions date and time set in the machine),
Network connection is available from the machine and there is a FTP server with a registered "ENS00059" the serial number,
account (ID/Password) used by the machine. "V01.44" the firmware version of the Main Controller (MNCONT), and
The address and account of the FTP server used by the machine are specified with the "Debuglog@Server" shows that the log was "collected with "DBG-LOG>LOG2SRVR".
setting file (to be described later).
Note:
The log file is deleted from the device once it is collected into the server.
6-51
6
Troubleshooting > Debug Log > LOG2SRVR > Function
6 Troubleshooting > Debug Log > LOG-TRIG > Function
6-52
LOG-TRIG Number Timing to automatically store the log
100-199 101 Exception + E-code + reboot
■■Function Default setting (at the time of shipment)
111 Exception only
This is a function to change the settings on debug log and then start a log collection operation 121 E-code only
with the new settings. 131 Reboot only
200-299 201 101 + alarm
211 Exception + alarm
●● Operation Procedure 221 E-code + alarm
a) Enter a numeric value (100 to 99999) that corresponds to the target operation mode for 231 Reboot + alarm
"LOG-TRIG" and click the "OK" button. 291 Alarm only
300-399 301 101 + jam
311 Exception + jam
321 E-code + jam
331 Reboot + jam
391 Jam only
T-6-20
• Do not use number 0 to 99 for system reservation.

• When changing the setting value or executing DEFAULT, the latest setting value will not be
displayed unless the DBG-LOG screen is displayed again. Therefore, exit the DBG-LOG
screen and then display the DBG-LOG screen again to check that the intended setting
value is shown.
• The setting to "automatically store logs by Exception + E-code + reboot (setting number
101)" is specified as default (the state specified at the shipment).
F-6-83
b) The log settings start to be changed in the device and "ACTIVE!" blinks during the ●● Limitations
processing. Automatic Collection (LOG-TRIG)
c) "OK!" is displayed when the processing is successfully completed. "NG!" is displayed • When the operation on debug log goes wrong, repeated log collection/setting change can
when the processing fails. cause faulty behavior such as generating extra temporary file and log file. In such a case,
d) It is not necessary to reboot the device. execute "DEFAULT" and reset the settings on debug log, and then try again.
See the following table for definition of the operation mode (0 to 99999). ●● Types and Descriptions of Logs to be Collected from Device
Debug log information, serial number and status information sent by the firmware of the
device are collected while image data, user settings (such as Address Book), etc. are not
collected. Depending on the log, user information (print file name, a part of image data, etc.)
can be included indirectly.
6-52
6
Troubleshooting > Debug Log > LOG-TRIG > Function
6 Troubleshooting > Debug Log > SYSLOG
6-53
Select necessary settings.
DEFAULT
1. Mode 1: Collection of all logs (including logs that may contain user information)
2. Mode 2: Collection of only logs that do not contain user information ■■Function
When you gain an approval from the customer, collect log in mode 1. (Switch modes 1 and 2
Set all debug log-related settings back to the default settings (the state at the time of
by changing the settings from "LOG-TRIG".)
shipment).
Mode 2 is the default setting; therefore, Mode 2 applies to all log collection settings unless the
• You must perform this measure when you complete troubleshooting and return the device
mode is changed by LOG-TRIG (LOG-TRIG > 1).
to the customer.
When changing the mode to Mode 1 by LOG-TRIG, Mode 1 applies to all log collection
• Perform this measure when you reset or make another settings relating to debug log during
settings.
a log collection investigation.
The following shows how to change the mode from Mode 2 (default at the time of shipping) to For log files that were automatically stored in the debug log storage space secured in the
Mode 1: machine's controller (/var/xpt/dbglog), they kept to be stored unless the number of log files
1) Enter "1" by LOG-TRIG and click OK. exceeds the limit. To delete the stored log (to use HIT-STS), use "LOG-DEL" described later.
2) Then enter "101" and click OK.
When making another number setting after executing step 2) above, the setting made in
step 1) is disabled; therefore, clear the default settings and then execute steps 1) and 2) SYSLOG
again. When a Canon quality-appointed staff determines the need to use this function, the setting
file for SYSLOG is provided through the sales company HQ.
HIT-STS The setting file may be provided when a large volume of logs are determined necessary by
Canon because the log storage space in the HDD is not sufficient.
The status shows OK when there is any log.
Turn ON and OFF the operation of syslog function.
The program responsible for the syslog function is hereinafter described as "syslogd".
Note:
The status shows "OK" under the condition that there is any storage log.
The status also shows "OK" by holding down the counter key + 1.2.3. Syslogd sends debug log of the machine's controller to any of the following:
• A file on the HDD in the controller of the machine
• Any of the syslog servers (not FTP server) that can connect to the machine and network
HIT-STS2
The log is automatically collected by the automatic log storage function (to be saved as a file Note:
in the device) and the status shows whether there is any log that includes an "expected log The syslog function involves a risk of full capacity in the HDD or increased network
pattern". traffic.
Perform this measure in the field only when the R&D determines it is necessary.
There is a log that includes an "expected pattern" when the status shows "OK". • Collect sublog at the main CPU of the Main Controller.
Note:
1) The status shows "OK" when both of the following conditions are satisfied: "There is
a storage log" and "the log includes an expected pattern described in the settings file".
2) In the standard settings, the expected pattern for HIT-STS2 condition is not specified.
To enable HIT-STS2, it is necessary to use LOG-TRIG to read and set the setting file
with an expected pattern described, which was provided by R&D.
6-53
6
Troubleshooting > Debug Log > SYSLOG
6 Troubleshooting > Debug Log > An Example of Automatic Log Collection Setting
6-54
LOG-DEL 3. Execute the service mode setting as follows.
Service mode LEVEL 2
This is a function to delete log files that have been automatically stored. The settings on log COPIER > FUNCTION > DBG-LOG > LOG-TRIG; and set 301.
operation such as the log storage trigger are not cleared.
Normally, there is no need to use this function (the firmware automatically restricts the upper
limit for the number of stored logs); however, it is necessary to delete logs by LOG-DEL when
using HIT-STS to see whether the log is collected or not after changing the log storage trigger
setting.
(Because the HIT-STS status always shows OK as long as there is a log that has been
stored.)
An Example of Automatic Log Collection Setting

Setting LOG-TRIG enables to collect logs limited to the following items
• Error code, Reboot, Exception processing F-6-85
• Alarm 4. Make a sheet of copy. Open the Delivery Feed Assembly before the paper is delivered
• Jam from the Delivery Assembly to make paper jam.
5. When a jam occurs, "Storing system information..." is displayed at the lower side of the
Setting Example Control Panel.
(Delivery Jam)
To experience a log collection operation, the following shows a setting example:
This is a log collection example when a jam occurs in the Delivery Assembly during a copy
operation.
1. Connect a USB memory to an available machine.
2. Check that the machine recognizes the USB memory.
F-6-86
F-6-84
6-54
6
Troubleshooting > Debug Log > An Example of Automatic Log Collection Setting
6 Troubleshooting > Debug Log > Uploading Data by SST > Preconditions:
6-55
6. Hold down the counter + 1.2.3 to transfer the log in the HDD of the machine to the USB
Uploading Data by SST
memory.
7. Check that the display disappears and cancel connection of the USB memory device to The following shows a method to collect a log by connecting a PC with SST (Ver. 4.73 or
remove the USB memory. later) running to the machine.
■■Preconditions:
The log is stored in the machine by holding down the counter + 1.2.3 or the automatic log
collection function.
A PC with SST running is connected to the machine and the machine is at download mode by
starting it with the 2 and 8 keys.
Note:
Executing a log collection by SST deletes logs in the machine.
F-6-87
8. Connect the USB memory to the PC and check that a log file is created. 1. Start SST (Ver. 4.73 or later) and select iA500 from Model List. Press the Start button.
F-6-88
6-55
6
Troubleshooting > Debug Log > Uploading Data by SST > Preconditions:
6-56
2. Press the Upload Data button.
F-6-90
F-6-89
4. Select "Upload Log file and LogList file".
3. Select the data to be uploaded, then click [Start] button. The list of logs stored in the log file of the machine (description of LogList files) is displayed.
When there is no log in the machine, it results in blank option items for "data to upload".
When the file name is longer than the frame, it displays that it is a log in the comment
column just below.
It is displayed as "log" in the figure below.
Note:
The log is not stored when You cancel it before pushing the Start button.
It is deleted from the main body.
F-6-91
6-56
6
6-57
5. Press the "Save" button. 7. Check that the log is stored in the specified location in the PC.
In the initial setting:
Windows(C:) > ServData > iA500 >EXR02627 (Serial number)
F-6-94
F-6-92
6. Check that the data storage is completed and click the "OK" button.
F-6-93
6-57
6
6 Troubleshooting > Debug Log > Saving a Log of Key Operations > Usage Method
6-58
Saving a Log of Key Operations ■■Usage Method
■■Overview ●● Preparation
1. Obtaining permission from the user to record key operation log for cause analysis
• The key operation log function collects key operation log of the user to identify the cause of
After gaining permission from the user, in Settings/Registration > Management Settings >
an error such as a wrong FAX transmission, to see whether the error is caused by a failure
Device Management > Store Key Operation Log, change the setting to "ON“.
in the machine or a wrong operation of the user.
2. Starting to save key operation log
• The key operation log is not recorded with the status at the time of shipment.
3. Occurring an error
• A setting is ready in user mode to enable the saving function of key operation log.
After the error occurred, execute a manual trigger operation to save key operation log in
• Only when the above setting is enabled, the machine determines that the user permission
the HDD of the machine.
has been obtained and starts recording user operation log.
4. Collecting key operation log with SST or USB memory
• User operation log is saved/collected to be included in sublog when the sublog is saved.
The key operation log is collected together with the sublog. Transfer the data that was
• Among the user operation log that was saved, the following confidential information is
collected from the machine to the PC or USB memory.
masked.
5. Changing the setting of saving key operation log back to "OFF" after collecting the log
• Password entered from the software keyboard
• Password, PIN code, etc. entered from the numeric keypad
• Character strings displayed with turned letters on the UI screen
●● Operation
1. Obtaining Permission to Record Key Operation Log
After gaining permission from the user, in Settings/Registration > Management Settings >
Note: Device Management > Store Key Operation Log, change the setting to "ON".
• When the log is output, information such as passwords and PINs is output as masked
characters. This can help prevent sensitive information from being leaked externally. For
information on interpreting and outputting saved logs, contact your local authorized Canon
dealer.
• When the Canon quality-appointed staff determines the need for an analysis of firmware
debug log by the R&D department, we ask the field to collect log for an investigation
to determine the cause. This is intended to improve efficiency in log collection when a
trouble occurs.
F-6-95
6-58
6
Troubleshooting > Debug Log > Saving a Log of Key Operations > Usage Method
6 Troubleshooting > Debug Log > Saving a Log of Key Operations > Usage Method
6-59
2. Starting to Save Key Operation Log 4. Collecting Key Operation Log with SST or USB Memory
See " Debuglog Collection (SST) " or " Debuglog Collection (USB) " for details. Here is an
example of using USB memory to collect.
a) Allow the host machine to recognize USB memory storage device.

b) Select Service Mode Lev2 > COPIER > FUNCTION > DBG-LOG > LOG2USB and click
OK.
F-6-96
• Starting to Save Key Operation Log.
• Note that the log cannot be recorded while "OFF" is selected.
F-6-98
c) "OK!" is displayed when the processing is successfully completed. "NG!" is displayed
3. After the error occurred, immediately execute a manual trigger operation for sublog.
when the processing fails.
• While holding down the Counter key (10 sec.), press 1, 2, and 3 keys.
d) Remove the USB memory device for log collection.
F-6-97
6-59
6
Troubleshooting > Debug Log > Saving a Log of Key Operations > Usage Method
7 Error Code
■
■Overview
■
■Error Code
■
■Jam Code
■
■Alarm Code
7
Error Code
7 Error Code > Overview > Outline > Points to Note When Clearing HDD
7-2
Overview ■■Pickup position code

When jam occurs, pickup location is indicated with the following pickup position code.
Outline In the jam display screen, the “P” row corresponds to the pickup position code.
Pickup position
■■Outline Pickup position
code
At Finisher jam/At error avoidance jam/At ADF jam without pickup
This chapter describes various codes which are displayed when a failure occurs on the 00
operation (at SEND, Inbox, etc.)
product. These are classified into 3 codes as follows.
Cassette 1 01
Code type Explanation Reference Cassette 2 02
Error code This code is displayed when an error occurs on the machine. p. 7-3 Cassette 3 03
Jam code This code is displayed when a jam occurs inside the machine. p. 7-34 Cassette 4 04
This code is displayed when a function of the machine is Multi-purpose Tray 05
Alarm code p. 7-38
malfunctioned. Duplex (At duplex printing, jam occurs after paper passes through the
T-7-1
06
Duplex Feed Sensor (PS8).)
Error code notation T-7-3
An error code is shown in 7-digit [E000XXX] on the display on the operation panel. However,
■■Points to Note When Clearing MN-CON
[000] in 2 to 4 digit is not used. Thus, an error code is described as [EXXX] using 5 to 7 digit
in the service manual. (e.g.: E012 = E000012) • Execution of clearing MN-COM deletes all data in Address Book, Forwarding Settings,
Settings/Registration (Preferences), Adjustment/Maintenance, Function Settings, Set
Destination, Management Settings, TPM Settings, etc. Before execution of this operation,
■■Location code
ask user to back up the data and get approval for this operation.
Error code, jam code, and alarm code include the location information. • When clearing MN-CON while any login application other than Default Authentication is,
Location information is displayed as 2-digit numbers as follows. error such as not displayed login screen occurred. In this case, access SMS once and
In the jam display screen, the “L” row corresponds to the location code. switch login application to Default Authentication to recover to the normal status.
Device JAM ERR ALARM
imageRUNNER ADVANCE Main Controller = 00
500/400 Series
Printer engine = 00
Reader+ADF=04
Others of ■■Points to Note When Clearing HDD
ADF=01 listed below
Printer engine = 05 As a remedy for error codes (E602-XXXX), HDD partition is selected and the target partition
CASSETTE UNIT-AA1 00 05 04
may be cleared.
Staple Finisher-R1 02 02 61
When clearing partition, be sure to check which data will be deleted by referring Detail of
FAX Board - 07 -
T-7-2 HDD partition and explain to the user before starting work.
7-2
7
Error Code > Overview > Outline > Points to Note When Clearing HDD
7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E197
7-3
Error Code E Detail

Location Item Description
Code Code
Title Fixing Assembly high temperature error (hardware detection)
Error Code Details The hardware circuit detected overheating of the Fixing Main
Description Thermistor (THM1) or Fixing Sub Thermistor (THM2) for 30msec
or longer on end.
■■E000 to E197
1. Perform the following to clear the error: COPIER > FUNCTION
E Detail > CLEAR > ERR in the Service Mode; then, turn the power switch
Location Item Description to OFF and then ON.
Code Code E001 0001 05
Title Fixing Assembly low temperature error 2. Check the connection of the Fixing Assembly. (Connection error
The detected temperature of the Fixing Main Thermistor (THM1) of the Drawer, connector disconnection, open circuit)
Description Remedy
failed to reach the specified temperature at the fixing start control. 3. Check the connection between the AC Driver PCB (PCB4) and
Fixing Assembly.
4. Replace the Fixing Assembly.
> CLEAR > ERR in the Service Mode; then, turn the power switch
5. Replace the AC Driver PCB (PCB4).
to OFF and then ON.
E000 0001 05 6. Replace the DC Controller PCB (PCB1).
2. Check the connection of the Fixing Assembly. (Connection error
of the Drawer, connector disconnection, open circuit) Title Fixing Assembly high temperature error
Remedy The Fixing Sub Thermistor (THM2) detected 295 degrees C or
3. Check the connection between the AC Driver PCB (PCB4) and Description
Fixing Assembly. higher for 200msec or longer on end.
4. Replace the Fixing Assembly. 1. Perform the following to clear the error: COPIER > FUNCTION
5. Replace the AC Driver PCB (PCB4). > CLEAR > ERR in the Service Mode; then, turn the power switch
6. Replace the DC Controller PCB (PCB1). to OFF and then ON.
Title Fixing Assembly high temperature error E001 0002 05 2. Check the connection of the Fixing Assembly. (Connection error
The Fixing Main Thermistor (THM1) detected 250 degrees C or of the Drawer, connector disconnection, open circuit)
Description Remedy
higher for 200msec or longer on end. 3. Check the connection between the AC Driver PCB (PCB4) and
Fixing Assembly.
> CLEAR > ERR in the Service Mode; then, turn the power switch
to OFF and then ON.
E001 0000 05 6. Replace the DC Controller PCB (PCB1).
of the Drawer, connector disconnection, open circuit) Title Fixing Assembly temperature rise error
Remedy 1. The Fixing Main Thermistor (THM1) detected the temperature
3. Check the connection between the AC Driver PCB (PCB4) and
Fixing Assembly. of lower than 115 degrees C for 400msec or longer on end 6.0
4. Replace the Fixing Assembly. seconds later after detecting 100 degrees C.
Description
5. Replace the AC Driver PCB (PCB4). 2. The Fixing Main Thermistor (THM1) detected the temperature
6. Replace the DC Controller PCB (PCB1). of lower than 150 degrees C for 400msec or longer on end 6.0
seconds later after detecting 140 degrees C.
E002 0000 05 > CLEAR > ERR in the Service Mode; then, turn the power switch
to OFF and then ON.
of the Drawer, connector disconnection, open circuit)
Remedy
3. Check the connection between the AC Driver PCB (PCB4) and
Fixing Assembly.
6. Replace the DC Controller PCB (PCB1).
7-3
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E197
7-4
E Detail E Detail
Location Item Description Location Item Description
Code Code Code Code
Title Fixing Assembly temperature decrease error (during printing) Title Waste Toner Motor (M3) rotation error
1. The Fixing Main Thermistor (THM1) detected the temperature of The same level of the lock signal was detected 375 times in a row
lower than 80 degrees C for 200msec or longer on end. while detecting the signal every 2msec.
Description Description
2. The Fixing Sub Thermistor (THM2) detected the temperature of * If paper is being fed, the error occurs after the paper has been
lower than 60 degrees C for 200msec or longer on end. E013 0000 05 delivered.
1. Perform the following to clear the error: COPIER > FUNCTION 1. Check the connector connection between the Waste Toner
> CLEAR > ERR in the Service Mode; then, turn the power switch Motor (M3) and the DC Controller PCB (PCB1).
Remedy
E003 0000 05 to OFF and then ON. 2. Replace the Waste Toner Motor (M3).
2. Check the connection of the Fixing Assembly. (Connection error 3. Replace the DC Controller PCB (PCB1).
of the Drawer, connector disconnection, open circuit) Title Fixing Motor (M1) rotation error
Remedy
3. Check the connection between the AC Driver PCB (PCB4) and The lock signal was not detected for 2.0 seconds while detecting
Fixing Assembly. Description
the signal every 100msec since starting the drive of the motor.
4. Replace the Fixing Assembly. E014 0001 05 1. Check the connector connection between the Fixing Motor (M1)
5. Replace the AC Driver PCB (PCB4). and the DC Controller PCB (PCB1).
6. Replace the DC Controller PCB (PCB1). Remedy
2. Replace the Fixing Motor (M1).
Title Thermistor disconnection detection error 3. Replace the DC Controller PCB (PCB1).
The disconnection of the thermistor connector was detected for Title Fixing Motor (M1) rotation error
Description
30msec on end. The lock signal was not detected 5 times in a row for 500msec
1. Check the connection of the Fixing Assembly. (Connection error Description while detecting the signal every 100msec during driving (after the
of the Drawer, connector disconnection, open circuit) lock signal detection).
E004 0000 05 E014 0002 05
2. Check the connection between the AC Driver PCB (PCB4) and 1. Check the connector connection between the Fixing Motor (M1)
Remedy Fixing Assembly. and the DC Controller PCB (PCB1).
3. Replace the Fixing Assembly. Remedy
4. Replace the AC Driver PCB (PCB4). 3. Replace the DC Controller PCB (PCB1).
5. Replace the DC Controller PCB (PCB1). Title Fixing Motor (M1) pressure release error
Title Main Motor (M2) rotation error The pressure release of the Fixing Assembly was not detected for
The lock signal was not detected for 2.0 seconds while detecting Description
Description 3.0 seconds during the pressure release drive.
the signal every 100msec since starting the drive of the motor. 1. Check the connector connection between the Fixing Pressure
E010 0001 05 1. Check the connector connection between the Main Motor (M2) E014 0003 05 Release Sensor (PS18) or the Fixing Motor (M1) and the DC
and the DC Controller PCB (PCB1). Controller PCB (PCB1).
Remedy Remedy
2. Replace the Main Motor (M2). 2. Replace the Fixing Pressure Release Sensor (PS18).
3. Replace the DC Controller PCB (PCB1). 3. Replace the Fixing Motor (M1).
Title Main Motor (M2) rotation error 4. Replace the DC Controller PCB (PCB1).
The lock signal was not detected 5 times in a row for 500msec Title Fixing Motor (M1) pressurization error
Description while detecting the signal every 100msec during driving (after the The pressurization of the Fixing Assembly was not detected for 3.0
lock signal detection). Description
E010 0002 05 seconds during the pressurization drive.
1. Check the connector connection between the Main Motor (M2) 1. Check the connector connection between the Fixing Pressure
and the DC Controller PCB (PCB1). E014 0004 05 Release Sensor (PS18) or the Fixing Motor (M1) and the DC
Remedy
2. Replace the Main Motor (M2). Controller PCB (PCB1).
3. Replace the DC Controller PCB (PCB1). Remedy
2. Replace the Fixing Pressure Release Sensor (PS18).
7-4
7
7-5
E Detail E Detail
Code Code Code Code
Detection of the toner clog between the Hopper Unit and the Title Bottle Motor (M5) rotation error
Title
Developing Assembly The same level of the Bottle Motor (M5) lock signal was detected
When the Developing Assembly Toner Sensor (TS2) detected 230 times in a row while detecting the signal every 2.0msec.
Description
“toner-absent” and the Hopper Toner Sensor (TS1) detected * If paper is being fed, the error occurs after the paper has been
“toner-present”, the Developing Assembly Toner Sensor (TS2) did E025 0001 05 delivered.
not detect “toner-present” though the Hopper Motor (M6) rotated 1. Check the connector connection between the Bottle Motor (M5)
Description
by 194 times at intervals of 1.0 second with having turned on the and the DC Controller PCB (PCB1).
Remedy
Developing Cylinder Clutch (CL2). 2. Replace the Bottle Motor (M5).
E020 0000 05 * If paper is being fed, the error occurs after the paper has been 3. Replace the DC Controller PCB (PCB1).
delivered. Title Failure of eM Controller Counter
1. Check the rotation of the Hopper Motor Gear. (If it is rotating, E032 0001 05 Description Detection of open circuit of count pulse signal.
the sensor may not be detecting correctly. In that case, perform the Remedy Check the cable (to see if it's disconnected)
following to supply toner to the Developing Assembly: COPIER > Title Laser Scanner Motor rotation error
Remedy FUNCTION > INSTALL > TONER-S in the Service Mode.)
After startup of the Laser Scanner Motor, the speed lock signal of
2. Replace the Developing Assembly.
the Laser Scanner Motor was not detected although a specified
3. Replace the Hopper Unit.
Description period of time had passed.
*When the same status was detected again after executing an
Connector disconnection of the Developing Assembly Toner E110 0001 05
Title error retry.
Sensor (TS2)
1. Check the connector connection between the Laser Scanner
The connection signal of the Developing Assembly Toner Sensor Unit and the DC Controller PCB (PCB1).
(TS2) was not detected 10 times in a row for 100msec. Remedy
Description 2. Replace the Laser Scanner Unit.
* If paper is being fed, the error occurs after the paper has been 3. Replace the DC Controller PCB (PCB1).
E024 0000 05
delivered.
Title Laser Scanner Motor rotation error
1. Check the connector connection between the Developing
After the speed lock of the Laser Scanner Motor settled, the speed
Assembly and the DC Controller PCB (PCB1).
Remedy lock signal was not detected 10 times in a row at intervals of
2. Replace the Developing Assembly.
Description 100msec.
Title Disconnection of the Developing Assembly Toner Sensor (TS2) E110 0002 05
error retry.
1. At normal speed: The Developing Assembly Toner Sensor (TS2) 1. Check the connector connection between the Laser Scanner
signal was detected 7500 times in a row at intervals of 100msec. Unit and the DC Controller PCB (PCB1).
2. At low speed: The Developing Assembly Toner Sensor (TS2) Remedy
Description 2. Replace the Laser Scanner Unit.
signal was detected 4500 times in a row at intervals of 100msec. 3. Replace the DC Controller PCB (PCB1).
E024 0001 05 * If paper is being fed, the error occurs after the paper has been
Title Laser Scanner Motor rotation error
delivered.
The speed lock signal of the Laser Scanner Motor was not
detected although 6.5 seconds (when switching from low speed to
Assembly and the DC Controller PCB (PCB1).
Remedy normal speed) or 8.0 seconds (when switching from normal speed
2. Replace the Developing Assembly. Description
to low speed) had passed.
E110 0003 05 *When the same status was detected again after executing an
Title Connector disconnection of the Hopper Toner Sensor (TS1) error retry.
The connection signal of the Hopper Toner Sensor (TS1) was not 1. Check the connector connection between the Laser Scanner
detected 10 times in a row for 100msec. Unit and the DC Controller PCB (PCB1).
Description Remedy
* If paper is being fed, the error occurs after the paper has been 2. Replace the Laser Scanner Unit.
E025 0000 05 delivered. 3. Replace the DC Controller PCB (PCB1).
1. Check the connector connection between the Hopper Unit and
the DC Controller PCB (PCB1).
Remedy
2. Replace the Hopper Unit.
7-5
7
7-6
E Detail
■■E202 to E355
Code Code
E Detail
Title EEPROM access error Location Item Description
During communication with EEPROM, the communication failed to
Code Code
retry 20 times after the communication error had occurred. Title CIS Unit home position detection error
E196 0000 05 Description Description The CIS HP Sensor (PS24) did not detect the CIS Unit.
* If paper is being fed, the error occurs after the paper has been
delivered. 1. Check the connection of the Flexible Cable between the Reader
Remedy 1. Replace the DC Controller PCB (PCB1). Controller PCB (PCB3) and the Main Controller PCB (PCB2).
Title Laser Driver PCB communication error E202 0001 04 2. Replace the Flexible Cable.
Error in communication with the Laser Driver PCB (communication Remedy 3. Replace the CIS HP Sensor (PS24).
data failure) 4. Replace the Reader Motor (M10).
Description 5. Replace the Reader Controller PCB (PCB3).
error retry. 6. Replace the Main Controller PCB (PCB2).
E197 0000 05 Title CIS Unit home position detection error
1. Check the connector connection between the Laser Scanner
Unit and the Main Controller PCB (PCB2) or the DC Controller Description The CIS Unit did not come off the CIS HP Sensor (PS24).
PCB (PCB1). 1. Check the connection of the Flexible Cable between the Reader
Remedy Controller PCB (PCB3) and the Main Controller PCB (PCB2).
2. Replace the Laser Scanner Unit.
3. Replace the Main Controller PCB (PCB2). E202 0002 04 2. Replace the Flexible Cable.
4. Replace the DC Controller PCB (PCB1). Remedy 3. Replace the CIS HP Sensor (PS24).
Title Laser Driver PCB communication error 4. Replace the Reader Motor (M10).
5. Replace the Reader Controller PCB (PCB3).
Error in communication with the Laser Driver PCB (serial
6. Replace the Main Controller PCB (PCB2).
communication failure)
Description Title Controller communication error
error retry. A serial communication error was detected during normal
Description
E197 0001 05 1. Check the connector connection between the Laser Scanner operation.
E240 0000 05
Unit and the Main Controller PCB (PCB2) or the DC Controller 1. Check the connector connection between the DC Controller
PCB (PCB1). Remedy PCB (PCB1) and the Main Controller PCB (PCB2).
Remedy 2. Replace the DC Controller PCB (PCB1).
2. Replace the Laser Scanner Unit.
3. Replace the Main Controller PCB (PCB2). Title Controller communication error
4. Replace the DC Controller PCB (PCB1). Description A serial communication error was detected during printing.
Title Connector disconnection of the Laser Scanner Unit E240 0001 05 1. Check the connector connection between the DC Controller
Description The disconnection of the Laser Scanner Unit was detected. Remedy PCB (PCB1) and the Main Controller PCB (PCB2).
1. Check the connector connection between the Laser Scanner 2. Replace the DC Controller PCB (PCB1).
Unit and the Main Controller PCB (PCB2) or the DC Controller Title System error
E197 0003 05
PCB (PCB1). E246 0001 00 Description System error
Remedy
2. Replace the Laser Scanner Unit. Remedy Contact the service company office
3. Replace the Main Controller PCB (PCB2). Title System error
4. Replace the DC Controller PCB (PCB1). E246 0002 00 Description System error
T-7-4 Remedy Contact the service company office
Title System error
E246 0003 00 Description System error
Remedy Contact the service company office
Title System error
Title System error
7-6
7
7-7
E Detail E Detail
Code Code Code Code
Title System error Title Image process device error
E247 0002 00 Description System error Description Error at MemoryCopy
Remedy Contact the service company office E315 000f 00 1. Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
Title System error Remedy 2. Check connection of Main Controller PCB.
E247 0003 00 Description System error 3. Replace Main Controller PCB (PCB2).
Remedy Contact the service company office Title Image process device error
Title System error Description ROTU timeout error
E247 0004 00 Description System error E315 0027 00 1. Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
Remedy Contact the service company office Remedy 2. Check connection of Main Controller PCB.
Title Reader backup data read error 3. Replace Main Controller PCB (PCB2).
Description The verification of the reader backup data failed to match. Title Image process device error
1. Check the connector connection between the Reader Controller Description MemFill timeout error
E248 0000 04 E315 0035 00 1. Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
PCB (PCB3) and the Main Controller PCB (PCB2).
Remedy Remedy 2. Check connection of Main Controller PCB.
2. Replace the Reader Controller PCB (PCB3).
3. Replace the Main Controller PCB (PCB2). 3. Replace Main Controller PCB (PCB2).
Title Zero cross signal error Title Image process device error
The zero cross signal was not detected for 500msec or longer Description PRIO overrun
while the relay turned to on. E315 0100 00 1. Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
Description Remedy 2. Check connection of Main Controller PCB.
E261 0000 05 error retry. 3. Replace Main Controller PCB (PCB2).
1. Check the connector connection. (All connectors on the DC Title Device timeout
Controller PCB) An image synchronous signal from the Main Controller PCB to the
Remedy Description
2. Replace the DC Controller PCB (PCB1). Reader is not received within 30 seconds.
3. Replace the AC Driver PCB (PCB4). 1. Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
E315 0500 00
Title Image process device error 2. Check the connection of the Main Controller PCB (including the
Description JBIG encode error Remedy flat cable).
E315 0007 00 1. Turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. Replace the flat cable.
Remedy 2. Check connection of Main Controller PCB. 4. Replace the Main Controller PCB (PCB2).
3. Replace Main Controller PCB (PCB2). Title Device abnormal completion
Title Image process device error An abnormal signal from the Main Controller PCB to the Reader is
Description
Description JBIG decode error detected.
1. Delete the current job. 1. Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
E315 0501 00
E315 000d 00 2. Turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. Check the connection of the Main Controller PCB (including the
Remedy 3. Check connection of Main Controller PCB. Remedy flat cable).
4. Replace the DDR-SDRAM, the HDD and Main Controller PCB 3. Replace the flat cable.
(PCB2) at the same time. 4. Replace the Main Controller PCB (PCB2).
Title Image process device error Title Device timeout
Description Error at software decoding An image synchronous signal from the Main Controller PCB to the
Description
1. Delete the current job. Reader is not received within 30 seconds.
E315 000e 00 2. Turn OFF and then ON the main power. 1. Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
E315 0510 00
Remedy 3. Check connection of Main Controller PCB. 2. Check the connection of the Main Controller PCB (including the
4. Replace the DDR-SDRAM, the HDD and Main Controller PCB Remedy flat cable).
(PCB2) at the same time. 3. Replace the flat cable.
7-7
7
7-8
E Detail E Detail
Code Code Code Code
Title Device abnormal completion Title Device timeout
An abnormal signal from the Main Controller PCB to the Reader is An image synchronous signal from the Main Controller PCB to the
detected. Reader is not received within 30 seconds.
1. Turn OFF and then ON the main power. 1. Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
E315 0511 00 E315 0540 00
2. Check the connection of the Main Controller PCB (including the 2. Check the connection of the Main Controller PCB (including the
Remedy flat cable). Remedy flat cable).
3. Replace the flat cable. 3. Replace the flat cable.
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB (PCB2). 4. Replace the Main Controller PCB (PCB2).
Title Device timeout Title Device abnormal completion
An image synchronous signal from the Main Controller PCB to the An abnormal signal from the Main Controller PCB to the Reader is
Reader is not received within 30 seconds. detected.
E315 0520 00 E315 0541 00
Title Device abnormal completion Title Device timeout
An abnormal signal from the Main Controller PCB to the Reader is An image synchronous signal from the Main Controller PCB to the
detected. Reader is not received within 30 seconds.
E315 0521 00 E315 0550 00
Title Device timeout Title Device abnormal completion
An image synchronous signal from the Main Controller PCB to the An abnormal signal from the Main Controller PCB to the Reader is
Reader is not received within 30 seconds. detected.
E315 0530 00 E315 0551 00
Title Device abnormal completion Title System error
An abnormal signal from the Main Controller PCB to the Reader is E350 0000 00 Description System error
Description
detected. Remedy Contact the service company office
1. Turn OFF and then ON the main power. Title System error
E315 0531 00
2. Check the connection of the Main Controller PCB (including the E350 0001 00 Description System error
Remedy flat cable). Remedy Contact the service company office
3. Replace the flat cable. Title System error
Title System error
7-8
7
7-9
E Detail
■■E500 to E583
Code Code
E Detail
Title System error Location Item Description
Code Code
Title Communication error
As for the communication with the Finisher and the Host Machine,
Title Main Controller PCB communication error
Description the retry of the communication was over the specified number of
Description Main Controller PCB communication error.
times.
1. Turn OFF and then ON the main power
E351 0000 00 E500 0000 02 1. Check the installation of the Host Machine and the Finisher.
2. Disconnect and then connect the connector of the Main
Remedy 2. Check the connector connection between the DC Controller
Controller PCB.
Remedy PCB (PCB1) and the Finisher Controller PCB (PCB1).
3. Replace the Finisher Controller PCB (PCB1).
Title System error
Title Front Alignment Motor (M4) error
At initialization of the Front Alignment Plate, the Front Alignment
Title System error Description Plate failed to move from the Front Alignment Plate HP Sensor (S4)
E354 0002 00 Description System error although the Front Alignment Motor (M4) was driven for 10mm.
Remedy Contact the service company office E530 0001 02 1. Check the connector connection of the Front Alignment Plate
Title System error HP Sensor (S4) or the Front Alignment Motor (M4).
E355 0001 00 Description System error Remedy 2. Replace the Front Alignment Plate HP Sensor (S4).
Remedy Contact the service company office 3. Replace the Front Alignment Motor (M4).
Title System error 4. Replace the Finisher Controller PCB (PCB1).
E355 0002 00 Description System error Title Front Alignment Motor (M4) error
Remedy Contact the service company office At initialization of the Front Alignment Plate, the Front Alignment
Title System error Plate failed to be detected by the Front Alignment Plate HP
Description
E355 0003 00 Description System error Sensor (S4) although the Front Alignment Motor (M4) was driven
Remedy Contact the service company office for 780msec.
E530 0002 02
Title System error 1. Check the connector connection of the Front Alignment Plate
HP Sensor (S4) or the Front Alignment Motor (M4).
Remedy 2. Replace the Front Alignment Plate HP Sensor (S4).
3. Replace the Front Alignment Motor (M4).
T-7-5
Title Staple Motor (M9) error
The Stapler failed to move from the Staple HP Sensor (S11) within
Description
the staple execution time (450msec).
E531 8001 02
1. Check the connector connection of the Staple Unit.
Remedy 2. Replace the Staple Unit.
Title Staple Motor (M9) error
After execution of staple operation, the Staple Unit could not be
detected by the Staple HP Sensor (S11) within 460msec although
the motor was operated in the positive direction. And then, the
Description
Staple Unit could not be detected by the Staple HP Sensor (S11)
E531 8002 02
within 460msec although the motor was rotated in the negative
direction.
1. Check the connector connection of the Staple Unit.
Remedy 2. Replace the Staple Unit.
7-9
7
7-10
E Detail E Detail
Code Code Code Code
Title Rear Alignment Motor (M5) error Title Gripper Motor (M7) clock error
At initialization of the Rear Alignment Plate, the Rear Alignment When the Gripper Motor (M7) was driven, the Gripper Encoder
Description
Description Plate failed to move from the Rear Alignment Plate HP Sensor (S5) Sensor (S8) detected the rotation of 400 clocks or more.
although the Rear Alignment Motor (M5) was driven for 10mm. 1. Check the connector connection of the Gripper Encoder Sensor
E575 0004 02
E537 0001 02 1. Check the connector connection of the Rear Alignment Plate (S8) or the Gripper Motor (M7).
HP Sensor (S5) or the Rear Alignment Motor (M5). Remedy 2. Replace the Gripper Encoder Sensor (S8).
Remedy 2. Replace the Rear Alignment Plate HP Sensor (S5). 3. Replace the Gripper Motor (M7).
3. Replace the Rear Alignment Motor (M5). 4. Replace the Finisher Controller PCB (PCB1).
4. Replace the Finisher Controller PCB (PCB1). Title Paddle Motor (M3) error
Title Rear Alignment Motor (M5) error The Paddle failed to move from the Paddle HP Sensor (S3)
Description
At initialization of the Rear Alignment Plate, the Rear Alignment although the Paddle Motor (M3) was driven for 175 steps.
Plate failed to be detected by the Rear Alignment Plate HP Sensor 1. Check the connector connection of the Paddle HP Sensor (S3)
Description E577 0001 02
(S5) although the Rear Alignment Motor (M5) was driven for or the Paddle Motor (M3).
760msec. Remedy 2. Replace the Paddle HP Sensor (S3).
E537 0002 02
1. Check the connector connection of the Rear Alignment Plate 3. Replace the Paddle Motor (M3).
HP Sensor (S5) or the Rear Alignment Motor (M5). 4. Replace the Finisher Controller PCB (PCB1).
Remedy 2. Replace the Rear Alignment Plate HP Sensor (S5). Title Paddle Motor (M3) error
3. Replace the Rear Alignment Motor (M5). The Paddle failed to be detected by the Paddle HP Sensor (S3)
4. Replace the Finisher Controller PCB (PCB1). Description
although the Paddle Motor (M3) was driven for 2.0 seconds.
Title Stack Tray Shift Motor (M8) error 1. Check the connector connection of the Paddle HP Sensor (S3)
E577 0002 02
The Stack Tray shifting operation could not be completed although or the Paddle Motor (M3).
Description
the Stack Tray Shift Motor (M8) was driven for 4.0 seconds. Remedy 2. Replace the Paddle HP Sensor (S3).
1. Check the connector connection of the Stack Tray Paper Height 3. Replace the Paddle Motor (M3).
E540 0001 02
Sensor (S9) or the Stack Tray Shift Motor (M8). 4. Replace the Finisher Controller PCB (PCB1).
Remedy 2. Replace the Stack Tray Paper Height Sensor (S9). Title Tray Auxiliary Guide Motor (M6) error
3. Replace the Stack Tray Shift Motor (M8). The Tray Auxiliary Guide failed to move from the Tray Auxiliary
4. Replace the Finisher Controller PCB (PCB1). Description Guide HP Sensor (S6) although the Tray Auxiliary Guide Motor
Title Gripper Motor (M7) error (M6) was driven for 30mm.
When the Gripper Motor (M7) was driven, the Gripper failed to E583 0001 02 1. Check the connector connection of the Tray Auxiliary Guide HP
Description move from the Gripper HP Sensor (S7) although the Gripper Sensor (S6) or the Tray Auxiliary Guide Motor (M6).
Encoder Sensor (S8) detected the rotation of 100 clocks. Remedy 2. Replace the Tray Auxiliary Guide HP Sensor (S6).
1. Check the connector connection of the Gripper HP Sensor (S7), 3. Replace the Tray Auxiliary Guide Motor (M6).
E575 0001 02
Gripper Encoder Sensor (S8) or the Gripper Motor (M7). 4. Replace the Finisher Controller PCB (PCB1).
2. Replace the Gripper HP Sensor (S7). Title Tray Auxiliary Guide Motor (M6) error
Remedy
3. Replace the Gripper Encoder Sensor (S8). The Tray Auxiliary Guide failed to be detected by the Tray Auxiliary
4. Replace the Gripper Motor (M7). Description Guide HP Sensor (S6) although the Tray Auxiliary Guide Motor
5. Replace the Finisher Controller PCB (PCB1). (M6) was driven for 1.8 seconds.
Title Gripper Motor (M7) error E583 0002 02 1. Check the connector connection of the Tray Auxiliary Guide HP
The Gripper failed to be detected by the Gripper HP Sensor (S7) Sensor (S6) or the Tray Auxiliary Guide Motor (M6).
Description although the Gripper Motor (M7) was driven for specified times (1.7 Remedy 2. Replace the Tray Auxiliary Guide HP Sensor (S6).
seconds at initialization or 1.4 seconds at normal operation). 3. Replace the Tray Auxiliary Guide Motor (M6).
E575 0002 02 1. Check the connector connection of the Gripper HP Sensor (S7) 4. Replace the Finisher Controller PCB (PCB1).
or the Gripper Motor (M7). T-7-6
Remedy 2. Replace the Gripper HP Sensor (S7).
3. Replace the Gripper Motor (M7).
7-10
7
7-11
■■E602 to E996 E Detail
Code Code
E Detail
Location Item Description Title File system error on the HDD
Code Code The file system failed to be initialized properly at startup, I/O error
Title HDD detection error occurred in the file system at startup
HDD fails to be Ready. HDD is not formatted. Description Error, the system of the host machine has not been started
Error, the system of the host machine has not been started normally.
Description E602 0201 00
normally. Therefore the error code is not recorded in the log.
Therefore the error code is not recorded in the log. 1. Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
1. Turn OFF the main power and check connection of the HDD 2. Start in safe mode to format the HDD (all the data in the HDD is
cable. Then, turn ON the main power. Remedy
erased).
2. Erase all partitions that can be initialized (all of erasable 3. Replace the HDD.
E602 0001 00 partition data is erased). Title File system error on the HDD
Press (user mode key) => (2, 8) => (user mode key), Select the Error in file system writing after startup, I/O error occurred in the
following to enter 0: [1]:CHK-TYPE = 0; and select and execute Description
Remedy file system after startup
the following: [3]:HD-CLEAR = 1; and then turn OFF and ON the
E602 0211 00 1. Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
power.
2. Start in safe mode to format the HDD (all the data in the HDD is
3. Start in safe mode to format the HDD (all the data in the HDD is Remedy
erased).
erased).
3. Replace the HDD.
4. Replace the HDD.
Title File system error on the HDD
5. Replace Main Controller PCB (PCB2).
The file system failed to be initialized properly at startup, I/O error
occurred in the file system at startup
The file system failed to be initialized properly at startup, I/O error
Description Error, the system of the host machine has not been started
occurred in the file system at startup
normally.
Description Error, the system of the host machine has not been started
Therefore the error code is not recorded in the log.
normally.
1. Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
Therefore the error code is not recorded in the log.
2. Press (user mode key) => (2, 8) => (user mode key),Select the
E602 0101 00 following to enter 5: [1]:CHK-TYPE = 5, and select and execute
the following: [2]:HD-CHECK = 1; and then turn OFF and ON the
following to enter 4: [1]:CHK-TYPE = 4, and select and execute
power.
Remedy 3. Erase partition (all the partition data is erased).
power.
E602 0301 00 Press (user mode key) => (2, 8) => (user mode key),Select the
erased).
the following: [3]:HD-CLEAR = 1, and then turn OFF and ON the
4. Replace the HDD.
Remedy power.
Title File system error on the HDD 4. Erase all partitions that can be initialized (all of erasable
Error in file system writing after startup, I/O error occurred in the partition data is erased).
Description
file system after startup Press (user mode key) => (2, 8) => (user mode key),Select the
1. Turn OFF and then ON the main power. following to enter 0: [1]:CHK-TYPE = 0, and select and execute
2. Press (user mode key) => (2, 8) => (user mode key),Select the the following: [3]:HD-CLEAR = 1, and then turn OFF and On the
E602 0111 00 following to enter 4: [1]:CHK-TYPE = 4, and select and execute power.
the following: [2]:HD-CHECK = 1; and then turn OFF and ON the 5. Start in safe mode to format the HDD (all the data in the HDD is
Remedy
power. erased).
3. Start in safe mode to format the HDD (all the data in the HDD is 6. Replace the HDD.
erased).
4. Replace the HDD.
7-11
7
7-12
E Detail E Detail
Code Code Code Code
Title File system error on the HDD Title File system error on the HDD
Error in file system writing after startup, I/O error occurred in the Error in file system writing after startup, I/O error occurred in the
file system after startup file system after startup
2. Press (user mode key) => (2, 8) => (user mode key),Select the 2. Press (user mode key) => (2, 8) => (user mode key),Select the
following to enter 5: [1]:CHK-TYPE = 5, and select and execute following to enter 5: [1]:CHK-TYPE = 5, and select and execute
the following: [2]:HD-CHECK = 1; and then turn OFF and ON the the following: [2]:HD-CHECK = 1; and then turn OFF and ON the
power. power.
3. Erase partition (all the partition data is erased). 3. Erase partition (all the partition data is erased).
Press (user mode key) => (2, 8) => (user mode key),Select the Press (user mode key) => (2, 8) => (user mode key),Select the
E602 0311 00 E602 0511 00
the following: [3]:HD-CLEAR = 1, and then turn OFF and ON the the following: [3]:HD-CLEAR = 1, and then turn OFF and ON the
Remedy power. Remedy power.
4. Erase all partitions that can be initialized (all of erasable 4. Erase all partitions that can be initialized (all of erasable
partition data is erased). partition data is erased).
the following: [3]:HD-CLEAR = 1, and then turn OFF and On the the following: [3]:HD-CLEAR = 1, and then turn OFF and On the
power. power.
5. Start in safe mode to format the HDD (all the data in the HDD is 5. Start in safe mode to format the HDD (all the data in the HDD is
erased). erased).
6. Replace the HDD. 6. Replace the HDD.
The file system failed to be initialized properly at startup, I/O error The file system failed to be initialized properly at startup, I/O error
occurred in the file system at startup occurred in the file system at startup
Description Error, the system of the host machine has not been started Description Error, the system of the host machine has not been started
normally. normally.
Therefore the error code is not recorded in the log. Therefore the error code is not recorded in the log.
power. power.
E602 0501 00 Press (user mode key) => (2, 8) => (user mode key),Select the E602 0601 00 Press (user mode key) => (2, 8) => (user mode key),Select the
power. power.
erased). erased).
7-12
7
7-13
E Detail E Detail
Code Code Code Code
power. power.
E602 0611 00 E602 0711 00
power. power.
erased). erased).
normally. normally.
power. power.
power. power.
erased). erased).
7-13
7
7-14
E Detail E Detail
Code Code Code Code
power. power.
E602 0811 00 E602 0911 00
power. power.
erased). erased).
normally. normally.
E602 1001 00
Remedy
power. power.
3. Erase partition (all the partition data is erased). 3. Start in safe mode to format the HDD (all the data in the HDD is
E602 0901 00 Press (user mode key) => (2, 8) => (user mode key),Select the erased).
following to enter 5: [1]:CHK-TYPE = 5, and select and execute 4. Replace the HDD.
the following: [3]:HD-CLEAR = 1, and then turn OFF and ON the Title File system error on the HDD
Remedy power. Error in file system writing after startup, I/O error occurred in the
4. Erase all partitions that can be initialized (all of erasable Description
file system after startup
partition data is erased). 1. Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
Press (user mode key) => (2, 8) => (user mode key),Select the 2. Press (user mode key) => (2, 8) => (user mode key),Select the
following to enter 0: [1]:CHK-TYPE = 0, and select and execute E602 1011 00 following to enter 6: [1]:CHK-TYPE = 6, and select and execute
the following: [3]:HD-CLEAR = 1, and then turn OFF and On the the following: [2]:HD-CHECK = 1; and then turn OFF and ON the
power. Remedy
power.
erased). erased).
7-14
7
7-15
E Detail E Detail
Code Code Code Code
normally. normally.
power. power.
power. power.
erased). erased).
power. power.
E602 1111 00 E602 1211 00
power. power.
erased). erased).
7-15
7
7-16
E Detail E Detail
Code Code Code Code
normally. normally.
E602 1301 00
Remedy
power. power.
3. Start in safe mode to format the HDD (all the data in the HDD is 3. Erase partition (all the partition data is erased).
erased). E602 1401 00 Press (user mode key) => (2, 8) => (user mode key),Select the
4. Replace the HDD. following to enter 2: [1]:CHK-TYPE = 2, and select and execute
Title File system error on the HDD the following: [3]:HD-CLEAR = 1, and then turn OFF and ON the
Error in file system writing after startup, I/O error occurred in the Remedy power.
Description 4. Erase all partitions that can be initialized (all of erasable
1. Turn OFF and then ON the main power. partition data is erased).
2. Press (user mode key) => (2, 8) => (user mode key),Select the Press (user mode key) => (2, 8) => (user mode key),Select the
E602 1311 00 following to enter 7: [1]:CHK-TYPE = 7, and select and execute following to enter 0: [1]:CHK-TYPE = 0, and select and execute
the following: [2]:HD-CHECK = 1; and then turn OFF and ON the the following: [3]:HD-CLEAR = 1, and then turn OFF and On the
Remedy power.
power.
erased). erased).
Error in file system writing after startup, I/O error occurred in the
Description
power.
3. Erase partition (all the partition data is erased).
Press (user mode key) => (2, 8) => (user mode key),Select the
E602 1411 00
the following: [3]:HD-CLEAR = 1, and then turn OFF and ON the
Remedy power.
4. Erase all partitions that can be initialized (all of erasable
partition data is erased).
Press (user mode key) => (2, 8) => (user mode key),Select the
the following: [3]:HD-CLEAR = 1, and then turn OFF and On the
power.
erased).
6. Replace the HDD.
7-16
7
7-17
E Detail E Detail
Code Code Code Code
Title File system error on the HDD Title Image memory is faulty or insufficient
The file system failed to be initialized properly at startup, I/O error 1536MB memory needs to be installed (insufficient memory for the
E604 1536 00 Description
occurred in the file system at startup model)
Description Error, the system of the host machine has not been started Remedy 1. Install a 1536MB or larger main memory
normally. An error code to prevent repeated resend due to power shutdown
E602 FF01 00 Title
Therefore the error code is not recorded in the log. during FAX transmission
1. Turn OFF and then ON the main power. Description Repeated rebooting and resending in a short period of time
2. Start in safe mode to format the HDD (all the data in the HDD is E611 0000 07 1. Clear the FAX job information.
Remedy
erased). Execute the following: COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > FXTX-
3. Replace the HDD. Remedy
CLR
Title File system error on the HDD 2. Turn OFF and ON the main power.
Error in file system writing after startup, I/O error occurred in the Title Image memory is faulty or insufficient
Description
file system after startup E613 0512 00 Description No necessary memory at Main Controller PCB
E602 FF11 00 1. Turn OFF and then ON the main power. Remedy Make a 512MB memory at Main Controller PCB (PCB2).
2. Start in safe mode to format the HDD (all the data in the HDD is Title Image memory is faulty or insufficient
Remedy
erased).
E613 1024 00 Description No necessary memory at Main Controller PCB
3. Replace the HDD.
Remedy Make a 1024MB memory at Main Controller PCB (PCB2).
Error in authentication between the host machine and the
Title Title Image memory is faulty or insufficient
Encryption Board
E613 1536 00 Description No necessary memory at Main Controller PCB
Description I/O error occurred in the file system after startup
Remedy Make a 1536MB memory at Main Controller PCB (PCB2).
1. After checking connection of the Encryption Board, remove and
E602 2000 00 Title Flash PCB detection error
then install the board, and then turn OFF and ON the main power.
2. Execute key clear by SST (to make an unformatted disc). Unable to recognize the Flash PCB. The Flash PCB is not
Remedy Description
Execute step 3 because starting an unformatted disc causes formatted.
E602-0001 1. Turn OFF the main power and check connection of the Flash
3. Start in safe mode and format the HDD. PCB, and then turn ON the main power.
Authentication error between the host machine and the Encryption 2. Erase all partitions that can be initialized (all of erasable
Title partition data is erased).
Board
E614 0001 00 Press (user mode key) => (2, 8) => (user mode key),Select the
Description Mistake in the procedure for installing the HDD Encryption Board
following to enter 0: [1]:CHK-TYPE = 0, and execute the following:
1. Remove the HDD Encryption Board, and start the machine with Remedy
E602 5001 00 [3]:HD-CLEAR = 1, and then turn OFF and ON the power.
only the HDD connected.
3. Start in safe mode and format the Flash PCB, and then reinstall
Remedy 2. Execute service mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL >
the system using SST or USB.
HD-CRYP.
4. Replace the Flash PCB and reinstall the system using SST or
3. Install the HDD Encryption Board again.
USB.
Title HDD error
E602 5002 00 Description A non-genuine HDD has been detected.
Remedy Install a genuine HDD.
Title Image memory is faulty or insufficient
512MB memory needs to be installed (insufficient memory for the
model)
Remedy 1. Install a 512MB or larger main memory
Title Image memory is faulty or insufficient
1024MB memory needs to be installed (insufficient memory for the
model)
Remedy 1. Install a 1024MB or larger main memory
7-17
7
7-18
E Detail E Detail
Code Code Code Code
Title Error in file system on the Flash PCB Title Error in file system on the Flash PCB
Description The file system failed to be initialized properly at startup Description The file system failed to be initialized properly at startup
1. Turn OFF the main power and check connection of the Flash 1. Turn OFF the main power and check connection of the Flash
PCB, and then turn ON the main power. PCB, and then turn ON the main power.
E614 0002 00 E614 0005 00
following to enter 0: [1]:CHK-TYPE = 0, and execute the following: following to enter 0: [1]:CHK-TYPE = 0, and execute the following:
Remedy Remedy
[3]:HD-CLEAR = 1, and then turn OFF and ON the power. [3]:HD-CLEAR = 1, and then turn OFF and ON the power.
3. Start in safe mode and format the Flash PCB, and then reinstall 3. Start in safe mode and format the Flash PCB, and then reinstall
the system using SST or USB. the system using SST or USB.
4. Replace the Flash PCB and reinstall the system using SST or 4. Replace the Flash PCB and reinstall the system using SST or
USB. USB.
5. Replace Main Controller PCB (PCB2). 5. Replace Main Controller PCB (PCB2).
Description I/O error occurred in the file system at startup Description Bootable is not found on the Flash PCB.
E614 0003 00 E614 0006 00
Remedy Remedy
USB. USB.
Description The file system failed to be initialized properly at startup Description The ICC Profile is not found on the Flash PCB.
E614 0004 00 E614 0007 00
Remedy Remedy
USB. USB.
7-18
7
7-19
E Detail E Detail
Code Code Code Code
Description Thai font is not found on the Flash PCB. Simplified Chinese, Hangul, and traditional Chinese fonts are not
Description
1. Turn OFF the main power and check connection of the Flash found on the Flash PCB.
PCB, and then turn ON the main power. 1. Turn OFF the main power and check connection of the Flash
2. Erase all partitions that can be initialized (all of erasable PCB, and then turn ON the main power.
partition data is erased). 2. Erase all partitions that can be initialized (all of erasable
Press (user mode key) => (2, 8) => (user mode key),Select the partition data is erased).
E614 0008 00
following to enter 0: [1]:CHK-TYPE = 0, and execute the following: E614 0011 00 Press (user mode key) => (2, 8) => (user mode key),Select the
Remedy
[3]:HD-CLEAR = 1, and then turn OFF and ON the power. following to enter 0: [1]:CHK-TYPE = 0, and execute the following:
Remedy
3. Start in safe mode and format the Flash PCB, and then reinstall [3]:HD-CLEAR = 1, and then turn OFF and ON the power.
the system using SST or USB. 3. Start in safe mode and format the Flash PCB, and then reinstall
4. Replace the Flash PCB and reinstall the system using SST or the system using SST or USB.
USB. 4. Replace the Flash PCB and reinstall the system using SST or
5. Replace Main Controller PCB (PCB2). USB.
Title Error in file system on the Flash PCB 5. Replace Main Controller PCB (PCB2).
Description The font for Print Report is not found on the Flash PCB. Title Error in file system on the Flash PCB
1. Turn OFF the main power and check connection of the Flash Description The web browser archive is not found on the Flash PCB.
PCB, and then turn ON the main power. 1. Turn OFF the main power and check connection of the Flash
2. Erase all partitions that can be initialized (all of erasable PCB, and then turn ON the main power.
partition data is erased). 2. Erase all partitions that can be initialized (all of erasable
Press (user mode key) => (2, 8) => (user mode key),Select the partition data is erased).
E614 0009 00
following to enter 0: [1]:CHK-TYPE = 0, and execute the following: Press (user mode key) => (2, 8) => (user mode key),Select the
Remedy E614 0012 00
[3]:HD-CLEAR = 1, and then turn OFF and ON the power. following to enter 0: [1]:CHK-TYPE = 0, and execute the following:
Remedy
3. Start in safe mode and format the Flash PCB, and then reinstall [3]:HD-CLEAR = 1, and then turn OFF and ON the power.
4. Replace the Flash PCB and reinstall the system using SST or the system using SST or USB.
USB. 4. Replace the Flash PCB and reinstall the system using SST or
Simplified Chinese, Hangul, and traditional Chinese fonts are not Title Error in file system on the Flash PCB
Description
found on the Flash PCB. Description Error in file system writing after startup
E614 0010 00 Press (user mode key) => (2, 8) => (user mode key),Select the Press (user mode key) => (2, 8) => (user mode key),Select the
E614 0013 00
Remedy Remedy
USB. USB.
7-19
7
7-20
E Detail E Detail
Code Code Code Code
normally. normally.
E614 0101 00 E614 0301 00
Remedy Remedy
3. Replace the Flash PCB and install the system using SST or 3. Replace the Flash PCB and install the system using SST or
USB. USB.
The file system failed to be initialized properly after startup, Error The file system failed to be initialized properly after startup, Error
in file system writing after startup in file system writing after startup
E614 0111 00 2. Start in safe mode and format the Flash PCB, and then reinstall E614 0311 00 2. Start in safe mode and format the Flash PCB, and then reinstall
Remedy Remedy
USB. USB.
normally. normally.
E614 0201 00
2. Start in safe mode and format the Flash PCB, and then reinstall 2. Initialize the corresponding partition (all the data in the
the system using SST or USB. corresponding partition is erased).
Remedy
3. Replace the Flash PCB and install the system using SST or Press (user mode key) => (2, 8) => (user mode key),Select the
USB. following to enter 5: [1]:CHK-TYPE = 5, and execute the following:
E614 0501 00
4. Replace Main Controller PCB (PCB2). [3]:HD-CLEAR = 1, and then turn OFF and ON the power.
Title Error in file system on the Flash PCB 3. Erase all partitions that can be initialized (all of erasable
The file system failed to be initialized properly after startup, Error partition data is erased).
Description Remedy
in file system writing after startup Press (user mode key) => (2, 8) => (user mode key),Select the
1. Turn OFF and then ON the main power. following to enter 0: [1]:CHK-TYPE = 0, and execute the following:
E614 0211 00 2. Start in safe mode and format the Flash PCB, and then reinstall [3]HD-CLEAR = 1, and then turn OFF and ON the power.
Remedy the system using SST or USB.
3. Replace the Flash PCB and install the system using SST or
USB. 5. Replace the Flash PCB and install the system using SST or
7-20
7
7-21
E Detail E Detail
Code Code Code Code
2. Initialize the corresponding partition (all the data in the 2. Initialize the corresponding partition (all the data in the
corresponding partition is erased). corresponding partition is erased).
E614 0511 00 3. Erase all partitions that can be initialized (all of erasable E614 0611 00 3. Erase all partitions that can be initialized (all of erasable
Remedy Remedy
[3]HD-CLEAR = 1, and then turn OFF and ON the power. [3]:HD-CLEAR = 1, and then turn OFF and ON the power.
USB. USB.
normally. normally.
E614 0601 00 E614 0701 00
Remedy Remedy
USB. USB.
7-21
7
7-22
E Detail E Detail
Code Code Code Code
E614 0711 00 3. Erase all partitions that can be initialized (all of erasable E614 0811 00 3. Erase all partitions that can be initialized (all of erasable
Remedy Remedy
USB. USB.
normally. normally.
E614 0901 00
2. Initialize the corresponding partition (all the data in the 2. Start in safe mode and format the Flash PCB, and then reinstall
corresponding partition is erased). the system using SST or USB.
Remedy
Press (user mode key) => (2, 8) => (user mode key),Select the 3. Replace the Flash PCB and install the system using SST or
following to enter 3: [1]:CHK-TYPE = 3, and execute the following: USB.
E614 0801 00
[3]:HD-CLEAR = 1, and then turn OFF and ON the power. 4. Replace Main Controller PCB (PCB2).
3. Erase all partitions that can be initialized (all of erasable Title Error in file system on the Flash PCB
partition data is erased). The file system failed to be initialized properly after startup, Error
Remedy Description
Press (user mode key) => (2, 8) => (user mode key),Select the in file system writing after startup
following to enter 0: [1]:CHK-TYPE = 0, and execute the following: 1. Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
[3]:HD-CLEAR = 1, and then turn OFF and ON the power. E614 0911 00 2. Start in safe mode and format the Flash PCB, and then reinstall
4. Start in safe mode and format the Flash PCB, and then reinstall the system using SST or USB.
the system using SST or USB. Remedy
5. Replace the Flash PCB and install the system using SST or USB.
USB. 4. Replace Main Controller PCB (PCB2).
7-22
7
7-23
E Detail E Detail
Code Code Code Code
normally. normally.
E614 1101 00
2. Initialize the corresponding partition (all the data in the 2. Start in safe mode and format the Flash PCB, and then reinstall
corresponding partition is erased). the system using SST or USB.
Remedy
Press (user mode key) => (2, 8) => (user mode key),Select the 3. Replace the Flash PCB and install the system using SST or
following to enter 2: [1]:CHK-TYPE = 2, and execute the following: USB.
E614 1001 00
[3]:HD-CLEAR = 1, and then turn OFF and ON the power. 4. Replace Main Controller PCB (PCB2).
3. Erase all partitions that can be initialized (all of erasable Title Error in file system on the Flash PCB
partition data is erased). The file system failed to be initialized properly after startup, Error
Remedy Description
Press (user mode key) => (2, 8) => (user mode key),Select the in file system writing after startup
following to enter 0: [1]:CHK-TYPE = 0, and execute the following: 1. Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
[3]:HD-CLEAR = 1, and then turn OFF and ON the power. E614 1111 00 2. Start in safe mode and format the Flash PCB, and then reinstall
4. Start in safe mode and format the Flash PCB, and then reinstall the system using SST or USB.
the system using SST or USB. Remedy
5. Replace the Flash PCB and install the system using SST or USB.
USB. 4. Replace Main Controller PCB (PCB2).
6. Replace Main Controller PCB (PCB2). Title Error in file system on the Flash PCB
Title Error in file system on the Flash PCB The file system failed to be initialized properly at startup, I/O error
The file system failed to be initialized properly after startup, Error occurred in the file system at startup
Description
in file system writing after startup Description Error, the system of the host machine has not been started
1. Turn OFF and then ON the main power. normally.
2. Initialize the corresponding partition (all the data in the Therefore the error code is not recorded in the log.
corresponding partition is erased). 1. Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
Press (user mode key) => (2, 8) => (user mode key),Select the 2. Initialize the corresponding partition (all the data in the
following to enter 2: [1]:CHK-TYPE = 2, and execute the following: corresponding partition is erased).
[3]:HD-CLEAR = 1, and then turn OFF and ON the power. Select the following to enter 2: [1]:CHK-TYPE = 2, and execute
E614 1011 00 3. Erase all partitions that can be initialized (all of erasable the following: [3]:HD-CLEAR = 1, and then turn OFF and ON the
partition data is erased). E614 1201 00
Remedy power.
Press (user mode key) => (2, 8) => (user mode key),Select the 3. Erase all partitions that can be initialized (all of erasable
following to enter 0: [1]:CHK-TYPE = 0, and execute the following: partition data is erased).
[3]:HD-CLEAR = 1, and then turn OFF and ON the power. Remedy
Select the following to enter 0: [1]:CHK-TYPE = 0, and execute
4. Start in safe mode and format the Flash PCB, and then reinstall the following: [3]:HD-CLEAR = 1, and then turn OFF and ON the
the system using SST or USB. power.
5. Replace the Flash PCB and install the system using SST or 4. Start in safe mode and format the Flash PCB, and then reinstall
USB. the system using SST or USB.
6. Replace Main Controller PCB (PCB2). 5. Replace the Flash PCB and install the system using SST or
USB.
7-23
7
7-24
E Detail E Detail
Code Code Code Code
The file system failed to be initialized properly after startup, Error Description The file system failed to be initialized properly at startup
Description
in file system writing after startup 1. Check the cable or the power connector.
1. Turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the above measure does not solve the problem, start in safe
2. Initialize the corresponding partition (all the data in the E614 4002 00 mode to format the entire Flash PCB, reinstall the system using
corresponding partition is erased). Remedy SST or USB (System, Lang, RUI), and then turn OFF and ON the
Select the following to enter 2: [1]:CHK-TYPE = 2, and execute main power.
the following: [3]:HD-CLEAR = 1, and then turn OFF and ON the 3. The Flash PCB is detected as faulty; therefore, replace the
power. Flash PCB and reinstall the system using SST or USB.
E614 1211 00 3. Erase all partitions that can be initialized (all of erasable Title Error in file system on the Flash PCB
partition data is erased). Description I/O error occurred in the file system at startup
Remedy
Select the following to enter 0: [1]:CHK-TYPE = 0, and execute 1. Check the cable or the power connector.
the following: [3]:HD-CLEAR = 1, and then turn OFF and ON the 2. If the above measure does not solve the problem, start in safe
power. E614 4003 00 mode to format the entire Flash PCB, reinstall the system using
4. Start in safe mode and format the Flash PCB, and then reinstall Remedy SST or USB (System, Lang, RUI), and then turn OFF and ON the
the system using SST or USB. main power.
5. Replace the Flash PCB and install the system using SST or 3. The Flash PCB is detected as faulty; therefore, replace the
USB. Flash PCB and reinstall the system using SST or USB.
6. Replace Main Controller PCB (PCB2). Title Error in file system on the Flash PCB
Title Error in file system on the Flash PCB Description The file system failed to be initialized properly at startup
The OS cannot be recognized. 1. Check the cable or the power connector.
Description The host machine was started normally immediately after the 2. If the above measure does not solve the problem, start in safe
Flash PCB was replaced. E614 4010 00 mode to format the entire Flash PCB, reinstall the system using
If the Flash PCB has just been replaced: Remedy SST or USB (System, Lang, RUI), and then turn OFF and ON the
1. Start in safe mode, and install the system. main power.
3. The Flash PCB is detected as faulty; therefore, replace the
E614 4000 00 If the Flash PCB has not been replaced: Flash PCB and reinstall the system using SST or USB.
1. Check the cable and Main Power Connector. Title Error in file system on the Flash PCB
Remedy 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start in safe
Description Error in file system writing after startup
mode to format the entire Flash PCB, reinstall the system using
1. Check the cable or the power connector.
SST or USB (System, Lang, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON
2. If the above measure does not solve the problem, start in safe
the main power.
E614 4011 00 mode to format the entire Flash PCB, reinstall the system using
3. It can be caused by Flash PCB failure; therefore, replace the
Remedy SST or USB (System, Lang, RUI), and then turn OFF and ON the
Flash PCB and reinstall the system using SST or USB.
main power.
Title Error in file system on the Flash PCB
Description Error in file system writing after startup Flash PCB and reinstall the system using SST or USB.
1. Check the cable or the power connector. Title Error in file system on the Flash PCB
Description The file system failed to be initialized properly at startup
1. Check the cable or the power connector.
main power.
main power.
7-24
7
7-25
E Detail E Detail
Code Code Code Code
Description SRAM device access-related error The file system failed to be initialized properly at startup, I/O error
1. Check the cable or the power connector. occurred in the file system at startup
2. If the above measure does not solve the problem, start in safe Description Error, the system of the host machine has not been started
E614 9000 00 mode to format the entire Flash PCB, reinstall the system using normally.
E614 FF01 00
Remedy SST or USB (System, Lang, RUI), and then turn OFF and ON the Therefore the error code is not recorded in the log.
main power. 1. Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
3. The Flash PCB is detected as faulty; therefore, replace the 2. Replace the Flash PCB and install the system using SST or
Remedy
Flash PCB and reinstall the system using SST or USB. USB.
Description Error in securing memory/invalid memory Title Error in file system on the Flash PCB
1. Check the cable or the power connector. The file system failed to be initialized properly after startup, Error
Description
2. If the above measure does not solve the problem, start in safe in file system writing after startup
E614 9001 00 mode to format the entire Flash PCB, reinstall the system using E614 FF11 00 1. Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
Remedy SST or USB (System, Lang, RUI), and then turn OFF and ON the 2. Replace the Flash PCB and install the system using SST or
Remedy
main power. USB.
3. The Flash PCB is detected as faulty; therefore, replace the 3. Replace Main Controller PCB (PCB2).
Flash PCB and reinstall the system using SST or USB. Title Error in self-diagnosis of the encryption module
Title Error in file system on the Flash PCB Description An error was found in self-diagnosis of the encryption library.
E615 0001 00
Description Setting file error 1. Reinstall the system software.
Remedy
1. Check the cable or the power connector. 2. Replace the HDD.
2. If the above measure does not solve the problem, start in safe Title FAX Board communication error
E614 9002 00 mode to format the entire Flash PCB, reinstall the system using The specified number of errors was detected with FAX Board
Remedy SST or USB (System, Lang, RUI), and then turn OFF and ON the Description
communication
main power. E674 0001 07 1. Check wire connection between the FAX Board and the Main
3. The Flash PCB is detected as faulty; therefore, replace the Controller PCB.
Flash PCB and reinstall the system using SST or USB. Remedy
2. Replace the FAX Board.
Title Error in file system on the Flash PCB 3. Replace the Main Controller PCB (PCB2).
Description Parameter error Title FAX Board communication error
1. Check the cable or the power connector. The specified number of errors was detected with FAX Board
2. If the above measure does not solve the problem, start in safe Description
communication
E614 9003 00 mode to format the entire Flash PCB, reinstall the system using E674 0002 07 1. Check wire connection between the FAX Board and the Main
Remedy SST or USB (System, Lang, RUI), and then turn OFF and ON the Controller PCB.
main power. Remedy
3. The Flash PCB is detected as faulty; therefore, replace the 3. Replace the Main Controller PCB (PCB2).
Flash PCB and reinstall the system using SST or USB. Title FAX Board communication error
Title Error in file system on the Flash PCB Description Error in access of the modem IC used by FAX
Description Startup error 1. Check wire connection between the FAX Board and the Main
1. Check the cable or the power connector. E674 0004 07
Controller PCB.
2. If the above measure does not solve the problem, start in safe Remedy
E614 9004 00 mode to format the entire Flash PCB, reinstall the system using 3. Replace the Main Controller PCB (PCB2).
main power.
7-25
7
7-26
E Detail E Detail
Code Code Code Code
Title FAX Board communication error Title Communication error (retransmission request reception error)
Description Error in access of the port IC used by OnBoardFax Communication between the Host Machine and the Finisher was
Description
1. Check wire connection between the FAX Board and the Main lost.
E674 0008 07
Controller PCB. 1. Check the installation of the Host Machine and the Finisher.
Remedy E711 0001 05
2. Replace the FAX Board. 2. Check the connector connection between the DC Controller
3. Replace the Main Controller PCB (PCB2). Remedy PCB (PCB1) and the Finisher Controller PCB (PCB1).
Title FAX Board communication error 3. Replace the Finisher Controller PCB (PCB1).
An error was detected in access of the modem IC or port IC used 4. Replace the DC Controller PCB (PCB1).
Description
by Fax Error in communication with the Finisher (communication retry
Title
E674 000C 07 1. Check wire connection between the FAX Board and the Main failure)
Controller PCB. The communication did not connect again although the error retry
Remedy Description
2. Replace the FAX Board. was executed after failing to communicate with the Finisher.
3. Replace the Main Controller PCB (PCB2). E713 0000 05 1. Check the installation of the Host Machine and the Finisher.
Title FAX Board communication error 2. Check the connector connection between the DC Controller
E674 0010 07 Description Error in timer device to be used by FAX at activation Remedy PCB (PCB1) and the Finisher Controller PCB (PCB1).
Remedy 1. Replace the Main Controller PCB (PCB2). 3. Replace the Finisher Controller PCB (PCB1).
Title FAX Board communication error 4. Replace the DC Controller PCB (PCB1).
E674 0011 07 Description Error when the timer device to be used by FAX is started Title Error in communication with the Cassette Module
Remedy 1. Replace the Main Controller PCB (PCB2). The communication did not connect again although the error
Description retry was executed after failing to communicate with the Cassette
Title FAX Board communication error
Module.
Description Checksum error of USB-FAX MAINROM
E674 0030 07 1. Check the installation of the Host Machine and the Cassette
When the power is turned ON, get in the download mode from E716 0000 05
Remedy Module.
service mode to execute downloading of USBFAX MAINROM.
2. Check the connector connection between the DC Controller
Title FAX Board communication error Remedy
PCB (PCB1) and the Cassette Module Controller PCB (PCB101).
After completion of fax communication, writing of the 3. Replace the Cassette Module Controller PCB (PCB101).
Description communication information (log) failed, and the log cannot be 4. Replace the DC Controller PCB (PCB1).
E674 0100 07 read.
Title Coin vendor error
Turn OFF and then ON the power.
Error when the coin vendor is started
Remedy (Points to note) All the previous communication information will be
- The Coin Vendor, which must have been connected before the
cleared. Description
power was turned OFF, is not connected when the power is turned
Title HDD access error ON
Description An error occurred when accessing the HDD. Check cable connection between the charging management
1. Turn OFF and then ON the power. E719 0001 00 equipment and the host machine.
E674 0200 07
2. System all format and installation
Remedy
3. Replace the HDD. While the charging management equipment is connected for
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB. Remedy
operation, clear the error in the case of switching to the operation
Title Print server error without the charging management equipment.
Error is detected by checking of the mother board at startup of the (To prevent a misuse by removing the charging management
Description
E677 0003 00 print server equipment, this error code is displayed.)
1. Check cable connection and turn ON the power again.
Remedy
2. Reinstall the printer server.
7-26
7
7-27
E Detail E Detail
Code Code Code Code
Title Coin vendor error Title Coin vendor error
IPC error at coin vendor operation IPC error at NewCardReader operation
Description
- Open circuit of IPC, unable to recover the IPC communication Open circuit of IPC, unable to recover the IPC communication
Description
- When open circuit of the pickup/delivery signal cable is detected Check cable connection between the charging management
- Invalid connection is detected equipment and the host machine.
Check cable connection between the charging management E719 0012 00
E719 0002 00 equipment and the host machine. While the charging management equipment is connected for
Remedy
While the charging management equipment is connected for without the charging management equipment.
Remedy
operation, clear the error in the case of switching to the operation (To prevent a misuse by removing the charging management
without the charging management equipment. equipment, this error code is displayed.)
(To prevent a misuse by removing the charging management Title Serial communication error when the NewCardReader is started
equipment, this error code is displayed.) Unable to start communication with the Serial NewCardReader at
Description
Title Coin vendor error startup
- Communication error with the coin manager occurs during unit E719 0031 00 1. Check if the cable of Serial NewCardReader is open circuit.
Description
price acquisition at startup. 2. Remove the Serial NewCardReader.
Remedy
Check cable connection between the charging management COPIER > Function > CLEAR > CARD
equipment and the host machine. COPIER > Function > CLEAR > ERR
E719 0003 00 Title Serial communication error after the NewCardReader was started
While the charging management equipment is connected for Although communication with the Card Reader was possible at
Remedy E719 0032 00 Description
operation, clear the error in the case of switching to the operation startup, it became unavailable in the middle of communication
without the charging management equipment. Remedy Check if the NewCardReader cable is open circuit
(To prevent a misuse by removing the charging management Title PDL software error
equipment, this error code is displayed.)
Description Initialization error
Title Coin vendor error E730 1001 00 1. PDL reset processing (user mode > function settings > printer >
The coin vendor was connected to a model that does not support Remedy printer settings > utility > Reset Printer).
the coin vendor 2. Turn OFF and then ON the power.
Remedy 1. Disconnect the coin vendor. Title PDL software error
Title Coin vendor error Description Systematic fatal error occurs
Error when the NewCardReader is started E730 100A 00 1. PDL reset processing (user mode > function settings > printer >
- The NewCardReader, which must have been connected before Remedy printer settings > utility > Reset Printer).
Description
the power was turned OFF, is not connected when the power is 2. Turn OFF and then ON the power.
turned ON.)
Title PDL communication error
Check cable connection between the charging management
No reply from PDL. No reply from PDL due to failure or absence of
E719 0011 00 equipment and the host machine. Description
the controller firmware
1. PDL reset processing (user mode > function settings > printer >
While the charging management equipment is connected for
Remedy E730 A006 00 printer settings > utility > Reset Printer).
2. Turn OFF and then ON the power.
without the charging management equipment. Remedy
3. Check connection of Main Controller PCB.
(To prevent a misuse by removing the charging management
4. Reinstall the controller firmware.
equipment, this error code is displayed.)
Title Mismatched PDL version
Mismatch in version of the control software between the host
E730 A007 00 Description
machine and the PDL.
Remedy System all format and installation.
7-27
7
7-28
E Detail E Detail
Code Code Code Code
Title PDL embedded font error Title Printer communication error
Description Broken font data A communication error between the DC Controller PCB and the
Description
E730 B013 00 1. Turn OFF and then ON the power. Main Controller PCB is detected at startup.
Remedy 2. Reinstall the system using SST or USB. 1. Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
3. System all format and reinstall the system using SST or USB. 2. Check the connection of the Flexible Cable between the DC
Title Initialization error E733 0000 00 Controller PCB and the Main Controller PCB.
Description An error, such as failure in memory retrieval at startup, occurs 3. Replace the Flexible Cable.
E730 C000 00 Remedy
1. System all format and installation. 4. Check the power of the DC Controller PCB. (Check if the
Remedy initialization operation is executed at startup.)
Title HDD access error 5. Replace the DC Controller PCB.
Description An error occurs when accessing to the HDD
Title Printer communication error
E730 C001 00 A communication error between the DC Controller PCB and the
erased). Description
Remedy Main Controller PCB is detected at startup.
2. Replace the HDD.
3. Replace Main Controller PCB (PCB2). 1. Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
Title Error in Main Controller PCB 2. Check the connection of the Flexible Cable between the DC
E733 0001 00 Controller PCB and the Main Controller PCB.
Description Unable to recognize the Surf board
E731 3000 00 3. Replace the Flexible Cable.
1. Check connection of Main Controller PCB. Remedy
Remedy 4. Check the power of the DC Controller PCB. (Check if the
initialization operation is executed at startup.)
Title Error in Main Controller PCB
5. Replace the DC Controller PCB.
Description Failure in Surf initialization 6. Replace the Main Controller PCB.
E731 3001 00
1. Check connection of Main Controller PCB. Title Printer communication error
Remedy
A communication error between the DC Controller PCB and the
Title Error in Main Controller PCB Description
Main Controller PCB is detected at startup.
Description Failure in Surf initialization 1. Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
E731 3002 00
1. Check connection of Main Controller PCB. 2. Check the connection of the Flexible Cable between the DC
Remedy
2. Replace Main Controller PCB (PCB2). E733 0005 00 Controller PCB and the Main Controller PCB.
Title Error in Main Controller PCB 3. Replace the Flexible Cable.
Remedy
Although it works normally at the software side, there is no video 4. Check the power of the DC Controller PCB. (Check if the
Description
E731 3015 00 data into CL1-G initialization operation is executed at startup.)
1. Check connection of Main Controller PCB. 5. Replace the DC Controller PCB.
Remedy
2. Replace Main Controller PCB (PCB2). 6. Replace the Main Controller PCB.
Title Scanner communication error Title Printer communication error
Description Vertical Synchronizing signal detection error A communication error between the DC Controller PCB and the
Description
1. Check the connection of the Connector with the Reader. Main Controller PCB is detected at startup.
E732 0010 00 2. Check the power of the Reader (check if the initialization 1. Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
Remedy operation is executed at startup). 2. Check the connection of the Flexible Cable between the DC
3. Replace the Reader Relay PCB. E733 0006 00 Controller PCB and the Main Controller PCB.
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB. 3. Replace the Flexible Cable.
Remedy
4. Check the power of the DC Controller PCB. (Check if the
initialization operation is executed at startup.)
5. Replace the DC Controller PCB.
7-28
7
7-29
E Detail E Detail
Code Code Code Code
Title Printer communication error Title System error
The Finisher connection information differs between the Main E744 2000 00 Description System error
Controller PCB and the DC Controller PCB. Remedy Contact the service company office
The information on the Main Controller PCB side is overwritten by Title Engine ID error
turning OFF and then ON the power. Self-check error of Image Analysis Board (HW board used for
Remedy Turn OFF and then ON the power Description
PCAM)
Title Printer communication error 1. Replace the Image Analysis Board (HW board used for PCAM).
E746 0021 00
A communication error between the DC Controller PCB and the 2. As a temporary measure, remove the Image Analysis Board and
Description
Main Controller PCB is detected at startup. Remedy get in service mode:
E733 F000 00 1. Turn OFF and then ON the main power. COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR > ST-JBLK (Lv2); set ST-JBLK
2. Check the connection of the Flexible Cable between the DC from 1 to 0, and turn OFF and then ON the power.
Remedy
Controller PCB and the Main Controller PCB. Title Engine ID error
3. Replace the Flexible Cable. Description Wrong version of Image Analysis Board
Title Ethernet Board error 1. Update the firmware of the Image Analysis Board.
E740 0002 00 Description Invalid MAC address E746 0022 00 2. As a temporary measure, remove the Image Analysis Board and
Remedy 1. Replace the LAN card Remedy get in service mode:
Title Ethernet Board error COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR > ST-JBLK (Lv2); set ST-JBLK
E740 0003 00 Description Invalid MAC address from 1 to 0, and turn OFF and then ON the power.
Remedy 1. Replace the LAN card Title Engine ID error
Title DDI communication error Description No reply from the Image Analysis Board
SCI error, reception data NG, reception timeout, SEQ timeout 1. Check if the Image Analysis Board is correctly installed.
Description 2. Turn OFF and then ON the power.
error
1. Turn OFF and then ON the power. E746 0023 00 3. If the problem is not fixed, replace the Option Board.
E743 0000 00 2. Check connection of the cable between the Reader and the Remedy 4. As a temporary measure, remove the Image Analysis Board and
Controller. get in service mode:
Remedy COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR > ST-JBLK (Lv2); set ST-JBLK
3. Check voltage (+24V and +12V) on the Reader Controller PCB.
4. Replace the Reader Controller PCB (PCB3). from 1 to 0, and turn OFF and then ON the power.
5. Replace Main Controller PCB (PCB2). Title Engine ID error
Title Language file error Description Operation error of the Image Analysis Board
Mismatch between the language version in the Flash PCB and the 1. Turn OFF and then ON the power.
Description 2. If the problem is not fixed, replace the Image Analysis Board.
E744 0001 00 Bootable version E746 0024 00
Use SST or USB memory to reinstall the correct language file. Or 3. As a temporary measure, remove the Image Analysis Board and
Remedy Remedy
reinstall the entire software. get in service mode:
Title Language file error (Lv2) COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR > ST-JBLK ; set ST-JBLK
from 1 to 0, and turn OFF and then ON the power.
Description Too large language size in the Flash PCB
E744 0002 00 Title Engine ID error
Format the Flash PCB and reinstall the system because more
Remedy Description Hardware error
than necessary language files may have been installed. E746 0031 00
Title Language file error 1. Turn OFF and then ON the power.
Remedy
2. Replace the TPM PCB.
Unable to find the language described in Config.txt in the Flash
that should be switched.
Remedy Reinstall the system.
Title Language file error
E744 0004 00 Description Unable to switch to the language in the Flash PCB
Remedy Use SST or USB to reinstall the system.
7-29
7
7-30
E Detail E Detail
Code Code Code Code
Title Engine ID error Title Main Controller PCB access error
Description TPM key mismatch Unable to initialize memory DDR2-SDRAM at the Main Controller
Description
Format the system PCB
E748 2023 00
Use SST or USB memory to format the HDD, and then execute 1. Clean the terminal of DDR2-SDRAM, and remove and then
E746 0032 00 downloading of the system software. See Chapter 6 Upgrading for Remedy install the DDR2-SDRAM.
Remedy details. For reference, the method using USB memory is shown 2. Replace the DDR2-SDRAM.
below: Title Main Controller PCB access error
1. Prepare USB memory in which the system software was The CPU at the Main Controller PCB failed to complete
registered. Description
initialization
Title Engine ID error 1. Clean the terminal of DDR2-SDRAM, and remove and then
E748 2024 00
Description Mismatched data in the TPM install the DDR2-SDRAM.
Recovery is available if backup of the TPM has been executed. Remedy 2. Check power state of Main Controller PCB and check around
1. Connect the USB memory in which the TPM key is saved. the connector.
2. Management Settings > Data Management > TPM Settings; 3. Replace Main Controller PCB.
click [Restore TPM key]. Title System error
3. Enter the password that was specified at the time of backup E748 9000 00 Description System error
work. Remedy Contact the service company office
E746 0033 00
4. Once the restore completion screen is displayed, click [OK] and Title Rebooting instruction due to change of MEAP configuration
Remedy
remove the USB memory, and then turn OFF and ON the main
There is a change in configuration that requires turning OFF and
power switch. E749 0002 00 Description
then ON the power
Remedy The symptom is recovered by turning OFF and then ON the power
When backup of the TPM key is not executed
Title Booting instruction due to change in mAccele configuration
System format is necessary.
Use SST or USB memory to format the HDD, and then download There is a change in configuration that requires turning OFF and
the system software. then ON the power
Title TPM auto recovery error Remedy The symptom is recovered by turning OFF and then ON the power
An error occurs when clearing the HDD while the TPM setting is Title Booting instruction due to change in hardware configuration
E746 0034 00 Description There is a change in configuration that requires turning OFF and
ON E749 0005 00 Description
Remedy The symptom is recovered by turning OFF and then ON the power then ON the power
Title TPM version error Remedy The symptom is recovered by turning OFF and then ON the power
E746 0035 00 Description TPM which cannot be used in this machine was installed.
Remedy Install the supported TPM.
Title PDL rendering error
Description Image processing IC error
1. Turn OFF and then ON the power (send the data to Inc because
E747 1201 00
running the data which generated an error code causes another
Remedy
error code).
Title Flash PCB error
E748 2010 00 Description Unable to find IPL (startup program)
Remedy Replace the Flash PCB and install the system using SST or USB
Title Main Controller PCB access error
Description Necessary H/W on Main Controller PCB is not detected
E748 2021 00 1. Clean the terminal of Main Controller PCB, and remove and
Remedy then install Main Controller PCB.
7-30
7
7-31
E Detail E Detail
Code Code Code Code
Title Restart direction due to configuration change. Title Heat Exhaust Fan (Rear) (FM6) error
The option such as the Finisher and ADF was installed or removed The lock signal was detected for 5.0 seconds while the Heat
when all of following conditions were met and the machine Exhaust Fan (Rear) (FM6) was being stopped.
Description
configuration is changed when the main power switch is turned *The same status was detected again after executing an error
ON. E805 0000 05 retry.
Description
- Settings/Registration > Preferences > Timer/Energy Settings > 1. Check the connector connection between the Heat Exhaust Fan
Quick Startup at Power-on > ON (Rear) (FM6) and the DC Controller PCB (PCB1).
Remedy
- The Main Power Switch is turned OFF 2. Replace the Heat Exhaust Fan (Rear) (FM6).
- The power plug of the machine is connected to the output. 3. Replace the DC Controller PCB (PCB1).
It is recovered by turning OFF and then ON the main power. Title Heat Exhaust Fan (Rear) (FM6) rotation error
E749 0006 00 The lock signal was not detected for 5.0 seconds while the Heat
CAUTION Exhaust Fan (Rear) (FM6) was being driven.
This machine provides power to some PCBs even when in the Description
*The same status was detected again after executing an error
main power OFF status. E805 0001 05 retry.
The power supply is not completely OFF by just turning OFF the 1. Check the connector connection between the Heat Exhaust Fan
Remedy
main power switch and therefore, the machine is unable to detect (Rear) (FM6) and the DC Controller PCB (PCB1).
a configuration change. Remedy
2. Replace the Heat Exhaust Fan (Rear) (FM6).
When disconnecting and then connecting a connector, always 3. Replace the DC Controller PCB (PCB1).
disconnect the power plug. Title Heat Exhaust Fan (Front) (FM5) error
Refer to the Service Manual > Chapter 2 > External and Controls
The lock signal was detected for 5.0 seconds while the Heat
> Quick Startup for details.
Exhaust Fan (Front) (FM5) was being stopped.
Title Downloading error Description
Firmware update error E805 0002 05 retry.
Description This symptom occurs when trying to update the firmware of an 1. Check the connector connection between the Heat Exhaust Fan
option that is not installed (Front) (FM5) and the DC Controller PCB (PCB1).
1. Check the log to identify the location of the download error. Remedy
2. Replace the Heat Exhaust Fan (Front) (FM5).
Check if the target option is installed. 3. Replace the DC Controller PCB (PCB1).
E753 0001 00 When the target option is not installed: Title Heat Exhaust Fan (Front) (FM5) rotation error
-> The symptom is recovered by turning OFF and then ON the
The lock signal was not detected for 5.0 seconds while the Heat
Remedy power (because there is nothing to update)
Exhaust Fan (Front) (FM5) was being driven.
When the target option is installed: Description
-> Check if the target option is properly installed and see if the
E805 0003 05 retry.
software to download is for the correct target option, and then
1. Check the connector connection between the Heat Exhaust Fan
execute downloading again.
(Front) (FM5) and the DC Controller PCB (PCB1).
Title Power Supply Cooling Fan (FM4) error Remedy
2. Replace the Heat Exhaust Fan (Front) (FM5).
Description When detecting a failure of the Power Supply Cooling Fan (FM4). 3. Replace the DC Controller PCB (PCB1).
E804 0000 00 1. Check the connector connection between the Power Supply Title Developing Cooling Fan (Front) (FM7) error
Remedy Cooling Fan (FM4) and the AC Driver PCB (PCB4).
The lock signal was detected for 5.0 seconds while the Developing
2. Replace the Power Supply Cooling Fan (FM4).
Cooling Fan (Front) (FM7) was being stopped.
Description
E820 0000 05 retry.
Cooling Fan (Front) (FM7) and the DC Controller PCB (PCB1).
Remedy
2. Replace the Developing Cooling Fan (Front) (FM7).
7-31
7
7-32
E Detail E Detail
Code Code Code Code
Title Developing Cooling Fan (Front) (FM7) rotation error Title Delivery Cooling Fan (Center) (FM2) error
The lock signal was not detected for 5.0 seconds while the The lock signal was detected for 5.0 seconds while the Delivery
Developing Cooling Fan (Front) (FM7) was being driven. Cooling Fan (Center) (FM2) was being stopped.
*The same status was detected again after executing an error *The same status was detected again after executing an error
E820 0001 05 retry. E822 0002 05 retry.
1. Check the connector connection between the Developing 1. Check the connector connection between the Delivery Cooling
Cooling Fan (Front) (FM7) and the DC Controller PCB (PCB1). Fan (Center) (FM2) and the DC Controller PCB (PCB1).
Remedy Remedy
2. Replace the Developing Cooling Fan (Front) (FM7). 2. Replace the Delivery Cooling Fan (Center) (FM2).
3. Replace the DC Controller PCB (PCB1). 3. Replace the DC Controller PCB (PCB1).
Title Developing Cooling Fan (Rear) (FM8) error Title Delivery Cooling Fan (Center) (FM2) rotation error
The lock signal was detected for 5.0 seconds while the Developing The lock signal was not detected for 5.0 seconds while the
Cooling Fan (Rear) (FM8) was being stopped. Delivery Cooling Fan (Center) (FM2) was being driven.
E820 0002 05 retry. E822 0003 05 retry.
Cooling Fan (Rear) (FM8) and the DC Controller PCB (PCB1). Fan (Center) (FM2) and the DC Controller PCB (PCB1).
Remedy Remedy
2. Replace the Developing Cooling Fan (Rear) (FM8). 2. Replace the Delivery Cooling Fan (Center) (FM2).
Title Developing Cooling Fan (Rear) (FM8) rotation error Title Delivery Cooling Fan (Rear) (FM1) error
The lock signal was not detected for 5.0 seconds while the The lock signal was detected for 5.0 seconds while the Delivery
Developing Cooling Fan (Rear) (FM8) was being driven. Cooling Fan (Rear) (FM1) was being stopped.
E820 0003 05 retry. E822 0004 05 retry.
Cooling Fan (Rear) (FM8) and the DC Controller PCB (PCB1). Fan (Rear) (FM1) and the DC Controller PCB (PCB1).
Remedy Remedy
2. Replace the Developing Cooling Fan (Rear) (FM8). 2. Replace the Delivery Cooling Fan (Rear) (FM1).
Title Delivery Cooling Fan (Front) (FM3) error Title Delivery Cooling Fan (Rear) (FM1) rotation error
The lock signal was detected for 5.0 seconds while the Delivery The lock signal was not detected for 5.0 seconds while the
Cooling Fan (Front) (FM3) was being stopped. Delivery Cooling Fan (Rear) (FM1) was being driven.
E822 0000 05 retry. E822 0005 05 retry.
1. Check the connector connection between the Delivery Cooling 1. Check the connector connection between the Delivery Cooling
Fan (Front) (FM3) and the DC Controller PCB (PCB1). Fan (Rear) (FM1) and the DC Controller PCB (PCB1).
Remedy Remedy
2. Replace the Delivery Cooling Fan (Front) (FM3). 2. Replace the Delivery Cooling Fan (Rear) (FM1).
Title Delivery Cooling Fan (Front) (FM3) rotation error Title Controller Fan error
The lock signal was not detected for 5.0 seconds while the Description Lock of Controller Fan is detected
E880 0001 00
Delivery Cooling Fan (Front) (FM3) was being driven. Check if the connector is connected
Description Remedy
*The same status was detected again after executing an error If the connector is OK, replace Controller Fan.
E822 0001 05 retry.
1. Check the connector connection between the Delivery Cooling
Fan (Front) (FM3) and the DC Controller PCB (PCB1).
Remedy
2. Replace the Delivery Cooling Fan (Front) (FM3).
7-32
7
7-33
E Detail
Code Code
Title CPU abnormal temperature rising error
Description Abnormal temperature of the Main Controller CPU
1. Send cold air to the device.
2. If there is a shielding object around the inlet, remove it to secure
E881 0001 00
enough space.
Remedy
3. Check the fan, and remove dust or replace the fan if it has an
abnormality such as abnormal sound.
Title Frequent error avoidance jam (ADF)
Description Frequent error avoidance jam (ADF)
Depending on the setting of JM-ERR-R in service mode, “010071”
E996 0071 04 jam is displayed as an error.
Remedy Collect log and contact to the sales companies.
To cancel the setting, select COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> JM-
ERR-R, and set JM-ERR-R to 0.
Title Frequent error avoidance jam (PRINTER)
Description Frequent error avoidance jam (PRINTER)
Make “000CA0” jam to be displayed as an error by setting JM-
E996 0CA0 05 ERR-D in service mode.
ERR-D, and set JM-ERR-D to 0.
Title Frequent error avoidance jam (PRINTER)
Description Frequent error avoidance jam (PRINTER)
Make “000CAF” jam to be displayed as an error by setting JM-
E996 0CAF 05 ERR-D in service mode.
ERR-D, and set JM-ERR-D to 0.
T-7-7
7-33
7
7 Error Code > Jam Code > Jam Type
7-34
Jam Code
Jam Type
Jam types are shown below.
Type Meaning
DELAY Delay jam
STNRY Stationary jam
OVERLAP Double feed detection
TIMING NG Timing error
OHP NG Incorrect paper
ADF OP ADF open
COVER OP Cover open
RESIDUAL Residual jam
PICKUP NG Pickup error
POWER ON Power ON
DOOR OP Door open
SEQ NG Sequence jam
DELAY ESC Delay jam while ejecting to the escape delivery tray
OTH JAM Other jams
STNRY ESC Stationary jam while ejecting to the escape delivery tray
STP Staple
SDL STP Saddle stitch staple
INIT ROT Residual (at initial rotation)
UP DEVICE Upper stream device jam
OTHER Others
ERROR Error evasion jam
RETRY ERR Retry error
STOP Press Stop key
ROT Keeps rotating
PROGRAM Program
TIME OUT Time-out
PUNCH Punch
MEDIA NG Misprint
T-7-8
7-34
7
Error Code > Jam Code > Jam Type
7 Error Code > Jam Code > Host machine
7-35
Host machine ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor ID Sensor Name
00 0101 DELAY PS12 Pre-Registration Sensor
00 0201 STNRY PS12 Pre-Registration Sensor
00 0A01 POWER ON PS12 Pre-Registration Sensor
00 0105 DELAY PS11 Registration Sensor
00 0205 STNRY PS11 Registration Sensor
00 0A05 POWER ON PS11 Registration Sensor
00 0107 DELAY PS19 Fixing Paper Sensor
PS6 00 0207 STNRY PS19 Fixing Paper Sensor
00 0A07 POWER ON PS19 Fixing Paper Sensor
00 0108 DELAY PS5 Delivery Sensor
00 0208 STNRY PS5 Delivery Sensor
PS5 00 0A08 POWER ON PS5 Delivery Sensor
00 010A DELAY PS6 Reverse Sensor
00 020A STNRY PS6 Reverse Sensor
PS19
00 0A0A POWER ON PS6 Reverse Sensor
00 010B DELAY PS20 Transparency Sensor
00 020B STNRY PS20 Transparency Sensor
00 0A0B POWER ON PS20 Transparency Sensor
PS8
00 010D DELAY PS8 Duplex Feed Sensor
00 020D STNRY PS8 Duplex Feed Sensor
PS11
00 0A0D POWER ON PS8 Duplex Feed Sensor
PS12 00 0B00 DOOR OP - -
00 0CA0 SEQ NG *2 - -
PS20
00 0CF1 ERROR *1 - -
00 0D91 OTHER - -
F-7-1 00 FF01 SEQ NG *2 - -
00 FF02 SEQ NG *2 - -
00 FF03 SEQ NG *2 - -
00 FF04 SEQ NG *2 - -
00 FF05 SEQ NG *2 - -
00 FF06 SEQ NG *2 - -
00 FF07 SEQ NG *2 - -
T-7-9
power supply.
If the same jam is detected regardless of the operation above, the error code is displayed.
Detected error is either of the following.
E010,E014,E110,E197-0000,E197-0001,E261,E805,E822,E820
power supply.
7-35
7
Error Code > Jam Code > Host machine
7 Error Code > Jam Code > ADF
7-36
CASSETTE UNIT-AA1 ADF
PS103/PS203/PS303 PS23 PS26 PS27
F-7-2
ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor ID Sensor Name

00 0102 DELAY PS103 Cassette 2 Retry Sensor PS22 PS24 PS25
00 0202 STNRY PS103 Cassette 2 Retry Sensor F-7-3
00 0A02 POWER ON PS103 Cassette 2 Retry Sensor ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor ID Sensor Name
00 0103 DELAY PS203 Cassette 3 Retry Sensor 01 0001 DELAY PS26 Timing Sensor
00 0203 STNRY PS203 Cassette 3 Retry Sensor 01 0003 DELAY PS23 Registration Sensor
00 0A03 POWER ON PS203 Cassette 3 Retry Sensor 01 0004 STNRY PS23 Registration Sensor
00 0104 DELAY PS303 Cassette 4 Retry Sensor 01 0005 DELAY PS22 Lead Sensor
00 0204 STNRY PS303 Cassette 4 Retry Sensor 01 0006 STNRY PS22 Lead Sensor
00 0A04 POWER ON PS303 Cassette 4 Retry Sensor 01 0009 DELAY PS24 Stay Sensor
T-7-10 01 000A STNRY PS24 Stay Sensor
01 000B DELAY PS25 Reversal Sensor
01 000C STNRY PS25 Reversal Sensor
01 0044 STNRY (first original) PS23 Registration Sensor
01 0045 DELAY (first original) PS22 Lead Sensor
01 0046 STNRY (first original) PS22 Lead Sensor
01 0049 DELAY (first original) PS24 Stay Sensor
01 004A STNRY (first original) PS24 Stay Sensor
01 004B DELAY (first original) PS25 Reversal Sensor
01 004C STNRY (first original) PS25 Reversal Sensor
01 0071 TIMING NG - -
STNRY
01 0084 PS23 Registration Sensor
(first original at re-pickup)
PS22/PS23/ Lead Sensor, Registration Sensor,
01 0094 RESIDUAL PS24/PS25/ Stay Sensor, Reversal Sensor,
PS26 Timing Sensor
01 0095 PICKUP NG PS27 Original Set Sensor
T-7-11
7-36
7
Error Code > Jam Code > ADF
7 Error Code > Jam Code > Staple Finisher-R1
7-37
Staple Finisher-R1
S2 S1 SW1
S11 S12
F-7-4
ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor ID Sensor Name

02 1001 DELAY S1 Inlet Sensor
02 1004 DELAY S2 Delivery Sensor
02 1104 STNRY S2 Delivery Sensor
02 1F01 TIMING S1 Inlet Sensor
02 1500 STP S11/S12 Stapler HP Sensor, Stapler Edging Sensor
02 1401 DOOR OP SW1/S1 Front Door Switch, Inlet Sensor
02 1404 DOOR OP SW1/S2 Front Door Switch, Delivery Sensor
02 1301 POWER ON S1 Inlet Sensor
02 1304 POWER ON S2 Delivery Sensor
02 2F77 ERROR *1 - -
02 2F30 ERROR *1 - -
02 2F37 ERROR *1 - -
02 2F83 ERROR *1 - -
02 2F75 ERROR *1 - -
02 2F40 ERROR *1 - -
02 2F31 ERROR *1 - -
T-7-12
power supply.
If the same jam is detected regardless of the operation above, the error code is displayed.
7-37
7
Error Code > Jam Code > Staple Finisher-R1
7 Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details
7-38
Alarm Code Alarm Code Title Movement /Cause /Measures

11-0001 Waste toner container full Movement: A message “The waste toner container is
full.” is displayed on the Control Panel, and the machine
Alarm Code Details is stopped.
Cause: The capacity of the Waste Toner Container
became full.
Alarm Code Title Movement /Cause /Measures Measures: Replace the Waste Toner Container.
00-0246 System error Contact the service company office 11-0010 Waste toner container near full Movement: Displayed a message by an operation panel
00-0247 System error Contact the service company office (A continuation print is possible)
04-0010 Jam left untouched (RDS Cause: The capacity of the Waste Toner Container
creates) became near full.
04-0011 Cassette 1 paper feed retry Movement: Nothing in particular. 31-0002 Power supply relay durability
error Cause: The paper does not picked up even if the paper alarm
feed retry operation is carried out 4 times. 31-0005 Environment sensor reading Movement: It becomes as follow: environment
Measures: Check the Cassette 1 Pickup and Feed and alarm temperature= 0 degC, environment humidity= 0%.
Separation Rollers. -> Check whether a scrap of paper Cause: Connection of the Environment Sensor cannot
remains around the paper feed area or not. be detected.
04-0012 Cassette 2 paper feed retry Movement: Nothing in particular. Measures:
error Cause: The paper does not picked up even if the paper 1) Check the connection of the Environment Sensor
feed retry operation is carried out 4 times. (THU1).
Measures: Check the Cassette 2 Pickup and Feed and 2) Replace the Environment Sensor (THU1).
Separation Rollers. -> Check whether a scrap of paper 31-0008 HDD failure prediction alarm Movement: HDD failure is expected to occur in a short
remains around the paper feed area or not. time due to occurrence of physical error in HDD. It does
04-0013 Cassette 3 paper feed retry Movement: Nothing in particular. not occur in the HDD of mirroring configuration.
error Cause: The paper does not picked up even if the paper Cause: Error in the S.M.A.R.T. value of HDD
feed retry operation is carried out 4 times. Measures:
Measures: Check the Cassette 3 Pickup and Feed and 1. Back up the data stored in HDD.
Separation Rollers. -> Check whether a scrap of paper 2. Replace the HDD.
remains around the paper feed area or not. 3. Restore the data.
04-0014 Cassette 4 paper feed retry Movement: Nothing in particular. S.M.A.R.T. (Self-Monitoring Analysis and Reporting
error Cause: The paper does not picked up even if the paper Technology): Self-diagnosis function built in the HDD.
feed retry operation is carried out 4 times. The occurrence rate of reading error, reading and writing
Measures: Check the Cassette 4 Pickup and Feed and speed, the total number of Motor start-up and stop times,
Separation Rollers. -> Check whether a scrap of paper the total length of power-on time, etc. are monitored.
remains around the paper feed area or not. 31-0009 FLASH failure prediction alarmMovement: FLASH failure is expected to occur in a short
04-0017 Multi-purpose tray paper feed Movement: Nothing in particular. time due to occurrence of physical error in FLASH. It
retry error Cause: The paper does not picked up even if the paper does not occur in the FLASH of mirroring configuration.
feed retry operation is carried out 4 times. Cause: Error in the S.M.A.R.T. value of FLASH
Measures: Check the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup and Measures:
Pullout Rollers. -> Check whether a scrap of paper 1. Back up the data stored in FLASH.
remains around the paper feed area or not. 2. Replace the FLASH.
10-0020 Toner cartridge prior delivery An alarm for requesting a prior delivery is sent to UGW 3. Restore the data.
alarm as the value of Toner level detect value has reached the S.M.A.R.T. (Self-Monitoring Analysis and Reporting
value set in COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > T-DLV-BK. Technology): Self-diagnosis function built in the FLASH.
10-0100 Toner cartridge replace notice The replacement of the Toner Cartridge was detected. The occurrence rate of reading error, reading and writing
speed, the total number of Motor start-up and stop times,
the total length of power-on time, etc. are monitored.
35-0013 Transfer Roller replacement The replacement completion button of Transfer Roller
completion alarm was pushed.
7-38
7
Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details
7-39
Alarm Code Title Movement /Cause /Measures Alarm Code Title Movement /Cause /Measures
35-0073 Drum Unit replacement The replacement completion button of Drum Unit was 73-0009 LIPS Reception data management error
completion alarm pushed. 73-0010 LIPS Page control error
35-0075 Static Eliminator replacement The replacement completion button of Static Eliminator 73-0011 LIPS Macro management error
completion alarm was pushed. 73-0012 LIPS Color management error
35-0076 Fixing Assembly replacement The replacement completion button of Fixing Assembly
73-0013 LIPS Layout control error
73-0014 LIPS Font management error
35-0077 MP Pickup Roller replacement The replacement completion button of MP Pickup Roller
73-0015 LIPS Letter drawing error
35-0078 MP Separation Pad The replacement completion button of MP Separation 73-0016 LIPS Graphic drawing error
replacement completion alarm Pad was pushed. 73-0017 LIPS Image drawing error
35-0080 Cassette 1 Feed Roller The replacement completion button of Cassette 1 Feed 73-0018 LIPS Display error to LCD
replacement completion alarm Roller was pushed. 73-0019 LIPS Text mode command error layer error
35-0081 Cassette 1 Separation Roller The replacement completion button of Cassette 1 73-0020 LIPS Vector mode command error layer error
replacement completion alarm Separation Roller was pushed. 73-0021 LIPS Utility execution control error
35-0083 Cassette 2 Feed Roller The replacement completion button of Cassette 2 Feed 73-0022 LIPS Database management error in LIPS
replacement completion alarm Roller was pushed. 73-0023 LIPS Menu control error in LIPS
35-0084 Cassette 2 Separation Roller The replacement completion button of Cassette 2 73-0024 LIPS Boot error in LIPS
replacement completion alarm Separation Roller was pushed.
73-0025 LIPS When the graphic library is in use for image processing,
35-0086 Cassette 3 Feed Roller The replacement completion button of Cassette 3 Feed if the memory allocation is failed.
replacement completion alarm Roller was pushed.
73-0026 LIPS Data format error of image mode
35-0087 Cassette 3 Separation Roller The replacement completion button of Cassette 3
76-0001 Font No memory for internal font
replacement completion alarm Separation Roller was pushed.
76-0002 Font Fails to assure the work area to analyze the font that is
35-0089 Cassette 4 Feed Roller The replacement completion button of Cassette 4 Feed
downloaded at “Resource Download”.
replacement completion alarm Roller was pushed.
76-0003 Font Fails to access the file that stores the font.
35-0090 Cassette 4 Separation Roller The replacement completion button of Cassette 4
replacement completion alarm Separation Roller was pushed. 76-0004 Font Fails to allocate the FM work memory.
40-0073 Drum Unit (Bk) prior delivery An alarm for requesting a prior delivery is sent to UGW 76-0005 Font Fails to analyze the internal font.
alarm as the value of COPIER > COUNTER > LF > K-DRM- 76-0006 Font Alignment of font data is wrong.
LF has reached the value set in COPIER > OPTION > 76-0007 Font Failed to allocate work memory with scaler. There are 3
FNC-SW > D-DLV-BK. types depending on where to occur.
50-0010 Alarm due to original Movement: Nothing in particular. 76-0008 Font Failed to allocate work memory with scaler. There are 3
separation failure Cause: Condition unable to separate 1st sheet of types depending on where to occur.
original from the ADF occurs 3 times. 77-0001 PDL Fails to allocate the memory
Measures: Check the rotation of the Delivery Reversal 77-0002 PDL Failure of rendering
Motor (M12) -> Check the operation of the Pickup
77-0003 PDL DGL entry invalid
Solenoid (SL5) -> Check the life of the Pickup and Feed
77-0005 PDL Other errors
Rollers and Separation Pad -> Check if the paper lint is
at the pickup slot. 77-0006 PDL DLG memory insufficient
61-0001 Finisher staple alarm Movement: A user message is displayed on the Control 78-0003 GL GL entry invalid
Panel. If staple job is being processed during a print job, 78-0005 GL System memory full
printing is stopped. 79-0001 In-house developed PCL PCL initialization error
Measures: Load staples. 79-0002 In-house developed PCL PCL processing error
70-0086 Upgrading-related alarm Upgrading process is failed. 79-0003 In-house developed PCL Overflow of work memory for translator
73-0004 LIPS Overflow of work memory for translator 79-0004 In-house developed PCL Download overflow
73-0006 LIPS Error in configuration acquisition/management 80-0001 BDL Admin error
73-0007 LIPS Memory management error in LIPS 80-0003 BDL DataArea error
73-0008 LIPS File management error in LIPS 80-0010 BDL Graphics error
7-39
7
7-40
Alarm Code Title Movement /Cause /Measures
80-0011 BDL Char error
80-0015 BDL Print data cannot process this version.
80-0016 BDL Overflow of work memory for translator
80-0018 BDL Syntax error
80-0019 BDL In case of invalid data format in BDL custom mode.
81-0001 Imaging Fails to allocate the memory
81-0002 Imaging Failure of rendering
81-0003 Imaging Overflow of work memory for translator
81-0004 Imaging Imaging initialization error
81-0005 Imaging Imaging processing error
83-0005 CanonPDF PDF memory full
83-0015 CanonPDF PDF data decode error
83-0016 CanonPDF PDF print range error
83-0017 CanonPDF PDF error
83-0018 CanonPDF PDF analysis error
Un-supported transparent object exists.
83-0020 ESCP
83-0021 I5577
83-0022 HPGL
83-0023 N201
84-0001 XPS memory full error
84-0002 XPS spool full error
84-0003 XPS print range error
84-0004 XPS document data error
84-0005 XPS page data error
84-0006 XPS image data error
84-0007 XPS font data error
84-0008 XPS non-support image error
84-0009 XPS rendering error
85-0001 System error clear
85-0002 Auto-restore caused by
service replacement
service replacement
service replacement
service replacement
T-7-13
7-40
7
8 Service Mode
■
■Overview
■
■COPIER
■
■FEEDER
■
■SORTER
■
■BOARD
8
Service Mode
8 Service Mode > Overview > Service mode item explanations
8-2
Overview Service mode item explanations

Explanatory texts for the initial window, main items, sub items and minor items can be
Overview displayed.
Select the desired initial window, main item, sub item or minor item, then pres [i] (Information
Instructions on how to use service mode items can be found within the service mode itself.
button) to display an explanatory text (hereafter, service mode contents) on the selected item.
The information explains what items have been added or changed from previous models.
E.g., COPIER> DISPLAY> Version window
Entering Service Mode

Contact the sales company for the method to enter service mode
Service Mode Menu 1) Press [i]

TOP Screen
4) A detailed explanation on the
item will be displayed (usage
scenarios, instructions,
settings range, etc.).
2) Minor item titles
are displayed.
F-8-1
"MODELIST" A brand new additional mode in the host machine.

3) Select the desired
A function that can be used as a reference on how to use each item in minor item and
Service Mode is installed. The new function, which will be described later, press [i]
is available in MODELIST Mode.
F-8-2
"MODELIST CLASSIC" This mode is same as the old machine. The new function, which will be • The service mode contents can be displayed in J/E/F/I/G/S languages.
described later, is not available in the MODELIST CLASSIC Mode.
• Service mode contents, like system software, can be upgraded by SST.
“Updater” This is a MEAP application with functions of network communication
to Content Delivery System V1.0 (hereinafter CDS) and installation of
firmware, MEAP applications or system options. (Refer to Updater V1.0
service manual.)
If " MODELIST " or " MODELIST CLASSIC " or “Updater” is pressed, the screen will switch to initial
screen for each mode..
8-2
8
Service Mode > Overview > Service mode item explanations
8 Service Mode > Overview > Display of Error Code/Alarm Code description
8-3
I/O information enhancement Display of Error Code/Alarm Code description
On the COPIER > I/O, the mode to confirm input output signal of electrical parts used (sensor, The detail description of each code can be viewed on the error code and alarm code
motor, fan, etc), makes it easier to look for the intended electrical part. occurrence record screen.
And the screen will also display the input output signal.
Device classification ERROR CODE : COPIER> DISPLAY> ERR
1) Press the button.

Electrical parts
classification Which button to press, will depend on which
electrical parts intended and its device
classification. For instance, if the host
machine uses paper pass detection sensor,
then press the button on the "COPIER" and
"P-Sensor" position.
2) Then the selected electrical

parts classification's mark,
name, port number and 0/1
content will appear.
F-8-4
3) If the "i" button is pressed,

the screen displaying the
electrical parts array will appear.
F-8-3
8-3
8
Service Mode > Overview > Display of Error Code/Alarm Code description
8 Service Mode > Overview > COPIER> OPTION> BODY, Item Segmentation
8-4
ALARM CODE : COPIER> DISPLAY> ALARM-2
COPIER> OPTION> BODY, Item Segmentation
COPIER> DISPLAY> ALARM-3
On the current machine, there are extremely many items in the COPIER> OPTION> BODY (in
related to host machine specification), that it is difficult to reach the intended item.
In order to reach the intended item in shorter time, all items inside the BODY is classified to
15 categories.
Classification Name Description

Function switching FNC-SW Language, cassette, paper size type, NAVI/
DA connection, count-up spec., document size
detection, dirt detection level
Display switching/ display timing DSPLY-SW UI (User Interface) display related
Image related (fixing) IMG-FIX Fixing related
Image related (transfer) IMG-TR Transfer related
Image related (developing) IMG-DEV Developer related
Image related (laser/ latent image) IMG-LSR Laser, latent image related
Image related (reader/ ADF) IMG-RDR Reader, ADF image related
Image related (controller, other IMG-MCON MN-CON image related, and image related items
general items) other than those referred to above.
Image quality/ copy speed IMG-SPD Power down sequence
F-8-5 Cleaning CLEANING Cleaning of charging unit, drum, transfer roller,
etc.
Environment settings ENV-SET Temperature, humidity, environmental heater,
condensation, log acquisition
Paper feed (pickup, delivery) FEED-SW Stack performance, motor speed adjustment,
delivery functions, etc.
Noise reduction SOUND Noise related
Network NETWORK Network settings, IFAX, SEND, E-RDS, etc.
Customization CUSTOM Customization
T-8-1
8-4
8
Service Mode > Overview > COPIER> OPTION> BODY, Item Segmentation
8 Service Mode > Overview > Security features > Related service modes
8-5
Security features 1) Enter System Manager ID> enter System PIN> press OK button.
(System Mangeger ID and System PIN can be set up in [Settings/Registration>
To prevent unauthorized access to Service Mode, Password set is enabled. Management Settings> User Management> System Manager Information Settings].)
■■Related service modes

• COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> PSWD-SW (Level1)
Set password type for transition to service mode.
<Setting range>
System Manager ID
0: No password (default)
1: Service engineer
System PIN
2: System administrator and Service engineer.
• COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> SM-PSWD (Level2)

Password for service engineer for transition to service mode.
• <Setting range>
To reinforce the security, change the password from a default. F-8-6
******** (eight digit numeral) [default: 11111111] 2) After entering the password for service technician (Service mode: COPIER> Option> FNC-
SW> SM-PSWD), press OK button.
After the above setting, to enter Service Mode, enter password screen will appear.
SM-PSWD
F-8-7
MEMO :
If Service Engineer’s password is forgotten, password function is cancelable by using
Service Support Tool (SST).
8-5
8
Service Mode > Overview > Security features > Related service modes
8 Service Mode > Overview > Language switch
8-6
Switching Screen (Level 1 < - > 2) Language switch
Switching screens between level 1 and 2 has been made easier. The language of the explanatory text displayed in the Service Mode can be switched by
When level 1 screen is displayed, press <LEVEL 1> in the right upper side of the screen, and performing the below languange switch operation in User Mode
it will switch to level 2. The explanatory text can be displayed by installing the Service Mode Content (SCMNT) in
HDD.
Service Mode Content (SCMNT) can be installed and upgraded on SST.
Settings/Registration> Preferences> Display Settings> Language/Keyboard Switch
<Language/Keybord Switch>
Language
Deutsch
English 1/2
Español
Français
Italiano
Keyboard Layout
English(USA)Layout Set
Cancel OK
NOTE:
If the Service Mode Content (SMCNT) of the concerned language is not installed,
English explanatory text will be displayed.
If English-language Service Mode Content (SMCNT) is not installed either, explanatory
text can't be displayed.
8-6
8
Service Mode > Overview > Language switch
8 Service Mode > Overview > Service Label
8-7
Back-up of service mode Service Label
In factory setting, adjustments are made for each machine, and adjustment values are written The item of Service Label.
in the service label. Factory Field1 Field2 Field3 Factory Field1 Field2 Field3
When you replaced the CIS unit or the DC controller PCB, or executed the RAM clear
COPIER > ADJUST COPIER > ADJUST
function, adjustment values for ADJUST or OPTION return to default. Therefore, when you
ADJ-X PVE-OFST
made adjustments and changed values of the Service Mode in the field, be sure to write down
ADJ-Y LDADJ1-K
the changed values in the service label. When there is no relevant field in the service label,
ADJ-S LDADJ2-K
write down the values in a blank field. ADJ-XY
ADJ-Y-DF LASER LDADJ3-K
STRD-POS LDADJ4-K
Service label: The inside of the Rear Cover ADJ-X-MG LDADJ5-K
BLANK-T LDADJ6-K
BLANK
BLANK-B C1-ADJ-Y
W-PLT-X C2-ADJ-Y
CCD W-PLT-Y MISC C3-ADJ-Y
W-PLT-Z C4-ADJ-Y
DEVELOP DE-OFST MF-ADJ-Y
REGIST OFST-P-K
FEED-ADJ ADJ-REFE
RG-HF-SP PASCAL
OFST1-DC
HV-PRI
OFST1-AC
HV-TR TR-OFST FEEDER > ADJUST
DOCST
LA-SPEED
Service label LA-SPD2
Body No： DOC-LNGH
F-8-9
F-8-8
8-7
8
Service Mode > Overview > Service Label
8 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION
8-8
COPIER COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION
LANG-IT Display of Italian language file version
Lv.1 Details To display the version of Italian language file.
DISPLAY Use case When upgrading the firmware
Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99
■■VERSION LANG-JP Display of Japanese language file ver
Lv.1 Details To display the version of Japanese language file.
COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION
Use case When upgrading the firmware
DC-CON Display of DCON firmware version
Lv.1 Details To display the firmware version of DC Controller PCB.
LANG-CS Display of Czech language file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Czech language file.
PANEL Display of Control Panel CPU PCB ROM version
Lv.1 Details To display the ROM version of Control Panel CPU PCB.
LANG-DA Display of Danish language file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Danish language file.
ECO Display of ECO-ID PCB ROM version
Lv.1 Details To display the ROM version of ECO-ID PCB
LANG-EL Display of Greek language file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Greek language file.
SORTER Display of FIN-CONT firmware version
Lv.1 Details To display the firmware version of Finisher Controller PCB.
LANG-ES Display of Spanish language file version
Lv.1 Details To display the version of Spanish language file.
NIB Display of network software version
Lv.1 Details To display the version of the network software.
LANG-ET Display of Estonian language file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Estonian language file.
MN-CONT Display of MNCON firmware version
Lv.1 Details To display the firmware version of Main Controller PCB.
LANG-FI Display of Finnish language file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Finnish language file.
LANG-EN Display of English language file version
Lv.1 Details To display the version of English language file.
LANG-HU Display of Hungarian language file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Hungarian language file.
LANG-FR Display of French language file version
Lv.1 Details To display the version of French language file.
LANG-KO Display of Korean language file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Korean language file.
LANG-DE Display of German language file version
Lv.1 Details To display the version of German language file.
8-8
8
Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION
8-9
COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION
LANG-NL Display of Dutch language file version LANG-CR Display of Croatian language file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Dutch language file. Lv.2 Details To display the version of Croatian language file.
Use case When upgrading the firmware Use case When upgrading the firmware
Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99 Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99
LANG-NO Display of Norwegian language file ver LANG-RM Display of Romanian language file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Norwegian language file. Lv.2 Details To display the version of Romanian language file.
LANG-PL Display of Polish language file version LANG-SK Display of Slovak language file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Polish language file. Lv.2 Details To display the version of Slovak language file.
LANG-PT Display of Portuguese language file version LANG-TK Display of Turkish language file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Portuguese language file. Lv.2 Details To display the version of Turkish language file.
LANG-RU Display of Russian language file version LANG-CA Display of Catalan language file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Russian language file. Lv.2 Details To display the version of Catalan language file.
Use case When upgrading the firmware “--.--” is displayed when no file is found.
Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99 Use case When upgrading the firmware
LANG-SL Display of Slovenian language file ver Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Slovenian language file. FAX1 Display of 1-line FAX PCB ROM version
Use case When upgrading the firmware Lv.1 Details To display the ROM version of 1-line FAX PCB.
Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99 “NULL” is displayed if the PCB is not connected.
LANG-SV Display of Swedish language file version Use case When upgrading the firmware
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Swedish language file. Display/adj/set range ASCII character string (12 digits)
Use case When upgrading the firmware FAX2/3/4 Display of 2-line FAX PCB ROM version
Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99 Lv.1 Details To display the ROM version of 2-line FAX PCB.
“NULL” is displayed if the PCB is not connected.
LANG-TW Display of Traditional Chinese language file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Chinese language file (traditional).
Display/adj/set range ASCII character string (12 digits)
IOCS Display of BIOS version
Lv.1 Details To display the BIOS version.
LANG-ZH Display of Simplified Chinese language file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Chinese language file (simplified).
COPY-FR Display of COPY application French file version
Lv.1 Details To display the French language file version of COPY application
LANG-BU Display of Bulgarian language file version
(JAVA UI).
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Bulgarian language file.
8-9
8
8-10
COPY-IT Display of COPY application Italian file version COPY-EL Display of COPY application Greek file version
Lv.1 Details To display the Italian language file version of COPY application (JAVA Lv.2 Details To display the Greek language file version of COPY application (JAVA
UI). UI).
COPY-DE Display of COPY application German file version COPY-ET Display of COPY application Estonian file version
Lv.1 Details To display the German language file version of COPY application Lv.2 Details To display the Estonian language file version of COPY application
(JAVA UI). (JAVA UI).
COPY-ES Display of COPY application Spanish file version COPY-FI Display of COPY application Finnish file version
Lv.1 Details To display the Spanish language file version of COPY application Lv.2 Details To display the Finnish language file version of COPY application
COPY-ZH Display of COPY application Simplified Chinese file version COPY-HU Display of COPY application Hungarian file version
Lv.2 Details To display the simplified Chinese language file version of COPY Lv.2 Details To display the Hungarian language file version of COPY application
application (JAVA UI). (JAVA UI).
COPY-TW Display of COPY application Traditional Chinese file version COPY-NL Display of COPY application Dutch file version
Lv.2 Details To display the traditional Chinese language file version of COPY Lv.2 Details To display the Dutch language file version of COPY application (JAVA
application (JAVA UI). UI).
COPY-KO Display of COPY application Korean file version COPY-NO Display of COPY application Norwegian file version
Lv.2 Details To display the Korean language file version of COPY application Lv.2 Details To display the Norwegian language file version of COPY application
COPY-CS Display of COPY application Czech file version COPY-PL Display of COPY application Polish file version
Lv.2 Details To display the Czech language file version of COPY application (JAVA Lv.2 Details To display the Polish language file version of COPY application (JAVA
UI). UI).
COPY-DA Display of COPY application Danish file version COPY-PT Display of COPY application Portuguese file version
Lv.2 Details To display the Danish language file version of COPY application Lv.2 Details To display the Portuguese language file version of COPY application
8-10
8
8-11
COPY-RU Display of COPY application Russian file version COPY-TK Display of COPY application Turkish file version
Lv.2 Details To display the Russian language file version of COPY application Lv.2 Details To display the Turkish language file version of COPY application
COPY-SL Display of COPY application Slovenian file version COPY-CA Display of COPY application Catalan file version
Lv.2 Details To display the Slovenian language file version of COPY application Lv.2 Details To display the Catalan language file version of COPY application
COPY-SV Display of COPY application Swedish file version COPY-TH Display of COPY application Thai file version
Lv.2 Details To display the Swedish language file version of COPY application Lv.2 Details To display the Thai language file version of COPY application (JAVA
(JAVA UI). UI).
COPY-ID Display of COPY application Indonesian file version COPY-VN Display of COPY application Vietnamese file version
Lv.2 Details To display the Indonesian language file version of COPY application Lv.2 Details To display the Vietnamese language file version of COPY application
COPY-BU Display of COPY application Bulgarian file version SEND-FR Display of SEND application French file version
Lv.2 Details To display the Bulgarian language file version of COPY application Lv.1 Details To display the French language file version of SEND application
COPY-CR Display of COPY application Croatian file version SEND-IT Display of SEND application Italian file version
Lv.2 Details To display the Croatian language file version of COPY application Lv.1 Details To display the Italian language file version of SEND application (JAVA
(JAVA UI). UI).
COPY-RM Display of COPY application Romanian file version SEND-DE Display of SEND application German file version
Lv.2 Details To display the Romanian language file version of COPY application Lv.1 Details To display the German language file version of SEND application
COPY-SK Display of COPY application Slovak file version SEND-ES Display of SEND application Spanish file version
Lv.2 Details To display the Slovak language file version of COPY application Lv.1 Details To display the Spanish language file version of SEND application
8-11
8
8-12
SEND-ZH Display of SEND application Simplified Chinese file version SEND-HU Display of SEND application Hungarian file version
Lv.2 Details To display the simplified Chinese language file version of SEND Lv.2 Details To display the Hungarian language file version of SEND application
SEND-TW Display of SEND application Traditional Chinese file version SEND-NL Display of SEND application Dutch file version
Lv.2 Details To display the traditional Chinese language file version of SEND Lv.2 Details To display the Dutch language file version of SEND application (JAVA
application (JAVA UI). UI).
SEND-KO Display of SEND application Korean file version SEND-NO Display of SEND application Norwegian file version
Lv.2 Details To display the Korean language file version of SEND application Lv.2 Details To display the Norwegian language file version of SEND application
SEND-CS Display of SEND application Czech file version SEND-PL Display of SEND application Polish file version
Lv.2 Details To display the Czech language file version of SEND application (JAVA Lv.2 Details To display the Polish language file version of SEND application (JAVA
UI). UI).
SEND-DA Display of SEND application Danish file version SEND-PT Display of SEND application Portuguese file version
Lv.2 Details To display the Danish language file version of SEND application Lv.2 Details To display the Portuguese language file version of SEND application
SEND-EL Display of SEND application Greek file version SEND-RU Display of SEND application Russian file version
Lv.2 Details To display the Greek language file version of the SEND application Lv.2 Details To display the Russian language file version of SEND application
SEND-ET Display of SEND application Estonian file version SEND-SL Display of SEND application Slovenian file version
Lv.2 Details To display the Estonian language file version of SEND application Lv.2 Details To display the Slovenian language file version of SEND application
SEND-FI Display of SEND application Finnish file version SEND-SV Display of SEND application Swedish file version
Lv.2 Details To display the Finnish language file version of SEND application Lv.2 Details To display the Swedish language file version of SEND application
8-12
8
8-13
SEND-ID Display of SEND application Indonesian file version SEND-VN Display of SEND application Vietnamese file version
Lv.2 Details To display the Indonesian language file version of SEND application Lv.2 Details To display the Vietnamese language file version of SEND application
SEND-BU Display of SEND application Bulgarian file version INTRO-FR Display of useful features application introduction French file version
Lv.2 Details To display the Bulgarian language file version of SEND application Lv.1 Details To display the version of French language file of Introduction to
(JAVA UI). Useful Features application.
SEND-CR Display of SEND application Croatian file version INTRO-IT Display of useful features application introduction Italian file version
Lv.2 Details To display the Croatian language file version of SEND application Lv.1 Details To display the version of Italian language file of Introduction to
(JAVA UI). Useful Features application.
SEND-RM Display of SEND application Romanian file version INTRO-DE Display of useful features application introduction German file
Lv.2 Details To display the Romanian language file version of SEND application version
(JAVA UI). Lv.1 Details To display the version of German language file of Introduction to
Use case When upgrading the firmware Useful Features application.
SEND-SK Display of SEND application Slovak file version Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99
Lv.2 Details To display the Slovak language file version of SEND application INTRO-ES Display of useful features application introduction Spanish file
(JAVA UI). version
Use case When upgrading the firmware Lv.1 Details To display the version of Spanish language file of Introduction to
Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99 Useful Features application.
SEND-TK Display of SEND application Turkish file version Use case When upgrading the firmware
Lv.2 Details To display the Turkish language file version of SEND application Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99
(JAVA UI). INTRO-ZH Display of useful features application introduction Simplified Chinese
Use case When upgrading the firmware file version
Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99 Lv.2 Details To display the version of simplified Chinese language file of
Introduction to Useful Features application.
SEND-CA Display of SEND application Catalan file version
Lv.2 Details To display the Catalan language file version of SEND application
(JAVA UI). Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99
Use case When upgrading the firmware INTRO-TW Display of useful features application introduction Traditional
Chinese file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of traditional Chinese language file of
SEND-TH Display of SEND application Thai file version
Introduction to Useful Features application.
Lv.2 Details To display the Thai language file version of SEND application (JAVA
UI).
INTRO-KO Display of useful features application introduction Korean file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Korean language file of Introduction to
Useful Features application.
8-13
8
8-14
INTRO-CS Display of useful features application introduction Czech file version INTRO-PL Display of useful features application introduction Polish file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Czech language file of Introduction to Lv.2 Details To display the version of Polish language file of Introduction to
Useful Features application. Useful Features application.
INTRO-DA Display of useful features application introduction Danish file version INTRO-PT Display of useful features application introduction Portuguese file
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Danish language file of Introduction to version
Useful Features application. Lv.2 Details To display the version of Portuguese language file of Introduction to
Use case When upgrading the firmware Useful Features application.
INTRO-EL Display of useful features application introduction Greek file version Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Greek language file of Introduction to INTRO-RU Display of useful features application introduction Russian file
Useful Features application. version
Use case When upgrading the firmware Lv.2 Details To display the version of Russian language file of Introduction to
INTRO-ET Display of useful features application introduction Estonian file Use case When upgrading the firmware
version Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Estonian language file of Introduction to INTRO-SL Display of useful features application introduction Slovenian file
Useful Features application. version
Use case When upgrading the firmware Lv.2 Details To display the version of Slovenian language file of Introduction to
INTRO-FI Display of useful features application introduction Finnish file version Use case When upgrading the firmware
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Finnish language file of Introduction to Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99
Useful Features application. INTRO-SV Display of useful features application introduction Swedish file
Use case When upgrading the firmware version
Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99 Lv.2 Details To display the version of Swedish language file of Introduction to
INTRO-HU Display of useful features application introduction Hungarian file
version Use case When upgrading the firmware
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Hungarian language file of Introduction to Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99
Useful Features application. INTRO-ID Display of useful features application introduction Indon file version
Use case When upgrading the firmware Lv.2 Details To display the version of Indonesian language file of Introduction to
INTRO-NL Display of useful features application introduction Dutch file version Use case When upgrading the firmware
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Dutch language file of Introduction to Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99
Useful Features application. INTRO-BU Display of useful features application introduction Bulgarian file
Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99 Lv.2 Details To display the version of Bulgarian language file of Introduction to
INTRO-NO Display of useful features application introduction Norwegian file
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Norwegian language file of Introduction to Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99
Useful Features application. INTRO-CR Display of useful features application introduction Croatian file
Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99 Lv.2 Details To display the version of Croatian language file of Introduction to
8-14
8
8-15
INTRO-RM Display of useful features application introduction Romanian file CSTMN-DE Display of custom menu German file version
version Lv.1 Details To display the version of German language file for custom menu
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Romanian language file of Introduction to application.
Useful Features application. Use case When upgrading the firmware
Use case When upgrading the firmware Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99
Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99 CSTMN-ES Display of custom menu Spanish file version
INTRO-SK Display of useful features application introduction Slovak file version Lv.1 Details To display the version of Spanish language file for custom menu
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Slovak language file of Introduction to application.
Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99 CSTMN-ZH Display of custom menu Simplified Chinese file version
INTRO-TK Display of useful features application introduction Turkish file version Lv.2 Details To display the version of simplified Chinese language file for custom
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Turkish language file of Introduction to menu application.
Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99 CSTMN-TW Display of custom menu Traditional Chinese file version
INTRO-CA Display of useful features application introduction Catalan file Lv.2 Details To display the version of traditional Chinese language file for custom
version menu application.
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Catalan language file of Introduction to Use case When upgrading the firmware
Useful Features application. Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99
CSTMN-KO Display of custom menu Korean file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Korean language file for custom menu
INTRO-TH Display of useful features application introduction Thai file version application.
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Thai language file of Introduction to Useful Use case When upgrading the firmware
Features application. Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99
CSTMN-CS Display of custom menu Czech file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Czech language file for custom menu
INTRO-VN Display of useful features application introduction Vietnamese file application.
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Vietnamese language file of Introduction to
CSTMN-DA Display of custom menu Danish file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Danish language file for custom menu
application.
CSTMN-FR Display of custom menu French file version
Lv.1 Details To display the version of French language file for custom menu
application.
CSTMN-EL Display of custom menu Greek file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Greek language file for custom menu
application.
CSTMN-IT Display of custom menu Italian file version
Lv.1 Details To display the version of Italian language file for custom menu
application.
8-15
8
8-16
CSTMN-ET Display of custom menu Estonian file version CSTMN-SL Display of custom menu Slovenian file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Estonian language file for custom menu Lv.2 Details To display the version of Slovenian language file for custom menu
application. application.
CSTMN-FI Display of custom menu Finnish file version CSTMN-SV Display of custom menu Swedish file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Finnish language file for custom menu Lv.2 Details To display the version of Swedish language file for custom menu
CSTMN-HU Display of custom menu Hungarian file version CSTMN-ID Display of custom menu Indonesian file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Hungarian language file for custom menu Lv.2 Details To display the version of Indonesian language file for custom menu
CSTMN-NL Display of custom menu Dutch file version CSTMN-BU Display of custom menu Bulgarian file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Dutch language file for custom menu Lv.2 Details To display the version of Bulgarian language file for custom menu
CSTMN-NO Display of custom menu Norwegian file version CSTMN-CR Display of custom menu Croatian file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Norwegian language file for custom menu Lv.2 Details To display the version of Croatian language file for custom menu
CSTMN-PL Display of custom menu Polish file version CSTMN-RM Display of custom menu Romanian file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Polish language file for custom menu Lv.2 Details To display the version of Romanian language file for custom menu
CSTMN-PT Display of custom menu Portuguese file version CSTMN-SK Display of custom menu Slovak file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Portuguese language file for custom menu Lv.2 Details To display the version of Slovak language file for custom menu
CSTMN-RU Display of custom menu Russian file version CSTMN-TK Display of custom menu Turkish file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Russian language file for custom menu Lv.2 Details To display the version of Turkish language file for custom menu
8-16
8
8-17
CSTMN-CA Display of custom menu Catalan file version ACSBT-TW Display of accessibility Traditional Chinese file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Catalan language file for custom menu Lv.2 Details To display the version of traditional Chinese language file for
application. Accessibility application.
CSTMN-TH Display of custom menu Thai file version ACSBT-KO Display of accessibility Korean file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Thai language file for custom menu Lv.2 Details To display the version of Korean language file for Accessibility
CSTMN-VN Display of custom menu Vietnamese file version ACSBT-CS Display of accessibility Czech file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Vietnamese language file for custom menu Lv.2 Details To display the version of Czech language file for Accessibility
ACSBT-FR Display of accessibility French file version ACSBT-DA Display of accessibility Danish file version
Lv.1 Details To display the version of French language file for Accessibility Lv.2 Details To display the version of Danish language file for Accessibility
ACSBT-IT Display of accessibility Italian file version ACSBT-EL Display of accessibility Greek file version
Lv.1 Details To display the version of Italian language file for Accessibility Lv.2 Details To display the version of Greek language file for Accessibility
ACSBT-DE Display of accessibility German file version ACSBT-ET Display of accessibility Estonian file version
Lv.1 Details To display the version of German language file for Accessibility Lv.2 Details To display the version of Estonian language file for Accessibility
ACSBT-ES Display of accessibility Spanish file version ACSBT-FI Display of accessibility Finnish file version
Lv.1 Details To display the version of Spanish language file for Accessibility Lv.2 Details To display the version of Finnish language file for Accessibility
ACSBT-ZH Display of accessibility Simplified Chinese file version ACSBT-HU Display of accessibility Hungarian file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of simplified Chinese language file for Lv.2 Details To display the version of Hungarian language file for Accessibility
Accessibility application. application.
8-17
8
8-18
ACSBT-NL Display of accessibility Dutch file version ACSBT-BU Display of accessibility Bulgarian file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Dutch language file for Accessibility Lv.2 Details To display the version of Bulgarian language file for Accessibility
ACSBT-NO Display of accessibility Norwegian file version ACSBT-CR Display of accessibility Croatian file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Norwegian language file for Accessibility Lv.2 Details To display the version of Croatian language file for Accessibility
ACSBT-PL Display of accessibility Polish file version ACSBT-RM Display of accessibility Romanian file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Polish language file for Accessibility Lv.2 Details To display the version of Romanian language file for Accessibility
ACSBT-PT Display of accessibility Portuguese file version ACSBT-SK Display of accessibility Slovak file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Portuguese language file for Accessibility Lv.2 Details To display the version of Slovak language file for Accessibility
ACSBT-RU Display of accessibility Russian file version ACSBT-TK Display of accessibility Turkish file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Russian language file for Accessibility Lv.2 Details To display the version of Turkish language file for Accessibility
ACSBT-SL Display of accessibility Slovenian file version ACSBT-CA Display of accessibility Catalan file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Slovenian language file for Accessibility Lv.2 Details To display the version of Catalan language file for Accessibility
ACSBT-SV Display of accessibility Swedish file version ACSBT-TH Display of accessibility Thai file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Swedish language file for Accessibility Lv.2 Details To display the version of Thai language file for Accessibility
ACSBT-ID Display of accessibility Indonesian file version ACSBT-VN Display of accessibility Vietnamese file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Indonesian language file for Accessibility Lv.2 Details To display the version of Vietnamese language file for Accessibility
8-18
8
8-19
ERS-FR Display of ERS French file version ERS-DA Display of ERS Danish file version
Lv.1 Details To display the version of French language file for ERS application. Lv.2 Details To display the version of Danish language file for ERS application.
Supplement/memo ERS: Error Recovery System Supplement/memo ERS: Error Recovery System
ERS-IT Display of ERS Italian file version ERS-EL Display of ERS Greek file version
Lv.1 Details To display the version of Italian language file for ERS application. Lv.2 Details To display the version of Greek language file for ERS application.
ERS-DE Display of ERS German file version ERS-ET Display of ERS Estonian file version
Lv.1 Details To display the version of German language file for ERS application. Lv.2 Details To display the version of Estonian language file for ERS application.
ERS-ES Display of ERS Spanish file version ERS-FI Display of ERS Finnish file version
Lv.1 Details To display the version of Spanish language file for ERS application. Lv.2 Details To display the version of Finnish language file for ERS application.
ERS-ZH Display of ERS Simplified Chinese file version ERS-HU Display of ERS Hungarian file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of simplified Chinese language file for ERS Lv.2 Details To display the version of Hungarian language file for ERS
ERS-TW Display of ERS Traditional Chinese file version ERS-NL Display of ERS Dutch file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of traditional Chinese language file for ERS Lv.2 Details To display the version of Dutch language file for ERS application.
application. Use case When upgrading the firmware
Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99 Supplement/memo ERS: Error Recovery System
Supplement/memo ERS: Error Recovery System ERS-NO Display of ERS Norwegian file version
ERS-KO Display of ERS Korean file version Lv.2 Details To display the version of Norwegian language file for ERS
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Korean language file for ERS application. application.
ERS-CS Display of ERS Czech file version ERS-PL Display of ERS Polish file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Czech language file for ERS application. Lv.2 Details To display the version of Polish language file for ERS application.
8-19
8
8-20
ERS-PT Display of ERS Portuguese file version ERS-SK Display of ERS Slovak file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Portuguese language file for ERS Lv.2 Details To display the version of Slovak language file for ERS application.
Supplement/memo ERS: Error Recovery System ERS-TK Display of ERS Turkish file version
ERS-RU Display of ERS Russian file version Lv.2 Details To display the version of Turkish language file for ERS application.
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Russian language file for ERS application. Use case When upgrading the firmware
Supplement/memo ERS: Error Recovery System ERS-CA Display of ERS Catalan file version
ERS-SL Display of ERS Slovenian file version Lv.2 Details To display the version of Catalan language file for ERS application.
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Slovenian language file for ERS application. Use case When upgrading the firmware
Supplement/memo ERS: Error Recovery System ERS-TH Display of ERS Thai file version
ERS-SV Display of ERS Swedish file version Lv.2 Details To display the version of Thai language file for ERS application.
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Swedish language file for ERS application. Use case When upgrading the firmware
Supplement/memo ERS: Error Recovery System ERS-VN Display of ERS Vietnamese file version
ERS-ID Display of ERS Indonesian file version Lv.2 Details To display the version of Vietnamese language file for ERS
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Indonesian language file for ERS application.
Supplement/memo ERS: Error Recovery System BCT Display of self diagnosis tool version
ERS-BU Display of ERS Bulgarian file version Lv.1 Details To display the version of self diagnosis tool.
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Bulgarian language file for ERS application. Use case When upgrading the firmware
Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99 LANG-TH Display of Thai language file version
Supplement/memo ERS: Error Recovery System Lv.2 Details To display the version of Thai language file.
ERS-CR Display of ERS Croatian file version Use case When upgrading the firmware
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Croatian language file for ERS application. Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99
Use case When upgrading the firmware LANG-VN Display of Vietnamese language file version
Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99 Lv.2 Details To display the version of Vietnamese language file.
Supplement/memo ERS: Error Recovery System Use case When upgrading the firmware
ERS-RM Display of ERS Romanian file version Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Romanian language file for ERS BOX-FR Display of BOX application French file version
application. Lv.1 Details To display the version of French language file for BOX application
Use case When upgrading the firmware (JAVA UI).
Supplement/memo ERS: Error Recovery System Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99
8-20
8
8-21
BOX-IT Display of BOX application Italian file version BOX-EL Display of BOX application Greek file version
Lv.1 Details To display the version of Italian language file for BOX application Lv.2 Details To display the version of Greek language file for BOX application
BOX-DE Display of BOX application German file version BOX-ET Display of BOX application Estonian file version
Lv.1 Details To display the version of German language file for BOX application Lv.2 Details To display the version of Estonian language file for BOX application
BOX-ES Display of BOX application Spanish file version BOX-FI Display of BOX application Finnish file version
Lv.1 Details To display the version of Spanish language file for BOX application Lv.2 Details To display the version of Finnish language file for BOX application
BOX-ZH Display of BOX application Simplified Chinese file version BOX-HU Display of BOX application Hungarian file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of simplified Chinese language file for BOX Lv.2 Details To display the version of Hungarian language file for BOX application
BOX-TW Display of BOX application Traditional Chinese file version BOX-NL Display of BOX application Dutch file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of traditional Chinese language file for BOX Lv.2 Details To display the version of Dutch language file for BOX application
BOX-KO Display of BOX application Korean file version BOX-NO Display of BOX application Norwegian file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Korean language file for BOX application Lv.2 Details To display the version of Norwegian language file for BOX
(JAVA UI). application (JAVA UI).
BOX-CS Display of BOX application Czech file version BOX-PL Display of BOX application Polish file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Czech language file for BOX application Lv.2 Details To display the version of Polish language file for BOX application
BOX-DA Display of BOX application Danish file version BOX-PT Display of BOX application Portuguese file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Danish language file for BOX application Lv.2 Details To display the version of Portuguese language file for BOX
8-21
8
8-22
BOX-RU Display of BOX application Russian file version BOX-TK Display of BOX application Turkish file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Russian language file for BOX application Lv.2 Details To display the version of Turkish language file for BOX application
BOX-SL Display of BOX application Slovenian file version BOX-CA Display of BOX application Catalan file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Slovenian language file for BOX application Lv.2 Details To display the version of Catalan language file for BOX application
BOX-SV Display of BOX application Swedish file version BOX-TH Display of BOX application Thai file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Swedish language file for BOX application Lv.2 Details To display the version of Thai language file for BOX application (JAVA
(JAVA UI). UI).
BOX-ID Display of BOX application Indonesian file version BOX-VN Display of BOX application Vietnamese file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Indonesian language file for BOX Lv.2 Details To display the version of Vietnamese language file for BOX
application (JAVA UI). application (JAVA UI).
BOX-BU Display of BOX application Bulgarian file version SC-FR Display of Self Copy application French file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Bulgarian language file for BOX application Lv.1 Details To display the version of French language file for Self Copy
BOX-CR Display of BOX application Croatian file version SC-IT Display of Self Copy application Italian file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Croatian language file for BOX application Lv.1 Details To display the version of Italian language file for Self Copy
BOX-RM Display of BOX application Romanian file version SC-DE Display of Self Copy application German file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Romanian language file for BOX application Lv.1 Details To display the version of German language file for Self Copy
BOX-SK Display of BOX application Slovak file version SC-ES Display of Self Copy application Spanish file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Slovak language file for BOX application Lv.1 Details To display the version of Spanish language file for Self Copy
8-22
8
8-23
SC-ZH Display of Self Copy application Simplified Chinese file version SC-HU Display of Self Copy application Hungarian file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of simplified Chinese language file for Self Lv.2 Details To display the version of Hungarian language file for Self Copy
Copy application (JAVA UI). application (JAVA UI).
SC-TW Display of Self Copy application Traditional Chinese file version SC-NL Display of Self Copy application Dutch file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of traditional Chinese language file for Self Lv.2 Details To display the version of Dutch language file for Self Copy
Copy application (JAVA UI). application (JAVA UI).
SC-KO Display of Self Copy application Korean file version SC-NO Display of Self Copy application Norwegian file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Korean language file for Self Copy Lv.2 Details To display the version of Norwegian language file for Self Copy
SC-CS Display of Self Copy application Czech file version SC-PL Display of Self Copy application Polish file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Czech language file for Self Copy Lv.2 Details To display the version of Polish language file for Self Copy
SC-DA Display of Self Copy application Danish file version SC-PT Display of Self Copy application Portuguese file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Danish language file for Self Copy Lv.2 Details To display the version of Portuguese language file for Self Copy
SC-EL Display of Self Copy application Greek file version SC-RU Display of Self Copy application Russian file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Greek language file for Self Copy Lv.2 Details To display the version of Russian language file for Self Copy
SC-ET Display of Self Copy application Estonian file version SC-SL Display of Self Copy application Slovenian file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Estonian language file for Self Copy Lv.2 Details To display the version of Slovenian language file for Self Copy
SC-FI Display of Self Copy application Finnish file version SC-SV Display of Self Copy application Swedish file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Finnish language file for Self Copy Lv.2 Details To display the version of Swedish language file for Self Copy
8-23
8
8-24
SC-ID Display of Self Copy application Indonesian file version SC-VN Display of Self Copy application Vietnamese file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Indonesian language file for Self Copy Lv.2 Details To display the version of Vietnamese language file for Self Copy
SC-BU Display of Self Copy application Bulgarian file version OPT-CAS1 Display of option Cassette 1 firmware version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Bulgarian language file for Self Copy Lv.1 Details To display the firmware version of option Cassette 1.
application (JAVA UI). Use case When upgrading the firmware
Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99 OPT-CAS2 Display of option Cassette 2 firmware version
SC-CR Display of Self Copy application Croatian file version Lv.1 Details To display the firmware version of option Cassette 2.
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Croatian language file for Self Copy Use case When upgrading the firmware
application (JAVA UI). Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99
OPT-CAS3 Display of option Cassette 3 firmware version
Lv.1 Details To display the firmware version of option Cassette 3.
SC-RM Display of Self Copy application Romanian file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Romanian language file for Self Copy
application (JAVA UI).
T-8-2
SC-SK Display of Self Copy application Slovak file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Slovak language file for Self Copy
SC-TK Display of Self Copy application Turkish file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Turkish language file for Self Copy
SC-CA Display of Self Copy application Catalan file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Catalan language file for Self Copy
SC-TH Display of Self Copy application Thai file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Thai language file for Self Copy application
(JAVA UI).
8-24
8
8 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > ACC-STS
8-25
■■USER ■■ACC-STS
COPIER>DISPLAY>USER COPIER>DISPLAY>ACC-STS
SPDTYPE Display of Controller Board engine speed type FEEDER Display of ADF connection state
Lv.1 Details To display the engine speed type (ppm) of Controller Board. Lv.1 Details To display the connecting state of ADF.
Use case When checking the engine speed type of Controller Board Use case When checking the connection between the machine and ADF
BRWS-STS Display of service browser ON/OFF Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
Lv.1 Details To display whether the service browser can be used. 0: Not connected, 1: Connected
If the value is 1, [Service Browser] button is displayed on the service SORTER Connect state of Finisher-related option
mode initial screen. Lv.1 Details To display the connecting state of Finisher-related options.
The value of BRWS-STS switches whenever COPIER> FUNCTION> Use case When checking the connection of Finisher-related options
INSTALL> BRWS-ACT is executed, but ON/OFF of service browser Display/adj/set range Left column (connecting state of Finisher-related options): 1 to 5
is enabled after reboot. If the service browser does not start even 1: Inner Finisher
though the value of BRWS-STS is 1, turn OFF/ON the main power 2 to 5: Not use
switch. Right column (connecting state of Finisher-belonged Inserter): 0 to 4
Use case When checking the operation mode of the service browser 0: no hole, 1 to 4: Not use
Caution The value of BRWS-STS is linked with COPIER> FUNCTION> CARD Display of connection state of Card Reader
INSTALL> BRWS-ACT, but the service browser cannot start even Lv.1 Details To display the connecting state of Card Reader.
though 1 is displayed unless the main power switch is turned OFF/
Use case When checking the connection between the machine and the Card
ON.
Reader
Display/adj/set range 1 to 2
1: ON (Available), 2: OFF (Not available)
0: No card is inserted while the Card Reader is connected. (Copy is
Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> BRWS-ACT
not available.)
T-8-3 1: Card Reader is not connected, or card is inserted while the Card
Reader is connected. (Copy is available.)
RAM Display of MNCON PCB memory capacity
Lv.1 Details To display the memory capacity of the Main Controller PCB.
Use case When checking the memory capacity of the machine
COINROBO Display of Coin Manager connection state
Lv.1 Details To display the connecting state of the Coin Manager.
Use case When checking the connection between the machine and the Coin
Manager
0: Not connected, 1: Connected
NIB Display of Network PCB connection state
Lv.1 Details To display the connecting state of the Network PCB.
Use case When checking the connection between the machine and the
Network PCB
0: Not connected, 1: Ethernet PCB connected, 2: Token Ring PCB
connected, 3: Ethernet PCB + Token Ring PCB connected
NETWARE Display of NetWare firmware install state
Lv.1 Details To display the installation state of the NetWare firmware.
Use case When checking whether NetWare firmware is installed to the
machine
0: Not installed, 1: Installed
8-25
8
Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > ACC-STS
8 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > ANALOG
8-26
COPIER>DISPLAY>ACC-STS ■■ANALOG
HDD Display of HDD model name
COPIER>DISPLAY>ANALOG
Lv.1 Details To display the model name of HDD.
TEMP Display of outside temperature
Use case When checking the model name of HDD used on the machine
Lv.1 Details To display the temperature outside the machine.
IA-RAM Display of MNCON PCB memory capacity
This is measured by the Environment Sensor that detects the
Lv.1 Details To display the memory capacity of the Main Controller PCB. outside air.
Use case When checking the memory capacity of the Main Controller PCB Use case When checking the temperature outside the machine
T-8-4
Appropriate target value 20 to 27
HUM Display of outside humidity
Lv.1 Details To display the humidity outside the machine.
outside air.
Use case When checking the humidity outside the machine
ABS-HUM Display of outside moisture amount
Lv.1 Details To display the absolute moisture amount outside the machine.
outside air.
Use case When checking the moisture amount outside the machine
FIX-C Display of Main Thermistor detection temperature
Lv.1 Details To display the temperature of the fixing heater detected by the Main
Thermistor.
Use case When checking the center temperature of the Fixing Heater.
Appropriate target value 180 to 230 (Among prints)
FIX-E Display of Sub Thermistor detection temperature
Lv.1 Details To display the temperature of the fixing heater detected by the Sub
Thermistor.
Use case When checking the edge temperature of the Fixing Heater.
Appropriate target value 180 to 230 (Among prints)
T-8-5
8-26
8
Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > ANALOG
8 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD
8-27
■■HV-STS ■■CCD
COPIER>DISPLAY>HV-STS COPIER>DISPLAY>CCD
PRIMARY Display of primary charging current TARGET-B Shading target value (B)
Lv.1 Details To display the current that is applied to the Primacy Charging Lv.2 Details To display the shading target value of Blue.
Assembly at the latest. Continuous display of 0 (minimum) or FFFF (maximum) is
Use case When checking the primary charging current considered a failure of the CCD Unit.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1600 Use case - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB
TR Display of transfer current: Plain paper, 1st side - At scanned image failure
Lv.1 Details To display the current that is applied to plain paper (1st side) in the Display/adj/set range 0 to FFFF
Pre-transfer Charging Assembly at the latest. Appropriate target value 512 to 2047
Use case When checking the transfer charging current TARGET-G Shading target value (G)
Display/adj/set range 0 to 50 Lv.2 Details To display the shading target value of Green.
Appropriate target value 5 to 50 Continuous display of 0 (minimum) or FFFF (maximum) is
considered a failure of the CCD Unit.
BIAS Display of developing DC bias setting value
Use case - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB
Lv.1 Details To display the setting value of developing DC bias.
- At scanned image failure
Use case When checking the developing DC bias
Display/adj/set range 0 to FFFF
TARGET-R Shading target value (R)
T-8-6
Lv.2 Details To display the shading target value of Red.
Continuous display of 0 (minimum) or FFFF (maximum) is
considered a failure of the CCD Unit.
Use case - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB
- At scanned image failure
Display/adj/set range 0 to FFFF
OFST-BW1 CIS offset level adjustment value: BW1
Lv.1 Details To display the offset level adjustment value (BW1) of CIS.
Use case When judging whether this adjustment value is appropriate in the
case that an image failure due to CIS occurs
8-27
8
Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD
8-28
COPIER>DISPLAY>CCD COPIER>DISPLAY>CCD
OFST-BW4 CIS offset level adjustment value: BW4 OFSTBW11 CIS offset level adjustment value: BW11
Lv.1 Details To display the offset level adjustment value (BW4) of CIS. Lv.1 Details To display the offset level adjustment value (BW11) of CIS.
Use case When judging whether this adjustment value is appropriate in the Use case When judging whether this adjustment value is appropriate in the
case that an image failure due to CIS occurs case that an image failure due to CIS occurs
Display/adj/set range 1 to 255 Display/adj/set range 1 to 255
Appropriate target value 1 to 255 Appropriate target value 1 to 255
OFST-BW5 CIS offset level adjustment value: BW5 OFST-CL1 CIS offset level adjustment value: CL1
Lv.1 Details To display the offset level adjustment value (BW5) of CIS. Lv.1 Details To display the offset level adjustment value (CL1) of CIS.
OFSTBW10 CIS offset level adjustment value: BW10 OFST-CL6 CIS offset level adjustment value: CL6
8-28
8
8-29
COPIER>DISPLAY>CCD
OFST-CL7 CIS offset level adjustment value: CL7
Lv.1 Details To display the offset level adjustment value (CL7) of CIS.
OFSTCL10 CIS offset level adjustment value: CL10
OFSTCL11 CIS offset level adjustment value: CL11
GAIN-BW CIS gain level adjustment value: BW
Lv.1 Details To display the B&W gain level adjustment value of the CIS.
Use case When image failure occurs at reading in black mode
GAIN-CL CIS gain level adjustment value: CL
Lv.1 Details To display the color gain level adjustment value of the CIS.
Use case When image failure occurs at reading in color mode
T-8-7
8-29
8
8 Service Mode > COPIER > I/O > Main Body_DC Controller (DC-CON> P001 to P016)
8-30
I/O Address bit Name Symbol Remarks
P002 15 Not used -
■■Main Body_DC Controller (DC-CON> P001 to P016) 14
Option Cassette Connection
- 0: Connect
Check
Main Body 13 Not used -
CASSETTE UNIT-AA1 12 Not used -
11 Cassette Size Detection Switch-1 SW2 Detect paper size by combination
Address bit Name Symbol Remarks 10 Cassette Size Detection Switch-2 SW2 of 4 switches.
P001 15 Transparency Sensor PS20 1: Paper presence 9 Cassette Size Detection Switch-3 SW2 0: ON (Condition that the switch is
14 Cassette Pickup Sensor PS13 1: Paper absence pressed)
13 Cassette Lifting Plate Sensor PS14 0: Paper absence 1: OFF
12 Cassette Paper Sensor PS15 Detect paper level by combination 8 Cassette Size Detection Switch-4 SW2 As for the combination, refer to the
of 3 sensors. Pickup/Feed System in Service
11 Cassette Paper Level Sensor A PS16
0: OFF Manual.
1: ON 7 Not used -
10 Cassette Paper Level Sensor B PS17 As for the combination, refer to the 6 Not used -
Pickup/Feed System in Service 5 Not used -
Manual. 4 Not used -
9 Registration Sensor PS11 0: Paper presence 3 Not used -
8 Pre-Registration Sensor PS12 0: Paper presence 2 Not used -
7 Arch Sensor PS9 1: Paper presence 1 Not used -
6 Not used - 0 Not used -
5 Duplex Feed Sensor PS8 1: Paper presence P003 15-0 Not used -
4 Multi-purpose Tray Paper Sensor PS7 0: Paper presence P004 15 Hopper Motor M6 1: Drive
3 Delivery Sensor PS5 1: Paper presence 14 Bottle Motor M5 1: Drive
2 Reverse Sensor PS6 1: Paper presence 13 For R&D use -
1 Fixing Pressure Release Sensor PS18 0: Pressure release 12 For R&D use -
0 Fixing Paper Sensor PS19 0: Paper absence 11 For R&D use -
10 For R&D use -
9 For R&D use -
8 For R&D use -
7 For R&D use -
6 For R&D use -
5 For R&D use -
4 For R&D use -
3 For R&D use -
2 Cassette Pickup Solenoid SL3 1: Drive
1 Lifter Motor M9 1: ON
0 For R&D use -
P005 15-0 Not used -
8-30
8
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O > Main Body_DC Controller (DC-CON> P001 to P016)
8 Service Mode > COPIER > I/O > Main Body_DC Controller (DC-CON> P001 to P016)
8-31
Address bit Name Symbol Remarks Address bit Name Symbol Remarks
P010 7 Not used - P016 7-0 Not used -
6 For R&D use - T-8-8
5 For R&D use -
4 Not used -
3 Not used -
2 For R&D use -
1 For R&D use -
0 For R&D use -
P011 7 For R&D use -
6 Delivery Cooling Fan (Rear) FM1 1: Full Speed
Delivery Cooling Fan (Front)/
5 FM2/FM3 1: Half Speed
(Center)
Delivery Cooling Fan (Front)/
4 FM2/FM3 1: Full Speed
(Center)
3 Waste Toner Motor Drive Signal M3 1: Drive
2 Not used -
1 Not used -
0 Not used -
P012 7 Not used -
6 Not used -
5 Not used -
4 Not used -
3 Not used -
2 Not used -
1 Finisher Connection Check - 0: Connect
0 For R&D use -
P013 7 Main Thermistor THM1 0: Connect
6 Not used -
5 Sub Thermistor THM2 0: Abnormal
4 Not used -
3 Cover Switch SW1 0: CLOSE
2 Not used -
1 Front Cover Sensor PS1 0: OPEN
0 Not used -
P014 7-0 Not used -
P015 7 For R&D use -
6 For R&D use -
5 For R&D use -
4 For R&D use -
3 Not used -
2 Not used -
1 Not used -
0 Not used -
8-31
8
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O > Main Body_DC Controller (DC-CON> P001 to P016)
8 Service Mode > COPIER > I/O > Reader (R-CON> P001)
8-32
■■ADF (FEEDER> P001) ■■Reader (R-CON> P001)
Address bit Name Symbol Remarks Address bit Name Symbol Remarks
P001 15 Not used - P001 15 Not used -
14 ADF Connection Check - 0: Connect 14 Not used -
13 Original Set Sensor PS27 1: Paper presence 13 Not used -
9 Stay Sensor PS24 1: Paper presence 9 Not used -
8 Reversal Sensor PS25 1: Paper presence 8 Not used -
7 Registration Sensor PS23 1: Paper presence 7 Not used -
6 Timing Sensor PS26 1: Paper presence 6 Not used -
5 Lead Sensor PS22 1: Paper presence 5 Not used -
1 Not used - 1 CIS HP Sensor PS21 1: Open
T-8-9 T-8-10
8-32
8
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O > Reader (R-CON> P001)
8 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY
8-33
ADJUST ■■ADJ-XY
COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY
■■AE
ADJ-X Adjustment of image position in book mode: vertical scanning
COPIER>ADJUST>AE Lv.1 Details To adjust the image reading start position (image lead edge position)
AE-TBL Adjustment of text density at image density adjustment in vertical scanning direction.
When the non-image width is larger than the standard value, set the
Lv.1 Details To increase/decrease the overall density with a focus on the
highlighted area according to the adjustment value. smaller value.
As the value is larger, overall density is increased. When out of original area is copied, set the larger value.
As the value is incremented by 1, the image position moves to the
Use case When clearing the RAM data of the Reader Controller PCB
leading edge side by 0.1mm.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Use case - When replacing the CIS Unit
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Default value 5 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
T-8-11
Caution Output the service mode setting values by P-PRINT beforehand.
Unit 0.1mm
Default value 20
Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> P-PRINT
ADJ-Y Adjustment of image position in book mode: horizontal scanning
Lv.1 Details To adjust the image reading start position in horizontal scanning
direction.
When the non-image width is larger than the standard value, set the
smaller value.
When out of original area is copied, set the larger value.
As the value is incremented by 1, the image position moves to the
rear side by 0.1mm.
After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the
service label.
Display/adj/set range -25 to 25
Unit 0.1mm
Default value 0
8-33
8
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY
8 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY
8-34
COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY
ADJ-S Adjusting the home position of the CIS unit ADJ-X-MG Adjustment of image ratio in book mode: vertical scanning
Lv.1 Details To change the position to measure data for shading correction with Lv.1 Details To make a fine adjustment of image magnification in vertical
standard white plate (horizontal scanning direction) by adjusting the scanning direction at copyboard reading.
home position of the CIS unit. As the value is incremented by 1, the image magnification changes
As the value is incremented by 1, CIS unit moves to the horizontal by 0.1%.
scanning direction by 0.1mm. +: Enlarge
Use case - When replacing the CIS Unit -: Reduce
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Use case - When replacing the CIS Unit
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Caution Output the service mode setting values by P-PRINT beforehand. Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and
After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the press OK key.
service label. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/adj/set range 20 to 500 Caution Output the service mode setting values by P-PRINT beforehand.
Unit 0.1mm After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the
service label.
Default value 73
Unit 0.1%
ADJ-Y-DF Adjustment of image position in ADF mode: horizontal scanning
Default value 0
Lv.1 Details To adjust the image reading start position in horizontal scanning
direction at ADF reading. Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> P-PRINT
As the value is incremented by 1, the image position moves to the T-8-12
front side by 0.1mm.
service label.
Unit 0.1mm
Default value 0
STRD-POS Adjusting read position in ADF mode
Lv.1 Details To adjust the reading position at ADF reading.
service label.
Unit 0.1mm
Default value 100
8-34
8
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY
8 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD
8-35
■■CCD COPIER>ADJUST>CCD
W-PLT-Z White level data(Z) entry of white plate
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD
Lv.1 Details When replacing the Copyboard Glass, enter the value of barcode
W-PLT-X White level data(X) entry of white plate label which is affixed on the glass.
Lv.1 Details When replacing the Copyboard Glass, enter the value of barcode Use case - When replacing the CIS Unit
label which is affixed on the glass. - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Use case - When replacing the CIS Unit - When replacing the Copyboard Glass
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
- When replacing the Copyboard Glass 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution Output the service mode setting values by P-PRINT beforehand.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the
Caution Output the service mode setting values by P-PRINT beforehand. service label.
After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the Display/adj/set range 1 to 9999
service label.
Default value 9427
Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-X, W-PLT-Y
Default value 8273 COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> P-PRINT
Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-Y, W-PLT-Z SH-TRGT Shading target value (B&W) [Copyboard]
COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> P-PRINT
Lv.1 Details To set the B&W shading target value in copyboard reading mode.
W-PLT-Y White level data(Y) entry of white plate
Lv.1 Details When replacing the Copyboard Glass, enter the value of barcode - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
label which is affixed on the glass. - When replacing the Copyboard Glass
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value and press OK key.
- When replacing the Copyboard Glass
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Default value 278
Caution Output the service mode setting values by P-PRINT beforehand. Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> P-PRINT
After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the DFTAR-R Shading target value (R) at ADF mode.
service label. Lv.1 Details To adjust the shading target value (R) at ADF reading.
Display/adj/set range 1 to 9999 When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit , execute
Default value 8737 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL3, DF-WLVL4.
Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-X, W-PLT-Z Use case - When replacing the CIS Unit
COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> P-PRINT - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Default value 267
Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL3, DF-WLVL4
8-35
8
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD
8 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > LASER
8-36
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD ■■LASER
DFTAR-G Shading target value (G) at ADF mode.
COPIER>ADJUST>LASER
Lv.1 Details To adjust the shading target value (G) at ADF reading.
When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit , execute PVE-OFST Trailing edge OFF adjustment for the laser
COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL3, DF-WLVL4. Lv.1 Details To adjust the image position by changing the laser emitting position.
Use case - When replacing the CIS Unit As the value is incremented by 1, the image moves by 0.1mm.
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data +: Toward rear
- When replacing the Copyboard Glass -: Toward front
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value and press OK key. Use case When adjusting image position
Caution Output the service mode setting values by P-PRINT beforehand. Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and
press OK key.
Caution Do not use except for replacing the DC controller PCB or laser
Default value 269
scanner unit. When adjusting the image position, use “COPIER>
Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL3, DF-WLVL4 MISC> C1-ADJ-Y to MF-ADJ-Y”.
COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> P-PRINT After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the
DFTAR-B Shading target value (B) at ADF mode. service label.
Lv.1 Details To adjust the shading target value (B) at ADF reading. Display/adj/set range -300 to 300
When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit, execute
Unit 0.1mm
COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL3, DF-WLVL4.
Default value 0
Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> MISC> C1-ADJ-Y, C2-ADJ-Y, C3-ADJ-Y, C4-
ADJ-Y, MF-ADJ-Y
POWER Adjustment of laser power at no potential control
Lv.1 Details To adjust the laser power when the potential control is not
performed.
When the setting value is incremented, the thin line becomes thick.
Default value 266
Use case When thin lines reproducibility is not good or when some kind of
Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL3, DF-WLVL4 problems of the laser power (light quantity) occurred .
COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> P-PRINT Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
DFTAR-K Shading target value (Black) at ADF mode
Caution Do not use this at the normal service.
Lv.1 Details To adjust the shading target value (Bk) at ADF reading.
When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit (paper front),
Default value 0
execute COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1, DF-WLVL2.
LOW-PWR Adjustment of laser power at no potential control, low-speed
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Lv.1 Details To adjust the laser power at low speed while the potential control is
- When replacing the Copyboard Glass not performed.
When the setting value is incremented, the thin line becomes thick.
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Use case When thin lines reproducibility is not good or when some kind of
problems of the laser power (light quantity) occurred .
Default value 278
Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1, DF-WLVL2
Default value 0
T-8-13
8-36
8
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > LASER
8 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > LASER
8-37
COPIER>ADJUST>LASER COPIER>ADJUST>LASER
LDADJ1-K Magnification between A-B laser LDADJ4-K Phase difference between A-B laser
Lv.1 Details Magnification adjustment amount of the B laser of the Laser Scanner Lv.1 Details Adjustment amount of phase difference (write start position) between
Unit. A and B lasers of the Laser Scanner Unit.
To adjust the magnification of the laser based on the magnification If the input value is not appropriate, phase difference between A and
of A laser. B lasers (misalignment of write start position) occurs.
If the input value is not appropriate, image quality decreases. Use case When replacing the Laser Scanner Unit
Use case When replacing the Laser Scanner Unit Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
service label. Display/adj/set range -512 to 511
Display/adj/set range -512 to 511 Default value 0
Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> LASER> LDADJ1-K, LDADJ2-K, LDADJ3-K,
Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> LASER> LDADJ2-K, LDADJ3-K, LDADJ4-K, LDADJ5-K, LDADJ6-K
LDADJ5-K, LDADJ6-K LDADJ5-K Phase difference between A-C laser
LDADJ2-K Magnification between A-C laser Lv.1 Details Adjustment amount of phase difference (write start position) between
Lv.1 Details Magnification adjustment amount of the C laser of the Laser A and C lasers of the Laser Scanner Unit.
Scanner Unit. If the input value is not appropriate, image quality decreases.
To adjust the magnification of the laser based on the magnification Use case When replacing the Laser Scanner Unit
of A laser. Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
If the input value is not appropriate, image quality decreases. Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the
Use case When replacing the Laser Scanner Unit service label.
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range -512 to 511
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the Default value 0
service label. Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> LASER> LDADJ1-K, LDADJ2-K, LDADJ3-K,
Display/adj/set range -512 to 511 LDADJ4-K, LDADJ6-K
Default value 0 LDADJ6-K Phase difference between A-D laser
Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> LASER> LDADJ1-K, LDADJ3-K, LDADJ4-K, Lv.1 Details Adjustment amount of phase difference (write start position) between
LDADJ5-K, LDADJ6-K A and D lasers of the Laser Scanner Unit.
LDADJ3-K Magnification between A-D laser If the input value is not appropriate, image quality decreases.
Lv.1 Details Magnification adjustment amount of the D laser of the Laser Use case When replacing the Laser Scanner Unit
Scanner Unit. Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
To adjust the magnification of the laser based on the magnification Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the
of A laser. service label.
If the input value is not appropriate, image quality decreases.
Use case When replacing the Laser Scanner Unit
Default value 0
Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> LASER> LDADJ1-K, LDADJ2-K, LDADJ3-K,
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the LDADJ4-K, LDADJ5-K
service label.
T-8-14
Default value 0
Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> LASER> LDADJ1-K, LDADJ2-K, LDADJ4-K,
LDADJ5-K, LDADJ6-K
8-37
8
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > LASER
8 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > DENS
8-38
■■DEVELOP ■■DENS
COPIER>ADJUST>DEVELOP COPIER>ADJUST>DENS
DE-OFST Set of developing bias offset value DENS-ADJ Density correction of copy image
Lv.1 Details To set the Vdc offset auto adjustment value for potential control of Lv.1 Details To correct the density of copy image by changing the F-value table.
copy image manually. Blurring is alleviated when the value is increased, and fogging is
As the value is increased, copy image gets darker. alleviated when the value is decreased.
Use case At the occurrence of an image failure (fogging, low density) Use case When fogging or blurring at high density area occurs with a copy
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and image
press OK key. Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Density of printer output image cannot be corrected.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the Output the service mode setting values by P-PRINT beforehand.
service label. Display/adj/set range 1 to 9
Display/adj/set range -128 to 127 Default value 5
Unit 0.3% (duty) Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> P-PRINT
Default value 0 DENS-PRT Density correction of printer image
T-8-15 Lv.1 Details To correct the density of printer image by changing the F-value
table.
Blurring is alleviated when the value is increased, and fogging is
alleviated when the value is decreased.
Use case When fogging or blurring at high density area occurs with a copy
image
Caution Density of copy output image cannot be corrected.
Default value 5
T-8-16
8-38
8
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > DENS
8 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > PASCAL
8-39
■■BLANK ■■PASCAL
COPIER>ADJUST>BLANK COPIER>ADJUST>PASCAL
BLANK-T Adjustment of leading edge margin OFST-P-K Bk density adjustment at test print reading
Lv.1 Details To adjust the margin on the leading edge of paper. Lv.1 Details To adjust the offset of Bk-color test print reading signal at auto
As the value is incremented by 1, the margin is increased toward the gradation adjustment (full adjustment).
center of the paper by 1 pixel (0.0423mm). As the value is larger, the image after adjustment gets darker.
Use case - When reducing the margin upon user’s request Use case When replacing the CIS Unit
- When enlarging the margin for transfer separation/fixing separation Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value and press OK key.
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the
Caution Do not use this at the normal service. service label.
Output the service mode setting values by P-PRINT beforehand. Display/adj/set range -128 to 128
After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the Default value According to the setting at shipment
service label.
T-8-18
Unit 1pixel
Default value 118
BLANK-B Adjustment of trailing edge margin
Lv.1 Details To adjust the margin on the trailing edge of paper.
As the value is incremented by 1, the margin is increased toward the
center of the paper by 1 pixel (0.0423mm).
Use case - When reducing the margin upon user’s request
- When enlarging the margin for transfer separation/fixing separation
Output the service mode setting values by P-PRINT beforehand.
service label.
Unit 1pixel
Default value 118
T-8-17
8-39
8
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > PASCAL
8 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR
8-40
■■HV-PRI ■■HV-TR
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PRI COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR
OFST1-DC Adjustment of primary charging DC bias offset value TR-OFST Adjustment of transfer charge current offset output value
Lv.1 Details To adjust the offset value of the primary charging DC bias. Lv.1 Details To adjust the offset output value of the transfer charging current.
As the value is increased, copy image gets darker. Use case When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Use case When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Output the service mode setting values by P-PRINT beforehand.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the
service label. service label.
Display/adj/set range -128 to 127 Display/adj/set range -128 to 127
Unit 0.3% (duty) Unit 0.3% (duty)
Default value 0 Default value 0
OFST1-AC Adjustment of primary charging AC bias offset value Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> P-PRINT
Lv.1 Details To adjust the offset value of the primary charging AC bias. T-8-20
Use case When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the
service label.
Unit 0.5% (duty)
Default value 0
T-8-19
8-40
8
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR
8 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ
8-41
■■FEED-ADJ COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ
LOOP-MF Registration loop amount adjustment: MP-feeding
COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ
Lv.1 Details The paper feeding distance is increased/decreased by changing the
REGIST Adjustment of registration start timing: 1/1 speed value.
Lv.1 Details To adjust the timing to turn ON the Registration roller at 1/1 speed. +: The loop amount increases.
As the value is incremented by 1, the margin on the leading edge of -: The loop amount decreases.
paper is increased by 0.1 mm. Use case When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
+: Top margin becomes larger. (An image moves downward.) When the manual feeding paper is skewed
-: Top margin becomes smaller. (An image moves upward.)
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and
When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the press OK key.
value of service label. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and Display/adj/set range -128 to 127
press OK key.
Unit 0.1mm
After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the Default value 45
service label. Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> P-PRINT
Display/adj/set range -50 to 50 ADJ-REFE Write start position in horizontal scanning: 2-sided feeding
Unit 0.1mm Lv.1 Details To adjust the image write start position on the second side in the
horizontal scanning direction.
Default value 0
The image write start position is set in the relative amount against
the first side regardless of the paper pickup cassette/tray/deck.
LOOP-CST Registration loop amount adjustment: cassette feeding As the value is incremented by 1, the margin on the left edge of
Lv.1 Details The paper feeding distance is increased/decreased by changing the paper is increased by 0.1 mm.
value. +: Left margin becomes larger. (An image moves to the right.)
+: The loop amount increases. -: Left margin becomes smaller. (An image moves to the left.).
-: The loop amount decreases. Use case When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
When the casette feeding paper is skewed press OK key.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the
Caution Output the service mode setting values by P-PRINT beforehand. service label.
Display/adj/set range -128 to 127 Display/adj/set range -50 to 50
Unit 0.1mm Unit 0.1mm
Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> P-PRINT Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> P-PRINT
8-41
8
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ
8 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ
8-42
COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ
LOOPREFE Registration loop amount adjustment: 2nd-sided feeding ADJ-RE-L Side registration adjustment: 2nd-sided with large paper
Lv.1 Details The paper feeding distance is increased/decreased by changing the Lv.1 Details To adjust the image reading start position in horizontal scanning
value. direction for 2-sided print.
+: The loop amount increases. As the value is incremented by 0.1, the left blank area changes by
-: The loop amount decreases. 0.1mm.
Use case When the skew occurs on the image of the 2nd side (of the paper) +: The left blank area becomes narrow. (The image shifts to left)
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and -: The left blank area becomes wide. (The image shifts to right).
press OK key. Use case When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and
Caution Output the service mode setting values by P-PRINT beforehand. press OK key.
Display/adj/set range -128 to 127 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Unit 0.1mm Caution Output the service mode setting values by P-PRINT beforehand.
Default value 45 Display/adj/set range -128 to 127
Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> P-PRINT Unit 0.1mm
RG-HF-SP Registration clutch on timing adjustment: half speed feeding Default value 0
Lv.1 Details The on timing of the registration clutch becomes fast/slow by Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> P-PRINT
changing the value. Supplement/memo Large paper: more than LTR paper
+: The on timing becomes fast. LOOP-THK Registration loop amount adjustment: heavy paper feeding from MP
-: The on timing becomes slow. Tray
Use case When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Lv.1 Details The paper feeding distance is increased/decreased by changing the
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and value.
press OK key. +: The loop amount increases.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. -: The loop amount decreases.
Caution Output the service mode setting values by P-PRINT beforehand. Use case When the skew occurs with heavy paper 1 or heavy paper 2 for the
After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the manual feeding.
service label. Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and
Display/adj/set range -128 to 127 press OK key.
Unit 0.1mm 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Default value 0 Caution Output the service mode setting values by P-PRINT beforehand.
Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> P-PRINT Display/adj/set range -128 to 127
Unit 0.1mm
Default value 0
8-42
8
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ
8 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > MISC
8-43
COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ ■■MISC
LOOP-SP Registration loop amount adjustment: special paper feeding
COPIER>ADJUST>MISC
Lv.2 Details The paper feeding distance is increased/decreased by changing the
value. SEG-ADJ Set criteria for text/photo mode
+: The loop amount increases. Lv.1 Details To set the judgment level of text/photo original in Text/Photo.
-: The loop amount decreases. As the value is increased, the original tends to be detected as a
Use case When the skew occurs with special paper photo document, and as the value is decreased, the original tends to
be detected as a text document.
press OK key. Use case When adjusting the classification level of text and photo in Text/
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Photo mode
Caution Output the service mode setting values by P-PRINT beforehand. Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and
press OK key.
Unit 0.1mm
Default value 0
Default value 0
Supplement/memo Special paper is OHP and Bond paper.
K-ADJ Set criteria for black text
LOOP-ENV Registration loop amount adjustment: envelope feeding
Lv.1 Details To set the judgment level of black characters at text processing.
Lv.2 Details The paper feeding distance is increased/decreased by changing the As the value is increased, the text tends to be detected as black.
value.
Use case When preferring the text to be judged as black
+: The loop amount increases.
-: The loop amount decreases.
press OK key.
Use case When the skew occurs with envelope
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and Display/adj/set range -3 to 3
press OK key.
Default value 0
Caution Output the service mode setting values by P-PRINT beforehand. ACS-ADJ Set criteria for B&W/color in ACS mode
Display/adj/set range -128 to 127 Lv.1 Details To set the judgment level of B&W/color original in ACS mode.
As the value is increased, the original tends to be detected as a
Unit 0.1mm
B&W document, and as the value is decreased, the original tends to
Default value 0 be detected as a color document.
Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> P-PRINT Use case When adjusting the color detection level in ACS mode
ADJ-PTMG Adjustment fixing temperature at start of pickup Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and
Lv.2 Details To adjust the paper feeding timing according to the feed allowance press OK key.
temperature. (regardless of the fixing mode) 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Use case Use to shorten the first copy time or the warm up time. Display/adj/set range -3 to 3
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Default value 0
Caution Output the service mode setting values by P-PRINT beforehand. ACS-EN Set judgment area in ACS mode
Display/adj/set range 0 to 14 Lv.2 Details To set the judgment area in ACS mode.
0 to 2: +15 degree As the greater value is set, the judgment area is widened.
3 to 11: each 3 degree Use case When adjusting the judgment area in ACS mode
12 to 14: -15degree Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and
Unit -deg C press OK key.
Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> P-PRINT Display/adj/set range -2 to 2
T-8-21 Default value 1
8-43
8
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > MISC
8-44
COPIER>ADJUST>MISC COPIER>ADJUST>MISC
ACS-CNT Set judgment pixel count area in ACS mode: front C3-ADJ-Y Entering Cassette3 side registration adjustment value
Lv.2 Details To set the area where the pixel is counted to judge the color Lv.2 Details As the value is incremented by 1, the margin on the left edge of
presence in ACS mode. paper is increased by 0.1 mm.
As the value is larger, the judgment area is widened. +: Left margin becomes smaller. (An image moves to the left.)
Use case When adjusting the area where the pixel is counted to judge the -: Left margin becomes larger. (An image moves to the right.)
color presence in ACS mode Use case When adjusting side registration of paper picked up from Cassette
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and 3, when executing RAM clear of the DC Controller PCB, or when
press OK key. replacing the PCB
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/adj/set range -2 to 2 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Default value 0 Caution Output the service mode setting values by P-PRINT beforehand.
C1-ADJ-Y Entering Cassette1 side registration adjustment value After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the
service label.
Lv.2 Details As the value is incremented by 1, the margin on the left edge of
paper is increased by 0.1 mm. Display/adj/set range -128 to 127
+: Left margin becomes smaller. (An image moves to the left.) Unit 0.1mm
-: Left margin becomes larger. (An image moves to the right.) Default value 0
Use case When adjusting side registration of paper picked up from Cassette Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> P-PRINT
1, when executing RAM clear of the DC Controller PCB, or when C4-ADJ-Y Entering Cassette4 side registration adjustment value
replacing the PCB Lv.2 Details As the value is incremented by 1, the margin on the left edge of
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. paper is increased by 0.1 mm.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. +: Left margin becomes smaller. (An image moves to the left.)
Caution Output the service mode setting values by P-PRINT beforehand. -: Left margin becomes larger. (An image moves to the right.)
After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the Use case When adjusting side registration of paper picked up from Cassette
service label. 4, when executing RAM clear of the DC Controller PCB, or when
Display/adj/set range -128 to 127 replacing the PCB
Unit 0.1mm Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> P-PRINT Caution Output the service mode setting values by P-PRINT beforehand.
C2-ADJ-Y Entering Cassette2 side registration adjustment value After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the
service label.
paper is increased by 0.1 mm. Display/adj/set range -128 to 127
+: Left margin becomes smaller. (An image moves to the left.) Unit 0.1mm
-: Left margin becomes larger. (An image moves to the right.) Default value 0
Use case When adjusting side registration of paper picked up from Cassette Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> P-PRINT
2, when executing RAM clear of the DC Controller PCB, or when
replacing the PCB
service label.
Unit 0.1mm
Default value 0
8-44
8
8-45
COPIER>ADJUST>MISC
MF-ADJ-Y Entering MP Tray side registration adjustment value
paper is increased by 0.1 mm.
+: Left margin becomes smaller. (An image moves to the left.)
-: Left margin becomes larger. (An image moves to the right.)
Use case When adjusting side registration of paper picked up from Multi-
purpose Tray, when executing RAM clear of the DC Controller PCB,
or when replacing the PCB
service label.
Unit 0.1mm
Default value 0
ACS-EN2 Set ACS mode judgment area in ADF mode
Lv.2 Details To set the judgment area in ACS mode at ADF reading.
As the greater value is set, the judgment area is widened.
Use case When adjusting the judgment area in ACS mode at ADF reading
press OK key.
Default value 1
ACS-CNT2 Set ACS judgment pixel count area in ADF
Lv.2 Details To set the area which counts the pixel to judge the color presence in
ACS mode at ADF reading.
As the greater value is set, the judgment area is widen.
Use case When adjusting the area which counts the pixel to judge the color
presence in ACS mode at ADF reading
press OK key.
Default value 0
T-8-22
8-45
8
8 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL
8-46
FUNCTION COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL
E-RDS Set use/no use of Embedded-RDS function
■■INSTALL Lv.1 Details To set whether to use the Embedded-RDS function.
Use case When using Embedded-RDS
COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL
TONER-S Toner supply to Developing Assembly 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Lv.1 Details To execute a series of operation necessary for supplying toner to Caution Be sure to use E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-LOG and
the Developing Assembly/Toner Supply area (drive the Developing RGW-ADR as a set.
Cylinder, Toner Stirring/Feed Member, Photosensitive Drum, and Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
output developing bias) as a whole. 0: Function not used, 1: Function used (All the counter information is
After finishing the operation, it is stopped automatically. sent.)
Use case - At installation Default value 0
- When replacing the Developing Assembly
Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-
- When replacing toner in the Developing Assembly
LOG, RGW-ADR
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select the items. COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERDS-DAT
“Check the Developer” is displayed.
Supplement/memo Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the
2) Check connection, and then press OK key.
device counter, failure, and consumables to the sales company’s
It automatically stops after 10 minutes.
server via SOAP protocol
Caution - Although “Check the Developer” is displayed when selecting the
RGW-PORT Set port number of Sales Company’s server
item, be sure to check the connection between the Developing
Assembly and connector. Lv.1 Details To set the port number of the sales company’s server to be used for
Embedded-RDS.
- The operation can stop manually with OK key when a failure
occurs. Use case When using Embedded-RDS
Display/adj/set range During operation: xxx second (remaining time), When operation Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
finished normally: END 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
CARD Card number setting Caution Be sure to use E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-LOG and
RGW-ADR as a set.
Lv.1 Details To set the card number to be used for Card Reader.
A series of numbers from the entered number to the number of Display/adj/set range 1 to 65535
cards specified by CARD-RNG can be used. Default value 443
Use case - At installation of the Card Reader Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> E-RDS, COM-TEST, COM-LOG,
- After replacement of the HDD RGW-ADR
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the number, and then press OK key. COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERDS-DAT
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Supplement/memo Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the
Caution The card management information (department ID and password) is device counter, failure, and consumables to the sales company’s
initialized. server via SOAP protocol
Default value 0
Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> CARD-RNG
8-46
8
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL
8-47
COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL
COM-TEST Display of connect result with Sales Company’s server RGW-ADR URL setting of Sales Company’s server
Lv.1 Details To display the result of the connection test with the sales company’s Lv.1 Details To set the URL of the sales company’s server to be used for
server. Embedded-RDS.
Use case When using Embedded-RDS Use case When using Embedded-RDS
Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. Adj/set/operate method 1) Select the URL.
Caution Be sure to use E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-LOG and 2) Enter the URL, and then press OK key.
RGW-ADR as a set. 3) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/adj/set range During operation: ACTIVE, When connection is completed: OK, Caution - Do not use Shift-JIS character strings.
When connection is failed: NG - Be sure to use E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-LOG and
Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COM-LOG, RGW-ADR as a set.
RGW-ADR Display/adj/set range URL
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERDS-DAT Default value https://a01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/agentif010
Supplement/memo Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COM-
device counter, failure, and consumables etc. to the sales company’s TEST, COM-LOG
server via SOAP protocol COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERDS-DAT
COM-LOG Display of connect error with Sales Company’s server Supplement/memo Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the
Lv.1 Details To display error information when the connection with the sales device counter, failure, and consumables to the sales company’s
company’s server failed. server via SOAP protocol
Use case When using Embedded-RDS CNT-DATE Set counter send start date to Sales Company's server
Adj/set/operate method Display only Lv.1 Details To set the year, month, date, hour and minute to send counter
Caution Be sure to use E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-LOG and information to the sales company’s server.
RGW-ADR as a set. This is displayed only when the Embedded-RDS third-party
Display/adj/set range Year, date, time, error code, error detail information (maximum 128 extended function is available.
characters) Use case When the Embedded-RDS third-party expanded function is available
Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COM- Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
TEST, RGW-ADR 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERDS-DAT Display/adj/set range YYYYMMDDHHMM (12 digits)
Supplement/memo Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the YYYY: Year, MM: Month, DD: Date, HH: Hour, MM: Minute
device counter, failure, and consumables to the sales company’s Default value 000000000000
server via SOAP protocol Supplement/memo Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the
device counter, failure, and consumables to the sales company’s
server via SOAP protocol
8-47
8
8-48
COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL
CNT-INTV Set counter send interval to Sales Company's server DRM-INIT Initialization of Photosensitive Drum
Lv.1 Details To set the interval of sending counter information to the sales Lv.1 Details To initialize Photosensitive Drum.
company’s server in a unit of one hour. Clear drum counter (PT-DRM, K-DRM-LF) stored in the DC
This is displayed only when the Embedded-RDS third-party Controller.
extended function is available. Use case After replacement of the Drum unit.
Use case - When restarting the potential control after executing COPIER> Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key.
OPTION> IMG-FIX> PO-CNT. Display/adj/set range During operation: ACTIVE, At normal termination: OK!, At abnormal
- When D-max control conditions are changed termination: NG
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Related service mode COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> PT-DRM
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. COPIER> COUNTER> LF> K-DRM-LF
Display/adj/set range 1 to 168 (= 1 week) HD-CRYP Executing HDD Encryption Board initial installation mode
Default value 24 Lv.1 Details To automatically execute operation necessary for initial installation
Supplement/memo Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the of the HDD Encryption Board.
device counter, failure, and consumables to the sales company’s By turning OFF the main power switch after execution, the HDD
server via SOAP protocol Encryption Board can be installed.
BRWS-ACT ON/OFF of service browser Use case At installation of the HDD Encryption Board
Lv.1 Details To set ON/OFF of service browser. Adj/set/operate method During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK!
ON/OFF of service browser switches whenever the main power BIT-SVC OFF/ON of Web Service of eRDS
switch is turned OFF/ON after execution.
Lv.1 Details To switch ON/OFF of the Web Service function of eRDS.
If connection with the UGW server is successful, “OK!” is displayed.
When OFF is selected, authentication information cannot be
If “NG!” is displayed, execute a communication test using COM-
obtained from eRDS.
TEST.
Use case Upon user’s request
The setting is enabled after reboot. Whether the service browser is
ON or OFF can be checked in COPIER> DISPLAY> USER> BRWS- Adj/set/operate method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key.
STS (1: ON, 2: OFF). 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Use case - When using the service browser Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
- At operation check 0:OFF 1:ON
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. Default value 1
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. T-8-23
Caution After execution, turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After reboot,
be sure to check the usage status in COPIER> DISPLAY> USER>
BRWS-STS.
Display/adj/set range At normal termination: OK!, At abnormal termination: NG!
Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> COM-TEST
COPIER> DISPLAY> USER> BRWS-STS
CDS-CTL Set country/area when using CDS
Lv.1 Details To set the country/area to enable the CDS.
Use case When enabling CDS
Display/adj/set range CA (Canada), LA (Latin America), HK (Hong Kong) and the country/
area specified in COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> CONFIG.
Default value The default differs according to the location.
Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> CONFIG
Supplement/memo CDS: Contents Delivery System
8-48
8
8 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD
8-49
■■CCD COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD
DF-WLVL2 White level adjustment in ADF mode: B&W
COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD
Lv.1 Details To adjust the white level for ADF scanning automatically by setting
CCD-ADJ Adjustment of CIS gain/offset the paper which is usually used by the user on the ADF.
Lv.1 Details To adjust the gain/offset of the CIS automatically. The result is reflected for COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>DFTAR-K.
Use case - When replacing the Copyboard Glass Use case - When replacing the Copyboard Glass
- replacing the CIS Unit - replacing the CIS Unit
- When clearing the RAM data of the Reader Unit - When clearing the RAM data of the Reader Unit
Adj/set/operate method 1) Place 10 or more sheets of paper on the platen glass. Adj/set/operate method 1) Set paper on the ADF.
2) Select this item and press OK key. 2) Select the item, and then press OK key.
3) The auto-adj is performed for about 30 sec. <ACTIVE> is Caution Be sure to execute this item after DF-WLVL1.
displayed on the LCD.
Display/adj/set range During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK!,
4) <OK!> is displayed and the auto-adj is completed. At abnormal termination: NG!
5) The adjusted value reflect COPIER >DISPLAY >CCD
Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1
>OFST(BW1 to BW11 and CL1 to CL11) and COPIER >DISPLAY
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFTAR-K
>CCD >GAIN-BW, GAIN-CL.
6) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. DF-WLVL3 White level adjustment in book mode (Color)
Caution When ten pieces of paper to put on the copyboard glass is less than Lv.1 Details To adjust the white level for copyboard scanning automatically
it, there is a possibility that it is not adjusted rightly. by setting the paper which is usually used by the user on the
Copyboard Glass.
The result is reflected for COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>DFTAR-R/
At abnormal termination: NG!
DFTAR-G/DFTAR-B.
Related service mode COPIER >DISPLAY >CCD >OFST (BW1 to BW11, CL1 to CL11)
COPIER >DISPLAY >CCD >GAIN-BW, GAIN-CL
Use case - When replacing the Copyboard Glass
- replacing the CIS Unit
Supplement/memo The NG is indicated after about 70 sec.
- When clearing the RAM data of the Reader Unit
DF-WLVL1 White level adjustment in book mode: B&W
Adj/set/operate method 1) Set paper on the Copyboard Glass.
Lv.1 Details To adjust the white level for copyboard scanning automatically 2) Select the item, and then press OK key.
by setting the paper which is usually used by the user on the Caution Be sure to execute DF-WLVL4 in a row.
Copyboard Glass.
Display/adj/set range During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK!
The result is reflected for COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>DFTAR-K.
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>DFTAR-R/DFTAR-G/DFTAR-B.
- When clearing the RAM data of the Reader Unit DF-WLVL4 White level adjustment in ADF mode: Color
Adj/set/operate method 1) Set paper on the Copyboard Glass. Lv.1 Details To adjust the white level for ADF scanning automatically by setting
2) Select the item, and then press OK key. the paper which is usually used by the user on the ADF.
The result is reflected for COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>DFTAR-R/
Caution Be sure to execute DF-WLVL2 in a row.
DFTAR-G/DFTAR-B.
Display/adj/set range During operation: ACTIVE, When the operation finished normally:
OK!
Related service mode COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL2 - When clearing the RAM data of the Reader Unit
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-K
Adj/set/operate method 1) Set paper on the DADF.
2) Select the item, and then press OK key.
Caution Be sure to execute this item after DF-WLVL3.
At abnormal termination: NG!
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>DFTAR-R/DFTAR-G/DFTAR-B.
T-8-24
8-49
8
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD
8 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > FIXING
8-50
■■CLEANING ■■FIXING
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEANING COPIER>FUNCTION>FIXING
DRM-IDL Drum cleaning NIP-CHK Check of fixing nip width
Lv.2 Details To perform the drum cleaning Lv.1 Details To check whether the fixing nip width is appropriate by printing.
Use case When the black spots appear on the copy image in the drum If it is not appropriate, a fixing failure may occur.
circumference cycle. (Toner adheres on the drum surface.) Use case - When replacing the fixing Assembly
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. - When a fixing failure occurs
2) Copy a blank paper, and check that black dots are alleviated. Adj/set/operate method 1) Print approx. 20 sheets of A4 size paper.
Required time 4min 2) Make a solid black print (setting value: 7) with COPIER> TEST>
TR-CLN Transfer roller cleaning PG> TYPE.
3) Set the output of step 2 on the Multi-purpose Tray while placing
Lv.2 Details To clean the transfer roller
the printed side down.
Use case When the back side of paper is soiled with toner (the transfer roller
4) Perform the size setting of the Multi-purpose Tray.
is soiled with toner).
Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. A sheet is stopped once in a state held by the Fixing Nip area, and
Required time 40sec is delivered approx. 20 seconds later.
FIX-CLN Fixing film cleaning 6) Measure the nip width of delivered sheet.
Lv.2 Details To clean the fixing film It is judged as normal: 6.5 to 8.0 mm at the center, and difference
Use case When the fixing pressure roller is soiled with tonner. between front and rear is within 1.0mm. If there is an error, execute
Adj/set/operate method 1) Print cleaning pattern in COPIER > TEST> PG> TYPE > 44. step 6.
2) Set printing side on the Multi-purpose Tray in an upturn , and 7) Check the Fixing Roller, Pressure Roller, and Fixing Lower Unit,
press OK key to execute operation. and replace damaged part.
Required time 70 sec Display/adj/set range During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK!,
At abnormal termination: NG
T-8-25
Related service mode COPIER> TEST> PG> TYPE
T-8-26
8-50
8
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > FIXING
8 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK
8-51
■■PANEL ■■PART-CHK
COPIER>FUNCTION>PANEL COPIER>FUNCTION>PART-CHK
LCD-CHK Check of LCD Panel dot missing CL Specification of operation Clutch
Lv.1 Details To check whether there is a missing dot on the LCD Panel of the Lv.1 Details To specify the Clutch to operate.
Control Panel. Use case When replacing the Clutch/checking the operation
Use case When replacing the LCD Panel Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range 1 to 2
2) Check that the LCD Panel lights up in the order of white, black, 1: Registration Clutch (CL1)
red, green and blue. 2: Developing Cylinder Clutch (CL2)
3) Press STOP key to terminate checking. Default value 1
LED-CHK Check of Control Panel LED Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> CL-ON
Lv.1 Details To check whether the LED on the Control Panel lights up. CL-ON Operation check of Clutch
Use case When replacing the LCD Panel Lv.1 Details To start operation check of the Clutch specified by Clutch
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. The operation automatically stops about 20 seconds later.
2) Check that the LED lights up in the order. Use case When replacing the Clutch/checking the operation
3) Terminate checking with LED-OFF.
Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> PANEL> LED-OFF
LED-OFF End check of Control Panel LED
Default value 1
Lv.1 Details To terminate checking of the LED on the Control Panel.
Required time 20sec
Use case During execution of LED-CHK
Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> CL
Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> PANEL> LED-CHK
MTR Specification of operation Motor
KEY-CHK Check of key entry
Lv.1 Details To specify the Motor to operate.
Lv.1 Details To check the key input on the Control Panel.
Use case When replacing the Motor/checking the operation
Use case When replacing the LCD Panel
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select the item and press the key on the Control Panel.
2) Check that the input value is displayed.
1:Laser Scanner Motor
3) Release the selection to terminate checking.
2: Fixing Motor (M1)
TOUCHCHK Adjustment of coordinate position of Touch Panel 3: Main Motor (M2)
Lv.1 Details To adjust the coordinate position on the Touch Panel of the Control 4: Waste Toner Motor (M3)
Panel. 5: Reverse Feed Motor (M4)
Use case When replacing the LCD Panel 6: Bottle Motor (M5)
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 7: Hopper Motor (M6)
2) Press the 9 “+” in sequence. 8: Duplex Feed Motor (M7)
T-8-27 9: Cassette 1 Pickup Motor (M8)
10: Cassette 1 Lifter Motor (M9)
11: Cassette 2 Pickup Motor (M101)
Default value 1
Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> MTR-ON
8-51
8
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK
8 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR
8-52
COPIER>FUNCTION>PART-CHK ■■CLEAR
MTR-ON Operation check of Motor
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR
Lv.1 Details To start operation check of the Motor specified by MTR.
The operation automatically stops after operation of 20 seconds. ERR Clear of error code
Use case When replacing the Motor/checking the operation Lv.1 Details To clear error codes (E000, E001, E002, E003, E719).
Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. Use case At error occurrence
Display/adj/set range During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Required time 20 sec
DC-CON RAM clear of DC Controller PCB
Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> MTR
Lv.1 Details To clear the RAM data of the DC Controller PCB.
SL Specification of operation Solenoid
Use case When clearing the RAM data of the DC Controller PCB
Lv.1 Details To specify the Solenoid to operate.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key.
Use case When replacing the Solenoid/checking the operation
Caution - Output the service mode setting values by P-PRINT before
Display/adj/set range 1 to 6 execution. After execution, enter necessary setting value.
1: Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Solenoid (SL1) - The RAM data is cleared after the main power switch is turned
2: Reverse Feed Solenoid (SL2) OFF/ON.
3: Cassette 1 Pickup Solenoid (SL3)
R-CON RAM clear of Reader Unit
6: Cassette 4 Pickup Solenoid (SL101) Lv.1 Details To clear the RAM data of the Reader Unit.
Default value 1 Use case When clearing the RAM data of the Reader Unit
Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> SL-ON Adj/set/operate method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key.
SL-ON Operation check of Solenoid
Lv.1 Details To start operation check for the Solenoid specified by SL.
execution. After execution, enter necessary setting value.
The operation stops after “ON for 0.5 sec” => “OFF for 5 sec” => “ON
- The RAM data is cleared after the main power switch is turned
for 0.5 sec” => “OFF for 5 sec” => “ON for 0.5 sec”.
OFF/ON.
Use case When replacing the Solenoid/checking the operation
JAM-HIST Clear of jam history
Lv.1 Details To clear the jam history.
Required time 12 sec
Use case When clearing the jam history
Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> SL
T-8-28
ERR-HIST Clear of error code history
Lv.1 Details To clear the error code history.
Use case When clearing the error code history
PWD-CLR Clear of system administrator password
Lv.1 Details To clear the password of the system administrator set in the user
mode.
Use case When clearing the password of the system administrator
8-52
8
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR
8-53
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR
ADRS-BK Clear of address book MN-CON RAM clear of MNCON PCB SRAM Board
Lv.1 Details To clear the address book data. Lv.1 Details To clear the RAM data of the Main Controller PCB SRAM Board.
Use case When clearing the address book data All data on the SRAM Board is initialized.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Use case When clearing the RAM data of the Main Controller PCB SRAM
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Board
Caution The address book data is cleared after the main power switch is Adj/set/operate method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key.
turned OFF/ON. The machine is automatically rebooted.
CNT-MCON Clear of Main Controller service counter 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Lv.1 Details To clear the service counter counted by the Main Controller PCB. Caution - Address Book, Forwarding Settings, Settings/Registration
(Preferences), Adjustment/Maintenance, Function Settings, Set
Use case When clearing the service counter counted by the Main Controller
Destination, Management Settings, TPM Settings, etc. are deleted.
PCB
- Inform the customer that all images in Inbox will be deleted and get
approval for it.
CNT-DCON Clear of DC Controller service counter - Since the file management information is initialized, images on the
Lv.1 Details To clear the service counter counted by the DC Controller PCB. HDD cannot be read.
Use case When clearing the service counter counted by the DC Controller - Output the service mode setting values by P-PRINT before
PCB execution. After execution, enter necessary setting value.
Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. - The RAM data is cleared after the main power switch is turned
OPTION Clear of service mode setting value (OPTION) OFF/ON.
Lv.1 Details To return the value specified in service mode (OPTION) to the - If this item is executed while a login application other than Default
default value (value at the time of RAM clear). Authentication is activated, any symptom occurs. (e.g. The login
screen is not displayed.) In this case, switch the login application to
Use case When clearing setting value of OPTION
Default Authentication once.
execution. After execution, enter necessary setting value. CARD Clear of card ID-related data
- This item is executed for the data on the Main Controller PCB, DC Lv.1 Details To clear the data related to the card ID (department).
Controller PCB and Reader Controller PCB. Use case When clearing the data related to the card ID
Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> P-PRINT Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
MMI Clear of user mode setting value 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Lv.1 Details To clear the user mode setting values (excluding values for Control Caution The data is cleared after the main power switch is turned OFF/ON.
Panel, common settings, and FAX). ALARM Clear of alarm code history
- Common Settings Lv.1 Details Clear of alarm code history
- Timer Settings COPIER > DISPLAY > ALARM-2, ALARM-3 is cleared.
- Adjustment/Cleaning Use case When clearing the alarm code history
- Report Settings Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
- System Settings 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
- Copy Settings Caution The alarm log is cleared after the main power switch is turned OFF/
- Communications Settings ON.
- Printer Settings
Related service mode COPIER> DISPLAY> ALARM-2, ALARM-3
Use case When clearing various setting values of user mode
Caution The setting value is cleared after the main power switch is turned
OFF/ON.
8-53
8
8-54
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR
CA-KEY Deletion of CA certificate and key pair KEY-CLR Encryption key clear of HDD Encryption Board
Lv.2 Details To simultaneously delete the CA certificate and key pair which are Lv.2 Details To clear the encryption key of the HDD Encryption Board (Security
additionally registered by the user. Kit) for replacement.
Use case When a service person replaces/discards the device Processing is executed at the time of replacement of the encryption
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. board, and a new encryption key is generated.
2) Check that OK is displayed. Use case When replacing the encryption key for the HDD Encryption Board
3) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Adj/set/operate method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key.
Caution - Unless this item is executed at the time of replacement/discard 2) Check that OK is displayed.
of the device, the CA certificate and key pair which are additionally 3) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
registered by the customer remain in the HDD, which is a problem in Caution Since all data in the HDD becomes unavailable when executing this
terms of security. item, be sure to initialize the HDD after turning OFF/ON the main
- Do not execute this item carelessly because the CA certificate power switch.
and key pair which are additionally registered are deleted when it Display/adj/set range At normal termination: OK, At abnormal termination: NG
is executed. If they are deleted mistakenly, they need to be again USBM-CLR Initialization of USB MEAP priority registered information
registered by the customer. If no CA certificate and key pair are Lv.1 Details To initialize the registered ID data retained in the OS field by calling
additionally registered, the machine condition becomes the same as the API provided by the OS.
the one at the time of factory shipment.
Use case When a failure occurs in USB MEAP priority registration
- When NG is displayed in 2), there is a possibility that deletion was
not executed. In this case, surely execute the deletion by initializing Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key.
the HDD, etc. JV-CACHE Cache clear of JAVA application
Display/adj/set range At normal termination: OK, At abnormal termination: NG Lv.1 Details To clear the cache information used by JAVA application.
Supplement/memo - The CA certificate is used in the MEAP application with E-RDS and Use case When initializing the JAVA application
SSL client connection, and the key pair is used in the SSL function Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key.
of IPP, RUI and MEAP. FXTX-CLR Clearing fax job information
- When the main power switch is turned OFF/ON, the CA certificate Lv.1 Details To clear fax job information stored on SRAM.
and key pair which were registered at the time of factory shipment Use this mode to restore from E611-0001.
are decompressed from the archive (/BOOTDEV/KCMNG), and Use case When E611-0001 occurs
become available in the E-RDS/SSL function.
ERDS-DAT Initialization of E-RDS SRAM data
LANG-CLR Uninstallation of language files
Lv.1 Details To initialize the SCM value of the Embedded-RDS stored in the
Lv.2 Details To uninstall the language files other than Japanese and English files.
SRAM.
After execution, the machine automatically enters the download
SCM values are ON/OFF of E-RDS, server’s port number, server’s
mode.
SOAP URL, and communication schedule with the server (how often
Use case When installing a new language file while there are 7 installed
the data is acquired), etc.
language files
The value set by COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> E-RDS, RGW-
PORT, RGW-ADR, COM-LOG is cleared. Adj/set/operate method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key.
2) Select the firmware in which the necessary language is included
Use case When upgrading the Bootable in the E-RDS environment
by SST, and perform downloading.
Caution The language files are not uninstalled if a language file is not
Caution The method of using the SRAM in E-RDS differs depending on the installed by SST after the execution of this service mode.
Bootable version. Therefore, unless the SRAM data is cleared at the When installing the language file to the host machine, the language
time of version upgrade, data inconsistency occurs. files other than the file selected by SST are deleted. (Japanese and
Display/adj/set range At normal termination: OK, At abnormal termination: NG English files will be kept.)
Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> E-RDS, RGW-PORT, RGW-ADR, Supplement/memo Screen is displayed in English after the execution, so switch the
COM-LOG language.
T-8-29
8-54
8
8 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P
8-55
■■MISC-R ■■MISC-P
COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-R COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P
SCANLAMP Light-up check of LED P-PRINT Output of service mode setting value
Lv.1 Details To light up the LED for 3 seconds. Lv.1 Details To print the service mode setting value.
Use case When replacing the LED Use case Before executing the CLEAR service mode, etc.
Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Display/adj/set range During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! Caution Be sure to use A4/LTR size plain paper/recycled paper.
Required time 3 sec HIST-PRT Output of jam and error history
T-8-30 Lv.1 Details To print the jam history and error history.
Use case When printing the jam/error history
Caution Be sure to use A4/LTR size plain paper/recycled paper.
TRS-DATA Moving memory reception data to Inbox
Lv.2 Details To move the data received in memory to Inbox.
Use case When moving the data received in memory to Inbox
USER-PRT Output of Settings/Registration list
Lv.1 Details To print the Settings/Registration list.
Use case When printing the Settings/Registration list
Supplement/memo It takes approximately 3 seconds before printing starts.
LBL-PRNT Output of service label
Lv.1 Details To print the service label.
Use case When printing the service label
Adj/set/operate method 1) Place A4/LTR paper in Cassette 1.
D-PRINT Output of service mode (DISPLAY)
Lv.1 Details To output items displayed by DISPLAY in the service mode .
Items output by P-PRINT, LBL-PRNT and HIST-PRT and ALARM
are excluded.
Use case When checking items in DISPLAY
ENV-PRT Inside temperature/humidity and fixing roller temperature log
Lv.1 Details To print the data of temperature and humidity in the machine/
temperature of the surface of the Fixing Roller as logs.
Use case When grasping information of temperature in the machine/fixing
temperature for trouble analysis
8-55
8
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P
8 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM
8-56
COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P ■■SYSTEM
PJH-P-1 Detail information of print job history: 100 jobs
COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM
Lv.1 Details To print the print job history for the latest 100 jobs with detailed
information. DOWNLOAD Shift to download mode
In the case of less than 100 jobs, the history of all print jobs is Lv.1 Details To make the machine enter the download mode and wait for a
printed. command.
Use case When printing the print job history with detailed information Perform downloading by SST.
Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. Use case At upgrade
Caution Be sure to use A4/LTR size plain paper/recycled paper. Adj/set/operate method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key.
2) Perform downloading by SST.
PJH-P-2 Detail information of print job history: all jobs
Caution Do not turn OFF the power before HOLD is displayed.
Lv.1 Details To print the history of all print jobs stored in the machine with
detailed information (for maximum 5000 jobs). Display/adj/set range When waiting for a command: STAND-BY/STNDBY, In
communication: CONNECTED, Communication terminated: HOLD
The difference between PJH-P-1 and this item is only the number of
jobs printed. Supplement/memo SST: Service Support Tool
Use case When printing the print job history with detailed information CHK-TYPE Specify HD-CLEAR/HD-CHECK partition No.
Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. Lv.1 Details To specify the partition number of the HDD to execute HD-CLEAR/
HD-CHECK.
Use case When executing HD-CLEAR/HD-CHECK
USBH-PRT Output of USB device information report
Adj/set/operate method Enter the value, and then press OK key.
Lv.1 Details To output information of the connected USB device in the form of a
report. Display/adj/set range 0 to 65535
0: All partitions (Only as for the executable field)
Use case When outputting USB device information in the form of a report
1: The system-related area
2: SWAP (temporary file / memory alternative area)
Caution Be sure to use A4/LTR size plain paper/recycled paper. 3: MEAP-related area
RPT-FILE Saving of service report as a file 4: Disabled
Lv.1 Details To save various service reports in HDD as a file. 5: Image and document-related area
The saved files can be obtained using PC to which SST has been 6: PDL-related area
installed or USB memory after starting the machine in download 7: Image log-related area
mode. 8: PDL spool-related area
Use case When obtaining the service report as a file instead of printout 9: General application temporary area
Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. 10: SEND-related area
Supplement/memo File size: Approx. 1 MB at a maximum 11: General application-related area
12: Update-related area
T-8-31
13: License-related area
14: Debug-related area
15 to 65535: Not used
* If 1, 2, 4, or 13 is selected, nothing is cleared by executing HD-
CLEAR.
* If 5 or 7 is selected, HD-CLEAR and HD-CHECK are executed
simultaneously.
* If 8, 9, 11, 12, or 14 is selected, HD-CLEAR and HD-CHECK are
executed simultaneously.
Default value 0
Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> HD-CLEAR, HD-CHECK
8-56
8
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM
8 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM
8-57
COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM
HD-CHECK File system check of specified partition DSRAMRES Restore of DC Controller PCB SRAM
Lv.1 Details To execute file system check specified by CHK-TYPE at the next Lv.2 Details To restore the setting data which has been backed up in SRAM of
startup. the DC Controller PCB.
Use case When trying to recover the HDD when ECODE (E602/E614) such as Use case When replacing the DC Controller PCB for troubleshooting at the
file corruption occurs time of trouble occurrence
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter 1, and then press OK key. Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution During operation, the setting data changes by manual or automatic
Caution Be sure to execute this item after CHK-TYPE. adjustment. When backup data which has been left for a long period
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 of time is restored, it is overwritten by the old setting data and the
0: Not executed, 1: The partition specified by CHK-TYPE is checked new data is deleted.
at the next startup. Display/adj/set range During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK!
Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE RSRAMBUP Backup of Reader Controller PCB SRAM
HD-CLEAR Initialization of specified partition Lv.2 Details To back up the setting data in SRAM of the Reader Controller PCB.
Lv.1 Details To initialize the partition specified by CHK-TYPE at next startup. Use case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB for troubleshooting at
Use case When trying to recover the HDD when ECODE (E602/E614) such as the time of trouble occurrence
file corruption occurs Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter 1, and then press OK key. Caution During operation, the setting data changes by manual or automatic
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. adjustment. When backup data which has been left for a long period
Caution Be sure to execute this item after CHK-TYPE. of time is restored, it is overwritten by the old setting data and the
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 new data is deleted.
0: Not executed, 1: Initialized at next startup Display/adj/set range During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK!
Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES
Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE RSRAMRES Restore of Reader Controller PCB SRAM
DSRAMBUP Backup of DC Controller PCB SRAM Lv.2 Details To restore the setting data which has been backed up in SRAM of
Lv.2 Details To back up the setting data in SRAM of the DC Controller PCB. the Reader Controller PCB.
Use case When replacing the DC Controller PCB for troubleshooting at the Use case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB for troubleshooting at
time of trouble occurrence the time of trouble occurrence
Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Caution During operation, the setting data changes by manual or automatic Caution During operation, the setting data changes by manual or automatic
adjustment. When backup data which has been left for a long period adjustment. When backup data which has been left for a long period
of time is restored, it is overwritten by the old setting data and the of time is restored, it is overwritten with new setting data and the old
new data is deleted. data is deleted.
Display/adj/set range During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! Display/adj/set range During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK!
Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP
R-REBOOT Reboot of host machine: VNC
Lv.1 Details To reboot the host machine.
Use case When the reboot is carried out with the remote control by VNC
T-8-32
8-57
8
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM
8 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > DBG-LOG
8-58
■■DBG-LOG COPIER>FUNCTION>DBG-LOG
LOG-TRIG Set of debug log storage condition
COPIER>FUNCTION>DBG-LOG
Lv.2 Details To set the conditions (timing, types, etc.) to automatically store the
LOG2USB Storage of debug log to USB memory debug logs (stored as an archive file).
Lv.2 Details To store a set of debug logs to USB memory at the error occurrence. By reading the operation setting file of the setting value from the
A type of log to be collected is set in LOG-TRIG. Main Controller, the conditions written in the file are set.
If there is a debug log which is automatically stored, it is archived at When setting a new condition is necessary, read the operation
this time. setting file provided by R&D from the USB memory.
Required time differs according to the device conditions and volume Use case - When changing the conditions of debug log to automatically store
of log data. - When setting a new condition
Use case When analyzing the cause of a problem Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Install the USB memory. Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999
Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> DBG-LOG> LOG2USB, LOG2SRVR, HIT-
Caution - Wait until the machine recognizes the USB memory (approx. 10 STS, HIT-STS2
sec.).
HIT-STS Display of debug log state
- During the data transfer (“ACTIVE” display), do not turn OFF the
power/remove the USB memory/use the screen for operations. Lv.2 Details To display whether archive file of the debug log which was matched
with the conditions set in LOG-TRIG exists or not.
Display/adj/set range During operation: ACTIVE, At normal termination: OK!, At abnormal
termination: NG Use case When checking the debug log automatically stored
Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> DBG-LOG> LOG-TRIG, SYSLOG Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key.
LOG2SRVR Transfer of debug log to server Display/adj/set range At normal termination: OK, At abnormal termination: --
Lv.2 Details To transfer a set of debug logs to FTP server using network at the Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> DBG-LOG> LOG-TRIG
error occurrence. SYSLOG Setting of syslog function
A type of log to be collected is set in LOG-TRIG. Lv.2 Details To set the syslog function.
If there is a debug log which is automatically stored, it is archived at When ON is set, sublog on the main CPU side of the Main Controller
this time. is output to the HDD/syslog server.
Address and account of the FTP server can be set by reading the “sublog” can be collected by LOG2USB or LOG2SRVR.
operation setting file from the USB memory in LOG-TRIG. Use case When R&D considers that setting the syslog function is necessary at
Use case When analyzing the cause of a problem problem analysis
Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution - Be sure to set the account of the machine to the FTP server Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999
beforehand. 0: OFF
- During the data transfer (“ACTIVE” display), do not turn OFF the Default value 0
power/use the screen for operations. Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> DBG-LOG> LOG2USB, LOG2SRVR
Display/adj/set range During operation: ACTIVE, At normal termination: OK!, At abnormal DEFAULT Reset of debug log setting
termination: NG Lv.2 Details To clear all debug log settings, log files, etc. and return to the state
Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> DBG-LOG> LOG-TRIG, SYSLOG before debug log collection operation.
Use case - When returning the device in which analyzing the cause of a
problem was completed
- When resetting the debug log settings
LOG-DEL Clear of debug log
Lv.2 Details To delete the debug log file.
The debug log setting is not reset.
Use case When clearing the debug log
8-58
8
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > DBG-LOG
8 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > DBG-LOG
8-59
COPIER>FUNCTION>DBG-LOG
HIT-STS2 Display of debug log state with string
Lv.2 Details To display whether archive file of the debug log including character
strings specified in LOG-TRIG exists or not.
Use case When checking the debug log automatically stored
Display/adj/set range At normal termination: OK, At abnormal termination: --
Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> DBG-LOG> LOG-TRIG
T-8-33
8-59
8
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > DBG-LOG
8 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW
8-60
OPTION COPIER>OPTION>FNC-SW
CONFIG Setting of country/area/language/location/paper size configuration
■■FNC-SW Lv.1 Details To set the country/region, language, location, paper size configuration
for multiple system software in HDD.
COPIER>OPTION>FNC-SW Use case Upon user’s request
MODEL-SZ Fixed magnification and ADF original detection size Adj/set/operate method 1) Select the setting item.
Lv.1 Details To set the fixed magnification ratio display and the original detection 2) Switch with +/- key, and then press OK key.
size with ADF. 3) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
It is set automatically at the time of installation of the Reader Display/adj/set range XX YY.ZZ.AA
according to the location. XX: Country/region
Use case Upon user’s request JP: Japan, US: USA, GB: Great Britain, FR: France, DE: Germany,
When Chinese paper (16K paper) is used IT: Italy, AU: Australia, SG: Singapore, NL: Netherlands, KR: Korea,
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. CN: China, TW: Taiwan, ES: Spain, SE: Sweden, PT: Portugal, NO:
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Norway, DK: Denmark, FI: Finland, PL: Poland, HU: Hungary, CZ:
Display/adj/set range 0 to 3 Czech Republic, SI: Slovenia, GR: Greece, EE: Estonia, RU: Russia,
0: AB configuration (5R5E) for Japan, 1: Inch configuration (4R3E) for SK: Slovakia, RO: Romania, HR: Croatia, BG: Bulgaria, TR: Turkey,
North/Middle/South America, 2: A configuration (3R3E) for Europe, 3: TH: Thailand, VN: Vietnam
AB/Inch configuration (5R5E) for Asia, Oceania, South America YY: Language (Fixed; e.g. ja: Japanese)
Default value The default differs according to the location. ZZ: Location (Fixed; e.g. 00: CANON)
Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW > KSIZE-SW, CONFIG AA: Paper size configuration
(00: AB configuration, 01: Inch configuration, 02: A configuration, 03:
SENS-CNF Setting of original detection size
Inch/AB configuration)
Lv.2 Details To set original detection size according to AB configuration/Inch
Default value The value differs according to the location.
configuration/A configuration.
Select 1 (Inch configuration) for Inch configuration/A configuration Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> MODEL-SZ
machine. FAN-EXTN Fan drive extension mode after job
Use case Upon user’s request Lv.2 Details To set whether to extend the driving time of the fan after completion
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. of a job.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Use case Upon user’s request
Caution When the original size sensor is not equipped, this service mode is Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
not used. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
0: AB configuration, 1: Inch configuration 0: OFF, 1: ON
SZDT-SW Switch of copyboard original size detection
Lv.2 Details To change the copyboard original size detection to photo size
detection.
Use case When changing the copyboard original size detection to photo size
detection
Caution When the original size sensor is not equipped, this service mode is
not used.
Display/adj/set range 0: Photo size detection disabled
1: Photo size detection enabled
Default value 0
8-60
8
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW
8-61
COPIER>OPTION>FNC-SW COPIER>OPTION>FNC-SW
SVMD-ENT Setting of entry method to service mode CARD-RNG Card number setting (department number)
Lv.2 Details To set the way to get in service mode to prevent information leak. Lv.2 Details To set the number of cards (departments) that can be used with the
Use case As needed Card Reader.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Use case When setting the number of cards (departments)
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
0: [Settings/Registration] - Pressing [2] and [8] at the same time - Display/adj/set range 1 to 1000
[Settings/Registration] Default value 1000
1: [Settings/Registration] - Pressing [4] and [9] at the same time - SJOB-CL Setting of scan job cancelling by logout
[Settings/Registration] Lv.1 Details To set whether to cancel the scan job in operation by logout of the
Default value 0 user.
KSIZE-SW Setting of Chinese paper (K-size) support: Reader Use case Upon user’s request
Lv.2 Details To set to detect/display the Chinese paper (K size paper: 16K). Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Use case When using K size paper 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution The job with scanning completed cannot be canceled.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
Caution Go through the following: COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > MODEL- 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
SZ; and if MODEL-SZ is “0: AB configuration”, this mode is enabled. Default value 0
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 Supplement/memo Scan job: A job after the scanning operation is completed.
0: Not supported, 1: Supported USB-RCNT Auto connect set at USB device disconnction
Default value 0
Lv.2 Details To set to enable/disable automatic connection when the USB device
Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> MODEL-SZ is disconnected.
Supplement/memo 8K paper: 270 x 390 mm, 16K paper: 270 x 195 mm With the setting to disable automatic connection, USB device cannot
PDF-RDCT PDF reduction set at forwarding be used if disconnecting and then connecting the USB device. To
Lv.2 Details To set whether to reduce the image for transmission when converting enable connection again, the power needs to be turned OFF/ON.
the image received by IFAX into PDF for e-mail/file transmission. With the setting to enable automatic connection, connect again after
Use case Upon user’s request disconnecting, and then connecting the USB device again.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Use case Upon user’s request
0: Following the current setting, 1: Image reduction Caution With the setting to enable automatic connection, disconnecting of 1
Default value 0 area makes automatic connection of all USB devices if there is USB
SJB-UNW Reserve upper limit of secure print job hub.
Lv.2 Details To set the upper limit for the number of reserved jobs in secure print Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
0: No automatic connection, 1: Automatic connection
job.
Use case Upon user’s request Default value 0
0: 50 jobs, 1: 90 jobs, 2: No limit
Default value 1
8-61
8
8-62
UNLMTBND Over 400 binders print job support set PSWD-SW Password type set to enter service mode
Lv.1 Details To set whether to support print job that exceeds 400 binders. Lv.1 Details To set the type of password that is required to enter when getting into
With the setting to support, the machine makes print by sharing service mode.
binders according to job attribution. 2 types are available: one for “service technician” and the other for
Select “1: Not supported” if the user does not print job* with large “system administrator + service technician”.
quantity of binders. When selecting the type for “system administrator and service
Use case When supporting print job that exceeds 400 binders technician”, enter the password for service technician after the
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. password entry by the user’s system administrator.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Use case Upon request from the user who concerns security
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
0: Automatic setting (when the print server is not connected: no 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
support; When the print server is connected: supported) Display/adj/set range 0 to 2
1: Not supported 0: No password, 1: Service technician, 2: System administrator and
Default value 0 service technician
Supplement/memo * : A job that requires finishing (such as stapling) in one job. Does not Default value 0
apply in the case of executing finishing with multiple sets of output. Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> SM-PSWD
MIBCOUNT Scope range set of Charge Counter MIB SM-PSWD Password setting for service technician
Lv.2 Details To set the range of counter information that can be obtained as MIB Lv.2 Details To set password for service technician that is used when getting into
(Management Information Base). service mode.
Use case For customization Use case When password is required to get into service mode
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 2 Caution Be sure to select 1 or 2 with PSWD-SW in advance.
0: All charge counters are obtained, 1: Only displayed counter* is Display/adj/set range 1 to 99999999
obtained, 2: All charge counters are not obtained Default value 11111111
* : Counter specified by the following: COPIER > OPTION > USER >
Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> PSWD-SW
COUNTER 1 to 6
RPT2SIDE Setting of report 1-sided/2-sided output
Default value 0
Lv.1 Details To set whether to use 1-sided or 2-sided for report output of service
Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> USER> COUNTER1 to 6
mode.
CNTR-SW Initialization of parts counter replacement timing
Use case When making 2-sided report output to reduce the number of output
Lv.1 Details To return the estimated life of parts counter to the initial value. pages
Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/adj/set range 0: Returned to the initial value Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
Default value 0 0: 1-sided, 1: 2-sided
Default value 1
8-62
8
8-63
BRWS-FAV Setting of service browser favorite register CDS-MEAP Set to allow MEAP installation by administrator
Lv.2 Details To set whether to allow registration of favorites in the browser for Lv.1 Details To set whether to permit the user (administrator) to install MEAP
service. applications and enable iR options from CDS.
When 1 is set, favorites in the browser for service can be edited, and When “1: Enabled” is set, Updater can be activated from the user
any URLs can be accessed. mode.
Use case When service engineers edit favorites in the browser for service Use case When allowing the administrator to install MEAP applications and
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. enable iR options from CDS
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
Default value 0 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
INVALPDL Disable of PDL license Default value 1
Lv.1 Details To disable the registered PDL license. Supplement/memo CDS: Contents Delivery System
When “1: Disabled” is set, PDL is disabled even if a PDL license CDS-UGW Set to allow firmware update from UGW
is registered. This is set to the machines installed at convenience Lv.1 Details To set whether to permit update of the firmware from the UGW server.
stores, which do not allow PDL to be used. When “1: Enabled” is set, Updater accepts the operation from the
Use case When prohibiting the use of PDL UGW server in cooperation with CDS.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Use case When allowing update of the firmware from the UGW server
0: Registered PDL license is enabled, 1: Disabled Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
CDS-FIRM Set to allow firmware update by administrator Default value 0
Lv.1 Details To set whether to permit update of the firmware by user Supplement/memo CDS: Contents Delivery System
(administrator). LOCLFIRM Set to allow firmware update by file
When “1: Enabled” is set, Updater can be activated from the user Lv.1 Details To set whether to permit the user (administrator) to update the
mode. firmware from the remote UI using a local file.
Use case When allowing the administrator to update the firmware This update is executed as a measure for vulnerability in emergency
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. situations.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Use case When allowing the administrator to update the firmware using a file
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Default value EUR:1 ,Others:0 Default value 1
Related service mode COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > LCDSFLG SDLMTWRN ON/OFF of warning message at E-mail/I-Fax TX
Supplement/memo CDS: Contents Delivery System Lv.2 Details To set whether to display the warning message when sending data
that exceeds the upper limit value for the transmission data size via
E-mail/I-Fax.
Use case For customization
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value 0
8-63
8
8-64
FAX-INT Setting of FAX RX print interruption operation mode AMSOFFSW Disabling AMS mode
Lv.2 Details To set the mode performing interruption operation of FAX reception Lv.1 Details (1) AMS license which is an iR option is installed.
print automatically. (2) AMS-supported Login application is activated..
Use case Upon user’s request Normally, when the conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied, it enters AMS
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. mode automatically.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Use this mode when preferring to disable AMS mode.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 Use case When preferring to disable AMS mode
0: Normal, 1: Interruption operation mode Adj/set/operate method 1) Press Counter button, and check that “ACCESS MANAGEMENT
Default value 0 SYSTEM” is displayed on the Device Configuration screen.
CDS-LVUP Set to allow CDS periodical update 2) Set the service mode to 1.
Lv.1 Details To set whether to allow the user (administrator) to use the periodical
4) Check that AMS is disabled.
update function linked with CDS.
Press Counter button, and check that “ACCESS MANAGEMENT
When 1 is set, the periodical update function can be used from user
SYSTEM” is not displayed on the Device Configuration screen.
mode.
Use case When allowing the user to use the periodical update function
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Default value JP:0, USA:1, EUR:1, AU:0, CN:0, KR:0, TW:0, ASIA:0
Supplement/memo AMS: ACCESS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Display/adj/set range 0 to1
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled UA-OFFSW ON/OFF of unified authentication function
Default value EUR:1 ,Others:0 Lv.1 Details To set ON/OFF of the Unified Authentication function.
Set the value to 0 when not preferring to use the Unified
Supplement/memo CDS: Contents Delivery System
Authentication function because of security concern.
WTM-DENS Setting of density at watermark setting
Use case Upon user’s request (not to use the Unified Authentication function)
Lv.2 Details When the watermark is set, the density becomes high by changing
the developing /primary charge DC voltage so that the watermark is Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
reappeared.
Use case When increasing the density in the case that watermark is selected
0: ON, 1: OFF
for secured print
Default value 0
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value 0
8-64
8
8-65
MIB-NVTA RFC-compatible character string MIB write LCDSFLG Enabling of local CDS server
Lv.1 Details As default, MIB object which NVT-ASCII can be written exists in order Lv.1 Details To set whether to use the local CDS server.
to link with LUI entry value. This violates RFC order, so a problem like When CDSFIRM is 1, this setting is enabled.
garbled 2-byte characters may occur in the SNMP monitoring system, Use case When using the local CDS server
such as the 3rd vendor’s MPS. Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Whether non-RFC-compatible character strings are written in MIB 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
can be set using this mode. Caution This mode is enabled only when 1 is selected in COPIER > OPTION
When 1 is set, only the character strings which are strictly compatible > FNC-SW > CDS-FIRM.
with RFC are written. (Writing operation is executed from the SNMP
manager.) LUI is not linked. 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Use case Upon user’s request (operation with RFC-compatible system)
Default value 0
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Related service mode COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CDS-FIRM
Related UI menu [Management Settings] > [License/Other] > [Register/Update
Display/adj/set range 0 to 3 Software] > [Software Management Setting] > [Setting]
0: Compatible in a conventional manner, 1: RFC-compatible, 2 to 3:
Supplement/memo When local CDS is used, iW EMC/MC device firmware update plug-in
Not used
is required.
Default value 0
NO-LGOUT Display/hide of logout button
Supplement/memo RFC: Document of Internet-related technical standards
Lv.1 Details To set whether to display or hide [Logout] button.
NVT-ASCII: Network Virtual Terminal-ASCII
When 0 is set, [Logout] button is displayed on the screen, and logout
SVC-RUI Enabling of RUI function for servicing
with the ID key is enabled. (Normal)
Lv.1 Details To set whether to enable the RUI function for servicing (not provided When 1 is set, [Logout] button is not displayed, and logout with the ID
to end users). key is disabled.
When 0 is set, the RUI function is disabled.
Use case Upon user’s request (for customization, etc.)
When setting the value other than 0, RUI function is enabled. The
value entered becomes password to use the RUI function.
The data is cleared after the main power switch is turned OFF/ON. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
0: Display, 1: Hide
Use case When preferring to use the import function of background image file
of main menu Default value 0
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. T-DLV-BK Setting of Bk-toner level displaying alarm
The data is cleared after the main power switch is turned OFF/ON. Lv.1 Details To set the Bk-toner level to display “absence of toner” message.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 65535 Use case When changing the timing to notify the end of life according to the
Default value 0 usage status
Caution Since toner level is calculated based on the developing supply count,
some errors may occur.
Unit %
Default value USA:29, EUR:0, AU:29, CN:29, KR:29, TW:29, ASIA:29
8-65
8
8-66
D-DLV-BK Setting of Bk Drum auto delivery alarm timing DLVFN-SW ON/OFF of delivery cooling fan drive
Lv.1 Details To set the timing to notify the auto delivery alarm of the Bk Drum. Lv.1 Details Set OFF the drive of fan to prevent the smell of the delivery unit
Use case When changing the timing to notify the end of life according to the vicinity from diffusing.
usage status Use case When preventing the odor from the Delivery Assembly or its vicinity
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. from being diffused
Unit % 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Default value 100 Caution When setting the “1”, the paper stacking on the delivery tray may
deteriorate. (i.e.; each paper adheres by its heat lightly.)
JM-ERR-D Handling 0CAx jam as an error: DCON
Lv.2 Details To display 0CAx jam as the error E996-0CAx.
0: OFF (fan drives), 1: ON (fan stops)
By handling the jam as an error, the machine stops, so that loss of
the log can be prevented.
Default value 0
Be sure to enable the service mode at the user’s site where 0CAx ASLPMAX Setting of auto sleep shift time maximum value
jam occurs. Lv.1 Details To set the auto sleep shift time maximum value
After that, if the error E996-0CAx occurs, the log which has been Use case Upon user’s request
backed up can be obtained. Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Use case When obtaining a log at the occurrence of 0CAx jam Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0: 4 hours
Display/adj/set range 0: Display as a jam, 1: Display as an error 1: 60 minutes
Default value 0 Default value JP:0 USA:0 EUR:1 AU:0 CN:0 KR:0 TW:0 ASIA:0
Related service mode COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > JM-ERR-R T-8-34
JM-ERR-R Handling 0071 jam as an error: RCON

Lv.2 Details To display 0071 jam as the error E996-0071.
By handling the jam as an error, the machine stops, so that loss of
the log can be prevented.
Be sure to enable the service mode at the user’s site where 0071 jam
occurs.
After that, if the error E996-0071 occurs, the log which has been
backed up can be obtained.
Use case When obtaining a log at the occurrence of 0071 jam
Display/adj/set range 0: Display as a jam, 1: Display as an error
Default value 0
Related service mode COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > JM-ERR-D
DFTSCNSZ Setting of default scan size
Lv.1 Details To set the default scan size when scan size is not specified.
Display/adj/set range 0:LTR
1:LGL
Default value 0
8-66
8
8 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW
8-67
■■DSPLY-SW COPIER>OPTION>DSPLY-SW
NWERR-SW OFF/ON of network-related error display
COPIER>OPTION>DSPLY-SW
Lv.2 Details To set OFF/ON of network-related error message display.
UI-COPY Display/hide of copy screen When setting “0: OFF” while the machine is not connected to network,
Lv.2 Details To set whether to display or hide the copy function. the error message “Check the network connection.” is not displayed.
Use case Upon user’s request Use case When using the machine as a copy machine
0: Hide, 1: Display 0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value 1 Default value Normal Model:1 , Self Copy Model:0
UI-BOX Display/hide of Inbox screen ANIM-SW Screen switch set from MEAP to warning
Lv.2 Details To set whether to display or hide the Inbox function. Lv.2 Details To set to enable/disable switching from MEAP screen to the error/jam
Use case Upon user’s request screen.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Use case When not preferring to display the warning screen in the case of an
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. error/jam/alarm
0: No Inbox function (Storing is not available even with PDL to Inbox.) 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
1: Inbox function is active Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
2: Inbox function is active (with limitation; Storing is available with 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled (No display of warning screen)
PDL to Inbox despite no display on the Control Panel/remote UI) Default value 0
Default value 1 Supplement/memo If just disabling the switch with MEAP-DSP, the screen is switched to
UI-SEND Display/hide of send screen the standard screen in the case of an error/jam/alarm.
Lv.2 Details To set whether to display or hide the SEND function. UI-PRINT Display/hide of print job screen
Use case Upon user’s request Lv.2 Details To set whether to display or hide the print job screen.
0: Hide, 1: Display Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
Default value 1 0: Hide, 1: Display
UI-FAX Display/hide of FAX screen Default value 1
Lv.2 Details To set whether to display or hide the FAX function. UI-RSCAN Display/hide of remote scan screen
Use case Upon user’s request Lv.2 Details To set whether to display or hide the remote scan screen on the
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Control Panel.
0: Hide, 1: Display 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Default value 1 Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default value 1
8-67
8
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW
8-68
COPIER>OPTION>DSPLY-SW COPIER>OPTION>DSPLY-SW
UI-WEB Display/hide of Web browser screen UI-NAVI Display/hide of introduction to useful features
Lv.2 Details To set whether to display or hide the Web browser screen. Lv.2 Details To set whether to display or hide “Introduction to Useful Features” in
Use case Upon user’s request the main menu.
Default value 1 0: Hide, 1: Display
TNR-WARN ON/OFF of toner alarm display Default value 1
Lv.1 Details To set whether to display the toner alarm screen. FXU-DSP ON/OFF of initialization screen after Fixing Assembly replacement
Use case When preferring to hide the alarm until the toner runs out Lv.1 Details To set whether to display “Fixing Assembly” on Initialization screen
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. after replacing parts in Settings/Registration.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. When allowing the user to replace the Fixing Assembly, set 1.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 Use case When allowing the user to replace the Fixing Assembly
0: ON, 1: OFF Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Default value USA:1 EUR:0 AU:0 CN:0 KR:0 TW:0 ASIA:0 Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
RMT-CNSL ON/OFF of MEAP console screen 0: Hide, 1: Display
Lv.1 Details Selecting “1: ON” enables to obtain log for Function Composer on Default value 0
console screen. Related UI menu Settings/Registration> Adjustment/Maintenance> Maintenance>
Use case When obtaining log for Function Composer Initialize After Replacing Parts> Fixing Assembly
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. PUMF-DSP ON/OFF of Initialization screen after MP Tray Pickup Roller
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. replacement
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 Lv.1 Details To set whether to display “Ppr. Feed Roller & Separation Pad of
0: OFF, 1: ON MP Tray” on Initialization screen after replacing parts in Settings/
registration.
Default value 0
When allowing the custommer to replace the Pickup Roller/
UI-SBOX ON/OFF of Advanced Box screen display
Separation Pad of Multi-purpose Tray, set 1.
Lv.2 Details To set ON/OFF of the Advanced Box screen on the Control Panel.
Use case When allowing the user to replace the Pickup Roller/Separation Pad
Use case When not displaying the Advanced Box screen on the Control Panel of Multi-purpose Tray
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value 0
Default value EUR:0 ,Others:1
Related UI menu Settings/Registration> Adjustment/Maintenance> Maintenance >
UI-MEM ON/OFF of memory media screen display Initialize After Replacing Parts> MP Tray Pickup Roller / Separation
Lv.2 Details To set ON/OFF of the memory media screen display on the Control Pad
Panel.
Use case When not displaying the memory media screen on the Control Panel
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value 0
8-68
8
8-69
COPIER>OPTION>DSPLY-SW COPIER>OPTION>DSPLY-SW
PUC1-DSP ON/OFF of Initialization screen after Cassette 1 Pickup Roller PUC4-DSP ON/OFF of Initialization after Cassette 4 Pickup Roller replacement
replacement Lv.1 Details To set whether to display “Cassette 4 Feed Roller (x 2)” on
Lv.1 Details To set whether to display “Cassette 1 Feed Roller (x 2)” on Initialization screen after replacing parts in Settings/Registration.
Initialization screen after replacing parts in Settings/Registration. When allowing the customer to replace the Pickup Rollers of Cassette
When allowing the customer to replace the Pickup Roller of Cassette 4, set 1.
1, set 1. Use case When allowing the customer to replace the Pickup Rollers of Cassette
Use case When allowing the user to replace the Pickup Roller of Cassette 1 4
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
0: Hide, 1: Display 0: Hide, 1: Display
Related UI menu Settings/Registration> Adjustment/Maintenance> Maintenance > Related UI menu Settings/Registration> Adjustment/Maintenance> Maintenance >
Initialize After Replacing Parts> Cassette 1 Feed Roller (x 2) Initialize After Replacing Parts> Cassette 4 Feed Roller (x 2)
PUC2-DSP ON/OFF of Initialization after Cassette 2 Pickup Roller replacement UI-CUSTM ON/OFF of Quick Menu screen display
Lv.1 Details To set whether to display “Cassette 2 Feed Roller (x 2)” on Lv.2 Details To set ON/OFF of the Quick Menu screen on the Control Panel.
Initialization screen after replacing parts in Settings/Registration. Use case When not displaying the Quick Menu screen on the Control Panel
When allowing the customer to replace the Pickup Rollers of Cassette Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2, set 1. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Use case When allowing the customer to replace the Pickup Rollers of Cassette Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
2 0: OFF, 1: ON
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 USER-DSP Display/hide of SSO-H login user name
0: Hide, 1: Display
Lv.1 Details To set whether to display the name of the user who logs in using
Default value 0 MEAP authentication (SSO-H) on the screen of the Control Panel
Related UI menu Settings/Registration> Adjustment/Maintenance> Maintenance > (upper left area).
Initialize After Replacing Parts> Cassette 2 Feed Roller (x 2) Use case Upon user’s request
PUC3-DSP ON/OFF of Initialization screen after Cassette 3 Pickup Roller Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
replacement 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Lv.1 Details To set whether to display “Cassette 3 Feed Roller (x 2)” on Display/adj/set range 0 to 2
Initialization screen after replacing parts in Settings/Registration. 0: Hide
When allowing the customer to replace the Pickup Rollers of Cassette 1: Display “display name”
3, set 1. 2: Display “user name”
Use case When allowing the customer to replace the Pickup Rollers of Cassette Default value 0
3
SDTM-DSP Display/hide of auto shutdown time
Lv.1 Details To set whether to display or hide “Auto Shutdown Time” in Settings/
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 Registration.
0: Hide, 1: Display
Use case When switching to display or hide auto shutdown time
Default value 0
Caution When “Hide” is set, auto shutdown time is reset. (Auto shutdown is
Initialize After Replacing Parts> Cassette 3 Feed Roller (x 2)
not performed.)
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default value USA:0, EUR:1, AU:0, CN:0, KR:0, TW:0, ASIA:0
Related UI menu Settings/Registration > Preferences > Timer/Energy Settings > Auto
Shutdown Time, Auto Shutdown Weekly Timer
8-69
8
8 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX
8-70
COPIER>OPTION>DSPLY-SW ■■IMG-FIX
WT-WARN Display/hide of Waste Toner Container preparation massage
COPIER>OPTION>IMG-FIX
Lv.1 Details To set whether to display the preparation warning message of the
Waste Toner Container on the status area of LUI. FIX-CLN Setting of fixing cleaning sequence execution temperature
Use case When there is no need to notify the preparation timing of the Waste Lv.2 Details To set the execution temperature for the fixing pressure roller
Toner Container to the user cleaning sequence.
Change the condition (temperature of the sub thermistor) to execute
the fixing pressure roller cleaning sequence.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Default value 1 0: 245 degree, 1: 250 degree, 2: 255 degree, 3: 240 degree
TR-DSP Display/hide of counter initialization screen: Transfer Roller Default value 0
Lv.1 Details To set whether to display/hide the Transfer Roller in the counter initial Related service mode COPIER >OPTION >CLEANING >FX-CN-SW
screen in Settings/Registration. FIX-TEMP Setting of down sequence mode
Use case When the customer replaces the parts Lv.1 Details To set the temperature of the Fixing Assembly to shift to down
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. sequence mode.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 Use case When prioritizing productivity
0: Hide, 1: Display Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Related UI menu Settings/Registration> Adjustment/Maintenance> Maintenance > Display/adj/set range 0 to 4
Initialize After Replacing Parts> Transfer Roller 0: +20 deg C, 1: +10 deg C, 2: Normal, 3: -10 deg C, 4: -20 deg C
SPEL-DSP Display/hide of counter initialization screen: Static Eliminator Default value 2
Lv.1 Details To set whether to display/hide the Static Eliminator in the counter TEMPCON2 Setting of fixing control temperature table: Plain paper 1, 1/2 speed
initial screen in Settings/Registration. Lv.1 Details To change the fixing control temperature in the plain paper 1 of 1/2
Use case When the customer replaces the parts SPD.
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Use case When a fixing failure occurs at the time of picking up paper from the
plain paper 1, 1/2 SPD.
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default value 0
Display/adj/set range 0 to 2: +15 degC
3 to 11: +12 to -12 degC (3 degC unit)
Initialize After Replacing Parts> Static Eliminator
12 to 14: -15 degC
DRM-DSP Display/hide of counter initialization screen: Drum Unit
Default value 7
Lv.1 Details To set whether to display/hide the Drum Unit in the counter initial
FIX-LOW Fixing performance improvement in low-temperature
screen in Settings/Registration.
Lv.1 Details Fixing performance improvement in low-temperature
Use case When the customer replaces the parts
Use case This item is used when a fixing failure has occurred in a low-
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. temperature environment.
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default value 0
Caution Use it after having told that productivity declines to a visitor.
Initialize After Replacing Parts> Drum Unit
0: OFF, 1: Low temperature fixing performance improvement mode is
T-8-35 set to ON.
Default value 0
8-70
8
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX
8-71
COPIER>OPTION>IMG-FIX COPIER>OPTION>IMG-FIX
FX-S-TMP Setting of fixing temperature: Curl correction TMP-TBL5 Setting of fixing control temperature table: Thin paper mode
Lv.1 Details To change the fixing temperature to correct the curl, the fixing failure Lv.1 Details To set the control temperature table for the plain paper 1 and plain
and the paper slip for the fixing target temperature at the N1 mode paper 2 to the thin paper mode or the S-thin paper mode.
and N3 mode. Use case When using plain paper 1 and plain paper 2 , set this mode to OFF.
Use case When changing the fixing temperature to correct the paper curl and Go through the following: COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > TMP-
fixing failure and paper slip. TBLC; and if TMP-TBLC is “0: Auto” or “1: OFF”, this mode is
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. enabled.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 2: +15 degC 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
3 to 11: +12 to -12 degC (3 degC unit) Caution When using plain paper, set this mode to OFF.
12 to 14: -15 degC Display/adj/set range 0 to 2
Default value 7 0: OFF
TMP-TBL2 Setting of fixing control temperature: Heavy paper 1 1: thin paper mode
Lv.1 Details To set the offset of fixing control temperature for heavy paper 1 at 1/1 2: S-thin paper mode
speed and 1/2 speed. Default value 0
As the value is incremented by 1, the control temperature is increased TMP-TBL6 Fixing control temperature: envelope
by 3 deg C. Lv.1 Details To set the offset of fixing control temperature for envelope at 1/2
Increase the value when a fixing failure occurs. speed.
Decrease the value when hot offset occurs. As the value is incremented by 1, the control temperature is increased
Use case When the poor fixing, paper slip or paper curl occurs in the heavy by 3 deg C.
paper 1 at the 1/1 SPD and 1/2 SPD. Increase the value when a fixing failure occurs.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Decrease the value when hot offset occurs.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Use case When hot offset/fixing failure occurs on envelope
Display/adj/set range 0 to 2: +15 degC Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
3 to 11: +12 to -12 degC (3 degC unit) 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
12 to 14: -15 degC Display/adj/set range 0 to 2: +15 degC
Default value 7 3 to 11: +12 to -12 degC (3 degC unit)
TMP-TBL4 Setting of fixing control temperature: Heavy paper 2 12 to 14: -15 degC
Lv.1 Details To change the fixing temperature to correct the curl, the fixing failure Default value 7
and the paper slip for the fixing target temperature at the Heavy TMP-TBL7 Setting of fixing control temperature table: Plain paper 2, 1/1 speed
paper 2 mode. Lv.1 Details To change the fixing control temperature in the plain paper 2 mode at
Use case When changing the fixing temperature to correct the paper curl and 1/1 SPD.
fixing failure and paper slip. Increase the value when a fixing failure occurs.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Decrease the value when hot offset occurs.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Use case When the poor fixing, paper slip or paper curl occurs in the plain
Display/adj/set range 0 to 2: +15 degC paper 2 mode at 1/1 SPD.
3 to 11: +12 to -15 degC (3 degC unit) Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
12 to 14: -15 degC 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Default value 7 Display/adj/set range 0 to 2: +15 degC
12 to 14: -15 degC
Default value 7
8-71
8
8-72
COPIER>OPTION>IMG-FIX COPIER>OPTION>IMG-FIX
RAG-CONT Setting of fixing smeared image control mode level TMP-TB13 Setting of fixing control temperature table: Thin paper, 1/1 speed
Lv.1 Details To set level of the mode (skipping) to control smeared image caused Lv.2 Details To change the fixing control temperature in the thin paper mode and
by fixing area. S-thin paper mode at the 1/1 SPD.
Use case When a smeared image occurs Use case When the poor fixing, paper slip or paper curl occurs in the thin paper
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. mode and S-thin paper mode at the 1/1 SPD.
0: No skipping, 1: Small skipping, 2: Medium skipping, 3: Large Caution Go through the following: COPIER >OPTION >IMG-FIX >TMP-TBL5;
skipping and if TMP-TBL5 is “1: thin paper mode” or “2: S-thin paper mode”,
Default value 2 this mode is enabled.
TMP-TBLC Setting of fixing control temperature table: curled paper Display/adj/set range 0 to 2: +15 degC
Lv.2 Details To set the control temperature table to the N1 mode or the N3 mode 3 to 11: +12 to -12 degC (3 degC unit)
so that the paper curl is reduced when select the: plain paper 1, plain 12 to 14: -15 degC
paper 2, recycled paper, color paper, prepunched paper. Default value 7
Use case When the paper is moist so that the paper curl occurs Related service mode COPIER >OPTION >IMG-FIX >TMP-TBL5
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. TMP-TB14 Setting of fixing control temperature table: Thin paper, 1/2 speed
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Lv.2 Details To change the fixing control temperature in the thin paper mode and
Display/adj/set range 0 to 3 S-thin paper mode at the 1/2 SPD.
0: Auto Use case When the poor fixing, paper slip or paper curl occurs in the thin paper
1: OFF mode and S-thin paper mode at the 1/2 SPD.
2: N1 mode with plain paper 1/2 (Target temperature becomes low.) Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
3: N3 mode with plain paper 1/2 (Target temperature becomes 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
moreover low.) Caution Go through the following: COPIER >OPTION >IMG-FIX >TMP-TBL5;
Default value 0 and if TMP-TBL5 is “1: thin paper mode” or “2: S-thin paper mode”,
FIX-PR Setting of fixing paper special processing mode this mode is enabled.
Lv.2 Details The electrostatic offset is improved, and electrical effect of the inside Display/adj/set range 0 to 2: +15 degC
between the paper become small. 3 to 11: +12 to -12 degC (3 degC unit)
To prevent of discharge between the fixing film unit and pressure 12 to 14: -15 degC
roller, and the static charge of the pressure roller. Default value 7
Use case When electrostatic offset is improved. Related service mode COPIER >OPTION >IMG-FIX >TMP-TBL5
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. TMP-TB15 Setting of fixing control temperature table: Plain paper, 2-sided
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Lv.2 Details To change the fixing control temperature in the plain paper mode 1
Display/adj/set range 0: OFF, 1: ON during the second printing of 2-sided at 1/1 SPD and 1/2 SPD.
Default value 0 Use case When the poor fixing, paper slip or paper curl occurs in the plain
TMP-TB12 Setting of fixing control temperature table: Plain paper 2, 1/2 speed paper mode 1 during the second printing of 2-sided at 1/1 SPD and
Lv.2 Details To change the fixing control temperature in the plain paper 2 at 1/2 1/2 SPD.
SPD. Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Use case When the poor fixing, paper slip or paper curl occurs in the plain 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
paper 2 at the 1/2 SPD. Display/adj/set range 0 to 2: +15 degC
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 3 to 11: +12 to -12 degC (3 degC unit)
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 12 to 14: -15 degC
Display/adj/set range 0 to 2: +15 degC Default value 7
12 to 14: -15 degC
Default value 7
8-72
8
8 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-TR
8-73
COPIER>OPTION>IMG-FIX ■■IMG-TR
TMP-TB16 Setting of fixing control temperature table: Plain paper 2, 2-sided
COPIER>OPTION>IMG-TR
Lv.2 Details To change the fixing control temperature in the plain paper mode 2
during the second printing of 2-sided at 1/1 SPD and 1/2 SPD. HUM-SW Selection of transfer current output
Use case When the poor fixing, paper slip or paper curl occurs in the plain Lv.2 Details Use this item when a failure occurs to the environment sensor. The
paper mode 2 during the second printing of 2-sided at 1/1 SPD and output level of transfer current is controlled in accordance with the
1/2 SPD. specified environment.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Use case Use this item when a failure occurs to the environment sensor.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 2: +15 degC 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
3 to 11: +12 to -12 degC (3 degC unit) Display/adj/set range 0 to 5
12 to 14: -15 degC 0: Automatic control by the environment sensor
Default value 7 1: Low humidity
2: Rather low humidity
T-8-36
3: Normal humidity
4: Rather high humidity
5: High humidity
Make the setting in accordance with the installation environment.
The transfer current output level is controlled in accordance with the
specified environment.
Low-humidity environment: The transfer current output level
increases.
High-humidity environment: The transfer current output level
decreases.
Default value 0
TROPT-SW Adjustment of transfer output
Lv.2 Details To adjust the transfer roller voltage
Use case - When the print is executed with the heavy paper, index paper or thin
paper or of the out-of-specification
- When the second page is printed in 2-sided mode with the manual
feed table
Display/adj/set range -2: Transfer output voltage moreover decreases.
-1: Transfer output voltage decreases.
0: OFF
1: Transfer output voltage increases.
Default value 0
8-73
8
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-TR
8 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-RDR
8-74
COPIER>OPTION>IMG-TR ■■IMG-RDR
TR-BS-SW Setting of transfer bias highland environment mode
COPIER>OPTION>IMG-RDR
Lv.2 Details To control the transfer bias in printing so that it does not exceed a
specified level DFDST-L1 ADF mode dust correction level adjustment: paper interval
Use case When the black spots appear on the image (caused by leak occurs at Lv.1 Details To adjust black line correction level with very small dust detection
high latitude) correction control that is executed at paper interval in ADF mode.
Increase the value in the case of black lines. As the value is larger,
the black line gets thin more.
Caution When the installation site is changed from a highland to a lowland, Use case - When black line occurs due to dust
- Upon user’s request
set this mode OFF.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
0: Normal, 1: Voltage reduction mode Caution When increasing the value too much, the cleaning instruction screen
Default value 0 may appear too often since even small dust that will not be appeared
on the image can be detected.
T-8-37
When reducing the value too much, black lines may appear on the
■■IMG-LSR image.
COPIER>OPTION>IMG-LSR Display/adj/set range 0 to 255
SC-PR-SW Setting of scanner last rotation time Default value 215
Lv.2 Details To stop the polygon motor immediately after the last rotation so that a Supplement/memo Black lines can appear on the image if there is dust. With dust
noise of the polygon motor is reduced detection correction control, the image is corrected to prevent black
lines once dust is detected.
Use case When receiving a complaint about the Scanner Motor drive noise
after completion of a job DFDST-L2 ADF mode dust correction level adjustment: after job
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Lv.1 Details To adjust dust detection level with dust detection correction control
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. that is executed after the job is completed in DADF mode.
Reduce the value in the case of frequent display of cleaning
instruction at the time of dust detection. As the value is smaller, the
0: OFF, 1: ON
dust is less detected.
Default value 0
Increase the value in the case of black lines. As the value is larger,
T-8-38
the small dust is more likely detected.
Use case - When black line occurs due to dust
- Upon user’s request
Caution When increasing the value too much, the cleaning instruction screen
may appear too often since even small dust that will not be appeared
on the image can be detected.
When reducing the value too much, black lines may appear on the
image.
Default value 215
Supplement/memo Black lines can appear on the image if there is dust. With dust
detection correction control, the image is corrected to prevent black
lines once dust is detected.
8-74
8
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-RDR
8 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON
8-75
COPIER>OPTION>IMG-RDR ■■IMG-MCON
UNK-A5R Paper size setting: copyboard original size detection, small
COPIER>OPTION>IMG-MCON
Lv.1 Details To detect custom size paper smaller than A4R (LTRR) as A5R
(STMTR) at copyboard original size detection. PASCAL Use/no use of auto gradation adjustment data
Use case Upon user’s request Lv.1 Details To set to use/not to use the gradation adjustment data gamma LUT
that is generated by auto gradation adjustment (Full/Quick Adjust)
control.
Selection is available as to whether to use gamma LUT at the time of
image formation.
not used.
Use case When PASCAL-related failure occurs/when identifying the cause of
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 PASCAL-related failure
0: Detect as custom size
1: Detect as A5R (STMTR)
Default value 0
T-8-39
0: Initial LUT is used. (Automatic gradation adjustment is not used.)
1: Auto gradation adjustment is used.
2 to 3: Not used
Default value 1
SHARP Setting of sharpness level of image
Lv.2 Details To set the setting level (center value) of sharpness of image.
As the value is increased, the image tends to be sharp, and as the
value is decreased, image tends to be soft.
Default value 3
TMC-SLCT Setting of error diffusion coefficient
Lv.2 Details To set coefficient to be used for error diffusion process.
Specify according to the level of granularity and dot stability.
Use case At error diffusion processing
Display/adj/set range 0: Small granularity/low dot stability
1: Small granularity/low dot stability (color mode), Large granularity/
high dot stability (B&W mode)
2: Large granularity/high dot stability
Default value 2
8-75
8
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON
8 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON
8-76
COPIER>OPTION>IMG-MCON COPIER>OPTION>IMG-MCON
VP-ART Setting of line art processing REGM-SEL Not use
Lv.2 Details To set outline processing for line art on scalable PDF. Lv.2 Details Not use
In the outline processing, a binary image outline is extracted in the Default value 2
field which is recognized as line art, and is converted into vector data. C-S-P-D High density trailing edge correction: PDL density print
Specify whether to convert the binary image outline into vector data
Lv.2 Details To set ON/OFF of high density trailing edge correction function at
or to recognize it as one line (as a thin line). For the thin line, the line
PDL.
width can be specified.
Use case ON: When reducing jagged line and jagged outline of text
Change this value when you want to obtain an output of a wide-width
OFF: When matching density with original on high density area, or
line as one line rather than as an outline (when you want to prioritize
when prioritizing density and gradation
edit operation as a line rather than image quality).
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value 1
Supplement/memo CAL: Abbreviation of CAL_Shadow_PDL_Density
Default value 1
Jaggy: Stair-like lines which commonly appears along the outline of
VP-TXT Setting of character vectorization image or font.
Lv.2 Details To set vector conversion processing for text on scalable PDF. C-S-C-D High density trailing edge correction ON/OFF: copy
In the vector conversion processing, a binary image outline is
Lv.2 Details To set ON/OFF of high density trailing edge correction function at
extracted in the field which is recognized as text, and is converted
copy.
into vector data.
With CAL of COPY, high density trailing edge correction function is
In regular vector conversion, function approximation is not used for
ON in normal operation; however, set OFF as needed.
small text because the image quality is not changed.
Use case ON: When reducing jagged line and jagged outline of text
When the value is changed, function approximation processing is
OFF: When matching density with original on high density area, or
executed for small text, which realizes smooth text although the
when prioritizing density and gradation
image quality is changed.
Change this value when you want to prioritize smoothness in small Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
text. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
Use case Upon user’s request 0: OFF, 1: ON
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Default value 1
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Supplement/memo Abbreviation of CAL_Shadow_COPY_Density. When adjusting the
Display/adj/set range 0 to 99 input signal 255 to low in the case that the density of solid area is
too high, jaggy (jagged effect of halftone) may occur to text, etc. By
Default value 1
entering the input signal 255 as solid, occurrence of jaggy can be
PASCL-TY Paper setting for auto gradation adjustment prevented.
Lv.2 Details Auto gradation adjustment is normally executed with the Jaggy: Stair-like lines which commonly appears along the outline of
recommended paper specified for each location. However, if you want image or font.
to change the paper type, use this setting to change the paper type.
Use case When executing the auto gradation adjustment using a paper other
than the recommended paper type
Caution Do not change the setting in the normal operation.
1: CS-814 (Except for USA and EU. Mainly for Japan)
2: Hammermill (For USA)
3: Mondi (For EU)
8-76
8
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON
8 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-SPD
8-77
COPIER>OPTION>IMG-MCON ■■IMG-SPD
LIN-OFST Setting of special paper added dot amount offset
COPIER>OPTION>IMG-SPD
Lv.1 Details To set the offset amount of dots added to vertical/horizontal direction
when lines on special paper are thinner than those on plain paper. PSP-PR1 Setting of productivity priority mode
When printing special paper, compared to plain paper, the amount of Lv.2 Details To lower the fixing temperature for the paper feed start at the paper
dots specified with this item is added. size change.
As the value is larger, lines become thicker. The priority is given to the productivity so that the fixing offset may
Use case When the line width of special paper is thinner than the one of plain occur.
paper Use case When prioritizing productivity
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Default value 0 Display/adj/set range 0: OFF
1: ON (Productivity priority mode)
BGE-OFS Fine adjustment of background adjustment level
Default value 0
Lv.2 Details To make a fine adjustment of the background adjustment (background
T-8-41
removal) level which can be set manually.
Break up the adjustment values into smaller ones when user does
not satisfy with the default adjustment values.
Use case When color fogging occurs on the output image when copying
yellowed blank paper as an original
Caution Since the background color is set to be washed out with this mode,
not only the background of yellowed blank paper, but also other light
colors (light blue, etc.) are washed out.
Default value 0
T-8-40
8-77
8
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-SPD
8 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > ENV-SET
8-78
■■CLEANING ■■ENV-SET
COPIER>OPTION>CLEANING COPIER>OPTION>ENV-SET
FX-CN-SW Setting of fixing pressure roller cleaning sequence ENVP-INT Temperature/humidity and Fixing Film temperature log getting cycle
Lv.2 Details To set the fixing pressure roller cleaning sequence Lv.1 Details To set the cycle to obtain log of the temperature and humidity inside
Use case Upon user’s request (When the fixing motor sound which is generated the machine and the surface temperature of the Fixing Film.
in the fixing pressure roller cleaning sequence is claimed from user) As the value is incremented by 1, the cycle is increased by 1 minute.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Obtained log can be displayed by selecting the following: COPIER >
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. DISPLAY > ENVRNT
Display/adj/set range 0: OFF, 1: ON Use case At trouble analysis
Default value 1 Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
T-8-42
Default value 60
IMG-BLD1 Setting of image smear prevention mode
Lv.2 Details To warm around the Developing Assembly and the Photosensitive
Drum with the following operation to prevent image smear.
- To decrease the discharge current value of the charging AC
discharge current control according to the environment.
- To extend the warm-up rotation time. As the value is larger, the time
becomes longer.
- To set the fixing control temperature at warm-up rotation to 108 deg C.
When either 1, 2 or 3 is set, “Clean Drum” is displayed in user mode,
and user can execute only setting 2.
When the value is increased, the effect becomes big.
Use case When image smear occurs
0: OFF, 1: Extend warm-up rotation for 60 seconds, 2: Extend for 120
seconds, 3: Extend for 240 seconds
Default value 0
Related service mode COPIER > OPTION > ENV-SET > IMG-BLD2
COPIER > OPTION > ENV-SET > IMG-BLD3
Related UI menu [Settings/Registration]> [Adjustment/Maintenance]> [Clean Drum]>
[Start]
8-78
8
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > ENV-SET
8 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK
8-79
COPIER>OPTION>ENV-SET ■■NETWORK
IMG-BLD2 Change of the charge frequency
COPIER>OPTION>NETWORK
Lv.2 Details Change the charged frequency to 2535Hz or 1300Hz from 1838Hz.
IFAX-LIM Number of maximum print lines at IFAX reception
Use case - When the drum that an image smear occurred is replaced by a new
drum Lv.2 Details To set the maximum number of lines for e-mail text to be printed
- When the image flow is improved when receiving IFAX.
Setting of this item can prevent endless printing of the attached file
data in the case of receiving an error e-mail or failure in interpretation
of the context.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 2 Selecting 0 prints the header/footer in 1 sheet when receiving e-mail
0: 1838Hz, 1: 2535Hz, 2: 1300Hz
text without attached file.
Default value 0
Use case When preventing endless print in the case of failure in reception
Related service mode COPIER > OPTION > ENV-SET > IMG-BLD1
COPIER > OPTION > ENV-SET > IMG-BLD3
IMG-BLD3 Black band mode
Lv.2 Details To further increase the cleaning level of the drum and remove 0: E-mail text not printed, 999: Unlimited
deteriorated toner to prevent image smear in a high humidity
Default value 500
environment.
As the value is increased, the effect is increased.
SMTPTXPN Setting of SMTP TX port number
Use case When image smear occurs Lv.2 Details To set SMTP transmission port number.
Caution Toner consumption is increased, and the Transfer Roller is likely to be 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
soiled. Display/adj/set range 0 to 65535
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 Default value 25
0: default (no black band) SMTPRXPN Setting of SMTP reception port number
1: The making of the black band at the last rotation for 50 jobs once Lv.2 Details To set SMTP reception port number.
Default value 0 Use case Upon user’s request
Related service mode COPIER > OPTION > ENV-SET > IMG-BLD1 Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
COPIER > OPTION > ENV-SET > IMG-BLD2 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
T-8-43 Display/adj/set range 0 to 65535
Default value 25
■■FEED-SW POP3PN Setting of POP3 reception port number
Lv.2 Details To set POP3 reception port number.
COPIER>OPTION>FEED-SW
SP-SW Setting of separation priority mode
Lv.2 Details To set the separation priority mode for using the thin paper of the out- 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
of specification
Use case When the moist, soft and thin paper is used
Default value 110
FTPTXPN Specification of SEND port (FTP) number
Lv.2 Details To specify address port (FTP) number for SEND.
Caution When using plain paper, set this mode to OFF.
0: OFF, 1 to 2: Separation priority mode (Separation effect improves.) Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Default value 0
T-8-44
Default value 21
8-79
8
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK
8-80
COPIER>OPTION>NETWORK COPIER>OPTION>NETWORK
STS-PORT Not use NS-NTLM Limit of NTLM authentication method at SMTP authentication
Lv.2 Details Not use Lv.2 Details To restrict use of NTLM authentication method at the time of SMTP
Default value 0 authentication.
CMD-PORT Not use Use case Upon user’s request
Lv.2 Details Not use Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
NS-CMD5 Limit of CRAM-MD5 authentication method at SMTP authentication Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
0: SMTP server-dependent, 1: Not used
Lv.2 Details To restrict use of CRAM-MD5 authentication method at the time of
SMTP authentication. Default value 0
Use case Upon user’s request Supplement/memo SMTP authentication: Protocol in which user authentication
function is added to SMTP, which is the protocol to be used
for e-mail transmission. At the time of e-mail transmission, this
protocol executes authentication of the user account and the
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 password between the SMTP server and the user to approve e-mail
transmission only when it’s authenticated.
Default value 0
NS-PLNWS Limit of plaintext authentication at SMTP authentication encryption
Supplement/memo SMTP authentication: Protocol in which user authentication
Lv.2 Details To restrict use of PLAIN/LOGIN authentication, which is plaintext, at
the time of SMTP authentication under the environment where the
communication packet is encrypted.
password between the SMTP server and the user to approve e-mail
transmission only when it’s authenticated. Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
NS-GSAPI Limit of GSSAPI authentication method at SMTP authentication
Lv.2 Details To restrict use of GSSAPI authentication method at the time of SMTP
authentication.
Default value 0
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 protocol executes authentication of the user account and the
Default value 0 transmission only when it’s authenticated.
8-80
8
8-81
NS-PLN Limit of plaintext authentication at SMTP authentication non- CHNG-STS Not use
encryption Lv.2 Details Not use
Lv.2 Details To restrict use of PLAIN/LOGIN authentication, which is plaintext, at Default value 20010
the time of SMTP authentication under the environment where the CHNG-CMD Not use
communication packet is not encrypted.
Lv.2 Details Not use
Default value 20000
MEAP-SSL HTTPS port setting of MEAP
Lv.2 Details To set the port of HTTPS server in the case of using SSL with HTTP
of MEAP.
Use case When specifying the setting of HTTPS port for MEAP
Default value 0
for e-mail transmission. At the time of e-mail transmission, this Display/adj/set range 0 to 65535
protocol executes authentication of the user account and the Default value 8443
password between the SMTP server and the user to approve e-mail LPD-PORT Setting of LPD port number
transmission only when it’s authenticated. Lv.2 Details To set the LPD port number.
NS-LGN Limit of LOGIN authentication at SMTP authentication Use case Upon user’s request
Lv.2 Details To restrict use of LOGIN authentication at the time of SMTP Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
authentication. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Use case Upon user’s request Display/adj/set range 1 to 65535
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Supplement/memo LPD port: Network port for TCP/IP communication when making
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 prints through network.
0: SMTP server-dependent, 1: Not used WUEV-SW Setting of sleep notification execution
Default value 0 Lv.2 Details To set whether to notify the sleep mode to the application
Supplement/memo SMTP authentication: Protocol in which user authentication (imageWARE, etc) on the network when shifting to/recovering from
function is added to SMTP, which is the protocol to be used the sleep mode.
for e-mail transmission. At the time of e-mail transmission, this Use case Upon user’s request
protocol executes authentication of the user account and the Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
password between the SMTP server and the user to approve e-mail 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
MEAP-PN HTTP port number setting of MEAP application 0: Notified, 1: Not notified
Lv.2 Details To set HTTP port number of MEAP application. Default value 0
Use case Upon user’s request Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> WUEV-INT, WUEV-POT, WUEV-
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. RTR
Caution Do not specify port 8080 when the Print Server is connected.
Otherwise, you cannot browse the device RUI in which MEAP
authentication application is running (Port 8080 is reserved for
redirection of EFI controller to the iR side.)
Default value 8000
8-81
8
8-82
WUEV-INT Setting of sleep notification interval IFX-CHIG Setting of operation by IFAX received mail content
Lv.2 Details To set the interval of sleep notification. Lv.1 Details To set the number of characters for the IFAX received mail content,
Use case Upon user’s request so that the mail is not printed/forwarded when the characters in the
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. text is less than the number of specified characters.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. This machine can output blank paper because some senders send
Caution This is active when COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> WUEV-SW is e-mail text consists of linefeed codes only. In such case, specify 2
set to 0: Notified. (number of characters) so that there will be no output of blank paper.
In the case of specifying any number other than 0, header/footer is
printed/forwarded in 1 sheet only if the e-mail (body) text is less than
Default value 600
the specified value while no TIFF file is attached.
Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> WUEV-SW As the value is incremented by 1, the number of target characters in
WUEV-POT Port number setting for sleep notice e-mail body text is increased by 1 character.
Lv.2 Details To set port number of the PC to notify the sleep mode. Use case When reducing print of blank paper due to e-mail received by IFAX.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Be sure to get approval from the user by telling that there will be no
Caution This is active when COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> WUEV-SW is print of e-mail (body) text if the number of characters is less than the
set to 0: Notified. specified value.
Default value 11427 0: E-mail (body) text is not ignored.
Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> WUEV-SW Default value 0
WUEV-RTR Setting of sleep notification range Supplement/memo 1 Japanese Kanji character is calculated as 2 bytes, and the control
Lv.2 Details To set the number of available routers to the target for sleep codes (such as linefeed code, etc) are included in the number of
notification. characters.
Use case Upon user’s request DNSTRANS Setting of DNS transfer priority
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Lv.1 Details To set priority order of the protocol (IPv4/IPv6) to be used for DNS
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. query.
In the case of using both IPv6 and IPv4 while the DNS server
Caution This is active when COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> WUEV-SW is
supports IPv4, it takes time because of timeout when executing DNS
set to 0: Notified.
query with priority on IPv6.
Giving priority on query by IPv4 can shorten the time.
Default value 3
Use case When it takes time to execute DNS query with priority on IPv6
Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> WUEV-SW because the DNS server supports IPv4
WUEN-LIV Recovery time setting after sleep notice Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Lv.2 Details To set the time from the sleep start from network without job 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
assignment until the mode is shifted to the sleep mode. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
Use case When setting the startup time after sleep notification 0: IPv4, 1: IPv6
Default value 15
8-82
8
8-83
PROXYRES Setting of proxy response to Windows SPDALDEL Initialization of SPD value
Lv.2 Details To set whether to provide proxy response or return the device status Lv.2 Details To initialize all the SPD values that are under management.
when an inquiry is received via Windows while the device is in sleep SPD values can be initialized without clearing SRAM.
mode. Use case At the time of SPD value mismatch when IPSec Board is added
Use case When executing status response for query from Windows correctly Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON
0: No proxy response, 1: Proxy response Default value 0
Default value 1 NCONF-SW ON/OFF of Network Configurator function
WOLTRANS Setting of sleep recovery protocol Lv.1 Details To set ON/OFF of Network Configurator function.
Lv.1 Details To set the protocol for recovery from sleep mode according to the If the user does not use the function, select OFF to prevent remote
value of WOL (Wake On LAN) trans. attack through network.
Reception of a specific network packet is one of the requirements for Use case Upon user’s request
the device to recover from sleep mode. Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
When the number of network protocols supported by the device 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
increases, the types of network packets which activate recovery from Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
sleep mode vary. However, there is a possibility that the existing 0: OFF, 1: ON
network protocol is actually used.
Default value 1
Select the type of network packet which activates recovery from sleep
IKEINTVL Setting of IKE retry interval
mode according to the environment where the device is used.
Lv.1 Details To set retry interval in the case of no response from the
Use case When selecting protocol for sleep recovery
communication target at the time of IKE packet transmission.
1: WSD and SNMP, 2: WSD and CPCA, 3: CPCA and SNMP
Default value 1
Default value 5
802XTOUT Set of IEEE802.1X authentication timeout
IPSDEBLV Setting of IPSec debug level
Lv.1 Details To set timeout value for IEEE802.1X authentication.
If the device executes 802.1X authentication, change the wait time for Lv.2 Details For R&D use
response from the authentication server. Use case For R&D use
Use case When response from the authentication server is slow/fast SP-LINK Mode setting at 1W sleep
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Lv.1 Details Switch to execute 10base-T standby as default to realize the standby
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. power 1W in sleep mode.
Display/adj/set range 10 to 120 Use case When shifting to sleep mode after negotiation (same as conventional
Default value 30 machines)
IKERETRY Setting of IKE retry times Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Lv.1 Details To set the number of retries in the case of no response from the
communication target at the time of IKE packet transmission. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
0: Shift to sleep mode with 10base-T
1: Shift to sleep mode after negotiation
Default value 0
Default value 1
8-83
8
8-84
AFS-JOB Setting of FAX server job reception port ILOGKEEP Setting of IP address block log hold time
Lv.1 Details To set the reception port of the fax server to which a fax client sends Lv.1 Details To set the retention time from the log time of IP block.
jobs. When access is made again from a same IP address which was
Use case When changing the job reception port of the fax server blocked before, if it is within the retention time of the previous log, its
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. log is not recorded.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. If access is frequently made from a same IP address, the log record
Display/adj/set range 0 to 65535 of the UI might be filled with its logs. If the user considers that a
single log for a same IP address is enough, set the longer retention
Default value 20317
time.
Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> AFC-EVNT
AFC-EVNT Setting of FAX client event reception port
Lv.1 Details To set the event notification reception port of a fax client. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Use case When changing the event notification reception port of a fax client Display/adj/set range 0 to 48
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0: 1 minute (special mode)
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 1 to 48: 1 hour to 48 hours
Default value 29400 IPTBROAD Set to allow broadcast/multicast TX
Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> AFS-JOB Lv.1 Details To set whether to permit transmission of broadcast packets and
ILOGMODE Setting of IP address block mode multicast packets.
Lv.1 Details To set all protocols or TCP/UDP/ICMP unicast as the target of IP Transmission of broadcast packets and multicast packets is permitted
block. without specifying an exception address. It is permitted within the
When 0 is set, the machine responds to ARP, ICMP multicast and device even if it is rejected in the default setting of the IPv4/v6
broadcast which have no direct relation, and consequently the transmission filter.
number of logs is increased. Set “1: Disabled” when the user does not want to send them.
When 1 is set, the machine filters TCP, UDP and ICMP unicast only. Use case Upon user’s request
Use case Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range 0 to 5
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled, 2 to 5: Not used
0: All protocols support mode PFWFTPRT Setting of RST reply at IP filter FTP SEND
1: TCP/UDP/ICMP unicast support mode Lv.1 Details When FTP SEND is executed using an IP filter by which packets from
2, 3: Not used a specific remote PC are rejected, SYN is returned to the port 113 if
Default value 0 the PC supports authentication of the FTP port 113. However, since
the IP filter blocks the packets, the block logs are increased and the
performance is lowered.
When 1 is set, RST is returned to the port 113 without blocking
packets.
Use case When executing FTP SEND against the OS which supports
authentication of the FTP port 113 while the IP filter is enabled
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value 0
8-84
8
8-85
IPMTU Setting of MTU size of network packet VLAN-SW Switch for VLAN participation packets
Lv.1 Details To change MTU size of network packet. Lv.2 Details Switch for sending packets for participating dynamic VLAN at startup.
Use this item when performing communications between locations For the packets to be sent, a static IP address is set as the sender.
(such as SEND) connected with Ethernet in a field environment Use case When allowing a device whose IP address has not been decided yet
where MTU black hole problem occurs. to participate in VLAN by sending packets for participating dynamic
Use case When MTU black hole problem occur VLAN at startup
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution With IPv6, use of MTU which size is less than 1280 bytes is not 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
recommended by RFC. Therefore, when setting IPv6 to ON and MTU Display/adj/set range 0: Packets for participating in dynamic VLAN are not sent.
to 7 or smaller, communication using IPv6 may not be available. 1: Packets for participating in dynamic VLAN are sent.
1: 600 bytes, 2: 700 bytes, ..., 9: 1400 bytes, 10: 1500 bytes Related service mode COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK > VLAN-PKT
Unit 100byte Supplement/memo VLAN: Virtual LAN
Default value 10 A method for realizing grouping of terminals depending on the HUB,
Supplement/memo MTU: A unit of transmission showing the maximum value of data switch connection port, MAC address, protocol, etc.
which can be sent per 1 transfer (1 frame) in a network VLAN-PKT Setting of number of VLAN packets to send
MTU black hole: A problem which occurs when ICMP packet is Lv.2 Details To set the number of packets for participating in VLAN to be sent
being filtered by firewall, etc. (Since the message does not reach the from the Main Controller when the LAN cable is connected or when
sender, the sender is not aware of the packet being lost, which then the device recovers from deep sleep.
results in time-out.) Use case When setting the number of packets to be sent with the setting made
DDNSINTV Setting of DDNS periodical update interval to send packets for participating in VLAN
Lv.1 Details The registered contents are deleted in an environment where the Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
DNS server settings are deleted at intervals. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
To set the interval of DDNS periodical update for not deleting the Caution This setting is ignored when the setting is made not to send packets
registered contents. for participating in VLAN (VLAN-SW=0).
Use case When the DNS server settings are deleted at intervals Display/adj/set range 0 to 10
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. VLAN participation packets of three times as much as the setting
Display/adj/set range 0 to 48 value are sent.
0: No periodical update, 1: 1-hour interval, 2: 2-hour interval, ..., 47: example) Setting value 1
47-hour interval, 48: 48-hour interval 3 (=1*3) sets of VLAN participation packet are sent.
Supplement/memo DDNS (Dynamic Domain Name System): A system to dynamically Related service mode COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK > VLAN-SW
register and manage the IP addresses which are dynamically Supplement/memo VLAN: Virtual LAN
allocated and their host names A method for realizing grouping of terminals depending on the HUB,
switch connection port, MAC address, protocol, etc.
8-85
8
8 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CUSTOM
8-86
COPIER>OPTION>NETWORK ■■CUSTOM
FTPMODE Switch of FTP print operation mode
COPIER>OPTION>CUSTOM
Lv.1 Details Switch to change the operation mode of FTP print from the default.
To switch the operation mode between ASCII mode and BIN mode. TEMP-TBL Setting of fixing control temperature: Plain paper 1, 1/1 speed
Depending on client application, FTP print becomes available without Lv.1 Details To set the offset of fixing control temperature for plain paper 1 at 1/1
executing BIN command. speed.
Use case When preferring to switch the operation mode of FTP print from the As the value is incremented by 1, the control temperature is increased
default. (installation) by 3 deg C.
Increase the value when a fixing failure occurs.
Decrease the value when hot offset occurs.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 Use case When the poor fixing, paper slip or paper curl occurs in the plain
paper 1 at the 1/1 SPD.
0: ASCII mode, 1: BIN mode
T-8-45
Display/adj/set range 0 to 2: +15 degC
12 to 14: -15 degC
Default value 7
ABK-TOOL Allow access from address book maintenance tool
Lv.1 Details To set whether to accept import from the address book maintenance
tool.
Use case When executing import from the address book maintenance tool
Default value 0
FLK-RD Flicker reduction mode
Lv.2 Details To change the fixing temperature control to cancel fluorescent flicking
during printing
Use case When the fluorescent flicking occurs during printing
Display/adj/set range 0: OFF
1: ON
Default value 0
TMP-TBL Shortening First Copy Output Time
Lv.1 Details To lower the fixing temperature for the paper feed start during the first
copying (-40degC)
Use case To shorten the first copy output time, the fixing temperature for the
paper feed start is lowered ( -40degC).
0: OFF 1: ON
Default value 0
Supplement/memo FCOT: First Copy Output Time
T-8-46
8-86
8
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CUSTOM
8 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER
8-87
■■USER COPIER>OPTION>USER
COUNTER2 Setting of software counter 2
COPIER>OPTION>USER
Lv.1 Details To set counter type for software counter 2 on the Counter Check
COPY-LIM Setting of upper limit for copy screen.
Lv.1 Details To set the upper limit value for copy. Use case Upon user/dealer’s request
Display/adj/set range 1 to 9999 0: Not registered
Default value 999 Default value The default differs according to the location.
SLEEP Setting of auto sleep function COUNTER3 Setting of software counter 3
Lv.1 Details To set ON/OFF of auto sleep function. Lv.1 Details To set counter type for software counter 3 on the Counter Check
Use case Upon user’s request screen.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Use case Upon user/dealer’s request
0: OFF, 1: ON Display/adj/set range 0 to 999
Default value 1 0: Not registered
Related UI menu Setting/Registration> Preferences> Timer/Energy Settings> Auto Default value The default differs according to the location.
Sleep Time COUNTER4 Setting of software counter 4
Supplement/memo The time to shift to the sleep mode can be set in the Setting/ Lv.1 Details To set counter type for software counter 4 on the Counter Check
Registration (Preferences> Timer/Energy Settings> Auto Sleep screen.
Time). Use case Upon user/dealer’s request
SIZE-DET ON/OFF of original size detection function Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Lv.2 Details To set ON/OFF of original size detection function. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Use case Upon user’s request (glare of the scan lamp, etc) Display/adj/set range 0 to 999
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0: Not registered
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Default value The default differs according to the location.
Caution When the original size sensor is not equipped, this service mode is COUNTER5 Setting of software counter 5
not used. Lv.1 Details To set counter type for software counter 5 on the Counter Check
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 screen.
0: OFF, 1: ON Use case Upon user/dealer’s request
COUNTER1 Display of software counter 1 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Lv.1 Details To display counter type for software counter 1 on the Counter Check Display/adj/set range 0 to 999
screen. 0: Not registered
Use case Upon user/dealer’s request Default value The default differs according to the location.
Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only) COUNTER6 Setting of software counter 6
Caution Display only. No change is available. Lv.1 Details To set counter type for software counter 6 on the Counter Check
Display/adj/set range 0 to 999 screen.
0: Not registered Use case Upon user/dealer’s request
Default value The default differs according to the location. Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
0: Not registered
8-87
8
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER
8-88
COPIER>OPTION>USER COPIER>OPTION>USER
DATE-DSP Setting of data/time display format PH-D-SEL Setting of dither matrix at screen processing
Lv.2 Details To set date/time display format according to the country or region. Lv.2 Details To set the screen dither matrix to be used for halftoning processing
After the display format is set with this mode, the order of date is at the time of copy output, B&W Inbox scan output and B&W SEND
reflected to the followings: Preferences > Timer/Energy Settings > output.
Date/Time Settings, and report output. When moire occurs frequently, set to “0: 134 lines”.
Use case Upon user’s request When the setting is changed, the number of PG lines to be output at
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. PASCAL control is also changed.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Use case When moire frequently occurs at the time of copy output, B&W
Display/adj/set range 0 to 2 Inbox scan output and B&W SEND output. Especially when moire
0: YYMM/DD, 1: DD/MMYY, 2: MM/DD/YY frequently occurs in the halftone density area of photo and image
Default value The default differs according to the location. gradation areas
CONTROL Charge setting of PDL job Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Lv.1 Details To set charge count transmission of PDL job to the connecting
charging management device (coin manager or non-Canon-made Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
0: 134 lines, 1: 141 lines
control card).
Use case Upon user’s request Default value 1
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. COPY-JOB Setting of copy job reservation
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Lv.1 Details To set to enable/disable copy job reservation when the Card Reader/
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 Coin Manager is used.
0: No charge, 1: Charge Use case Upon user’s request
Related service mode COPIER > OPTION > ACC > COIN 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
MF-LG-ST Long original switch Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
0: Enabled, 1: Disabled
Lv.2 Details When 1 is set, setting of long length paper is enabled at PDL
printing.
Default value 0
Use case Upon user’s request. (use of long strip original or long strip paper) P-CRG-LF ON/OFF of Drum Unit life warning
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Lv.2 Details To set whether to display the preparation warning message on the
status line of LUI seven days from the indication of alarm code [40-
0073].
Caution Copying using long length paper is not available with this machine.
Use case When requesting customer to replace the Drum Unit
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
0: OFF, 1: ON
CNT-DISP Display/hide of serial No.
Default value 0
Lv.2 Details To set whether to display or hide the serial No. on the Counter
Check screen. Related service mode COPIER > COUNTER > LF > K-DRM-LF
COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >D-DLV-BK
Use case When setting to display/hide serial No. on the Counter Check screen
Supplement/memo COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >D-DLV-BK adjust the alarm output
timing.
0: Display, 1: Hide
Default value 0
8-88
8
8-89
CPRT-DSP ON/OFF of [Print Charge Log] button PRJOB-CP Setting of count TX at RX/report print
Lv.1 Details To set whether to display the [Print Charge Log] button to print the Lv.2 Details To set to enable/disable a page-basis count pulse transmission to
charge logs on the charge log screen in user mode. the charging management device at the time of reception print or
When “1: ON” is set, the button is displayed in Management report print.
Settings> Charge Management> Charge Log Screen. Use case Upon user’s request
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: No transmission, 1: Transmission
0: OFF, 1: ON Default value 0
Default value 0 DPT-ID-7 Password entry setting at department ID registration/authentication
PCL-COPY Setting of PCL COPIES command control method Lv.2 Details To set whether to require a password entry at the time of registration/
Lv.2 Details To set the binder control method of COPIES command with PCL. authentication of department ID.
Select whether to use the control method of Canon-made PCL or With the setting to require entry, entry of 7-digit password is required
use the same control method of non-Canon-made PCL. as well as entry of department ID.
Use case Upon user’s request Use case Upon user’s request
0: Control method of Canon-made PCL (following the value of 0: Department ID only, 1: 7-digit (password) entry
COPIES command that is specified for each page to control on a Default value 0
page basis) RUI-RJT Connection setting at invalid authentication from remote UI
1: Control method of non-Canon-made PCL (handling the value Lv.2 Details To set to disconnect HTTP port when the machine receives invalid
of COPIES command, which is specified for page 1 at the time of authentication from remote UI 3 times.
Collate mode, as bind figure while the value of COPIES command
for the next page or later is invalid. Same control applies as Canon-
made PCL at the time of Non Sorted mode) Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2 to 65535: For future use
Default value 0
0: Continued connection, 1: Disconnected
CNT-SW Setting of default display items on charge counter
Default value 0
Lv.1 Details To set default display items of the charge counter on the Counter
FREG-SW Display/hide of MEAP counter free register area
Check screen.
For details of each type, refer to the Service Manual. Lv.2 Details To set whether to display or hide the free register area of MEAP
counter for SEND
Use case At trouble analysis
0:Type1 , 1:Type2 Caution - Do not use this at the normal service.
- Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the
Default value 0
Quality Support Division.
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default value 0
Supplement/memo Individual count-up (counter advance) of MEAP application is
available in the free register area of MEAP counter.
8-89
8
8-90
IFAX-SZL Setting of IFAX send size limit PRNT-POS ON/OFF of all pauses at error job cancel
Lv.2 Details To set for restricting data size at the time of IFAX transmission that Lv.2 Details To set whether to pause the print operation of following jobs when
does not go through the server. a job is cancelled due to an error inside the machine (#037, etc.)
With the setting to restrict the data size, there will be #830 error in except service calls during PDL print.
the case of sending data that exceeds the upper limit value. Use case Upon user’s request
In the case that the data goes through the server, the size of Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
transmission data is always restricted. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0: OFF, 1: ON
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 AFN-PSWD Access limit setting to user mode
0: Limited, 1: Not limited (Restriction applies when data goes Lv.2 Details To set to restrict password entry when accessing to the user mode.
through the server.) With this setting is enabled, password entry of system administrator
Default value 1 is required after pressing Settings/Registration key.
IFAX-PGD Setting of page split TX at IFAX Simple mode TX Use case Upon user’s request
Lv.2 Details To set to enable/disable split-data transmission on a page basis in Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
the case that the transmission size in IFAX Simple mode exceeds 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
the upper limit value. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
Use case Upon user’s request 0: Password is not required, 1: Password is required
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. PTJAM-RC Auto reprint setting at PDL print jam
Caution In the case to enable split-data transmission, be sure to get approval Lv.2 Details To set to automatically restart printing after jam recovery that occurs
from the user by explaining the following: with PDL print.
- No guarantee for page order on the reception side
- There is a possibility of interruption of other received jobs between
pages Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
0: Not automatically reprinted, 1: Automatically reprinted
Default value 0
Default value 1
MEAPSAFE Setting of MEAP safe mode
PDL-NCSW Card management setting for PDL print job
Lv.2 Details To set safe mode for MEAP platform.
MPSF is displayed on the Control Panel in safe mode. Lv.2 Details To set to make PDL print job to be subject to card management by
the Card Reader.
In safe mode, MEAP application is stopped while just the system
With the setting to enable this mode, PDL print is available only
application, which starts with initial state, is activated. This mode
when the card ID of the card inserted to the Card Reader matches
enables obtaining log for cause analysis of MEAP failure.
the department ID.
Use case Perform system recovery processing when MEAP platform fails to
be activated due to resource confliction between MEAP applications, Use case Upon user’s request
service registration or use order Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
0: PDL print is available with no card inserted.
0: Normal mode, 1: Safe mode 1: PDL print is available only when the card ID matches the
department ID when the card is inserted.
Default value 0
Default value 0
8-90
8
8-91
PS-MODE Compatible mode setting at PS usage COUNTER8 Setting of software counter 8
Lv.2 Details To set the image processing at PS print. Lv.1 Details To set counter type for software counter 8 on the Counter Check
Although the same line width is set, it may differ depending on the screen.
drawing position. Use case Upon user’s request
By selecting 8, line widths which vary depending on the drawing Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
position can be uniformed. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Use case At replacement Display/adj/set range 0 to 999
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0: Not registered
Display/adj/set range 0 to 65535 JA-FUNC ON/OFF of job archive function
0 to 7: Spare Lv.2 Details To set ON/OFF of job archive function.
8: Strokeadjustment is enabled.
Use case When using the job archive function
9 to 65535: Spare
Adj/set/operate method Changing this mode is not available in service mode, but only
Default value 0
reference is available.
CNCT-RLZ Setting of connection serialize function
This mode can be set only with the MEAP program that supports job
Lv.2 Details Connection serialize is a function to assure job grouping function of archive.
imageWARE Output Manager Select Edition V1.0. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
The setting to enable this mode can avoid job rearrangement 0: OFF, 1: ON
because the machine does not receive job data from other
Default value 0
connection until it completes job data reception from the current
connection. JA-JOB Setting of job archive target job
Use case Upon user’s request Lv.2 Details To set the job type subject to job archive.
With the job archive function enabled, archive operation is executed
when executing the target job.
Use case When using the job archive function
0: OFF, 1: ON Adj/set/operate method Changing this mode is not available in service mode, but only
reference is available.
Default value 0
This mode can be set only with the MEAP program that supports job
Supplement/memo Connection: Connection to be established through network between
archive.
multiple hosts (PC, etc).
Display/adj/set range 0: N/A, 3: Limited to FAX/IFAX, 0xFFFFFFFF: All jobs
Job grouping function: A function of imageWARE Output Manager
Select Edition V1.0. This is to prevent job interruption from other PC Default value 0
by group job (sending multiple jobs in 1 session at job transmission). Related service mode COPIER > OPTION > USER > JA-FUNC
COUNTER7 Setting of software counter 7
Lv.1 Details To set counter type for software counter 7 on the Counter Check
screen.
0: Not registered
Default value 0
8-91
8
8-92
JA-RESTR Setting of job archive limit items DOM-ADD Additional entry of mail destination domain
Lv.2 Details To set restriction items for job archive specification. Lv.2 Details To set to automatically add the domain specified in user mode to the
With job archive function enabled, follow the setting to execute sending address (To) entered at the time of e-mail transmission.
operation to restrict specification. If specifying “xxx.com” as a domain in user mode in advance, just
Use case When using the job archive function entering “aaa” enables to display “aaa@xxx.com” when sending
Adj/set/operate method Changing this mode is not available in Service Mode, but reference e-mail.
is available (in Service mode). Use case Upon user’s request
This mode is available only with the MEAP program that supports Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
job archive. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
0: OFF, 1: ON 0: Not added, 1: Added
32 specification restrictions with Bit definition Default value 0
Bit0: Function to obtain image file (0: OFF, 1:ON) FILE-OF File send prohibition to entered address
Bit1: Function to compose form registration (0: OFF, 1: ON) Lv.1 Details To set to prohibit address entry at the time of file transmission.
Bit2: Function to edit document (0:OFF, 1: ON) File transmission is not available by entering the address because of
Default value 0 no display of “File” on the transmission screen.
Related service mode COPIER > OPTION > USER > JA-FUNC The addresses already registered in the Address Book can be used.
LDAP-SW Retrieval condition setting for LDAP server Use case Upon user’s request
Lv.1 Details To set the condition to search e-mail address, etc. from LDAP Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
server. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Use case When specifying condition to search e-mail address, etc. from LDAP Caution To restrict addresses for transmission, be sure to manually delete
server them because the addresses registered in the Address Book can be
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. used.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 5 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled
0: Includes the next, 1: Not include the next, 2: Equivalent to Default value 0
the next, 3: Not equivalent to the next, 4: Starts with the next, 5: MAIL-OF Mail send prohibition to entered address
Finishes with the next Lv.1 Details To set to prohibit address entry at the time of e-mail transmission.
Default value 4 E-mail transmission is not available by entering the address because
Related service mode COPIER > OPTION > USER > LDAP-DEF of no display of “E-Mail” on the transmission screen.
Supplement/memo LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol): Registering LDAP The addresses already registered in the Address Book can be used.
server enables to search e-mail address, etc. from LDAP server and Use case Upon user’s request
the result can be registered in the Address Book, etc. Registration is Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
available by the following: Set Destination > Register LDAP Server 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
FROM-OF Deletion of mail sender’s address Caution To restrict addresses for transmission, be sure to manually delete
Lv.1 Details To set whether to delete the sender’s address (From) at the time of them because the addresses registered in the Address Book can be
e-mail transmission. used.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled
0: Retained, 1: Deleted
Default value 0
8-92
8
8-93
IFAX-OF IFAX send prohibition to entered address TNRB-SW Setting of Toner Container counter display
Lv.1 Details To set to prohibit address entry at the time of I-Fax transmission. Lv.2 Details To set whether to display or hide the Toner Container counter on the
IFAX transmission is not available by entering the address because Counter Check screen.
of no display of “I-Fax” on the transmission screen. Use case When not showing the screen to users
The addresses already registered in the Address Book can be used. Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Use case Upon user’s request 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0: Hide, 1: Display (Toner Container counter only), 2: Not use
Caution To restrict addresses for transmission, be sure to manually delete Default value 0
them because the addresses registered in the Address Book can be CLR-TIM Setting of HDD Encryption Kit data delete timing
used. Lv.2 Details To set the timing to completely delete the data when HDD Encryption
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 Kit is used.
0: Enabled, 1: Disabled Selecting 0 may reduce the job processing speed because page
Default value 0 data that has been already processed is deleted while the other job
LDAP-DEF Initial condition setting of LDAP server search is in process, causing overload to CPU and HDD access.
Lv.1 Details To set initial condition for search target attribute that is specified at Selecting 1 improves the job processing speed because the process
the time of LDAP server Details search. is executed after a job is completed.
Use case Upon user’s request Use case Upon request to improve the job processing speed
0: Name, 1: E-mail, 2: FAX, 3: Organization, 4: Organization unit, 5: 0: During job process, 1: After the job is completed
No registration 1 (any setting), 6: No registration 2 (any setting) Default value 0
Default value 0 JA-FORMT Display of job archive record format
Related service mode COPIER > OPTION > USER > LDAP-SW Lv.2 Details To display the format of images for job archives recorded in jobs
FREE-DSP Display/hide of charge disable screen other than FAX reception and IFAX reception, etc.
Lv.2 Details To set whether to display or hide the Use Charge Management Whether the images processed by Packet JPEG are recorded in
screen for switching between charge and no charge. Packet JPEG, or converted into Raster JPEG and then recorded is
The hardware switch for switching charge/no charge in the Coin displayed.
Manager enables the mode in which all the services are available Only display is available in service mode. The setting is available
for free (store manager mode) by temporarily releasing the charging only in the MEAP applications which support job archiving.
system. Use case Upon user’s request
Even without the hardware switch, the mode can be switched Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
with the software switch when it is set to display the Use Charge 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Management screen in Settings/Registration. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
Use case When enabling all the services to be provided for free by temporarily 0: Packet JPEG, 1: Raster JPEG
releasing the charging system Default value 0
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default value 0
8-93
8
8-94
HDCR-DSW Display/hide of HDD complete delete ON/OFF USBM-DSP Display/hide of USB external memory device driver
Lv.1 Details To set whether to display or hide “Hard Disk Data Complete Lv.2 Details To set whether to display “Preferences > External Interface > USB
Deletion” in user mode. Settings > Use MEAP Driver for USB External Device”.
With this setting, HDD data complete deletion function is available By selecting “0: Hide”, the item is not displayed, and the user
with ON/OFF button on the screen. administrator cannot change the setting of the MEAP driver for the
Use case Upon user’s request USB external memory device.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Use case When prohibiting the user administrator to change the setting of
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. “Use MEAP driver for USB external device”, set 0 after the specified
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 setting is completed.
0: Hide, 1: Display Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
SCALL-SW Display/hide of repair request button Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Lv.1 Details To set whether to display or hide the repair-request button on the
Control Panel. Default value 1
Use case When the sales company supports service by the repair-request Related UI menu Settings/Registration >Preferences > External Interface > USB
button Settings > Use MEAP Driver for USB External Device
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. USBI-DSP Display/hide of USB input device driver set
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Lv.2 Details To set whether to display “Preferences > External Interface > USB
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 Settings > Use MEAP Driver for USB Input Device”.
0: Hide, 1: Display By selecting “0: Hide”, the item is not displayed, and the user
Default value 0 administrator cannot change the setting of the MEAP driver for the
USB input device.
SCALLCMP Setting of repair request complete notice
Use case When prohibiting the user administrator to change the setting of “Use
Lv.1 Details With this setting enabled, a notification of repair completion is sent
MEAP Driver for USB Input Device”, set 0 after the specified setting
to UGW server to clear the repair-request status that is retained
is completed.
internally.
Use case Service technician uses this mode after completing repair
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display
USBH-DSP Display/hide of USB host usage Related UI menu Setting/Registration > Preferences > External Interface > USB
Lv.2 Details To set whether to display “Preferences > External Interface > USB Settings > Use MEAP Driver for USB Input Device
Settings > Use USB Host”. CTCHKDSP Display/hide of counter print
By selecting “1: Display”, whether to use USB host on USB setting
Lv.1 Details To set whether to display or hide “Print List” on the Counter Check
screen can be selected. screen.
Use case When switching to display or hide “Use USB Host” on USB setting Model name, model number information, counter check date and
screen counter information can be output as a total count management
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. report.
0: Hide, 1: Display 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Related UI menu Setting/Registration > Preferences > EXternal Interface > USB 0: Hide, 1: Display
Settings > Use USB Host Default value 1
8-94
8
8-95
DFLT-ADJ Taget Auto Adjustment Gradation initial display setting JA-SBOX Setting of linking with Advanced Box: SAM
Lv.1 Details To set the initial display of the target full adjustment items on the Lv.2 Details To set the link with Advanced Box when iW SAM is enabled.
Auto Adjust Gradation screen in Settings/Registration. When 1 is set, linking with Advanced Box is enabled.
When 0 is set, the adjustment item is not displayed. Use case When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM
When 1 to 3 is set, the target adjustment item (Copy/Printer/Both) is Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
displayed to select. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Use case When switching the initial display at the time of Auto Adjust Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
Gradation 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. JA-DFAX Setting of direct fax transmission: SAM
Lv.2 Details To set the direct fax transmission when iW SAM is enabled.
0: Adjustment item is not displayed.
When 1 is set, the direct fax transmission is enabled.
1 to 3: Adjustment item (Copy/Printer/Both) is displayed.
Use case When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM
Default value 0
Related UI menu Settings/Registration> Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image
Quality> Adjust Gradation
USBR-DSP Display/hide of USB infrared device driver
Lv.2 Details To set whether to display “Preferences > External Interface > USB Default value 0
Settings > Use MEAP Driver for USB Infrared Device.”
JA-REP Setting of TX Report with image: SAM
Use case When prohibiting the user administrator to change the setting of
“Use MEAP Driver for USB Infrared Device,” set 0 after the specified
Lv.2 Details To set the TX Report with image when iW SAM is enabled.
When 1 is set, the TX Report with image is enabled.
setting is completed.
Default value 0
Default value 0
Related UI menu Setting/Registration > Preferences > External Interface > USB
Settings > Use MEAP Driver for USB Infrared Device JA-FREP Setting of Fax TX Report with image: SAM
POL-SCAN Display/hide of Rights Management Server setting Lv.2 Details To set the Fax TX Report with image when iW SAM is enabled.
When 1 is set, the Fax TX Report with image is enabled.
Lv.1 Details When “1: Display” is set, the Rights Management Server function
screen is displayed. Use case When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM
While the Rights Management Server function is a standard feature, Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
it is possible to hide if not necessary. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 JA-BOX Setting of Inbox document operation: SAM
0: Hide, 1: Display Lv.2 Details To set the operation for Inbox document at the time of iW SAM
Default value 0 When 1 is set, the Inbox document can be operated.
Default value 0
8-95
8
8-96
JA-FORM Setting of image composition: SAM JA-JOBK Setting of job merge allowance: SAM
Lv.2 Details To set the image composition when iW SAM is enabled. Lv.2 Details To set whether merging jobs is allowed when iW SAM is enabled.
When 1 is set, the image composition is enabled. When 1 is set, jobs can be merged.
Use case When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM Use case When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
JA-PREV Setting of preview page deletion: SAM JA-JDF Setting of JDF: SAM
Lv.2 Details To set whether a page is deleted from the scan preview screen at Lv.2 Details To set the use of JDF when iW SAM is enabled.
the time of iW SAM When 1 is set, JDF can be used.
When 1 is set, a page is deleted from the scan preview screen. Use case When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SA
Use case When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Default value 0
Default value 0 JA-RUI Setting of Inbox document access: SAM
JA-PULL Setting of network scan: SAM Lv.2 Details To set the Inbox document access from remote UI at the time of iW
Lv.2 Details To set the network scan when iW SAM is enabled. SAM
When 1 is set, the network scan is enabled. When 1 is set, accessing to the Inbox document from remote UI is
Use case When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM enabled.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Use case When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM
JA-PDLB Setting of printer driver multiple box save: SAM Default value 0
Lv.2 Details To set whether a document can be simultaneously saved to multiple JA-WEB Setting of Inbox document upload: SAM
Inboxes from the printer driver at the time of iW SAM. Lv.2 Details To set the Inbox document upload with the Web browser at the time
When 1 is set, a document can be saved to multiple Inboxes from of iW SAM.
the printer driver. When 1 is set uploading to the Inbox document with the Web
Use case When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM Browser is enabled.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Use case When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM
Default value 0
8-96
8
8-97
EXP-CRYP Confidential encryption ON/OFF: address book export SMD-EXPT Setting of export target data: remote UI
Lv.1 Details To set whether to encrypt the confidential part (password part) in the Lv.1 Details To set whether to export “service mode data” from remote UI.
Address Book when exporting the address book and device settings When 1 is set, “service mode data” is displayed as the target data
via RUI. of export on remote UI. When installing more than 1 machine at the
When 0 is set, the confidential part in the address book is exported same time, the same service mode data can be registered.
without encryption. Use case When installing more than 1 machine at the same time
Use case When there is a need to export password without encryption Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
because of operation and tool 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0: Hide, 1: Display
Caution Be sure not to allow the user to execute export without encryption Default value 0
because of security concern. Be sure to get approval from the user Supplement/memo If selecting “service mode data” as the target data of export on
in advance by telling that the security decreases without encryption. remote UI after setting SMD-EXPT to 1, service mode data can be
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 exported.
0: OFF, 1: ON SNDSTREN Setting of transmission settings deletion after scan and send
Default value 1 Lv.1 Details To set whether to delete the transmission settings except for the
EZY-SCRP ON/OFF of secure print simple authentication address after transmission from the “Scan and Send” screen.
Lv.1 Details To set whether to conduct secure print by simple authentication. Use case Upon user’s request
When 1 is set, secured print, encryption secured print and inbox Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
print are received, but the normal print jobs are cancelled. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
If the password “3758211” is entered at job sending, authentication Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
by entering the password on the Control Panel is not required. If the 0: Delete, 1: Remain
password is not entered at job sending, authentication by entering
Default value 0
the password on the Control Panel is necessary at job output.
In addition, the following selection is added as auto deletion time of FAXSTREN Setting of transmission settings deletion after fax transmit
secure job: 10 minutes, 20 minutes, 30 minutes Lv.1 Details To set whether to delete the transmission settings except for the
address after transmission from the “Fax” screen.
0: OFF, 1: ON Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
0: Delete, 1: Remain
Default value 0
Default value 0
DMN-MTCH ON/OFF of secure print domain judgment
T-8-47
Lv.1 Details To set whether to display only the job which matches the domain in
the “My Job Status” screen of the secure print.
When 1 is set, only the job which matches the user name and
domain name is displayed in the “My Job Status” screen, so the job
which does not match the domain is not displayed.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value 1
Supplement/memo The “My Job Status” screen is displayed when login service is used.
Only the job of user who logs in is displayed.
8-97
8
8 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CST
8-98
■■CST COPIER>OPTION>CST
CST1-P1 Setting of Cassette 1 paper size (A5R/STMTR)
COPIER>OPTION>CST
Lv.1 Details To set the paper size used in Cassette 1.
U1-NAME Display/hide of paper name in paper size group U1
Use case When setting the paper size for the Cassette 1
Lv.2 Details To set whether to display or hide paper name at paper size group
U1 detection.
Caution Be sure to match with the hardware setting size.
0: A5R, 1: STMTR
Default value JP:0, USA:1, EUR:0, AU:0, CN:0, KR:0, TW:0, ASIA:0
0: Hide, 1: Display
Related UI menu Preferences> Paper Settings> A5R/STMTR Paper Selection
Default value 1
CST2-P1 Setting of Cassette 2 paper size (A5R/STMTR)
Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> CST> CST1-U1, CST2-U1, CST3-U1,
CST4-U1 Lv.1 Details To set the paper size used in Cassette 2.
U2-NAME Display/hide of paper name in paper size group U2 Use case When setting the paper size for the Cassette 2
Lv.2 Details To set whether to display or hide paper name at paper size group Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
U2 detection. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Use case Upon user’s request Caution Be sure to match with the hardware setting size.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0: A5R, 1: STMTR
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 Default value JP:0, USA:1, EUR:0, AU:0, CN:0, KR:0, TW:0, ASIA:0
0: Hide, 1: Display Related UI menu Preferences> Paper Settings> A5R/STMTR Paper Selection
Default value 1 CST3-P1 Setting of Cassette 3 paper size (A5R/STMTR)
Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> CST> CST1-U2, CST2-U2, CST3-U2, Lv.1 Details To set the paper size used in Cassette 3.
CST4-U2 Use case When setting the paper size for the Cassette 3
U4-NAME Display/hide of paper name in paper size group U4 Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Lv.2 Details To set whether to display or hide paper name at paper size group 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
U4 detection. Caution Be sure to match with the hardware setting size.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0: A5R, 1: STMTR
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Default value JP:0, USA:1, EUR:0, AU:0, CN:0, KR:0, TW:0, ASIA:0
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 Related UI menu Preferences> Paper Settings> A5R/STMTR Paper Selection
0: Hide, 1: Display CST4-P1 Setting of Cassette 4 paper size (A5R/STMTR)
Default value 1 Lv.1 Details To set the paper size used in Cassette 4.
Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> CST> CST1-U4, CST2-U4, CST3-U4, Use case When setting the paper size for the Cassette 4
CST4-U4
ENV1 To display the envelope cassette size: ENV1 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Lv.2 Details To display the paper size for the envelope cassette. Caution Be sure to match with the hardware setting size.
Use case When using the Envelope Cassette Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
Adj/set/operate method Display only 0: A5R, 1: STMTR
Display/adj/set range 21: ISO-C5, 22: COM10, 23: MONARCH, 24: DL, 25 to 26:Not used Default value JP:0, USA:1, EUR:0, AU:0, CN:0, KR:0, TW:0, ASIA:0
Default value 21 Related UI menu Preferences> Paper Settings> A5R/STMTR Paper Selection
8-98
8
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CST
8-99
COPIER>OPTION>CST COPIER>OPTION>CST
CST1-U1 Setting of Cassette 1 area-specific standard size paper category 1 CST2-U1 Setting of Cassette 2 area-specific standard size paper category 1
Lv.1 Details To set the area-specific standard size paper category 1 used in Lv.1 Details To set the area-specific standard size paper category 1 used in
Cassette 1. Cassette 2.
Use case When setting area-specific standard size paper for the Cassette 1 Use case When setting area-specific standard size paper for the Cassette 2
Caution The kind of the paper is not displayed unless set COPIER >OPTION Caution The kind of the paper is not displayed unless set COPIER >OPTION
>CST >U1-NAME to “1”. >CST >U1-NAME to “1”.
0: Special paper is not used, 1 to 23: Not used, 24: FLSC, 25: 0: Special paper is not used, 1 to 23: Not used, 24: FLSC, 25:
A-FLS, 26: OFI, 27 to 33: Not use, 34: G-LGL, 35 to 36: Not use, 37: A-FLS, 26: OFI, 27 to 33: Not use, 34: G-LGL, 35 to 36: Not use, 37:
M-OFI, 42: FA4 M-OFI, 42: FA4
Related service mode COPIER >OPTION >CST >U1-NAME Related service mode COPIER >OPTION >CST >U1-NAME
0: Special paper is not used, 1 to 22: Not used, 23: K-LGLR, 24 to 0: Special paper is not used, 1 to 22: Not used, 23: K-LGLR, 24 to
31: Not used, 32: G-LTRR, 33 to 40: Not used, 41: 16K-R, 42 to 43: 31: Not used, 32: G-LTRR, 33 to 40: Not used, 41: 16K-R, 42 to 43:
Not use, 44: EXEC-R Not use, 44: EXEC-R
Supplement/memo When the setting value is 0, the setting value is automatically Supplement/memo When the setting value is 0, the setting value is automatically
changed according to the location. changed according to the location.
CN: 41, other than CN: 44 CN: 41, other than CN: 44
0: Special paper is not used, 1 to 27: Not used, 28: B-OFI 0: Special paper is not used, 1 to 27: Not used, 28: B-OFI
8-99
8
8-100
COPIER>OPTION>CST COPIER>OPTION>CST
0: Special paper is not used, 1 to 23: Not used, 24: FLSC, 25: 0: Special paper is not used, 1 to 23: Not used, 24: FLSC, 25:
A-FLS, 26: OFI, 27 to 33: Not use, 34: G-LGL, 35 to 36: Not use, 37: A-FLS, 26: OFI, 27 to 33: Not use, 34: G-LGL, 35 to 36: Not use, 37:
M-OFI, 42: FA4 M-OFI, 42: FA4
0: Special paper is not used, 1 to 22: Not used, 23: K-LGLR, 24 to 0: Special paper is not used, 1 to 22: Not used, 23: K-LGLR, 24 to
31: Not used, 32: G-LTRR, 33 to 40: Not used, 41: 16K-R, 42 to 43: 31: Not used, 32: G-LTRR, 33 to 40: Not used, 41: 16K-R, 42 to 43:
Not use, 44: EXEC-R Not use, 44: EXEC-R
Supplement/memo When the setting value is 0, the setting value is automatically Supplement/memo When the setting value is 0, the setting value is automatically
changed according to the location. changed according to the location.
CN: 41, other than CN: 44 CN: 41, other than CN: 44
0: Special paper is not used, 1 to 27: Not used, 28: B-OFI 0: Special paper is not used, 1 to 27: Not used, 28: B-OFI
T-8-48
8-100
8
8 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > ACC
8-101
■■ACC COPIER>OPTION>ACC
Related UI menu Function Settings > Send > E-Mail/I-Fax Settings > Communication
COPIER>OPTION>ACC
Settings
COIN Setting of charge management Preferences> Network > TCP/IP Settings > DNS Settings > FTP
Lv.1 Details To set charging management method. Print Settings
Use case At installation of Coin Manager Preferences> Network > TCP/IP Settings > DNS Settings > IPP Print
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Settings
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Supplement/memo Control card can be used with “0: No charge”.
Caution In case of setting “3”, if “0 to 2” is changed to “3”, the following items DA: Digital Accessory
are automatically set. After making a change, even though “3” is set CARD-SW Screen setting when Coin Manager connected
to “0 to 2” again, they will not be restored. Lv.1 Details To set coin or card that the user is urged to insert on the Control
- COPIER> OPTION> USER> CONTROL, AFN-PSWD = 1 Panel when the Coin Manager is connected.
- COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> DA-CNCT = 1 Use case Upon user’s request
- COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> UI-BOX, UI-SEND, UI-FAX = 0 Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
- IE Settings> IE Function Priority = ON 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
- Preferences> Network> TCP/IP Settings> IPv4 Settings> IP Display/adj/set range 0 to 3
Address Range Settings> RX/Print Range: Permit IPv4 Address = 0: Coin, 1: Card, 2: Coin and card, 3: Card (for customization)
ON
Default value 0
- Preferences> Network> TCP/IP Settings> IPv6 Settings> IP
Address Range Settings> RX/Print Range: Permit IPv6 Address = CC-SPSW Support setting of control card I/F
ON Lv.2 Details To set support level for control card (CCIV/CCV) interface.
- Preferences> Network> TCP/IP Settings> FTP Print Settings> Use To keep processing performance of printer engine, select “1: Priority
FTP Printing = OFF on speed”.
- Preferences> Network> TCP/IP Settings> IPP Print Settings = ON To correctly stop the output by the upper limit number of sheets,
- Preferences> Network> SMB Server Settings> SMB Printer select “2: Priority on upper limit number of sheets”.
Settings> Use SMB =ON Use case Upon user’s request (when connecting to the external counter
- Function Settings> Send> E-Mail/I-Fax Settings> Communication management system using the control card interface)
Settings> SMTP RX, POP = OFF Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
In case of setting “4”, if “0 to 2” is changed to “4”, the following items Caution With priority on speed, output cannot be correctly stopped by the
are automatically set. After making a change, even though “4” is set upper limit number of sheets.
to “0 to 2” again, they will not be restored. With priority on the upper limit number of sheets, processing
- COPIER> OPTION> USER> AFN-PSWD = 1 performance of the printer engine is decreased depending on pickup
- COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> UI-BOX, UI-SEND, UI-FAX, UI- location.
RSCAN, UI-EPRNT, UI-HOLD = 0 Display/adj/set range 0 to 2
- Management Settings>Device Management> Display Log=OFF 0: No support, 1: Priority on speed, 2: Priority on upper limit number
Display/adj/set range 0 to 7 of sheets
0: No charge Default value 0
1: Charge with Coin Manager UNIT-PRC Setting of Coin Manager currency unit
2 Charge with remote counter Lv.2 Details To set currency unit to be handled with Coin Manager
3: Charge with DA (only in Japan)
Use case At installation of Coin Manager
4: Charge with this machine itself
5: New SC mode Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
6: External charge mode 6
7: External charge mode 7 Display/adj/set range 0 to 6
0: Japanese yen, 1: Euro, 2: Pound, 3: Swiss Franc. 4: Dollar, 5: No
Default value 0
currency unit (no fractional unit), 6: No currency unit (with fractional
Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> USER> CONTROL
unit)
COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> UI-BOX, UI-SEND, UI-FAX
Default value 0
COPIER> OPTION> ACC> PDL-THR
8-101
8
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > ACC
8 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > ACC
8-102
COPIER>OPTION>ACC COPIER>OPTION>ACC
MIN-PRC Setting of Coin Manager minimum price PDL-THR Normal PDL print setting in external charge mode
Lv.1 Details To set the minimum amount to be handled with Coin Manager. Lv.2 Details To set the normal PDL print process when the external charge mode
Enter 10 when specifying 10 Japanese yen as the minimum amount 6/7 is set in COIN.
to be handled with the Coin Manager that supports Japanese yen. When “0” is set, a job is canceled. When “1” is set, a job is executed.
In the case to specify 1 to 4 (Euro/Pound/Swiss Franc/Dollar) by Use case When executing normal PDL print in external charge mode
going through the following: COPIER> OPTION> ACC > UNIT-PRC, Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
entry is in fractional unit. Entry of 50 indicates 50 cents ($ 0.50). 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Use case At installation of Coin Manager Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0: Cancel, 1: Execute
Caution This mode is enabled when selecting 4 for the following: COPIER > Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> ACC> COIN
OPTION > ACC > COIN. CR-TYPE Setting of Card Reader
Lv.1 Details To set the model of the Card Reader.
Default value 10 Set 1 in the case of connecting the Card Reader-C1. It operates
Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> ACC> COIN, UNIT-PRC even 0 is set, but recognition rate decreases.
Supplement/memo As for the charging amount, it causes an error if specifying the Use case When connecting the Card Reader-C1
value that is smaller than the minimum currency unit with Settings/ Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Registration mode. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
MAX-PRC Setting of Coin Manager maximum price Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
Lv.1 Details To set the maximum amount to be handled with Coin Manager. 0: Card Reader-F1, 1: Card Reader-C1
Enter 8800 when specifying 8800 Japanese yen as the maximum Default value 0
amount to be handled with the Coin Manager that supports T-8-49
Japanese yen.
In the case to specify 1 to 4 (Euro/Pound/Swiss Franc/Dollar) by
going through the following: COPIER> OPTION> ACC> UNIT-PRC,
entry is in fractional unit. Entry of 50 indicates 50 cents ($ 0.50).
Use case At installation of Coin Manager
Caution This mode is enabled when selecting 4 for the following: COPIER>
OPTION> ACC> COIN.
Default value 8800
Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> ACC> COIN, UNIT-PRC
Supplement/memo As for charging amount, it causes an error if specifying the value that
is larger than the maximum currency unit with Settings/Registration
mode.
SRL-SPSW Not use
Default value 0
8-102
8
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > ACC
8 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR
8-103
■■INT-FACE ■■LCNS-TR
COPIE>OPTION>INT-FACE COPIER>OPTION>LCNS-TR
NWCT-TM Timeout setting of network connection ST-SEND Installation state display of SEND function
Lv.2 Details To set the time to keep network connection between this machine Lv.2 Details To display installation state of SEND function when transfer is
and the PC application (keep-alive setting). disabled.
As the value is incremented by 1, the time is increased by 1 minute. Use case When checking whether SEND function is installed
Use case When using PC application Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-SEND.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is
Display/adj/set range 1 to 5 displayed under TR-SEND.
Default value 5 Display/adj/set range When operation finished normally: OK!
Supplement/memo Expected PC application: Network print application, E-mail function, Default value 1
cascade copy, MEAP network application, etc. TR-SEND Transfer license key display of SEND function
T-8-50 Lv.2 Details To display transfer license key to use SEND function when transfer
is disabled.
Use case - When replacing HDD
- When replacing the device
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-SEND.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-SEND.
Display/adj/set range License key (24 characters)
ST-ENPDF Installation state display of Encryption PDF
Lv.2 Details To display installation state of Encryption PDF when transfer is
disabled.
Use case When checking whether Encryption PDF is installed
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-ENPDF.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is
displayed under TR-ENPDF.
Display/adj/set range When operation finished normally: OK!
Default value 0
TR-ENPDF Transfer license key display of Encryption PDF
Lv.2 Details To display transfer license key to use Encryption PDF when transfer
is disabled.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-ENPDF.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-ENPDF.
Caution This mode is enabled when SEND function is installed.
8-103
8
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR
8-104
COPIER>OPTION>LCNS-TR COPIER>OPTION>LCNS-TR
ST-SPDF Installation state display of Searchable PDF ST-PDFDR Installation state display of Direct Print PDF
Lv.2 Details To display installation state of Searchable PDF when transfer is Lv.2 Details To display installation state of Direct Print PDF when transfer is
disabled. disabled.
Use case When checking whether Searchable PDF is installed Use case When checking whether Direct Print PDF is installed
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-SPDF. Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-PDFDR.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is
displayed under TR-SPDF. displayed under TR-PDFDR.
Display/adj/set range When operation finished normally: OK! Display/adj/set range When operation finished normally: OK!
Default value USA:1 EUR:1 AU:0 CN:0 KR:0 TW:0 ASIA:0 Default value 0
TR-SPDF Transfer license key display of Searchable PDF TR-PDFDR Transfer license key display of Direct Print PDF
Lv.2 Details To display transfer license key to use Searchable PDF when transfer Lv.2 Details To display transfer license key to use Direct Print PDF when transfer
is disabled. is disabled.
Use case - When replacing HDD Use case - When replacing HDD
- When replacing the device - When replacing the device
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-SPDF. Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-PDFDR.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-SPDF. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PDFDR.
Caution This mode is enabled when SEND function is installed. Display/adj/set range License key (24 characters)
Display/adj/set range License key (24 characters) ST-SCR Installation state display of Encrypted Secure Print
ST-EXPDF Installation state of Encryption PDF and Searchable PDF Lv.2 Details To display installation state of Encrypted Secure Print when transfer
Lv.2 Details To display installation state of Encryption PDF and Searchable PDF is disabled.
when transfer is disabled. Use case When checking whether Encrypted Secure Print is installed
Use case When checking whether Encryption PDF + Searchable PDF is Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-SCR.
installed 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-EXPDF. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. displayed under TR-SCR.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is Display/adj/set range When operation finished normally: OK!
displayed under TR-EXPDF. Default value 0
Display/adj/set range When operation finished normally: OK! TR-SCR Transfer license key display of Encrypted Secure Print
Default value 0 Lv.2 Details To display transfer license key to use Encrypted Secure Print when
TR-EXPDF Transfer license key of Encryption PDF and Searchable PDF transfer is disabled.
Lv.2 Details To display transfer license key to use Encryption PDF and Use case - When replacing HDD
Searchable PDF when transfer is disabled. - When replacing the device
Use case - When replacing HDD Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-SCR.
- When replacing the device 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-EXPDF. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-SCR.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. Caution This mode is enabled when there is “3DES+USH-H” Board.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-EXPDF. Display/adj/set range License key (24 characters)
Caution This mode is enabled when SEND function is installed for Japan.
8-104
8
8-105
ST-BRDIM Installation state display: PCL Barcode Printing ST-WEB Installation state display of Web Access Software
Lv.2 Details To display installation state of Barcode Printing for PCL when Lv.2 Details To display installation state of Web Access Software when transfer
transfer is disabled. is disabled.
Use case When checking whether Barcode Printing for PCL is installed Use case When checking whether Web Access Software is installed
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-BRDIM. Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-WEB.
displayed under TR-BRDIM. displayed under TR-WEB.
TR-BRDIM Transfer license key display: PCL Barcode Printing TR-WEB Transfer license key display of Web Access Software
Lv.2 Details To display transfer license key to use Barcode Printing for PCL when Lv.2 Details To display transfer license key to use Web Access Software when
transfer is disabled. transfer is disabled.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-BRDIM. Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-WEB.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-BRDIM. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-WEB.
Display/adj/set range License key (24 characters) Display/adj/set range License key (24 characters)
ST-VNC Installation state display of Remote Operators Software ST-HRPDF Installation state display of High Compression PDF
Lv.2 Details To display installation state of Remote Operators Software when Lv.2 Details To display installation state of High Compression PDF when transfer
Use case When checking whether Remote Operators Software is installed Use case When checking whether High Compression PDF is installed
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-VNC. Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-HRPDF.
displayed under TR-VNC. displayed under TR-HRPDF.
TR-VNC Transfer license display of Remote Operators Software TR-HRPDF Transfer license key display of High Compression PDF
Lv.2 Details To display transfer license key to use Remote Operators Software Lv.2 Details To display transfer license key to use High Compression PDF when
when transfer is disabled. transfer is disabled.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-VNC. Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-HRPDF.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-VNC. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-HRPDF.
8-105
8
8-106
ST-TRSND Installation state display of Trial SEND function ST-TSPDF Installation state display of Time Stamp PDF: JP
Lv.2 Details To display installation state of Trial SEND function when transfer is Lv.2 Details To display installation state of Time Stamp PDF (JP only) when
disabled. transfer is disabled.
Use case When checking whether Trial SEND function is installed Use case When checking whether Time Stamp PDF (JP only) is installed
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-TRSND. Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-TSPDF.
displayed under TR-TRSND. displayed under TR-TSPDF.
TR-TRSND Transfer license key display of Trial SEND function TR-TSPDF Transfer license key display of Time Stamp PDF: JP
Lv.2 Details To display transfer license key to use Trial SEND function when Lv.2 Details To display transfer license key to use Time Stamp PDF (JP only)
transfer is disabled. when transfer is disabled.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-TRSND. Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-TSPDF.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-TRSND. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-TSPDF.
Display/adj/set range License key (24 characters) Caution This mode is enabled when SEND function is installed.
ST-WTMRK Installation state display of Secure Watermark Display/adj/set range License key (24 characters)
Lv.2 Details To display installation state of Secure Watermark when transfer is ST-USPDF Installation state display of Digital User Signature PDF
disabled. Lv.2 Details To display installation state of Digital User Signature PDF when
Use case When checking whether Secure Watermark is installed transfer is disabled.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-WTMRK. Use case When checking whether Digital User Signature PDF is installed
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-USPDF.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
displayed under TR-WTMRK. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is
Display/adj/set range When operation finished normally: OK! displayed under TR-USPDF.
Default value 0 Display/adj/set range When operation finished normally: OK!
TR-WTMRK Transfer license key display of Secure Watermark Default value 0
Lv.2 Details To display transfer license key to use Secure Watermark when TR-USPDF Transfer license key display of Digital User Signature PDF
transfer is disabled. Lv.2 Details To display transfer license key to use Digital User Signature PDF
Use case - When replacing HDD when transfer is disabled.
- When replacing the device Use case - When replacing HDD
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-WTMRK. - When replacing the device
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-USPDF.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-WTMRK. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
Display/adj/set range License key (24 characters) The transfer license key is displayed under TR-USPDF.
Caution This mode is enabled when SEND function is installed.
8-106
8
8-107
ST-DVPDF Installation state display of Device Signature PDF ST-AMS Installation state display of AMS
Lv.2 Details To display installation state of Device Signature PDF when transfer Lv.2 Details To display installation state of Access Management System when
is disabled. transfer is disabled.
Use case When checking whether Device Signature PDF is installed Use case When checking whether Access Management System is installed
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-DVPDF. Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-AMS.
displayed under TR-DVPDF. displayed under TR-AMS.
Default value 0 Default value USA:1 EUR:1 AU:0 CN:0 KR:0 TW:0 ASIA:0
TR-DVPDF Transfer license key display of Device Signature PDF TR-AMS Transfer license key display of AMS
Lv.2 Details To display transfer license key to use Device Signature PDF when Lv.2 Details To display transfer license key to use Access Management System
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-DVPDF. Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-AMS.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-DVPDF. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-AMS.
Caution This mode is enabled when SEND function is installed. Display/adj/set range License key (24 characters)
Display/adj/set range License key (24 characters) ST-ERDS Installation state display: E-RDS 3rd Party Expansion
ST-SCPDF Installation state display of Trace & Smooth PDF Lv.2 Details To display installation state of E-RDS 3rd Party Expansion when
Lv.2 Details To display installation state of Trace & Smooth PDF when transfer is transfer is disabled.
disabled. Use case When checking whether E-RDS 3rd Party Expansion is installed
Use case When checking whether Trace & Smooth PDF is installed Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-ERDS.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-SCPDF. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-ERDS.
displayed under TR-SCPDF. Display/adj/set range When operation finished normally: OK!
Display/adj/set range When operation finished normally: OK! Default value 0
Default value 0 Supplement/memo E-RDS 3rd Party Expansion: A function to send charge counter to
TR-SCPDF Transfer license key display of Trace & Smooth PDF the third party’s charge server.
Lv.2 Details To display transfer license key to use Trace & Smooth PDF when TR-ERDS Transfer license key display: E-RDS 3rd Party Expansion
transfer is disabled. Lv.2 Details To display transfer license key to use E-RDS 3rd Party Expansion
Use case - When replacing HDD when transfer is disabled.
- When replacing the device Use case - When replacing HDD
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-SCPDF. - When replacing the device
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-ERDS.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-SCPDF. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
Caution This mode is enabled when SEND function is installed. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-ERDS.
Supplement/memo E-RDS 3rd Party Expansion: A function to send charge counter to
the third party’s charge server.
8-107
8
8-108
ST-PS Installation state display of PS function ST-PSLI5 Installation state display: PS/LIPS4/LIPS LX: JP
Lv.2 Details To display installation state of PS function when transfer is disabled. Lv.2 Details To display installation state of PS/LIPS4/LIPS LX function (JP only)
Use case When checking whether PS function is installed when transfer is disabled.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-PS. Use case When checking whether PS/LIPS4/LIPS LX function (JP only) is
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. installed
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-PSLI5.
displayed under TR-PS. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
Display/adj/set range When operation finished normally: OK! When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is
Default value USA:1 EUR:1 AU:1 CN:0 KR:0 TW:1 ASIA:1 displayed under TR-PSLI5.
TR-PS Transfer license key display of PS function Display/adj/set range When operation finished normally: OK!
Lv.2 Details To display transfer license key to use PS function when transfer is Default value 0
disabled. TR-PSLI5 Transfer license key display: PS/LIPS4/LIPS LX: JP
Use case - When replacing HDD Lv.2 Details To display transfer license key to use PS/LIPS4/LIPS LX function (JP
- When replacing the device only) when transfer is disabled.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-PS. Use case - When replacing HDD
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. - When replacing the device
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PS. Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-PSLI5.
Display/adj/set range License key (24 characters) 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
ST-PCL Installation state display of PCL function The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PSLI5.
Lv.2 Details To display installation state of PCL function when transfer is Display/adj/set range License key (24 characters)
disabled. ST-LIPS5 Installation state display: LIPS LX/LIPS4: JP
Use case When checking whether PCL function is installed Lv.2 Details To display installation state of LIPS LX/LIPS4 function (JP only)
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-PCL. when transfer is disabled.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. Use case When checking whether LIPS LX/LIPS4 function (JP only) is
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is installed
displayed under TR-PCL. Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-LIPS5.
Display/adj/set range When operation finished normally: OK! 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
Default value USA:1 EUR:1 AU:1 CN:0 KR:0 TW:1 ASIA:1
displayed under TR-LIPS5.
TR-PCL Transfer license key display of PCL function
Lv.2 Details To display transfer license key to use PCL function when transfer is
disabled. Default value 0
Use case - When replacing HDD TR-LIPS5 Transfer license key display: LIPS LX/LIPS4: JP
- When replacing the device Lv.2 Details To display transfer license key to use LIPS LX/LIPS4 function (JP
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-PCL. only) when transfer is disabled.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. Use case - When replacing HDD
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PCL. - When replacing the device
Display/adj/set range License key (24 characters) Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-LIPS5.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-LIPS5.
8-108
8
8-109
ST-LIPS4 Installation state display of LIPS4: JP ST-PCLUF Installation state display of PCL/UFR II
Lv.2 Details To display installation state of LIPS4 function (JP only) when transfer Lv.2 Details To display installation state of PCL/UFR II function when transfer is
is disabled. disabled.
Use case When checking whether LIPS4 function (JP only) is installed Use case When checking whether PCL/UFR II function is installed
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-LIPS4. Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-PCLUF.
displayed under TR-LIPS4. displayed under TR-PCLUF.
TR-LIPS4 Transfer license key display of LIPS4: JP TR-PCLUF Transfer license key display of PCL/UFR II
Lv.2 Details To display transfer license key to use LIPS4 function (JP only) when Lv.2 Details To display transfer license key to use PCL/UFR II function when
transfer is disabled. transfer is disabled.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-LIPS4. Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-PCLUF.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-LIPS4. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PCLUF.
ST-PSPCL Installation state display of PS/PCL ST-PSLIP Installation state display of PS/LIPS4: JP
Lv.2 Details To display installation state of PS/PCL function when transfer is Lv.2 Details To display installation state of PS/LIPS4 function (JP only) when
disabled. transfer is disabled.
Use case When checking whether PS/PCL function is installed Use case When checking whether PS/LIPS4 function (JP only) is installed
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-PSPCL. Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-PSLIP.
displayed under TR-PSPCL. displayed under TR-PSLIP.
TR-PSPCL Transfer license key display of PS/PCL TR-PSLIP Transfer license key display of PS/LIPS4
Lv.2 Details To display transfer license key to use PS/PCL function when transfer Lv.2 Details To display transfer license key to use PS/LIPS4 function (JP only)
is disabled. when transfer is disabled.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-PSPCL. Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-PSLIP.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PSPCL. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PSLIP.
8-109
8
8-110
ST-PSPCU Installation state display of PS/PCL/UFR II ST-HDCR2 Installation state display: HDD Initialize All Data/Settings
Lv.2 Details To display installation state of PS/PCL/UFR II function when transfer Lv.2 Details To display installation state of HDD Initialize All Data/Settings when
is disabled. transfer is disabled.
Use case When checking whether PS/PCL/UFR II function is installed Use case When checking whether HDD Initialize All Data/Settings is installed
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-PSPCU. Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-HDCR2.
displayed under TR-PSPCU. displayed under TR-HDCR2.
TR-PSPCU Transfer license key display of PS/PCL/UFR II TR-HDCR2 Transfer license key display: HDD Initialize All Data/Settings
Lv.2 Details To display transfer license key to use PS/PCL/UFR II function when Lv.2 Details To display transfer license key to use HDD Initialize All Data/Settings
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-PSPCU. Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-HDCR2.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PSPCU. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-HDCR2.
ST-LXUFR Installation state display of UFR II ST-AFAX Installation state display of Remote Fax
Lv.2 Details To display installation state of UFR II function when transfer is Lv.2 Details To display installation state of Remote Fax when transfer is disabled.
disabled. Use case When checking whether Remote Fax is installed
Use case When checking whether UFR II function is installed Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-AFAX.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-LXUFR. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-AFAX.
displayed under TR-LXUFR. Display/adj/set range When operation finished normally: OK!
Display/adj/set range When operation finished normally: OK! Default value 0
Default value 1 TR-AFAX Transfer license key display of Remote Fax
TR-LXUFR Transfer license key display of UFR II Lv.2 Details To display transfer license key to use Remote Fax when transfer is
Lv.2 Details To display transfer license key to use UFR II function when transfer disabled.
is disabled. Use case - When replacing HDD
Use case - When replacing HDD - When replacing the device
- When replacing the device Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-AFAX.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-LXUFR. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-AFAX.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-LXUFR. Display/adj/set range License key (24 characters)
8-110
8
8-111
ST-REPDF Installation state display: Reader Extensions PDF ST-XPS Installation state display of Direct Print XPS
Lv.2 Details To display installation state of Reader Extensions PDF when transfer Lv.2 Details To display installation state of Direct Print XPS when transfer is
is disabled. disabled.
Use case When checking whether Reader Extensions PDF is installed Use case When checking whether Direct Print XPS is installed
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-REPDF. Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-XPS.
displayed under TR-REPDF. displayed under TR-XPS.
TR-REPDF Transfer license key display: Reader Extensions PDF TR-XPS Transfer license key display of Direct Print XPS
Lv.2 Details To display transfer license key to use Reader Extensions PDF when Lv.2 Details To display transfer license key to use Direct Print XPS when transfer
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-REPDF. Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-XPS.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-REPDF. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-XPS.
ST-OOXML Installation state display of Office Open XML ST-2600 Installation state display: IEEE2600.1 security function
Lv.2 Details To display installation state of Office Open XML when transfer is Lv.2 Details To display installation state of the IEEE2600.1 security function
disabled. when transfer is disabled.
Use case When checking whether Office Open XML is installed Use case When checking whether the IEEE2600.1 security function is installed
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-OOXML. Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-2600.
displayed under TR-OOXML. displayed under TR-2600.
Default value USA:1 EUR:1 AU:0 CN:0 KR:0 TW:0 ASIA:0 Default value 0
TR-OOXML Transfer license key display of Office Open XML TR-2600 Transfer license key display: IEEE2600.1 security function
Lv.2 Details To display transfer license key to use Office Open XML when Lv.2 Details To display transfer license key of the IEEE2600.1 security function
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-OOXML. Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-2600.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-OOXML. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-2600.
8-111
8
8-112
COPIER>OPTION>LCNS-TR
ST-OPFNT Installation state display of PCL Font Set
Lv.2 Details To display installation state of PCL Font Set when disabling the
function with license transfer.
Use case When checking whether PCL Font Set is installed
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-OPFNT.
displayed under TR-OPFNT.
Default value 0
TR-OPFNT Transfer license key display of PCL option Font
Lv.2 Details To display transfer license key of the PCL Font Set security function
when transfer is disabled.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-OPFNT.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-OPFNT.
T-8-51
8-112
8
8 Service Mode > COPIER > TEST > PG
8-113
TEST COPIER>TEST>PG
2-SIDE Setting of PG; 1-sided/2-sided mode
■■PG Lv.1 Details To set 1-sided/2-sided print for PG output.
COPIER>TEST>PG
TYPE Test print
Lv.1 Details To execute the test print. 0: 1-sided, 1: 2-sided
Use case At trouble analysis Default value 0
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. PG-QTY Setting of PG output quantity
Test print is executed. Lv.1 Details To set the number of sheets for PG output.
Caution Be sure to return the value to 0 after the test print output.
0: Normal print
1: Grid
2: 17 gradations Tbic rank 2 Default value 1
3: 17 gradations 600dpi (134-line screen or 141-line screen) T-8-52
4: Solid white
5: Halftone (density: 80H, Tbic rank 2, without image correction)
6: Halftone (density: 80H, 134-line screen or 141-line screen, without
image correction)
7: Solid black
8: Horizontal line (4 dots, 27 spaces)
12: Halftone (density: 80H, 134-line screen or 141-line screen,
without image correction)
14: Halftone (density: 30H, 134-line screen or 141-line screen,
without image correction)
15-50: For development
Default value 0
PG-PICK Setting of test print pickup cassette
Lv.1 Details To set the pickup cassette for test print output.
At test print output
1: Cassette1, 2: Cassette2, 3: Cassette3, 4: Cassette4, 5: Multi-
purpose Tray, 6 to 8: Not used
Default value 1
8-113
8
Service Mode > COPIER > TEST > PG
8 Service Mode > COPIER > TEST > NETWORK
8-114
■■NETWORK COPIER>TEST>NETWORK
BML-DISP Set System Monitor screen: BMlinks support
COPIER>TEST>NETWORK
Lv.2 Details To set whether to only display the device configuration in the System
PING Network connection check Monitor screen when supporting BMlinks.
Lv.1 Details To check connection between this machine and TCP/IP network. When the setting is switched, the Status and Log are not displayed.
Use case - When checking network connection at the time of installation Use case When supporting BMlinks
- At network connection failure Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Turn OFF the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
2) Connect the network cable to this machine, and then turn ON the 0: Ordinary System Monitor screen
main power switch. 1: Screen in which only the device configuration is displayed
3) Inform the system administrator at user’s site that installation of
Default value 0
this machine is complete, and ask for network setting.
4) Ask the system administrator to check the network connection, IPV6-ADR Setting of PING send address (IPv6)
and check the remote host address of PING transmission target. Lv.1 Details To set the IPv6 address to send PING.
5) Select the item and enter the remote host address, and then When PING is sent to this address by COPIER> TEST>
press OK key and Start key. NETWORK> PING-IP6, the network connection condition in the
OK: Connection is normal. Checking procedure is complete. IPv6 environment can be checked.
NG: Connection failed. Go to step 6) if the cable connection is OK. Use case When IPv6 network is connected
In case of cable connection failure, connect again and then go to Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
step 5). Caution - Enter a consistent character string as an address of IPv6.
6) Select the item and enter loopback address, and then press OK - Enter an address within 39 characters including hexadecimal
key and Start key. numbers (0 to 9, a to f) and a separator (:).
OK: TCP/IP setting of this machine is normal. Go to step 7) to check Related service mode COPIER> TEST> NETWORK> PING-IP6
NIC. PING-IP6 PING transmission to IPv6 address
NG: TCP/IP setting of this machine has failure. Go to step 3) to
Lv.1 Details To send PING to the address specified by IPV6-ADR.
check the setting again.
The network connection condition in the IPv6 environment can be
7) Select the item and enter the local host address, and then press
checked.
OK key.
Use case When IPv6 network is connected
OK: Network setting of this machine and NIC are normal. Inform the
system administrator that the trouble is due to network environment Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key.
and ask for countermeasure. Related service mode COPIER> TEST> NETWORK> IPV6-ADR
NG: Connection failure/fault with NIC. Check connection of NIC/ T-8-53
replace NIC.
Display/adj/set range 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
At normal state: OK
At failure occurrence: NG
Supplement/memo - Remote host address: IP address of PC terminal in network.
- Loopback address: 127.0.0.1. Checking TCP/IP of this machine is
available because the signal is returned before NIC.
- NIC: Network interface board
- Local host address: IP address of this machine
8-114
8
Service Mode > COPIER > TEST > NETWORK
8 Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > TOTAL
8-115
COUNTER COPIER>COUNTER>TOTAL
SCAN Scan counter
■■TOTAL Lv.1 Details To count the number of scan operations according to the charge
counter when the scanning operation is complete.
COPIER>COUNTER>TOTAL Use case When checking the counter
SERVICE1 Service-purposed total counter 1 Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999
Lv.1 Details To count up when the paper is delivered outside the machine. T-8-54
Use case When checking the counter
SERVICE2 Service-purposed total counter 2
Lv.1 Details To count up when the paper is delivered outside the machine.
COPY Total copy counter
Lv.1 Details To count up when the paper is delivered outside the machine.
PDL-PRT PDL print counter
Lv.1 Details To count up when the paper is delivered outside the machine
according to the charge counter at PDL print.
FAX-PRT FAX reception print counter
according to the charge counter at FAX reception.
BOX-PRT Inbox print counter
according to the charge counter at Inbox print.
RPT-PRT Report print counter
according to the charge counter at report print.
2-SIDE 2-sided copy/print counter
according to the charge counter at 2-sided copy/print.
8-115
8
Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > TOTAL
8 Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > FEEDER
8-116
■■PICK-UP ■■FEEDER
COPIER>COUNTER>PICKUP COPIER>COUNTER>FEEDER
C1 Cassette 1 pickup total counter FEED ADF original pickup total counter
Lv.1 Details Cassette 1 pickup total counter Lv.1 Details ADF original pickup total counter
Use case When checking the Pickup counter Use case When checking the counter
C2 Cassette 2 pickup total counter Default value 0
Lv.1 Details Cassette 2 pickup total counter T-8-56
Use case When checking the Pickup counter
C3 Cassette 3 pickup total counter
Lv.1 Details Cassette 3 pickup total counter
C4 Cassette 4 pickup total counter
Lv.1 Details Cassette 4 pickup total counter
MF Multi-purpose Tray pickup total counter
Lv.1 Details Multi-purpose Tray pickup total counter
Use case When checking the Pcikup counter of Multi-purpose Tray
2-SIDE Duplex Unit pickup total counter
Lv.1 Details Duplex Unit pickup total counter
Use case When checking the Pickup counter of Duplex Unit
T-8-55
8-116
8
Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > FEEDER
8 Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > JAM
8-117
■■JAM COPIER>COUNTER>JAM
C4 Cassette 4 pickup jam counter
COPIER>COUNTER>JAM
Lv.1 Details Cassette 4 pickup jam counter
TOTAL Printer total jam counter
Use case When checking the jam counter of machine’s Cassette 4
Lv.1 Details Printer total jam counter
Use case When checking the total jam counter of printer
Default value 0
T-8-57
Default value 0
FEEDER Feeder total jam counter
Lv.1 Details Feeder total jam counter
Use case When checking the total jam counter of feeder
Default value 0
SORTER Finisher total jam counter
Lv.1 Details Finisher total jam counter
Use case When checking the total jam counter of finisher
Default value 0
2-SIDE Duplex Unit jam counter
Lv.1 Details Duplex Unit jam counter
Use case When checking the jam counter of Duplex Unit
Default value 0
MF Multi-purpose Tray jam counter
Lv.1 Details Multi-purpose Tray jam counter
Use case When checking the jam counter of Multi-purpose Tray
Default value 0
Default value 0
Default value 0
Default value 0
8-117
8
Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > JAM
8 Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > JOB
8-118
■■MISC ■■JOB
COPIER>COUNTER>MISC COPIER>COUNTER>JOB
T-SPLY-K Bk toner supply counter DVPAPLEN Average paper length of job
Lv.1 Details Number of Bk color toner supply blocks. Lv.1 Details Average paper length in the period from when the printer engine
Count up by every one piece of printing. starts printing operation to when it stops the operation.
Use case When checking the usage condition of toner. Since the printer engine considers small jobs that are executed
Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 continuously as a large job, the average paper length affects
Default value 0 calculation of the life.
LSR-MTR Laser Scanner Motor counter Use case When checking the average paper length of job.
Lv.1 Details To use as the reference for judging whether replacement of the Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999
Laser Scanner Unit is needed. DVRUNLEN Average distance of job
Use case When using as the reference for judging whether replacement of the Lv.1 Details Average running distance in the period from when the printer engine
Laser Scanner Unit is needed starts printing operation to when it stops the operation.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999 Since the printer engine considers small jobs that are executed
continuously as a large job, the average running distance affects
ALLPW-ON Number of DCON PCB power-on times
calculation of the life.
Lv.1 Details Number of power-on times (Non-all-night Power Unit).
Use case When checking the average distance of job.
To count up when power is turned ON (Non-all-night Power Unit).
Use case When checking the usage status of the product
T-8-59
T-8-58
8-118
8
Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > JOB
8 Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1
8-119
■■DRBL-1 COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-1
C1-SP-RL Cassette1 Separation Roller parts counter
COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-1
Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement
TR-ROLL Transfer Roller parts counter 2nd line: Estimated life
Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
2nd line: Estimated life
Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear
Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts key.
Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and
key. then press OK key.
To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and Caution Clear the counter value after replacement.
then press OK key.
Caution Clear the counter value after replacement.
Default value 0
C1-FD-RL Cassette1 Feeding Roller parts counter
Default value 0
SP-SC-EL Separation Static Eliminator parts counter 2nd line: Estimated life
then press OK key.
Default value 0
M-FD-RL MP Tray Pickup Roll parts counter
Default value 0
PT-DRM Drum Unit parts counter 2nd line: Estimated life
then press OK key.
Default value 0
M-SP-PD MP Tray Separation Pad parts counter
Default value 0
Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
key.
To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and
then press OK key.
Default value 0
8-119
8
Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1
8-120
COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-1 ■■DRBL-2
FX-UNIT Fixing Assembly parts counter
COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-2
2nd line: Estimated life DF-SP-PD Separation Pad parts counter: ADF
Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement
key. Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear
then press OK key. key.
Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and
then press OK key.
Default value 0
WST-TNR Waste Toner Container parts counter
Default value 0
2nd line: Estimated life Supplement/memo Regardless of the read mode (1-sided/2-sided), the counter is
advanced every time a sheet is fed.
DF-FD-RL Pickup Roller1 Unit parts counter: ADF
key. Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement
To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and 2nd line: Estimated life
then press OK key. Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear
key.
Default value 0
then press OK key.
T-8-60
Default value 0
Supplement/memo Regardless of the read mode (1-sided/2-sided), the counter is
advanced every time a sheet is fed.
key.
then press OK key.
Default value 0
8-120
8
8-121
COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-2 COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-2
C3-FD-RL Cassette3 Feed Roller parts counter C2-FD-RL Cassette2 Feeding Roller parts counter
Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement
2nd line: Estimated life 2nd line: Estimated life
Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear
key. key.
To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and
then press OK key. then press OK key.
Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement.
C4-SP-RL Cassette4 Separation Roller parts counter T-8-61
key.
then press OK key.
Default value 0
C4-FD-RL Cassette4 Feed Roller parts counter
key.
then press OK key.
Default value 0
key.
then press OK key.
Default value 0
8-121
8
8 Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > LF
8-122
■■LF
COPIER>COUNTER>LF
K-DRM-LF Display of Drum Unit (Bk) life
Lv.1 Details To display how much the Drum Unit (Bk) is close to the end of life in
% (percentage).
Use case When checking the drum unit life.
T-8-62
8-122
8
Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > LF
8 Service Mode > FEEDER > ADJUST
8-123
FEEDER FEEDER>ADJUST
LA-SPD2 Fine adjustment of ADF image magnification: rear
Lv.1 Details To make a fine adjustment of the image magnification ratio in vertical
ADJUST scanning direction at the time of ADF scanning.
As the value is incremented by 1, the image is expanded by 0.1% in
vertical scanning direction.
FEEDER>ADJUST
(The feeding speed decreases, and the image is spread.)
DOCST Adjustment of ADF image leading edge margin: front
Lv.1 Details To adjust the margin at the leading edge of the image at the time of - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
ADF scanning.
Execute when the output image is displaced.
As the value is incremented by 1, the margin at the leading edge
of the image is decreased by 0.1mm. (The image moves in the
service label.
direction of the leading edge of the sheet.)
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Unit 0.1%
Caution When setting an extreme value, the error E302 (shading error) may Related service mode COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > P-PRINT
occur. DOC-LNGH ADF paper detection adjustment
After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the Lv.1 Details When ADF is installed (to adjust the detection margin of error)
service label. Use case - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Display/adj/set range -50 to 50 Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and
Unit 0.1mm press OK key.
Default value 0 Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the
LA-SPEED Fine adjustment of ADF image magnification: front service label.
Lv.1 Details To make a fine adjustment of the image magnification ratio in vertical Display/adj/set range -100 to 100
scanning direction at the time of DADF scanning. Unit 0.1mm
As the value is incremented by 1, the image is expanded by 0.1% in Default value 0
vertical scanning direction. T-8-63
(The feeding speed decreases, and the image is spread.)
service label.
Unit 0.1%
Default value 0
Related service mode COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > P-PRINT
8-123
8
Service Mode > FEEDER > ADJUST
8 Service Mode > FEEDER > FUNCTION
8-124
FUNCTION FEEDER>FUNCTION
MTR-ON Operation check of motor
FEEDER>FUNCTION Lv.1 Details To start operation check for the motor specified by MTR-CHK.
MTR-CHK Specifying ADF Operation Motor Use case At operation check
Lv.1 Details To specify the ADF Motor to operate. Adj/set/operate method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key.
The motor is activated by MTR-ON. The unit operates for approximately 5 seconds and automatically
Use case At operation check stops.
2) Press OK key.
The operation check is completed.
Caution Be sure to press the OK key again after execution. The operation
0: ADF Motor (M1), 1: Delivery Motor (M2), 2 to 9: Not used
automatically stops after approximately 5 seconds, but is not
Related service mode FEEDER> FUNCTION> MTR-ON
completed unless the OK key is pressed (STOP is not displayed).
FEED-CHK Specifying ADF individual feed mode
Related service mode FEEDER> FUNCTION> MTR-CHK
Lv.1 Details To specify the feed mode for DADF.
FEED-ON Operation check of ADF individual feed
Feed operation is activated by FEED-ON.
Lv.1 Details To start operation check for the feed mode specified by FEED-CHK.
Use case At operation check
0: 1-sided pickup/delivery operation Related service mode FEEDER> FUNCTION> FEED-CHK
1: 2-sided pickup/delivery operation T-8-64
Related service mode FEEDER> FUNCTION> FEED-ON

SL-CHK Specifying ADF Operation Solenoid
Lv.1 Details To specify the ADF solenoid to be operate.
The solenoid is activated by SL-ON.
0: Pickup SL (SL1)
1: Registration SL (SL2)
2: Flapper 1 SL (SL3)
3: Flapper 2 SL (SL4)
4: Disengagement SL (SL5)
Related service mode FEEDER> FUNCTION> SL-ON
SL-ON Operation check of ADF Solenoid
Lv.1 Details To start operation check for the solenoid specified by SL-CHK.
The unit operates for 1 time and automatically stops.
2) Press OK key.
The operation check is completed.
Caution Be sure to press the OK key again after execution. The operation
automatically stops after approximately 1time, but is not completed
unless the OK key is pressed (STOP is not displayed).
Related service mode FEEDER> FUNCTION> SL-CHK
8-124
8
Service Mode > FEEDER > FUNCTION
8 Service Mode > FEEDER > OPTION
8-125
OPTION
FEEDER>OPTION
UNK-A5R Print size set: ADF original size detection, small
Lv.1 Details To detect custom size paper smaller than A4R (LTRR) as A5R
(STMTR) at ADF original size detection.
not used.
0: Detect as custom size
1: Detect as A5R
Default value 1
T-8-65
8-125
8
Service Mode > FEEDER > OPTION
8 Service Mode > SORTER > OPTION
8-126
SORTER
OPTION
SORTER>OPTION
MD-SPRTN Set restriction at Finisher error: Staple
Lv.1 Details To set whether to stop the machine when an staple motor error
occurs at Finisher. Function restriction is not executed when error is
not the staple motor error.
Use case When preferring to run the machine at staple motor error of the
Finisher
Caution When “1” is set, staple operation or alignment operation is not
executed. Set “0” normally.
0: Normal, 1: Function restriction
Default value 0
T-8-66
8-126
8
Service Mode > SORTER > OPTION
8 Service Mode > BOARD > OPTION
8-127
BOARD
OPTION
BOARD>OPTION
MENU-1 Hide/display of printer setting menu level 1
Lv.2 Details To set whether to display or hide the level 1 of printer setting menu.
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default value 0
MENU-2 Not use
Default value 0
MENU-3 Not use
Default value 0
MENU-4 Not use
Default value 0
SURF-OFF Not use
TR-DSP Not use
T-8-67
8-127
8
Service Mode > BOARD > OPTION
9 Installation
■
■How
■
to check this Installation Procedure
■Installation
■
■Option Installation Sequence
■
■Copy Card Reader-F1
■ Card Reader BOX-A1
■IC
■
■Copy Control Interface Kit-A1
■
■HDD Data Encryption Kit-C6
■
■PCL International Font Set-B1
9
Installation
9 Installation > Option Installation Sequence
9-2
How to check this Installation Procedure Installation

This machine is able to be installed by the user.
When Using the parts included in the package For details of installation procedure, refer to the User's Manual.
A symbol is described on the illustration in the case of using the parts included in the package
of this product.
Option Installation Sequence

When installing options of this machine, be sure to note the following points.
F-9-1
1) When installing the Drum Heater-F1, be sure to install it first.
Symbols in the Illustration 2) When installing the Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board-AM1, be sure to install the Super G3
Fax Board-AM1 already.
The frequently-performed operations are described with symbols in this procedure.
3) Be sure to install the Staple Finisher-R1 last.
Screw Connector Harness
Tighten Remove Connect Disconnect Secure Free
Claw
Insert Remove Push Plug in Turn on
Checking instruction
Check Visual Check Sound Check

F-9-2
9-2
9
Installation > Option Installation Sequence
9 Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Checking the Contents > Copy Card Reader Attachment-C2
9-3
Copy Card Reader-F1 ■■Copy Card Reader Attachment-C2
[1] Card Reader Lower [2] Card Reader Lower [3] Cord Guide X 1
Check Item of the Contents Cover X 1 Mounting Plate X 1
The parts with a diagonal line in the contents list will not be used during installation.
Points to Note at Installation

[4] Connector Cover X 1 [5] Card Reader Harness [6] Wire Saddle X 2
[A] X 1
CAUTION:
• When working for a long time with the Right Door open, be sure to block light to the
Photosensitive Drum.
• To install this equipment, the Copy Card Reader Attachment-C2 is required.
• This equipment and the IC Card Reader Box-A1 cannot be used at the same time.
[7] Edge Saddle X 1 [8] Screw [9] Screw (TP; M3x6) X 3
(Binding; M4x6) X 1
Checking the Contents

■■Copy Card Reader-F1
[10] Connector Relay Unit [11] Card Reader Harness [12] Reader Right Front
X1 [B] X 1 Cover X 1
[1] Card Reader Unit X 1 [2] Screw [3] Toothed washer X 1
(RS tight; M4x10) X 1
[13] Card Reader [14] Option Mounting [15] Screw (TP; M4x8) X 2
Fixation Plate X 1 Plate X 1
F-9-3
[16] Screw (TP; M3x4) X 4
F-9-4
9-3
9
Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Checking the Contents > Copy Card Reader Attachment-C2
9 Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Installation Procedure > Assembling the Card Reader
9-4
Check Items when Turning OFF the Power Installation Procedure
Check that the power of the host machine is OFF. ■■Assembling the Card Reader
1) Turn OFF the Power Switch of the host machine.
2) Be sure that display in the Control Panel and the Power Supply Lamp are turned off, then
1) Remove the Card Reader Lower Cover from the Card Reader Unit.
(The removed Card Reader Lower Cover and screw are not be used.)
• 1 Screw
Installation Outline Drawing
F-9-6
F-9-5
2) Remove the Card Reader Fixation Plate from the Card Reader Unit.
(The removed Card Reader Fixation Plate are not be used.)
• 1 Screw (The removed screw is used in step 4.)
F-9-7
9-4
9
Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Installation Procedure > Assembling the Card Reader
9 Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Installation Procedure > Assembling the Card Reader
9-5
3) Free the Grounding Wire from the Card Reader Unit. 5) Install the Grounding Wire on the Card Reader Unit.
(The removed screw and toothed washer is used in step 5.) • 1 Screw (Use the screw removed in step 3.)
• 1 Screw • 1 Toothed Washer (Use the toothed washer removed in step 3.)
• 1 Toothed Washer
F-9-10
F-9-8
6) Pass the Card Reader Harness through the Edge Saddle.
4) Install the Card Reader Lower Mounting Plate on the Card Reader Unit.
• 1 Screw (Use the screw removed in step 2.)
• 1 Edge Saddle
F-9-11
F-9-9
9-5
9
Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Installation Procedure > Assembling the Card Reader
9 Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Installation Procedure > Removing the Covers
9-6
■■Removing the Covers

• 1 Claw
F-9-14
F-9-12
2) Remove the Rear Cover. • 1 Screw
• 6 Screws
• 2 Claws
x6
x2
F-9-15
F-9-13
9-6
9
Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Installation Procedure > Removing the Covers
9 Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Installation Procedure > Installing the Card Reader Unit
9-7
■■Installing the Card Reader Unit
• 2 Screws
• 1 Claw
2) Install the Card Reader Unit.

Claw
x2 • 2 Screws (TP; M3x6)
x2
F-9-16
6) Peel off the Face Seal.
F-9-18
3) Slide and install the Card Reader Lower Cover, and then fix it.
• 1 Screw (Binding; M4x6)
Face Seal
F-9-17
F-9-19
9-7
9
Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Installation Procedure > Installing the Card Reader Unit
9-8
4) Open the Right Door Unit. 7) Remove the Face Plate. (The removed Face Plate is not be used.)
• 2 Screws ( The removed screws are used in step 8. )
5) Remove the Main Controller Sub Cover.

• 1 Screw
x2
x1
F-9-22
8) Using two screws removed in the step 7), install the Connector Relay Unit. Then connect
F-9-20
the connector to the main controller PCB.
6) Remove the Main Controller Cover. • 2 Screws
• 2 Connectors • 1 Connector
• 4 Screws
• 1 Boss
Boss
x4 x2
x2
F-9-23
F-9-21
9-8
9
9-9
9) Fix the Wire Saddles to the main controller mount plate. 10) Connect the Card Reader Harness [A], and then pass the harness through the Wire
Saddles and harness guide as shown in the figure. Remove the Short Connector from the
Harness of the Card Reader. (The removed Short Connector is not be used.)
Wire Saddle
x3
Wire Saddle
Connector
F-9-24
F-9-25
9-9
9
9-10
11) Fix the Card Reader Harness [A] as shown in the figure. 12) Remove the cover from the Cord Guide and peel off the release paper, and then attach
• 2 Wire Saddles Cord Guide to the area shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
• Put the Control Panel Cable above the Card Reader Harness [A], because the
Reader Right Rear Cover may damage to the Card Reader Harness [A] when
installing it.
Control Panel Cable Cord Guide

x2
F-9-27
13) Put the Card Reader Harness [A] on the Cord Guide as shown in the figure, and install
Card Reader Harness the Cord Guide Cover.
F-9-26
Cord Guide Cover
F-9-28
9-10
9
9-11
14) Draw out the Card Reader Harness [A] from the cover by approximate 120mm, and install 16) Install the Connector Cover.
the Right Rear Cover. • 1 Screw (TP; M3x6)
• 2 Screws
• 1 Claw CAUTION:
When installing the Connector Cover, be sure to place the Harness Band on the Card
Reader Harness [A] inside the Connector Cover.
Claw
x2
Approx. 120mm
Connector Cover
Harness Band
Card Reader Harness
F-9-29
15) Connect the connector of the Card Reader Harness [A]. F-9-31
Connector
F-9-30
9-11
9
9-12
17) Cut off the Face Cover of the Reader Right Rear Cover with a side cutter. 18) Install the Reader Right Rear Cover. The Card Reader Harness must be passed through
• 3 Joints the hole where the Face Cover is cut off in the step 17).
• 1 Screw
CAUTION:
Be sure to check that there is no burr. CAUTION:
When installing the Reader Right Rear Cover, take care that it don't pinch or damage
to the Card Reader Harness.
Joint
Card Reader Harness Reader Right Rear Cover
Joint
F-9-32
F-9-33
19) Return the removed covers to their original positions.

• Close the Right Door Unit.
• Close the ADF Unit.
• Main Controller Cover (2 Connectors, 4 Screws; TP)
• Main Controller Sub Cover (1 Screw; TP)
• Rear Cover (2 Claws, 6 Screws; RS tight)
• Reader Controller Cover (1 Claw)
9-12
9
9 Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Registering the Card IDs
9-13
Registering the Card IDs
20) The following parts remain after installing the Copy Card Reader. Make sure not to leave
the remained parts at the site. After installing the Card Reader, register the card numbers to be used in the service mode of
the host machine.
[1] Card Reader Harness [2] Reader Right Front [3] Card Reader If they are not registered, cards will not be recognized when inserted.
[B] X 1 Cover X 1 Fixation Plate X 1
1) Enter the service mode, and set the model of the Card Reader.
• Check the service mode (COPIER> OPTION> ACC> CR-TYPE) to see that the setting
value is “0”.
2) Enter the service mode: COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> CARD, and enter the card
number to be used (1 to 2001).
[4] Option Mounting [5] Screw (TP; M4x8) X 2 [6] Screw (TP; M3x4) X 4
• Enter the smallest card number to be used by a user.
Plate X 1
• From the entered card number, 1000 cards can be used.
3) Turn OFF and ON the main power switch to enable the setting value.
NOTE:
If needing to log in as an administrator, the default ID and Password are the as follows.
• System Manager ID: 7654321
• System PIN: 7654321
[7] Screw [8] Card Reader [9] Card Reader

(Binding; M3x13) X 1 Lower Cover X 1 Fixation Plate X 1 4) Insert a card which card number has been registered, and check that the machine operates
normally.
NOTE:
When changing the number of cards (departments) after specifying the setting, specify
the following settings, In such a case, the department ID counter information is reset.
• Select the service mode (Level 1): COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> CARD.
• Select the service mode (Level 2): COPIER> OPTION> FUN-SW> CARD-RNG, and set
any value.
[10] Face Plate X 1 [11] Short Connector X 1 • Select the service mode (Level 1): COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> CARD, and enter
the card number to be used (1 to 2001).
• Turn OFF and ON the main power switch to enable the setting value.
• After that, perform from step 1).
F-9-34
9-13
9
Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Registering the Card IDs
9 Installation > IC Card Reader BOX-A1 > Checking the Contents
9-14
IC Card Reader BOX-A1 Checking the Contents
Check Item of the Contents [1] IC Card Reader

Box Unit X 1
[2] IC Card Reader
Box Upper Cover X 1
[3] IC Card Reader
Mount Plate X 1
The parts with a diagonal line in the contents list will not be used during installation.
Points to Note at Installation
CAUTION:
• When working for a long time with the Right Door open, be sure to block light to the [4] Card Reader Sheet [5] Card Reader Sheet [6] Sponge Sheet X 2
Photosensitive Drum. (A) X 1 (B)X 1
• This equipment and the Copy Card Reader -F1 cannot be used at the same time.
• When installing the equipment, the IC Card Reader (sales company's option) is
required.
[7] Cord Guide X 1 [8] Large Wire Saddle X 2 [9] Small Wire Saddle X 3
One Use
[10] Screw (TP; M3x6) X 6 [11] Screw

(Tapping; M3x8) X 2
F-9-35
9-14
9
Installation > IC Card Reader BOX-A1 > Checking the Contents
9 Installation > IC Card Reader BOX-A1 > Installation Procedure > Assembling the IC Card Reader Box
9-15
Check Items when Turning OFF the Power Installation Procedure
Check that the power of the host machine is OFF. ■■Assembling the IC Card Reader Box
1) Turn OFF the Power Switch of the host machine.
2) Be sure that display in the Control Panel and the Power Supply Lamp are turned off, then
1) Remove the bottom cover of the IC Card Reader Box Unit.
• 4 Claws

Bottom Cover
Claw
x4 Claw
F-9-36 Lower Cover
Bottom Cover
F-9-37
9-15
9
Installation > IC Card Reader BOX-A1 > Installation Procedure > Assembling the IC Card Reader Box
9 Installation > IC Card Reader BOX-A1 > Installation Procedure > Assembling the IC Card Reader Box
9-16
2) Install the IC Card Reader Mount Plate to the IC Card Reader Lower Cover. 3) Install the Small Wire Saddle to the IC Card Reader Mount Plate.
• 4 Screws (TP; M3x6) • 1 Small Wire Saddle
• 2 Bosses
NOTE:
When installing the IC Card Reader Mount Plate, be sure to install as shown in the
Small Wire Saddle
figure.
IC Card Reader Mount Plate IC Card Reader Mount Plate
F-9-40
F-9-38
x4
Boss
IC Card Reader Mount Plate
F-9-39
9-16
9
Installation > IC Card Reader BOX-A1 > Installation Procedure > Assembling the IC Card Reader Box
9 Installation > IC Card Reader BOX-A1 > Installation Procedure > Removing the Covers
9-17
■■Removing the Covers

• 1 Claw
F-9-43
F-9-41
2) Remove the Rear Cover. • 1 Screw
• 6 Screws
• 2 Claws
x6
x2
F-9-44
F-9-42
9-17
9
Installation > IC Card Reader BOX-A1 > Installation Procedure > Removing the Covers
9 Installation > IC Card Reader BOX-A1 > Installation Procedure > Installing the Card Reader Unit
9-18
■■Installing the Card Reader Unit
• 2 Screws
• 1 Claw
2) Install the Card Reader Unit.

Claw
x2 • 2 Screws (TP; M3x6)
x2
F-9-45
6) Peel off the Face Seal. F-9-47
3) Open the Right Door Unit.
4) Fix the Large Wire Saddles to the main controller mount plate.
Face Seal
F-9-46
Large Wire Saddle
F-9-48
9-18
9
Installation > IC Card Reader BOX-A1 > Installation Procedure > Installing the Card Reader Unit
9-19
5) Put the IC Card Reader (sales company's option) on the Card Reader Unit and set the 6) Fix the USB Cable of the IC Card Reader as shown in the figure.
USB Cable as shown in the figure, and then place the sponge sheet between the IC Card • 2 Large Wire Saddles
Reader and the Card Reader Unit.
• 4 Wire Saddles CAUTION:
• Put the Control Panel Cable above the USB Cable, because the Reader Right
NOTE: Rear Cover may damage to the USB Cable when installing it.
• Use the sponge sheet of one piece or two pieces depending on the size of the IC Card
Reader.
• Loop the USB Cable around the IC Card Reader so that it does not move.
x2 Control Panel Cable
USB Cable
IC Card Reader Sponge Sheet F-9-51
F-9-49
7) Remove the cover from the Cord Guide and peel off the release paper, and then attach the
Cord Guide to the area shown in the figure.
x4
Cord Guide
F-9-50
F-9-52
9-19
9
9-20
8) Put the USB Cable of the IC Card Reader on the Cord Guide as shown in the figure, and 10) Connect the USB Connector.
install the Cord Guide Cover.
Cord Guide Cover
USB Connector
F-9-55
F-9-53
9) Draw out the USB Cable of the IC Card Reader from the cover by approximate 90mm, and
install the Right Rear Cover.
• 2 Screws
• 1 Claw
Claw
x2
Approx. 90mm
USB Cable
F-9-54
9-20
9
9-21
11) Set the Card Reader Sheet (A) on the Card Reader Unit, and install the IC Card Reader 12) Install the Bottom Cover of the IC Card Reader Box Unit.
Box Upper Cover. • 4 Claws
• 3 Claws
NOTE: Claw
x4
Use the Card Reader Sheet (A). The Card Reader Sheet (B) is not used.
Claw
F-9-58
Card Reader Sheet (A) Card Reader Sheet (B) 13) Cut off the Face Cover of the Reader Right Rear Cover with nippers.
F-9-56 • 3 Joints
CAUTION:
Be sure to check that there is no a side cutter.
x3 IC Card Reader Box Upper Cover
Claw Claw
Joint
IC Card Reader Sheet
F-9-57
Joint
F-9-59
9-21
9
9-22
14) Install the Reader Right Rear Cover. The USB Cable must be passed through the hole 16) The following parts remain after installing the Card Reader Unit. Make sure not to leave
where the Face Cover is cut off in the step 13). the remained parts at the site.
• 1 Screw
[1]Small Wire Saddle X 2 [2]Screw [3]Card Reader Sheet
(Tapping; M3x8) X 2 （B）X 1
CAUTION:
When installing the Reader Right Rear Cover, take care that it don't pinch or damage
to the USB Cable.
F-9-61
USB Cable Reader Right Rear Cover
F-9-60
15) Return the removed covers to their original positions.

• Close the Right Door Unit.
• Close the ADF Unit.
• Rear Cover (2 Claws, 6 Screws; RS tight)
• Reader Controller Cover (1 Claw)
9-22
9
9 Installation > Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 > Installation Procedule
9-23
Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 Installation Outline Drawing
Checking the Contents
[1] CC-VI Cable X 1 [2] D-SUB Support Plate [3] Washer (large) X 2
X1
[4] Hexagonal Screw (Washer (Small) ,Nut) X 2 [5] IA Harness Protection

Sheet X 1
Do not use a Nut
F-9-63
Installation Procedule
1) Remove the Reader PCB Cover.

F-9-62
• 1 Claw
Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power

Check that the main power switch is OFF
1) Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine.
2) Be sure that Control Panel Display and Main Power Lamp are both turned OFF, and then
Claw
F-9-64
9-23
9
Installation > Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 > Installation Procedule
9-24
2) Remove the Rear Cover. 4) Remove the Controller Cover.

• 6 Screws
• 2 Claws CAUTION:
When removing the Controller Cover, be careful to not give a shock to the HDD
Claw attached inside it.
x6 • 4 Screws (TP; M3X6)

• 2Connectors
• 2 Hooks
x2 • 1 Protrusion
Protrusion Hook
x2 Hook
x4
F-9-65
3) Remove the Controller Sub Cover.

• 1 Screw
• 2 Hooks
Connector
F-9-67
Hook
F-9-66
9-24
9
9-25
5) Remove the Face Cover .(Removed Face Cover and screws is not used.) 7) Install the CC-VI cable.
• 2 Screws • 2 Hexagonal Screws
• 2 Washers (small)
• 2 Washers (large)
• 1 Connector
x2
x2
F-9-68
6) Put the CC-VI cable through the D-SUB Support Plate.

F-9-70
CAUTION:
Be sure to install the extruded side of the D-SUB Support Plate to be inside. 8) Install the removed cover.
• Controller Cover( 4 Screws/2 Connector)
• Controller Sub Cover (1 Screw)
• Rear Cover (6 Screws)
• Reader PCB Cover.
Inside
9) Connect the power plug of the host machine to the power outlet.
10) Turn the main power switch ON.
D-SUB Support Plate
CC-VI Cable
F-9-69
9-25
9
9 Installation > HDD Data Encryption Kit-C6 > Checking the Contents
9-26
HDD Data Encryption Kit-C6 Checking the Contents
[1] Encryption Board X 1 [2] Signal Cable [3] Power Cable

Points to Note when Unpacking HDD Data Encryption (250mm; A:HDD-Sig) (270mm; A:HDD-Pow1)
Kit X1 X1
A security sticker is attached to the kit package to indicate that the package has not been
opened. Check to see that the package has not been opened in any way and the sticker is
not torn.
If the package appears to have been opened or the sticker is torn, check to make sure that
the user has done so intentionally.
[4] Signal Cable [5] Power Cable [6] Harness Guide X 1
(135mm; A:Cont-Sig) (135mm; A:Cont-Pow)
X1 X1
[7] Wire Saddle X 3 [8] Screw (TP; M3x6) X 4
F-9-71
< CD/Guides >
• HDD Data Encryption Kit-C Series User Documentation
• HDD Data Encryption Kit Notice
• Installation Procedure
• FCC/IC Sheet
9-26
9
Installation > HDD Data Encryption Kit-C6 > Checking the Contents
9 Installation > HDD Data Encryption Kit-C6 > Points to Note Regarding Data Backup/Export
9-27
Points to Note Regarding Data Backup/Export [List of Data that can be backed up]
Data that can be backed up Reference
Before performing work that will result in the loss of data, inform the system administrator of Settings/Registration Basic Information See the "e-Manual > Remote UI".
the inevitable loss, asking him to make a backup or export of important data items. Paper Type Management Settings
Backup or export work must not be performed by the service person because of security Printer Settings
considerations. Forwarding Settings
Box Settings
In this Installation Procedure, a series of backup or export procedures are described for
Department ID Management Settings
reference. Main Menu Settings
Favorite Settings
[List of Data to be Deleted] Address Book
Quick Menu Settings
Data to be Deleted Availability of
MEAP Application Setting Information
Backup User Setting Information
Information registered in the Address Book Yes Favorite Settings for Web browser See the e-Manual > Web Access.
Settings made from the Settings/Registration screen Yes *1 (You can select this if web browser (Option) is
Forwarding Settings Yes installed.)
License files for MEAP applications Yes License files for MEAP applications For information on downloading license files, see
MEAP applications No the "e-Manual > MEAP".
Data saved using MEAP applications Yes *2 Data saved by MEAP applications Data saved by MEAP applications may be
Favorite Settings registered in the Copy and Mail Box functions No able to be backed up, depending on the MEAP
Scan modes registered in the Send Function No application.
Unsent documents (documents waiting to be sent with the Delayed Send No See the documentation included with the MEAP
mode) application.
MEAP SMS (Service Management Service) password (the password will No SSO-H (Single Sign-On H) user authentication see the "e-Manual > MEAPI".
return to its default password if it was changed) information
Job logs No T-9-2
User authentication information registered in the Local Device Authentication Yes

user authentication system of SSO-H (Single Sign-On H)
CAUTION: Work to Perform After Installing the Kit
Registration information for the Network Place Yes
Key Pair and Server Certificate No If you have logged on to the machine using a login service, such as SSO-H (Single
Audit Log Yes Sign-On H) before using this product, you must select the login service again using
Password that is protected by TPM Yes *3 SMS (Service Management Service) after restarting the machine.
Encryption key that is protected by TPM No For more information on using SMS, see the e-Manual > MEAP.
Information for Web browser settings Yes *4
Quick Menu Information Yes
T-9-1
*1 Can only be backed up using the Remote UI.

*2 Depending on the MEAP application.
*3 You may not be able to back up, depending on the type of the password.
*4 Only the stored Favorite Settings can be backed up.
9-27
9
Installation > HDD Data Encryption Kit-C6 > Points to Note Regarding Data Backup/Export
9 Installation > HDD Data Encryption Kit-C6 > Making a Backup of the Data (reference only) > Stop of MEAP Applications, Disabling, Download of D
9-28
Making a Backup of the Data (reference only) 5) Click [Check Status].
6) Check the batch export result.
The data items that have been backed up may be restored when the this product has been
installed. These data items are property of the user, and the restoration work must be
■■Backup of MEAP Application
performed by the system administrator.
The method of restoration is described in the Users Guide. See Table (Data to be backed up) When a MEAP application has been installed, the data and license that the MEAP application
in Points to Note About Installation of the Installation Procedure. retains will be deleted. If no MEAP application is installed, there is no need to make a backup.
If a MEAP application has a backup function, make a backup of the data peculiar to the
MEAP application using this function. With regard to the license, there is a need to stop all
■■Procedure for Import/Export ALL of User Settings
applications from SMS (Service Management Service), invalidate the license, and download
Following data can be batch exported. the invalid license file.
• Settings/Registration Basic Information The overview of procedures for stop of MEAP applications, Disabling of the license, and
• Paper Type Management Settings download of an Disabled license file is described below.For more information, see the
• Printer Settings MEAPSMS Administrator Guide.
• Box Settings
■■Stop of MEAP Applications, Disabling, Download of Disabled
• Department ID Management Settings
• Main Menu Settings License Files and Uninstallation
• Favorite Settings
1) Select the URL given below and access SMS.
• Address Book
http://[IP address of the device]:8000/sms/
• Quick Menu Settings
The default password is MeapSmsLogin. If a user has changed the password, ask the user
• MEAP Application Setting Information
to change the password again after the use of this product is started.
• User Setting Information
CAUTION:
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
The default password is MeapSmsLogin. If a user has changed the password, ask the
http://[IP address of the device]/
user to change the password again after the use of this product is started.
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password 2) Click [MEAP Application Management].
in Password, and then click [Administrator Login]. 3) Click [Stop] button of the application you want to stop on the MEAP Application
2) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Import/ Management page.
Export ALL] > [Export]. 4) Check the status of MEAP Application is [Stop],
3) Select items to export. 5) Click on the name of applications to disable.
6) Click [License Control], and then click [Disable].
CAUTION: 7) Click [Yes] in a confirmation window for disabling the license.
When exporting only specific items, this may cause setting information relating to 8) Return to the MEAP Application Management page and click on the appropriate application
multiple items to lose its relations and cause setting details to be switched. names.
In this case, export all related items simultaneously. 9) Click [License Management] on the Application/License Information page.
10) Click [Download].
4) Enter the password into [Encryption Password] and click on [Start Exporting].
9-28
9
Installation > HDD Data Encryption Kit-C6 > Making a Backup of the Data (reference only) > Stop of MEAP Applications, Disabling, Download of D
9 Installation > HDD Data Encryption Kit-C6 > Installation Outline Drawing
9-29
11) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file.
Setting Before Turning OFF the Power
Set a distinctive name for the disabled license file so that you can recognize it for which
application. After you download the disabled license file to your PC, click [Delete].
Click [Yes] in a confirmation window for license deletion. CAUTION:
12) Return to the MEAP Application Management page, click [Uninstall] button of the Be sure to turn OFF the main power after executing this service mode setting.
application you want to uninstall. Click [Yes] in a confirmation window for uninstallation. Turning OFF the main power without executing service mode causes "E602-5001
If there are several applications, repeat the procedures 1) to 7). (procedure error before installing the HDD Encryption Board)" to occur when turning
13) After the use of this product is started, re-install the application using an application file (jar ON the main power after installing the Encryption Board.
file) of each application from SMS and the disabled license file (lic file). When this error occurs, the machine needs to be returned again to the initial state in
which no Encryption Board is installed.
■■User Authentication Information Registered by SSO-H (Single

Sign-ON H) 1) Execute the following service mode (level 1).
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > HD-CRYP
In the case that the MEAP login application has been changed to SSO-H, there is a need to
make a backup of the user authentication information.
1) Access the URL given below. Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power
http://[IP address of the device]:8000/sso/
Check that the main power switch is OFF.
2) Login with the user name and password registered as an administrator in SSO-H.
1) Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine.
The default administrator user name and password are as follows:
2) Be sure that Control Panel Display and Main Power Lamp are both turned OFF, and then
User Name: Administrator
Password: password
3) Click [User Control].
4) Put a checkmark to Select All, and then click [Export].
5) Leave the file format and character code as defaults and click [Start Export].
6) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file and click
[Save].
F-9-72
9-29
9
Installation > HDD Data Encryption Kit-C6 > Installation Outline Drawing
9 Installation > HDD Data Encryption Kit-C6 > Installation Procedure
9-30
Installation Procedure
3) Remove the Controller Sub Cover.
• 1 Screw
1) Remove the Reader PCB Cover. • 2 Hooks
• 1 Claw
Claw
Hook
F-9-75
F-9-73
2) Remove the Rear Cover.

• 6 Screws
• 2 Claws
Claw
x6
x2
F-9-74
9-30
9
Installation > HDD Data Encryption Kit-C6 > Installation Procedure
9-31
4) Remove the Controller Cover. 5) Install the Encryption Board to the Controller Cover.
• 1 Hook
CAUTION: • 4 Screws (TP; M3x6)
When removing the Controller Cover, be careful not to give a shock to the HDD
attached inside it.
• 4 Screws
• 2 Connectors
• 2 Hooks
• 1 Protrusion x4
Protrusion Hook
x2 Hook
Hook
x4 F-9-77
6) Install the Harness Guide.

• 2 Hooks
• 1 Boss
Connector Hook
F-9-76
Boss
Hook
F-9-78
9-31
9
9-32
7) Remove the Signal Cable and the Power Cable of the host machine from the HDD. 9) Install the 3 Wire Saddles.
(The removed cables will not be used.)
• 2 Connectors
• 1 Edge Saddle
x2
F-9-81
Edge Saddle 10) Connect the connector of the Power Cable (270mm; A:HDD-Pow1) to the HDD, fix
F-9-79 the cable to the Harness Guide, and then connect it to the connector of the Encryption
Board.
8) Connect the Signal Cable (135mm; A:Cont-Sig) and the Power Cable (135mm; A:Cont-Pow)
to the Encryption Board.
• 2 Connectors Power Supply Cable
• 1 Edge Saddle (270mm; A:HDD-Pow1)
x2
Power Supply Cable Signal Cable
(135mm; A:Cont-Pow) (135mm; A:Cont-Sig)
x2
F-9-82
Edge Saddle
F-9-80
9-32
9
9-33
11) Connect the connector of the Signal Cable (250mm; A:HDD-Sig) to the HDD, fix the 13) Install the removed covers to their original positions.
cable to the Harness Guide, and then connect it to the connector of the Encryption Board. • Controller Cover (4 screws, 2 connectors)
• Controller Sub Cover (1 screw)
• Rear Cover (6 screws)
• Reader PCB Cover
Signal Cable
(250mm; A:HDD-Sig)
14) Connect the power plug of the host machine to the power outlet.
x2
F-9-83
12) Secure the Power Cable (270mm; A:HDD-Pow1) and the Signal Cable (250mm;
A:HDD-Sig) with the 3 Wire Saddles as shown in the figure.
x3
F-9-84
9-33
9
9 Installation > HDD Data Encryption Kit-C6 > Checking the Security Mark
9-34
HDD Initialization Procedure 7) Press the key on the Control Panel in the following order.
• Press any key.
1. Requirements • [1] : Format HDD (ALL)
1) PC • [0] : OK
Service support tool in the version that supports this host machine must be installed. • [Reset] : Start shutdown sequence
2) Cross Ethernet Cable • [0] : OK (The power of the host machine is turned OFF automatically.)
8) Turn ON the power of the host machine.
2. Preparing for the Installation of the System Software of Host machine 9) After the host machine has been restarted, remove the USB memory from the mount mark
1) If both PC and the machine are on, turn them off.
( ) on the lower side of the screen.
2) Connect the PC and the machine using an Cross Ethernet cable.
3) Turn on the PC.
Checking the Security Version
3. Selecting the System Software
1) Press the Counter Check key on the control panel.
1) Set the CD containing the latest system software in the PC on which the SST is used.
2) Press the [Check Device Configuration] key appearing on the control panel.
2) Start up the SST.
3) Make sure that ‘2.00’ or '2.01' is displayed in ‘Canon MFP Security Chip’ as version
3) Click ‘Register Firmware’.
information of the security chip.
4) Select the drive in which the System Software CD has been set, and click ‘SEARCH’.
When several Encryption Boards are installed, multiple version information is displayed.
5) Click ‘REGISTER’.
6) Click OK. CAUTION:
The user will be able to make sure that the encryption board fitted with a security chip
4. Initializing HDD
of the correct version with CC Certification is functioning normally by referring to the
< In case of SST > version information indicated for 'Canon MFP Security Chip'.
1) Start up the machine in download mode (safe mode).
2) Start up the SST.
3) Select the model. Then, select "Single" and click "Start".
4) Execute the"Format HDD". Checking the Security Mark
5) After formatting is completed, shut down and restart the host machine. The user may check the security mark, appearing on the control panel when using the host
6) Terminate the SST. machine to make sure that an appropriate level of security is being maintained. The mark
appears when the machine is equipped with an Encryption Board and the board is operating
< In case of USB memory > correctly. The Users Guide provides the following description in connection with the security
1) Connect the USB memory to the PC. mark:
2) Start up SST, and click the USB icon displayed in the target selection screen.
3) Select Drive > Model Series > Version to be written in USB memory, and then click < Confirming the Security Mark >
"Confirm"
When the HDD Data Encryption Kit is operating normally, a security mark ( ) is displayed
4) Click "Start". After writing in USB memory is completed, remove the USB memory. on the lower left corner of a panel screen.
5) Terminate the SST.
6) Connect the USB memory to the host machine, and start the machine with download mode
(safe mode).
9-34
9
Installation > HDD Data Encryption Kit-C6 > Checking the Security Mark
9 Installation > HDD Data Encryption Kit-C6 > Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment
9-35
Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of the
Work
When you have completed all installation work, report to the system administrator for the
following:
At the point when installation is completed, make explanations about how to check that
the appropriate security function has been added and enabled so that, when the function
becomes uncontrolled, the system administrator can immediately detect the problem and
request <Servicing work when a failure occurs>.
Completion of the Installation Work:

Ask the system administrator to make sure that ‘2.00’ or '2.01' is indicated for ‘Canon MFP
Security Chip’ as the version information of the security chip by referring to the description
of Checking the Security Version.
Maintenance of the Security Functions:

Ask the system administrator to check the security mark to make sure that the security
functions are maintained each time the machine is started up by referring to the description
of Checking the Security Mark.
Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment

When this product is installed, the machine initializes its HDD, resetting the data used for
auto gradation adjustment.
Therefore be sure to execute auto gradation adjustment (full adjust) after installing this kit.
9-35
9
Installation > HDD Data Encryption Kit-C6 > Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment
9 Installation > PCL International Font Set-B1 > Installation Procedure > Register Andale Font using the SST
9-36
PCL International Font Set-B1 Checking the Contents

• License Access Number Certificate
Preparation • Font set software CD
●● Andale Font Data file

It is contained in a file in the Font Set Software CD. Installation Procedure
●● PC that supports SST

■■Register Andale Font using the SST
Transfer the Andale Font Data to a USB memory device using SST Ver.4.72 or later. ●● System CD => SST
Register the system software, which is included in the system CD, in the SST.
●● USB memory device
Connect it to the host machine, and register Andale Font in Download Mode. Preparation
Requirements:
• PC with SST Ver. 4.72 or later installed
NOTE: • Font set software CD containing Andale Font
• In this procedure, use a USB memory device where the system software for the host
machine has been registered using the SST.
• Unless the LMS of Andale Font included in the kit is enabled, the installed font cannot be System software registration procedure
used.
<Checking procedure> 1) Start the PC.
Counter Check > Check Device Configuration
2) Load the Font Set Software CD into the PC.
Check that "PCL International Font Set-B1" is displayed.
3) Start SST.
4) Click the "Register Firmware" button.
PCL International Font Set-B1
F-9-85
F-9-86
9-36
9
Installation > PCL International Font Set-B1 > Installation Procedure > Register Andale Font using the SST
9 Installation > PCL International Font Set-B1 > Installation Procedure > Register Andale Font using the SST
9-37
5) Select the drive where the Font Set Software CD has been loaded, then click the 7) "Registered firmware" will appear. Click the "OK" button.
"SEARCH" button.
F-9-89
F-9-87
6) The font list in the Font Set Software CD will appear.

Click the "REGISTER" button.
F-9-88
9-37
9
Installation > PCL International Font Set-B1 > Installation Procedure > Register Andale Font using the SST
9 Installation > PCL International Font Set-B1 > Installation Procedure > Register Andale Font in the USB memory device
9-38
■■Register Andale Font in the USB memory device
5) Select the drive (removable disk) where the USB memory storage device is inserted.
●● SST > USB memory device
Register the system software, which has been registered in the SST, in the USB memory
device.
Preparation
Requirements:
• PC with SST Ver. 4.72 or later installed
• USB memory storage device
• Requirements for USB memory storage device:
Interface: USB 1.1 or later (USB 2.0 is recommended)
Memory capacity: 1GB or more is recommended (the total file size of the system software
is approx. 500MB).
Format: FAT (FAT 16), FAT32 (NTFS and HFS are not supported). The memory is formatted
in a partition (multiple partitions are not supported)
F-9-91
Unavailable USB memory: memory that is protected by a password or the encryption
technology.
6) Select “Series” and “Version” (the System Version).
System software registration procedure
1) Start the PC.

2) Insert the USB memory storage device to the slot of the PC.
3) Start SST.
4) Click the USB icon shown in "Select the target" Screen.
F-9-92
F-9-90
9-38
9
Installation > PCL International Font Set-B1 > Installation Procedure > Register Andale Font in the USB memory device
9 Installation > PCL International Font Set-B1 > Installation Procedure > Register Andale Font in the USB memory device
9-39
7) Select the file you want to register in the USB memory device, and select "Confirm". 9) A message "Firmware export to the USB storage is completed." will appear. Select "OK".
F-9-93 F-9-95
8) Select "Start". NOTE:

The folder name "iA500" needs to be changed if the model name differs.
Press the Counter Check button to refer to the displayed model names.
Example: iR-ADV 500(iA500) -> iA500
Andale Font can be registered by a means other than the above. It can be registered by
using SST Ver.4.72 or later.
F-9-94
9-39
9
Installation > PCL International Font Set-B1 > Installation Procedure > Register Andale Font in the USB memory device
9 Installation > PCL International Font Set-B1 > Installation Procedure > Register Andale Font in the host machine
9-40
■■Register Andale Font in the host machine CAUTION:
●● Connection Depending on the manufacturer or the model, this machine may not recognize the USB
Preparation memory storage device.
Item to prepare: A USB memory device where the system software for this machine has been This machine retries the detection of a USB memory storage device for up to 60
registered seconds after power-ON. The above menu is not displayed if the recognition of a USB
memory storage device is failed within the time period.
Procedure In such a case, use another USB memory storage device.
1) If the host machine is connected with a network cable, disconnect it.

2) Connect the USB memory device to the USB port. ●● Downloading Andale Font
1) Select "[1]: Select Version".
[[[[[[[[[[[ Root Menu (USB) ]]]]]]]]]]]]

--------------------------------------------
[1] : Select Version
[4] : Clear/Format
[5] : Backup/Restore
[8] : Download File
F-9-96
[Reset]: start shutdown sequence
3) Switch to the download mode to use.
F-9-97
• In the case of normal mode (Recommended)
Select the following in Service Mode: COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > 2) Select "[1]: PCL_Option_Font_andele_01".
DOWNLOAD; and then press [OK].
• In the case of safe mode (This mode should not be used as general rule. To be used [[[[[[[[[ Select Version (USB) ]]]]]]]]]
only when normal startup fails, such as a system error, etc.) ----------------------------------------
While pressing 2 + 8 keys at the same time, turn ON the Main Power Switch.
[1] : PCL_Option_Font_andele_01
Once this machine recognizes the USB memory storage device, the following menu is
[C] : Return to Root Menu
displayed on the Control Panel.
F-9-98
9-40
9
Installation > PCL International Font Set-B1 > Installation Procedure > Register Andale Font in the host machine
9 Installation > PCL International Font Set-B1 > Installation Procedure > Confirmation of the application condition
9-41
■■Operation check after making the settings
3) Select "[1]: Update".
Output the font list, and check that the font has been added.
[[[[ AddCL Update Main Menu (USB) ]]]]] 1) Settings/Registration > Function Settings > Printer > Output Report > PCL > Font List
---------------------------------------- 2) Select "Yes".
[1] : Update
[4] : Clear/Format
[5] : Backup/Restore
[8] : Download File
[C] : Return to Select Version
[Reset]: Start shutdown sequence
F-9-99
4) Select "0".
/[1] Update selected. Execute?/

- (OK) : 0 / (CANCEL) : Any other keys -
F-9-101
F-9-100
NOTE:
Unless the LMS of Andale Font included in the kit is enabled, the installed font cannot
5) Completion of the update automatically restarts the device. be used.
■■Confirmation of the application condition

Please ask End User to confirm Readme.txt specifying terms and condition of using this
software, which is included in Font Set Software CD.
9-41
9
Installation > PCL International Font Set-B1 > Installation Procedure > Confirmation of the application condition
Appendix
■
■Service Tools
■
■General Timing Chart
■
■General Circuit Diagram
■
■List of User Mode
■
■Backup Data
Appendix > Service Tools > Special Tools
10-2
Service Tools
Special Tools
In addition to the standard tools set, the following special tools are required when servicing the machine:
Tool name Tool No. Rank (*) Shape Uses
Digital multimeter FY9-2002 A For making electrical checks.
Tester extension pin FY9-3038 A As an addition when making an electrical check.
Tester extension pin FY9-3039 A As an addition when making an electrical check.

(L-shipped)
NA-3 Test Chart FY9-9196 A For checking and adjusting images.
T-10-1
*
A: each service engineer is expected to carry one.
B: each group of 5 service engineers is expected to carry one.
C: each workshop is expected to carry one.
10-2
Appendix > Service Tools > Special Tools
Appendix > Service Tools > Oils and Solvents
10-3
Oils and Solvents
Name Uses Composition Remarks
Alcohol Cleaning; e.g., Fluoride-family hydrocarbon • Do not bring near fire.
glass, plastic, rubber; external covers. Alcohol • Procure locally.
Surface activating agent • Substitute: IPA (isopropyl alcohol)
Water
Solvent Cleaning; e.g., Fluoride-family hydrocarbon • Do not bring near fire.
metal; oil or toner stain. Chlorine-family hydrocarbon • Procure locally
Alcohol • Substitute: MEK
Lubricating oil (EM-50L) Lubrication; e.g., gears. Special oil • Tool No.: HY9-0007
Special solid lubricating agent
Lithium soap
Lubricating oil Lubrication; e.g., Silicone oil • Tool No.: FY9-6022
drive areas, friction areas, scanner rail.
T-10-2
10-3
Appendix > Service Tools > Oils and Solvents
10-4
General Timing Chart
Basic sequence at printing (A4 single-sided print (2 sheets), cassette)

Appendix > General Timing Chart > Basic sequence at printing (A4 single-sided print (2 sheets), cassette)
Appendix > General Timing Chart > Basic sequence at printing (A4 single-sided print (2 sheets), cassette)
Start key ON
Sequence STBY INTR PRINT LSTR STBY
Main Motor (M2)
Primary charging AC bias
Primary charging DC bias
Developing AC bias
Developing DC bias
Transfer bias
Static eliminator bias
Laser
Pickup Motor (M8)
Cassette Pickup Solenoid (SL3)
Cassette Pickup Sensor (PS13)
Registration Sensor (PS11)
Registration Clutch (CL1)
Fixing Motor (M1)
Delivery Sensor (PS5)
Fixing Heater (H1)
Sub Heater (H2)

F-10-1
10-4
10-5
Basic sequence at printing (A4 double-sided print (1 sheet), cassette)
Start key ON
Appendix > General Timing Chart > Basic sequence at printing (A4 double-sided print (1 sheet), cassette)
Appendix > General Timing Chart > Basic sequence at printing (A4 double-sided print (1 sheet), cassette)
Sequence STBY INTR PRINT LSTR STBY
Main Motor (M2)
Primary charging AC bias
Primary charging DC bias
Developing AC bias
Developing DC bias
Transfer bias
Static eliminator bias
Laser
Pickup Motor (M8)
Cassette Pickup Solenoid (SL3)
Cassette Pickup Sensor (PS13)
Registration Sensor (PS11)
Registration Clutch (CL1)
Reverse Feed Motor (M4) Reverse rotation
Reverse Feed Solenoid (SL2)
Reverse Sensor (PS6)
Duplex Feed Motor (M7)
Duplex Feed Sensor (PS8)
Fixing Motor (M1)
Delivery Sensor (PS5)
Fixing Heater (H1)
Sub Heater (H2)

F-10-2
10-5
10-6
General Circuit Diagram

■■General Circuit Diagram (1/10)
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J79DH
F +3.3V J79D
F
3
J79L
N.C
J26
2
SW1
1
4
H3
1
4
SW DET
1
1
PCB2
2
3
J7021
2
3
2
Main Switch
3
Drum Heater
2
GND
3
2
MT2
3
2
J25
Main Controller PCB
4
1
+5V
4
1
4
1
J78D J78L
J78DH
J3
1 2 J7010 J7011
J7003
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
MT3
PCB7
Control Panel CPU PCB
J1002
E E
1 2 3
1 2 J11M
1 2 J11F
2
SW3
NO
J22F 1 2 3 4
SOLD7 SOLD5 J70L 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
J22M
Cover Switch J70DH 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
3 4 COM
1
J70D
1 2 3 J80M
J80F 1 2 3
1 2
ADDON FANROCK
MAINSW OFF DET

ADDON FANHALF
ADDON FANFULL
SOLD6 SOLD4
SW4
RMT DCON
RMT CONT
Drum Heater Switch
+12V_CB
RMT SYS
QUICK N
+12V CB
+24VR1
+24VR1
D D
+3.3VR
GND
GND
+3.3U
GND
GND
N.C
N.C
H
N
3 2 1 1 2 3 4 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3
1 2 3
J901 J103 J106 J120 J121
To Finisher
J2521DH
J2521DA A5 B4 1 2 3 4
J2521DB PCB4
AC Driver PCB (1/3)
C C
L GND
4
+5VR
3
P GND J109
2
+24VR2
1
J100
1 2 J104 J108
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1
5
H
N
GND
+24VU
+24VU
GND
+5VR
GND
GND
+24VR1
+24VR1
+24VR1
L GND
L GND
+5VR
P GND
+24VR2
MT10
4
SOLD1 SOLD3
SOLD2
FIN DOWNLOAD
J161
ENGINE ENBL
B B
FIN RESET
J72M
1
2
3
5 4 3 2 1
FIN ENBL
5 4 3 2 1
FIN RXD
FIN DCT
FIN TXD
J72F
GND
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1
J207
J201 J903
PCB1 PCB3
DC Controller PCB (1/4) Reader Controller PCB (1/3)
A A
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
P.1
F-10-3
10-6
10-7
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

F PCB8 F
PCB4
HVT PCB (1/2)
AC Driver PCB (2/3)
J101 J105
3 2 1 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J301
29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PSU FAN LOCK

GND
+24VR
GND
GND
ZERO CROSS
H_RELAY1
HEATER2 ON
HEATER1 ON
ENV HEATER ON
H_RELAY2
DOOR OPEN
CHRG DC CTRL
CHRG AC CTRL
CHRG AC DRV
DEV DC CTRL
DEV AC DRV*
TR CURRENT
CHRG DC ON
TR CC CTRL
DEV AC ON*
CHRG I SNS
TR N DC ON
DEV DC ON
FIX N CTRL
DIS DC ON
TR P DRV*
FIX N DRV
FIX P DRV
E E
DIS CTRL
TR CHG
DC CLK
+24VU
+24VU
MUTE
+3.3V
J2216
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
1 2 3
J2216H 3 2 1
H2
H1
H-COM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
321
J216 J202
J205
GND
9 10 11 12
MT1 GND
FM4 SUB TH
GND
Power Supply Cooling Fan MAIN TH
8
TH DCT
PCB1
7
FUSER EXIT SEN J206
6
GND
D DC Controller PCB (2/4) D
5
+5V
4
FUSER RELEASE SEN
3
GND
2
+5V
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
J10D
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J10DH J209
J10L 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
DEV FAN(R) LOCK

GND
+24VR
DEV FAN(F) LOCK
GND
+24VR
+5V
R TONER FULL SEN
GND
F COVER SEN
GND
+5V
GND
+24VR
DEV LEVEL SEN
R TONER M ON
+24VR
R TONER TURN SEN
GND
+5V
+3.3V
ENV HUM
GND
ENV TEMP
J2510DWH
6 5 4 3 2 1 J2510DA
B9 A10 J2510DB J111 J444
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
J2510LWH J2510LA
B9 A10 J2510LB
To Fixing Assembly
C 6 5 4 3 2 1
C
N.C
N.C
J15D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
J15DH
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J15L
MT2501
J22D
10
1 N.C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
N.C
N.C
N.C
J22DH
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J22L
J2511 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 J60D
9
1
1
B 6 5 4 3 2 1 J60LH
B
N.C
N.C
N.C
J60L
H2 H1 J2205
J2204
1 2 3
J3D
J3DH
Sub Heater
1 2 3
Fixing Heater J2302 1 2 3
1 2 3
3 2 1
J2302H J3L
MT2505
1 2 3
2
J2501
TH2
1 2 3
1 2 3 J2303 J2207 1 2 3 4 J2203
1 2 1 2
1 2 3 J2502 J2303H
PS1
J2512 1 2 3 J2207H 1 2 3 4
3 2 1
2
N.C
2 1
PS2
1 2 3
THU1
1 2 3
2
TP1
1
Front Cover J2209 J2206

TP
TH1
1 2 3
PS19
3 2 1
THM2 Waste Toner

1 2 3 4
Sensor
321 2 1
Fixing Thermoswitch
1 2 3
Environment Sensor
PS18
1
Fixing Paper Full Sensor 1 2 3 4

2
M
MT2503
MT2502
Sub Thermistor
MT2506
321
Sensor Fixing Pressure

FM7 TS2 M3 PS3
THM1 Release Sensor
Developing Assembly
Waste Toner Waste Toner Motor
MT2504
A Developing Cooling A
Main Thermistor
Fan (Front)
FM8 Toner Sensor
Motor Rotation Sensor
Developing Cooling
Fan (Rear)
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
P.2
F-10-4
10-7
10-8
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

M9 PS14
Lifter Motor PS17 FM5 FM6
SL3 PS13 Cassette Lifting
PS15 Cassette Paper
SL1 SL2
F Plate Sensor Multi-purpose Tray Reverse Feed Heat Exhaust Heat Exhaust F
Cassette Pickup
M
Cassette Pickup Cassette Paper Level Sensor B
Pickup Solenoid Solenoid Fan (Front) Fan (Rear) PS9
Solenoid
1 2
Sensor Sensor PS7
PS16 Arch Sensor
3 2 1
SW2 SL 1 2 3 3 2 1 3 2 1 PS20 SL SL
PS8 Multi-purpose Tray
M8
1 2
Cassette Paper Paper Sensor
3
123 123
Cassette Size 1 2
3 2 1 3 2 1 J2237 3 2 1
3 2 1
Transparency Duplex Feed Sensor
Pickup Motor Detection Switch 1 2 J2235H
3 2 1 3 2 1 Level Sensor A J2240
Sensor 1 2 1 2 3 3 2 1
J2235 J2238 3 2 1 J2219H 1 2 3 1 2 3 3 2 1 J2223

2 1 J2236
5 4 3 2 1 2 1 J2218H J2219 3 2 1
M J2218 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
3 2 1
J2234H 3 2 1
3 2 1 3 2 1
N.C
5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 J2234 3 2 1 J2220H J2221H J2217
3 2 1 J2220 J2221 J2222 J5L
1 2 3 4 5 6 J2241 J2239 1 2 3
J2233 J2301
3 2 1
J5D
J5DH
E 1 2 3 4 5
J13L
1 2
J14L
J14LH
E
5 4 3 2 1
J13DH
J13D 2 1 J14D
J9L
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
J9DH
J20L 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J8L
J9D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
1 2 3 4 J20LH
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
4 3 2 1 J8D
J20D
J8DH
EXHAUST R FAN LOCK

EXHAUST F FAN LOCK
MULTI FEED SL ON
MULTI PAPER SEN

CST LEVEL A SEN
CST LEVEL B SEN
REVERSE SL ON
CST PAPER SEN
DUPLEX SEN
FEED SL ON
ROOP SEN
CST SIZE 4
CST SIZE 3
CST SIZE 2
CST SIZE 1
FEED M B*
FEED M A*
FEED SEN
LIFT M ON
D D
FEED M B
FEED M A
OHP SEN
LIFT SEN
+24FU2
+24VR
+24VR
+24VR
+24VR
+24VR
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
J213 J212
PCB1
DC Controller PCB (3/4)
J210 J203 J211
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
C C
PRE REGIST SEN

+24VU
FUSER M FG*
GND
FUSER M ACC
FUSER M DEC
FUSER M CW/CCW
MAIN M FG*
MAIN M DEC
MAIN M ACC
GND
GND
+24VU
+24VU
DUPLEX M B*
DUPLEX M B
DUPLEX M A*
DUPLEX M A
N.C
+5V
GND
+5V
REGIST SEN
GND
SLEEVE CL ON
+24VR
REGIST CL ON
+24VR
HOPPER M ON
+24VR
BOTTLE M ON
+24VR
GND
+24VR
HOPPER LEVEL SEN
BOTTLE TURN SEN
GND
+5V
N.C
REVERSE M A*
REVERSE M A
REVERSE M B*
REVERSE M B
REVERSE SEN
GND
+5V
EXIT SEN
GND
+5V
EXIT FULL SEN
GND
+5V
EXIT FAN LOCK(R)
GND
+24VR
EXIT FAN LOCK(F)
GND
+24VR
REAR FAN LOCK
GND
+24VR
J21D
J21DH 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 J6D
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
J21L 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J6LH
1 2 3
J2213 J6L
J2213H
3 2 1
J7D
B 321 4 3 2 1
J50D
1 2 3 4 5 6 J7DH
B
6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 J50LH
J40D J7L J2229 J2228
1 2 3 4 5 6 J2229H
J50L J2228H
6 5 4 3 2 1 J40LH
6 5 4 3 2 1 J2D 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J2227
J40L J2226
FM2 J1D
1 2 3 4 5 6 J2LH
J2L
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1
2 1
2 1
2 1
2 J2227H J2226H
1 2 3 4
J2225 1 2 3
J2224
J1LH J2230
Delivery Cooling
1 2 1 2 1 2 3
J2215 J1L 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4
2 1 2 1 P S
J2215H
J2212
J2214
J2300 Fan (Center) 4 3 2 1 2 1 2 1
TS1
J2214H
PS10
J2300H 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 J2211 J2210 J2201 J2202 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 M
J2232 J2231 CL CL 2 1 2 1
1 2 3
4 3 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
3 2 1
1 2 3 6 5 4 3 2 1
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 3
M M
Hopper Toner Bottle Rotation
1 2 3 1 2 3
3 2 1
M
M
M7 1
P
2 3
S
1
P
2 3
S
CL2 CL1 Sensor Sensor
4 3 2 1
PS6 321
M1
Duplex Feed Developing Registration M6 M5
M2 PS12 PS11
321
M
Reverse PS5 PS4 Fixing Motor

Motor Cylinder Clutch Clutch Hopper Motor Bottle Motor
A Main Motor Pre-Registration Registration A
M4 Sensor Delivery Delivery Paper
Reverse Feed Motor Sensor Full Sensor FM3 FM1 Sensor Sensor
Delivery Cooling
Delivery Cooling
Fan (Front)
Fan (Rear)
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
P.3
F-10-5
10-8
10-9
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

F F
PCB2
Main Controller PCB (2/5)
J6001 J6003 J6002

27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
GND
/TOP
/INT IMG1L
IMG1L GARX
IMG1L GATX
GND
PSTS
PCMD
GND
/RAW BD0
GND
/PLIVEWAKE
/PPI0
/PDOWNLOAD
/IMG SYS RST
GND
/PRESET
PPOWER
/PCPRDY
/PPRDY
GND
/PCTS
/PRTS
/PPRTST
/LASER CND
/PPO3
GND
/LASER CND
DATA D-
DATA D+
GND
DATA A+
DATA A-
GND
DATA B+
DATA B-
GND
DATA C-
DATA C+
GND
/LASER CND
CTRL1_2
CTRL1_1
CTRL1_0
GND
CTRL0_2
CTRL0_1
CTRL0_0
CNT OUT0(PWM)
GND
+5V
GND
RAW BD0
+3.3V
E E
D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 D
J601 J602 J2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
J204
PCB9 PCB10
Laser Driver PCB BD PCB
PCB1
C DC Controller PCB (4/4) S/S C
6
POLYGON M FG
5
+24VR
4
J215 POLYGON M ACC J1
Laser Scanner Motor
3
POLYGON M DEC
2
GND
1
J208 J214
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2
N.C.
OP CST RETRY
OP IRQ
GND
+5V
OP CST RXD
OP CST TXD
OP CST RESET
OP CST TRIGGER
OP CST DOWNLOAD
OP CST MODE2
OP CST MODE1
OP CST DCT
+24VR
GND
Laser Scanner Unit

B B
MT4
6 N.C.
FT1 FT2
1
Separation
PCB8
1
HVT PCB (2/2) FT3 FT4
CZ CZ
Transfer
J2520DB
J2520DA A7 B6 1 2 3 4
A J2520DH
A
To Option Cassette
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
P.4
F-10-6
10-9
10-10
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

SP1
2
2
J7
1
Speaker
1
1
7
F F
2
PCB13
6
3
5
J3
4
J401
Mojular PCB
4
5
3
6
PCB15
2
7
1
Off-hook PCB PCB11
3
L1-GND
J232
G3 FAX PCB PCB12
2
J4
2
L1-24V
1
1
1
J281 2nd Line G3 FAX PCB
J73F
J73M
1 2
7
1
7
2
6
2
6
3
5
3
5
J6
1
1
4
4
4
J8
2
2
3
E E
5
J2
3
3
3
2
6
2
4
4
4
J403
1
7
1
J1 J4
J74F
J74M
J5 5 1
J76DH
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2
J76D
J76L
1 2 3
GND
SET_RST_FAX_N
USB_PP3
USB_PN3
+3.3VR_FAX
L2-12V
L2-GND
1 2 3 4 5 6
D J402 D
PCB14
MODEM SNS
EXB_ADDR1
EXB_ADDR2
EXB_ADDR3
EXB_ADDR4
EXB_ADDR6
EXB_ADDR6
EXB_ADDR7
EXB_ADDR8
RESET_FAX
2nd Line Mojular PCB
+3.3R_FAX
FOFFHK H
FCID_USB
EXB_DT0
EXB_DT1
EXB_DT2
EXB_DT3
EXB_DT4
EXB_DT5
EXB_DT6
EXB_DT7
EXB_WE
EXB_OE
CS_FAX
INT FAX
FCID_H
L2-12VS
L2-GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 1 2 3
J7019 J6006 5 1
J7014
L1-GND
1
PCB2
J7013
L1-12VS
C C
2
C1-GND
3
C1-12VS Main Controller PCB (3/5)

4
J6005 J6
J21
30 28 26 24 22 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 5 1
31 29 27 25 23 21 19 17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1
GND
OC (Not used)
USBA+
USBA-
USBA_VCC
READER FFC OUT
/RESET READER
GND
MOT IRQ
SIZE ON
GND
ADF REVERSE
SENS IRQ
ADF COVER
GND
ADF EXIT
ADF REG
DES
GND
RX3+
RX3-
GND
RXCLK+
RXCLK-
GND
RX1+
RX1-
GND
HPS
SIDATAO
SIDATAI
SILOAD
GND
SICLK
GND
READER FFC IN
GND
+SVS
CC-VI_CPENB
CC-VI_COUNT
CC-VI_CL/BW
CC-VI_L/S
CC-VI_OP
B B
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
5 1
J907
USB Port
PCB3 CC-VI
A Reader Controller PCB (2/3) A
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
P.5
F-10-7
10-10
10-11
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

F F
GND
6
GND
PCB4
5
+24V
J181
4
+24V
AC Driver PCB (3/3)
3
GND
2
+12V
1
J150 J180
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
+3.3VU
+3.3VU
GND
GND
H N N H
E E
6 5 4 3 2 1
J222 1 2 3 4
J333
1
J603
2
J555
3
PCB6 PCB5
12/24V Power Supply PCB All-night Power Supply PCB
D D
PCB2
C C
J7008 J7018 J7008 J7018 J15

2 1 2 1
7 1 7 1 3 2 1
GND
SATA_RxP2_LEG
SATA_RxN2_LEG
GND
SATA_TxN2_LEG
SATA_TxP2_LEG
GND
GND
SATA_RxP2_LEG
SATA_RxN2_LEG
GND
SATA_TxN2_LEG
SATA_TxP2_LEG
GND
+5V
GND
GND
+5V
SNS_FAN_COM
GND
+12VS
B 7 1 7 1 J77 B
5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 J77H
1 2 3
J510 J509 J510 J509
3 2 1
321
J20 J2
PCB16 FM9
HDD
HDD Encryption PCB Main Controller Cooling Fan
5
J3
4
5V
J510
3
GND
A A
2
1
1
When installing Option Kit
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
P.6
F-10-8
10-11
10-12
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

F F
Control Panel Key PCB
J3001
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21
POWER_LED (PKEY_LED_CNT)
E E
POWER_LED
LED_ST_G
LED_TA_G
LED_TA_R
SOFT_SW
DKEY7
DKEY2
DKEY1
DKEY0
SKEY4
SKEY2
SKEY1
SKEY5
SKEY6
SKEY3
SKEY7
SKEY0
GND
+5V
+5V
N.C
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
J1008
D 1 N.C 1 D
+3.3V
+3.3V
GND
GND
LCD TXOUT0- 1
TTP_L
1
Touch Panel
TXOUT0+ TTP_R
GND J1005 TTP_D
TXOUT1- PCB7 4
TTP_U
4
10 TXOUT1+ 10
GND
J1006 Control Panel CPU PCB
TXOUT2-
TXOUT2+
GND
TXCLKOUT-
C TXCLKOUT+
GND
C
N.C
N.C
+3.3V J1001
20 20
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19
POWER_LED
TXCLKOUT+
TXCLKOUT-
RESET_UI
SOFT_SW
SOFT_SW
TXOUT2+
TXOUT1+
TXOUT0+
UI_PRDY
TXOUT2-
TXOUT1-
TXOUT0-
LCD_ON
GND
GND
RxD
TxD
N.C
B B
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18
J4
PCB2
A A
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
P.7
F-10-9
10-12
10-13
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

F F
Contact Image Sensor

E E
J950
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39
MODE CIS
3.3V CIS
3.3V CIS
CS CLK
LEDG1
LEDG2
LEDR1
LEDR2
LEDB1
LEDB2
VIN10
VREF
+24V
+24V
GND
GND
GND
GND
VIN0
GND
VIN1
GND
VIN2
GND
VIN3
GND
VIN4
GND
VIN5
GND
VIN6
GND
VIN7
GND
VIN8
GND
VIN9
GND
GND
D D
SP
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40
J902
Reader Controller PCB (3/3)
J911
J905 6 5 4 3 2 1
C 4 3 2 1
C
A-
B-
A
B
END1
J923 1 2 3
1 2 3
J922 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
PS21
M
CIS HP Sensor
B B
M10
Reader Motor
A A
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
P.8
F-10-10
10-13
10-14
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

F F
ADF Unit
Front
SL8 SL6 SL7
Roller Release Flapper Flapper
PS25 PS24 Solenoid Solenoid 2 Solenoid 1
Reversal Sensor Stay Sensor SL SL SL
2 1 2 1 2 1
1 2 3 1 2 3
J949 J944
1 2 3 1 2 3
E J961 J953
E
1 2 J952 1 2 1 2
J960H 2 1 J936H 2 1 J937H
2 1 MT904
J960 J936 J937
PS23 PS22
Registration Sensor Lead Sensor
1 2 3 1 2 3
J943 J942
1 2 3 1 2 3
D D
SL4 Rear
M12
Registration SL5 M11 PS26 PS27
Delivery Reversal
Solenoid Pickup Solenoid Feed Motor
MT903
Motor Timing Sensor Original Set Sensor
SL SL M M
J948 J957 J941 J959
3 2 1
4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 J934 1 2 3 4 2 1 2 1
J947H 1 2 3 4 J956H J933H 1 2 3 4 5 6 J958H 2 1 MT902
1 2 3 J925H 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1
J956 J933 3 2 1 3 2 1
J947 J958 J925 J928 J929 J930 J931
J954 J955 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
1 2
1 2 J927H
J926H 2 1
2 1
J926 J927
B-
A-
B-
A-
B
A
C C
MT901
1 2 3 4 5 6
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
J910 J912 J908 J906 J909
B PCB3 B
A A
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
P.9
F-10-11
10-14
10-15
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

F SL101 M102 F
To Upper Cassette Module Cassette Pickup Solenoid
M101 Lifter Motor
or Host Machine SL
Pickup Motor 1 2 J1002H
M
SOLD2
1
J1802DWH SOLD1
J1002
2 1
J1802DA
A7 B6 1 2 3 4 M
J1802DB
6 5 4 3 2 1
J1003 J1001D
6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3
J1001L
3 2 1
J1001LH
1
MT1
1 2 3 4 5 J1805D
1
E 5 4 3 2 1
J1805L
J1805LH
E
OPC_LIFT_MOTOR ON
OPC_FEED_SOL ON
OPC_FEED_/MA
OPC_FEED_/MB
UP_OPC_DCT
OPC_FEED_MB
OPC_FEED_MA
OPC_MODE1
OPC_MODE2
OPC_RESET
OPC_REQ
OPC_RXD
OPC_TRG
OPC_TXD
OPC_IRQ
OPC_DL
GND(P)
GND(L)
GND(L)
+24R
+24R
+24R
+5V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1 2
J802 J801 J805 J807
D D
1
PCB101
J808
2
3
Cassette Module Controller PCB
4
J804 J803 J806
1 2 3
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
GND(L)
OPC_PAPER_SENS
OPC_SIZE_1
OPC_SIZE_2
GND(L)
OPC_SIZE_3
OPC_SIZE_4
OPC_DOOR_SENS
GND(L)
+5V
OPC_LEVEL_B_SENS
GND(L)
+5V
OPC_LEVEL_A_SENS
GND(L)
+5V
OPC_RETRY_SENS
+5V
GND(L)
+5V
OPC_LIFT_SENS
GND(L)
+5V
OPC_FEED_SENS
GND(L)
+5V
OPC_REQ
OPC_IRQ
GND(L)
+5V
OPC_RXD
OPC_TXD
OPC_RESET
OPC_TRG
OPC_DL
OPC_MODE1
OPC_MODE2
L_OPC_DCT
GND(L)
+24R
GND(P)
C C
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 J1806D
1
J1806DH
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J1806L
B MT2 B
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
1 2 3
J1010 J1009 J1008 J1007 J1006 J1005 J1004
J1011
J1802LWH 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
SW101
1 2 3 4
A7 B6 J1802LA
J1802LB
Cassette Size PS103 PS102 PS107
To Lower Cassette Module
Detection Switch
PS106 PS105 PS104 PS101
Cassette Right Cassette Paper Cassette Paper Cassette Retry Sensor Cassette Paper Cassette Lifting Plate Cassette Pickup
Cover Sensor Level Sensor B Level Sensor A Sensor Detection Sesnor Sensor
A A
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
P.10
F-10-12
10-15
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Display Settings
10-16
List of User Mode
Environment Settings
■■Paper Settings
* Default Settings
Item Setting Description Device Information DeliveryAvailable
Paper Settings Plain*, Heavy 1 (25 bond-28 bond), Color (17 bond-24 bond), Recycled, Pre-Punched, Envelope No
A5R/STMTR Original Selection A5R, STMT* No
Paper Type Management Settings Details/Edit Yes
• Name, Category, Basis Weight, Type, Finish, Color
Duplicate, Delete No
Register Multi-Purpose Tray Defaults On, Off* No
Register Custom Size S1 to S4:Register/Edit, Delete, Rename Yes
T-10-3
■■Display Settings
* Default Settings
*1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional product is available for use.
Item Setting Description Device Information DeliveryAvailable
Default Screen at Startup Main Menu*, Quick Menu, Copy, Fax, Scan and Send, Scan and Store, Access Stored Files, Fax/I-Fax Inbox, No
Secure Print, Scanner, Web Access*1, Tutorial, Workflow Composer*1
Open Status Monitor/Cancel: On, Off* No
Default Screen (Status Monitor/Cancel) Default Status Type: Copy/Print*, Send, Receive, Store, Consumables No
Status/Log: Job Status*, Log No
Details: Print Jobs, Send Jobs, Receive Jobs, Copy, Fax, Forward, Local Print, Printer, RX Print, Print Report No
Display Fax Function On*, Off No
Enable Fax in Scan and Send Function: On*, Off No
Store Location Display Settings Network: On*, Off No
Memory Media: On, Off* No
Language/Keyboard Switch On/Off On, Off* No
Language/Keyboard Switch Language, Keyboard Layout No
Use Keyboard Shift Lock Feature On, Off* No
Display Remaining Paper Message On*, Off No
No. of Copies/Job Duration Status On*, Off No
Display Original Scanning Cleaning Area On*, Off No
Paper Type Selection Screen Priority Simple*, Detailed No
mm/Inch Entry Switch mm, inch* Yes
ID/User Name Display On/Off On*, Off No
T-10-4
10-16
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Display Settings
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Network
10-17
■■Timer/Energy Settings
* Default Settings
Item Setting Description Device Information Delivery Available
Adjust Time 00: 00 to 23: 59, in one minute increments No
Date/Time Settings Date and Time Setting (12 digit number) No
Time Zone: GMT -12: 00 to GMT +12: 00 (GMT -05:00*) No
Daylight Saving Time: On, Off* No
Start Date (Month/Day/Time (0 to 23)) (March, 2nd, Sunday, 2:00)* No
End Date (Month/Day/Time (0 to 23)) (November, 1st, Sunday, 2:00)* No
Time Format 24 Hour, 12 Hour* No
Quick Startup Settings for Main Power On*, Off Yes
Auto Reset Time 0 (Off), 10 to 50 seconds in 10 seconds increments, 1 to 9 minutes in one minute increments (2minutes*) Yes
Restrict Auto Reset Time On, Off* Yes
Function After Auto Reset Initial Function*, Selected Function Yes
Auto Sleep Time 10 secs, 1, 2, 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50 mins., 1 hour, 90 mins., 2, 3, 4 hours (1 mins*)*1 Yes
Sleep Mode Energy Use Low*, High Yes
Auto Sleep Weekly Timer Sunday to Saturday, 00: 00 to 23: 59, in one minute increments Yes
Sleep Mode Exit Time Settings 00: 00 to 23: 59, in one minute increments Yes
*1 It is recommended that you use the default setting for this item. T-10-5
■■Network
If you are configuring the settings for the first time in "Interface Settings," "TCP/IPv4 Settings," "TCP/IPv6 Settings," or "Settings Common to TCP/IPv4 and TCP/IPv6," use the control panel of the
machine. After configuring the TCP/IP settings, you can change them using the Remote UI.
If you are using a NetWare network, you must use the TCP/IP protocol if you want to specify settings using software other than the control panel of the machine.
* Default Settings
Can be set in Remote Device Information
Item Setting Description
UI Delivery Available
Output Report Yes, No Yes No
Confirm Network Connection Set. Changes On, Off* No Yes
TCP/IP Settings
IPv4 Settings
Use IPv4 On*, Off Yes No
IP Address Settings IP Address: 0.0.0.0* Yes No
Subnet Mask: 0.0.0.0* Yes No
Gateway Address: 0.0.0.0* Yes No
Auto IP: On, Off* Yes No
DHCP: On, Off* Yes Yes
DHCP Option Settings Acquire Host Name: On*, Off Yes No
DNS Dynamic Update: On, Off* Yes No
PING Command IP Adress: 0.0.0.0* No No
10-17
10-18
IPv6 Settings
Use IPv6 On, Off* Yes No
Stateless Address Settings Use Stateless Address: On*, Off Yes No
Manual Address Settings Use Manual Address: On, Off* Yes No
Manual Address: IPv6 Address (39characters maximum) Yes No
Prefix Length: 0 to 128 (64*) Yes No
Default Router Address (39 characters maximum) Yes No
Use DHCPv6 On, Off* Yes Yes
PING Command IPv6 Address: (39characters maximum) Yes No
Host Name - Yes No
DNS Settings
DNS Server Address Settings
IPv4 Primary DNS Server: IP Address:0.0.0.0* Yes No
Secondary DNS Server: IP Address:0.0.0.0* Yes No
IPv6 Primary DNS Server: IPv6 Address Yes No
Secondary DNS Server: IPv6 Address Yes No
DNS Host/Domain Name Settings Yes No
IPv4 Host Name: Yes No
(Canon + represents the last six digits of a MAC address)
Domain Name: Yes No
IPv6 Use Same Host Name/Domain Name as IPv4:On, Off* Yes No
Host Name: Yes No
(Canon + represents the last six digits of a MAC address)
Domain Name: Yes No
DNS Dynamic Update Settings
IPv4 DNS Dynamic Update: On, Off* Yes No
IPv6 DNS Dynamic Update: On, Off* Yes No
Register Stateless Address: On, Off* Yes No
Register Manual Address: On, Off* Yes No
Register Stateless Address: On, Off* Yes No
mDNS Settings
IPv4 Use IPv4 mDNS: On, Off* Yes No
mDNS Name (63 characters maximum) (NULL*) Yes No
IPv6 Use IPv6 mDNS: On, Off* Yes No
Use Same mDNS Name as IPv4 mDNS: On, Off* Yes No
mDNS Name (63 characters maximum) (NULL*) Yes No
WINS Settings
WINS Resolution On, Off* Yes No
WINS Server Address IP Address: 0.0.0.0* Yes No
Node Type Auto Set (display only) No No
Scope ID (NULL*) Yes No
LPD Print Settings
LPD Print Settings On*, Off Yes Yes
LPD Banner Page*1 On, Off* Yes Yes
10-18
10-19
RAW Print Settings
RAW Print Settings On*, Off Yes Yes
Bidirectional Communication On, Off* Yes Yes
SNTP Settings
Use SNTP On, Off* Yes No
Polling Interval 1 to 48 hours in one hour increments (24hours*) Yes No
NTP Server Address IP address or host name Yes No
Check NTP Server - Yes No
FTP Print Settings
Use FTP printing On, Off* Yes Yes
User name User name for FTP server login (guest*) Yes No
Password Password for FTP server login (7654321*) Yes No
WSD Print Settings
Use WSD On, Off* Yes Yes
Use WSD Browsing On, Off* Yes Yes
Use Multicast Discovery On, Off* Yes Yes
Use FTP PASV Mode
Use FTP PASV Mode On, Off* Yes Yes
IPP Print Settings
IPP Print Settings On, Off* Yes Yes
Use SSL On, Off* Yes No
Use Authentication On*, Off Yes No
User name User name for IPP authentication (guest*) Yes No
Password Password for IPP authentication (7654321*) Yes No
Multicast Discovery Settings
Response On* Off Yes Yes
Scope name Scope name to be used for a multicast discovery (default*) Yes No
Use HTTP On* Off Yes Yes
Use Web DAV Server On, Off* Yes Yes
SSL Settings Settings that use SSL Yes No
Key and Certificate
Set as the Default Key (NULL) Yes No
Certificate Details Version, Serial Number, Signature Algorithm, Issue Destination, Validity Start Date, Validity End Date, Issuer, Yes No
Public Key, Certificate Thumbprint, Verify Cert.
Display Use Location (Key and Certificate) Yes No
Proxy Settings
Use proxy On, Off* Yes No
Server Address IP address or FQDN Yes No
Port Number 1 to 65535 (80*) Yes No
Use Proxy within the Same Domain On, Off* Yes No
Set Authentication
Use Proxy Auth. On, Off* Yes No
User (NULL) Yes No
Password (NULL) Yes No
10-19
10-20
Confirm Dept. ID PIN On, Off* Yes No
IPSec Settings
Use IPSec On, Off* Yes No
Receive Non-policy Packets Allow*, Reject Yes No
Policy On, Off On*, Off Yes No
Register Policy Name (24 characters maximum) (NULL*) Yes No
Selector Settings
Local Address All IP Addresses*, IPv4 Address, IPv6 Address, IPv4 Manual Settings, IPv6 Manual Settings Yes No
• IPv4 Manual Settings Single Address*, Address Range(First Address, Last Address), Subnet Settings(Address, Subnet Mask) Yes No
• IPv6 Manual Settings Single Address*, Address Range (First Address, Last Address), Specify Prefix (Address, Prefix Length) Yes No
Prefix Length (0 to 128) 64* Yes No
Remort Address All IP Addresses*, All IPv4Address, All IPv6Address, IPv4Manual Settings, IPv6 Manual Settings Yes No
• IPv4 Manual Settings Single Address*, Address Range(First Address, Last Address), Subnet Settings(Address, Subnet Mask) Yes No
• IPv6 Manual Settings Single Address*, Address Range (First Address, Last Address), Specify Prefix (Address, Prefix Length) Yes No
Prefix Length (0 to 128) 64* Yes No
Port Specify by Port Number*, Specify by Service Name Yes No
• Specify by Port Number Local Port(All Ports*, Single Port), Remote Port(All Ports*, Single Port) Yes No
Single Port (1 to 65535) 0* Yes No
• Specify by Service Name Service On, Off Yes No
On/Off
IKE Settings
IKE mode Main*, Aggressive Yes No
Authentication Method Pre-Shared Key Method*, Digital sig. Method Yes No
• Key and Certificate Set as the Default Key Yes No
Public Key, Certificate Thumbprint, Verify Cert
Auth./Encryption Algorithm Auto*, Manual Settings Yes No
Manual Settings • Authentication Yes No
SHA1: On*, Off
• Authentication Yes No
SHA2: On*, Off
• Encryption Yes No
3DES-CBC: On*, Off
AES-CBC: On, Off*
DH Group:Group1 (768), Group2 (1024)*, Group14 (2048), ECDH-P256, ECDH-P384
IPSec Network Settings
Validity Time 1 to 65535minuites (480minuites*) Yes No
Validity Size On, Off* Yes No
On:1 to 65535 MB (0 MB)* Yes No
PFS On, Off* Yes No
Auth./Encryption Algorithm Auto*, Manual Settings Yes No
10-20
10-21
Auth./Encryption Algorithm Manual Settings(ESP*, ESP (AES-GCM), AH (SHA1)) Yes No
ESP Settings • ESP Auth. Yes No
SHA1: On*, Off
NULL: On, Off* Yes No
• ESP Encryption Yes No
3DES-CBC: On*, Off
AES-CBC: On, Off* Yes No
NULL: On, Off* Yes No
ESP (AES-GCM) Settings None Yes No
AH (SHA1) Settings None Yes No
Connect. Mode Transport (display only) No No
Edit - Yes No
Delete - Yes No
Print List Yes, No No No
Netware Settings
Use NetWare On, Off* Yes Yes
Frame Type Auto Detect*, Ethernet II, Ethernet 802.2, Ethernet 802.3, Ethernet SNAP Yes No
IPX External Network Number Auto Set (display only) - No
Node Number Auto Set, (display only) - No
Print Service Bindery PServer, RPrinter, NDS PServer*, NPrinter Yes No
Packet Signature Auto Set (display only) - No
Bindery Pserver Settings
Print Server Name (NULL) Yes No
File Server Name (NULL) Yes No
Print Server Password (NULL) Yes No
Printer Number 0 to 15 (0*) Yes No
Polling Interval 1 to 15seconds (5sedonds*) Yes No
Printer Form 0 to 255 (0*) Yes No
Buffer Size 1 to 20 KB (20KB*) Yes No
Service Mode Minimize form changes within print queues*, Minimize form changes across print queues, Change forms as Yes No
needed, Service only currently mounted form
RPrinter Settings
Print ServerName (NULL) Yes No
File ServerName (NULL) Yes No
NDS PServer Settings
Printer Number (NULL) Yes No
Tree Name (NULL) Yes No
Context (NULL) Yes No
Print Server Password (NULL) Yes No
Polling Interval 1 to 255 seconds (5seconds*) Yes No
Printer Form 0 to 255 (0*) Yes No
Buffer Size 3 to 20KB (20KB*) Yes No
10-21
10-22
Service Mode Minimize form changes within print queues*, Minimize form changes across print queues, Change forms as Yes No
needed, Service only currently mounted form
NPrinter Settings
Print ServerName (NULL) Yes No
Tree Name (NULL) Yes No
Context (NULL) Yes No
SNMP Settings Yes No
Use SNMPv1 On*, Off Yes Yes
Dedicated Comm. Settings
Dedicated Community On*, Off Yese No
MIB Access Permission Read/Write, Read Only* Yes No
Community Name1Settings
Community Name1 On*, Off Yes No
Community Name (public*) Yes No
Community Name2 Settings
Community Name2 On, Off* Yes No
Community Name (public2*) Yes No
Use SNMPv3 On, Off Yes No
User Settings
User On/Off On*, Off Yes No
Register User Name, MIB Access Permis. (Read/Write, Read Only), Security Settings (Auth. Yes/Encry. Yes, Auth. Yes/ Yes No
Encry. No, Auth. No/Encrypt. No), Authent. Algorithm (MD5, SHA1), Authent. Password, Encryption Algorithm
(DES, AES), Encryption Password
Details/Edit User Name, MIB Access Permis. (Read/Write, Read Only), Security Settings (Auth. Yes/Encry. Yes, Auth. Yes/ Yes No
Encry. No, Auth. No/Encrypt. No), Authent. Algorithm (MD5, SHA1), Authent. Password, Encryption Algorithm
(DES, AES), Encryption Password)
Delete - Yes No
Context Settings
Register Context Name Yes No
Edit Context Name Yes No
Delete - Yes No
Get Printer Mgmt Info from Host On, Off* Yes Yes
Reject SNMP Packets While in Sleep Mode On, Off* Yes No
Dedicated Port Settings
Dedicated Port Settings On*, Off Yes Yes
Use Spool Function
Use Spool Function On, Off* Yes Yes
Startup Settings
Startup Settings 30 to 300 seconds (30 seconds*) Yes No
10-22
10-23
Ethernet Driver Settings
Auto Detect On*, Off Yes No
Communication Mode Half Duplex*, Full Duplex Yes No
Ethernet Type 10 Base-T*, 100 Base-TX, 1000 Base-T Yes No
MAC Address Display only - No
IEEE802.1X Settings
Use IEEE802.1X On, Off* Yes No
Login Name (NULL*) Yes No
Use TLS On, Off* Yes No
Key and Certificate
Set as the Default Key - Yes No
Public Key, Certificate Thumbprint, Verify Cert.
Use TTL On, Off* Yes No
TTLS Settings (TTLS Protocol) MSCHAPv2*, PAP Yes No
Use PEAP On, Off* Yes No
User Name Name of the user to be authenticated with IEEE802.1X authentication (NULL*) Yes No
Password Password of the user to be authenticated with IEEE802.1X authentication (NULL*) Yes No
PEAP Settings
Same User Name as Login Name On*, Off Yes No
Firewall Settings
IPv4 Address Filter
TX Filter
Use Filter On, Off* Yes No
Default Policy Allow*, Reject Yes No
IPv4 Address Edit, Delete Yes No
Register Single Address*, Address Range (First Address, Last Address), Specify Prefix (Address, Prefix Length) Yes No
Edit Single Address*, Address Range (First Address, Last Address), Specify Prefix (Address, Prefix Length) Yes No
Prefix Length (0 to 32) Yes No
RX Filter
Register Single Address*, Address Range (First Address, Last Address), Specify Prefix (Address, Prefix Length), Port Yes No
Number (Do Not Specify, Specify)
Specify (Port Number) dd, Delete Yes No
Details/Edit Single Address*, Address Range (First Address, Last Address), Specify Prefix (Address, Prefix Length), Port Yes No
Number (Do Not Specify, Specify)
Specify (Port Number) Add, Delete Yes No
Prefix Length (0 to 32) Yes No
IPv6 Address Filter
TX Filter
10-23
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Accessibility
10-24
Register Single Address* (Address), Specify Prefix (IPv6 Prefix, Prefix Length) Yes No
Edit Single Address* (Address), Specify Prefix (IPv6 Prefix, Prefix Length) Yes No
Prefix Length 0 to 128 Yes No
RX Filter
Register Single Address* (Address), Specify Prefix (IPv6 Prefix, Prefix Length), Port Number (Do Not Specify, Specify) Yes No
Details/Edit Single Address (Address), Specify Prefix (IPv6 Prefix, Prefix Length), Port Number (Do Not Specify, Specify) Yes No
Prefix Length 0 to 128 Yes No
MAC Address Filter
TX Filter
MAC Address Edit, Delete Yes No
RX Filter
MAC Address Edit, Delete. Yes No
IP Address Block Log Date, Type, IP Address, Port Number, Result, Details(Date, Type, IP Address, Port Number, Result) Yes No
T-10-6
■■External Interface
* Default Settings
USB Settings
Use USB Device On*, Off Yes
Use MEAP Driver for USB Device On, Off* Yes
Use MEAP Driver for USB External Drive On, Off* Yes
T-10-7
■■Accessibility
* Default Settings
Key Repetition Settings Standard*, Slightly Slow, Slow No
Reversed Display (Color) On, Off* No
T-10-8
10-24
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Accessibility
Appendix > List of User Mode > Adjustment/Maintenance > Maintenance
10-25
Adjustment/Maintenance
■■Adjust Image Quality
* Default Settings
Auto Adjust Gradation Press [Start Printing] No
Correct Density Copy, Black Scan for Send/Scan and Store, Color Scan for Send/Scan and Store: 9 levels each (5 leveis*) No
Fine Adjust Zoom X, Y: -1.0% to +1.0%, in 0.1% increments (X: 0.0%* Y: 0.0%*) No
T-10-9
■■Adjust Action
* Default Settings
Toner Saving Settings On, Off* No
Saving Level Level 1*, Level 2 No
T-10-10
■■Maintenance
Clean Feeder Start key No
Clean Transfer Roller Start key No
Clean Pressure Roller for Fixing Start Printing, Start Cleaning key No
Initialize After Replacing Parts
Drum Unit Yes, No No
T-10-11
10-25
Appendix > List of User Mode > Adjustment/Maintenance > Maintenance
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Common
10-26
Function Settings
■■Common
* Default Settings
*2 Indicates items with no serial number or ID/user name.

Item Setting Description Device information DeliveryAvailable
Paper Feed Settings
Paper Drawer Auto Selection On/Off Copy, Printer, Access Stored Files, Receive/Fax, Other No
Multi-Purpose Tray On, Off* No
Other On*, Off No
Copy Consider Paper Type : On*, Off No
Feed Method Switch MP Tray and Other: Speed Priority*, Print Side Priority No
Suspended Job Timeout On On, Off* Yes
0 to 999 min. (5min*) Yes
Paper Output Settings
Offset Jobs*1 On*, Off Yes
Job Separator Between Jobs On, Off* Yes
Change (Select Paper Source) Yes
Job Separator Between Copies On, Off* No
Copies (1 to 9999) (10*) No
Change (Select Paper Source) No
Print Settings
Print Priority
Copy 1*,2,3 Yes
Printer 1,2*,3 Yes
Access Stored File, Receive/Fax, 1,2,3* Yes
Other
Output Report Default Settings
2-Sided Printing On, Off* Yes
Register Characters for Page No./Watermark Register, Edit, Delete Yes
Copy Set Numbering Option Settings On, Off* Yes
Number Option ON
ID/User Name On, Off* Yes
Date On, Off* Yes
Text On, Off* Yes
Date Settings dd/mm/yyyy*, yyyy/mm/dd, mm/dd/yyyy, yyyy.mm.dd, mm.dd.yyyy, dd.mm.yyyy Yes
Set Characters - Yes
Alignment Settings Align Left*, Align Center, Align Right Yes
Secure Watermark Settings*1
Forced Secure Watermark
Copy Set, Do Not Set* Yes*2
Access Stored Set, Do Not Set* Yes*2
Printer Set, Do Not Set* Yes*2
10-26
10-27
Printer Driver Watermark Set, Do Not Set* Yes*2
Adjust Background/Character Contrast
Sample Print - No
Relative Contrast -7 to +7 (-1*) No
Pattern , Arabesque, Fans*, Polka Dots, Stars, Mesh, Clouds, Cherry Blossoms, Leaves No
Size 36.0 pt, 54.0 pt*, 72.0 pt No
White Letters on Colored On*, Off No
Background
Standard Value Set 1 to 64 (20*) No
Latent Area Density 1 to 36 (7*) No
Initialize - No
Scan Settings*1
Streak Prevention On*, Off Yes
Color Scan Speed/Image Quality Priority Speed Priority*, Quality Priority Yes
Remote Scan Gamma Value Gamma 1.0, Gamma 1.4, Gamma 1.8*, Gamma 2.2 Yes
Auto Online On, Off* Yes
Auto Offline On, Off* Yes
Generate File
High Compression Image Quality Level
Image Level in Text/Photo Mode or Data Size Priority, Normal*, Image Quality Priority Yes
Photo Mode
Image Level in Text Mode Data Size Priority, Normal*, Image Quality Priority Yes
OCR (Text Searchable) Settings
Smart Scan On*, Off Yes
No. of OCR File Name Characters 1 to 24 (24Chae*) Yes
Trace & Smooth Settings*1
Outline Graphics On*, Off Yes
Graphics Recognition Level Normal*, Moderate, High Yes
Background Image Level Data Size Priority, Normal*, Image Quality Priority Yes
OOXML Settings
Background Image Level Quality Priority, Standard*, Data Size Priority Yes
Color Image Recognition Level High, Standard*, Do Not Recognize Yes
Color Image Line Width Recognition On*, Off Yes
Specify Minimum PDF Version Do Not Specify*, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7 Yes
Format PDF to PDF/A On, Off* Yes
Optimize PDF for Web On, Off* Yes
256-bit AES Settings for Encrypted PDF Acrobat 9.0 or Equivalent, Acrobat 10.0 or Equivalent* Yes
Rights Management Server Settings
Server URL (NULL*) No
User Name (NULL*) No
Password (NULL*) No
Always Show Auth. Scrn On, Off* No
10-27
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Printer
10-28
Set Authentication Method
Info. Used for LDAP Server Device Settings*, Device Login Auth. Info., Regist. Info. for Each User No
Authentication
Info. Used for Rights Mgmt. Server Device Settings*, Regist. Info. for Each User No
Auth
Info. Used for SMTP Server Device Settings, Regist. Info. for Each User* No
Authentication
Info. Used for File TX/Browsing Auth Standard*, Device Login Auth. Info., Regist. Info. for Each User No
T-10-12
■■Copy
* Default Settings
Register/Edit Favorite Settings M1 to M9: Register, Rename, Delete, Check Content No
Change Default Settings Register, Initialize No
Register Options Shortcuts
Shortcut 1 Each mode, Unassigned (Orig. Content Orientation*) No
Shortcut 2 Each mode, Unassigned (2-Sided*) No
Shortcut 3 Each mode, Unassigned (Density*) No
Shortcut 4 Each mode, Unassigned (Original Type*) No
Auto Collate On*, Off Yes
Photo Printout Mode On, Off* Yes
T-10-13
■■Printer
* Default Settings
*1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached.
*2 Indicates items that appear only when using a Direct Print Printer.
Output Report
PCL
Configuration Page Yes*, No No
Font List Yes*, No No
PS
Configuration Page Yes*, No No
Font List Yes*, No No
Common Settings
Copies 1 to 9999 (1*) Yes
2-Sided Printing On, Off* Yes
Paper Feed
Default Paper Size Letter, Legal, A4, B5, A5, Executive, Statement, Env. NAGAGATA 3, Env. YOGATANAGA3, Envelope Monarch, No
Env. No. 10, Envelope ISO-C5, Envelope DL
Default Paper Type Plain 1, Plain 2, Recycled, Color, Pre-Punched, Bond, Heavy 1, Heavy 2, Transparency, Labels, Envelope No
10-28
10-29
Paper Size Override On, Off* Yes
Print Quality
Image Refinement On*, Off Yes
Density*1 -8 to +8 (0*) Yes
Density (Fine Adjust)*1 High: -8 to +8 (0*) Yes
Medium: -8 to +8 (0*) Yes
Low: -8 to +8 (0*) Yes
Toner Save On, Off* Yes
Line Refinement On, Off* Yes
Horizontal Line Refinement Off*, Level 1, Level 2,Level 3, Level 4 Yes
Vertical Line Refinement Off, Level 1*, Level 2,Level 3, Level 4 Yes
Resolution 1200 dpi, 600 dpi* Yes
Layout
Binding Location Long Edge*, Short Edge Yes
Gutter -50.0 mm to +50.0 mm (0.0*) Yes
Offset Short Edge (Front) -50.0 mm to +50.0 mm (0.0*) Yes
Offset Long Edge (Front) -50.0 mm to +50.0 mm (0.0*) Yes
Offset Short Edge (Back) -50.0 mm to +50.0 mm (0.0*) Yes
Offset Long Edge (Back) -50.0 mm to +50.0 mm (0.0*) Yes
Auto Error Skip On, Off* Yes
Secure Print Delete Time 10 minutes, 20 minutes, 30 minutes, 1 hour*, 2 hours, 3 hours, 6 hours, 12 hours, 24 hours Yes
Timeout Timeout (5 to 300 seconds), Off (15 seconds*) Yes
Finishing Off*, Collate, Offset+Collate*1,Offset+Group*1, Staple+Collate*1, Staple+Group*1 Yes
Staple Position (Staple+Collate):
Corner (Upper-L),Corner (Upper-R),Corner (Lower-R),Corner (Lower-L)
Staple Position (Staple+Group):
Grp Upp L-Corner,Grp Upp R-Corner,Grp Lwr R-Corner,Grp Lwr L-Corner
Copy Set Numbering
Copy Set Numbering On, Off* Yes
Print Position*1 5 Locations*, Top Left, Bottom Left, Top Right, Bottom Right, Full Surface Yes
Starting Number*1 1 to 9999 (1*) Yes
Number Size*1 Small(12 point), Medium(24 point), Large(36 point)* Yes
Density*1 1 to 5 (3*) Yes
Personality*1 Auto*, PS, PCL, Imaging, PDF, XPS No
Mode Priority*1 None*, PS, PCL, PDF, XPS No
Initialize Yes, No Yes
UFR II Settings
Halftones
Text Color Tone, Gradation, Resolution*, High Resolution Yes
Graphics Color Tone*, Gradation, Resolution, High Resolution Yes
Image Color Tone*, Gradation, Resolution, High Resolution Yes
Paper Save On*, Off Yes
10-29
10-30
PCL Settings
Paper Save On, Off* Yes
Orientation Portrait*, Landscape Yes
Font Number 0 to 104 (0*) No
Point Size*1 4.00 to 999.75 point (12.00 point) No
Pitch*1 0.44 to 99.99 cpi (10.00cpi*) No
Form Lines 5 to 128 lines (60 lines*) No
Character Code ARABIC8, DESKTOP, GREEK8, HEBREW7, HEBREW8, ISO4, ISO6, ISO11, ISO15, ISO17, ISO21, ISO60, Yes
ISO69, ISOCYR, ISOGRK, ISOHEB, ISOL1, ISOL2, ISOL5, ISOL6, LEGAL, MATH8, MCTEXT, MSPUBL, PC775,
PC8*, PC850, PC851, PC852, PC862, PC864, PC866, PC8DN, PC8GRK, PC8TK, PC1004, PIFONT, PSMATH,
PSTEXT, ROMAN8, VNINTL, VNMATH, VNUS, WIN30, WINARB, WINBALT, WINCYR, WINGRK, WINL1, WINL2,
WINL5
Custom Paper On, Off* No
Unit of Measure*1 Millimeters, Inches* No
X dimension*1 5.50 to 24.80 inches (14.00 inches*) No
Y dimension*1 3.89 to 8.50 inches (8.50 inches*) No
Append CR to LF Yes, No* Yes
Enlarge A4 Print Width On, Off* Yes
Halftones
Text Color Tone, Gradation, Resolution*, High Resolution Yes
Graphics Color Tone*, Gradation, Resolution, High Resolution Yes
Image Color Tone*, Gradation, Resolution, High Resolution Yes
BarDIMM Enable, Disable* Yes
FreeScape*1 Off, ~, ", #, $, /, \, ?, {, }, | (~*) Yes
PS Settings
Job Timeout 0 to 3600 seconds (0*) Yes
Print PS Errors On, Off* Yes
Halftones
Text Gradation, Resolution*, High Resolution Yes
Graphics Gradation, Resolution*, High Resolution Yes
Image Gradation, Resolution*, High Resolution Yes
Grayscale Conversion*1 sRGB, NTSC*, Uniform RGB Yes
Dot Gain Adjustment -10%, -5%, Standard*, +5%, +10% Yes
Imaging Settings *2
Image Orientation Auto*, Vertical, Horizontal Yes
Zoom Mode Off*, Auto Yes
Print Position Auto*, Center, Top Left Yes
Show Warnings On*, Off Yes
Enlarge Print Area On, Off* Yes
Halftones Gradation*, Resolution, High Resolution Yes
PDF Settings *2
Enlarge/Reduce to Fit Size On, Off* Yes
Enlarge Print Area On, Off* Yes
N on 1 Off*, 2 on 1, 4 on 1, 6 on 1, 8 on 1, 9 on 1, 16 on 1 Yes
10-30
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Send
10-31
Comment Print Off, Auto* Yes
Halftones
Text Gradation, Resolution, High Resolution* Yes
Graphics Gradation, Resolution, High Resolution* Yes
Image Gradation, Resolution, High Resolution* Yes
Dot Gain Adjustment -10%, -5%, Standard*, +5%, +10% Yes
XPS Settings *2
Halftones
Text Gradation, Resolution, High Resolution* Yes
Graphics Gradation, Resolution, High Resolution* Yes
Image Gradation, Resolution, High Resolution* Yes
Grayscale Conversion*1
Text sRGB*, NTSC, Uniform RGB Yes
Graphics sRGB*, NTSC, Uniform RGB Yes
Image sRGB*, NTSC, Uniform RGB Yes
Utility Settings
Initialize PCL Hard Disk Yes, No No
Initialize PS Hard Disk Yes, No No
Reset Printer Yes, No No
Printer Menu
Restrict Printer Jobs On, Off* Yes
PDL Selection (Plug-n-Play) UFR II*, PS3, UFR II (XPS), Fax, PCL5e, PCL6 No
T-10-14
■■Send
* Default Setting
*1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional products are available for use.
*2 Indicates item that is not delivered as device information.
Details/Edit, Delete
Output Report
TX/RX User Data List Yes, No No
Fax User Data List Yes, No No
Common Settings
Register Favorite Settings Confirm Settings, Select Location: M1 to M18 Yes
Show Comment On, Off* Yes
Edit Favorite Settings Delete, Check Content, Rename (Name, Comment): M1 to M18 Yes
Show Comment On, Off* Yes
Display Confirmation for Favorite Settings On*, Off No
Default Screen Standard*, One-Touch, Favorite Settings, Address Book No
Shortcut 1 2-Sided Original*, Unassigned No
10-31
10-32
Shortcut 2 Different Size Originals*, Unassigned No
TX Report For Error Only*, On, Off Yes
Report with TX Image On*, Off Yes
Communication Management Report
Auto Print (100 Transmissions) On*, Off Yes
Specify Print Time On, Off* Yes
Timer Setting 00 : 00 to 23 : 59 (00 : 00*) Yes
Send/Receive Separate On, Off* Yes
TX Terminal ID
TX Terminal ID Print*, Do Not Print Yes
Print Position Inside, Outside* Yes
Display Destination Unit Name On*, Off Yes
Telephone # Mark Fax*, TEL Yes
Delete Failed TX Jobs On*, Off Yes
Retry Times 0 to 5 times (3 times*) Yes
Data Compression Ratio High Ratio, Normal*, Low Ratio Yes
YCbCr TX Gamma Value Gamma 1.0, Gamma 1.4, Gamma 1.8*, Gamma 2.2 Yes
Use Divided Chunk Send for WebDAV TX On*, Off Yes
Confirm SSL Certificate for WebDAV TX On, Off* Yes
Add Items to Verify CN On, Off* Yes
Limit New Destinations
Fax On, Off* Yes
E-mail On, Off* Yes
I-Fax On, Off* Yes
File On, Off* Yes
Always Add Device Signature to Send*1 On, Off* Yes
Restrict File Formats On, Off* Yes
Limit E-Mail to Send to Myself On, Off* Yes
Restrict File TX to Personal Folder On, Off* Yes
Personal Folder Specification Method Home Folder, Register for Each User*, Use Login Server Yes
Home Folder Settings Host Name, Folder Path Yes
Use Auth. Info. of Each User On, Off* Yes
Restrict Resending from Log On, Off* No
E-mail/Ifax Settings
Register Unit Name (NULL*) No
Communication Settings
SMTP Server (NULL*) Yes
Use POP RX On*, Off Yes
Use SMTP RX On, Off* No
E-mail Address (NULL*) No
POP Server (NULL*) No
POP Login Name (NULL*) No
POP Password (NULL*) No
POP Interval 0* to 99 (If the interval is set to '0', the incoming e-mail is not checked automatically.) (0 mins*) No
10-32
10-33
Communication Settings: Allow SSL SMTP TX: On, Off* No
SMTP RX: Always SSL, On, Off* No
POP: On, Off* No
POP AUTH Method Standard*, APOP, POP AUTH Yes
POP Authentication before Sending On, Off* No
SMTP Authentication (SMTP AUTH) On, Off* No
User Name (NULL*) No
Password (NULL*) No
Display Auth. Screen When Send On, Off* No
Confirm SSL Certificate for SMTP TX On, Off* No
Add Items to Verify CN On, Off* No
Confirm SSL Certificate for POP RX On, Off* No
Maximum Data Size for Sending 0=(Off)/1 to 99 MB (3MB*) Yes
Default Subject (Attached Image*) Yes
Specify Authentication User Dest. to Reply On, Off* No
Set Authorized User Destination to Sender On*, Off No
Allow Sending to Unregistered Destinations On, Off* Yes
Full Mode TX Timeout 1 to 99 hours (24hours*) Yes
Print MDN/DSN upon Receipt On, Off* Yes
Use Send via Server On, Off* Yes
Allow MDN Not via Server On*, Off Yes
Restrict TX Destination Domain
Restrict Sending to Domains On, Off* Yes
Permitted Domains Register, Details/Edit, Delete Tes*2
Domain Name, Send to Subdomain Allow, Reject
Autocomplete for Entering E-Mail Addresses On*, Off
Fax Settings
Default Screen Standard*, One-Touch, Address Book No
Shortcut 1 Density*, Unassigned No
Shortcut 2 Original Type*, Unassigned No
Shortcut 3 2-Sided Original*, Unassigned No
Shortcut 4 Preview*, Unassigned No
Register Sender Name (TTI) 01 to 99: Register/Edit, Delete No
Use Auth. User Name as Sender Name On, Off*
ECM TX On*, Off Yes
Set Pause Time 1 to 15 seconds (2 seconds*) Yes
Auto Redial On*, Off Yes
Redial Times 1 to 10 times (2 times*) Yes
Redial Interval 2 to 99 minutes (2 minutes*) Yes
Redial When TX Error Error and 1st page*, All pages, Off Yes
Check Dial Tone Before Sending On*, Off Yes
Fax TX Report For Error Only, On, Off* Yes
10-33
10-34
Report with TX Image On*, Off Yes
Fax Activity Report
Auto Print (40 Transmissions) On, Off* Yes
Specify Print Time On, Off* Yes
Timer Setting 00: 00 to 23: 59 (00: 00*) Yes
Send/Receive Separate On, Off* Yes
Set Line
Line 1 to Line 2
When no option is attached Line 1 No
If the Super G3 2nd Line Fax Line 1, Line 2 No
Board is installed
Register Unit Telephone Number (NULL*) No
Register Unit Name (NULL*) No
Select Line Type Pulse, Tone* No
Select TX Line If the Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board is installed: No
• Line 1: Priority TX*, Prohibit TX
• Line 2: Priority TX, Prohibit TX
TX Start Speed 33600 bps*, 14400 bps, 9600 bps, 7200 bps, 4800 bps, 2400 bps Yes
Confirm Entered Fax Number On, Off* Yes
Allow Fax Driver TX On*, Off Yes
Confirm Before Sending When Fax Dest. On, Off* No
Incl Only for Seq. Broadcast*, Always No
Restrict Seq. Broadcast When Fax Dest. Incl On, Off* No
T-10-15
10-34
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Receive/Forward
10-35
■■Receive/Forward
* Default Setting
*1 Indicates items that are not delivered as device information.
Receive Method:, E-Mail Priority, Details/Edit, Delete, Print List
Output Report
TX/RX User Data List Yes, No No
Fax User Data List Yes, No No
Common Settings
Print on Both Side On, Off* Yes
Reduce Fax RX Size On*, Off Yes
Reduction Mode Auto*, Fixed Yes
Reduction % 75% to 97% (90%*)
Reduction Direction Vertical & Horizontal, Vertical Only*
2 On 1 Log On, Off* Yes
Received Page Footer Print, Do Not Print* Yes
Interrupt and Print RX Jobs On, Off*
Handle Files with Forwarding Errors Always Print*, Store/Print, Off Yes
Forwarding Settings Receive Method:, Validate/Invalidate, Delete, Register, Other Operations, (Forward w/o Conditions, Details/Edit, Yes*7
E-Mail Priority, Print List), Search
Set Fax/I-Fax Inbox
Memory RX Inbox PIN Set:PIN, Confirm (NULL*)
Use Fax Memory Lock On, Off* Yes
Use I-Fax Memory Lock On, Off* Yes
Memory Lock Start Time Everyday, Select Days, Off* Yes
Memory Lock End Time Everyday, Select Days, Off* Yes
Divided Data RX Timeout 0 to 99 hours (24hours*) Yes
Always Send Notice for RX Errors *On, Off Yes
Fax Settings
ECM RX On*, Off Yes
Fax RX Report For Error Only, On, Off* Yes
RX Start Speed 33600 bps*, 14400 bps, 9600 bps, 7200 bps, 4800 bps, 2400 bps Yes
RX Password (NULL*) No
T-10-16
10-35
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Receive/Forward
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Secure Print
10-36
■■Store/Access Files
* Default Setting
Common Settings
Scan and Store Settings
Register/Edit Favorite Settings Register, Rename, Delete, Check Content (M1 to M9) No
Access Stored Files Settings
Register/Edit Favorite Settings Register, Rename, Delete, Check Content (M1 to M9) No
Network Settings
Network Place Settings Register (Name, Protocol, Location), Details, Delete No
Protocol for External Reference
SMB On*, Off No
WebDAV On*, Off No
Confirm SSL Certificate for Network Access On, Off* No
Memory Media Settings
Use Scan/Print Function Use Scan Function: On*, Off Yes
Use Print Function: On*, Off Yes
T-10-17
■■Secure Print
* Default Setting
*1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is available for use.
Simple Authentication Settings
Omit Password On, Off* Yes
Require Domain Name to Determine My Job On*, Off Yes
Only Allow Encrypted Print Jobs*1 On, Off* Yes
T-10-18
10-36
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Secure Print
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Web Access
10-37
■■Web Access
* Default Setting
Settings
View Settings
Show Images On*, Off No
Show Animated GIFs On*, Off No
Enable Table On*, Off No
Fit Page to Screen Size On*, Off No
Use JavaScript On*, Off No
Use Word Wrap On, Off* No
Use JP Hyphenation On, Off* No
Format Std CSS only, Std CSS + Style Attribute, Std CSS + Style Attribute + External Imported CSS* No
Standard CSS CSS1*, CSS2, CSS3 No
Home Page Settings
URL Use Current Page as Home (NULL*) No
Home Page during Startup On*, Off No
Auto Clear Settings
Display during Auto Clear Show Home Page*, Show Blank Page, Keep Last Page No
Security
Use SSL 2.0 On*, Off No
Use SSL 3.0 On*, Off No
Use TLS 1.0 On*, Off No
Certificates Enable/Disable No
Details
Dsply Mixed HTTPS/HTTP On*, Off No
Trusted Server Address - No
Restrict Share Device Information On*, Off No
Display Server Cert. Authentication On, Off* No
Warning
Display Warning when Entering On, Off* No
Secured Page
Display Warning when Leaving On, Off* No
Secured Page
Cookie
Cookie Handling Accept*, Block, Prompt No
Delete Cookies Yes, No No
Privacy Policy and Regulations
Restrict URL Entry On, Off* No
Restrict Fav On, Off* No
Restrict Home Page Edit On, Off* No
Rstrct History Display On, Off* No
ID/User with History On, Off* No
Full Screen On, Off* No
Hide Buttons in Toolbar On, Off* No
10-37
10-38
Hide Address in Toolbar On, Off* No
Hide Web Access Button On, Off* No
Proxy Settings No
Use a proxy server (Display Only) No
Proxy Server Address (Display Only) No
Port Number (Display Only) No
Use proxy auth (Display Only) No
Address Without Using Proxy (NULL*) No
Use HTTP1.1 for proxy connection On, Off* No
Version
Version (Display Only) No
T-10-19
10-38
Appendix > List of User Mode > Set Destination > Set Destination
10-39
Set Destination
■■ Set Destination
* Default Setting
*1 Indicates items that are not delivered as device information: Details/Edit, Delete, Search by Name
*2 Indicates items that are not delivered as device information: Edit, Delete
Address List Address List 1 to 10, One-touch No
Register Destinations Register New Dest., Details/Edit, Delete, Search by Name Yes*1
Rename Address List Rename Yes
Register One-Touch Register/Edit, Delete Yes*2
Change Default Display of Address Book Local*, LDAP Server, Remote No
Address Book PIN Seven digit number (NULL*) Yes
Manage Address Book Access Numbers On, Off* Yes
Include Pswd. When Exporting Address Book On, Off*
Register LDAP Server Register, Details/Edit, Delete, Print List No
Auto Search When Using LDAP Server On* Off Yes
Register/Edit LDAP Search Conditions
Not Reg'd 1, Not Reg'd 2 Register/Edit, Delete
Change Default LDAP Search Conditions Register, Initialize
Acquire Remote Address Book
Acquire Address Book On, Off* Yes
Remote Address Book Server Address IP Address or Host Name No
Communication Timeout 15 to 120 seconds (30 seconds*) Yes
Fax TX Line Auto Select Adjustment On*, Off Yes
T-10-20
10-39
Appendix > List of User Mode > Set Destination > Set Destination
Appendix > List of User Mode > Management Settings > Device Management
10-40
Management Settings
■■User Management
* Default Settings
System Manager Information Settings
System Manager ID Seven digit number maximum (7654321*) Yes
System PIN Seven digit number maximum (7654321*) Yes
System Manager (NULL*) Yes
E-Mail Address (NULL*) Yes
Contact Information (NULL*) Yes
Comment (NULL*) Yes
Department ID Management
Department ID Management On, Off* Yes
Register PIN Register, Edit, Delete, Limit Functions Yes
Page Totals Clear, Print List, Clear All Totals No
Allow Printer Jobs with Unknown IDs On*, Off Yes
Allow Remote Scan Jobs With Unknown IDs On*, Off Yes
T-10-21
■■Device Management
* Default Settings
*1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is available for use.
Device Information Settings
Device Name Model Name No
Location (NULL*) No
Device Information Delivery Settings
Register Destinations Auto Search/Register, Register, Details, Delete, Print List No
Auto Search/Register
Search Depth (Router) 1 to 8 (1*) No
Display Host Name On, Off* No
Start Auto Search - No
Set Auto Delivery Everyday (1 to 5), Specify Days (Sun to Sat, 1 to 5), Off* No
Settings/Registration Value On, Off* No
Network Settings: Include, Exclude*
Dept. ID On, Off* No
Address Book On, Off* No
Web Access Favorites*1 On, Off* No
Printer Settings On, Off* No
Paper Information On, Off* No
Workflow Composer*1 On, Off* No
10-40
10-41
Manual Delivery
Settings/Registration Value On, Off* No
Network Settings: Include, Exclude*
Dept. ID On, Off* No
Address Book On, Off* No
Web Access Favorites*1 On, Off* No
Printer Settings On, Off* No
Paper Information On, Off* No
Workflow Composer*1 On, Off* No
Set MEAP Authentication User Name, Password, Login Destination No
Restrictions Receiving Device Information On*, Off No
Restore Data Settings/Registration Value, Dept. ID, Address Book, Web Access Favorites*1, Printer Settings, Paper Information, No
Start
Restrict Restriction for Each Function
Settings/Registration Value On*, Off No
Dept. ID On*, Off No
Address Book On*, Off No
Web Access Favorites*1 On*, Off No
Printer Settings On*, Off No
Paper Information On*, Off No
Workflow Composer*1 On*, Off No
Use MEAP Auth. When Receive On*, Off No
Communication Log Details, Print List, Report Settings No
Report Settings No
• Auto Print (100 transmissions): On*, Off
• Specify Print Time: On, Off* No
00: 00* to 23:59 No
• Separate Report Type: On, Off* No
Limited Functions Mode*1 On, Off* No
Confirm Device Signature Certificate*1 Version, Serial Number, Signature Algorithm, Issue Destination, Validity Start Date, Validity End Date, Issuer, Public No
Key, Certificate Thumbprint, Verify Cert.
Confirm User Signature Certificate*1 Version, Serial Number, Signature Algorithm, Issue Destination, Validity Start Date, Validity End Date, Issuer, Public No
Key, Certificate Thumbprint, Verify Cert.
Generate Network Communication Key
Key Name (NULL*) No
Signature Algorithm SHA1*, SHA256, SHA384, SHA512 No
Key Algorithm RSA*, ECDSA No
Key Length (bit) 512*, 1024, 2048, 4096 No
Key Type P256*, P384, P521 No
Validity Start Date Month, Date, Year (01/01/2000 - 12/31/2037) (NULL*) No
Validity Endt Date Month, Date, Year (01/01/2000 - 12/31/2037) (NULL*) No
Country/Region Country/Region name and code (US*) No
State (NULL*) No
City (NULL*) No
10-41
10-42
Organization (NULL*) No
Organization Unit (NULL*) No
Common Name IP address of the machine or FQDN (41 characters maximum) (NULL*) No
Generate/Update Device Signature Key Yes, No No
Key and Certificate List for This Device*1
Certificate Details Version, Serial Number, Signature Algorithm, Issue Destination, Validity Start Date, Validity End Date, Issuer, Public No
Key, Certificate Thumbprint, Verify Cert
Delete - No
Display Use Location - No
Key and Certificate List for Users*1
Delete - No
CA Certificate List
Delete - No
Certificate Revocation List (CRL)
CRL Details (Version, Serial Number, Signature Algorithm, Issue Destination, Validity Start Date, Validity End Date, Issuer, No
Public Key, Certificate Thumbprint, Verify Cert.)
Delete - No
Register Key and Certificate
Register - No
Delete - No
Register CA Certificate
Register - No
Delete - No
Display Job Status Before Authentication On*, Off No
Display Log On*, Off No
Off No
• Obtain Job Log with Management Software: Allow, Do Not Allow*
Save Audit Log On, Off* No
Store Key Operation Log On, Off* No
Format Encryption Method to FIPS 140-2 On, Off* No
T-10-22
10-42
Appendix > List of User Mode > Management Settings > Data Management
10-43
■■License/Other
* Default Settings
Register License 24 characters maximum, Start (NULL*) No
MEAP Settings
Print System Information Yes, No No
Use SSL On, Off* No
Remote UI On*, Off Yes
On No
• Use SSL:On, Off*
Delete Message Board Contents Yes, No No
Use ACCESS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM On, Off* No
Register/Update Software Install Applications/Options, Software Management Settings No
Start Setup Guide Start No
T-10-23
■■Data Management
* Default Settings
Delete Existing Data Settings
Delete Existing Data On, Off* No
Timing of Deletion During Job*, After Job No
Overwrite Method to Delete HDD Data Once with 0 (Null) Data*, Once with Random Data, 3 Times with Random Data, DoD Standard No
Initialize All Data/Settings Once with 0 (Null) Data*, Once with Random Data, 3 Times with Random Data, 9 Times with Random Data, DoD Standard No
TPM Settings Use TPM: On, Off* No
Back Up TPM Key(12 characters maximum for password), Restore TPM Key No
T-10-24
10-43
Appendix > List of User Mode > Management Settings > Data Management
10-44
Backup Data
Data Location Replacement CLEAR Backup by User Backup by Service
Appendix > Backup Data

User function Service function
When When Main PCB DC Cont- Reader Replace Initialize Settings/Registration > Function Settings COPIER > Function > CLEAR Yes Method Location Yes Method Location
Replacing Replacing When roller PCB Controller the All Data Copy> Send > Common Send > Fax Printer MN- MMI DC-CON R-CON ADRS-BK JV- / to be / to be
HDD / Flash / Replacing PCB TPM / Change Settings > Settings Settings CONT CASHE No stored No stored
Executing Executing Main PCB Settings Default Change Default > Change > Custom
AllFormat AllFormat PCB Settings > Settings Default Settings >
Initialize >Initialize Settings > Initialize
Initialize
Address List HDD Clear Clear Clear - - - Clear - - - - Clear - - - Clear - Yes Remote UI (block of PC No - -
FLASH Export / Import)
Forwarding Settings HDD Clear Clear Clear - - - Clear - - - - Clear Clear - - - - Yes Remote UI (block of PC No - -
FLASH Export / Import)
Settings / Registration
Preferences FLASH - Clear Clear - - - Clear - - - - Clear Clear Clear(*1) - - - Yes (*2) Remote UI (block of PC No - -
Adjustment/Maintenance FLASH - Clear Clear - - - Clear - - - - Clear Clear - - - - Yes Export / Import) PC No - -
Function Settings FLASH - Clear Clear Clear - - Clear Clear Clear Clear - Clear Clear Clear(*3) Clear(*4) - - No - - No - -
Set Destination HDD - Clear Clear - - - Clear - - - - Clear Clear - - - - No - - No - -
FLASH
Management Settings FLASH - Clear Clear - - - Clear - - - - Clear Clear - - - - No - - No - -
Printer Settings FLASH - Clear Clear - - - Clear - - - Clear Clear Clear - - - - Yes Remote UI (block of PC No - -
Set Paper Information FLASH - Clear Clear - - - Clear - - - - - - - - - - Yes Export / Import) PC No - -
Setting items for each menu in Main Menu (Copy, Scan and Send, Fax, Scan and Store, Access Stored Files, Fax/I-Fax Inbox)
Favorite Settings HDD Clear Clear - - - - Clear - - - - - - - - - Clear Yes (*5) Remote UI (block of PC Yes SST PC
Export / Import) (*6) (Meapback)
Default Settings HDD Clear Clear - - - - Clear - - - - - - - - - Clear No - - PC
Shortcut settings for “Options” HDD Clear Clear - - - - Clear - - - - - - - - - Clear No - - PC
Previous Settings HDD Clear Clear - - - - Clear - - - - - - - - - Clear No - - PC
Setting items for Quick Menu
Button Size information HDD Clear Clear - - - - Clear - - - - - - - - - Clear Yes Remote UI (block PC Yes SST PC
Wallpaper Setting HDD Clear Clear - - - - Clear - - - - - - - - - Clear Yes of Export / Import) , PC (*6) (Meapback) PC
Button information in Quick HDD Clear Clear - - - - Clear - - - - - - - - - Clear Yes DCM PC PC
Menu
Restrict Quick Menu HDD Clear Clear - - - - Clear - - - - - - - - - Clear Yes PC PC
Setting items for Main Menu
Button settings in Main Menu HDD Clear Clear - - - - Clear - - - - - Clear - - - - No - - No - -
Button settings on the top of the HDD Clear Clear - - - - Clear - - - - - Clear - - - - No - - No - -
screen
Wallpaper Setting for Main HDD Clear Clear - - - - Clear - - - - - Clear - - - - No - - No - -
Menu
Other settings for Main Menu HDD Clear Clear - - - - Clear - - - - - Clear - - - - No - - No - -
Access Stored Files
The image data of a fax box HDD Clear Clear - - - - Clear - - - - - - - - - - No - - No - -
and the system box
Network Place Settings HDD Clear Clear - - - - Clear - - - - - - - - - - No - - No - -
Web browser settings
Web Access setting information HDD Clear Clear - - - - Clear - - - - - - - - - - Yes (*7) RUI (Import/Export) PC No - -
MEAP settings
MEAP application HDD Clear Clear - - - - Clear - - - - - - - - - Clear No - - Yes SST PC
License files for MEAP HDD Clear Clear - - - - Clear - - - - - - - - - Yes SMS PC Yes (Meapback) PC
applications
User authentication information HDD Clear Clear - - - - Clear - - - - - - - - - Yes SSO-H PC Yes PC
registered in the Local
Device Authentication user
authentication system of SSO-H
(Single Sign-On H)
Data saved using MEAP HDD Clear Clear - - - - Clear - - - - - - - - - Yes (*8) iWEMC DAM plug-in PC Yes PC
applications
SMS (Service Management HDD Clear Clear - - - - Clear(*9) - - - - - - - - - No - - Yes PC
Service) password of MEAP
Universal data settings
Unsent documents (documents HDD Clear Clear - - - - Clear - - - - - - - - - - No - - No - -
waiting to be sent with the
Delayed Send mode)
Job logs HDD Clear Clear - - - - Clear - - - - - - - - - - No - - No - -
Audit Log HDD Clear Clear - - - - Clear - - - - - - - - - Clear Yes RUI (Export only) *10 PC No - -
10-44
10-45
Data Location Replacement CLEAR Backup by User Backup by Service
User function Service function
When When Main PCB DC Cont- Reader Replace Initialize Settings/Registration > Function Settings COPIER > Function > CLEAR Yes Method Location Yes Method Location

Replacing Replacing When roller PCB Controller the All Data Copy> Send > Common Send > Fax Printer MN- MMI DC-CON R-CON ADRS-BK JV- / to be / to be
HDD / Flash / Replacing PCB TPM / Change Settings > Settings Settings CONT CASHE No stored No stored
Executing Executing Main PCB Settings Default Change Default > Change > Custom
AllFormat AllFormat PCB Settings > Settings Default Settings >
Initialize >Initialize Settings > Initialize
Initialize
Key Pair and Server Certificate HDD - - Clear - - - Clear - - - - - - - - - - No - - No - -
in Certificate Settings in TCP/
IP Settings in Network Set-tings
in System Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen)
Auto Adjust Gradation setting FLASH - Clear Clear - - - Clear - - - - Clear - - - - - No - - No - -
values
PS font HDD Clear - - - - - Clear - - - - - - - - - - No - - No - -
Key information to be used for FLASH Clear (*11) Clear (*11) - - - - Clear - - - - Clear - - - - - No - - No - -
encryption when TPM is OFF (*11)
Key and settings information FLASH Clear (*12) Clear (*12) - - - Clear Clear - - - - Clear - - - - - Yes Settings / Registration USB No - -
to be used for encryption when HDD (*14) (*13) (*15) (Management
TPM is ON TPM Settings >Data
Management > TPM
Settings)
Service Mode
Service Mode setting values FLASH - Clear Clear - - - - - - - - Clear Clear - - - - Yes RUI (Import/Export) PC No - -
(MN-CON) block of Export/
Service Mode setting values SRAM - - - Clear - - - - - - - - - Clear - - - Yes Import) PC Yes COPIER> HDD/
(DC-CON) (DC-CON) COPIER>OPTION> FUNCTION> USB
USER>SMD-EXPT> SYSTEM>
ON Only DSRAMBUP
Service Mode setting values FLASH - Clear - - - - - - - - - - - - Clear - - Yes (*16) PC Yes COPIER> HDD
(R-CON) FUNCTION>
SYSTEM>
RSRAMBUP
T-10-25
*1 The following settings are deleted.

Preferences > Paper Settings >Register Envelope Drawer
Preferences > Paper Settings >B5/EXEC Paper Selection
Preferences > Paper Settings >A5R/STMTR Paper Selection
*2 Preferences > Timer/Energy Settings > [Adjust Time]/[Date/Time Settings] is excluded
Data can be backed up and restored from the RESTORE menu in service mode.
If backup data has been exported to the USB memory device, only restoration can be performed from Download Menu (USB).
Function Settings > Common > Paper Feed Settings > Paper Drawer Auto Selection On/Off
Function Settings > Common > Paper Feed Settings > Feed Method Switch
Function Settings > Common > Scan Settings >Scanner Noise Settings
Function Settings > Common > Scan Settings >Timing to Raise Feeder Tray
Function Settings > Common > Scan Settings >Streak Prevention
*5 Backup is available only "Favorite Settings" in "Scan to Send"
*6 If the machine can be activated with download mode in safe mode at the time of HDD failure, backup of Meapback may be possible by SST. In this case, start the machine with download mode in safe mode and restore the backup data after replacing the HDD and checking
that the machine starts normally. By performing the above, data can be restored while retaining Meapback information.
*7 "Web Access Favorites" is the only data which can be backed up by a method other than collective export in DCM.
*8 Only when MEAP application has a backup function, or when data is saved in Preference / Configuration of EAGLE
*9 Since the password is TPM-encrypted and saved, password backed up after all data/settings have been initialized cannot be restored. When all data/settings have been initialized, initialize the password using a switch license for password initialization.
[Reference] Since TPM encryption key is updated when all data/settings are initialized, the password which was backed up cannot be read.
*10 The audit log which was backed up cannot be restored to the device.
*11 When replacing the HDD and FLASH PCB simultaneously, the key information is not restored automatically.
*12 An error code is displayed when "ON" is displayed for the TPM setting.
After all data/settings are initialized after restart, select "ON" for the TPM setting to enable the TPM setting.
*13 If the TPM key information in the FLASH is lost, the key information in the FLASH is automatically recovered from the backup of the common key in the HDD. Then the internal state of TPM setting changes to "ON". However, the display on the UI remains "OFF", therefore the
TPM setting needs to be manually changed to "ON".
*14 The TPM setting changes to "OFF" when all the data/settings have been initialized.
*15 Only backup in preparation for a TPM PCB failure is possible. Moreover, data cannot be restored to other machines where the TPM setting is set to "ON".
*16 DSRAMBUP, and RSRAMBUP can be backed up collectively.
Only when ON is selected in COPIER > OPTION > USER > SMD-EXPT, the service mode setting values can be backed up and restored from the RUI.
As for the service mode setting values, they can also be backed up to the HDD of the machine or a connected USB memory device by making the setting on the service mode top screen.
The settings made in Settings/Registration are included in the target of collective backup, but there are some exceptions.
For details, refer to the list of items excluded from DCM backup in the next sheet.
T-10-26
10-45
10-46
DCM backup exclusion items
Preferences Paper Settings Paper Type Management Settings Custom Type > Details/Edit > Change
Register Multi-Purpose Tray Defaults

Network Output Report
TCP/IP Settings IP Address Settings (IPv4)
IP Address Settings (IPv6)
IPP Print Settings
SSL Settings
Confirm Dept. ID PIN
IPSec settings
IEEE802.1X Settings
Firewall Settings IP Address Block Log
Adjustment/ Adjust Image Quality Auto Adjust Gradation
Maintenance Conect Shading
Auto Correct Color Mismatch
Maintenance
Function Settings Common Paper Feed Settings Paper Drawer Auto Selection On/Off
Print Settings Local Print Default Settings
Form for Superimpose Image
Secure Watermark Settings > Adjust Background/Character Contrast
Printer
Send Output Report TX/RX User Data List
Fax User Data List
E-Mail/I-Fax Settings Communication Settings
Receive/Forward Output Report
Common Settings Forwarding Settings
Store/Access Files Mail Box Settings Settings for All Mail Boxes
Network Settings
Set Destination Address Lists
Register Destinations
Register LDAP Server
Auto Serarch when using LDAP Server
Management User Management Department ID Management Page Totals
Settings Print List
Device Management Device Information Delivery Settings Manual Delivery
Resor Data
Communication Log
Register Destination > Auto Serch/Registor
Restrict Receiving Device Information
Limit Function when Security key is off
License/Other Register License
MEAP Settings Print System Information
Remote UI On/Off
Delete Massage Board Contents
Data Management Back Up
Restore
Back Up/Restore Log
Initialize All Data/Settings
TPM Settings
T-10-27
10-46

IRAdv 500 400 SM PDF

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

IRAdv 500 400 SM PDF

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

imageRUNNER ADVANCE 500/400 Series

Service Manual Rev. 1.0

© CANON INC. 2013

Remove the screw.

Tighten the screw.

Turn Power Switch ON----------------------------------------------------- 0-19

locations for cleaning----------------------------------------------------------3-2 Removing the Delivery Outer Cover------------------------------------------4-28

Consumable parts------------------------------------------------------------------ 3-2 Removing the Delivery Inner Cover-------------------------------------------4-29

CDRH Act Laser Safety

Sicherheit des Lasers

A different description may be used for a different product.

Handling of Laser System

Handhabung des Laserteils

• Keine stark reflektierenden Schraubenzieher oder ähnliche Werkzeuge direkt in den

Turn Power Switch ON CAUTION:

Energy Saver Key

Main Power Switch

Power Supply Safety of Toner

Notes When Handling a Lithium Battery Points to Note at Cleaning

Achtung: Notes On Assembly/Disassembly

Notes Before Servicing

Zweipolige bzw. Neutralleiter-Sicherung

Product Lineup Option

■■Host machine configuration [5]

Features Service Feature

Low running cost

Main Controller F-1-5

Staple Finisher-R1 aabbbb

Specifications Item Specifications

Parts Name Rear view, Right side

Front view, Left side

[1] Reader Rear Cover [7] Right Door Unit

[1] ADF Left Cover [8] ADF Front Lower Cover

[1] Reader Bottom Cover

[29] [28] [27] [26] [25] [24]

[13] [12] [11] [10] [9]

[1] Touch Panel Display [9] Main Power Indicator

●● Points to Note on Turning ON/OFF the Power Switch

Basic Configuration ■■Basic sequence

Tray CIS HP sensor ON ON

Original Exposure and Feed System Item

Magnification 25% to 400% (in 1% increment)

Delivery reversal roller (upper)

Lead roller 1 Delivery reversal roller Original delivery tray

CIS HP sensor (PS21) F-2-5

J907 J909 J910 J903 J908 J912

CIS HP sensor (PS21) :Forward

Copyboard glass reading Shading Leading edge Trailing edge

Shading Leading edge

1. Black shading and

- 1st original: Pickup

- 1st original: Pickup - 1st original: Delivery

- 1st original: Formation of loop

- 1st original: Reading

- 1st original: Reading - End of job

- 1st original: Feeding to

- 1st original: Reversal - 2nd original: Feeding to

- 1st original: Delivery

- 2nd original: Reversal and - End of job

- 2nd original: Reading of

Reader motor (M10) OM_RTPA

The scan speed is 160 mm/sec.

CIS HP sensor (PS21) Carriage